KX-T336 SYSTEM

System Reference Manual

Vol. 1

Matsushita Consumer Electronics Company,

Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),

Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,
Puerto Rico 00985

Matsushita Electric of Canada Limited

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W2T3

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

Central P.O.Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan

KX - A220
Printed in Japan PQQX6483WA KW0691O2045

C Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 1997

 Contents

Vol. 1
Section 1 ---- System Outline

Section 2 ---- Installation

Section 3 ---- System Features and Operation

Section 4 ---- Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 5 ---- Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)

Section 6 ---- Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)

Vol. 2
Section 7 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles

Section 8 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 9 ---- System Programming

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 10 ---- System Programming

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 11 ---- System Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 12 ---- Station Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 13 ---- Station Programming

Attendant Console (ATT)

Section 14 ---- Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 15 ---- Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 16 ---- Backup Utility-On-Site

Section 17 ---- Backup Utility-Remote Location

Section 18 ---- Abbreviations

Section 19 ---- Index

NOTIFY THE TELEPHONE COMPANY For U.S.A. Only
Installation must be performed by the telephone company or a qualified professional installer.

Notify the Telephone Company

Before connecting this equipment to any telephone, call the telephone company and inform them of the
following:

• Telephone number to which the system will be connected ..................................................

• Make....................................................................................................................Panasonic
• Model..........................................................................................KX-T336100/KX-T336200

• FCC Registration No.......................See the Name Plate on the KX-T336100/KX-T336200

In case of enabling the following function(s), please inform your telephone company
of the FCC Registration number “ACJJPN-18958-MF-E.”

1. Ground Start
2. Automatic Route Selection
3. Local Access

If these features are not being used, use “ACJJPN-18959-KF-E.”

• Ringer Equivalence.......................................................................................................0.4B
• Service Order Code ......................................................................................................9.0F
• Facility Interface Code (Loop Start).......................................................................02LS2
(Ground Start) ..................................................................02GS2
(DID)..............................................................................02RV2-T
(OPX)................................................................................0L13C
• Required Network Interface Jack (Loop Start and Ground Start).............................RJ21X
(DID and OPX).......................................................RJ11

Present FCC Regulation prohibit connecting this unit to a party line, or to a coin operated telephone.

Please read the section on “Telephone Company and FCC Requirements and Responsibilities.”

1
 TELEPHONE COMPANY and
FCC REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of
the FCC Rules and Regulations for connection of
terminal system (this device is classified as
terminal system) to the telephone network and
for your convenience, the following information is
presented:
1. Notification to the Telephone
Company
Customers connecting terminal equipment to the
telephone network shall, upon request of the
Telephone Company, inform the Telephone
Company of the particular line(s) to which such
connection is made, the FCC registration number
and (See label on bottom of unit.) ringer
equivalence number of the registered terminal
equipment.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of
devices you may connect to your telephone line
and still have all of those devices ring when your
telephone number is called. In most, but not all
areas, the sum of the REN's of all devices
connected to one line should not exceed five
(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you
may connect to your line, as determined by the
REN, your should contact your local telephone
company to determine the maximum REN for
your calling area.
2. Direct connection to A Party-
line or Coin-operated
telephone Line is Prohibited
3. Incidence of Harm to The
Telephone Lines
Should Terminal Equipment cause harm to the
Telephone Network, the Telephone Company
shall, where practical, notify the customer that
temporary discontinuance of service may be
required. However, where prior notice is not
practical, the Telephone Company may
temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such
action is reasonable in the circumstances. In
case of such unnotified temporary
discontinuance of service, the Telephone
Company shall:
2
(a) Promptly notify the customer of such
temporary discontinuance of service.
(b) Afford the customer the opportunity to correct
the situation which gave rise to the temporary
discontinuance.
(c) Inform the customer of the right to bring a
complaint to the Commission pursuant to the
procedures set out in Subpart E of Part 68 of
FCC Telephone Equipment Rules.
4. Compatibility of The
Telephone Network and
Terminal Equipment
(a) Availability of telephone
interface information.
Technical information concerning interface
parameters and specifications not specified in
FCC Rules, including the number of Ringers
which may be connected to a particular
telephone line, which is needed to permit
Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner
compatible with Telephone Company
communications facilities, shall be provided by
the Telephone Company upon customer's
request.
(b)Changes in Telephone
Company Communications
Facilities, Equipment,
Operations and Procedures.
The Telephone Company may make changes in
its communications facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures, where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its
business and is not inconsistent with the rules
and regulations in FCC Part 68 of the FCC Rules
and Regulations. If such changes can be
reasonably expected to render any customer
Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone
Company Communications Facilities, or require
modification or alteration of such Terminal
Equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use
or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
 OTHERS
WARNING:
For U.S.A. only
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOTE: This equipment has been tested and
NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR found to comply with the limits for a Class A
MOISTURE. digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances reasonable protection against harmful
and electrical noise generating devices such as interference when the equipment is operated
fluorescent lamps, motors and television. in a commercial environment.
These noise sources can interfere with the
performance of the EASA-PHONE. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, installed and used in accordance with the
high temperature and vibration, and should not instruction manual, may cause harmful
be exposed to direct sunlight. interference to radio communications.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into Operation of this equipment in a residential
the vents or other holes of this unit. area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to
• If there is trouble, disconnect the unit from the correct the interference at his own expense.
telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into
the telephone line. If the telephone operates
properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line
until the trouble has been repaired by an
authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
If the telephone does not operate properly,
chances are that the trouble is in the telephone
system, and not in the unit.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or similar solvents.
Do not use abrasive powder to clean the
cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the even of theft.

MODEL NO.: KX-T336100/KX-T336200

SERIAL NO.:

For your future reference

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER'S ADDRESS

3
 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When using your telephone equipment,
basic safety precautions should always
be followed to reduce the risk of fire,
electric shock and injury to persons,
including the following:
1 . Read and understand all instructions.
2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked
on the product.
3. Unplug this product from the wall outlet
before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners
or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for
cleaning.
4. Do not use this product near water, for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen
sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or
near a swimming pool.
5. Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious damage to the product.
6. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the
back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to
protect it from overheating, these openings
must not be blocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing
the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other
similar surface. This product should never be
placed near or over a radiator or heat
register. This product should not be placed in
a built-in installation unless proper ventilation
is provided.
7. This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the
marking label. If you are not sure of the type
of power supply to your home, consult your
dealer or local power company.
4
8. This product is equipped with a three wire
grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a
grounding type power outlet. This is a safety
feature. If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, contact your electrician to
replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat
the safety purpose of the grounding type
plug.
9. Do not allow anything to rest on the power
cord. Do not locate this product where the
cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cords as this can result in the risk of fire or
electric shock.
11. Never push objects of any kind into this
product through cabinet slots as they may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts that could result in a risk of fire or
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind
on the product.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
disassemble this product, but take it to a
qualified serviceman when some service or
repair work is required. Opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous
voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly
can cause electric shock when the appliance
is subsequently used.
13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and 14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a
refer servicing to qualified service personnel cordless type) during an electrical storm.
under the following conditions: There may be a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
A. When the power supply cord or plug is
damaged or frayed. 15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak
B. If liquid has been spilled into the product. in the vicinity of the leak.
C. If the product has been exposed to rain or
water.
D. If the product does not operate normally
by following the operating instructions. SAVE THESE
Adjust only those controls, that are
covered by the operating instructions INSTRUCTIONS
because improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will
often require extensive work by a qualified
technician to restore the product to normal
operation.
E. If the product has been dropped or the
cabinet has been damaged.
F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance.

SAFETY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

When installing telephone wiring, basic
safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric
shock and injury to persons, including
the following;

1. Never install telephone wiring during a

lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations

unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or

terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying

telephone lines.

5
 Section 1

System Outline
 (Section 1)

System Outline

Contents

Page
A Overview.......................................................................................................... 1-A-1

1.00 The Structure of This Manual ................................................................ 1-A-1

2.00 Some Conventions Used in This Manual............................................... 1-A-2
3.00 System Description................................................................................ 1-A-3
4.00 Communication Needs .......................................................................... 1-A-3
5.00 Service Cards Description..................................................................... 1-A-5

B System Components........................................................................................ 1-B-1

1.00 Components List.................................................................................... 1-B-1

2.00 System Connections.............................................................................. 1-B-2

C Features........................................................................................................... 1-C-1

D Administration.................................................................................................. 1-D-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 1-D-1

2.00 System Interface.................................................................................... 1-D-1
3.00 Programming......................................................................................... 1-D-2
4.00 Test........................................................................................................ 1-D-2
5.00 Monitor................................................................................................... 1-D-3
6.00 Backup Utility......................................................................................... 1-D-3

E System Configuration....................................................................................... 1-E-1

1.00 Basic Shelf............................................................................................. 1-E-1

2.00 Expansion Shelf..................................................................................... 1-E-2
3.00 Attendant Console................................................................................. 1-E-3
4.00 CPU Card .............................................................................................. 1-E-3
5.00 TSW Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-4
6.00 Power Unit............................................................................................. 1-E-4
7.00 LCOT Card ............................................................................................ 1-E-5
8.00 RCOT Card............................................................................................ 1-E-5
9.00 PCOT Card............................................................................................ 1-E-6
10.00 GCOT Card (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) ........................................ 1-E-6
11.00 PLC Card............................................................................................... 1-E-7
12.00 SLC Card............................................................................................... 1-E-7
12.01 SLC Card..................................................................................... 1-E-7
12.02 SLC-M Card................................................................................. 1-E-7
13.00 HLC Card............................................................................................... 1-E-8
14.00 ATLC Card............................................................................................. 1-E-8
15.00 DISA Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-9
16.00 DID Card................................................................................................ 1-E-10
17.00 OPX Card .............................................................................................. 1-E-10

1-1
 Page
18.00 DPH Card .............................................................................................. 1-E-10
19.00 AGC Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-11
20.00 RMT Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-11
21.00 T-SW Conference Expansion Card........................................................ 1-E-12
22.00 OHCA Card............................................................................................ 1-E-12
23.00 T-SW OHCA Expansion Card................................................................ 1-E-12
24.00 OPX Power Unit..................................................................................... 1-E-12
25.00 E&M Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-13
26.00 T-1 Digital Trunk Card............................................................................ 1-E-13
27.00 E-1 Digital Trunk Card ........................................................................... 1-E-14

1-2
A. Overview
1.00 The Structure of This Manual
Introduction
This system reference manual provides general
technical information on Panasonic KX-T336
system.
This includes a description of the system, its
hardware and software, features and service,
environmental requirements.
This manual is intended to serve as an overall
technical reference for the system.
Organization
This manual is comprised of the following 19
sections.
Section 1 System Outline
This section describes the overall information of
the system and the construction of this Service
Reference Manual.
Section 2 Installation
This section describes how to install and start up
the system.
Section 3 System Features and Operation
This section describes the basic system features.
Section 4 Station Features and Operation
(PITS)
This section describes the basic features and
operations from the viewpoint of Proprietary
Integrated Telephone System (PITS) users.
The basic features and required operations for
DSS console are also described.
Section 5 Station Feature and Operation (SLT)
This section describes the basic features and
operations from the viewpoint of Single Line
Telephone (SLT) users.
Section 6 Station Feature and Operation (ATT)
This section describes the basic features and
operations from the viewpoint of the Attendant
Console (ATT) Operator.
Section 7 Preparation for Programming and
Operation (VT220 and Compatibles)
This section describes the basic usage and
available functions of VT220 and Compatibles.
Section 8 Preparation for Programming and
Operation (Dumb)
This section describes the basic usage and
command reference of Dumb terminal.
1-A-1
Section 9 System Programming (VT220 and
Compatibles)
This section provides information for the
programming of the system database using VT220
and Compatibles.
Section 10 System Programming (Dumb)
This section provides information for the
programming of the system database using Dumb
terminal.
Section 11 System Programming (PITS)
This section provides information for a certain
programming of the system database using PITS
telephone.
Section 12 Station Programming (PITS)
This section provides information for the
programming of various features specific to each
PITS telephone and DSS console using PITS
telephone.
Section 13 Station Programming (ATT)
This section provides information for the
programming and the back-up of the attendant
console database using the attendant console.
Section 14 Maintenance (VT220 and
Compatibles)
This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system
using VT220 and Compatibles.
Section 15 Maintenance (Dumb)
This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system
using Dumb terminal.
Section 16 Backup Utility-On-Site
This section provides the information for saving
and loading of the system programming data
(including attendant console database) at on-site.
Section 17 Backup Utility-Remote Location
This section provides the information for saving
and loading the system programming data
(including attendant console database) from a
remote location.
Section 18 Abbreviations
This section provides a list of abbreviations used
in this manual.
Section 19 Index
2.00 Some Conventions Used in
This Manual
In this manual “system features” are described in <3> shows the reference number for
Section 3 and “station (PITS, SLT, ATT) features” programming (Dumb terminal user)
are described in Section 4 to Section 6. In these
sections, information for each feature is (Note)
presented under the following four headings: In this manual, all reference numbers are
described using Section Number, Subsection
Description, Programming, Conditions, and
Number, and Title Number.
Operation.
<Example>
Description
2.00 System Administration from
Defines the feature, describes what it does for a Remote Location
the user, and how it is used.
Description
Programming
From a remote location, you can perform system
Provides tabular listing of items required for programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements
system programming as follows: using a Dumb terminal.
For details about communication parameters, refer
<1> <2> <3> to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication Interface.”
Reference
System Programming Conditions
VT Dumb
• RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 system and assign the telephone number of
Executive Busy Override
Deny
“System-Numbering Plan”, 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
Busy Override Deny Set 7.00 Communication Interface
Busy Override Deny Cancel

Title Number
Interpret this table as follows:
<1> shows the required programming items for
the described feature.
<2> shows the reference number for
programming (VT 220 user)
For example, interpret “9-D-4.01” as follows.
9-D-4.01 Conditions
Title Number
Describes the applications and benefits of the
Subsection Number
feature, followed by factors to be considered
Section Number
when the feature is used.
<Example>
4.00 Class of Service Operation
4.01 Class of Service (1/2)
Provides instructions for a user of PITS
telephone (Section 4), Single Line Telephone
Title Number
(Section 5) and Attendant Console (Section 6)
individually.

1-A-2
3.00 System Description
The system can consist of one, two, or three
shelves (Basic and Expansion 1, 2) and
Attendant Console. Each shelf contains its own
power supply.
Basic shelf is always required and it can be
equipped with up to 96 lines (including
Extensions and CO lines).
Building Block System
Useful to enlarge system's ability by installing the
optional Expansion Shelf.
Up to two Expansion Shelves can be installed to
the system.
Each expansion shelf can be equipped with up to
120 lines (including Extensions and CO lines).
Flexible Ports
Up to 336 lines (including Extensions and CO
lines) can be connected with this system.
However Extensions (including DSS
consoles)must be 288 lines or less and CO lines
must be 144 lines or less.
Up to two Attendant Consoles (option-with CRT
display) can be connected to the system if ATLC
card is equipped with this system.
Attendant Console can be used for call
processing and system programming in
interactive format.
Switched Loop Attendant Console Operation
makes the handling of incoming calls more
efficient than conventional system.
Starting up the System Administration and
Maintenance of this system can be done using
VT220 (VT100), Compatibles, Dumb terminal or
Attendant Console.
Not only Panasonic Proprietary Integrated
Telephones (PITS) but Single Line Telephones
(SLT) can be used as Extension Telephones in
this system.
1-A-3
4.00 Communications Needs
To meet the user’s communications needs, this
system provides the following features.
Outgoing Call Features
Toll Restrictions allow the manager to restrict
extension users from making certain types of
calls.
Restriction is administered through outward
restriction, toll restriction, and ARS restriction.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides for
the routing of calls over the telecommunication
network based on preferred routes (normally the
least expensive route available at the time the
call is made) with capacity for multiple common
carriers. (for U.S.A., Canada and New Zealand)
Receiving Features
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) allows outside parties
to reach specific inside parties or facilities by
direct dialing without attendant assistance.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows the
outside parties to dial directly into this system
and access to certain system’s features and
facilities without attendant assistance.
After gaining access to the system, the outside
party can access certain system's features by
dialing the appropriate feature number.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) allows incoming
calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific
group of extensions. Calls to a UCD group hunt
for an idle extension in a circular way, starting at
the extension following the last one called.
Intercept Routing-No Answer allows calls that are
not answered within a specified time set period to
be redirected to an individual covering extension
and/or an attendant console.
Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of
incoming calls to pre-assigned extension of a
hunting group in a circular way or one way when
the called party is busy.
Holding Features
Hold allows an extension user to suspend a call.
This feature allows users to temporarily
disconnect from one conversation and either
make or answer another call. Music on-hold or
message may be provided to the held party if
available.
Call Park allows a user to place a call on hold,
then pick up the call at any station in the system.
The user can page another party to pick up the
parked call or may move to another location and
then re-access the call.
Transferring Features
Transfer allows a user to transfer any call to
another party.
This feature supports transfer of calls from the
called party to another party for completion of a
transaction.
Call Forwarding allows users who are away from
their phones to receive calls at another phone.
This feature supports roving personnel and
shared office space or company staff.
Conversation Features
Conference allows up to 3 parties (maximum two
outside parties), including the originator, to join a
call.
Paging Features
Paging allows extension users to make
announcement through built-in speaker of
Proprietary Integrated Telephone (PITS) and/or
external Pager Equipments.
Other Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
generates detailed call information on all CO
calls and sends this information to the printer.
SMDR also generates detailed data on Error Log
Records, System Programming Data and Traffic
Information.
Off Premise Extension (OPX) allows Single Line
Telephones (SLT) installed off the premises can
be operated via a public or private network in
exactly the same way as extension on the
premise.
Account Code Entry allows a user to associate
calls with an account code for charge-back
purposes.

No. Item Maximum number per system/

station
1 Tenant 2 system
2 Operator 2 tenant
3 Speed Dialing-System 200 system
4 Speed Dialing-Station/SLT 10 station
5 One Touch Dialing-Station/PITS 23 station
6 Call Park Area 20 system
7 Programmable Absent Message 10 system
8 Trunk Group 16 system
9 Equal Access Group 4 system
10 OCC Access Group 4 system
11 Toll Restriction Level 16 system
12 Paging Group 8 system
13 ICM Group 8 system
14 Pickup Group 32 system
15 UCD Group 32 system
16 Class of Service 32 system
17 Primary DN (PDN) 3 station
18 Message Waiting 500 system

1-A-4
5.00 Service Cards Description
Extension cards
Proprietary Integrated Line Circuit (PLC) Card;
This card interfaces 8 PITS telephones/DSS
consoles and the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 PITS telephones, DSS
consoles to the system per PLC card.
Single Line Telephone Line Circuit (SLC) Card;
This card interfaces 8 SLT type telephones and
the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 SLT telephones to the
system per SLC card.
SLC Card with Message Waiting (MSLC);
This card is the same as the standard SLC card
except that it has the capability to turn on and off
the message waiting lamp of a Single Line
Telephone.
Hybrid Line Circuit (HLC) Card;
This card interfaces PITS/SLT type telephones,
DSS consoles and the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 PITS/SLT telephones/
DSS consoles to the system per HLC card.
Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card;
This card interfaces 4 off premise extensions
through off premise extension power unit.
Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card;
This card interfaces 2 Attendant Consoles and
the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 2 attendant consoles to
the system if this card is installed.
CO trunk cards
Loop Start Central Office Trunk (LCOT) Card; *
This card interfaces 8 central office loop start
trunks and the TDM bus.
It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system
per LCOT card.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
through a resistance the tip and ring (both wires)
of your telephone line.
LCOT Card with Pay-Tone Detection (PCOT);
This card is a version of the LCOT card with the
capability to detect a pay-tone of CO line. This is
useful to charge management with a pay-tone
which is sent from CO line
1-A-5
LCOT Card with Polarity Reversal Detection
(RCOT);
This card is a version of the LCOT card with the
capability to detect a reversal of CO line polarity.
This is useful for determining the start and
completion of calls.
Ground Start Central Office Trunk (GCOT) Card; *
This card interfaces 8 central office trunks and the
TDM bus. It is available to connect 8 CO lines to
the system per GCOT card.
A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which
one side of the two wire trunk (typically the “Ring”
conductor of the Tip and Ring) is momentarily
grounded to get dial tone.
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
* There are two types of switched trunks one can
typically lease from a local phone company-
Loop Start and Ground Start.
You must be careful to order the correct type of
trunk from your local phone company and
correctly install your telephone system at your
end — so that they both match.
Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card;
This card interfaces 4 central office trunks
arranged for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and the
TDM bus.
E&M Card;
This card interfaces 4 E&M lines and TDM bus. It
is available to connect 4 E&M lines to the system
per E&M card.
T-1 Digital Trunk Card;
This card interfaces 1 T-1 line and TDM bus. It is
available to connect a T-1 line to the system per
T-1 digital trunk card. A T-1 line has capacity of 24
voice conversations.
E-1 Digital Trunk Card;
This card interfaces 1 E-1 line (PCM 30) and TDM
bus. It is available to connect an E-1 line to the
system per E-1 digital trunk card. An E-1 line has
capacity of 30 voice conversations.
Resource cards Other cards
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Card; Doorphone Circuit (DPH) Card;
This card interfaces 4 central office trunks This card interfaces 4 doorphones and the TDM
arranged for Direct Inward System Access bus. Up to 4 doorphones can be connected to
(DISA) and the TDM bus. the system.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Card;
This card is used to maintain volume of CO-CO
communication.
An electronic circuit which compares the level of
an incoming signal with a previously defined
standard and automatically amplifies or
attenuates that signal so it arrives at its
destination at the correct level.
Remote Circuit (RMT) Card;
This card is necessary for accessing the system
from a remote location.
Time Switch Conference Expansion Card (T-SW
Conference) Card;
This card provides 64 additional conference
trunks, and is installed on the T-SW card.
Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Card;
This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement
features, and is installed on the HLC card or PLC
card.
Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcement
Expansion (T-.SW OHCA) Card;
This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement
features, and is installed in the Basic Slot 2.

System Configuration

No. Item Maximum number per system/

station
1 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+ 42 cards (336 ports) system*
E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
2 DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT 18 cards (144 ports) system*
3 DPH 1 card (4 doorphones) system*
4 DISA 4 cards (16 resources) system*
5 AGC 4 cards (16 resources) system*
6 RMT 1 card (1 resource) system*
7 ATLC 1 card (2 ports) system*
8 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+ 12 cards (96 ports) basic shelf
E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
9 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+ 15 cards (120 ports) expansion shelf
E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
10 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX 12 cards (96 ports) shelf
11 DSS console 16 consoles (16 ports) system*
12 External Pager 2 system*
13 External Music Source 2 system*

* System = fully expanded system = basic shelf + expansion shelf 1 + expansion shelf 2

Note:
Total 18 CO cards (144 ports) allowed per system
DID + LCOT + GCOT + T-1 + E-1 + E&M + PCOT + RCOT
*T-1 is counted as 3 cards, and E-1 is counted as 4 cards.

1-A-6
B. System Components

1.00 Components List

Model No. Name

KX-T336100 Basic Shelf

KX-T336101 CPU card
KX-T336102 T-SW card
KX-T336200 Expansion Shelf
KX-T96300 Attendant Console
KX-T96145 Attendant Console Keyboard
KX-T96186 Off Premise Extension (OPX) Power Unit
KX-T96180 Loop Start Central Office Trunk (LCOT) Card
KX-T96189 Loop Start Central Office Trunk Card with Pay - Tone Detection (PCOT) Card
KX-T96183 Loop Start Central Office Trunk Card with Polarity Reversal Detection (RCOT) Card
KX-T96181 Ground Start Central Office Trunk (GCOT) Card
KX-T96172 Proprietary ITS Line Circuit (PLC) Card
KX-T96174 Single Line Telephone Line Circuit (SLC) Card
KX-T96175 Single Line Telephone Circuit (SLC) Card with Message Waiting
KX-T96170 Hybrid Line Circuit (HLC) Card
KX-T96141 Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card
KX-T96191 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Card
KX-T96182 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
KX-T96182D Both-way Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
KX-T96182CE MFC Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
KX-T96185 Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card
KX-T96161 Doorphone Circuit (DPH) Card
KX-T96193 Automatic Gain Control(AGC) Card
KX-T96196 Remote Circuit (RMT) Card
KX-T336104 Time Switch Conference (T-SW Conference) Expansion Card
KX-T96136 Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Card
KX-T336105 Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcement (T-SW OHCA) Card
KX-T96184 E&M Card
KX-T96187 T-1 Digital Trunk Card
KX-T96188 E-1 Digital Trunk Card

1-B-1
 Model No. Name

KX-T30820 Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)

KX-T30830 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (3 CO’s, 8 DSS’s)
KX-T30850 Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)
KX-T61620 Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)
KX-T61630 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 CO’s)
KX-T61650 Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)
KX-T123220 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T123230 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T123230D Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T123235 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T123250 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T7020 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T7030 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T7050 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T7052 Single Line Telephone with FLASH button
KX-T7130 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T61640 DSS Console (16 DSS's, 16 PF buttons)
KX-T123240 DSS Console (32 DSS's, 16 PF buttons)
KX-T7040 DSS Console (32 DSS's, 16 PF buttons)
KX-T30865 Doorphone
KX-T30890 Headset
KX-A26D Battery Adapter

1-B-1-1
(70695)
2.00 System Connections
Paging Speaker 1
Amplifier

Paging Speaker 2
Amplifier

Radio

Printer

Radio

To AC Outlet

Data Terminal Automobile type batteries

• Consisting of two 12VDC (24VDC)

1-B-2
(60395)
 Central Office Lines

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

KX-T336 System Attendant Console Attendant Console

KX-T96300 KX-T96300

Off Premise Extension Power Unit

KX-T96186
(two pair) (two pair)
(one pair)

KX-T61640

KX-T61630
Single Line KX-T30830
(two pair) (two pair)
Telephone
(one pair)
KX-T123240

KX-T30820 KX-T61620
(two pair)
(two pair)
Data Terminal
KX-T7040
(three pair)
(one pair)

KX-T30850
(three pair) KX-T61650

(two pair) KX-T123235,

KX-T123230D
Cordless Phone (two pair)

KX-T7130
(two pair)
KX-T123250
(one pair)
(two pair) KX-T123230
Telephone with
Answering (two pair)
Machine
KX-T7030
(two pair)

KX-T7020
(one pair) KX-T123220
Telephone • Parallel connections of extension is
Answering System available. Refer to Section 3-F-9.00
KX-T7050 “Parallel Connection of Extensions”
with Facsimile
for further information.
1-B-3
 DID

KX-T96182

CO DID LINE Telephone with Telephone

Single Line Cordless Answering Answering System
Telephone Data Terminal
Phone Machine with Facsimile
LCOT HLC

CO LINE
KX-T96180 KX-T96170

C.O.
CO LINE KX-T7130 KX-T123220 KX-T30850 KX-T61630

GCOT
CO OPX LINE
KX-T96181

KX-T7030 KX-T61650 KX-T123250 KX-T61620 KX-T123235,

KX-T123230D

OPX PLC

KX-T96185 KX-T96172

KX-T123230 KX-T7050 KX-T30820 KX-T30830 KX-T7020

OPX PWR
UNIT
SLC

KX-T96186 DISA
KX-T96174
KX-T96191

STORE HOUSE
Single Line Telephone with Telephone
RMT Cordless
Telephone Data Terminal Answering Answering System
Phone Machine with Facsimile
KX-T96196

AGC

KX-T96193
DPH
Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

KX-T96161

Attendant Console Attendant Console

POWER ATLC KX-T96300
BATT KX-T96300
24V A 26D
UNIT
KX-T96141

TSW-OHCA

KX-T336105
Printer
TSW-CONF
RS-232C Amplifier
Paging Speaker 1
KX-T336104

Amplifier
Paging Speaker 2
RS-232C

Data Terminal

Radio Radio
1-B-4
C. Features
Tabular listings of features by group (System, Stations) are provided in this subsection.
System Features are programmed at system level and affect the entire operation of the
system.

Basic Features Flexible Numbering

Directory Number (DN)
Floating Directory Number (FDN)
Tenant Service
Operator
Class of Service (COS)
Group - Intercom
- Pickup
- UCD
- Paging
- Trunk
Night Service - Directed Night Answer
- Universal Night Answer (UNA)
- Flexible Night Service
- Fixed Night Service - Switching of Day/Night Mode
Mixed Station Capacities
Variable Time-Out
Lockout
Automatic Station Release
Distinctive Dial Tone
Distinctive Busy Tone
Confirmation Tone
Tone and Ringing Patterns
Outgoing Call Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access
Features Toll Restriction in ARS System
Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access
Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
Operator/International Call Restriction
7/10 Digit Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction for Speed Dialing
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Tone/Pulse Conversion
Automatic Pause Insertion
Receiving Features Dual Console Operation
Attendant Consoles-less Operation
Direct In Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) - Day Service
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) - without OGM
- with OGM
Private CO
Single CO
Group CO
Flexible Ringing Assignment - No Ringing
- Delayed Ringing
Discriminating Ringing
Station Hunting - Circular
- Terminal

Continued
1-C-1
 Continued
Holding Features Music on Hold
Held Call Reminder
Transfer Recall
Other Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Off Premise Extension (OPX)
Walking Station
Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back
Intercept Routing - No Answer
Rerouting
Calling Party Control (CPC) Detection
CO Busy Out
Parallel Connection of Extensions
Voice Mail Integration
DTMF Tone Integration

1-C-2
Station Features are accessible by an extension user or attendant, either through dial
feature number at a Single Line Telephone, or by either feature number or dedicated
feature button access at a Proprietry Integrated Telephone (PITS) or Attendant Console
location.

Features PITS SLT ATT

Outgoing Call Line Selection-Calling

Features Prime Line Preference
Idle Line Preference
No Line Preference
Local Trunk Dial Access
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
Direct Trunk Access
Inter Office Calling
Intercom Calling
Intercom - Voice Calling
Intercom - Busy Station Signaling
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Automatic Callback Busy - Trunk
- Station
Executive Busy Override
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Operator Call
On-Hook Dialing
Speed Dialing - System
Speed Dialing - Station
One Touch Dialing
Last Number Redial (LNR)
Saved Number Redial (SNR)
Automatic Redial
Pickup Dialing
Serial Call
Receiving Features Line Selection - Answering
Direct Answering
Ringing Line Preference
Prime Line Preference
Call Waiting
Executive Busy Override Deny
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Intercom Answer - Voice Calling Deny
- BSS/OHCA Deny
No Line Preference
Dial Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Call Pickup Deny
Hands-Free Answerback
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Log Out
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
- Day Service

Continued
1-C-3
 Continued

Features PITS SLT ATT

Holding Features Hold

Exclusive Hold
Consultation Hold
Call Park- System
- Station
Call Hold Retrieve - Station
Call Splitting
Transferring Unscreened Call Transfer to Station
Features Screened Call Transfer to Station
Screened Call Transfer to Trunk
Ringing Transfer
Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote
Call Forwarding- All Calls
- Busy/Off-Hook
- No Answer
- Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer
- to Trunk
Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station
Camp-on to Station
Interposition Call/Transfer
Call Transfer via Attendant Console
Released Link Operation
Conversation Programmable Privacy
Features Privacy Release
Privacy Attach
Hands-Free Operation
Conference
Unattended Conference
Doorphone
Flash
External Feature Access
Microphone Mute
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling)
Paging Features Paging All Extensions
Group Paging
Paging External Pagers
Paging All Extensions and External Pagers
Call Park and Paging
Background Music (BGM) through External
Pager

Continued

1-C-4
 Continued

Features PITS SLT ATT

Other Features Universal Night Answer

Night Service - Manual Change
Flexible Night Service
Account Code Entry
Timed Reminder
Background Music (BGM)
Secret Dialing
Assigned Feature Clear
Electronic Station Lock Out
Remote Station Feature Control
Absent Message Capability
Message Waiting
Data Line Security
DSS Console features
- Automatic Transfer
Dial Tone Transfer
CO Access Control
Search by Name/Department
OGM Recording and Playing Back
Power Failure Operation
Trunk Verify

1-C-5
D. Administration

1.00 Introduction 2.00 System Interface

Starting up the system administration can be The programming and diagnostics features can
done using one of the following devices. be accessed either locally or remotely using the
system RS-232C interface.
• VT220 (VT100)(default setting), Compatibles The system may be configured for local direct
• Dumb Terminal access from the data terminal, or via a modem
• Attendant Console connection that allows the data terminal to be
located at a greater distance from the system
Only one terminal can perform system than is allowed for an RS-232C interface.
administration at any one time. For remote access, a data terminal and modem
Starting up the system administration from a are required at the maintenance location, and
remote location is available. For details about the RMT card (Modem) at the system.
Remote Operation, refer to Section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Location.” Two RS-232C interfaces are provided by the
system.
System Configurations These connections provide communication either
A. VT220 and Dumb terminal locally or remotely between the system and
devices for programming and diagnostics,
external system programming data storage and
Main Unit
VT220, Station Message Detailed Recording (SMDR).
compatibles, SIO #2 is used for SMDR only. SIO #1 is for
or Dumb programming and diagnostics, and external
Terminal.
system programming data storage functions.
Typical devices would include VT220,
#1 compatibles, personal computers and line
RC-232C Cable
#2 printers.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface” for further information.
B. Attendant console

Attendant
console #1 Extension Main Unit
A
T
Attendant
L
console #2 Extension C

C. Remote operation

Main Unit Remote Terminal

Modem
Central
Office

1-D-1
3.00 Programming
Before starting up the basic system data
programming, general feature description must
be read.
For further information about general feature
description, refer to Section 3 “System Features
and Operation.”
Basic system data programming can be done
using VT220, compatibles, dumb terminal and
attendant console.
(VT220 and Compatibles user)
Refer to Section 7 “Preparation for Programming
and Maintenance (VT220 and Compatibles)” and
Section 9 “System Programming (VT220 and
Compatibles).”
(Dumb terminal user)
Refer to Section 8 “Preparation for Programming
and Maintenance (Dumb)” and Section 10
“System Programming (Dumb).”
1-D-2
4.00 Test
System’s built-in maintenance capabilities and
the basic diagnostics in fault diagnosis and
corrective maintenance are described in Section
14 “Maintenance (VT220 and Compatibles)” and
Section 15 “Maintenance (Dumb).”
Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)
System’s built-in on-line diagnostic test program
monitors the troubles generated by hardware or
software during on-line communication mode.
(VT220 and Compatibles user)
Refer to Section 14-D “Self-Test (System-
Detected Troubles)” for further information.
(Dumb terminal user)
Refer to Section 15-D “Self-Test (System-
Detected Troubles)” for further information.
Functional test by entering commands
Functional test is done by entering specific test
commands when you install the new device and
so on.
(VT220 and Compatibles user)
Refer to Section 14-F “Functional Test by
Entering Commands” for further information.
(Dumb terminal user)
Refer to Section 15-E “Functional Test by
Entering Commands” for further information.
5.00 Monitor
Monitor function provides displaying current
status of “Error Log,” “Device Status” and “Traffic
Information” individually on the screen.
Error Log
When a system maintenance object begins to fail
periodic testing, the system automatically
generates an error record which is stored in the
Error Log.
Consulting the error log should be the first step in
diagnosing system related troubles.
For further information, refer to Section 14-D-
2.02 “Consulting the Error Log.”
Device Status
Provides information about current operation
status of the following items individually on the
screen.
• System
• Card
• Port
• Conference Trunk
6.00 Backup Utility
Making backups of the system programming data
and keeping it is extremely important in the
unlikely event that system programming data are
lost in a system failure.
Backup Utility consists of “save” and “load.”
Save is to transmit a file of data from your system
to backup device.
Load is to send a file of data on your system from
backup device.
Before beginning saving or loading, check
carefully that you are going to the direction you
want.
It’s very easy to erase files if you make a mistake
and confuse saving and loading.
Starting up the backup operation can be done
both at on-site and from a remote location.
Refer to Section 16 “Backup-Utility on-site” and
Section 17 “Backup Utility-Remote Location” for
further information.

Traffic
Provides current traffic information about
following items individually.

• Station
• Trunk Group
• Attendant Console
• DISA
• OGM1
• OGM2
• AGC

Refer to Section 14-G “Monitor” for further

information about monitor.

1-D-3
E. System Configuration

1.00 Basic Shelf

Basic Shelf is always required. Basic Shelf consists of the followings.
Basic Shelf contains its own power supply and 15
mounting spaces called “Slot.” CPU card and No. Name Number
T-SW card are installed at factory.
1 POWER-for Power Unit 1
Basic Slot 2 is provided for installing the optional
2 BS1 (Basic Slot 1) - for CPU card 1
T-SW OHCA card.
3 BS2 (Basic Slot 2) 1
The remaining 12 slots provide mounting space
- for optional T-SW OHCA card
for the various cards that can be used. Any
4 BS3 (Basic Slot 3) - for T-SW card 1
optional service card can be mounted in any of
5 FS1 to 12 (Free Slot 1 to 12) 12
these 12 slots.
- for optional service card
So these slots are called “Free Slot.”

Construction of Basic Shelf

P F F F F F F F F F F F F B B B
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
E
R

Free Slot can be equipped with the following

optional service cards.

a. Loop start central office trunk (LCOT) Card p. Remote circuit (RMT) Card
b. Loop start central office trunk with Pay- q. Attendant console Line circuit (ATLC) Card
Tone Detection (PCOT) Card r. E&M Card
c. Loop start central office trunk with Polarity s. T-1 Digital Trunk Card
Reversal Detection (RCOT) Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
d. Ground start central office trunk (GCOT) t. E-1 Digital Trunk Card
Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
e. Hybrid line circuit (HLC) Card
f. Proprietary ITS Line circuit (PLC) Card
g. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC)
Card
h. Single line telephone line circuit with
Message Waiting (MSLC) Card
i. Direct inward dialing trunk (DID) Card
j. Both-way direct inward dialing access
(DID-W) Card
k. MFC direct inward dialing access (DID-
MFC) Card
l. Off premise extension trunk (OPX) Card
m. Doorphone circuit (DPH) Card
n. Automatic Gain control (AGC) Card
o. Direct inward system access (DISA) Card

1-E-1
2.00 Expansion Shelf
Expansion Shelf is provided optionally. Expansion Shelf consists of the following.
Up to two Expansion Shelves (1 and 2) can be
installed on the Basic Shelf to enlarge the ability No. Name Number
of the system. 1 POWER-for Power Unit 1
Each Expansion Shelf contains its own power 2 FS1 to 15 (Free Slot) 15
supply and 15 mounting spaces for any optional - for optional service card
card required for system expansion.
Expansion Shelf is installed on top of the basic
shelf.

Construction of Expansion Shelf (1 and 2).

P F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
R

Free Slot can be equipped with the following

optional service cards.

a. Loop start central office trunk (LCOT) Card k. MFC direct inward dialing access (DID-
b. Loop start central office trunk with Pay- MFC) Card
Tone Detection (PCOT) Card l. Off premise extension trunk (OPX) Card
c. Loop start central office trunk with Polarity m. Doorphone circuit (DPH) Card
Reversal Detection (RCOT) Card n. Automatic Gain control (AGC) Card
d. Ground start central office trunk (GCOT) o. Direct inward system access (DISA) Card
Card p. Remote circuit (RMT) Card
e. Hybrid line circuit (HLC) Card q. Attendant console Line circuit (ATLC) Card
f. Proprietary ITS Line circuit (PLC) Card r. E&M Card
g. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC) s. T-1 Digital Trunk Card
Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
h. Single line telephone line circuit with t. E-1 Digital Trunk Card
Message Waiting (MSLC) Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
i. Direct inward dialing trunk (DID) Card
j. Both-way direct inward dialing access
(DID-W) Card

1-E-2
3.00 Attendant Console
Functions
Up to two Attendant Consoles (optional-with CRT
display) can be equipped with the system.
The attendant console allows one or two
attendants to answer, screen, and control
incoming calls using Switched Loop Operation.
With attendant operation, incoming calls can be
screened and forwarded to the proper party for
resolution, messages taken for absent users, or
forwarded to alternate locations.
The attendant console is not dedicated to call
processing and feature accessing, and can be
used for system data programming and
diagnostics.
Refer to Section 6 “Station Features and
Operation-Attendant Console” for further
information about attendant console call
processing features, and Section 13 “Station
Programming-Attendant Console” for further
information about attendant console local
programming mode.
Operation
Attendant console is operable for the following.
• Call Processing mode
• System programming
• Diagnostics
• Editing local data
1-E-3
4.00 CPU Card
Functions
(1)Call process and basic shelf main protocol.
(Microprocessor 80C286).
Time switch (TSW) control, detection of
system clock alarm, basic shelf power down
and expansion shelf power down alarm,
watch dog.
(2)System switch interface.
There are Operation Switch (MODE) (10
modes, 0 to 9) and System Administration
Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM) (10
modes, 0 to 9) on the CPU rotary switch.
When the system lost the programming data
because of system resetting, set system
operation mode using these switches when
starting up the system again.
(3)Terminal interface.
CPU card has two RS-232C terminal
interfaces.
Operation
(1)Operation Switch (MODE) and System
Administration Device Selection Switch
(SYSTEM) are set by turning with screw
driver.
(2)Reset switch is non-lock push switch.
(3) LED for battery alarm lights when voltage of
Lithium-battery becomes too low (less than
2.5V).
(4)LED for watch dog lights when CPU’s
software is running away.
(5)Watch dog is detecting CPU’s running away.
5.00 TSW Card 6.00 Power Unit
Functions Functions
(1)Time switch. (1)Power supply (+5, ±15, GND) for a shelf.
Capability of switching voice is 512ch x
512ch. (2)External battery interface. (+24)
Battery power (+24) is input from a battery
(2) Generation of system clocks. interface unit in basic shelf with a 2 wire
System clocks are 2,048MHz (PCM clock), cable.
8kHz (PCM frame clock).
(3)Power failure detection.
(3)Generation of call progress tone. A circuit in POW detects power failures of
Call progress tones are 350+440Hz, 620Hz, +5VDC, ±15VDC, AC power supply, and 2
480+620Hz and 440+480Hz. power alarm signals are sent to CPU card as
DC alarm and AC alarm.
(4) Conference circuit.
T-SW card has 3 party x 8 conference’s (4)Generation of bell signal. (20Hz, 100V0p)
circuits.
For CO-CO speech amp., AGC card can be
inserted to a free slot of basic or expansion
shelf.

(5)Paging interface.
T-SW card has 2 pre-amp. circuits for paging.
In order to adjust volume, each amp circuit is
equipped with a knob.

(6)Music-in interface.
T-SW card has 2 interface circuits for music
on hold or BGM.

Operation
(1)A knob for adjusting volume of external
paging is turned with a screw driver from front
of T-SW card.

(2)LED indicator or the T-SW card lights when

system reset or T-SW local reset occurs.

1-E-4
7.00 LCOT Card
Functions
LCOT (KX-T96180)-----Loop Start Central Office
Trunk card (8 CO Lines/
card)
(1)Loop start CO interface.
CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
through a resistance the tip and ring (both
wires) of your telephone line.
(2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO
interface circuit, and directly to LCOT PFT
modular. When power failure occurs, CO
Tip/Ring leads are directly connected to SLT
Tip/Ring leads, but LCOT PFT modular and
SLT PFT modular should be connected each
other with connection cord in advance.
(3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of
each port.
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic
relay in an LCOT of a system is activated.
Operation
LED indicator on the LCOT card lights when the
system reset or LCOT local reset occurs.
1-E-5
(70695)
8.00 RCOT Card
Functions
RCOT (KX-T96183) ----Loop Start Central Office
Trunk with Polarity
Reversal Detection card
(8 CO Lines/card)
(1)Loop start CO interface.
CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
through a resistance the tip and ring (both
wires) of your telephone line.
(2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO
interface circuit, and directly to RCOT PFT
modular. When power failure occurs, CO
Tip/Ring leads are directly connected to SLT
Tip/Ring leads, but RCOT PFT modular and
SLT PFT modular should be connected each
other with connection cord in advance.
(3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of
each port.
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic
relay in an RCOT of a system is activated.
Operation
LED indicator on the RCOT card lights when the
system reset or RCOT local reset occurs.
9.00 PCOT Card
Functions
PCOT (KX-T96180)-----Loop Start Central Office
Trunk with Pay Tone
Detection card (4 CO
Lines/card)
(1)Loop start CO interface.
CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
through a resistance the tip and ring (both
wires) of your telephone line.
Pay tone detection (12kHz/16kHz)
(2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO
interface circuit, and directly to PCOT PFT
modular. When power failure occurs, CO
Tip/Ring leads are directly connected to SLT
Tip/Ring leads, but PCOT PFT modular and
SLT PFT modular should be connected each
other with connection cord in advance.
(3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of
each port.
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic
relay in an PCOT of a system is activated.
Operation
LED indicator on the PCOT card lights when the
system reset or PCOT local reset occurs.
1-E-6
(70695)
10.00 GCOT Card
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Functions
GCOT (KX-T96181) ----Ground Start Central Office
Trunk card (8 CO Lines/
card)
(1)Ground start CO interface.
CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.
A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which
one side of the two wire trunk (typically the
“Ring” conductor of the Tip and Ring) is
momentarily grounded to get dial tone.
(2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO interface
circuit, and directly to GCOT PFT modular.
When power failure occurs, CO Tip/Ring leads
are directly connected to SLT Tip/Ring leads,
but GCOT PFT modular and SLT PFT modular
should be connected each other with
connection cords in advance.
(3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of each
port.
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic relay
in a GCOT of a system is activated.
Operation
LED indicator on the GCOT card lights when the
system reset or GCOT local reset occurs.
11.00 PLC Card 12.00 SLC Cards
Functions 12.01 SLC Card
PLC card (KX-T96172) Functions

(1)PITS and DSS console interface. (8 circuits/ SLC card (KX-T96174)

card)
Maximum loop resistance : 40 ohms
Power supply 1 : +30V (supplied through
speech path, and with
current limitation circuit).
Power supply 2 : +15V (supplied through
data line).
(1)Standard SLT interface.
Maximum loop resistance : 600 ohms.
(including SLT)
Power supply : +30V (with current limitation
circuit.)
2 DTMF receivers, dial pulse detector.

(2)PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-T123235, KX- (2)Power Failure Transfer (PFT) by ports 1

T7130) interface with OHCA feature.
When a PITS with OHCA feature is connected
to a port, an OHCA piggy back card (KX-
T96136) should be mounted to its interface
circuit.
through 8*.
When power failure occurs, SLT Tip / Ring are
led by a PFT relay, but SLT PFT modular and
LCOT / GCOT modular should be connected
each other by connection cords in advance.

Operation * 3 ports are available for KX-T96174X.

LED indicator on the PLC card lights when the
system reset or PLC local reset occurs.
(3) Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
Diagnostic relay is placed in Tip / Ring of each
port.
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic
relay in the SLT of a system is activated.

Operation
LED indicator on the SLC card lights when
system reset or SLC local reset occurs.

12.02 SLC-M Card

Functions
SLC-M Card (KX-T96175)

(1)
(2) Same as 12.01 SLC Card
(3)
(4) SLT with Message Waiting Lamp interface
Power supply to Message Waiting
Lamp: +80VDC (when 1mA)

Operation
Same as 10.01 SLC Card

1-E-7
(70695)(E)
13.00 HLC Card 14.00 ATLC Card
Functions Functions
HLC card (KX-T96170) is for PITS, DSS console (1)ATLC card. (KX-T96141)
and SLT. Attendant console interface. (2 circuits / card)
(8 extensions / card) (Attendant console : KX-T96300)

(1)Standard SLT interface. SLT interface is quite Operation

same as that of SLT card.
LED indicator on the ATLC card lights when the
system reset or attendant console local reset
(2)PITS and DSS console interface. PITS and
occurs.
DSS console interface is quite same as that of
PLC card.

(3)Interface for PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-

T123235, KX-T7130) with OHCA feature.
Interface for PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-
T123235, KX-T7130) with OHCA feature is
quite same as that of PLC.

(4)Power failure transfer by each port. (when

using SLT)
Power failure transfer is quite same as that of
SLC card.

(5) Diagnostic transfer by each port. Diagnostic

transfer is quite same as that of SLC card.

Operation
LED indicator on the HLC card lights when the
system reset or HLC local reset occurs.

1-E-8
(70695)
15.00 DISA Card
Functions
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) card.
(KX-T96191)
(1)4 OGM trunks.
OGM duration : 30 seconds,
OGM Battery Backup : 5 days.
The number of OGM : 1,
Recording Algorithm : ADPCM.
(2)4 CO-CO speech paths without amp.
A CO-CO speech path consists of up-path
and down-path.
Up-path is from call-originate CO to call-
answer CO, and 1 DTMF receiver and one
speech end detector is connected to it.
Down-path is from call-answer CO to call-
originate CO and one speech end detector is
connected to it.
(3)Speech end detector.
Speech end detector detects call progress
tones.
Operation
LED indicator on the DISA card lights when the
system reset or DISA local reset occurs.
1-E-9
(70695)
16.00 DID Card
Functions
(1) DID (Direct Inward Dialing) card (KX-T96182)
Wink start/immediate start DID interface.
(4 circuits/card)
45V used in circuits is originated from DC-DC
converter in DID card.
DID card will receive pulse signal only.
(2) Both-way DID card (KX-T96182D)
Wink start/immediate start DID interface. (4
circuits/card)
a) Incoming
• 45V used in circuit is originated from DC-
DC converter in DID card.
• Signaling - Pulse/DTMF
b) Outgoing
• Seize a line by bridging through a
resistance between tip and ring.
• Signaling - Pulse/DTMF
(3) DID card with MFC (KX-T96182CE)
Wink start/immediate start DID interface. (4
circuits/card)
a) Incoming
• 48V used in circuit is originated from DC-
DC converter in DID card.
• Signaling - MFC-R2
b) Outgoing
• Seize a line by bridging through a
resistance between tip and ring.
• Signaling - MFC-R2 signal
Operation
LED indicator on the DID card lights when the
system reset or DID local reset occurs.
17.00 OPX Card 18.00 DPH Card
Functions Functions
OPX (KX-T96185)-----Off Premise Extension. Doorphone card (KX-T96161)
(4 OPX Lines / card)
OPX Power Unit is (1)Doorphone interface (4 circuits / card)
necessary. 4 doorphones can be connected using a
modular connector.
OPX Power Unit should be connected with OPX Doorphone chime is sent to both extension
card, and Single Line Telephones for OPX should and doorphone at a time when a doorphone
be connected with OPX card. button is pressed.

(2) Door opener interface (4 circuits / card)

DPH card has 4 relays for door opener.
(120VAC, 1A)
The relay opens for doorlock, closes for door
release. It also opens in the case of power
failure.

Operation
Terminal plate on the DPH card has 8 terminals,
2 leads from door opener are directly connected
to two of 8 terminals.
Operation interval of door opener is 3 seconds.

1-E-10
(70695)
19.00 AGC Card 20.00 RMT Card
Functions Functions
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) card RMT (Remote Circuit) card (KX-T96196)
(KX-T96193)
Modem (300/1200 bps) for remote administration.
(1)4 CO-CO speech paths with AGC Amp. and Modem protocol (1) free wheeling (TTY).
Echo-Suppressor.
A CO-CO speech path consists of up-path Operation
and down-path, up-path is from call-originate
LED indicator on the RMT card lights when the
CO to call-answer CO, and AGC amp is
system reset or RMT local reset occurs.
inserted and speech end detector is
connected.
Maximum amplitude rate of AGC is 14 dB.
Echo-Suppressor is inserted in a CO-CO
speech path.

(2) 4 DTMF transceivers.

DTMF transceiver is used as DTMF repeater.
So, AGC card microprocessor controls DTMF
repeater.

(3) 8 Speech End Detectors.

Speech end detector of AGC is quite same as
that of DISA card.

Operation
LED indicator on the AGC card lights when the
system reset or AGC local reset occurs.

1-E-11
(70695)(E)
21.00 T-SW Conference Expan- 23.00 T-SW OHCA Expansion
sion Card Card
Functions Functions
T-SW Conference Expansion card (KX-T336104)
T-SW OHCA Expansion card (KX-T336105)
Mounted on T-SW card.
3 party x 64 conference circuits. This card is mounted on Basic Slot 2 for OHCA
feature.
OHCA card (KX-T96136) for extension port must
be installed on the HLC card or PLC card in
advance.

22.00 OHCA Card

24.00 OPX Power Unit
Functions
Functions
OHCA (Off Hook Call Announcement) card
(KX-T96136) OPX (Off Premise Extension) Power Unit
(KX-T96186).
This card is mounted on HLC card (KX-T96170)
or PLC card (KX-T96172) Input: 115/200/220/240V (voltage selector)
Output is Ringing Signal (100VAC, 20Hz) and
This card includes 2 OHCA circuits. 48V DC for OPX Card.
Allows an extension user to intrude through the
speaker into another extension that is in
conversation using the handset.
This feature is available only against the following
PITS telephones: KX-T123230D, KX-T123235,
KX-T7130.

1-E-12
(70695)(E)
25.00 E&M Card 26.00 T-1 Digital Trunk Card
Functions Functions
(1) E&M (Tie) Line Types........ Type 5 only. T-1 interface.(1 circuit / card)
(2) Transmission.....................2-wire/4-wire T-1 is a digital transmission link with a capacity of
voice path 1.544 Mbps.
(Programmable) A T-1 card carries 24 voice conversations.
(Note) Maximum cabling distance of E&M line Frame Format : D4 / ESF
cord (twisted cable): 22 AWG: Under Line Coding : AMI / B8ZS
9.6 km Channel Type : LCO / GCO / DID / OPX / TIE
(3) Transmission levels Signaling : DP / DTMF
2-wire voice path............... -3 dB (DTMF:24 receivers and 6 generators)
(transmit/receive)
4-wire voice path............... -3 dB normal Operation
(transmit/receive)
RED LED indicator on T-1 card lights when the
Programmable (-6 dB,-3 dB,0 dB,+3 dB)
system reset or T-1 card local reset, T-1 line fault
(4) Signaling DTMF/Pulse
occurs.
(5) E lead Battery -48 VDC, 20 mA to
ground (max.)
Sensitivity 5 mA or 2000 Ω to
(min)
ground (max.)
(6) M lead Permitted current : 30mA (max.)
Permitted voltage: _ +100V (max.)

1-E-13
(70695)
27.00 E-1 Digital Trunk Card
Functions
E-1 interface.(1 circuit / card)
E-1 is a digital transmission link with a capacity of
2.048Mbps.
An E-1 card carries 30 voice conversations.
Frame Format : PCM30 / PCM30-CRC
Line Coding : HDB3 / AMI
Channel Type : DR2 / E&M-C /E&M-P
Signaling : DP / DTMF / MFC-R2
(DTMF:8 receivers and 2 generators)
(MFC-R2:16 receivers and 16 generators)

Operation
RED LED indicator on E-1 card lights when the
system reset or E-1 card local reset, E-1 line fault
occurs.

1-E-14
(70695)
 Section 2

Installation
 (Section 2)

Installation
Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 2-A-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 2-A-1

2.00 Before Installation.................................................................................. 2-A-2

B Installation of Shelf........................................................................................... 2-B-1

1.00 Basic Shelf............................................................................................. 2-B-1

1.01 Basic Shelf Assembly.................................................................. 2-B-2
1.02 Removing the Panels .................................................................. 2-B-3
1.03 Cable Connections...................................................................... 2-B-5
2.00 Expansion to 2-Shelf System................................................................. 2-B-6
2.01 Expansion Shelf Assembly.......................................................... 2-B-7
2.02 Removing the Panels .................................................................. 2-B-8
2.03 Stacking on the Basic Shelf......................................................... 2-B-10
2.04 Installation of Top Cover.............................................................. 2-B-11
2.05 Cable Connections...................................................................... 2-B-12
3.00 Expansion to 3-Shelf System................................................................. 2-B-13
3.01 Stacking on the 2-Shelf System .................................................. 2-B-14
3.02 Installation of Top Cover.............................................................. 2-B-15
3.03 Cable Connections...................................................................... 2-B-16
4.00 Ground Wiring........................................................................................ 2-B-18
5.00 Fixing on the Floor................................................................................. 2-B-19
5.01 Setting Out and Drilling................................................................ 2-B-19
5.02 Fixing on the Floor....................................................................... 2-B-22

C Installation of Cards......................................................................................... 2-C-1

1.00 Before Installation.................................................................................. 2-C-1

1.01 Slot Construction......................................................................... 2-C-1
1.02 Guide Plate.................................................................................. 2-C-2
2.00 Connection of Standard System ........................................................... 2-C-3
2.01 CPU Card.................................................................................... 2-C-3
2.02 T-SW Card................................................................................... 2-C-3
2.03 Power Unit................................................................................... 2-C-3
3.00 Connection of Optional Cards ............................................................... 2-C-4
3.01 T-SW Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104)...................... 2-C-4
3.02 T-SW OHCA Card (KX-T336105)................................................ 2-C-5
3.03 OHCA Card (KX-T96136)............................................................ 2-C-6
3.04 ATLC Card (KX-T96141)............................................................. 2-C-9
3.05 DPH Card (KX-T96161)............................................................... 2-C-10
3.06 HLC Card (KX-T96170)............................................................... 2-C-14
3.07 PLC Card (KX-T96172)............................................................... 2-C-16
3.08 SLC Card (KX-T96174)............................................................... 2-C-18
3.09 LCOT Card (KX-T96180)............................................................. 2-C-21

2-1
 Page
3.10 GCOT Card (KX-T96181) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)......... 2-C-22
3.11 DID Card ..................................................................................... 2-C-25
1. DID Card (KX-T96182) (for U.S.A. and Canada).................... 2-C-25
2. DID Card (KX-T96182)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)............................... 2-C-25-1
3. Both-way DID Card (KX-T96182D)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)............................... 2-C-25-2
4. MFC DID Card (KX-T96182CE)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)............................... 2-C-25-3
3.12 OPX Card (KX-T96185)............................................................... 2-C-26
3.13 DISA Card (KX-T96191).............................................................. 2-C-28
3.14 AGC Card (KX-T96193) .............................................................. 2-C-28
3.15 RMT Card (KX-T96196).............................................................. 2-C-28
3.16 E&M Card (KX-T96184).............................................................. 2-C-28-1
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
3.17 T-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96187)............................................ 2-C-28-9
3.18 E-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96188) ........................................... 2-C-28-14
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
4.00 Parallel Connection of the Extensions .................................................. 2-C-29
5.00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer ................................... 2-C-30
6.00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D)...................................... 2-C-32

D Connection of Optional Peripheral Equipments............................................... 2-D-1

1.00 Paging Equipment ................................................................................. 2-D-1

2.00 External Music Source........................................................................... 2-D-2
3.00 RS-232C Interface................................................................................. 2-D-3
3.01 Connection to the Printer............................................................. 2-D-5
3.02 Connection to the Data Terminal................................................. 2-D-6

E Installation of Attendant Console..................................................................... 2-E-1

1.00 Configuration ......................................................................................... 2-E-1

2.00 Attendant Console Assembly................................................................. 2-E-3
3.00 Handset Connection.............................................................................. 2-E-4
4.00 Installation and Removal of CRT Unit.................................................... 2-E-5
4.01 CRT Unit Installation.................................................................... 2-E-5
4.02 CRT Unit Removal....................................................................... 2-E-7
5.00 Keyboard Connection............................................................................ 2-E-8
6.00 Connection with KX-T336 System ........................................................ 2-E-9
7.00 AC Power Cord Connection................................................................... 2-E-10
8.00 Various Adjustments.............................................................................. 2-E-11

F Starting Up the KX-T336 System..................................................................... 2-F-1

2-2
(70695)
 Page
1.00 System Power-Up Procedure................................................................ 2-F-1
2.00 CPU Rotary-Switch Features................................................................. 2-F-2
2.01 Operation Switch (MODE)........................................................... 2-F-2
2.02 System Administration Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM)....... 2-F-5
2.03 Operation Sequence for System Starting Up.............................. 2-F-6

2-3
(70695)
A. Preparation

1.00 Introduction
This section describes the procedures required to install the KX-T336 System.
Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing the shelves and optional
cards, and cabling of peripheral equipments are provided.
Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is
included.

2-A-1
2.00 Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installations and connections before installing the
KX-T336 system.
1) Installation Cautions
• Avoid installing the KX-T336 system in the
following places. (Doing so may result in
malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid
places. [Temperature range: 32°F-104°F
(0°C-40°C)]
2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where
there are thermal springs, etc. may
damage the equipment or contacts.
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are
frequent or strong.
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil
may come into contact with the unit.
5. Near high-frequency generating devices
such as sewing machines or electric
welders.
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other
office equipments, as well as microwave
ovens or air conditioners.
(It is preferable not to be installed in the
same room with the above equipment.)
7. Install at least 6 feet (1.8 m) away from
televisions. (both the KX-T336 system and
EMSS proprietary telephones)
8. Do not obstruct area around the KX-T336
system. (for reasons of maintenance and
inspection—be especially careful to allow
space for cooling above and at the sides of
the KX-T336 system)
2-A-2
2) Wiring Cautions
• Make sure to keep the following
instructions when wiring.
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel
with an AC power source, computer, telex,
etc. If the cables are run near those wires,
shield the cables with metal tubing or use
shielded cables and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use
protectors or the like to protect the wires
where they may be stepped on. Avoid
wiring under carpets.
3. Avoid sharing the same power supply
outlet for computers, telexes, and other
office equipments. Otherwise, the
operation of KX-T336 system may be
interrupted by the induction noise from
such equipments.
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for
extension connection of (telephone)
equipments such as single line telephone,
data terminal, answering machine,
computer etc., except proprietary
telephone (KX-T7130, KX-T7030, KX-
T123230D etc.,).
B. Installation of Shelf
This subsection describes the installation of the shelf, with information on expanding the
capacity of an existing system.

Building Block System provides the enlargement of system's ability by installing the
optional Expansion Shelf.
Up to two Expansion Shelves can be installed to the system.
Each expansion shelf can be equipped with up to 120 lines (including Extensions and
CO lines).

The system can consist of one, two or three shelves (Basic, Expansion 1 and
Expansion 2).
Each shelf contains its own power supply.

1.00 Basic Shelf

Basic Shelf is always required and it can be equipped with up to 96 lines (including
Extension and CO lines).
The basic shelf includes top cover and base shelf.

The following figure shows a basic system composed of a basic shelf only.

2-B-1
1.01 Basic Shelf Assembly

Top Cover
15

1 16

2 17
18
3 19
4
Basic Shelf
5
6
7

9 20
10
11
12 21 Base Shelf
13

14

1. Side Panel (Left) 13. Ground Wire Connector (GND)

2. Power Unit 14. Base Front Panel
3. Power Indicator 15. LED Cable
4. Power Switch 16. LED Cable Connector
(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Basic Shelf) (Connects the LED Cable)
5. Backup Battery Connector 17. Side Panel (Right)
(Connects the Battery Adaptor Cable) 18. Flat Cable Connector
6. Fuse (Connects the Flat Cable from Expansion
7. Power Supply Cable Shelf)
8. Front Panel 19. Cable Opening
9. Transform Cord 20. Base Board
10. Base Side Panel (Left) 21. Battery Adaptor Compartment
11. Power Supply Cable Connector
12. Main Power Switch
(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Whole Unit)

2-B-2
1.02 Removing the Panels

Front Panel

1. Rotate the key on the front panel

counterclockwise to unlock.
2. Open the front panel toward you at right
angles to the basic shelf.
3. Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

Base Front Panel

1. Open the base front panel toward you while

holding down the button on the panel.
2. Pull out the base front panel to the right.

2-B-3
Side Panel

Screws Screws

Screws
Screws

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the eight screws.

2. Remove the upper left side panel by loosening the four screws.

Base Side Panel

Screws

Screws

1. Remove the lower left side panel by loosening the four screws.

Note :
If the system is to be expanded to 2-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-2.00
“Expansion to 2-Shelf System.”

2-B-4
1.03 Cable Connections

LED Cable

• Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the
LED cable connector (on the basic shelf).

LED cable

Power Supply Cable

• Plug the power supply cable (on the basic

shelf) into the power supply cable connector
labeled “AC OUT 1” (on the base shelf).

power supply cable

2-B-5
2.00 Expansion to 2-Shelf System
The KX-T336 System can be expanded to 2-Shelf System by installing the Expansion
Shelf 1 on the Basic Shelf.
The 2-Shelf system can be equipped with up to 216 lines (including extensions and CO
lines).

The following figure shows a 2-Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and an expansion
shelf.

2-B-6
2.01 Expansion Shelf Assembly

1 9

10
2
11
3
4
12
5
6
7

1. Side Panel (Left) 8. Front Panel

2. Power Unit 9. LED Cable Connector
3. Power Indicator (Connects the LED Cable)
4. Power Switch 10. Side Panel (Right)
(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Expansion 11. Flat Cable
Shelf) 12. Cable Opening
5. Backup Battery Connector
(Connects the Battery Adaptor Cable)
6. Fuse
7. Power Supply Cable

Note :
The construction of Expansion Shelf 1 and Expansion Shelf 2 is identical to each other.

2-B-7
2.02 Removing the Panels
<Basic Shelf>
Removing the Top Cover
1)

Screws

Screws

LED cable connector

LED cable

2)

Top cover

1. Disconnect the LED cable (on the top cover) from the LED cable connector (on the
basic shelf).
2. Remove the top cover by loosening the four screws.

2-B-8
<Expansion Shelf>
Front Panel

1. Rotate the key on the front panel

counterclockwise to unlock.
2. Open the front panel toward you at right
angles to the expansion shelf.
3. Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

Side Panel

Screws Screws

Guides Screws

Screws

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the four screws.

2. Remove the left side panel by loosening the four screws.

2-B-9
2.03 Stacking on the Basic Shelf

1)
• To connect the expansion shelf with basic shelf,
place the holes of the expansion shelf exactly
on the holes of the basic shelf.

Expansion
shelf

Basic shelf

2)

Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them

with the three screws immediately to prevent
the expansion shelf from falling down.

Note :
If the system is to be expanded to 3-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-3.00
“Expansion to 3-Shelf System.”

2-B-10
2.04 Installation of Top Cover

1) • To connect the top cover, place the holes of the

top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion
Top cover
shelf.

Expansion
shelf Note:
Before installing the top cover, remove a screw
as shown in the illustration above. Otherwise the
top cover cannot be installed properly.
This screw is necessary for installing an
expansion shelf.

2)

Screws
Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the four screws immediately to
prevent the top cover from falling down.

2-B-11
2.05 Cable Connections
LED Cable/Flat Cable

Top cover

LED cable
Expansion shelf
connector

Flat cable

Basic shelf

Flat cable
connector

Base shelf

1. Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the LED cable connector (on the expansion
shelf).
2. Plug the flat cable (on the expansion shelf) into the flat cable connector (on the basic
shelf).

Power Supply Cable

Top cover

Expansion shelf

Power
supply cable

Basic shelf

Base shelf

• Plug the power supply cable into the power supply cable connector (“AC OUT 2”).

2-B-12
3.00 Expansion to 3-Shelf System
The KX-T336 System can be expanded to 3-Shelf System by installing the Expansion
Shelf 2 on the 2-Shelf System.
Up to 336 lines (including extensions and CO lines) can be equipped with 3-Shelf
System.

Note :
Before stacking the Expansion Shelf 2 on the 2-Shelf System, remove the front panel
and side panels from Expansion Shelf 2 following the procedures described in Section
2-B-2.00 “Expansion to 2-Shelf System.”

The figure below shows a 3-Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and two expansion
shelves.

2-B-13
3.01 Stacking on the 2-Shelf System
1)
• To connect the expansion shelf 2 with 2-Shelf
System, place the holes of the expansion shelf
Expansion 2 exactly on the holes of the expansion shelf 1.
shelf 2

Expansion
shelf 1

2)

Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the three screws immediately to
prevent the expansion shelf 2 from falling down.

2-B-14
3.02 Installation of Top Cover
1)
Top cover • To connect the top cover, place the holes of the
top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion
shelf 2.

2)
Screws
Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the four screws immediately to
prevent the top cover from falling down.

2-B-15
3.03 Cable Connections
LED Cable/Flat Cable

LED
cable

Flat
cable

Flat cable
connector

1. Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the LED cable connector (on the expansion
shelf 2).
2. Plug the flat cable (on the expansion shelf 2) into the flat cable connector (on the basic
shelf).

2-B-16
Power Supply Cable

Top cover

Expansion shelf 2

Expansion shelf 1

Power
supply cable

Basic shelf

Base shelf

• Plug the power supply cable (on the Expansion Shelf 2) into the power supply cable
connector (“AC OUT 3”).

2-B-17
4.00 Ground Wiring

IMPORTANT!!!
Make sure to connect the frame of the KX-T336 system
to the earth ground properly to protect the unit.

• Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector (GND).

2-B-18
5.00 Fixing on the Floor
5.01 Setting Out and Drilling
1) Basic System (Basic Shelf)

14 31/32"

1 3/8"

12 14/32"
(A) 10 10/32"
2 2/32"

11 12/32" 13 5/32"

1 10/32"
2 4/32" 2 4/32"

• Location of the anchor plug (A):

Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in
accordance with the measurements.
• Drive the anchor plug into the hole.
Hammer
Note:
When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,
anchor plugs should always be used to prevent
the system from falling down.
Anchor plug

Hole
1 4/32 inch

8/32 inch

2-B-19
2) 2-Shelf System (Basic Shelf + Expansion Shelf 1)

26 25/32"

1 3/8"

12 14/32"
(A) 10 10/32"
2 2/32"

11 12/32" 13 5/32"

1 10/32"
2 4/32" 2 4/32"

• Location of the anchor plug (A):

Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in
accordance with the measurements.
• Drive the anchor plug into the hole.
Hammer
Note:
When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,
anchor plugs should always be used to prevent
the system from falling down.
Anchor plug

Hole
1 4/32 inch

8/32 inch

2-B-20
3) 3-Shelf System (Basic Shelf + Expansion Shelf 1 + Expansion Shelf 2)

40"

1 3/8"
12 14/32"
(A) 10 10/32"
2 2/32"

11 12/32" 13 5/32"

1 10/32"
2 4/32" 2 4/32"

• Location of the anchor plug (A):

Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in
accordance with the measurements.
• Drive the anchor plug into the hole.
Hammer
Note:
When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,
anchor plugs should always be used to prevent
the system from falling down.
Anchor plug

Hole
1 4/32 inch

8/32 inch

2-B-21
5.02 Fixing on the Floor

1)
• Attach the two floor-fixing hardwares to the
basic shelf as shown in the figure.
Fasten each hardware with four screws.

2)
• Position the shelf on the floor.
Check alignment and level of the shelf.

3)
• Fix the shelf securely to the floor using
screws and flat washers.

Screw

Latch Washer

Hole

Anchor
plug

2-B-22
C. Installation of Cards

1.00 Before Installation

1.01 Slot Construction

Expansion shelf 2
P F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
R

Expansion shelf 1
P F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
R

Basic shelf
P F F F F F F F F F F F F B B B
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
E
R

Basic shelf Expansion shelf 1/Expansion shelf 2

No. Name Number Name Number

1 POWER - for Power Unit 1 POWER - for Power Unit 1

2 BS1 (Basic Slot 1) - for CPU card 1 FS1 to FS15 (Free Slot) 15
3 BS2 (Basic Slot 2) 1 - for optional service card
- for optional T-SW OHCA card
4 BS3 (Basic Slot 3) - for T-SW card 1
5 FS1 to 12 (Free Slot 1 to 12) 12
- for optional service card

2-C-1
1.02 Guide Plate

Screw

Guide Plate
Fig.1

(Front Side)

(Rear Side)

Card Latch
Fig.2
Fig.3

1. Before installing the service cards, remove the Guide Plate (See Fig.1) from the
upper front side of the basic shelf (and expansion shelf 1 and 2, if provided) by
loosening the five screws.

2. Install a service card (with facing the components side to the right) along with the
upper and lower guide rails. Press the upper and lower latch firmly until the upper
latch is located inside of the shelf. (See Fig.2 and Fig.3)
Please do not touch the components side of the service card.

3. After installing the service cards, attach the Guide Plate to the upper front side of
the basic shelf (and expansion shelf 1 and 2, if provided) with five screws.
If service cards are not installed properly, the Guide Plate will not be fixed.

2-C-2
2.00 Connection of Standard System

2.01 CPU Card

• This card is already inserted at the factory in
the “CPU” in the Basic shelf.

SYTEM

CPU

“CPU” is marked.

2.02 T-SW Card

(for U.S.A. and Canada)
• This card is already inserted at the factory in
the “TSW” in the Basic shelf.

TSW

“TSW” is marked.

(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Music source • This card is already inserted at the factory in
Selector Switch the “TSW” in the Basic shelf.

Music Source Selector Switch

INT MUS : Set when using the internal music
INT MUS
source
MUS 2 MUS 2 : Set when using the external
music source.
TSW

“TSW” is marked.

2-C-3
(60395)
2.03 Power Unit
• Power unit is already inserted at the factory in
the “POWER” in the Basic shelf and the
Expansion shelf 1, 2.

2-C-3-1
(60395)
3.00 Connection of Optional Cards

3.01 T-SW Conference Expansion

Card (KX-T336104)

• This card is installed on the T-SW card.

Connector
(30-pin)

“TSW CONF” is marked.

1) Connection to the T-SW card

T-SW Conference Card

30-pin connector
(Plug)

Make sure the card is in

the correct direction

KX-T336104 TSW-CONF

30-pin connector
(Jack)

T-SW Card

1. Insert the 30-pin connector (plug) on the T-SW CONF card into the 30-pin connector
(jack) on the T-SW card.
2. Install the T-SW card into the Basic Slot 1 (BS1). See page 2-C-3.

2-C-4
3.02 T-SW OHCA Card (KX-T336105)

• Insert this card into the Basic Slot 2 (BS2).

OHCA

“OHCA” is marked.

2-C-5
3.03 OHCA Card (KX-T96136)

• This card is installed on the HLC card or PLC

connector card.
(5-pin)

connector
(9-pin)
connector
(4-pin)
OHCA

“OHCA” is marked.

1) Connection to the HLC card (KX-T96170)

9-pin connector
(plug)
5-pin connector
(plug)
4-pin connector
(plug)

OHCA card
9-pin connector
(jack)
5-pin connector
(jack)
4-pin connector
(jack)

HLC card

1. Make sure that the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards.
2. Insert the connector (plug) on the OHCA card into the connector (jack) on the HLC
card.
3. Install the HLC card into a free slot. See page 2-C-14.
Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card. Refer to
page 2-C-8.
The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only:
KX-T123235, KX-T123230D or KX-T7130.

2-C-6
(E)
2) Connection to the PLC card (KX-T96172)

5-pin connector
(plug)
9-pin connector
(plug)
4-pin connector
(plug)

OHCA card

5-pin connector
(jack)
9-pin connector
(jack)
4-pin connector
(jack)

PLC card

1. Make sure that the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards.
2. Insert the connector (plug) on the OHCA card into the connector (jack) on the PLC
card.
3. Install the PLC card to a free slot. See page 2-C-16.

Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card. Refer to
page 2-C-8.
The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only:
KX-T123235, KX-T123230D or KX-T7130.

2-C-7
3) Wiring Table

CONN. CABLE COLOR CLIP Extension OHCA • Connection of the Proprietary Telephones:
PIN NO. Extension KX-T123235, KX-T123230D, or KX-T7130.
26 WHT-BLU 1 T T: Tip D1: Data 1 P1: 3 Pair Voice
1 BLU-WHT 2 R R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice
27 WHT-ORN 3 NO.1 D1
2 ORN-WHT 4 D2 • OHCA NO.
28 WHT-GRN 5 P1
3 GRN-WHT 6 P2 NO1
29 WHT-BRN 7 T (HLC card)
4 BRN-WHT 8 R
30 WHT-SLT 9 NO.2 D1
5 SLT-WHT 10 D2 OHCA
31 RED-BLU 11 P1 NO 4
6 BLU-RED 12 P2
32 RED-ORN 13 T
OHCA
7 ORN-RED 14 R
33 RED-GRN 15 NO.3 D1 NO 3
8 GRN-RED 16 D2
34 RED-BRN 17 P1
OHCA
9 BRN-RED 18 P2 NO2
NO 2
35 RED-SLT 19 T
10 SLT-RED 20 R
36 BLK-BLU 21 NO.4 D1 OHCA
11 BLU-BLK 22 D2 NO 1
37 BLK-ORN 23 P1
12 ORN-BLK 24 P2
38 BLK-GRN 25 T
13 GRN-BLK 26 R
39 BLK-BRN 27 NO.5 D1
14 BRN-BLK 28 D2
40 BLK-SLT 29 P1 (PLC card)
15 SLT-BLK 30 P2 NO3
41 YEL-BLU 31 T
16 BLU-YEL 32 R
42 YEL-ORN 33 NO.6 D1 OHCA OHCA
17 ORN-YEL 34 D2 NO 3 NO 4
43 YEL-GRN 35 P1
18 GRN-YEL 36 P2
44 YEL-BRN 37 T
19 BRN-YEL 38 R
45 YEL-SLT 39 NO.7 D1
20 SLT-YEL 40 D2
46 VIO-BLU 41 P1
21 BLU-VIO 42 P2 NO4
47 VIO-ORN 43 T
22 ORN-VIO 44 R OHCA OHCA
48 VIO-GRN 45 D1 NO 1 NO 2
23 GRN-VIO 46 NO.8 D2
49 VIO-BRN 47 P1
24 BRN-VIO 48 P2
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VIO 50

2-C-8
(10991)
3.04 ATLC Card (KX-T96141)

• Insert this card into a free slot.

“ATLC” is marked.

KX-T96141

1) Maximum cabling distance of the Attendant Console line cord (2-conductor wiring)

26 AWG: Under 680 feet

24 AWG: Under 1130 feet
22 AWG: Under 1770 feet

2) Connection to the Attendant Console (KX-T96300)

Attendant Console (KX-T96300)

ATLC Card (KX-T96141)

Use 2-conductor wiring cord

• Insert the modular plug of the Attendant Console line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the ATLC card.

2-C-9
3.05 DPH Card (KX-T96161)

KX-T96161 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DPH” is marked.

1) Maximum cabling distance of the Doorphone and the Door Opener line.

26 AWG: Under 230 feet

24 AWG: Under 370 feet
22 AWG: Under 590 feet

Doorphone

Door Opener
26 AWG: Under 230 feet
24 AWG: Under 370 feet
22 AWG: Under 590 feet

2-C-10
2) Installation of the Doorphone (KX-T30865)

1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone

into two halves.

2. Install the base cover to the wall with two

screws.

• Two kinds of screws are included.

Please choose appropriate one according to
your wall type. See the following.

..........When the doorphone plate has been

fixed to the wall.
..........When you wish to install the
doorphone directly to the wall.

3. Connect the wires from the terminal box to the

screws located in the front cover.

To the terminal box

(See page 2-C-12)
4. Secure both halves together and re-install the
screw.

2-C-11
3) Wiring of the Doorphone

4-conductor wiring
is required.

Terminal Box 1

Doorphone 1 (KX-T30865) Doorphone 2 (KX-T30865)

YELLOW BLACK
RED GREEN

DPH Card
(KX-T96161)
4-conductor wiring
is required.

Terminal Box 2

Doorphone 3 (KX-T30865) Doorphone 4 (KX-T30865)

YELLOW BLACK
RED GREEN

1. Connect the DPH Card to the terminal box using a 4-conductor modular connector.
2. Connect the wires of doorphone 1 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 1.
3. Connect the wires of doorphone 2 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 1.
4. Connect the wires of doorphone 3 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 2.
5. Connect the wires of doorphone 4 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 2.

2-C-12
4) Connection to Door Openers

Door opener 1
Door opener 2
Door opener 3
Door opener 4

DPH Card (KX-T96161)

doorphone 1
Paired
door opener 1

doorphone 2
Paired
door opener 2

doorphone 3
Paired
door opener 3

doorphone 4
Paired
door opener 4

• Set the door opener paired with the doorphone.

Only the telephone which received the doorphone call and in conversation can open
the door using door opener. System program determines the telephones that can
receive the doorphone calls and use the door opener.

2-C-13
3.06 HLC Card (KX-T96170)

KX-T96170 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“HLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the HLC card.
Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins.

See page 2-C-20.

2-C-14
3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

DSS Console

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

Proprietary Telephone

Single Line Telephone

26 AWG: Under 2290 feet

24 AWG: Under 3700 feet
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

4) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-15
3.07 PLC Card (KX-T96172)

KX-T96172 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“PLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the PLC card.
Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins.

See page 2-C-20.

2-C-16
3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

24 AWG: Under 750 feet
DSS Console
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

Proprietary Telephone

26 AWG: Under 460 feet

24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

2-C-17
3.08 SLC Card (KX-T96174)

KX-T96174 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“SLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the SLC card.
Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins

See page 2-C-20.

2-C-18
3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 2290 feet

24 AWG: Under 3700 feet Single Line Telephone
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

4) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-19
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Extension Line)

CONN. CABLE COLOR CLIP Extension • Connection of the following Proprietary

PIN NO.
Telephones
26 WHT-BLU 1 T KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 and KX-T7130
1 BLU-WHT 2 R
27 WHT-ORN 3 NO.1 D1 T: Tip D1: Data 1 P1: 3 Pair Voice
2 ORN-WHT 4 D2 R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice
28 WHT-GRN 5 P1
3 GRN-WHT 6 P2
• Connection of other Proprietary Telephones
29 WHT-BRN 7 T
4 BRN-WHT 8 R Connect the only pin number of “T”, “R”, “D1”
30 WHT-SLT 9 NO.2 D1 and “D2”.
5 SLT-WHT 10 D2
31 RED-BLU 11 P1
6 BLU-RED 12 P2 • Connection of a Single Line Telephone
32 RED-ORN 13 T Connect the only pin number of “T” and “R”.
7 ORN-RED 14 R
33 RED-GRN 15 NO.3 D1
16
• Connection of a DSS Console
8 GRN-RED D2
34 RED-BRN 17 P1 Connect the only pin number of “D1” and “D2”.
9 BRN-RED 18 P2
35 RED-SLT 19 T
10 SLT-RED 20 R
36 BLK-BLU 21 NO.4 D1
11 BLU-BLK 22 D2
37 BLK-ORN 23 P1
12 ORN-BLK 24 P2
38 BLK-GRN 25 T
13 GRN-BLK 26 R
39 BLK-BRN 27 NO.5 D1
14 BRN-BLK 28 D2
40 BLK-SLT 29 P1
15 SLT-BLK 30 P2
41 YEL-BLU 31 T
16 BLU-YEL 32 R
42 YEL-ORN 33 NO.6 D1
17 ORN-YEL 34 D2
43 YEL-GRN 35 P1
18 GRN-YEL 36 P2
44 YEL-BRN 37 T
19 BRN-YEL 38 R
45 YEL-SLT 39 NO.7 D1
20 SLT-YEL 40 D2
46 VIO-BLU 41 P1
21 BLU-VIO 42 P2
47 VIO-ORN 43 T
22 ORN-VIO 44 R
48 VIO-GRN 45 D1
23 GRN-VIO 46 NO.8 D2
49 VIO-BRN 47 P1
24 BRN-VIO 48 P2
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VIO 50

• Station wiring (3-pair twisted cabling)

2-C-20
■ Extension Connection of KX-A204 (Cable)/KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

This KX-A204 (cable) enables you to connect 8
extensions to the KX-T336 System.
When you want to connect 8 extensions to the
connector (KX-A205), two of KX-A205 are
required.
The KX-A204/205 consists of the following:
KX-A204 : Cable......................... 1
KX-A205 : Clip Terminal ............. 1

Please connect KX-A204 (Cable) to KX-A205

(Clip Terminal) as follows. Refer to the
connection chart on page 2-C-22.

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

HLC Card (KX-T96170)

or
PLC Card (KX-T96172)
or
SLC Card (KX-T96174)

KX-A204
(Cable)

2-C-20-1 (X)
(60395)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Extension Line)

Connection Chart

Conn. Cable Color Clip Number Extension • Connection of the following Proprietary
Pin No. of Dot Telephones (6-conductor wiring is required for
each extension.)
26 ORN-RED 1 1 T
1 ORN-BLK 2 1 R KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 and KX-T7130.
27 YEL-RED 3 1 No.1 D1 Connect the pin number of “T”, “R”, “D1”, “D2”,
2 YEL-BLK 4 1 D2 “P1” and “P2”.
28 GRN-RED 5 1 P1
3 GRN-BLK 6 1 P2 T: Tip D1: Data 1 P1: 3 Pair Voice (O.H.C.A.)
29 GRY-RED 7 1 T R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice (O.H.C.A.)
4 GRY-BLK 8 1 R
30 WHT-RED 9 1 No.2 D1 • Connection of the Proprietary Telephone
5 WHT-BLK 10 1 D2
31 ORN-RED 11 2 P1 (4-conductor wiring is required for each
6 ORN-BLK 12 2 P2 extension.)
32 YEL-RED 13 2 T Connect the pin number of “T”, “R”, “D1” and “D2”
7 YEL-BLK 14 2 R only.
33 GRN-RED 15 2 No.3 D1
8 GRN-BLK 16 2 D2
34 GRY-RED 17 2 P1 • Connection of Standard Telephone (2-conductor
9 GRY-BLK 18 2 P2 wiring is required for each extension). Connect
35 WHT-RED 19 2 T the pin number of “T” and “R” only.
10 WHT-BLK 20 2 R
36 ORN-RED 21 3 No.4 D1
11 ORN-BLK 22 3 D2
37 YEL-RED 23 3 P1 EXAMPLE:
12 YEL-BLK 24 3 P2 orange line
38 GRN-RED 25 3 T The line of pin no.26
13 GRN-BLK 26 3 R
39 GRY-RED 27 3 No.5 D1
14 GRY-BLK 28 3 D2
40 WHT-RED 29 3 P1
15 WHT-BLK 30 3 P2
41 ORN-RED 31 4 T red
16 ORN-BLK 32 4 R
42 YEL-RED 33 4 No.6 D1 white line
17 YEL-BLK 34 4 D2
43 GRN-RED 35 4 P1
The line of pin no.25
18 GRN-BLK 36 4 P2
44 GRY-RED 37 4 T
19 GRY-BLK 38 4 R
45 WHT-RED 39 4 No.7 D1
20 WHT-BLK 40 4 D2 black
46 ORN-RED 41 C P1
21 ORN-BLK 42 C P2
47 YEL-RED 43 C T
22 YEL-BLK 44 C R
48 GRN-RED 45 C D1
23 GRN-BLK 46 C No.8 D2
49 GRY-RED 47 C P1
24 GRY-BLK 48 C P2
50 WHT-RED 49 C
25 WHT-BLK 50 C Not use

C: continuos

2-C-20-2 (X)
(60395)
3.09 LCOT Card (KX-T96180)

KX-T96180 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“LCOT” is marked.

1) Connection of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Terminal Board
from the Central
Office (CO)

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable) into
the 50-pin connector (jack) on the LCOT card.

Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins

See page 2-C-23.

3) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-21
3.10 GCOT Card (KX-T96181)

KX-T96181 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“GCOT” is marked.

1) Connection of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Terminal Board
from the Central
Office (CO)

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable) into
the 50-pin connector (jack) on the GCOT card.

Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins

See page 2-C-23.

3) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-22
◗ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Central Office Line)
CONN. CABLE COLOR CLIP CO Line
PIN NO.

26 WHT-BLU 1 T
NO.1 R
1 BLU-WHT 2
27 WHT-ORN 3 T
4 NO.2
2 ORN-WHT R
28 WHT-GRN 5 T
NO.3
3 GRN-WHT 6 R
29 WHT-BRN 7 T
NO.4
4 BRN-WHT 8 R
30 WHT-SLT 9 T
10 NO.5 R
5 SLT-WHT
31 RED-BLU 11 T
NO.6
6 BLU-RED 12 R
32 RED-ORN 13 T
NO.7
7 ORN-RED 14 R
33 RED-GRN 15 T
16 NO.8
8 GRN-RED R
34 RED-BRN 17
9 BRN-RED 18
35 RED-SLT 19
10 SLT-RED 20
36 BLK-BLU 21
11 BLU-BLK 22
37 BLK-ORN 23
12 ORN-BLK 24
38 BLK-GRN 25
13 GRN-BLK 26
39 BLK-BRN 27
14 BRN-BLK 28
40 BLK-SLT 29
15 SLT-BLK 30
41 YEL-BLU 31
16 BLU-YEL 32
42 YEL-ORN 33
17 ORN-YEL 34
43 YEL-GRN 35
18 GRN-YEL 36
44 YEL-BRN 37
19 BRN-YEL 38
45 YEL-SLT 39
20 SLT-YEL 40
46 VIO-BLU 41
21 BLU-VIO 42
47 VIO-ORN 43
22 ORN-VIO 44
48 VIO-GRN 45
23 GRN-VIO 46
49 VIO-BRN 47
24 BRN-VIO 48
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VIO 50

• Central Office Line Wiring

50 Pin Connector Block Terminal

CO Line 1

CO Line 2

CO Line 3

Bridging Clips

2-C-23
■ Central Office Line Connection of KX-A204 (Cable)/KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

This KX-A204 (cable) enables you to connect 8 The KX-A204/205 consists of the following:
Central office lines to the KX-T336 System.
KX-A204 : Cable......................... one
Please connect KX-A204 (Cable) to KX-A205 KX-A205 : Clip Terminal ............. one
(Clip Terminal) as follows. Refer to the
connection chart on page 2-C-26.

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

LCOT Card
(KX-T96180)

KX-A204 (Cable)

To Terminal Board from the

Central Office (CO)

2-C-23-1 (X)
(60395)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Central Office Line)

Connection Chart

Conn. Cable Color Clip Number CO Line EXAMPLE:

Pin No. of Dot
orange line
26 ORN-RED 1 1
1 ORN-BLK 2 1
NO.1 The line of pin no.26
27 YEL-RED 3 1 NO.2
2 YEL-BLK 4 1
28 GRN-RED 5 1 NO.3
3 GRN-BLK 6 1
red
29 GRY-RED 7 1 NO.4
4 GRY-BLK 8 1 green line
30 WHT-RED 9 1 NO.5 The line of pin no.8
5 WHT-BLK 10 1
31 ORN-RED 11 2 NO.6
6 ORN-BLK 12 2
32 YEL-RED 13 2 NO.7
7 YEL-BLK 14 2
33 GRN-RED 15 2 black
NO.8
8 GRN-BLK 16 2
34 GRY-RED 17 2
9 GRY-BLK 18 2
35 WHT-RED 19 2
10 WHT-BLK 20 2
36 ORN-RED 21 3
11 ORN-BLK 22 3
37 YEL-RED 23 3
12 YEL-BLK 24 3
38 GRN-RED 25 3
13 GRN-BLK 26 3
39 GRY-RED 27 3
14 GRY-BLK 28 3
40 WHT-RED 29 3
15 WHT-BLK 30 3
41 ORN-RED 31 4
16 ORN-BLK 32 4
42 YEL-RED 33 4
17 YEL-BLK 34 4
43 GRN-RED 35 4
18 GRN-BLK 36 4
44 GRY-RED 37 4
19 GRY-BLK 38 4
45 WHT-RED 39 4
20 WHT-BLK 40 4
46 ORN-RED 41 C
21 ORN-BLK 42 C
47 YEL-RED 43 C
22 YEL-BLK 44 C
48 GRN-RED 45 C
23 GRN-BLK 46 C
49 GRY-RED 47 C
24 GRY-BLK 48 C
50 WHT-RED 49 C
25 WHT-BLK 50 C

C: continuous

2-C-23-2 (X)
(60395)
■ To connect Amphenol 57JE type (screw-attach-type 50-pin
connector) to the Option Card, follow the procedure below.

1. The 50-pin connector (jack) on the Option
Card has two hook-pins.
Remove the upper hook-pin, taking out the
screw.
2. To attach the Amphenol 57JE type (plug) to
the connector, drive the accessory Screw at
the upper part, and fasten the accessory Wire
Tie around the lower hook-pin and the
Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.

Option Card

Screw

Hook-pins

50-pin connector

2-C-24
3.11 DID Card
1. DID Card (KX-T96182) (for U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DID” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line

(L) R T (H) R : Ring

T : Tip
(L) : Low
(H): High

View of TEL Jack (CO)

(L) and (H) are equipped for
the DID port No.4 only.

DID Port No.1

DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2- conductor (See “Note” below.)

wiring cord

• Insert the modular plug of the telephone line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the DID card.
(Note)
The DID port No.4 is equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads.
If you connect a 4-conductor wiring cord to this port, the on/off status of the system can be detected
through “H” and “L” leads.
When the system is on : Ground is applied.
When the system is off : Ground is not applied.

2-C-25
(70695)
3.11 DID Card
2. DID Card (KX-T96182) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DID” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line

Insert the modular plug of the telephone line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the DID card.

A B
A: A-wire
B: B-wire

View of TEL Jack (CO)

DID Port No.1

DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2-conductor
wiring cord

• The DID port No.4 is equipped with “H” and “L” leads as well as “A-wire”
and “B- wire.”
However, please be sure to use 2-conductor wiring cord for connection.

• Make sure to connect the frame of the KX-T336 System to the earth ground
properly to protect the unit.

2-C-25-1 (X)
(70695)
3.11 DID Card
3. Both-way DID Card (KX-T96182D) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182D • Insert this card into a free slot.

DID-2W

“DID-2W” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line

Insert the modular plug of the telephone line
cord (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jack
(DID ports 1 through 4) on the DID card.

R T R : Ring
T : Tip

View of TEL Jack (CO)

DID Port No.1

DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182D)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2- conductor wiring cord (See “Note” below.)

(Note)
• Make sure to match the polarity of DID lines and DID port — Ring: “–” (negative)
Tip: “+” (positive).

• The DID ports 1 through 4 are equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads in addition to “R” and “T.”
However, please be sure to use 2-conductor wiring cord for connection.

• Make sure to connect the frame of the Main Unit to the earth ground properly to protect the unit.

2-C-25-2(X)
(70695)
3.11 DID Card
4. MFC DID Card (KX-T96182CE) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182CE • Insert this card into a free slot.

DID-MFC

“DID-MFC” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line

Insert the modular plug of the telephone line
cord (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jack
(DID ports 1 through 4) on the DID card.

T R T : Tip
R : Ring

View of TEL Jack (CO)

DID Port No.1

DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182CE)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2- conductor wiring cord (See “Note” below.)

(Note)
• Make sure to match the polarity of DID lines and DID port — Ring: “–” (negative)
Tip: “+” (positive).

• The DID ports 1 through 4 are equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads in addition to “R” and “T.’
However, please be sure to use 2-conductor wiring cord when connecting.

• Connect the Main Unit frame to the earth ground properly to protect the unit.

2-C-25-3(X)
(70695)
3.12 OPX Card (KX-T96185)
• Insert this card into a free slot.
KX-T96185

“OPX” is marked.

1) Connection to private lines

Single Line Telephone

22 AWG: Under 6 miles

OPX Port No.1

OPX Port No.2
OPX Port No.3
OPX Port No.4
Use 2- conductor wiring cord
OPX Card

• Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord (2-conductor
wiring) into the modular jack on the OPX card.

2) Connection to public lines

OPX Central
Office Line

Use 2- conductor wiring cord

OPX Card
• Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord (2-conductor
wiring) into the modular jack on the OPX card.

2-C-26
3) Connection to the OPX Power Unit (KX-T96186)
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
9-pin Connector
(plug)

screw

9-pin Connector
screw
(jack)

Power Switch

OPX Card
(KX-T96185)

OPX Power Unit

120V AC 60Hz (KX-T96186)
1. Insert the 9-pin connector (plug) of the OPX
Power Unit into the 9-pin connector (jack) on
the OPX card.

To earth 2. Connect the frame of the OPX Power Unit to

ground earth ground properly to protect the unit.

3. Plug the AC Power cord of the OPX Power

Unit to the AC outlet.

4. Turn on the Power Switch on the OPX Power

Unit.
• The Power indicator will be lit.

2-C-27
(60395)
3) Connection to the OPX Power Unit (KX-T96186/KX-T96186B)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
9-pin Connector
(plug)

screw

9-pin Connector
screw
(jack)

Voltage
Power Switch Selector
Power 1

OPX Card
Rear (KX-T96185)

Off Premise Extension

(OPX) Power Unit
(KX-T96186/KX-T96186B)

↓
To AC Outlet 1. Insert the 9-pin connector (plug) of the OPX
Power Unit into the 9-pin connector (jack) on
the OPX card.

To earth 2. Connect the frame of the OPX Power Unit to

ground earth ground properly to protect the unit.
3. Check the Voltage Selector if it is set to your
household AC voltage. If not, reset the
NOTE: Voltage Selector to the correct position with a
Model No. of available OPX Power Unit screwdriver. There is no Voltage Selector for
depends on the electrical requirement in your some countries; The correct voltage is
area. already set.
4. Plug in the AC Power cord from the OPX
Power Unit.
5. Turn on the Power Switch on the OPX Power
Unit.
• The Power indicator will be lit.
■ Primary Power Fuse
If the Power Indicator light goes out, replace
the Primary Power Fuse after removing the
cause.

2-C-27-1 (X)
(60395)
3.13 DISA Card (KX-T96191)

KX-T96191 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DISA” is marked.

3.14 AGC Card (KX-T96193)

KX-T96193 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“AGC” is marked.

3.15 RMT Card (KX-T96196)

KX-T96196 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“RMT” is marked.

2-C-28
3.16 E&M Card (KX-T96184)

• Insert this card into a free slot.

PUSH

“E&M” is marked.

1) Connection of the E&M Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Terminal
Board from the
E&M Line

• Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector (GND).

•Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the E&M Line cord (twisted cable) into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the E&M card.

Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins

See pages 2-C-28-2 and 2-C-28-3.

2-C-28-1
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (E&M Line)
Connect Number of
Cable Color Clip No E&M Line
Pin Dot
1 ORN-RED 1 1 T 2-wire or 4 - wire - send
26 ORN-BLK 2 1 R
}
2 YEL-RED 3 1 T1 4-wire - receive
27 YEL-BLK 4 1 R1
}
3 GRY-RED 5 1 E Lead
28 GRY-BLK 6 1 NO.1 SG Lead
4 WHY-RED 7 1 SB Lead
29 WHY-BLK 8 1 M1 Lead
5 ORN-RED 9 1 No connect
30 ORN-BLK 10 1 M Lead only for Type 5
6 YEL-RED 11 2 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
31 YEL-BLK 12 2 R
}
7 GRY-RED 13 2 T1 4-wire - receive
32 GRY-BLK 14 2 R1
}
8 WHY-RED 15 2 E Lead
33 WHY-BLK 16 2 NO.2 SG Lead
9 ORN-RED 17 2 SB Lead
34 ORN-BLK 18 2 M1 Lead
10 YEL-RED 19 2 No connect
35 YEL-BLK 20 2 M Lead only for Type 5
11 GRY-RED 21 3 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
36 GRY-BLK 22 3 R
}
12 WHY-RED 23 3 T1 4-wire - receive
37 WHY-BLK 24 3 R1
}
13 ORN-RED 25 3 E Lead
NO.3
38 ORN-BLK 26 3 SG Lead
14 YEL-RED 27 3 SB Lead
39 YEL-BLK 28 3 M1 Lead
15 GRY-RED 29 3 No connect
40 GRY-BLK 30 3 M Lead only for Type 5
16 WHY-RED 31 4 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
41 WHY-BLK 32 4 R
}
17 ORN-RED 33 4 T1 4-wire - receive
42 ORN-BLK 34 4 R1
}
18 YEL-RED 35 4 E Lead
43 YEL-BLK 36 4 NO.4 SG Lead
19 GRY-RED 37 4 SB Lead
44 GRY-BLK 38 4 M1 Lead
20 WHY-RED 39 4 No connect
45 WHY-BLK 40 4 M Lead only for Type 5

Note:
21~25, 46~50: No connect

2-C-28-2
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (E&M Line)
• E&M Line Wiring

50-pin Block Terminal

Connector

E&M Line 1

Bridging Clips

2-C-28-3
(70695)
■ Connection to another KX-T336 system (KX-T96184)
2-wire voice path
KX-T96184 Another KX-T96184

4-wire voice path

KX-T96184 Another KX-T96184

■ Connection to E&M Central Office

2-wire voice path.
KX-T96184 E&M Central Office

4-wire voice path.

KX-T96184 E&M Central Office

2-C-28-4
(70695)
■ E&M Line Connection of KX-A204 (Cable)/KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

KX-A204 (cable) enables you to connect four E&M The KX-A204/205 consists of the following:
lines to the KX-T336 System. Please connect KX-
KX-A204 : Cable ................ one
A204 (Cable) to KX-A205 (Clip Terminal) as
KX-A205 : Clip Terminal ..... one
follows. Refer to the connection chart on page 2-C-
28-6.

KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

E&M Card
(KX-T96184)

KX-A204 (Cable)
To Terminal Board
from the E&M Line

2-C-28-5
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (E&M Line)
Connect Number
Cable Color Clip No E&M Line
Pin of Dot
1 ORN-RED 1 1 T 2-wire or 4 - wire - send
26 ORN-BLK 2 1 R
}
2 YEL-RED 3 1 T1 4-wire - receive
27 YEL-BLK 4 1 R1 }
3 GRY-RED 5 1 E Lead
28 GRY-BLK 6 1 NO.1 SG Lead
4 WHY-RED 7 1 SB Lead
29 WHY-BLK 8 1 M1 Lead
5 ORN-RED 9 1 No connect
30 ORN-BLK 10 1 M Lead only for Type 5
6 YEL-RED 11 2 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
31 YEL-BLK 12 2 R}
7 GRY-RED 13 2 T1 4-wire - receive
32 GRY-BLK 14 2 R1 }
8 WHY-RED 15 2 E Lead
33 WHY-BLK 16 2 NO.2 SG Lead
9 ORN-RED 17 2 SB Lead
34 ORN-BLK 18 2 M1 Lead
10 YEL-RED 19 2 No connect
35 YEL-BLK 20 2 M Lead only for Type 5
11 GRY-RED 21 3 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
36 GRY-BLK 22 3 R
}
12 WHY-RED 23 3 T1 4-wire - receive
37 WHY-BLK 24 3 R1
}
13 ORN-RED 25 3 E Lead
NO.3
38 ORN-BLK 26 3 SG Lead
14 YEL-RED 27 3 SB Lead
39 YEL-BLK 28 3 M1 Lead
15 GRY-RED 29 3 No connect
40 GRY-BLK 30 3 M Lead only for Type 5
16 WHY-RED 31 4 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
41 WHY-BLK 32 4 R
}
17 ORN-RED 33 4 T1 4-wire - receive
42 ORN-BLK 34 4 R1
}
18 YEL-RED 35 4 E Lead
43 YEL-BLK 36 4 NO.4 SG Lead
19 GRY-RED 37 4 SB Lead
44 GRY-BLK 38 4 M1 Lead
20 WHY-RED 39 4 No connect
45 WHY-BLK 40 4 M Lead only for Type 5

Note:
21~25, 46~50: No connect

2-C-28-6
(70695)
■ Hardware Setting
You can choose one of the following E&M sequences using the hard switch on the KX-T96184

(OFF)
(OFF)
(OFF)

(1) Continuous E&M (Wink/Immediate)

(ON/ON/ON)

(OFF/ON/ON)
Hard switch
(ON/OFF/ON) (2) Pulsed E&M with Answer signal (Wink)

(OFF/OFF/ON) (3) Pulsed E&M without Answer signal (Wink)

(ON/ON/OFF)
Reserved
(OFF/OFF/OFF)

(1)Continuous E&M

2-C-28-7
(70695)
■ Hardware Setting (E&M Card)
(2)Pulsed E&M with Answer signal

If you select this sequence, then you must select “Wink” as a start type.

(3)Pulsed E&M without Answer signal

If you select this sequence, then you must select “Wink” as a start type.

2-C-28-8
(70695)
3.17 T-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96187)

KX-T96187 • Insert the card into Free Slot 1, 5 or

T-1
9 of any shelf.
• A maximum of six KX-T96187 can
be installed in the system.

“T-1” mark

Connecting the Central Office Line

Insert the RJ-48C plug of the telephone line
cord (4-conductor wiring) into the RJ-48C jack
(T-1 port on the KX-T96187).

T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD

(KX-T96187)
Use 4-conductor wiring cord.

Transmit Equalizer Setting

Note:
The User cannot change this setting.

2-C-28-9
(70695)
 Maximum Cabling Distance of the T-1 Line

Modular Jack
from the Central
Office (CO)

Other
KX-T96187

Note :
The T-1 line cable must be 22 AWG shielded twisted pair cable or 24 AWG UTP
(unshielded twisted pair) cable supported Category 5.

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected for KX-T96187

KX-T96187 Channel Service Unit (CSU)

KX-T96187 KX-T96187
8 Pin Modular Jack
on KX-T96187 on KX-T96187

2-C-28-10
(70695)
System Clock Mode for KX-T96187

Note:
System Clock mode is programmed by CLK command.(see 10-C-64.02)

2-C-28-11
(70695)
Short Jumper Setting for KX-T96187

SW2, SW3 SW5

NOR Normal (default) T336 Mode for KX-T336 (default)

TEST TEST (see Note) TD500 (Reserved)

Note:
Loop Back Test
The user can check KX-T96187 by the following procedure.

1. Remove T-1 cable from KX-T96187.

2. Set SW2 and SW3 to TEST position.
3. Check SYNC LED (green).
• If SYNC LED does not light or flash, KX-T96187 does not work.
4. Set SW2 and SW3 to NOR position.

2-C-28-12
(70695)
LED Indication for KX-T96187

Item Status Contents

FAULT ON Card Fault
OFF Normal
SYNC ON Clock Synchronization Error or Loss of Signal
ERROR OFF Normal
RAI ON Receive Remote Alarm Indication signal (Yellow
Alarm)
OFF Normal
AIS ON Send Alarm Indication Signal (Yellow Alarm)
OFF Normal
SYNC FLASH Clock Master at External Clock Mode
ON Detection of Signal
OFF No Detection of Signal

2-C-28-13
(70695)
3.18 E-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96188)

KX-T96188 • Insert the card into Free Slot 1, 5 or

E-1
9 of any shelf.
• A maximum of four E1 DIGITAL
TRUNK CARDS can be installed in
the system.

“E-1” mark

■ Connecting the Central Office Line

Insert the coaxial plugs of the telephone line cords (2 coaxial cables)
into the coaxial jacks. (E-1 port on the KX-T96188).

■ Maximum Cabling Distance of the E-1 Line

Coaxial Jacks from

the Central Office
(CO)

Another
KX-T96188

Note:
• The E-1 line cable must be 75 ohm transmission coaxial cable.
2-C-28-14
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be Connected for KX-T96188
KX-T96188 Central Office (CO)

KX-T96188 KX-T96188

■ System Clock Mode for KX-T96188

Note:
• System Clock mode is programmed using CLK command (See 10-C-64.02).

2-C-28-15
(70695)
■ Short Jumper Setting for KX-T96188

SW2, SW3 SW5

NOR Normal (default) T336 Mode for KX-T336 (default)

TEST TEST (see Note) TD500 (Reserved)

Note:
Loop Back Test
The user can check KX-T96188 by the following procedure.
1. Remove E-1 coaxial cables from KX-T96188.
2. Set SW2 and SW3 to TEST position.
3. Check SYNC LED (green).
• If SYNC LED does not light or flash, KX-T96188 does not work.
4. Set SW2 and SW3 to NOR position.

2-C-28-16
(70695)
■ LED Indication for KX-T96188

Item Status Contents

FAULT ON Card Fault

OFF Normal
SYNC ON Clock Synchronization Error or Loss of Signal
ERROR OFF Normal
RAI ON Receive Remote Alarm Indication Signal
OFF Normal
AIS ON Send Alarm Indication Signal
OFF Normal
SYNC FLASH Clock Master at External Clock Mode
ON Detection of Signal
OFF No Detection of Signal

2-C-28-17
(70695)
4.00 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
Any Single Line Telephone can be connected parallely with Proprietary Telephone as
follow:

To HLC card
Modular Panasonic KX-J66
or
T-Adaptor USOC RJA2X
2-conductor wiring cord

4-conductor
wiring cord

Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone

KX-T7020 KX-T61620
KX-T7030 KX-T61630
KX-T7050 KX-T61650
KX-T7130 KX-T123220
KX-T30820 KX-T123230
KX-T30830 KX-T123230D
KX-T30850 KX-T123235
KX-T123250

Note :
The 6-conductor wiring cord and the Modular T Adaptor KX-J36 are required when one of
the following PITS telephones is used for parallel connection. KX-T7130, KX-T123230D
and KX-T123235.

Not only a Single Line Telephone but an answering machine, a facsimile or a modem
(personal computer) can be connected parallely with certain PITS telephones.
Refer to Section 3-F-9.00 “Parallel Connection of Extensions” for further information.

2-C-29
5.00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer connects a specific Single Line and PITS telephones to selected
trunks in the event of system power failure.

The following PITS telephones can be used during power failure.

KX-T30830, KX-T61630, KX-T123230, KX-T123230D, KX-T123235

For further information about Power Failure Transfer, refer to Section 14-H-1.00 “Power
Failure Transfer Assignment.”
The Auxiliary Connection (see the illustration below) is required to implement this feature.

KX-T336 System changes the current connection to the Auxiliary connection

automatically when the power supply stops.
While the DC power is available by the backup batteries even if the AC power fails,
KX-T336 System does not change the current connection to the Auxiliary connection.
3 ports are available for KX-T96174X.

1) Connection

T3 T2 T 1 R1 R2 R3

T n : Tip
R n : Ring

(Modular plug)

Modular Jack 1

Modular Jack 2

Modular Jack 3

Central Office Line option card Extension option card

(LCOT, GCOT) (SLC, HLC)

• Insert the modular plugs of connection cords (6-conductor wiring) to the modular jacks of
Central Office Line option cards (LCOT, GCOT) and Extension option cards (SLC, HLC).

PLC card (Extension card) is not available with Power Failure Transfer.

2-C-30
(70695)
2) Connection of Central Office Line and Extensions

50-pin Connector 50-pin Connector

26 26
1 1
27 27
2 2
28 28
6 6
3 5 5 3
29 4
3
4
3 29
4 2
1
2
1
4
30 30
5 5
31 Modular Jack 1 31
6 6
32 32
7 7
33 33
8 8
34 34
9 9
35 35
10 10
36 36
11 11
37 6 6 37
5 5
12 4 4 12
38 3
2
3
2
38
13 1 1 13
39 39
14 14
40 Modular Jack 2 40
15 15
41 41
16 16
42 42
17 17
43 43
18 18
44 44
19 6 6 19
5 5
45 4 4 45
20 3
2
3
2
20
46 1 1 46
21 21
47 Modular Jack 3 47
22 22
48 48
23 23
49 49
24 24
50 50
25 25
Central Office Line cards Extension cards

2-C-31
6.00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D)
1.
Front
Metal Plate 1) Drive the two small screws (accessory) on the
bottom of the unit.
Screw 2) Place the Metal Plate so that the screw heads
(Small) insert into the slots as shown.
Bottom
3) Slide the Metal Plate in the directions of the
arrows, and drive the screws.
Rear

2.
Insert Battery Adaptor into the Battery Adaptor
Compartment (Base Shelf).
Pull out the cords from the left side of the
Battery Adaptor.

3.
Slide the Metal Plate on Battery Adaptor
toward you and fix it to the Holder attached to
Base Shelf, as illustrated.

Holder

Metal Plate

2-C-32
4.
Connect the Battery Adaptor with two
automobile-type batteries (12V DC × 2) using
Battery Adaptor Line Cable as shown.
Make sure of the polarities of batteries and
wires.
Make sure do not short the batteries and
wires.
To connect the two batteries, use accessory
wire.

Automobile-type batteries Red (+)

12V DC
Accessory
Wire
12V DC

(A) (B) (C)

Blue (— )

(A) Ground Wire

(B) Battery Adaptor Cord
(C) Battery Adaptor Line Cable

5.
• Plug the Battery Adaptor cord to Backup Battery
connector on the Basic Shelf.
• Connect the Ground Wire of Battery Adaptor to
Ground Wire Connector on the Base Shelf.
Backup Battery
Connector

Power Unit

Ground Wire
Connector

2-C-33
6. When one or two Expansion Shelves (KX-T336200)
are installed, connect another Battery Adaptor (KX-
A26D) with automobile type batteries (12V DC × 2)
following the same procedures from 1 to 5.

Automobile type
batteries (24V DC)

Note :
Up to three pairs of automobile-type batteries can be connected to the KX-T336 System.
If power failure occurs, each pair of batteries supplies the power to each shelf (Basic,
Expansion 1, 2) connected respectively via Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D).

2-C-34
D. Connection of Optional
Peripheral Equipments

1.00 Paging Equipment

Up to two paging equipments (customer-supplied) can be connected to the system as
illustrated below.

Use an RCA connector.

• Output impedance: 600Ω

Speaker

Amplifier

Paging equipment 1

Speaker

Amplifier

TSW Card

Paging equipment 2

Paging jack 1

Paging jack 2

2-D-1
2.00 External Music Source (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Up to two external music sources (customer-supplied) can be connected to the system

as illustrated below.

Use a two-conductor plug

(9/64 inch in diameter)
• Input impedance 8Ω

TSW Card

EXT MUSIC Jack 1

EXT MUSIC Jack 2

2-D-2
(60395)
2.00 External Music Source (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

The KX-T336 System provides Music on Hold and Background Music. The KX-T336
System itself has music source (Internal Music Source), but External Music Source
(e.g.radio) can also be used by connecting it to the KX-T336 System. When you use
the External Music Source, the Music Source Selector Switch on the T-SW Card
should be set to “MUS 2” and when you use the Internal Music Source, the Music
Source Selector Switch should be set to “INT MUS.”

Use a two-conductor plug

(9/64 inch diameter)
• Input impedance
8Ω

T-SW Card

EXT MUSIC Jack 1

EXT MUSIC Jack 2

INT MUS

MUS 2

Music Source Selector Switch

INT MUS: Set when using the internal music
source.
MUS 2 : Set when using the external music
source.

• For the assignment of external Music Source 1 or 2, refer to 9-D-1.01 System-

Operation (1/3) and 9-F-2.00 Trunk-Pager & Music Source.
• If you use the internal music source, set 9-D-1.01 System-Operation (1/3),
External Music Source 1, 2 to “No, Yes.”

2-D-2-1
2-D-2(X)
(60395)
3.00 RS-232C Interface
The KX-T336 System provides two RS-232C interfaces.
These interfaces provide communication between the system and customer supplied
devices such as data terminals and line printers.
RS-232C Port 1 (PROG) is used for system programming, diagnostics and external
system database storage (Save/Load) functions, and Port 2 (SMDR) for Station
Message Detailed Recording (SMDR) only.

PROG

SMDR

2-D-3
1) Pin Configuration (“PROG”, “SMDR”)

Pin Circuit Type

Signal Name
Number EIA CCITT
1 FG Frame Ground AA 101
2 TXD Transmitted Data BA 103

3 RXD Received Data BB 104

4 RTS Request To Send CA 105

5 CTS Clear To Send CB 106

6 DSR Data Set Ready CC 107

7 SG Signal Ground AB 102

8 DCD Data Carrier CF 109
Detect

20 DTR Data Terminal CD 108.2

Ready

EIA (RS-232C) SIGNALS:

Frame Ground (FG);
Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground
conductor of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data (TXD);........................(output)
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A
“Mark” condition is held unless data or BREAK
signals are being transmitted.
Received Data (RXD);..............................(input)
Conveys signals from the printer.
Request To Send (RTS);........................(output)
This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON.
Clear To Send (CTS);............................... (input)
The ON condition of circuit CTS indicates that the
printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The
unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive
data when circuit CTS is OFF.
Data Set Ready (DSR); ............................(input)
The ON condition of circuit DSR indicates the
printer is ready. Circuit DSR ON does not
indicate that communication has been
established with the printer.
Signal Ground (SG);
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all
interface signal.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)...................(output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to
indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit DTR ON does
not indicate that communication has been
established with the printer. It is switched OFF
when the unit is OFF LINE.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD).......................(input)
The ON condition is an indication to data terminal
(DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.

2-D-4
3.01 Connection to the Printer

• Connect the RS-232C connector of the printer to “SMDR.”

• Cables must be shielded and the maximum cabling distance is 6.5 feet.

• Connection Chart

RS-232C (SMDR) port on the Basic Shelf (KX-T336100) RS-232C port on the printer

Circuit Type (EIA) Single Name Pin No. Pin No. Single Name Circuit Type (EIA)

AA FG 1 1 FG AA
BA TXD 2 3 RXD BB

BB RXD 3 2 TXD BA

CC DSR 6 20 DTR CD
AB SG 7 7 SG AB

CD DTR 20 5 CTS CB
6 DSR CC
8 DCD CF

2-D-5
3.02 Connection to the Data Terminal

Data Terminal

• Connect the RS-232C connector of the data terminal to the “PROG.”

• Cables must be shielded and the maximum length of the cable is 6.5 feet.

• Connection Chart

RS-232C port (PROG) on the Basic Shelf (KX-T336100) RS-232C port on the data terminal

Circuit Type (EIA) Single Name Pin No. Pin No. Single Name Circuit Type (EIA)

AA FG 1 1 FG AA

BB RXD 3 2 TXD BA

BA TXD 2 3 RXD BB

CB CTS 5 4 RTS CA

CA RTS 4 5 CTS CB

CD DTR 20 6 DSR CC

AB SG 7 7 SG AB

CC DSR 6 20 DTR CD

Panasonic data terminal ; KX-D4930, etc.

If you connect this unit to a Panasonic Data Terminal, the Communication Parameter
Transmit XON/XOFF on the Data Terminal must be set to “YES.”
For further details, see the Operating Instructions of the Data Terminal.

2-D-6
E. Installation of Attendant Console

1.00 Configuration

1) Front View

CRT unit

Handset

Base unit
Handset cord

Keyboard cord

Keyboard
(Option)

2) Rear View

AC power cord
Jack for attendant console
line cord.

Reset button

To AC outlet

2-E-1
(60395)
3) Left Side View

Power Switch

Jack for handset cord

4) Right Side View

Local switch

Ringer volume selector

Jack for handset cord Speaker volume control knob

2-E-2
2.00 Attendant Console Assembly

1)

CRT unit

Power indicator
Brightness adjustment
knob
CRT unit cord
Plug for connection
Handset
Plug for connecting the
CRT unit is connected
here.

Speaker Base unit

Handset cord

Keyboard cord
Keyboard (Option)

Name Quantity

CRT unit 1
Attendant Console Line cord
Base unit 1
(2-conductor wiring)
Handset 1

Handset cord 1

Attendant Console Line cord 1

Ferrite core 1 Ferrite core

Note: The illustration of Ferrite core may
Keyboard (Option) 1 vary slightly from the actual
product.
2-E-3
(E)
3.00 Handset Connection

Base unit

Jack Jack

Plug Plug Plug Plug

Handset cord Handset cord

1. Plug the coiled handset cord into the jack labeled “TO HANDSET” either right side or
left side of the base unit.
2. Plug the other end of the coiled cord into the handset, and then hang up.

❇ You can use either of the right and left jacks.

2-E-4
4.00 Installation and Removal of CRT Unit

4.01 CRT Unit Installation

1) Before connecting the CRT unit to the Base unit, be sure to attach the Ferrite core to the
CRT unit cord as shown in the figure below.

(Opening the Ferrite core)

(Attaching the Ferrite core to the CRT unit cord)

Ferrite core

Note: The illustration of Ferrite core may vary slightly from the actual product.
2) Plug the CRT unit cord into the connector (“CRT CONNECTOR”) on the base unit.

CRT unit
Plug

Connector

Ferrite core

Connect so that
the arrows face Base unit
each other.

2-E-5
(E)
3) Insert the two male components of the bottom front surface of the CRT unit to the two
female components at the top front surface of the base unit.

CRT unit

Male component

Female component
Ferrite core

Base unit

4) Set rear portion of the CRT unit slowly onto the base unit until the stop fixture holds the
CRT unit securely.

CRT unit

Base unit

2-E-6
4.02 CRT Unit Removal

❇ Confirm that the AC power cord has been removed.

Stop fixture

Press

1. Press the stop fixture toward you and hold it pressed, then lift up the rear portion
of the CRT unit.
2. Unplug the CRT unit cord from the base unit connector.

2-E-7
5.00 Keyboard Connection
1)

Plug
Jack

Plug

Keyboard (KX-T96145)
Base unit(bottom panel)

Insert the plug of the keyboard cord into the jack (“KEY BOARD CONNECTOR”)
on the base unit.
Cord clamper
2)

To disconnect the plug,

pull the plug while keeping
the hook pushed.
Hook

Fasten the keyboard plug securely with the cord clamper.

3)

Stand

• Stands are attached to the bottom of the keyboard so that the keyboard incline can
be adjusted.
Set the stands for maximum ease in key operation.

2-E-8
6.00 Connection with KX-T336 System

KX-T336 System

• Insert the modular plug of the attendant console line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack (“TO AT LC”) on the base unit.

❇ For connection on the KX-T336 System side, see page 2-C-9.

2-E-9
7.00 AC Power Cord Connection (for U.S.A. and Canada)

❇ Connect the AC power cord only after all attendant console connections have been completed.

1)

To AC outlet (120V AC/60Hz).

AC power cord

• Insert the AC power cord into the AC outlet (120V AC/60Hz).

Attention!
• Hold the AC power cord plug to insert or remove the AC power cord.
• Do not insert or remove the AC power cord with a wet hand.
• Do not forcefully twist or pull on the AC power cord, and do not leave it only partially inserted.
• When connecting the AC power cord, be sure to always establish ground wiring.

2)

Power switch

• Turn on the power switch.

(The power indicator lights and the initial screen appears on the display.)

2-E-10
(60395)
7.00 AC Power Cord Connection (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

❇ Connect the AC power cord only after all attendant console connections have been completed.

1)

To AC outlet
AC power cord

❇ Before connecting the AC power cord, be

sure to check the Voltage Selector (115V/
200V/220V/240V) if it is set to your
household AC voltage. If not, reset the
Voltage Selector to the correct position with
a screwdriver.
If the plug of AC Power Cord does not fit
• Insert the AC power cord into the AC outlet. your electrical outlet, use the furnished plug
adaptor.
Attention!
• Hold the AC power cord plug to insert or remove the AC power cord.
• Do not insert or remove the AC power cord with a wet hand.
• Do not forcefully twist or pull on the AC power cord, and do not leave it only partially inserted.
• When connecting the AC power cord, be sure to always establish ground wiring.

2)

Power switch

• Turn on the power switch.

(The power indicator lights and the initial screen appears on the display.)

2-E-10-1
2-E-11(X)
(60395)
8.00 Various Adjustments

1) Display brightness adjustment

Brightness adjustment knob

• The brightness adjustment knob is used to adjust the brightness of the display.
Turn the knob to the right for increasing brightness until the proper brightness is
established.

2) SP-PHONE volume adjustment

• Volume control knob is used to adjust the volume level of the call through the SP-
PHONE. Adjust this volume for maximum ease in listening.

3) Ringer volume adjustment

• The ringer volume selector is used to adjust the ringer volume.

This selector can be switched among three stages: OFF, LOW and HIGH. Set for
the most appropriate volume.

2-E-12
2-E-11
F. Starting Up the KX-T336 System
1.00 System Power-Up Procedure
❇ Complete and check all installation procedures before connecting the AC power
cord (packaged separately).

1. First insert the AC power cord into the AC power cord connector on the back of the
base shelf as shown below.
2. Then insert the other end of the AC power cord into the AC outlet .
3. Turn on the Main Power Switch on the base shelf.
4. Turn on the power switch on the power unit of each shelf.
• The power indicator on the power unit will light.

Note :
Each shelf may be powered down individually, without powering down the entire
system.

2-F-1
(60395)
2.00 CPU Rotary-Switch Features

LED 1 (CPU failure)

LED 2 (Battery power down)

RESET button

Operation Switch 0 to 9 (MODE)

System Administration Device

Selection Switch: 0 to 9 (SYSTEM)

2.01 Operation Switch (MODE)

Switch Operation
With System Memory Without System Memory
No. Mode
Starts up the system with current system • System programming data is
programming data verified logically → on-line
0
• System programming data is not
verified logically → off-line
Starts up the system with current system Starts up the system with default
1
On-line programming data values
Starts up the system with current system Enters to off-line mode without
2 programming data initializing the data
(Power failure transfer status)
Special Operation
3
(Examination on the finished product)

4 Holds the current system programming data

Assigns default values automatically and “System Installation” screen is displayed

5
(Installation)
Off-line
Initializes the current system programming data and “System Installation” screen
6
is displayed (Installation)
Holds the current programming data and “System Installation” screen is displayed
7
(Enters to “Password Entry” screen compulsorily)
Reserved for future expansion
8 (Functions same as “0”)
Reserved for future expansion
9 (Functions same as “0”)

2-F-2
[Note]

a) When you start up the system after installation, the Operation Switch (MODE) should be set to “5” or
“6.”

• No.5 ....When you program the system data based on the factory programmed default values.
• No.6 ....When you program the system data without the factory programmed default values.

b) When system programming is finished, the Operation Switch (MODE) should be set to “0,” “1” or “2.”

• No.0 .....When CPU runaway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is
pressed, the system enters to on-line mode if system programming data is verified logically, or
the system enters to off-line mode if system programming data is not verified logically.

• No.1 ....When CPU runway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is
pressed, default value is loaded and the system enters to on-line mode.
If system programming data is not lost, reset-routine will be activated and enters to on-line
mode with the current system programming data.

• No.2 ....When CPU runaway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is
pressed, the system enters to off-line mode with the current System programming data.

c) With System Memory

System memory is provided.

d) Without System Memory

System memory is not provided.

e) Off-line
It is available to perform system data programming but call processing and functional test are not
available in off-line mode.

f) Power failure transfer

Connects preassigned CO lines and extensions directly, bypassing the system.

g) After you entered the system administration mode, keep the following considerations in mind when
setting the Operation Switch.

• No.5 ....Current programming data will be defaulted.

• No.6 ....Current programming data will be removed.

2-F-3
Operation Switch and Screen Display

Operation Backup Clock Setting Data On-line/Off-line Patterns of Screen

Switch Data Display (Below)

0 Without 3
1 8 On-line
Not assigned yet 3
3 9 With
Already assigned 4
Not assigned yet 3
Without Off-line
Already assigned 4
2
Not assigned yet 3
With On-line
Already assigned 4
Not assigned yet 3
4 ——
Already assigned 4
Not assigned yet 1
7 —— Off-line
Already assigned 2
5
—— 1
6

(Note) Once you exit the “System Installation” screen and “Date & Time Set Up” screen, these
screens are not displayed again.

Patterns of Screen Display

KX-T336
Pattern 1 System Installation Password Date & Time Main Menu

KX-T336
Pattern 2 Installation Password Main Menu
System

KX-T336
Pattern 3 Password Date & Time Main Menu
System

KX-T336
Pattern 4 Password Main Menu
System

2-F-4
2.02 System Administration Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM)

0 Pre-Programmed device is assigned

1 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
2 VT220 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
3 Dumb is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
4 ATT1 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
5 ATT2 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
6 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
7 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
8 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
9 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)

a) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “2” through “5,” System
Administration Device will be assigned compulsorily regardless of the system
programming. Default setting is VT220. (Refer to the table above)

b) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “0,” “1,” or “6” through “9,” pre-
programmed device becomes valid as the System Administration Device.

It is possible to change the System Administration Device assignment compulsorily

by pressing the RESET button after selecting the desired switch position, if pre-
programmed System Administration Device is not available due to the hardware
troubles or something.

2-F-5
2.03 Operation Sequence for System Starting Up

START

Attendant Console
Administration
Device
RS-232C
4: ATT1
Connect the device to SYSTEM=4.5
5: ATT2
SIO#1 (upper side)

Dumb mode
Device mode
VT mode
SYSTEM=2 MODE=2

No
Default Values
Yes
MODE=5 MODE=6

Confirm device
assignment and Reset Power-on or
Rotary Switch press the RESET button

No Initial Screen
is displayed

Yes
Programming Off-line mode

When system data is destroyed, the

MODE switch system enters to off-line mode
selection
When system data is
destroyed, start up the
system with default
values
MODE=0 MODE=1 MODE=2

Press the RESET button

An error is detected
Programming
MODE : Operation Switch
Error ?
SYSTEM : System Administration Device
Selection Switch
No error
END On-line mode

2-F-6
(Example) The following flow chart shows the operation sequence for System
Starting Up with default values using Panasonic KX-D4930 in VT mode.

START

MODE=5
SYSTEM=2

Power ON reset or Press

the RESET button

Confirm the
Initial screen

MODE=0
SYSTEM=2

Press the RESET button

MODE : Operation Switch

SYSTEM : System Administration Device
END Selection Switch

* To start up the system using Panasonic KX-D4930 in Dumb mode, set

SYSTEM switch to “3” in above sequence.

2-F-7
 Section 3

System Features and Operation

 (Section 3)

System Features and Operation

Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 3-A-1

B Basic Features................................................................................................. 3-B-1

1.00 Flexible Numbering................................................................................ 3-B-1

2.00 Directory Number (DN).......................................................................... 3-B-5
3.00 Floating Directory Number (FDN).......................................................... 3-B-6
4.00 Tenant Service....................................................................................... 3-B-7
5.00 Operator................................................................................................. 3-B-8
6.00 Class of Service (COS).......................................................................... 3-B-10
7.00 Group..................................................................................................... 3-B-11
7.01 Intercom Group............................................................................ 3-B-11
7.02 Call Pickup Group........................................................................ 3-B-12
7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group........................................ 3-B-12
7.04 Paging Group.............................................................................. 3-B-13
7.05 Trunk Group ................................................................................ 3-B-13
8.00 Night Service ......................................................................................... 3-B-14
8.01 Directed Night Answer................................................................. 3-B-15
8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA).................................................... 3-B-16
8.03 Flexible Night Service.................................................................. 3-B-17
8.04 Fixed Night Service..................................................................... 3-B-17-1
8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode...................................................... 3-B-18
9.00 Mixed Station Capacities....................................................................... 3-B-19
10.00 Variable Time-Out.................................................................................. 3-B-20
11.00 Lockout.................................................................................................. 3-B-21
12.00 Automatic Station Release .................................................................... 3-B-21
13.00 Distinctive Dial Tone .............................................................................. 3-B-22
14.00 Distinctive Busy Tone............................................................................. 3-B-23
15.00 Confirmation Tone.................................................................................. 3-B-24
16.00 Tone and Ringing Patterns .................................................................... 3-B-25

C Outgoing Call Features.................................................................................... 3-C-1

1.00 Toll Restriction (for U.S.A. and Canada)................................................ 3-C-1

1.01 Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access ................................ 3-C-2
1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System...... 3-C-5
1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access............................................................................... 3-C-7
1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access.... 3-C-10
1.05 Operator/International Call Restriction ........................................ 3-C-13
1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction............................................................... 3-C-15
1.07 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction............................................................. 3-C-20
1.00 Toll Restriction (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)..................... 3-C-20-1
1.08 Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access ................................ 3-C-20-2
1.09 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct Trunk Access........................................................ 3-C-20-4

3-1
(60395)
 Page
1.10 7 Digit Toll Restriction.................................................................. 3-C-20-6
1.11 Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System
(for New Zealand)........................................................................ 3-C-20-7
2.00 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)......................................................... 3-C-21
2.01 ARS (for U.S.A. and canada)...................................................... 3-C-21
2.02 ARS (for New Zealand) ............................................................... 3-C-35-1
3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion ........................................................................ 3-C-36
4.00 Automatic Pause Insertion ................................................................... 3-C-37

D Receiving Features.......................................................................................... 3-D-1

1.00 Attendant Console (ATT) Operation ...................................................... 3-D-1
1.01 Load Sharing............................................................................... 3-D-2-1
1.02 Simultaneous Ringing.................................................................. 3-D-2-2
1.03 Interconsole IRNA....................................................................... 3-D-2-3
2.00 Attendant Console-less Operation ........................................................ 3-D-3
2.01 Direct In Line (DIL) ...................................................................... 3-D-3
2.02 Direct Inward System Access (DISA).......................................... 3-D-4
2.03 Direct Inward Dialing (DID).......................................................... 3-D-7
2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service............... 3-D-8
2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-General..................................... 3-D-9
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with/without OGM..................... 3-D-11
2.07 Private CO (PCO)........................................................................ 3-D-15
2.08 Single CO (SCO)......................................................................... 3-D-16
2.09 Group CO (GCO)......................................................................... 3-D-17
2.10 Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment .................................................. 3-D-17-1
2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment........................................................... 3-D-17-3
3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment ................................................................ 3-D-18
3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment-No Ringing.................................... 3-D-18
3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment-Delayed Ringing ........................... 3-D-18
4.00 Discriminating Ringing........................................................................... 3-D-19
5.00 Station Hunting ..................................................................................... 3-D-20
5.01 Station Hunting-Circular .............................................................. 3-D-20
5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal............................................................. 3-D-21

E Holding Features.............................................................................................. 3-E-1

1.00 Music on Hold (for U.S.A. and Canada) ............................................... 3-E-1
1.00 Music on Hold (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) .................... 3-E-1-1
2.00 Held Call Reminder................................................................................ 3-E-2
3.00 Transfer Recall ..................................................................................... 3-E-3

F Other Features................................................................................................. 3-F-1

1.00 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .......................................... 3-F-1
2.00 Off Premise Extension (OPX)................................................................ 3-F-3
3.00 Walking Station...................................................................................... 3-F-3
4.00 Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ...................... 3-F-5
5.00 Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)..................................................... 3-F-8
3-2
(70695)
 Page
6.00 Rerouting............................................................................................... 3-F-9
7.00 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ....................................... 3-F-10
8.00 CO Busy Out.......................................................................................... 3-F-11
9.00 Parallel Connection of Extensions......................................................... 3-F-12
10.00 Voice Processing System (VPS)............................................................ 3-F-13
10.01 Voice Mail Integration................................................................ 3-F-15
10.02 DTMF-Tone Integration ............................................................. 3-F-21
11.00 Call Accounting Summary ..................................................................... 3-F-52
12.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone................................................................. 3-F-62
13.00 Timed Reminder with OGM (Wake-up Call) .......................................... 3-F-64
14.00 TIE Lines................................................................................................ 3-F-67
14.01 Calling from TIE to TIE.............................................................. 3-F-72
14.02 Calling from TIE to CO .............................................................. 3-F-76
14.03 Calling from CO to TIE .............................................................. 3-F-79
14.04 Alternate Routing....................................................................... 3-F-81
14.05 TIE Caller ID Identification (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) ....... 3-F-84
15.00 T-1 Carrier.............................................................................................. 3-F-85
16.00 E-1 Carrier (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) .......................... 3-F-87
17.00 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) .................................................. 3-F-90
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
18.00 Limited Call Duration ............................................................................. 3-F-92
19.00 Charge Management............................................................................. 3-F-93
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
19.01 Budget Management................................................................. 3-F-93
19.02 Charge Fee Reference.............................................................. 3-F-94

3-3
(70695)
A. Preparation
This section provides the basic information on
each of the system features which are
programmed at system level.
System features are those that affect the entire
operation of the system.
In this section, system features are divided into
the following five categories.

• Basic Features
• Outgoing Call Features
• Receiving Features
• Holding Features
• Other Features

3-A-1
B. Basic Features
1.00 Flexible Numbering
Description
This system comes with a variety of services,
and the feature numbers used when executing
these services can be set as required.
Feature numbers can be from one to four digits,
utilizing numbers “0” through “9” as well as “* ”
and “#.”
Directory Numbers (DN) can be three or four
digits in length, and it is acceptable for some to
have three digits and others four digits.
When three-digit DN's are used, any number can
be set as the initial digit; when four-digit DN's are
used, any numbers can be set as the initial two
digits.
The feature numbers are set in the “System-
Numbering Plan” screens.
Two default parameters sets are provided for the
feature numbers and when either is used in its
original form, the Numbering Plan option in the
“System-Operation” screen is set to “Fixed 1” or
“Fixed 2.”
In this case, the settings cannot be changed in
the “System-Numbering Plan” screen. When a
feature number is to be changed, select Flex in
the “System-Operation”, Numbering Plan before
making the change in the “System-Numbering
Plan.”
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Numbering Plan
“System-Numbering Plan” 9-D-6.01 10-C-10.00
to 6.09
3-B-1
Conditions
The followings are examples of feature number
conflicts:
Examples: 2 and 21, 32 and 321, etc.
Conversely, the following numbers can be used
without conflict:
Examples: 2 and 3, 3 and 41, 41 and 42, 450
and 451, etc.
“* ” and “#” cannot be used for extension
numbers (extension blocks).
When “* ” and “#” are included in a feature
number, it will not be possible to execute the
corresponding feature using a dial pulse type of
Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Only “0”, “1” to “9”, “* ” and “#” are valid for
entering feature numbers into One Touch dial
buttons.
When “FLASH”, “-” ,“PAUSE” and “SECRET” are
included into feature numbers, reorder tone is
sent and the features cannot be executed.
“#” cannot be used for the feature numbers listed
below, for those features require “#” as a
delimiter when setting the feature:
“Call Forwarding-to Trunk”
“Pickup Dialing Programming”
“Speed Dialing-Station”
The feature numbers which have been set in the
“System-Numbering Plan” screens can be used
when dial tone is heard. However, feature
number for “Account Code” may be used at times
other than when dial tone is heard.
In addition to the feature numbers which can be
set in “System-Numbering Plan,” fixed feature
numbers are provided and these are shown in
the following table.

Fixed Feature Numbers

Function Number

While busy tone is heard

Call-back (for extensions only) 6
Busy Override 1

While Do Not Disturb tone is heard

DND Override 1

When handset is on-hook (PITS only)

Time display/date display switching *
Background music on/off 1
Day/Night mode display #

While talking to doorphone

Open the door 5

Others
Extension time and data display mode
switching *
Account code delimiter #
Account code delimiter (for dial pulse type 99
SLT only)
Account code re-input *

• The feature numbers which are set in the

“System-Numbering Plan” are listed on the
following pages.

3-B-2
 Flexible Feature Numbers

Function Default
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
1st Hundred Block Extension 1 1
2nd Hundred Block Extension 2 2
3rd Hundred Block Extension 3 3
4th Hundred Block Extension — —
5th Hundred Block Extension — —
6th Hundred Block Extension — —
7th Hundred Block Extension — —
8th Hundred Block Extension — —
9th Hundred Block Extension — —
10th Hundred Block Extension — —
11th Hundred Block Extension — —
12h Hundred Block Extension — —
13th Hundred Block Extension — —
14th Hundred Block Extension — —
15th Hundred Block Extension — —
16th Hundred Block Extension — —
Operator Call (General) 0 0
Operator Call (Specific) — —
ARS/Local CO Line Access 9 9
Trunk Group 01-08 Access 81 81
Trunk Group 09-16 Access 82 82
Trunk Group 17-24 Access * 83 83
Speed Dialing - System 1 6 1
Speed Dialing - Station 2 6 2
Doorphone Call (1-4) 40 640
External Paging 41 641
Station Paging 42 642
External Paging Answer 43 643
Station Paging Answer 44 644
Night Answer 1 45 645
Night Answer 2 46 646
Dial Call Pickup 47 647
Directed Call Pickup 48 648
Hold Extension Retrieve 49 649
Redial 3 6 3
External Feature Access 50 650
Account Code # #
Hold 51 651
Hold Retrieve 52 652
Call Park-System 53 653
Call Park Retrieve - System 54 654
Call Park - Station 55 655
Call Park Retrieve - Station 56 656
Call Forwarding - All Call Set 2 2
Call Forwarding - Busy Set 3 3
Call Forwarding - No Answer Set 4 4
Call Forwarding - to Trunk 5 5
Call Forwarding - Busy/No Answer 6 6
Do Not Disturb Set 1 1
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel ##0 ##0
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set 61 61
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 61# 61#
* (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
3-B-3
(70695)
 Flexible Feature Numbers

Function Default
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Call Waiting Set 62 62
Call Waiting Cancel 62# 62#
BSS/OHCA Deny Set 63 63
BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel 63# 63#
Busy Override Deny Set 64 64
Busy Override Deny Cancel 64# 64#
Data Line Security Set 65 65
Data Line Security Cancel 65# 65#
Pickup Dialing Programming 660 660
Pickup Dialing Set 66 66
Pickup Dialing Cancel 66# 66#
Absent Message Set 4 6 4
Absent Message Cancel #4 6#4
Timed Reminder Confirm 50 50
Timed Reminder Set 51 51
Timed Reminder Cancel #5 #50
Voice Calling Mode Set 67 67
Voice Calling Mode Cancel 67# 67#
Voice Calling Deny Set 68 68
Voice Calling Deny Cancel 68# 68#
Speed Dialing - Station Programming 6 6 5
Station Lock Set 6 6 6
Station Lock Cancel #6 6#6
Walking COS Set 7 6 7
Walking COS Cancel #7 6#7
Walking Station Set 8 6 8
Walking Station Cancel #8 6#8
Message Set 9 6 9
Message Cancel #9 6#9
Station Program Clear ### ###
Message Waiting Reply 57 657
TIE Trunk Access 84 7
Night Mode Set 70 69
Night Mode Cancel 70# 69#
Night Service Manual Mode Set 71 51
Night Service Manual Mode Cancel 71# 51#
Flexible Night Service 72 520
Remote Station Lock Set 73 53
Remote Station Lock Cancel 73# 53#
Remote DND Set 74 54
Remote DND Cancel 74# 54#
Remote FWD Cancel 75 675
Remote FWD Cancel - One Time 76 676
BGM Through External Pager 77 677
Busy Out Trunk 78 57
Unbusy Trunk 78# 57#
OGM Record 791 691
OGM Playback 792 692
UCD Log In 0 6 0
UCD Log Out #0 6#0
Remote Timed Reminder Confirm 7 0 5 0
Remote Timed Reminder Set 7 1 5 1
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel 7# 50#
3-B-4
(70695)
 Flexible Feature Numbers
Function
Fixed 1
Call Forwarding - Follow Me Set
Call Forwarding - Follow Me Cancel
Other PBX Extension 01
Other PBX Extension 02
Other PBX Extension 03
Other PBX Extension 04
Other PBX Extension 05
Other PBX Extension 06
Other PBX Extension 07
Other PBX Extension 08
Other PBX Extension 09
Other PBX Extension 10
Other PBX Extension 11
Other PBX Extension 12
Other PBX Extension 13
Other PBX Extension 14
Other PBX Extension 15
Other PBX Extension 16
Transfer
Conference
Default
Fixed 2
7 7
8 8
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
58 58
59 59
3-B-4-1
(70695)
2.00 Directory Number (DN)
Description <Example>
Directory numbers are the software type logical System-Numbering Plan
numbers which are programmed to match the
Numbering Plan (01/11)
hardware type physical numbers (port numbers)
attached to ports of extensions. No. Feature DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4
Accordingly, directory numbers are extension 1 1st Hundred Block Extension 5 - -
numbers.
2 2nd Hundred Block Extension 6 - -
Directory numbers are assigned in “Configuration- 3 3rd Hundred Block Extension 7 0 - -
DN Assignment” to be three or four digits.
4 4th Hundred Block Extension 8 0 - -
Only numeric characters “0 to 9” can be used as a
Directory Number.
DNs from 8000 to 8099 are assignable.
Directory number setting follows the setting in DNs from 7000 to 7099 are assignable.
“System-Numbering Plan”, 1st Hundred Block
DNs from 600 to 699 are assignable.
Extension through 16th Hundred Block Extension.
DNs from 500 to 599 are assignable.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Configuration-DN Assignment” 9-C-3.00 10-C-3.00

“System-Numbering Plan”, 9-D-6.01 10-C-10.00
1st Hundred Block Extension 9-D-6.02
•
•
•
16th Hundred Block Extension

Conditions
There are two types of directory numbers: the
Primary Directory Number (PDN) and the
Secondary Directory Number (SDN).
For further details of PDN, refer to Section 4-B-3.01
“PDN Button.” For SDN, refer to Section 4-B-3.02
“SDN Button.”

If you assign only one digit in “System-Numbering

Plan”, 1st Hundred Block Extension through 16th
Hundred Block Extension, you can assign three-
digit DNs which start with the pre-assigned digit in
“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

If you assign leading two digits in “System-

Numbering Plan,” you can assign four-digit DNs
which start with the pre-assigned two digits in
“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

3-B-5
(70695)
3.00 Floating Directory Number
(FDN)
Description
It is possible to assign virtual directory numbers
to resources and make them appear to be
extensions. Those directory numbers are
defined as Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).
Conditions
FDN setting must follow the assignment of
“System-Numbering Plan”, 1st Hundred Block
Extension through 16th Hundred Block
Extension, as well as DN setting.

For example, if an operator receives an incoming

CO call for Remote Administration, the operator
can transfer the call to Remote Administration
resource using the FDN, in the same way as if
the operator transfers an incoming CO call to an
extension, that is, if the operator is PITS, by
pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the
FDN.

FDN can be assigned to the following:

1. Pilot number for UCD groups 01 to 32

2. General Operator Call (two FDN's can be
programmed)
3. Attendant Console number (ATT1, ATT2)
4. Remote Administration resource

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Special Attended-UCD (1/2)”, 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00

FDN
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
FDN for General Operator Call
“System-Operation (2/3)”, 9-D-1.02
Remote Directory Number
“Extension-Attendant Console 9-G-4.01 10-C-28.00
(1/2)”, DN

3-B-6
4.00 Tenant Service
Description
A single system can be used as if two systems To enable Tenant Service, set “System-
were available. Operation”, Tenant Service to “Yes.”
This enables the configuration of two systems “System-Tenant”, programming is used to
which, in each case, are suited to a different determine how the resources will be divided up
customer. between the tenants.

System Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Tenant 1 Tenant 2
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
(Customer 1) (Customer 2) Tenant Service
“System-Tenant” 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00

Some of resources can be divided up between

the tenants and others are used in common. Conditions
A list of resources in each classification is given The Night Mode can be operated separately for
below. each tenant.

[Resources which can be divided up] Calling to extensions in the other tenant can be
• Trunk Groups enabled by setting “System-Tenant”, Inter-Tenant
• Attendant Consoles Calling to “Yes.”
• Extensions However, even when this function has been set
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA) to “Yes,” it is not possible to call the Attendant
• Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Console in the other tenant.
• Number of Speed Dialing-System
• External pagers
• Doorphones
• Background Music or Music on Hold
• Number of Call Park-System parking zones
• Number of Flexible Absent Messages
• Number of possible Message Waiting
entries
• Passwords (Walking COS, PITS System
Programming)

[Common resources]
• Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
• Numbering Plan
• Remote operation control
• Class of Service (COS)
• Administration Device
• Toll restriction tables

3-B-7
5.00 Operator
Description
The system allows the operator to answer, (When one attendant console is connected)
monitor and control the incoming calls.
Operator 1 ATT ATT
Up to two operators (operator 1 and 2) can be
or
assigned in the system.
Operator 2 extension
The Operator 1 and 2 can perform several
special functions listed in the table below.
If tenant service is employed, up to two operators (When two attendant consoles are connected)
can be assigned to each tenant individually.
Not only the ATT (attendant console) operator but Operator 1 ATT
the extension user can be assigned as an
operator. Operator 2 ATT
“Operator 1” must always be selected when only
one operator is assigned.
The operator assignment can be done in the
If an attendant console is connected to the
system programming “System-Operation (3/3),”
system, the operator assignment should be
Operator 1 and Operator 2.
arranged as follows.

Special functions available with each operator.

Operator 1 Operator 1 Operator 2

Feature (ATT) (Extension) (ATT or
Extension)
1 Change Night/Day Mode
2 Change Night/Day Switching Mode (Auto/Man)
3 Set Destination in the Night Mode
(Only for Flexible Night Answer Trunk)
4 Pickup Group Station Lock/Unlock
5 Electronic Station Lock Out/Unlock (to Other Stations)
6 DND Set/Cancel (to Other Stations)
7 FWD Cancel (to Other Stations)
8 One-time FWD Cancel (to Other Stations)
9 External BGM On/Off
10 Manual Trunk Busy-Out Setting
11 CO Access Control
12 OGM Record/Playback
13 Transfer to Internal Modem * 1
(For Remote Maintenance)
14 Local Alarm Indication
15 Remote Timed Reminder *2 *2

* 1 Available with any extension user from software version 9.XX and above. : available
* 2 In case of an extension, only a PITS with display is available. : not available

3-B-8
(50195)
Programming • Invalid Operator Assignment
Reference The following arrangement is invalid in the
System Programming
VT Dumb operator assignment whether tenant service is
employed or not.
“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-5.00
Operator 1
Operator 2 Operator 1 — — extension
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Operator 1 (Tenant 2) Operator 2 ATT extension ATT
Operator 2 (Tenant 2)

Conditions • Operator Call

The extension user can call the operator in the
• Tenant Service system by dialing the feature number for
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and “Operator Call (General)” or “Operator Call
2) can have unique operator assignment (Specific).”
individually, that is, up to four operators can be For further information, refer to the following:
assigned to the system. (PITS users)
In this case, the operator assignment should be Section 4-C-10.00 “Operator Call”
arranged as follows.
(SLT users)
Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Section 5-A-8.00 “Operator Call.”

Operator 1 ATT ATT • Transfer

The extension user can transfer a call to the
Operator 2 extension extension operators (Attendant Console or Extension) by
both screened and unscreened call transfers.
or For further information, refer to the following.

Operator 1 ATT extension (PITS users)

Section 4-F-1.01 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Operator 2 ATT extension Station”
Section 4-F-1.02 “Screened Call Transfer to
or Station”
Section 4-F-1.06 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Attendant Console”
Operator 1 ATT extension
(SLT users)
Operator 2 Section 5-D-1.01 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Station”
Section 5-D-1.02 “Screened Call Transfer to
The operator assignment can be done in the Station”
system programming as follows. Section 5-D-1.04 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
(Tenant 1) Attendant Console”
“System-Operation (3/3)”, Operator 1 and
Operator 2. • Hold
(Tenant 2) The extension user cannot hold a call with an
“System-Tenant”, Operator 1 and Operator 2. attendant console operator.

3-B-9
(30393)
6.00 Class of Service (COS)
Description 16) Trunk groups available for an outgoing CO
call when the outgoing call is made by
The functions executed by the extensions users
specifying a trunk group. This setting is not
can be restricted by the COS No. assigned for
valid for one-touch CO line outgoing calls,
each extension user.
outgoing calls by specifying a Virtual Trunk
A total of 32 classes of service are available.
Group, and local CO line outgoing calls
A Class of Service is assigned to every extension
including Automatic Route Selection calls.
in “Extension-Station”, Class of Service. The
17) Special carrier access-enable/disable
available options are set in “System-Class of
(Setting of accessible carrier when outgoing
Service”.
calls are made by specifying Virtual Trunk
Group)
Programming
18) Setting of accessible paging group with
Reference station paging
System Programming
VT Dumb 19) Setting of accessible external pager with
“System-Class of Service” 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
external paging
9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
“Extension-Station”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Class of Service

Conditions
A list of the items which can be set in "System-
Class of Service" are given below:

1) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode)

2) Outgoing call restriction level (Night mode)
3) Maximum number of digits allowed for a CO
call
4) The ability to allow or deny Call Forwarding
and Do Not Disturb
5) The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the
called station
6) The ability to forward or transfer a call to an
outside party.
7) Forced account code operation-enable/disable
8) BSS/OHCA override operation-enable/disable
9) BSS/OHCA deny-enable/disable
10) Executive Busy Override of called party-
enable/disable
11) Executive Busy Override deny-enable/disable
12) Electronic Station Lock Out/Walking COS-
enable/disable
13) Walking Station-enable/disable
14) The ability to perform PITS System
Programming-enable/disable
15) ARS/Local toll restriction-with restriction/no
restriction/no access

3-B-10
7.00 Group
7.01 Intercom Group
Description
Each extension is assigned to an intercom group
(1 to 8). The extension users in the same intercom
group can call each other by dialing the intercom
number (one or two digits) using ICM button on a
PITS telephone. It is also possible to make an
intercom call by dialing “*” and the directory
number (three or four digits).
Refer to Section 4-C-5.02 “Intercom Calling” for
further information.
Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each intercom group is determined by the
programming in “Group-ICM/Paging Group”
screen.
There is no limit on the number of extensions that
each Intercom Group can include, but an
extension user can be assigned to only one
Intercom Group.

The intercom group affiliation of each extension
user is determined in the “Extension-Station”, ICM
Group and the intercom numbers are set by
“Extension-Station”, Intercom Number.
All extensions (PITS and SLT) must belong to one
of eight intercom groups.
Intercom numbers are composed of one or two
digits. This means that there are a maximum of
100 intercom numbers (00 through 99) per
intercom group.
Extensions belonging to different intercom
groups can have the same intercom number.

Since intercom numbers cannot be given to SLT, it

is only possible to call these telephones by using
their directory numbers. Also, since SLTs are not
provided with ICM buttons they can only call PITS
using the directory numbers.

The relationship between intercom groups and

paging groups is determined by programming the
“Group-Call Pickup Group” screen.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-ICM/Paging Group” 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00

“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
ICM
“Extension-Station”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Intercom Number
ICM Group

3-B-11
(50195)
7.02 Call Pickup Group 7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description Group
Extensions belonging to a particular intercom Description
group can be divided into call pickup groups It is possible to execute UCD functions in a group
which can execute the Dial Call Pickup feature. composed of one or more Call Pickup Groups.
The call pickup group belonging to an intercom Such a group is called a UCD group.
group is set by programming in the “Group-Call The “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen
Pickup Group”, ICM. determines which pickup group(s) will be in the
UCD group.
Up to 32 call pickup groups can be assigned in Up to 32 UCD groups can be assigned in the
the system. system.
Extensions programmed into call pickup groups The UCD group and the call pickup group
are set in the “Extension-Station”, Pickup Group. configuring the UCD group must belong to the
It is not necessary for all extensions to be in a same intercom group.
pickup group. See Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call Distribution
See Section 4-D-3.01 “Dial Call Pickup” for (UCD)-without OGM” and Section 3-D-2.06
further information about the Dial Call Pickup “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with OGM” for
feature. further information about the UCD functions.
See the previous Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup
Programming Group” for details on Call Pickup Groups.
Reference See Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for
System Programming
VT Dumb further information about ICM Groups.
“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
ICM Programming
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 Reference
Pickup Group System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00

UCD
Conditions
Different call pickup groups can have the same
UCD and/or paging groups. Conditions
None
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for details
on Paging Groups.
See the following Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) Group” for details on UCD
Groups.

3-B-12
7.04 Paging Group 7.05 Trunk Group
Description Description
It is possible to execute paging functions in a To support efficient utilization of trunks, they can
group composed of one or more pickup groups. be grouped together (up to 16 groups) if all
Such a group is called a “Paging Group.” trunks in the group perform the same function.
The following six kinds of trunk groups can be
Up to eight paging groups can be assigned in the assigned in the system.
system. The items listed below are set in the “Group-
When Tenant Service is employed, the “Group- Trunk Group” screen.
ICM/Paging Group” screen sets which tenant the
paging group belongs to. (a) Trunk group type
The “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen sets (b) Trunk group name
which pickup group(s) make up a paging group. (c) Tenant selection
(d) Trunk group direction
Programming (e) Incoming destination (Day)
Reference
(f) Incoming destination (Night)
System Programming (g) Intercept Routing (Day)
VT Dumb
(h) Intercept Routing (Night)
“Group-ICM/Paging Group”, 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00 (i) Toll restriction level
Paging Group-Tenant (j) Toll restriction table
“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
(k) Dialing plan selection
PAG
(l) Disconnect time selection
(m) Pause time selection
(n) Hookswitch flash time selection
Conditions
(o) DID digit modification table selection
If tenant service is employed, pickup groups (p) Entry of PBX access code (No restriction)
which can be used to configure a paging group (q) Entry of PBX access code (Restriction)
are limited within the same tenant. (r) Restriction time on CO-CO calls
See Section 4-H-1.00 “Paging” for further (s) DIL (I:N) destination
information about paging features. (t) Maximum number of digits after External
Feature Access
(u) CO-TIE Restriction
(v) TIE-CO Restriction
(w) TIE Forced Account Mode
(x) TIE Incoming Delete Digit
(y) TIE Incoming Insert Dial

The “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group determines

which trunk group the CO line belongs to.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group” 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00

Conditions
A single CO line cannot belong to more than one
trunk group.

3-B-13
(70695)
8.00 Night Service
Description
Special arrangements are required to handle 2. Treatment of other calls in night mode
attendant-seeking incoming CO calls during period
DID and PCO calls are not assignable to Night
when the operator at Attendant Console is not
Service.
available, for example at night and on weekends.
A DID call will ring at the appropriate extension
Attendant-seeking incoming CO calls will be
and PCO call will ring at designated extension
redirected to the designated extension and/or a
regardless of Day/Night mode.
group of extensions (Directed Night Answer)or will
ring an external pager (Universal Night Answer) in The following list shows the relationship
night mode. between Incoming Mode (Day) and assignable
Incoming Mode (Night) of the Trunk Group.
1. Treatment of attendant-seeking incoming CO
Incoming Mode (Day) Incoming Mode (Night)
calls in night mode
ATT FIXED
(Directed Night Answer)
FLEXIBLE
Used to redirect incoming attendant-seeking CO DISA
calls to the designated extension or a group of
extensions automatically in night mode.
Incoming Mode (Day) Incoming Mode (Night)
(Universal Night Answer (UNA))
Allows any extension user in the system to DISA Day Mode
answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls FIXED
DIL 1: 1
ringing at an external pager, by dialing the FLEXIBLE
feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.” DIL 1: N DISA

Note:Incoming attendant-seeking CO calls can TAFAS (1/2)

be redirected to the Remote Maintenance
Resource for the System Administration.
Night Answer Destination can be administered
either by fixed mode (Fixed Night Service) or
flexible mode (Flexible Night Service).
(Flexible Night Service)
Allows the Operator 1 to change the pre-
assigned night answer destination.
(Fixed Night Service)
The Operator 1 cannot change the pre-assigned
night answer destination.
Only the system administrator can change the
pre-assigned night answer destination.
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
is almost the same.
The difference is:
To continue the same Incoming Mode for a
trunk group both in Day and Night, set
“Incoming Mode (Night)” to Day Mode.
(Note)
If Incoming Mode (Day) of a trunk group is set
to ATT, Day Mode can not be selected for
Incoming Mode (Night).
The following calls directed to the Attendant
Console in day mode can be redirected to the
designated extension in night mode.
DPH, DID, DISA and Extension calls
To utilize this redirection, assign desired
extension number in “Extension-Attendant
Console” Night.

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

or Extension) can change the night
answer destination.
Fixed A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode

3-B-14
(30393)
 8.01 Directed Night Answer
3. Switching of Day/Night Mode Description
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either Used to redirect incoming attendant-seeking CO
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually calls to the designated extension or a group of
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or extensions (Night Answer Group) automatically in
Extension User) at any time desired. night mode.
(Automatic Switching) To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
The system will switch the day and night modes Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
at the programmed time automatically each day. and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to EXT:
xxxx or NAG (Night Answer Group).
(Manual Switching)
Operator 1 can switch the Day/Night mode at
desired time. Night Answer Group
A single group of extensions (called the Night
(Supplement)
Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at
The following programming items may be night.
assigned in a different way between day mode Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at
and night mode. this group.
• “System-Class of Service” The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.
Toll Restriction Level (Day)
Toll Restriction Level (Night) CO1 CO2 CO3
(Refer to Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of
Service (1/2).”)
• “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Day) Night Answer Group
Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
(Refer to Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group To utilize this feature, program as follows.
(1/2).”) 1. Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode
• “Extension-Station” (Night) to “FIXED.”
Day Ring 2. Assign “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to
Night Ring “NAG.”
(Refer to Section 9-G-1.02 “Station (2/3).”) This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to
FIXED.
3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions
by using NAG command.

3-B-15
(30393)
 8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Programming Description
Reference Allows any extension user in the system to
System Programming
VT Dumb answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls
ringing at an external pager, by dialing the
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.”
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00 To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Night Answer Point Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
“Night Answer Group (NAG)” — 10-C-59.00
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Conditions Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. All CO lines belonging to this trunk
1. IRNA and Rerouting group are covered by this assignment.
If an incoming CO call directed to a single
extension is not answered within a specified External pager must be connected to the system
time period, the caller will receive Rerouting beforehand.
or IRNA treatment. Up to two external pagers can be connected to
For further information, refer to Section 3-F- the system.
5.00 “Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)” To answer calls ringing at external pager 1, dial
and Section 3-F-6.00 “Rerouting.” the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to
answer calls ringing at external pager 2, dial the
2. Remote Administration feature number for “Night Answer 2.”
To execute the system administration from a For further information about external pager
remote location at night, select “RMT” for assignment, refer to Section 4-H-1.03 “Paging
“Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point External Pagers.”
assignment.
For further information about remote Programming
administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Location.”
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
3. Tenant Service Incoming Mode (Night)
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
and 2) can have unique Night Service Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
arrangement individually.
(03/11)”,
In this case, Night Service assignment for
Night Answer 1
tenant 1 is determined by the system Night Answer 2
programming “System-Operation” and Night
Service assignment for tenant 2 is determined
by the system programming “System-Tenant.”

3-B-16
(70695)
 8.03 Flexible Night Service
Conditions Description
1. UNA and TAFAS Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1
Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. (Attendant Console or Extension user) to change
The difference is that TAFAS is available in the assigned night answer destination on a CO
day mode and UNA is available in night line basis by dialing the feature number for
mode. “Flexible Night Service.”
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”
lines which belong to this trunk group are
covered by this assignment.
2. IRNA and Rerouting
If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the
If incoming CO calls are not answered for any
assigned night answer destination can not be
reason within a specified time period, the
changed by the Operator 1.
caller will receive Rerouting or IRNA
treatment. Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
For further information, refer to section 3-F- is almost the same.
6.00 “Rerouting” and Section 3-F-5.00 The difference is:
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
3. Remote Administration or Extension) can change the night
To execute the system administration from a answer destination.
remote location at night, select “RMT” for
“Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point Fixed A group of extensions (Night
assignment. Answer Group) can be assigned as
For further information about remote the destination of one or more CO
administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00 lines in night mode
“System Administration from a Remote
Location.”
Programming
4. Tenant Service Reference
System Programming
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 VT Dumb
and 2) can have a unique Night Service
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
arrangement individually. Incoming Mode (Night)
The affiliation of each external pager is “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
determined by the system programming in Night Answer Point
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External “System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
Pager- Tenant. (08/11)”, Flexible Night Service
Extension users cannot answer the UNA calls
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant. Conditions
Tenant Service
Operation If tenant service is employed, the night answer
Refer to the following: destination for a CO line can only be changed by
the Operator 1 in the same tenant.
(PITS) Section 4-I-1.01 “Universal Night
Answer (UNA)” Operation
(SLT) Section 5-G-1.01 “Universal Night For the operation of changing the Night Answer
Answer (UNA)” destination, refer to the following:
(PITS) Section 4-I-1.02 “Flexible Night Service”
(SLT) Section 5-G-1.02 “Flexible Night Service”
(ATT) Section 6-J-1.01 “Flexible Night Service”

3-B-17
(70695)
8.04 Fixed Night Service
Description Programming
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service is Reference
System Programming
almost the same. VT Dumb

The difference is: “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Incoming Mode (Night)
Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
or Extension) can change the night Night Answer Point
“Night Answer Group (NAG)” — 10-C-59.00
answer destination.
Fixed A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as Conditions
the destination of one or more CO
None
lines in night mode
Operation
If FIXED is selected, the assigned night answer None
destination can not be changed by the Operator 1.
To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to “FIXED.” All CO lines
belong to this trunk group are covered by this
assignment.

Night Answer Group

A single group of extensions (called the Night
Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at
night.
Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at
this group.
The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.

CO1 CO2 CO3

Night Answer Group

To utilize this feature, program as follows.

1. Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode
(Night) to “FIXED.”
2. Assign “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to
“NAG.”
This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to
FIXED.
3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions by
using NAG command.

3-B-17-1
(30393)
8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode
Description
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or
Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the
Operator 1 must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode
Cancel” for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system
will switch the day and night modes at the
programmed time each day.
To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and
assign desired mode switching time to “Auto
Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”
The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode can be
established, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the
Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
Conditions
If Auto Start Time on a certain day is not
assigned, the current mode is continued until a
new start time is encountered.
If the Start Time for Day mode and Night mode
on the same day are set identically, the current
mode is continued.
If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
at all, the current mode is continued. In other
words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
then Night Mode is continued.
Operation
Refer to the following:
(PITS) Section 4-I-1.03 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”
(SLT) Section 5-G-1.03 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”
(ATT) Section 6-J-1.02 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”

If tenant service is employed, night service

assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
The assignment in “System-Operation (3/3)” is
applied to Tenant 1 and the assignment in
“System-Tenant” is applied to Tenant 2.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-4.00

Night Service
Auto Start Time
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
(08/11)”,
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual Mode
Set
Night Service Manual Mode
Cancel

3-B-18
(70695)
9.00 Mixed Station Capacities
Description Programming
The KX-T336 System supports a wide range of Reference
System Programming
telephone sets, not only PITS (Proprietary VT Dumb
Integrated Telephone System) telephones but “Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
also Standard Rotary telephones (10 pps/20 pps)
and Standard Push-button telephones.
Conditions
The PITS telephones can be categorized as
follows: None

KX-T308 system : KX-T30820

KX-T30830
KX-T30850

KX-T616 system : KX-T61620

KX-T61630
KX-T61650

KX-T1232 system: KX-T123220

KX-T123230
KX-T123230D
KX-T123235
KX-T123250

KX-T7000 series : KX-T7020

KX-T7030
KX-T7050
KX-T7130

Hybrid Line Circuits (HLC) card or Proprietary

ITS Line Circuits (PLC) card are required for
PITS telephones. Hybrid Line Circuits (HLC) card
or Single Line Circuits (SLC) card are required
for single line telephones.
The “Configuration-Slot Assignment” screen
defines which card is installed in which slot.

3-B-19
10.00 Variable Time-Out
Description Programming
The timer values listed below can be set and Reference
System Programming
changed in system programming. VT Dumb
Common system timer values are set by the “System-System Timer” 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
“System–System Timer” screen and “Special “Special Attended-DISA”, 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
Attendant–DISA” screen. The timer values used Delayed Answer
with each trunk group are set by the “Group- Prolong Time
Trunk Group” screen and the timer values used “Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
by the CO lines are set by the "Trunk–CO Line" CO-CO Duration Limit
screen. The timer values used with each Disconnect Time
extension are set by the "Extension-Station" Pause Time
Hook Switch Flash Time
screen.
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
DTMF Duration Time
System timer values: CPC Detection
<1> Held Call Reminder Wink Signal Time-Out
<2> Held Call Reminder (Attendant) “Extension-Station”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-22.00
<3> Transfer Recall Day Ring
<4> Pickup Dial Waiting Night Ring
<5> External First Digit Time-Out “World Select 1 (WS1)” — 10-C-51.00
<6> External Interdigit Time-Out Automatic Redial Retry
Interval
<7> External Interdigit Time-Out (PBX)
“World Select 2 (WS2)” — 10-C-52.00
<8> Toll Restriction Guard Time-Out First Dial Timer
<9> Call Forwarding–No Answer Time-Out First Dial Timer (DID)
<10> Intercept Routing–No Answer Time-Out
(System)
<11> Intercept Routing–No Answer Time-Out
Conditions
(DISA)
<12> Attendant Overflow Time None
<13> SMDR Duration Time
<14> TIE Interdigit Time-Out
<15> DISA Interdigit Time-Out
<16> Delayed Answer (DISA)
<17> Prolonged Time (DISA)
<18> Automatic Redial Retry Interval (WS1)
<19> First Dial Timer (WS2)
<20> First Dial Timer (DID) (WS2)

Trunk group timer values:

<1> CO-CO Duration Limit
<2> Disconnect Time
<3> Pause Time
<4> Hook Switch Flash Time

CO Line timer values:

<1> DTMF Duration Time
<2> CPC Detection Time (Incoming)
<3> Wink Singnal Time-Out

Station timer values:

<1> Delayed Ringing (Day/Night)

3-B-20
(70695)
11.00 Lockout 12.00Automatic Station Release
Description Description
If the extension user remains off-hook after the If an extension user fails to dial any digits within a
completion of a call, he or she will be specified time period after getting a line for
disconnected from the channel after hearing making a call, he or she will be disconnected
reorder tone. from the channel after hearing reorder tone.
Lockout applies to all types of calls:Extension, To get a line for making a call again, the
Intercom and CO line calls. extension user must once go on-hook and then
off-hook.
Programming
When making an outgoing CO call with either
None
PITS and SLT, the timers set by "System-System
timers", External First Digit Time-Out, External
Conditions
Interdigit Time-Out and External Interdigit Time-
If the extension user remains off-hook after the Out (PBX) are used.
completion of a CO call on which “CPC
Detection” has been set to “None,” reorder tone Programming
is not sent even if the other party, on the CO line, Reference
goes on-hook. System Programming
VT Dumb
Refer to Section 3-F-7.00 “Calling Party Control
(CPC) Signal Detection” for further information. “System-System Timer ”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
External First Digit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out
(PBX)

Conditions
This function does not work when originating an
intercom call or extension call with a PITS.

This function works in the following cases when

originating a CO line call with a PITS.

<1> When nothing has been dialed before the

External First Digit Time-Out expires. This
timer is started after CO dial tone has been
heard.
<2> When the External Interdigit Time-Out has
expired during dialing.

This function works in the following cases when

originating a call with an SLT.

<1> When the first digit was not dialed within 10

seconds after dial tone was heard.
<2> When the time between the digits being
dialed exceeds five seconds (only when
originating an extension call).

3-B-21

The following conditions apply when originating a
CO call with an SLT.
<1> When the first digit was not dialed within 10
seconds after dial tone was heard.
<2> When the five second interdigit timer expires
when dialing on a CO line.
<3> When the first digit was not dialed before the
External First Digit Timer Time-Out expires
after the CO dial tone was heard
<4> When the External Interdigit Time-Out
expires during dialing.
13.00 Distinctive Dial Tone
Description
Multiple dial tone patterns are presented to the
extension user to give some information about
selected lines, features set to the lines, etc.
There are five dial tone types, as follows:
Dial tone 1 : Normal dial tone, sounds when
calling on DN buttons.
Dial tone 2 : Sounds to request an account code
entry or DISA user code entry, or
sounds when an extension goes
off-hook after Timed Reminder.

Dial tone 3 : Sounds if the extension user has

set any of the following features:

• Do Not Disturb
• Call Forwarding
• Absent Message
• Timed Reminder
• Walking Station
• Walking COS

Dial tone 4 : Sounds if the extension user has

set UCD Log Out.

Dial tone 5 : Sounds when intercom calling (only

for PITS's).

Programming
None

Conditions
The patterns for dial tone are listed in Section 3-
B-16.00 “Tone and Ringing Patterns.”

3-B-22
14.00 Distinctive Busy Tone
Description
There are three busy tone patterns as follows:
Busy tone 1 : Normal busy tone.
Busy tone 2 : A unique busy tone which allows
users with busy tone detection
SLT’s to use Busy Override, etc,
when encountering a busy line.
Busy tone 3 : A special busy tone sent when a
trunk is busy to inform the
extension user that Automatic
Callback to Trunk will be set by
going on-hook automatically.
Conditions
If Automatic Callback to Trunk is programmed,
the function is automatically set when making an
outgoing CO call and going on-hook when
hearing busy tone.
See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic
Callback-Trunk” for details.
When the Automatic Callback to Trunk function is
enabled in system programming, special busy
tone is sent. When Automatic Callback to Trunk
is not enabled in system programming, busy tone
1 or busy tone 2 is sent. See Section 3-B-16.00
“Tone and Ringing Patterns” for the busy tone
patterns.

Busy tones 1 and 2 are not used at the same

time. Only one tone is selected by “System-
Operation”, Busy Tone.

If busy tone 2 is selected, PITS’s follow the

setting.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Busy Tone

3-B-23
15.00 Confirmation Tone
Description Confirmation tone from external pagers can be
After several operations the system confirms the selected to be sent or not in “Trunk-Pager &
success of the operation by sending a Music Source”, External Pager-Tone.
confirmation tone to the extension user.
Refer to Section 3-B-16.00 “Tone and Ringing
Multiple patterns of confirmation tone is sent Patterns” for the confirmation tone patterns.
when the following operations have been
successfully conducted: Programming
Reference
System Programming
Confirmation tone 1 : VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

When a function is set, indicates that the new Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in
setting differs from the previous setting. “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tone
Confirmation tone 2 :

When a function is set, indicates that the new Conditions

setting is identical to the previous setting. In
Dial tone is sent after confirmation tone has been
addition, the tone is sent when holding a
sent. However, if the Automatic Callback to
calling party (including Consultation Hold and
Station function has been set, reorder tone is
Call Park) or setting Call Park and when
sent after confirmation tone.
setting or releasing Message Waiting, and
setting BGM through External Pager on and
When a function is set using a PITS with the
off.
display, details of the setting appear on the
display while confirmation tone is sent.
Confirmation tone 3 :
If any operation is performed, the message on
the display will be terminated at that time.
The tone is sent when calling by OHCA,
answering by Call Pickup or by Call Hold
Retrieve-Station, or when making and
answering the paging announcement, or
when calling a doorphone or starting
conference, and so on.

Confirmation tone 4 :

The tone is sent when converting conference

into a two party call.

A setting can be made by programming “System-

Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in to
determine whether confirmation tone is to be sent
or not when two party conversation is
successfully converted into a three party
conversation (Busy Override, Conference, etc.).

3-B-24
16.00 Tone and Ringing Patterns
Description
This system offers various tone patterns and
ringing patterns, as listed below:

Tone Patterns

1 sec

Dial tone 1

Dial tone 2

Dial tone 3

Dial tone 4

Dial tone 5 (For intercom calls)

Busy tone 1

Busy tone 2

Busy tone 3

Reorder tone

Ringback tone

Do Not Disturb (DND)

tone
Confirmation tone 1

Confirmation tone 2

Confirmation tone 3

Confirmation tone 4

Warning tone
CO-CO timeout
warning tone
Held Call Reminder
15 sec
Call waiting tone

3-B-25
 Ringing Patters

1 sec

CO ringing/CO Held
Call Reminder
Extension ringing/
Extension Held Call
Reminder
Intercom ringing

Callback ringing

Timed Reminder/
Doorphone ringing

See Section 3-B-13.00 “Distinctive Dial Tone” for details of dial tone.
See Section 3-B-14.00 “Distinctive Busy Tone” for details of busy tone.
See Section 3-B-15.00 “Confirmation Tone” for details of confirmation tone.
See Section 3-D-4.00 “Discriminating Ringing.”

Programming
None

Conditions
None

3-B-26
C. Outgoing Call Features

1.00 Toll Restriction (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description The levels of extensions are assigned in “System-

Class of Service”, Toll Restriction Level (Day) and
Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature
Toll Restriction Level (Night) as below:
that, in conjunction with the assigned Class of
Service, can prohibit selected extension users
from placing unauthorized toll call. System-Class of Service OFL PRGSCR DIR
Toll Restriction types depend on the following
four ways of selecting a trunk: Class of Service (COS) No.=01(1/2)

• Local Trunk Dial Access (Refer to Section 3-C-
1.01)
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.02)
• Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (Refer to Section 3-C-1.03)
• Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.04)
Three Toll Restriction types below are common to
the above listed four methods:
• Operator/International Call Restriction
(Refer to 3-C-1.05)
• 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C-
1.06)
• 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C-
1.07)
Toll Restriction Level (Day).............. 01
Toll Restriction Level (Night)............ 02
Level of Extension
“Toll Restriction Level of Extension” is referred to
as “TRLE” in the following.
Each Toll Restriction type can set its own level
and executes restriction by comparing its own
level with TRLE.
For example, the toll restriction level for Local
Trunk Dial Access can be programmed in
“System-Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction
Level.
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

3/6 Digit Toll Restriction and 7/10 Digit Toll

Restriction are used in pairs.
Toll Restriction Level 08
Flow charts and Programming are used to
explain Toll Restriction types.
Flow chart illustrates the flow of procedures. Level of Local Access Group
Programming shows the programming
reference and the method to execute each
program for the procedures illustrated in the flow
chart. Each Programming has a number, which In the flow charts, marks such as “>” are used to
matches the numbers attached to the procedures compare TRLE and the level of each Toll
in the flow chart: <1>, <2> • • • Restriction type.
When TRLE is equal to or higher than the toll
Toll Restriction Level restriction level, it is described as follows:
TRLE ≥ Toll restriction level
Toll restriction level is one of the elements used When TRLE is lower than the toll restriction level,
to judge Toll Restriction. The level consists of 16 it is described as follows:
stages from 01 to 16. 01 is the highest level and TRLE < Toll restriction level
16 is the lowest:
<Example>
01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
TRLE • • • • 03
high low Toll restriction level • • • • 08
The levels above are described as :
The higher the level of an extension is, the less TRLE > Toll restriction level
the extension is restricted. Conversely, the lower
the level the greater the restriction.
3-C-1
(60395)
1.01 Toll Restriction for Local
Trunk Dial Access (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The flow chart below shows the procedures for “ARS/Local CO line Access” in the system
restricting outgoing calls when a user makes an without ARS service.
outgoing CO call by dialing the feature number for
Start

<1>When “ARS/Local Access” in <2>When “ARS/Local Access” in <1>When “ARS/Local Access” in

the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2>Is the selected trunk group No

programmed to “Yes” in
”Class of Service – Trunk-
Prohibits
Group Access”?
(Sends reorder
Yes tone)

No <3> Is the trunk group type in “System-Local Access Group”, Local Access
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX?

Yes

<4> Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in No
“Group-Trunk Group”,PBX Access Code with Restriction ?

Yes

<5> Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll Restriction Level of Local TRLE≥ TRLL
Access (TRLL).

TRLE<TRLL Calls

Determines whether the call is an operator call (leading digit is 0), Equal
Access, custom calling, local call, or long distance call. ☛1

Local, or long distance call Operator call

Restricted <6> Executes 3/6 Digit Toll
Executes Operator/International Call Restricted
Restriction (Refer to 3-C-1.06) Restriction. (Refer to 3-C-1.05)

Not restricted

Restricted Executes 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Not restricted

(Refer to 3-C-1.07)
Not restricted

Prohibits Calls Calls Prohibits

(Sends reorder (Sends reorder
tone) tone)
Note
☛1 Equal Access is prohibited. Custom Calling is performed.

3-C-2
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <4>
System Programming Reference System Programming Reference
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
ARS/Local Access PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
Extension users may be restricted from Local PBX Access Code (Restriction)
Trunk Dial Access by “System-Class of Service”,
ARS Local Access, as follows: If this system works into the host PBX, PBX
access code is required to dial through the
If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is connected PBX.
impossible (reorder tone is returned). To execute Toll Restriction, register PBX Access
Code in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code
If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is (Restriction).
possible with restriction by “System-Class of To access the Host PBX without executing Toll
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Restriction, register PBX Access Code in “Group-
Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No Restriction)
If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is
possible with no restriction by “System-Class of Programming <5>
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Programming <2>
“Class of Service (1/2)” 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
System Programming Reference Toll Restriction Level (Day)
VT Dumb
and (Night)
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level

Programming <3> TRLL is assigned in the item below:

System Programming Reference
VT Dumb System-Local Access Group OFLPRG LIN DIR
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Local Access Trunk Group
Hunt Sequence
Toll Restriction Level 08
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00

When “Type” of the trunk group which is set to
“Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01”
in Local Access Group is programmed to “PBX,”
the types of the other trunk groups preset to other
“Hunt Sequence” than “01” are all regarded as
“PBX”. “PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and
“PBX Access Code (Restriction)” of the trunk
group which is set to “Hunt Sequence 01” are
used to judge.
Toll Restriction Level of
Local Access (TRLL)
When TRLL is programmed higher than TRLE,
the procedure advances to the next step.
When TRLL is programmed equal to or lower
than TRLE, the call is not restricted and
performed.

3-C-3
Programming <6>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Toll Restriction Table

The number that is registered in the “System-

Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the
number of the Area/Office Code Table.

System-Local Access Group OFLPRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 08

Toll Restriction Table 1

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL

Area/Office Code Table No. =1 Entry =200

3-C-4
1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) System (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line Access” in
procedures for outgoing calls when an extension the system with ARS service.
user makes an outgoing CO call by dialing the

Start

<1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in
the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2> Is the selected trunk group No

programmed to “Yes” in
“Class of Service—Trunk-
Group Access”? Prohibits
(Sends reorder
Yes
tone)

Determines whether the call is an operator call

(leading digit is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local
call, or long distance call. ☛1

Local, or long distance call Operator call

TRLE>TRLL <3>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Local Access

(TRLL) with TRLE in Class of Service. Advances to Toll Restriction
for Operator/International Call
TRLE<TRLL

<4> Executes 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted

(Refer to 3-C-1.06)

Not restricted

Executes 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted

(Refer to 3-C-1.07)

Not restricted

<5>Does the dialed number suit the dialing plan (A,B, No

C or D) preset in “System-Operation”, Home
Dialing Plan ?

Yes

Executes ARS. Prohibited by ARS

(Refer to 3-C-2.00)

Prohibits (Sends reorder

Calls tone)
Note
☛1 Equal Access and custom calling are prohibited.
3-C-5
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <4>
System Programming Reference System Programming Reference
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
ARS/Local Access Toll Restriction Table

The number that is registered in “System-Local

Extension users may be restricted from Local
Access Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the
Trunk Dial Access by the assignment of “System-
number of the Area/Office Code Table.
Class of Service”, ARS Local Access, as follows:
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR
If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is
impossible (reorder tone is returned).

If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is Toll Restriction Level 08

possible with restriction by “System-Class of
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Toll Restriction Table 1

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is

possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-
tem-Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access
assignment. Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables OFL PRG SCR SEL

Area/Office Code Table No. =1 Entry=200

Programming <2>

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb
9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 Programming <5>
“System-Class of Service”,
Trunk Group Access System Programming Reference
VT Dumb

Programming <3> “System-Operation (1/2)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Home Dialing Plan
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
Dialing Plan
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
There are four types of dialing plans for local calls
Toll Restriction Level
and long distance calls depending on areas, as
follows:
TRLL is assigned in the item below:
Type A : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR NXX+XXXX

Type B : 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX
Toll Restriction Level 08 NNX+XXXX

Type C : 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX
Toll Restriction Level of 1+ NNX+XXXX
Local Access (TRLL) NXX+XXXX

When TRLL is set higher than TRLE, Toll Restric- Type D : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
tion advances to the next step. NXX+NXX+XXXX
When TRLL is set equal to or lower than TRLE, NXX+XXXX
Toll Restriction advances to ARS without execut- Area Code
ing 3/6 and 7/10 Digit Toll Restrictions. Office Code
Subscriber Number
N=2 to 9, P=0 or 1, X=0 to 9
3-C-6
(50195)
1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual
Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
Shows the procedures for restricting outgoing
calls when an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by employing Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct Trunk Access.
Start

<1>Is the selected trunk group set available for access No

in Class of Service?
Yes
<2>Does the selected trunk group belong to the same No
tenant that the extension belongs to?
Yes
No <3>Is the type of the selected trunk group PBX? Prohibits
(Sends reorder
Yes tone)
<4>Does the PBX access code coincide with the code No
that is registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX
Access Code (Restriction).
Yes
TRLE≥TRLT
<5>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group
(TRLT) with TRLE in Class of Service.
Calls
TRLE<TRLT
Determines whether the call is an operator call (leading
Local or long distance call Equal Access (101XXXX)
digit is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local call, or
long distance call.
☛1 operator call
Execute Operator/International Call Restriction.
Restricted Not
<6>Execute 3/6 Digit Toll Restricted restricted <7> Does the dialed XXXX coincide
Restriction. No with Equal Access Carrier
Not restricted Code in Equal Access?
Yes
Execute 7/10 Digit Toll Restricted
Restriction. <8>Is the selected trunk group No
available for Equal Access?
Not restricted
Calls Prohibits Calls Yes
(Sends reorder <9>Compares Toll Restriction
tone) Level of Special Carrier Prohibits
Access (TRLS) with TRLE in (Sends reorder
Notes Class of Service. tone)
☛1 Custom calling is performed.
☛2 In case TRLE<TRLS, determines again if the call is TRLE≥TRLS TRLE<TRLS ☛2
an operator call, Equal Access, custom calling, local
call, or long distance call. In this case, checks the Calls
subsequent dialed numbers after “101XXXX.”
3-C-7
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <5>
System Programming Reference System Programming Reference
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level (Day)
and (Night)
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
When the selected trunk group is assigned to Toll Restriction Level
“No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group
Access, calling is impossible.
When you want to make a trunk group TRLT is assigned in the item below (Assuming
unavailable for outgoing calls, assign the trunk Trunk Group No.=01):
group to “No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk
Group Access. Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL

Trunk Group No.=01(1/2)

Programming <2>

System Programming Reference

“Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant
“Group-ICM/Paging Group”
“Extension-Station”, ICM Group
VT Dumb
Toll Restriction Level | 01
9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00
9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Toll Restriction Level of
Trunk Group (TRLT)

The tenant of the selected trunk group is When TRLT is programmed higher than TRLE,
assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant. Toll Restriction advances to the next step.
An extension should belong to one of eight ICM When TRLT is programmed equal to or lower
groups. than TRLE, calling is performed without
The tenant that the extension belongs to is the restriction.
tenant that the ICM group belongs to.
The tenant that the ICM group belongs to is Programming <6>
programmed in “Group-ICM/Paging Group.”
The ICM group that the extension belongs to is System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
programmed in “Extension-Station”, ICM Group.
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Programming <3> Toll Restriction Table

System Programming Reference

“Group-Trunk Group”, Type
Programming <4>
System Programming
“Group-Trunk Group”,
PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
PBX Access Code (Restriction)
VT Dumb
The number that is registered in “Group-Trunk
9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00
Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the number of
the Area/Office Code Table.
Reference Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL
VT Dumb
Trunk Group No.=01(1/2)
9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
Toll Restriction Table | 3

To execute Toll Restriction, the PBX Access

Code must be registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL
PBX Access Code (Restriction).
To access the Host PBX without Toll Restriction, Area/Office Code Table No. =3 Entry=200
the PBX Access Code must be assigned in
“Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No
Restriction).
3-C-8
Programming <7> Programming <9>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference

VT Dumb VT Dumb
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00 “Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
Access”, Equal Access Carrier Access”, Toll Restriction Level
Code

There are four types of Equal Access Tables to TRLS is programmed in the item below:
check if the dialed XXXX corresponds with
assigned numbers in four types of tables. Special Carrier Access-Equal Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

Equal Access No.=1

Equal Access No.=4
Equal Access No.=3
Equal Access No.=2 Toll Restriction Level | 10 | Trunk Group 04 | Yes
Special Carrier Access-Equal Access

Equal Access No.=1 Toll Restriction Level of Special

carrier Access (TRLS)

Equal Access Carrier Code | 2222 |
When the dialed XXXX does not correspond with
any of the tables, calling is performed without
restriction.
When the dialed XXXX corresponds with any
table, the procedures in steps 8 and 9 in the flow
chart (3-C-1.03) depend on the table that the
dialed XXXX corresponds with.
When TRLS is programmed higher than TRLE,
checks again if the call is an operator call, Equal
Access, custom calling, local call, or long
distance call.
When TRLS is programmed equal to or lower
than TRLE, calling is performed without
restriction.

Programming <8>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
Access”, Trunk Group 01-16

3-C-9
(50195)
1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual
Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow Chart
Shows the procedures for restricting outgoing
calls when an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by employing Individual Virtual Trunk Start
Group Dial Access.

<1> Is the selected virtual trunk group set available for No

access in Class of Service? ☛1

Yes

Determines if the call is an operator call (leading digit

is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local call, or long
distance call. ☛2

Local, or long distance call

TRLE>TRLL <2>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Special Carrier

Access (TRLS) in Equal Access or OCC Access
with TRLE.

TRLE<TRLS

<3>Executes 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted

(Refer to 3-C-1.06)

Not restricted

Restricted
Executes 7/10 digit Toll Restriction.
(Refer to 3-C-1.07)

Not restricted

<4>Does the dialed number suit the dialing plan (A,B, No

C or D) preset in “System-Operation”, Home
Dialing Plan?

Yes

Modifies the dialed number, depending on “Special Prohibits

Carrier Access-Equal Access”, Digit Modification or (Sends reorder
-OCC Access”, Digit Modification. tone)

Notes Calls
☛1. When available, accesses an idle trunk group that is assigned to “Yes” in “Special Carrier Access-Equal
Access” or “-OCC Access.”
☛2.Operator calls, Equal Access, custom calling are prohibited.

3-C-10
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <3>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference

“System-Class of Service”,
Special Carrier Access
Programming <2>
System Programming
“Special Carrier Access–Equal
Access”, Toll Restriction Level
“Special Carrier Access–OCC
Access”, Toll Restriction Level
VT Dumb VT Dumb
9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “Special Carrier Access–Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
Access“, Toll Restriction Table
“Special Carrier Access–OCC 9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00
Access”, Toll Restriction Table
The number that is registered in “Special Carrier
Reference
VT Dumb
Access–Equal Access”, Toll Restriction Table is
9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
the number of the Area/Office Code Table.
9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00
Special Carrier Access-Equal Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

Equal Access No.=1

TRLS of Equal Access is assigned in the item
below (when virtual trunk group 1 is designated):

Toll Restriction Table 8 Trunk Group 05 Yes

Special Carrier Access-Equal Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

Equal Access No.=1

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL

Toll Restriction Level 10 Trunk Group 04 Yes
Area/Office Code Table No. =8 Entry=200
Toll Restriction Level of Special
Carrier Access (TRLS)

TRLS of OCC Access is assigned in the item

below (when virtual trunk group 5 is designated):

Special Carrier Access-OCC Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

OCC Access No.=1

Toll Restriction Level 10 Trunk Group 04 Yes

Toll Restriction Level of Special

Carrier Access (TRLS)

When TRLS is programmed higher than TRLE,

the procedure advances to the next step.

When TRLS is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, the procedure advances to check the
dial type in “Home Dialing Plan” without executing
3/6 and 7/10 Digit Toll Restrictions.

3-C-11
The number that is registered in “Special Carrier Programming <4>
Access–OCC Access”, Toll Restriction Table is
the number of the Area/Office Code Table. System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
(when virtual trunk group 5 is designated): “System-Operation”, 9-D-1.0010-C-4.00
Home Dialing Plan
Special Carrier Access-OCC Access OFL PRG SCR SEL
There are three types of dialing plans for local
OCC Access No.=1
and long distance calls. Each area has one of
the three plans as mentioned before.

Toll Restriction Table 8 Trunk Group 05 Yes

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables OFL PRG SCR DIR

Area/Office Code Table No.=8 Entry=200

3-C-12
1.05 Operator/International Call
Restriction (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction
procedure for Operator (telephone company) and
International calls.

Start

<1> Compares Operator Call Restriction Level (ORLV) TRLE<ORLV

with TRLE in Class of Service.

Prohibits operator calls and

TRLE>ORLV international calls.
(Sends reorder tone)
Is the call an international call (leading digit is 01 or No
011)?

Yes Operator call is performed.

<2> Compares International Call Restriction Level TRLE<IRLV

(IRLV) with TRLE in Class of Service.

TRLE>IRLV

International call is performed.

Prohibits international calls.
(Sends reorder tone)

3-C-13
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <2>

System Programming Reference Reference

System Programming
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, Restriction 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 “System-Operation”, Restriction 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Level-Operator Level-International

ORLV is assigned in the item below: IRLV is assigned in the following item:

System-Operation OFL PRG SCR SEL System-Operation OFL PRG SCR SEL
Operation(1/3) Operation(1/3)

Restriction Level-Operator 06 Restriction Level-International 05

Operator Call International Call

Restriction Level (ORLV) Restriction Level (IRLV)

When ORLV is programmed higher than TRLE, When IRLV is programmed equal to or lower than
operator and international calls are prohibited. TRLE, international calls are performed.

When ORLV is programmed equal to or lower

than TRLE, operator calls are performed.
International calls advances to the next
procedure.

3-C-14
1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow Chart
Local and long distance calls can be restricted by
area codes only, or by office codes only, or by both
area codes and office codes.
The procedures are shown below:

Start

Type-A, B or C <1>Determines if the leading three digits of the telephone Type-A, B or C

Area Code number is an Area Code or Office Code, depending Office Code
on “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan or “Group-
Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan.

Type-D

Is the item “L” in Area/Office Code No

Table assigned to “Y”?

Yes

TRLE ≥ AL Compares “AL” in Area/Office Code Table with

TRLE<OL Compares “OL” in Area/
Office Code Table with
TRLE in Class of Service. TRLE in Class of Service.
TRLE<AL
blank TRLE ≥ OL
Checks “OC” in Area/Office Code Table.

except blank
No
Is office code registered in Office Code Table?

Yes
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

End (Advances to 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction)

3-C-15
(60395)
Programming <1> (1)Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction plan
Reference
(General)
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Before programming the toll restriction plan,
Home Dialing Plan determine the TRLE of each extension user in
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 Class of Service programming.
Dialing Plan
Table 1 Toll Restriction Level of each Extension
When a call is made by ARS or Individual Virtual user
Trunk Group Dial Access, the call is judged by TRLE RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6
“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan.
President 1 A A A A A A
When a call is made by Local Trunk Dial Access Vice-President 2 R A A A A A
or Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Manager 3 R R A A A A
Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk
Group”, Dialing Plan. Assistant Manager 4 R R R A A A
Part-Timer 1 5 R R R R A A
Programming <2> Part-Timer 2 6 R R R R R A

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb Legend:
TRLE - Toll Restriction Level of Extension
“Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code 9-I-1.00 10-C-32.00
RL - Restriction Level
Tables”
“Toll Restriction-Office Code 9-I-2.00 10-C-33.00 A - Allowed
Tables” R - Restricted

• Eight Area/Office Code Tables are prepared to

program various restrictions for calling ways
such as Local Trunk Group Dial Access,
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access, etc. Each
table consists of 16 screens:

•
=8
•
•
•
=2
Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables
Area Office Code Table No.=1

• 64 Office Code Tables are also prepared.

Each table consists of four screens:

• =64
•
•
•
=02
Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables
Office Code Table No.=01

3-C-16
Assuming that your telephone system is located
in the area, Area Code (AC)=200, Office Code
(OC)=320, accordingly, your CO number is (1) +
200 + 320 + XXXX.

Determine the Restriction Level of each AC and

OC respectively according to the TRLE of each
extension user (Table 1).

Table 2 Restriction Level of each AC and OC

the boundaries of Area Code

--------- the boundaries of Office Code

3-C-17
Now program the 3/6 digit toll restriction plan (2)Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
according to the Table 1 and Table 2 using “Area/ Plan Using “OC” field.
Office Code Table.”
When you want to restrict an outgoing call for
In some areas, the same 3-digit code may be certain area except a district within that area,
used as both an Area Code and Office Code. program the toll restriction plan by entering Office
Code Table No. in “OC” field of that Area Code
<Example> and set Office Code of the destrict in that Office
1 – 201 – NXX – XXXX, 201 – XXXX Code Table.
Office Code
Assuming that your system is located in Area A
Area Code
AC=200, and Restriction Level of Area B is set to
“10.”
Therefore, assign restriction level for an Area
So extension users with TRLE of 11-16 are
Code in “AL” field and an Office Code in “OL” field
restricted to place a call to Area B.
respectively as shown below.
Area A
AC=200
OC=323 OC=321 Area B
RL=16 RL=16 AC=201
B-1 RL=10
System
OC=322 OC=320 OC=321 OC=320
RL=16 RL=16

Select N (Default Setting)

Enter Restriction Level of Office Code
Enter Restriction Level of Area Code OC=322 OC=323
Area / Office Code

Select N (Default Setting)

Enter Restriction Level of
Office Code
Area/Office Code

[Note]
AL : Restriction Level for Area Code
OL : Restriction Level for Office Code

3-C-18
(50195)
If you do not want to restrict an extension user
from originating CO calls for district B-1 within
Area B, because calls for district B-1 are
considered local calls.
Then enter “01” in “OC” field of Area Code 201,
and register Office Code 321 in the Office Code
Table No.=1 as follows.
Select “N” (Default Setting)
Enter Office Code Table No. (01~64)
Enter Restriction Level of Office Code
Enter Restriction Level of Area Code
Area / Office Code
Select “21”
Now Restriction Level 10 is not applied to calls for
district B-1 ((1) + 201 + 321 + XXXX).
3-C-19
(50195)
(3)Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
Plan by selecting “Y” in “L” field.
In the area where Dialing Plan Type D is
adopted, the system may not be able to identify
the leading three digits of the dialed number as
an Area Code or Office Code.
<Example>
NXX + NXX + XXXX — 10 digits local call
NXX + XXXX — 7 digits local call
If your system is located in the Type D area,
program the toll restriction plan as follows.
Select “Y” (10 digits Local Call)
Enter Restriction Level of Office Code
Enter Restriction Level of Area Code
Area / Office Code
(If “N” is selected in “L” field, the dialed number
“201 + NXX + XXXX” will be checked against the
Restriction Level in “OL” field.)
[Note]
The above example is based on the following
conditions.
• Calls to the AC201 area can be made without
dialing “1” (Toll Prefix), that is, in the “201 +
NXX + XXXX” format.
• Restriction Level for the call is “10.”
1.07 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow Chart
7/10 Digit Toll Restriction is to restrict calls that
are not restricted by 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction,
employing office codes and subscriber numbers,
as follows:

Start

<1> Does the dialed number suit the dialing

plan (A,B,C or D) preset in “System- No
Operation”, Home Dialing Plan or in
“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan ?

Yes

<2> Is the dialed number registered in “Toll No

Restriction-7/10 Digit Toll Restriction” ?

Yes
Prohibits
(Sends reorder tone) Calls

Programming <1> Programming <2>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference

VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 “Toll Restriction-7/10 Digit Toll 9-I-3.00 10-C-34.00
Home Dialing Plan Restriction”
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Dialing Plan
Enter the office codes and the subscriber
When a call is made by ARS or Individual Virtual numbers that you want to restrict into “Toll
Trunk Group Dial Access, the call is judged by Restriction-7/10 Digit Toll Restriction” Table.
“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan. Up to 64 entries can be assigned to the table.

When a call is made by Local Trunk Dial Access Note

or Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
If there are several subscribers who have the
Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk
same office code and the same subscriber
Group”, Dialing Plan.
number in different areas, all the calls for the
subscribers are restricted by entering the code
and the number into the 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction
Table.

3-C-20
(60395)
1.00 Toll Restriction (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
Description
Toll restriction is a system programmable feature
that, in conjunction with the assigned Class of
Service, can prohibit the extension users from
making unauthorized toll calls.
The following three toll restriction plans can be
programmed depending on a way of making
outgoing calls.
• Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.08)
• Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct Trunk Access (Refer to Section
3-C-1.09)
• Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) System (Refer to Section 3-C-1.11)
“7-Digit Toll Restriction” applies to all above
mentioned toll restriction plan.
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.10)
The system administrator in conjunction with the
assigned Class of Service, can assign toll
restriction level for the above mentioned three
ways.
To assign toll restriction level for “Local Trunk
Dial Access,” enter the desired restriction level in
System-Local Access Group “Toll Restriction
Level” as follows.
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR
Toll Restriction Level 08
Toll Restriction Level of
Local Access (TRLL)
Toll restriction level of Local Trunk Dial Access is
referred to as “TRLL” in the following.
To assign toll restriction level of “Individual Trunk
Group Dial Access,” enter the desired restriction
level for each trunk group in Group-Trunk Group
“Toll Restriction Level” as follows.
Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL
Trunk Group No.=01(1/2)
Toll Restriction Level| 01
Toll Restriction Level of
Trunk Group (TRLT)
3-C-20-1 (X)
(70695)
Toll restriction level for Trunk Group is referred to
as “TRLT” in the following.
To assign toll restriction level for an extension user,
enter the desired restriction level in System-Class
of Service “Toll Restriction Level (Day)” and “Toll
Restriction Level (Night)” as follows.
System-Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR
Class of Service (COS) No.=01(1/2)
Toll Restriction Level (Day).............. 01
Toll Restriction Level (Night)............ 02
Toll Restriction Level of
Extension (TRLE)
Toll restriction level of an extension user is referred
to as “TRLE” in the following.
Toll restriction level consists of 16 levels (01 to16).
01,02 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15, 16
higher lower
An extension user assigned to TRLE of 01 has the
most privileges, an extension user assigned to
TRLE of 16 has the least.
When an extension user makes an outgoing CO
call, TRLE of that extension is compared with TRLL
or TRLT.
If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLL or TRLT
(TRLE TRLL or TRLT), the call is made, and if
TRLE is lower than TRLL or TRLT (TRLE< TRLL or
TRLT), the call will be checked against “7-Digit Toll
Restriction Table.”
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.10 “7-Digit Toll
Restriction.”)
<Example>
Assuming that TRLL is assigned as 09:
When an extension user assigned to TRLE of 08
makes an outgoing CO call, in this case TRLE of 08
is higher than TRLL of 09 (TRLE>TRLL), so the call
is made.
When an extension user assigned to TRLE of 10
makes an outgoing CO call, in this case TRLE of 10
is lower than TRLL of 09 (TRLE<TRLL), then the
call is checked against “7-Digit Toll Restriction
Table.”
1.08 Toll Restriction for Local
Trunk Dial Access (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The following flow chart shows the procedures for
restricting an extension user when an outgoing
CO call is made by dialing the feature number for
“ARS/Local CO line Access.”

Start

<1>When “ARS/Local Access” in <1>When “ARS/Local Access” in <1>When “ARS/Local Access” in

the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2>Is the selected trunk group No

programmed to “Yes” in
”Class of Service—Trunk-
Group Access”?
Prohibits
Yes (Sends reorder
tone)

No <3> Is the trunk group type in “System-Local Access Group”, Local Access
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX?

Yes

<4> Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in No
“Group-Trunk Group”,PBX Access Code with Restriction ?

Yes

<5> Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll Restriction Level of Local TRLE≥ TRLL
Access (TRLL).

TRLE<TRLL Calls

Restricted Executes 7-Digit Toll Restriction

(Refer to 3-C-1.10)

Not restricted

Calls
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

(Note)
Bracketed numbers (e.g., <1> <2>) provide a link between an
item on the flow chart and the associated programming items.
(See the following page.)

3-C-20-2 (X)
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <4>
Reference Reference
System Programming System Programming
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
ARS/Local Access PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
Extension users may be restricted from Local PBX Access Code (Restriction)
Trunk Dial Access by “System-Class of Service”,
ARS Local Access, as follows: If this system works into the host PBX, PBX
access code is required to dial through the
If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is connected PBX.
impossible (reorder tone is returned). To execute Toll Restriction, register PBX Access
Code in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code
If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is (Restriction).
possible with restriction by “System-Class of To access the Host PBX without executing Toll
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Restriction, register PBX Access Code in “Group-
Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No Restriction)
If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is
possible with no restriction by “System-Class of Programming <5>
Service”, Trunk Group Access.
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
Programming <2>
“Class of Service (1/2)” 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
System Programming Reference Toll Restriction Level (Day)
VT Dumb
and (Night)
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level

Programming <3> TRLL is assigned in the item below:

System Programming Reference
VT Dumb System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Local Access Trunk Group
Hunt Sequence
Toll Restriction Level 08
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00

When “Type” of the trunk group which is set to
“Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01”
in Local Access Group is programmed to “PBX,”
the types of the other trunk groups preset to other
“Hunt Sequence” than “01” are all regarded as
“PBX”. “PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and
“PBX Access Code (Restriction)” of the trunk
group which is set to “Hunt Sequence 01” are
used to judge.
Toll Restriction Level of
Local Access (TRLL)
When TRLL is programmed higher than TRLE,
the procedure advances to the next step.
When TRLL is programmed equal to or lower
than TRLE, the call is not restricted and
performed.

3-C-20-3 (X)
(60395)
1.09 Toll Restriction for Individual
Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The following flow chart shows the procedures for
restricting an extension user when an outgoing
CO call is made by dialing the feature number for
“Trunk Group 01-08/09-16 Dial Access,” or by
pressing SCO/GCO button.
Start

<1>Is the selected trunk group set available for access in No

Class of Service?
Yes
<2>Does the selected trunk group belong to the same No
tenant that the extension belongs to?
Yes
No Prohibits
<3>Is the type of the selected trunk group PBX?
(Sends reorder
Yes tone)
<4>Does the PBX access code coincide with the code
No
that is registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX
Access Code (with Restriction).
Yes
<5>Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll TRLE≥TRLT
Restriction Level of Trunk Group (TRLT).
Calls
TRLE<TRLL

Restricted Executes 7-Digit Toll Restriction

(Refer to 3-C-1.10)

Not restricted

Calls
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

(Note)
Bracketed numbers (e.g., <1> <2>) provide a link between an
item on the flow chart and the associated programming items.
(See the following page.)

3-C-20-4 (X)
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <5>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference

VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level (Day)
and (Night)
“Group-Trunk Group(1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
When the selected trunk group is assigned to Toll Restriction Level
“No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group
Access, call is denied.
When you want to make a trunk group
unavailable for outgoing calls, assign the trunk
group to “No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk
Group Access.

Programming <2>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Tenant 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
“Group-ICM/Paging Group” 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
ICM Group

The tenant of the selected trunk group is

assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant.
All extension users should belong to one of eight
ICM groups.
The tenant that the extension belongs to is the
tenant that the ICM group belongs to.
The tenant that the ICM group belongs to is
programmed in “Group-ICM/Paging Group.”
The ICM group that the extension belongs to is
programmed in “Extension-Station”, ICM Group.

Programming <3>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00

Programming <4>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
PBX Access Code (Restriction)

To execute toll restriction, the PBX Access Code

must be registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX
Access Code (Restriction).
To access the Host PBX without Toll Restriction,
the PBX Access Code must be assigned in
“Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No
Restriction).
3-C-20-5 (X)
(60395)
1.10 7-Digit Toll Restriction (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Description
The 7-digit toll restriction feature applies to the (Example)
outgoing CO calls made by the extension users If a call is made by an extension user whose
whose TRLE are lower than TRLL or TRLT. TRLE is 05, the leading three digits of the dialed
The 7-digit toll restriction table is used to perform number is checked against the entries of the toll
toll restriction by checking the leading seven restriction levels 01 to 05, that is, entries 01 to 20.
digits (except the feature number for CO access) If a match is found in the table, the call is denied
of the dialed number. and an extension user receives reorder tone.
If the leading seven digits of dialed number are If no match is found, the call is made.
found in the table, the call is denied and the users
receive reorder tone. Programming
If not found in the table, the call is made. Reference
The system administrator can register up to 64 System Programming VT Dumb
entries (each entry=seven digits) in this table.
“Toll Restriction-7-Digit Toll 9-I-4.00 10-C-34.00
Restriction Table”
Assign entry number as follows.

Conditions
• If no digits were dialed until “External First Digit
Time-Out” timer has expired, an extension user
hears reorder tone.

• If “External Interdigit Time-Out” Timer has

expired before less than seven digits were
dialed, the number dialed is checked against
the entry number in the 7-digit toll restriction
table.

• One of the following three characters “N (2 to

9),” “P (0,1)” and “X (0 to 9)” can be used as a
In this table, each unit of four entry numbers wild card character in any position of the entry
corresponds with toll restriction levels 01 to 16 number.
respectively as follows.
Note:
Entry Number Registered Toll Restriction Software version
Digits Level • V.14.XX or lower version
01 653XXXX 3-Digit Toll Restriction is applied.
02 555XXXX 1
03 • V.15.XX or higher version
04 7-Digit Toll Restriction is applied.
05 423XXXX
06 2
07
08

61 396XXXX
62 16
63
64

3-C-20-6 (X)
(70695)
1.11 Toll Restriction in Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) System (for New Zealand)

Flow Chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line Access” in
procedures for outgoing calls when an extension the system with ARS service.
user makes an outgoing CO call by dialing the

Start

<1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in
the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2> Is the selected trunk group No

programmed to “Yes” in
“Class of Service—Trunk-
Group Access”? Prohibits
(Sends reorder
Yes
tone)

TRLE>TRLL <3>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Local Access

(TRLL) with TRLE in Class of Service.

TRLE<TRLL

<4> Executes 7-Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted

(Refer to 3-C-1.10)

Not restricted

Executes ARS. Prohibited by ARS

(Refer to 3-C-2.02)

Prohibits (Sends reorder

Calls tone)

3-C-20-7 (XNZ)
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <4>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference

VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “Toll Restriction-7-Digit Toll 9-I-4.00 10-C-34.00
ARS/Local Access Restriction Table”

Extension users may be restricted from Local

Trunk Dial Access by the assignment of “System-
Class of Service”, ARS Local Access, as follows:

If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is

impossible (reorder tone is returned).

If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is

possible with restriction by “System-Class of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is

possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-
tem-Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access
assignment.

Programming <2>

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
Trunk Group Access

Programming <3>

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Toll Restriction level

TRLL is assigned in the item below:

System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 08

Toll Restriction Level of

Local Access (TRLL)

When TRLL is set higher than TRLE, Toll Restric-

tion advances to the next step.
When TRLL is set equal to or lower than TRLE,
Toll Restriction advances to ARS without execut-
ing 7-Digit Toll Restriction.

3-C-20-8 (XNZ)
(70695)
2.00 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.01 ARS (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description 2. Not outdialed via ARS

The following types of calls are not outdialed via
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system
ARS, reorder tone is sent if dialed.
programmable feature that automatically selects
the least expensive route available at the time an
• 9 + 10XXX or 101XXXX (Equal Access*)
outgoing CO call is made. It is executed by
dialing the feature number for “ARS/Local CO • 9 + 11XXX (Custom Calling)
Line Access” from a DN button, then making a • 9 + or # in the leading 3 digits.
long distance call or local call.
• Equal Access Code “10XXX” or “101XXXX” is
A typical application is to deny most extensions decided by EQC command.
dial access to all trunk groups. This forces Refer to Section 10-C-63.00 “Equal Access
extension users to use the ARS feature, which Code (EQC).”
should results in reduced toll charges.
3. Toll Restriction
To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred ARS applies to the call after the toll restriction
call routing plan in the system programming procedure.
“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “System-
Operation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.” 4. ARS Override
If an extension user selects the desired outside
Programming line directly (Individual Line Access). ARS does
not function and a call is routed via selected CO
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb line.
“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Automatic Route Selection Operation
Home Dialing Plan
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
“System-Numbering Plan (02/11)”, 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
ARS/Local CO Line Access PHONE button.
“Automatic Route Selection”,
Leading Digit Table 9-J-1.00 10-C-35.00
Office Code Tables (ARS) 9-J-2.00 10-C-36.00
Route Plan Tables 9-J-3.00 10-C-37.00 2. Dial the feature number for
Route Lists Tables 9-J-4.00 10-C-38.00 ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
Modified Digit Tables 9-J-5.00 10-C-39.00 (default).

Conditions
1. ARS Restriction 3. Dial the telephone number of the
ARS is restricted by “System-Class of Service”, external party.
ARS/Local Access, as follows:
• The system follows the pre-
•If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an programmed sequence and
outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone selects the least expensive route.
is returned.)
• The dialed digits are then sent
•If “W/RSTR” (With Restriction) is set , calling after the system adds or deletes
is possible with restriction by “System-Class digits according to the ARS
of Service”, Trunk Group Access. programming.

•If “No RSTR (No Restriction) is set, calling is

possible regardless of the assignment of
“System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group
Access.
3-C-21
(70695)
(40993)
Explanation <Example>
ARS Programming Explains the procedures to program ARS plan for
calling the XYZ Company, which has the
The following is an example to show the procedures
telephone number “201-234-5678” and is long
for programming ARS feature.
distance.
Five types of tables are used to program ARS
Three telephone service companies are available
feature;
to call the XYZ Company: telephone company A,
The ARS feature, when accessed, selects the least
B and C.
expensive route as follows.
Telephone companies A and B are the long
distance carriers.
Programs Routing Procedures
Telephone company A has:
Dial • Local access code: 765-4321
• Authorization number: 012345
Telephone company B has:
(Toll Restriction) • Local access code: 987-6543
• Authorization number: 567890

Leading Digit Table - - - - Analyze the dialed digit Telephone company A is connected to trunk group
Office Code Tables 01.
(ARS) Telephone company B is connected to trunk group
02.
Route Plan Tables - - - - - Analyze the time of day Telephone company C is connected to trunk group
03.

Route Lists Tables - - - - - Check the restriction Telephone companies A, B, and C charges for
level of trunk groups Monday are as follows:
and search an idle
trunk group

high
Modified Digit Tables - - - Modify the dialed digits
Company C

Sends the dialed number

Company B
Charge
Company A
low

12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9
a.m. p.m.
Time

(Table 1)

3-C-22
(40993)
The companies are shown below in order from
least to most expensive :

Hour Least Costly Company Next Less Costly Company Most Costly Company

7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. B A C

1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. B C A

6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. A B C

(Table 2)

Based upon Table 2, the order of trunk group

numbers connected to the telephone companies
are shown below:

Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

(Least Costly Trunk Group) (Next Less Costly Trunk Group) (Most Costly Trunk Group)
Route List 01
(7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m.) 02 01 03

Route List 02
(1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m.) 02 03 01

Route List 03
(6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.) 01 02 03

(Table 3)

3-C-23
(40993)
When an extension user calls the XYZ Company Modified Digit Table
by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the
local access code and the authorization number of Enter the digits which you want to add
the telephone company A or B before dialing the automatically to the user dialed number into the
telephone number of XYZ Company, as follows: “Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter the number of digits which you want to
When trunk group 01 is selected to use the delete from the beginning of the user dialed
telephone company A; number except the feature number for “ARS /
Local CO Line Access” into “DEL” field.
765-4321 P P 012345 201-234-5678 <Example 1>
Telephone Deleting “012” from the beginning of the user
number of dialed number and adding number “987”,
XYZ Company
Enter “3” in “DEL” field.
Authorization number of Enter “987” in “Digits to be Inserted” field.
the telephone company A
Pause
ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted
Local Access Code of the telephone company A
01 3 987
When trunk group 02 is selected to use the 02
telephone company B; 03
04
987-6543 P P 201-234-5678 567890

Authorization When “9-012-345-6789” is dialed,

number of the 012 345 6789
telephone
Three digits are deleted and “987” is
Telephone company B added here.
number of “987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.
XYZ Company
Pause
Local Access Code of the telephone company B

To add the above local access code and the

authorization numbers of the telephone
companies to the user dialed digits, the Modified
Digit Table is made up in the following manner.

3-C-24
(40993)
<Example 2>
To register the local access code and the When trunk group 02 is accessed:
authorization number of the telephone company A
which you want to add automatically when trunk 987-6543 P P 201-234-5678 567890
group 01 or 02 is accessed, enter those numbers
into “Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter these numbers into “Digits to
When trunk group 01 is accessed: be Inserted” field of “ENT” 02.

765-4321 PP 012345 201-234-5678

Enter these numbers into “Digits to

be Inserted” field of “ENT” 01.

Automatic Route Selection-Modified Digit Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Modified Digit Table (1/2)

ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted

01 0 7654321PP012345 09
02 0 9876543PPH567890 10
03 11
04 12

(Table 4)

The numbers stored in “Digits to be Inserted” is

sent to the CO line first before the user dialed
number is sent.
To insert the user dialed number into the stored
number, enter “H” at the proper place. Then the
user dialed number is inserted where “H” is
entered and sent to the CO line.
The registered numbers in the above table are
sent to the CO line as follows:

When “7654321PP01234” is stored:

7654321 012345 2012345678 is sent to the CO line.

Pause User dialed number

Automatically added number

When “9876543PPH56789” is registered :

9876543 2012345678 567890 is sent to the CO line.

Pause Automatically added number

Automatically added number User dialed number

3-C-25
(40993)
Route Lists Table

Entering “TG”
Enter the trunk group numbers in “TG” field
according to the Table 3.
Enter the numbers “02” “01” “03” (7:00 a.m. to
1:00 p.m.) in Route List #01.
Enter the numbers “02” “03” “01” (1:00 p.m. to
6:00 p.m.) in Route List #02.
Enter the numbers “01” “02” “03” (6:00 p.m. to
7:00 a.m.) in Route List #03.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4

List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 01 03
#02 02 03 01
#03 01 02 03
#04
#05
Trunk group number
(Table 5)

Entering “MOD”
Select the digits that you want to add to or delete
from the telephone number depending on Modified
Digit Table (Table 4) and enter the applicable
“ENT” number in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 01, enter ENT “01” in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 02, enter ENT “02” in “MOD” field.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4

List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 02 01 01 03
#02 02 02 03 01 01
#03 01 02 02 03
#04

“ENT” number in Modified Digit Table (Table 4)

(Table 6)
Leave “MOD” field blank if there are no digits to be entered or deleted.
3-C-26
(40993)
Entering “ALV”
It is possible to set ARS restriction levels from
“01” to “16” for Priority 2, 3, and 4. Enter ARS
restriction level into “ALV” field.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 7)

Entering “WT”
It is programmable to send the warning tone to
the user or not when the trunk group of Priority 2
to 4 are seized, by selecting “Y” in “WT” field of
Priority 2.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 8)

Route Plan Table Route Plan Table No. =01

Enter the starting Hour designated in Table

Start Hour Route List Number (01~64)
2 in the “Start Hour” field.
Enter the “Route List Number” in Route
Hour AM/PM MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI. SAT. SUN.
Lists Table (Table 6) depending on the
trunk group in Table 3 into “Route List
Number” field. 7 AM 01
Enter Route List Number “01” for “Hour” : 1 PM 02
7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “02” for “Hour” : 6 PM 03
1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “03” for “Hour” :
6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m..

Enter the “Route List Number” in Route

Lists Table (Table 6) into each field
divided by hour and the day of the week.
Enter the starting Hour according to Table 2.
(Table 9)

3-C-27
(40993)
Leading Digit Table/Office Code Table

1. Leading Digit Table

Leading Digit Table is used for assigning Route
Plan Table Number (RPN) for Area Code or
Office Code respectively.
Route Plan Table number assigned to the Area
Code is applied to the long distance call and
Route Plan table number assigned to the Office
Code is applied to the local call.
Assuming that your system is located in the area
AC=200, OC=320, that is, your CO number is
(1) + 200 + 320 + XXXX, and Route Plan Table
number for each Area Code and Office Code are
determined as follows.

AC=205 AC=206
RPN=13 RPN=14
OC=322 OC=320
OC=321 OC=321
AC=201 AC=202
RPN=10 OC=322 OC=320 RPN=10

- - - - - - - - - OC=321 OC=321 - - - - - - - - -
AC=200
--------- ---------
OC=320 OC=321 OC=322 OC=322
OC=320 RPN=2 RPN=5 OC=322
----------

--- SYSTEM ---

OC=320
RPN=2
OC=322 ---------- OC=320
OC=320 - - - - - - - - - OC=324 OC=323 - - - - - - - - - OC=320
RPN=3 RPN=8
- - - - - - - - - OC=321 OC=321 - - - - - - - - -

OC=321 RPN=6 OC=320 OC=322 RPN=11 OC=321

AC=204 AC=203

RPN=13 OC=320 OC=322 RPN=14

AC=208 AC=207

the boundaries of Area Code

--------- the boundaries of Office Code

3-C-28
Assign Route Plan Table number for each Area Code or Office Code as follows,

For Long Distance Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=200

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

200 210 220

201 10,
202 10,
203 11,
204 06,
205 13,
206 14,
207 14,
208 13,

Enter Route Plan Table number for Area Code

Area Code

For Local Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=300

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

300 310 320 , 02 330

301 311 321 , 02 •

• • 322 , 05 •

• • 323 , 08 •

• • 324 , 03 •

• • 325 , •

• • • •

• • • •

Enter Route Plan Table number for Office Code

Office Code

3-C-29
2. Office Code Table

Route Plan Table number for Area Code is

applied to the long distance call, accordingly,
the same Route Plan Table number is applied
to all Office Codes within that area.
Office Code Table is used when you want
assign another Route Plan Table number to
an Office Code within that area.

Assuming that your system is located in the

area AC=201, OC=320, and Route Plan Table
number 7 is applied to the calls for Area A,
AC=200.

Area A
AC=200
RPN=7 OC=321 OC=322
OC=320 Area B
AC=201
OC=323 OC=324 OC=325 OC=321 OC=322
RPN=5

OC=326 OC=327 OC=328 OC=320 OC=323

RPN=2 System

the boundaries of Area Code

--------- the boundaries of Office Code

In above case, usually Route Plan Table number

7 is applied to all Office Codes within Area A,
AC=200.
But if you want to assign Route Plan Table
number 5 to OC=325 and Route Plan Table
number 2 to OC=328 within Area A, program the
Leading Digit Table as follows.

3-C-30
Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=200

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

200 07 210
201
202
•
•

Enter Route Plan Table number

Area Code

Office Code Table No.=01(1/4)

2 Hundred Office Code 3 Hundred Office Code

, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , 25
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,

Area Code 200 Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32) 05

Enter the Area Code.

To register the Office Code 325, enter the last two digits of 325 into
“3 Hundred Office Code” field.

200-325-xxxx

The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number (Table 9) which is applied to calls for
the area, AC=200, OC=325.

Route Plan Table number 5 is applied to the Office Code 325 within the
Area A.

3-C-31
 Office Code Table No.=01(1/4)

2 Hundred Office Code 3 Hundred Office Code

, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , 28
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,

Area Code 200 Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32) 02

Enter the Area Code.

To register the Office Code 328, enter the last two digits of 328 into
“3 Hundred Office Code” field.

200-328-xxxx

The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number (Table 9) which is applied to calls
for the area, AC=200, OC=328.

Route Plan Table number 2 is applied to the Office Code 328 within the
Area A.

3-C-32
The flow chart shows the procedures for ARS feature:

The user dials.

(After passing through the toll restriction procedure)

Following “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan,

determines whether the leading digits indicate an area
code or an office code.

Office code Area code

Leading Digit Table (LDT) Leading Digit Table/Office Code Table

Checks whether Route Plan

Checks whether Route Plan Table number is entered or not
Table number is entered or in “AC” field.
not in “OC” field.

Not entered Not entered

(blank) Entered (blank) Entered

Prohibits, sends Checks whether dialed Area

reorder tone Code is entered or not in “Area
Prohibits. Code” of Office Code Table.
Sends reorder tone.
Not entered Entered

Obtains applicable Route Checks whether dialed Office

Plan Table number from Code is entered in Office Code
Leading Digit Table Table which contains dialed
Area Code.

Not entered Entered

Obtains applicable Obtains applicable Route Plan

Route Plan Table Table number from Office Code
number from Table which contains dialed
Leading Digit Table Area Code and Office Code

Route Plan Table

Determines Route List number by the present time of the day. (Sends reorder tone when
Route Plan Table is not stored.)

Continued to Route Lists Table

3-C-33
 Continued from Route Plan Table

Route Lists Table

Obtainable Checks whether an idle line

is obtainable or not from the
trunk group assigned to
Priority 1 in “TG.” Priority 1

Not obtainable

Checks whether Priority 2 is Not assigned

assigned or not.

Assigned
Priority 2
TRLE ≥ ALV ☛1 No

Yes Priority 3

Not obtainable Checks whether an idle line Priority 4

is obtainable or not from the
trunk group entered in “TG.”
Sends busy
Assigned tone.
Obtainable

Checks whether Checks whether sending

the next priority is warning tone is assigned or
assigned or not. not in “WT.” Not assigned

Not assigned Assigned

Sends busy Sends warning

tone. tone.

Checks the number

entered in “MOD.”

From 01 to 32

Continued to Modified Digit Table

☛1 TRLE : toll restriction level of extension assigned

in Class of Service.

3-C-34
(50195)
 Continued from Route Lists Table

Modified Digit Table (MDT)

Checks the number 0

entered in “DEL” field.

From 1 to 9

Deletes the number of digits entered in “DEL” field from the begin-
ning of the user dialed number except the feature number for “ARS/
Local CO Line Access.”

Adds the digits entered in “Digits to be Inserted” field to

the user dialed number.

Calls

3-C-35
2.02 ARS (for New Zealand)
Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system 3. Toll Restriction
programmable feature that automatically selects ARS applies to the call after the toll restriction
the least expensive route available at the time an procedure.
outgoing CO call is made. It is executed by
dialing the feature number for “ARS/Local CO 4. ARS Override
Line Access” from a DN button, then making a If an extension user selects the desired outside
long distance call or local call. line directly (Individual Line Access), ARS does
not function and a call is routed via selected
A typical application is to deny most extension's CO line.
dial access to all trunk groups. This forces
extension users to use the ARS feature, which Operation
should results in reduced toll charges.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred PHONE button.
call routing plan in the system programming
“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “System-
Operation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.”
2. Dial the feature number for
Programming ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
(default).
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Automatic Route Selection
Home Dialing Plan 3. Dial the telephone number of the
“System-Numbering Plan (02/11)”, 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 external party.
ARS/Local CO Line Access
“Automatic Route Selection”, • The system follows the pre-
Leading Digit Table 9-J-6.00 10-C-35.00 programmed sequence and
Route Plan Tables 9-J-7.00 10-C-37.00 selects the least expensive
Route Lists Tables 9-J-8.00 10-C-38.00
route.
Modified Digit Tables 9-J-9.00 10-C-39.00

• The dialed digits are then sent

Conditions after the system adds or deletes
1. ARS Restriction digits according to the ARS
ARS is restricted by “System-Class of Service”, programming.
ARS/Local Access, as follows:

• If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an

outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone is
returened.)

• If “W/RSTR” (With Restriction) is set, calling is

possible with restriction by “System-Class of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.

• If “No RSTR (No Restriction) is set, calling is

possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-
tem-Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access.

3-C-35-1(XNZ)
(70695)
Explanation <Example>
ARS Programming Explains the procedures to program ARS plan for
calling the XYZ Company, which has the
The following is an example to show the procedures
telephone number “03-234-5678” and is long
for programming ARS feature.
distance.
Five types of tables are used to program ARS
Three telephone service companies are available
feature;
to call the XYZ Company: telephone company A,
The ARS feature, when accessed, selects the least
B and C.
expensive route as follows.
Telephone companies A and B are the long
distance carriers.
Programming Routing Procedures
Telephone company A has:
Dial • Local access code: 765-4321

Telephone company B has:

(Toll Restriction) • Local access code: 987-6543

Leading Digit Table - - - - Analyze the dialed digit Telephone company A is connected to trunk group
01.
Telephone company B is connected to trunk group
02.
Route Plan Tables - - - - - Analyze the time of day Telephone company C is connected to trunk group
03.

Route Lists Tables - - - - - Check the restriction Telephone companies A, B, and C's charges for
level of trunk groups Monday are as follows:
and search an idle
trunk group

high
Modified Digit Tables - - - Modify the dialed digits
Company C

Sends the dialed number

Company B
Charge
Company A
low

12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9
a.m. p.m.
Time

(Table 1)

3-C-35-2(XNZ)
(70695)
The companies are shown below in order from
least to most expensive :

Hour Least Costly Company Next Less Costly Company Most Costly Company

7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. B A C

1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. B C A

6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. A B C

(Table 2)

Based upon Table 2, the order of trunk group

numbers connected to the telephone companies
are shown below:

Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

(Least Costly Trunk Group) (Next Less Costly Trunk Group) (Most Costly Trunk Group)
Route List 01
(7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m.) 02 01 03

Route List 02
(1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m.) 02 03 01

Route List 03
(6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.) 01 02 03

(Table 3)

3-C-35-3(XNZ)
(70695)
When an extension user calls the XYZ Company Modified Digit Table
by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the
local access code of the telephone company A or Enter the digits which you want to add
B before dialing the telephone number of XYZ automatically to the user dialed number into the
Company, as follows: “Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter the number of digits which you want to
When trunk group 01 is selected to use the delete from the beginning of the user dialed
telephone company A; number except the feature number for “ARS /
Local CO Line Access” into “DEL” field.
765-4321 P P 03-234-5678
<Example 1>
Telephone
number of Deleting “03” from the beginning of the user
XYZ Company dialed number and adding number “987”,

Enter “2” in “DEL” field.

Enter “987” in “Digits to be Inserted” field.

Pause

Access Code of the telephone company A ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted

01 2 987
When trunk group 02 is selected to use the 02
telephone company B; 03
04
987-6543 P P 03-234-5678

When “9-03-345-6789” is dialed,

03 345 6789
Two digits are deleted and “987” is added
Telephone here.
number of “987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.
XYZ Company
Pause
Access Code of the telephone company B

To add required access code of the telephone

company to the user dialed digits, the Modified
Digit Table is made up in the following manner.

3-C-35-4(XNZ)
(70695)
<Example 2>
To register the access code required by the When trunk group 02 is accessed:
telephone company which you want to add
automatically when trunk group 01 (telephone 9876543 P P 03-234-5678
company A) or 02 (telephone company B) is
accessed, enter those numbers into “Digits to be Enter these numbers into “Digits to
Inserted” field. be Inserted” field of “ENT” 02.

When trunk group 01 is accessed:

7654321 PP 03-234-5678

Enter these numbers into “Digits to

be Inserted” field of “ENT” 01.

Automatic Route Selection-Modified Digit Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Modified Digit Table (1/2)

ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted

01 0 7654321PP 09
02 0 9876543PP 10
03 11
04 12
register the required access code
(Table 4)

The numbers stored in “Digits to be Inserted” is

sent to the CO line first before the user dialed
number is sent.
The registered numbers in the above table are
sent to the CO line as follows:

7654321 03-234-5678 is sent to the CO line.

Pause User dialed number

Automatically added number

3-C-35-5(XNZ)
(70695)
Route Lists Table

Entering “TG”
Enter the trunk group numbers in “TG” field
according to the Table 3.
Enter the numbers “02” “01” “03” (7:00 a.m. to
1:00 p.m.) in Route List #01.
Enter the numbers “02” “03” “01” (1:00 p.m. to
6:00 p.m.) in Route List #02.
Enter the numbers “01” “02” “03” (6:00 p.m. to
7:00 a.m.) in Route List #03.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4

List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 01 03
#02 02 03 01
#03 01 02 03
#04
#05
Trunk group number
(Table 5)
Entering “MOD”
Select the digits that you want to add to or delete
from the telephone number depending on Modified
Digit Table (Table 4) and enter the applicable
“ENT” number in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 01, enter ENT “01” in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 02, enter ENT “02” in “MOD” field.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4

List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 02 01 01 03
#02 02 02 03 01 01
#03 01 02 02 03
#04

“ENT” number in Modified Digit Table (Table 4)

(Table 6)
Leave “MOD” field blank if there are no digits to be entered or deleted.
3-C-35-6(XNZ)
(70695)
Entering “ALV”
It is possible to set ARS restriction levels from
“01” to “16” for Priority 2, 3, and 4. Enter ARS
restriction level into “ALV” field.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 7)

Entering “WT”
It is programmable to send the warning tone to
the user or not when the trunk group of Priority 2
to 4 are seized, by selecting “Y” in “WT” field of
Priority 2.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 8)

Route Plan Table Route Plan Table No. =01

Enter the starting Hour designated in Table

Start Hour Route List Number (01~64)
2 in the “Start Hour” field.
Enter the “Route List Number” in Route
Hour AM/PM MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI. SAT. SUN.
Lists Table (Table 6) depending on the
trunk group in Table 3 into “Route List
Number” field. 7 AM 01
Enter Route List Number “01” for “Hour” : 1 PM 02
7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “02” for “Hour” : 6 PM 03
1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “03” for “Hour” :
6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m..

Enter the “Route List Number” in Route

Lists Table (Table 6) into each field
divided by hour and the day of the week.
Enter the starting Hour according to Table 2.
(Table 9)
3-C-35-7(XNZ)
(70695)
Leading Digit Table

Leading Digit Table is used for assigning Route

Plan Table Number (RPN) for Area Code or
Office Code respectively.
Route Plan Table number assigned to the Area
Code is applied to the long distance calls, and
Route Plan table number assigned to the Office
Code is applied to the local calls or VPN (Virtual
Private Network) calls.

Assign Route Plan Table number for each Area Code or Office Code as follows,

For Long Distance Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=200

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

200 210 220

201 10,
202 10,
203 11,
204 06,
205 13,
206 14,
207 14,
208 13,

Enter Route Plan Table number for Area Code

Area Code

For Local Call NPN Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=300

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

300 310 320 , 02 330

301 311 321 , 02 •

• • 322 , 05 •

• • 323 , 08 •

• • 324 , 03 •

• • 325 , •

• • • •

• • • •

Enter Route Plan Table number for Office Code

Office Code
3-C-35-8(XNZ)
(70695)
Routing the VPN (Virtual Private Network) calls
VPN calls can be routed using one of the following two ways.
1. Using the ARS Procedures
ARS procedures can be used for routing the VPN calls.
In this case, VPN access code “1” should be attached to the beginning of the extension user dialed
number using the Modified Digit Table.

(Example)
Dialed number: 9-250-1234
↓
After modification: 1-250-1234

VPN access code

2. Using the TIE trunk call procedures

TIE trunk call procedures can be used for routing the VPN calls as follows.

(Example)
Calling to VPN extension 5000

Call Flow
1.Ext.100 dials 5000.
2.Ext.100 is connected to VPN Ext.5000

Programming example:
• System-Numbering Plan (9-D-6.00, 10-C-10.00)
Other PBX Extension 01:50
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table (9-K-4.00, 10-C-65.01)

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial
01 02
01 5XX 0 02 03
02
.
.

3-C-35-9(XNZ)
(70695)
The flow chart shows the procedures for ARS feature:

An outside call is made.

(After passing the toll restriction procedure)
Leading Digit Table

Long distance call? (the first digit is “0”) or

Local call? (the first digit is not “0”)

Local call Long distance call

Is Route Plan Table number Is Route Plan Table number

entered in “OC” field of the entered in “AC” field of the
dialed number? dialed number?

No Yes Yes No

The call is prohibited. The call is prohibited.

Reorder tone is sent. Reorder tone is sent.

Obtains applicable Route Plan Table

number from Leading Digit Table.

Route Plan Table

Determines Route List number by the present time of the day. (Sends reorder
tone when Route Plan Table is not stored.)

Continued to Route Lists Table

3-C-35-10(XNZ)
(70695)
 Continued from Route Plan Table

Route Lists Table

Obtainable Checks whether an idle line

is obtainable or not from the
trunk group assigned to
Priority 1 in “TG.” Priority 1

Not obtainable

Checks whether Priority 2 is Not assigned

assigned or not.

Assigned
Priority 2
TRLE ≥ ALV ☛1 No

Yes Priority 3

Not obtainable Checks whether an idle line Priority 4

is obtainable or not from the
trunk group entered in “TG.”
Sends busy
Assigned tone.
Obtainable

Checks whether Checks whether sending

the next priority is warning tone is assigned or
assigned or not. not in “WT.” Not assigned

Not assigned Assigned

Sends busy Sends warning

tone. tone.

Checks the number

entered in “MOD.”

From 01 to 32

Continued to Modified Digit Table

☛1 TRLE : toll restriction level of extension assigned

in Class of Service.

3-C-35-11(XNZ)
(70695)
 Continued from Route Lists Table

Modified Digit Table (MDT)

Checks the number 0

entered in “DEL” field.

From 1 to 9

Deletes the number of digits entered in “DEL” field from the begin-
ning of the user dialed number except the feature number for “ARS/
Local CO Line Access.”

Adds the digits entered in “Digits to be Inserted” field to

the user dialed number.

Calls

3-C-35-12(XNZ)
(70695)
3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion
Description Conditions
When the DTMF dial mode is established on a When making a CO call, if the trunk is assigned
CO line, the dial signal sent from an extension to a PULSE dial mode, in the following conditions
(tone or pulse dial mode) is converted into DTMF the dial signal is converted into DTMF signal after
signals by the COT (LCOT,GCOT) card and sent sending a telephone number.
to the Central Office.
If the PULSE dial mode is established on a CO 1) A telephone number belongs to “Special
line, the dial signal sent from an extension (tone Carrier Access-OCC Access.”
or pulse dial mode) is converted into pulse signal 2) The selected trunk group belongs to the
by the COT card and sent to the Central Office. trunk group in “Special Carrier Access-
OCC Access.”
The “DTMF dial mode” or “PULSE dial mode” is
set in "Trunk-CO Line", Dial Mode. After External Feature Access, until the
Set “DTMF” for a CO line which can accept both maximum digits are dialed, the dialing mode is
DTMF and PULSE dialing. changed to the mode set in “Trunk-CO Line”, Dial
Mode.
Programming (With a PITS, Tone Though mode is released
Reference temporarily during this time.)
System Programming
VT Dumb
With a PITS, Tone Through mode is established
“Trunk-CO Line”, Dial Mode 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
automatically after the dialing sequence.
After pressing the Tone Through Break button,
until the maximum digits are dialed, the dialing
mode becomes the dialing mode set in “Trunk-
CO Line”, Dial Mode. Tone Through mode is
released temporarily during the time.
Refer to Section 4-G-12.00 “Tone Through (End
to End DTMF Signaling)” for further information.

3-C-36
4.00 Automatic Pause Insertion
Description Programming
When a host PBX or Centrex is accessed and Reference
System Programming
PBX access code with no restriction or restriction VT Dumb
is programmed, a pause is automatically inserted
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
after the access code. Type
This function can only be executed for a trunk Pause Time
group whose Type PBX. The access code after “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
which the pause is to be inserted is determined by PBX Access Code (No
programming “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Restriction)
Code (No Restriction) or (Restriction) PBX Access Code (Restriction)
An example of using the system as behind PBX is
given below.
Conditions
<Example> When the type of the top priority trunk group is
Dial details: 811 9 201 3456 PBX with the “System-Local Access Group”,
Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Telephone
setting, all local access is considered to be host
number
PBX or Centrex line access. The data set in the
Host PBX CO line top priority trunk group is used as the data
access code required for the access.
Feature number for
In the same trunk group, the access codes set in
selecting the CO line
“PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and “PBX
Access Code (Restriction)” must be different.
When “9” is entered in “PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)”, the pause is automatically inserted
after dialing 9.
When “9” is entered in “PBX Access Code
(Restriction)”, the pause is automatically inserted
after dialing 9, and the outgoing restrictions are
checked for the “201 3456” phone number.
The length of the automatically inserted pause
depends on the “Group-Trunk Group”, Pause
Time setting.

3-C-37
D. Receiving Features

1.00 Attendant Console Operation

Description An incoming call from a CO line can be routed to the Attendant Console
operator who can then transfer it to the target extension.
This function works by setting “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming Mode
(Day) to ATT (Attendant Consoles).
Up to two Attendant Consoles (with CRT display — Optional) can be
equipped with the KX-T336 system.
The Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Port 1 is for Attendant
Console 1 and Port 2 is for Attendant Console 2.
Outline drawings of the basic process are shown below.

Attendant Console Incoming Mode

1. Single Console Operation

• When Tenant Service is employed:

Tenant 1 Tenant 2
Attendant-seeking Attendant-seeking Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls incoming CO calls incoming CO calls

Attendant Attendant Attendant

Console 1 Console 1 Console 2

2. Dual Console Operation

• When Tenant Service is employed:

Tenant 1 or 2
Attendant-seeking Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls incoming CO calls

Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant

Console 1 Console 2 Console 1 Console 2

3-D-1
(30393)
 Dual Console Operation
When two attendant consoles are equipped with the system, one of the
following three types of Incoming Mode can be selected.
Options B and C work only for the incoming outside call routed via a CO
line which belongs to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is
assigned as “ATT.”
A. Load Sharing (Section 3-D-1.01)
Incoming calls are distributed evenly to two attendant consoles so that
they can share the same load. (default)
B. Simultaneous Ringing (Section 3-D-1.02)
An incoming outside call rings at two attendant consoles
simultaneously.
C. Interconsole IRNA (Section 3-D-1.03)
If an incoming outside call ringing at one attendant console is not
answered within a specified time period (Attendant Overflow Time), it
will be automatically transferred to another attendant console.

This selection can be done by entering the WS3 command at Dumb

programming mode.
Refer to “Attendant Incoming Mode” in Section 10-C-53.00 World Select 3
(WS3).

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions (1)The attendant console is not available to receive a call in:

• Night mode (Section 3-B-8.00)
• ATT-FWD mode (Section 6-A-1.00)

(2)What if all six LOOP keys on the attendant console are in use?
• Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station (Section 6-G-2.00)

(3)What if an incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key is not

answered?
• Automatic Redirection If No Answer (Section 6-G-7.00)

(4)Tenant Service
To use two attendant consoles in dual console operation mode, both
consoles should belong to either one of two Tenants.

(5) Operator Assignment

With Dual Console Operation, two attendant consoles must be
programmed as operator 1 and operator 2 for the above operation to
be valid. See Section 3-B-5.00 “Operator” for further information.

3-D-2
(30393)
1.01 Load Sharing
Description When two attendant consoles are equipped with the KX-T336 system,
incoming calls directed to the attendant console are distributed to each
console evenly so that both consoles can share the same load.

KX-T336 System

ATT 1
1st
3rd
2nd
4th
Incoming call
ATT 2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.

This setting can be changed to one of the following other two settings by
using the WS3 command at Dumb programming mode.
• Simultaneous Ringing (Section 3-D-1.02)
• Interconsole IRNA (Section 3-D-1.03)
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions 1. General and Specific Calls

Incoming outside calls directed to the attendant console are categorized as
“General” or “Specific.”
(General Calls)
• Operator Call (General)
• Incoming outside calls routed via CO lines which belong to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT.”
• FDN for General Operator Call
(Specific Calls)
• Operator Calls (Specific)
• Directory Number for ATT1 and 2

2. Call Distribution Order

General calls are distributed to each console on the basis of “First In First
Out.”
Specific calls always arrive at the specified attendant console.

3-D-2-1
(30393)
3. Automatic Redirection If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to a
Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a LOOP
key of ATT1 or 2 is not answered within a specified time (Attendant
Overflow Time), it may be redirected to the extension assigned as the
overflow destination.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for
further information.

KX-T336 System

ATT 1

ATT 2 Ringing at ATT2

↓
No Answer
↓
Time Out (Attendant Overflow Time)
Overflow Extension ↓
Ringing at Overflow Extension

3-D-2-2
(30393)
1.02 Simultaneous Ringing
Description When two attendant consoles are equipped with the KX-T336 system, an
incoming outside call directed to the attendant console will ring on a LOOP
key of both attendant consoles simultaneously.
KX-T336 System

ATT 1 Ringing

Incoming outside call

ATT 2 Ringing

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.

This “Simultaneous Ringing” setting can be selected by using the WS3
command at Dumb programming mode.
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions 1. A call will ring simultaneously at both ATT1 and 2 when:

• An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATT.”
• Both ATT1 and 2 are available to receive a call.
• An idle LOOP key is available at both ATT1 and 2.
Otherwise, a call will ring at either one of two attendant consoles.
2. Automatic Redirection If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to
a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a
LOOP key of two attendant consoles simultaneously is not answered
within a specified time (Attendant Overflow Time), it may be redirected
to the extension assigned as the overflow destination.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System

ATT 1 Ringing

ATT 2 Ringing
No Answer
↓
Time Out
Overflow Extension ↓
Ringing at overflow extension

3-D-2-3
(30393)
1.03 Interconsole IRNA
Description When two attendant consoles are equipped with the KX-T336 system, if an
incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key of one attendant console is
not answered within a specified time (Attendant Overflow Time), it will be
redirected to another attendant console automatically.
KX-T336 System

ATT 1 Ringing at ATT1

Incoming outside call ↓
No Answer
↓
Time Out
ATT 2 ↓
Ringing at ATT2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.

This “Interconsole IRNA” setting can be selected by using the WS3
command at Dumb programming mode.
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions 1. Interconsole IRNA works when:

• An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATT.”
• An idle LOOP key is available at the second console when a call
ringing at the first console is not answered within a specified time.
2. Attendant Overflow Time
The timer which applies to the feature is “System—System Timer”,
Attendant Overflow Time.
3. Automatic Redirection If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to
a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a
LOOP key of ATT2 (see illustration above) is not answered within a
specified time (Attendant Overflow Time) it may be redirected to the
extension assigned as the overflow extension.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System

Ringing at ATT2
ATT 2 ↓
No Answer
↓
Time Out
↓
Overflow Extension Ringing at overflow extension

3-D-2-4
(30393)
2.00 Attendant Console-less
Operation
2.01 Direct In Line (DIL)
Description Programming
Once set in system program, this function makes DIL 1:1
it possible for an incoming call from a CO line to
Reference
go directly to an extension without assistance of System Programming
VT Dumb
the attendant.
This function can be performed in two ways, as “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
described below. Incoming Mode (Day)
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
DIL 1:1:For putting an incoming call from a CO
Trunk Group
line trunk to a single destination Direct Termination
Assignable destinations are:

• Extension User DIL 1: N

• FDN for Remote
Reference
• FDN for UCD group System Programming
VT Dumb

DIL 1: N: For putting an incoming call from a CO “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
line to a maximum of eight destinations Incoming Mode (Day)
simultaneously Incoming Mode (Night)
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
Assignable destinations are:
Destination (DIL 1: N Only)
Type and Number
• Extension User
• Pickup Group
• ICM Group
To use the DIL 1:1 and DIL 1: N functions,
program “Group-Trunk Group”,Incoming/Outgoing
For DIL 1:1, set “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming
to Both-Way or Incoming Only.
Mode (Day) to DIL 1:1, and program the CO
line to this Trunk Group using “Trunk- CO Line”,
Conditions
Trunk Group. Then set the incoming destination
in “Trunk-CO Line”, Direct Termination. If CO buttons are assigned, an incoming call to a
PITS will arrive at one of the CO buttons (except
For DIL 1: N, program “Group-Trunk Group”, PCO button). If no CO button is assigned, it will
Incoming Mode (Day) to DIL 1: N, and program arrive at a PDN.
the “Group-Trunk Group”, Destination (DIL 1: N
Only) Type and Number. When a DIL 1:1 incoming call arrives at a PDN, it
will also arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose
To use these functions in the Night mode, set the owner is that PDN.
Day mode to the DIL 1:1 or DIL 1: N setting, and
set “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming Mode (Night) When a DIL 1: N incoming call arrives at a PDN,
to Day Mode. it will not arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose
owner is that PDN.

It is programmable that an incoming CO call

routed via DIL 1:N feature arrives at “CO button
only” or “CO button or PDN button.” For further
information, refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World
Select 3 (WS3).”

3-D-3
2.02 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
Description Programming
DISA allows an outside party calling into the System Programming
Reference
system on a DTMF line to directly access certain VT Dumb
system features, without attendant assistance. “Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
After gaining access to the system, the caller can “System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
access allowed features by dialing the appropriate Intercept Routing Time-Out
feature number. (DISA)
The caller is required to enter DISA User Code “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
before being allowed to make an outgoing CO call Incoming Mode (Day)
via DISA feature. Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
Once a DISA call has gained access to the
Intercept Routing (Night)
system, it is treated as any other incoming CO call. “Trunk-AGC” 9-F-3.00 10-C-21.00
“Special Attended-DISA” 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
Extension call via DISA is made as follows: to 41.00
Outgoing call via DISA is made as follows:

Conditions
System
central If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
office DISA card can be programmed by “Special
Attended-DISA”, Tenant.
Outside extension
Party
Automatic Gain Control can be used for DISA to
maintain the volume of CO-CO call via DISA
To utilize DISA feature, a DISA card is required feature by equipping up to four AGC cards. If
Tenant Service is employed, the AGC card can
be assigned to a tenant in “Trunk-AGC.”
System
central
office Dialing “* ” allows the user to call again or
disconnect the line. It is possible to disable it by
Outside setting “Special Attended-DISA”, Control Code
Party “* ” to “No.”
central
office Four digit DISA User Code is necessary for
making outgoing calls via DISA. It is assigned in
“Special Attended-DISA”, DISA User Code.

To execute Intercept Routing-No Answer and

Rerouting for DISA calls, assign “System-System
Outside Party Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA) and
“Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day)
and assign “Special Attended-DISA”, For Use to and (Night).
“DISA.” For further information, refer to Section 3-F-5.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
It can be used as one of the following four ways.
1. OGM 1 for UCD with OGM
2. OGM 2 for UCD with OGM
3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)
Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the
system.

3-D-4
(40993)
Conditions Operation
DISA calls should be made from external callers Calling an extension from outside
by DTMF dial type telephone instruments.
1. Dial the telephone number of the
line which is programmed as a
If reorder tone is returned but “* ” is not dialed in
DISA line in this system.
10 seconds, the line will be disconnected.

Rerouting starts in the cases below: • You hear ringback tone until
the system detects your call.
1) When nothing is dialed in 10 seconds during • When it is detected, you hear
no tone heard after OGM is sent. the outgoing message if
2) When a wrong extension number is dialed. recorded, or no tone if not
3) When the number of “Out Service” status recorded.
extension is dialed.
4) When a wrong DISA user code is dialed. 2. Dial the directory number of the
extension.
If the destination of Intercept Routing is
programmed, extension calls unanswered in • You hear ringback tone.
programmed period are forwarded to the
destination. The call will be disconnected after 3. When the extension answers,
60 seconds, if the destination does not answer. start conversation.
If no destination is programmed, extension calls
are disconnected after 60 seconds, if
unanswered.

Procedures for outgoing calls are similar to that

from extensions.

Warning tone is sent during CO-CO conversation

15 seconds before time limit programmed in
“Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit. It
is possible to prolong the duration by dialing a
digit other than “* ” and “#.” Prolonging the
duration is enabled or disabled by system
programming.

It can be selected whether detecting of the CPC

signal is done at the end of the CO-CO
conversation or not in “Trunk-AGC”, Tone Detect.

If “Tone Detect” is set to “Yes,” the following will

occur in each case:

<1> If the calling party finishes first, both lines

are disconnected.

<2> If the receiving party finishes first, reorder

tone is sent to the caller.

3-D-5
Calling an external party
1. Dial the telephone number of the
line which is programmed as a
DISA line in this system.
• You hear ringback tone until
the system detects your call.
• When it is detected, you hear
the outgoing message if
recorded, or no tone if not
recorded.
2. Dial the feature number for
selecting a CO line.
• You hear dial tone 2.
3. Dial the DISA user code: four
digits.
Calling again
While talking with an external party, or hearing
ringback tone, busy tone, or reorder tone.
1. Dial “* .”
• You hear dial tone 1.
2. To call an extension, follow the
procedure for calling an
extension from step 2.
To call an external party, follow
the procedure for calling an
external party from step 4.
(Supplement)
If you dial “* ” while hearing OGM, or hearing no
tone in 10 seconds after OGM is sent, or hearing
dial tone, you are disconnected from the line.

If you dial “* ” during conversation with an

4. Dial the telephone number of the extension, you are not disconnected and able to
external party. continue the conversation.

5. When the external party

answers, start conversation (CO-
CO conversation).

(Supplement)
If account code entry is forced for the accessed
line by programming, you must dial the account
code in step 4 before the telephone number.

3-D-6
(E)
2.03 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description
Incoming calls can be put through directly to
extensions in accordance with the subscriber
numbers sent from the Central Office.
Not only extensions but either an Attendant
Console or UCD group may serve as the
destination of the incoming calls via DID lines.
for U.S.A. and Canada
Available for receiving incoming calls only. DID
lines cannot be used for making outside calls.
DID card (KX-T96182) and T-1 Digital Trunk card
(DID channel) are provided for this usage.
for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada
(Both-way DID service)
In some areas, DID lines can be used for both
receiving incoming calls and making outside
calls. One of the following three cards is required
to utilize Both-way DID service.
• Both-way DID card (KX-T96182D)
(Refer to Reference Guide for KX-T96182D).
• MFC DID card (KX-T96182CE) (Refer to
Reference Guide for KX-T96182CE.)
• E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD (KX-T96188)
(Refer to Section 3-F-16.00 “E-1 Carrier”.)
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group”,
Type 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
DID Digit Modification Table 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Trunk Group
DID Start Arrangement
“Special Attended-DID”, 9-K-2.00 10-C-43.00
Receive Digit
Delete Digit
Insert Dial No.
To make use of DID trunks, program “Group-
Trunk Group”, Type to DID, and assign the CO
lines to be used for DID by programming the
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group option. Set the
DID Start Arrangement in “Trunk-CO Line” and
the DID Digit Modification Table in “Group-Trunk
Group (2/2)”. This table is used to convert the
subscriber numbers sent from the Central Office
into DNs or Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).
The number of “received digits”, “digits to be
deleted” and “the digits to insert” are
programmed in the “Special Attended-DID”
screen. 3-D-7
(70695)
Conditions
A subscriber number received from the Central
Office is converted into a DN or FDN according
to the DID Digit Modification Table setting as
follows.
<Example>
“Special Attended-DID” Table settings
Receive Digit: 4
Delete Digit: 2
Insert Dial No.: 2
Subscriber number received from the Central
Office: 43112
Processing
<1> The “2” in 43112 is ignored since there are
four receive digits. This leaves 4311.
<2> “43” is deleted since there are two delete
digits. This leaves 11. Note that the digits
are deleted from the beginning of the
number.
<3> Inserting Dial No. “2” makes the final
number 211 which serves as the DN or
FDN. Note that digits are inserted before
the beginning of the number.
Reorder tone is sent to the DID caller if the
number of digits received is less than the number
programmed in “Special Attended-DID”, Receive
Digit.
The subscriber number received from the Central
Office is converted into a DN or FDN. If it could
not be put through to the incoming call
destination, because the DN or FDN does not
exist or the destination is Out of Service, the call
is sent to the destination specified by the “Group-
Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day/Night). If
there is nothing programmed for intercept routing
then the call is sent to Operator 1.*
* If MFC signaling is utilized, reorder tone is sent
to the caller in this case.
When the CO Forward Mode function has been
programmed in “System-Class of Service” for
the DID incoming call destination, forwarding will
not take place, and the call will be put through to
the extension.
2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station
(TAFAS)-Day Service
Description Conditions
Incoming CO calls programmed for TAFAS will If tenant service is employed :
ring the external pager and any extension user in The affiliation of each external pager is
the system can answer the calls by dialing the determined by the system programming in
feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2” Tenant.
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2). Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager in the different
To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk tenant.
Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
To utilize the external pager, assign “System-
Operation”, External Paging 1, 2” to “Yes.”

Up to two external pagers can be connected to

this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The

difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to
Section 4-I-1.01 “Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

External Paging 1, 2
“System-Numbering Plan (3/9)”, 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
“Group-Trunk-Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Incoming Mode (Day)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Trunk Group
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tenant

3-D-8
2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-
General

Description UP to 32 UCD groups can be set up in the

Calls to a UCD group are distributed uniformly system and they can be categorized into the
among the group members so that each member following two types.
can share the same load.
1. UCD group with OGM (01-04)
This UCD feature is particularly helpful when –Section 2.06-1
certain extension receives a high volume of calls 2. UCD group without OGM (05-32)
compared with other extensions. –Section 2.06-2

(Example) Detailed information is described in the Section

3-D-2.06.
DIL 1:1 Switching system

CO 1 Extension A
CO 2 Extension B
CO 3 Extension C

Calls from CO 1 always arrive at Extension A.

Calls from CO 2 always arrive at Extension B.
Calls from CO 3 always arrive at Extension C.
UCD Switching system

CO 1 Extension A
CO 2 UCD Extension B
Group
CO 3 Extension C

Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle station in a

circular way, starting at the extension following
the last one called.
Call completion time is minimized without
attendant assistance.

The UCD group is comprised of one or more

pickup groups in the same Intercom group.
An extension can be in only one UCD group.
Members can leave the group temporarily, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension
(Logout).

3-D-9
(40993)
An outline sketch of UCD is shown below.
(1)When a number of calls have been arrived at
a UCD group, the 1st call arrives at extension
A first.
Calls have arrived at a UCD group
4th call
is in the queue
3rd call
is in the queue
2nd call
is in the queue
1st call
is in the queue
UCD group
Extension A
(When extension A is busy*1
or in UCD logout*2 mode, the
call arrives at extension B.)
Extension B
(When extension B is busy
or in UCD logout mode, the
call arrives at extension C.)
Extension C
(When extension C is busy
or in UCD logout mode, the
call arrives at extension D.)
Extension D
(When extension D is busy
or in UCD logout mode, the
call arrives at extension A.)
3-D-10
(40993)
(2)When the 1st call arrives at extension A, the
2nd call arrives at extension B.
4th call
is in the queue
3rd call
is in the queue
2nd call
is in the queue
UCD group
Extension B
(When extension B is busy
or in UCD logout mode, the
call arrives at extension C.)
Extension C
Extension D
Extension A
(3)When the 2nd call arrives at extension C,
the 3rd call will arrive at extension D.
(4)When the 3rd call arrives at extension D,
the 4th call will arrive at extension A.
[Note]
*1 Busy status
• When “Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call
Forwarding” has been set to the extension.
• When any one of PDN is used.
(Including using own PDN as an SDN at
another extension)
• When the extension is off-hook.
*2 Logout
Members can leave the group temporarily, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension.
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-
with/without OGM
2.06-1 UCD Group with OGM (01-04)
Description If all group members are not available to answer
a call (All Logout)
UCD Groups 01-04 are provided exclusively for
receiving outside calls. A call will be redirected to another destination
(Overflow destination) immediately.
CO

DIL 1:1
DISA
DID
TIE UCD (01)

T336 System

(All busy) (All logout)

ATT/Ext.

Transfer UCD Timetable Overflow

destination (OFDN)

Ext.100
ATT Any UCD EXT.
Group
(only one for each group)
Ext.103 Ext.101

Programming

Ext.102 Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

UCD group (01-04) “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)” 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Incoming Mode (Day)
-DIL 1:1
Incoming Mode (Night)
If all group members are busy -Day Mode
A caller may receive an answer delay “Group-Call Pickup Group”, UCD 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
announcement (OGM 1,2) and be placed in the “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Direct Termination-DN
waiting queue until any one of busy group
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
member goes on-hook, or be redirected to Pickup Group
another destination (Overflow destination), or “Special Attended-DISA”, 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
receive any other treatments. For Use
A type of treatments may differ depending on the “Special Attended-UCD (1/2)”, 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00
preprogrammed UCD Timetable. 01 to 04
“Special Attended-UCD (2/2)” 9-K-3.02 10-C-45.00
“UCD Auto Log-out Operation — 10-C-70.00
(ULO)”

3-D-11
(70695)
Conditions
1. Calls which can arrive at a UCD group (with
OGM) are:
• Incoming outside calls via DIL(1:1) for which
destination is set as FDN of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls via DID or TIE by
dialing FDN of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing
FDN of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls transferred by an
attendant console or extension
2. Login and Logout
Members can leave the group temporarily
when they will be away from their desks, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension.
(Logout). They can return to the group when
they are ready to answer a call (Login).
Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-Log Out” for more
information on Login and Logout.
3. Busy status
• When “Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call
Forwarding” has been set to the extension.
• When any one of PDN has been used.
(Including using own PDN as an SDN at
another extension)
• When the extension is off-hook.
4. Auto Log-out
When a group member does not answer a call
more than a set time period (“Call Forwarding-
No Answer Time-Out”), the call will be
automatically transferred to other member's
extension. If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs
twice in succession on the same extension, it
automatically set to log-out status.
Note:
From software version 15.XX or higher, “Auto
Log-out” can be disabled on a UCD Group
basis. See Section 10-C-70.00 “UCD Auto
Log-out Operation (ULO)”.
3-D-12
(70695)
What if all members are logged-out?
Then depending on your software version, the
call is handled as follows.
(Software version 8. XX or higher)
The call overflows to the overflow destination
immediately after the Auto-Logout.
This is changed from 6.XX versions.
(Software version 6.XX or higher)
The call is put in the waiting queue. but
continues to hear ringback tone.
There is no timetable treatment.
5. Overflow destination
One of the following three destinations can be
assigned as the overflow destination (OFDN)
per UCD group (01-04).
• Attendant Console
• Extension
• Another UCD Group (01-04), (05-32)
(Treatment of the calls transferred to the overflow
destination (OFDN))
(1) What if the overflow destination is busy?
The call is put in the waiting queue, and will
begin to ring at the overflow destination as
soon as it becomes idle.
or
The call may begin to ring at a group
member's extension, if it becomes idle while
overflow destination is still busy.
No
The call is put in Is overflow
the waiting queue. destination idle?
The call begins to Yes
ring at a group
member's extension.
The call begins to
ring at overflow
destination.
(2) What if a call ringing at overflow destination 7. UCD Timetable
(ATT/EXT.) is not answered?
When all extensions in a UCD group are busy,
CO calls are handled according to the pre-
programmed timetable.

UCD group (01-04) The timetable is assigned to the system by

employing “UCD Time Table-UCD (2/2)” in
(All Logout) system programming.

(1) Number of timetables

Overflow destination (ATT/EXT.) Each UCD group (01 to 04) has own timetable
respectively.
(No answer)
(2) Up to 16 steps can be registered per timetable
by selecting a command listed below.

(A) (B) Command list and functions

The call The call will be disconnected
continues to ring. 60 seconds later. Command Functions

1T Callers are put in the waiting queue

(A) A call which comes in directly on the overflow for 15 seconds.
destination*1 continues to ring on it. 2T Callers are put in the waiting queue
(B) A call which comes in on the overflow for 30 seconds.
3T Callers are put in the waiting queue
destination after being answered or held
for 45 seconds.
once by the system*2 will be disconnected
4T Callers are put in the waiting queue
automatically, if not answered by the overflow
for 60 seconds.
destination within 60 seconds.
O1W When OGM1 is in use, wait until
*1 A call via DIL 1:1, DID. OGM1 becomes available and then
OGM1 is sent to the caller.
*2 A call via DISA, transferred by ATT or O2W When OGM2 is in use, wait until
Extension, or a call held by the system as a OGM2 becomes available and then
treatment of the UCD Time Table. OGM2 is sent to the caller.
O1S OGM1 is sent to the caller if
6. OGM1 and OGM2 available.
When OGM1 is in use, skips to the
To utilize OGM, install Direct Inward System next step without sending OGM1.
Access (DISA) card to the system and assign O2S OGM2 is sent to the caller if
the usage of DISA card to OGM1 and/or available.
OGM2 by system programming in advance. When OGM2 is in use, skips to the
The Operator 1 can record OGM. next step without sending OGM2.
Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the H Music-on-Hold is sent to the caller.
system. TR Transfers a call to the overflow
Four OGMs per DISA card can be sent to destination set by “OFDN” of
outside callers simultaneously. “Special Attended-UCD(1/2)” in
Refer to Section 3-F-4.00, 4-I-13.00 and system programming.
6-J-6.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM) OFF Disconnects the outside call.
Recording and Playing Back,” for further RET Returns to the first column.
information.
Note: Any command after “TR” or “OFF” does not
function.

3-D-13
(50195)
(3) Music on Hold is sent to the caller in the Timetable operation examples
queue until a group member answers it.
(Example 1) O1S → 4T → 2T → O2S → TR
(Example)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
In the following case, Music on Hold is sent to
the caller, during 4T (60 seconds) interval.

O1W → 4T UCD Group

Sends Music on Hold
(1)The caller hears OGM1, if available.
(Example)

Sorry, all lines are busy.

Please wait a moment

• What if OGM1 is busy?

Steps (1) and (2) will be skipped.
The caller hears OGM2, if
available (Go to Step 3).
If “O1W” is used instead of “O1S,”
the caller first hears ringback tone
and then will hear OGM1 as soon
as it becomes available (Go to
Step 2).

• What if OGM1 is Out of Service?

Steps (1), (2) and (3) will be
skipped. The caller is directly
transferred to the Overflow
destination (Go to Step 4).

(2)The caller hears Music on Hold for

90 seconds (4T + 2T).

(3)The caller hears OGM2.

(Example)

Sorry, all lines are still busy.

Calling the Operator.

(4)The caller is transferred to the

Overflow destination (Operator or
covering extension).

Note:
• During steps (1) through (3), the
caller will be connected to a UCD
group member as soon as
anyone of members becomes
available to answer the call.

3-D-14
(40993)
(Example 2) O1S → H → 4T → 2T → O2S → H
→ TR
If “H” command is used as shown
above, Music on Hold is always
sent to the caller whether OGMs
are In Service or not.
(Example 3) O1S → 2T → O2W → OFF
(1) (2) (3) (4)
UCD Group
(1)The caller hears OGM1.
(Example)
Sorry, all lines are busy.
Please wait a moment.
If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service,
this step will be skipped.
Then the caller hears ringback tone.
(2)The caller hears Music on Hold for
30 seconds (2T).
(3)The caller hears OGM2.
(Example)
Sorry, all lines are still busy.
Please call us again.
Thank you for calling.
If OGM2 is busy, the caller first
hears ringback tone and then will
hear OGM2 as soon as it becomes
available.
(4)The caller is disconnected from the
switch.
(Example 4) H → TR
(1)
UCD Group
(1)The caller hears Music on Hold until
anyone of the group members or
Overflow destination becomes idle.
3-D-14-1
(50195)
Note:
• If “IT” command is used instead of
“H,” the caller hears ringback tone
instead of Music on Hold.
(Example 5) H → O1S → TR
(1) (2) (3)
UCD Group
(1)This step is skipped automatically.
“H” does not function.
(2)The caller hears OGM1 followed by
Music on Hold.
(3)The caller is transferred to the
Overflow destination.
(Example 6) → O1S → 2T → O2W → 2T → RET
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1)The caller hears OGM1.
(Example)
Sorry, all lines are busy.
Please wait a moment.
If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service,
this step will be skipped.
Then the caller hears ringback tone.
(2)The caller hears Music on Hold for
30 seconds (2T).
(3)The caller hears OGM2.
(Example)
Sorry, all lines are still busy.
Please wait a moment.
If OGM2 is busy, the caller first hears
ringback tone and then will hear
OGM2 as soon as it becomes
available.
(4)Same as the step (2).
(5)Go back to the step (1).
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-
with/without OGM

2.06-2 UCD Group without OGM (05-32)

Description If all group members are not available to answer
a call (All Logout)
UCD Groups (05-32) are provided to receive both
extension and outside calls. A call will be redirected to another destination
(Overflow destination) immediately.
CO

DIL 1:1
DISA
DID UCD (05)
TIE
T336 System

(All busy) (All logout)

ATT/Ext. Ext. ATT/Ext.

Transfer waiting queue

Overflow timeout (OT)

Ext.110 UCD (05)

Overflow destination (OFDN)

Ext.113 Ext.111

Ext.112
ATT UCD (08) EXT.

UCD group (05-32)

Programming
Reference
If all group members are busy System Programming
VT Dumb
A call is placed in the waiting queue and the
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)” 9-E-101 10-C-14.00
caller hears ringback tone. Incoming Mode (Day)
A call in the queue will be redirected to another -DIL 1:1
destination (Overflow destination) if all group Incoming Mode (Night)
members are still busy after a specified time -Day Mode
period (Overflow Timer – OT) has elapsed. “Group-Call Pickup Group”, UCD 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Direct Termination-DN
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Pickup Group
“Special Attended-UCD (1/2)” 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00
05 to 32
“UCD Auto Log-out operation — 10-C-70.00
(ULO)”

3-D-14-2
(70695)
Conditions
1. Calls which can arrive at UCD group (05-32)
are:
(1) Outside calls
• Incoming outside calls via DIL (1:1) for
which call destination is set as FDN of a
UCD group
• Incoming outside calls via DID by dialing
FDN of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing
FDN of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls transferred by the
Extension or Attendant Console
(2)Extension calls
• Calls made by extension or attendant
console by dialing FDN of UCD group
4. Overflow destination
One of the following three destinations can be
assigned as the overflow destination (OFDN)
per UCD group (05-32)
• Attendant Console
• Extension
• Another UCD Group (05-32)*
* UCD group (01-04) is not available to set as
the overflow destination of a UCD group
(05-32).
<LCD display> (Extension user only)
When a call to a UCD group is transferred and
placed to another UCD group assigned as
overflow destination, the display, if provided, of
the caller's PITS shows:
→ 5678: UCD GRP 08

• Calls transferred by extension or attendant
console by dialing FDN of UCD group.
2. Login and Logout
Members can leave the group temporarily
when they will be away from their desks, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension.
(Logout)
They can return to the group when they are
ready to answer a call. (Login)
Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)- Log Out” for more
information on login and logout.
(Treatment of the calls transferred to the overflow
destination (OFDN))
(1) What if the overflow destination is busy?
The call is put in the waiting queue, and will
begin to ring at the overflow destination as
soon as it becomes idle.
or
The call may begin to ring at a group
member's extension, if it becomes idle while
overflow destination is still busy.

3. Busy status
The call is put in No Is overflow
• When “Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call the waiting queue. destination idle?
Forwarding” has been set to the extension.
• When any one of PDN is used.
(Including using own PDN as an SDN at The call begins to Yes
another extension) ring at a group
member's extension.
• When the extension is off-hook.

<LCD display> (Extension user only) The call begins to

When all extensions within a UCD group are ring at overflow
destination.
busy, the display, if provided, of the caller's PITS
shows:

1234: UCD GRP 12

↓ ↓
FDN UCD group number
3-D-14-3
(40993)
(2) What if a call ringing at overflow destination Operation
is not answered?
Making a call from extension to a UCD group
In case the overflow destination is an
attendant console or extension. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
1. When the call ringing at overflow
destination has originally arrived to a UCD
• Dial tone 1 or 3 or 4 sounds.
group by call transfer.
(Transfer Recall) 2. Dial FDN of the UCD group.
The call will ring back at the attendant
console/extension who transferred it, if not
answered until the transfer recall timer has
elapsed.

CO

ATT/EXT.

Transfer

UCD group (05-32)

(All Login)

Overflow destination (ATT/EXT.)

No Answer (Transfer recall timer

has elapsed)

2. When the call ringing at overflow

destination has originally routed via DISA.
<Disconnection>
The call will be disconnected automatically,
if not answered within 60 seconds.

5. Auto Log-out
When an extension in a UCD group does not
answer more than a set time period (“Call
Forwarding-No Answer Time-Out”),the call
will be automatically transferred to other
member's extension.
If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs twice in
succession on the same extension, it is
automatically set to Log-out status.

Note:
From software version 15.XX or higher, “Auto
Log-out” can be disabled on a UCD Group
basis. See Section 10-C-70.00 “UCD Auto
Log-out” Operation (ULO).

3-D-14-4
(70695)
2.07 Private CO (PCO)
Description Conditions
It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were A Private CO button lights up red at the times
connected directly to a DN button on a PITS. below.
This operation is called Private CO (PCO).
1) When the Private CO line is not In Service.
It is then no longer possible to place outgoing
calls from other extensions using this CO line. 2) When the Private CO line has been set to
Also, an incoming call from the CO line assigned CO Busy-Out.
as PCO will arrive only at this PITS.
3) When access using the Trunk Verify
function is made by the Attendant Console.
To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk
Group”, Type to PVL and program the CO line to
A call held on a Private CO button can not be
the Private trunk group in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
retrieved by other extensions, however, an
Group.
incoming call to a Private CO button can be
Also, program the DN button on the PITS to
transferred.
PRV-CO using “Extension-Station (2/3)”, Type
and assign the physical number of the Private
When an incoming CO call arrives, ringing occurs
CO line under Number.
instantly. Delayed ringing is not available.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Type
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
Type and Number

3-D-15
2.08 Single CO (SCO)
Description CO line which can be assigned as a SCO button
To support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO is:
line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS • A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
telephone. assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL
PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button. 1: N.
SCO button feature provides easy access to the
CO lines for extension users who make and • A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
receive many outside calls. assigned as Outgoing Only.
The PITS telephone user can access a CO line
by simply pressing the SCO button without Programming
dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming
Reference
outside call can be directed to the PITS System Programming
VT Dumb
telephone via dedicated SCO button without
assistance of the Operator. “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
In addition, the associated status LED provides Type and Number
busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

SCO button can be used either one-way service Conditions

(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways
service (Both-Way).
SCO button can be assigned to a PITS telephone
in conjunction with DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N feature.
SCO button with DIL 1: 1 feature
• Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
function is set, it is overridden by an outgoing
call made by pressing the Single CO button.
• The Single CO button indicator will light up red
in the following circumstances.

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SCO button <1> When the Single CO is not In Service
can be assigned to the PITS telephone <2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out
programmed as the destination of DIL 1: 1 status
feature.
<3> Idle status and Single CO in trunk route
If SCO button is not assigned on the PITS
control status
telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN
When the Single CO button is pressed in
button on it.
any of these statuses, its indicator lights up
green but busy tone is heard.
The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button programmed as Single CO and the
In the following cases, the Single CO button
CO line status:
indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is
sent.
Indicator CO Line Status
<1> When Calling Party Control signal has
Off Idle been detected during a call using the
Lights green I-use Single CO.
Green 60 wink I-hold
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold, <2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
unattended conference outgoing call made from the Single CO.
Green 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: 1)
Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold
Red 60 wink Other-hold
Red 120 wink Privacy release possible
Red 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

3-D-16
(30393)
2.09 Group CO (GCO)
Description Trunk group which can be assigned as a GCO
To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a button is:
group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned • A trunk group assigned as Bothway or
to a DN button on a PITS telephone. Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a (Day) is DIL 1:1 or DIL 1: N.
PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.
GCO button feature provides better service with • A trunk group assigned as Outgoing Only.
a given number of CO lines.
Programming
GCO button can be assigned to a PITS
Reference
telephone in conjunction with DIL 1: N feature. System Programming
VT Dumb
Incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group
can be directed to a maximum of eight “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
destinations (extension user, ICM group, pickup Type and Number
group) simultaneously.
In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons
on the PITS telephone. Conditions
If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls
When the ARS function is set, it is overridden by
via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.
outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.
To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user
Pressing a Group CO button when it is red
can access an idle CO line in the group by simply
serves to set the “Automatic Callback to Trunk”
pressing the dedicated GCO button.
function.
See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic
The table below shows the relationship between
Callback-Trunk” for details.
the DN button programmed as Group CO and the
CO line status:
In the following cases, the Group CO button
indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.
Indicator CO Line Status

Off Free CO line in trunk group and no <1> When Calling Party Control signal has
incoming CO call been detected during a call using the
Lights green I-use Group CO.
Green 60 wink I-hold
<2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold,
unattended conference outgoing call made from a Group CO.
Green 240 wink —
Lights red No idle CO lines in trunk group
and no incoming call in trunk
group
Red 60 wink —
Red 120 wink —
Red 240 wink CO line receiving an incoming call
in trunk group

3-D-17
(30393)
2.10 Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment
Description CO lines of the same trunk group can be assigned to both GCO (as a
group unit) and SCO (as a single unit) at a time.

Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines.

TG01 CO line 1011

CO line 1012
CO line 1013
CO line 1014

Case 1. Case 2. Case 3.

EXT.100 EXT.100 EXT.100

(Appearance of the call indication in Case 3.)

SCO has priority over GCO when incoming CO calls come.
When an outside call via CO line-1011 comes in on an extension, the
call indication appears on SCO-1011, not on GCO-01.
However it may appear on GCO-01, if SCO-1011 is in use as follows.

(Example)
1. SCO-1011 is in use.
2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.100 via CO line-1011
appears on GCO-01.

1. 2

EXT.100 EXT.100
SCO-1011 is lit GCO-01 is flashing
in green. in red or green.

3-D-17-1
(70695)
 Retrieving a call held on GCO from SCO.

Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines and

GCO and SCO buttons are assigned as follows.

TG01 CO line 1011

CO line 1012
CO line 1013
CO line 1014

GCO-01 is in use at EXT.100 now.

EXT.100 EXT.101
GCO-01 is lit in SCO-1011 is lit
green . in red .

In case, CO line 1011 is captured by pressing GCO-01.

When a call on GCO-01 is put on hold at EXT.100, GCO-01 begins to

flash in green and SCO-1011 on EXT.101 begins to flash in red as follows:

EXT.100 EXT.101

EXT.101 can retrieve a call held on GCO-01 by simply pressing the red
flashing SCO-1011.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00

Type and Number

Conditions None

3-D-17-2
(70695)
2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment
Description More than one GCO button of the same trunk group can be assigned to a
single PITS extension.

(Example)
Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines.

TG01 CO line 1011

CO line 1012
CO line 1013
CO line 1014

Case 1.

Ext.100 Ext.101

Case 2.

Ext.100 Ext.101

Case 1 Case 2

Old version Available Not Available

New version Available

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00

Type and Number

3-D-17-3
(70695)
Conditions (1) Appearance of the call indication in case 2.
If more than one outside call (via CO lines of the same trunk group)
comes in under the following situation, the second call will appear on
the next GCO button of the same extension.

(Example)

CO Lines Direct Termination

Trunk Group 01 CO Line 1011

Ext. 100
CO Line 1012

Incoming Mode (Day): CO Line 1013

DIL 1: 1 Ext. 101
CO Line 1014

1. GCO-01 is in use at Ext.100.

2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.100 via a CO line of
Trunk Group 01 appears on another GCO of Ext.100.

1. 2

Ext.100 Ext.100

3-D-17-4
(70695)
3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment
3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment- 3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment -
No Ringing Delayed Ringing
Description Description
Each line access button on the PITS telephone When incoming calls are placed to PITS from
can be programmed to ring or not to ring when extensions, CO lines or doorphones, the
incoming calls arrive during the day or at night. indicators of the PDN, SDN, SCO and GCO
When incoming calls are placed to PITS from buttons corresponding to the respective incoming
extensions, CO lines or doorphones, the calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing
indicators of the PDN, SDN, SCO, GCO and PCO is sent to the phone.
buttons corresponding to the respective incoming It is possible to delay the ringing and have
calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing different settings in the day and night mode.
is sent to the phone.
It is possible to disable the ringing and have “Extension-Station”, Day Ring and Night Ring are
different settings in the day and night mode. set to delayed ringing.
The delay time can be set to any one of three
"Extension-Station", Day Ring and Night Ring are values.
set to No Ring.
Delayed 1: 5 seconds after placement of
Programming the incoming call
Reference Delayed 3: 15 seconds after placement of
System Programming the incoming call
VT Dumb
Delayed 6: 30 seconds after placement of
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
the incoming call
Day Ring
Night Ring
Programming
Reference
System Programming
Conditions VT Dumb

When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,
SCO, GCO or PCO button for which no ringing
has been set, it is still possible to answer the call
flashing in 240 wink. In other words, responding
to incoming calls is not affected by no ringing
assignment in any way.
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
Day Ring
Night Ring
Conditions
When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,
SCO or GCO button for which delayed ringing
has been set, it is still possible to answer the call
flashing in 240 wink before ringing begins. In
other words, responding to incoming calls is not
affected by delayed ringing assignment in any
way.

3-D-18
4.00 Discriminating Ringing
Description In an SLT, the Held Call Reminder for CO calls is
It is possible to identify the type of an incoming call the same as the CO line incoming ringing
by the ringing pattern. pattern. The ringing for extension hold is the
same as the extension incoming ringing pattern.
The ringing patterns are listed on Section 3-B-
16.00 “Tone and Ringing Patterns.” There is no distinction made for calls to an Off
Premise Extension (OPX): The CO line incoming
Programming ringing pattern only.

None

Conditions
All Transfer Recall signals have the same ringing
pattern as Held Call Reminder.

If there are multiple incoming calls on an extension

when the extension user goes on-hook, the calls
are rung in the following sequence.

<1> Consultation Held Call Reminder

<2> In a PITS, an incoming call from a line in which
the Prime Line Preference (incoming) function
has been set
<3> Call Waiting. The call was waiting when the
user was off-hook.
<4> CO line incoming call, extension incoming call,
intercom incoming call, doorphone incoming
call, Held Call Reminder, Transfer Recall,
Unattended Conference Recall.
When there is more than one of the above
incoming calls in a PITS, the calls are
prioritized in DN sequence (PDN takes top
priority). Intercom incoming calls have the
lowest priority.
<5> Automatic Callback
<6> Timed Reminder

When a multiple number of incoming calls arrive at

a PITS in the on-hook status, priority as to which
calls should be rung is generally on a “first-come
first-served” basis. However, when the Prime Line
Preference (incoming) function has been set, this
line takes precedence.

When there are multiple calls placed to an SLT

which is on-hook, priority as to which calls should
be rung is generally on a “first-come first-served”
basis.

3-D-19
5.00 Station Hunting
5.01 Station Hunting-Circular
Description See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.
Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of
See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call
incoming calls to an idle member of a hunt group
Distribution (UCD)-without OGM/-with OGM” for
when the called extension is busy. Idle extensions
details on the UCD function.
are automatically hunted in accordance with the
hunting sequence set in the system program, and
The following calls do not receive the Station
the call is put through to an idle extension.
Hunting treatment.
The hunting sequence is set by "Extension- • A call on the ICM button.
Station", Next Hunt Station. • An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1:N
The group formed by this setting is called a or Private CO feature.
hunting group. • A call on the SDN button.
Busy status applies when there are no idle PDNs
for the extension and when the extension is Out of When the incoming destination extension is in
Service or in fault condition. any of the following statuses, the operation below
is accomplished.
Circular hunting is enabled when the last DN in the
hunting group sets the first DN as the Next Hunt Status Operation
Station as follows.
Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
FWD setting FWD processing
DN 100 DND setting DND processing

DN 200 Incoming call Depending on the status of the hunted

extensions, the operation below is accomplished
DN 110 : Hunting
after hunting starts.
DN 120 Status Operation

Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller

Hunting Group - Circular
hears ringback tone)
When an incoming call cannot be put through Busy Hunting proceeds to next station
even after hunting all the extensions belonging to FWD setting Hunting proceeds to next station
the hunting group, busy tone is sent to the calling DND setting Hunting proceeds to next station
party.
The call forwarded to a busy extension/Voice
Programming Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station
Hunting if programmed.
Reference
System Programming Refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice Processing
VT Dumb
System (VPS)” for further information.
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Next Hunt Station A call redirected to another PITS extension by
the Station Hunting feature always rings on a
PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed
Conditions on a SCO or GCO button.
Extensions can be in only one hunting group.

Extensions in a UCD group cannot belong to

hunting groups. Similarly, extensions in hunting
groups cannot belong to UCD groups.
3-D-20
(21292)
5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal
Description See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution
Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of (UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.
incoming calls to an idle member of a hunt group See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call
when the called extension is busy. Idle extensions Distribution (UCD)-without OGM/-with OGM” for
are automatically hunted in accordance with the details on the UCD function.
hunting sequence set in the system program, and
the call is put through to an idle extension. The following calls do not receive the Station
Hunting treatment.
The hunting sequence is set by "Extension- • A call on the ICM button.
Station", Next Hunt Station. • An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1:N
The group formed by this setting is called a or Private CO feature.
hunting group. • A call on the SDN button.
Busy status applies when there are no idle PDN's
for the extension and when the extension is Out of When the incoming destination extension is in
Service or in fault condition. any of the following statuses, the operation below
is accomplished instead.
Terminal hunting is selected when the last station
Status Operation
in the hunt leaves the Next Hunt Station blank.
Example Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
FWD setting FWD processing
DN 100 DND setting DND processing

DN 200 Incoming call

Depending on the status of the hunted
DN 110 : Hunting extensions, the operation below is accomplished
after hunting starts.
DN 120
Status Operation
Hunting Group - Circular
Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
When an incoming call cannot be put through even Busy Hunting proceeds to next station
after hunting up to the last extension in the hunting FWD setting Hunting proceeds to next station
DND setting Hunting proceeds to next station
group, busy tone is sent to the calling party.

Programming The call forwarded to a busy extension/Voice

System Programming
“Extension-Station (1/3)”,
Next Hunt Station
Conditions
An extension can belong to only one hunting
group.
Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station
Hunting if programmed.
Reference
Refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice Processing
VT Dumb
System (VPS)” for further information.
9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
A call redirected to another PITS extension by
the Station Hunting feature always rings on a
PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed
on a SCO or GCO button.

Extensions belonging to a UCD group cannot

belong to hunting groups. Similarly, extensions
belonging to hunting groups cannot belong to UCD
groups.
3-D-21
(21292)
E. Holding Features

1.00 Music on Hold (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description Conditions
The external music device (up to two units can be Music on Hold is not sent to the party on Hold
accommodated by this system) automatically unless the settings outlined in description have
sends Music on Hold to a party on Hold. been made.

This function will only be executed when If Tenant Service is employed, the “Trunk-Pager
“System-Operation”, External Music Source 1, 2 & Music Source”, Music Source - Tenant setting
is set to Yes, “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, determines which tenant the external music
Music Source - For Use set either to “HOLD” or device belongs to.
“HOLD & BGM” and the external music device
has been connected. When both external music devices are
accommodated in the same tenant and the
Programming applications of both devices are set identically,
the device connected to port 1 is used as the
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Music on Hold.
An example of this is given below.
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
External Music Source 1, 2 <Example>
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00
Music Source - For Use Trunk-Pager & Music Source
Music Source - Tenant Port
number Tenant For Use

1 1 HOLD
2 1 HOLD

3-E-1
(60395)
1.00 Music on Hold (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Description Programming
System built-in Music Source and/or External System Programming Reference
Music Source (if available) provide(s) Music on VT Dumb
Hold and Background Music. “System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Music on Hold is a programmable feature that External Music Source 1, 2
provides music from a music source to a party “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00
placed on Hold. Music Source - For Use
This lets the waiting party know that he is still Music Source - Tenant
connected.
For further information about Background Music, Conditions
refer to the followings.
Even if tenant service is activated, the built-in
Section 4-I-4.00 “Background Music (BGM)” Music Source cannot be divided between two
tenants.
Section 4-H-2.00 “Background Music (BGM) In this case, both built-in and external music
Section 5-F-2.00 through External Pager” source can be used at a time by the following
Section 6-I-2.00 setting.
<Using system built-in Music Source> 1. Connect External Music Device such as a
1. Set Music Source Selector Switch on the T- radio to EXT MUSIC Jack 2 on the T-SW
SW card to “INT MUS.” Card.
2. Assign “System-Operation (1/2)”, External 2. Assign “System-Operation (1/2)”, External
Music Source 1,2 to “No, Yes.” Music Source 1 to “Yes.”
3. Assign “Trunk Pager & Music Source”,
For Use of Music Source 2 to “Hold” or “Hold & When both external music devices are accommo-
BGM.” dated in the same tenant and the applications of
If you assign “BGM” to For Use, Music on Hold both devices are set identically, the device
is not provided to the party placed on Hold. connected to port 1 is used as the Music on
Hold.
<Using the External Music Device> An example of this setting is given below.
1. Connect External Music Device (such as a
radio) to the system. <Example>
2. Set Music Selector Switch on the T-SW card to
“MUS 2.” Trunk-Pager & Music Source
Port
3. Assign “System-Operation (1/2)” External number Tenant For Use
Music Source 1, 2 to “Yes, Yes.”
4. Assign “Trunk Pager & Music Source”, 1 1 HOLD
For Use of Music Source 2 to “Hold” or “Hold & 2 1 HOLD
BGM.”
If you assign “BGM” to For Use, Music on Hold
is not provided to the party placed on Hold.

When Tenant Service is activated and two

External Music Devices are connected to the
system, the “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music
Source - Tenant setting determines which tenant
the external music device belongs to.

3-E-1-1 (X)
(60395)
2.00 Held Call Reminder
Description
When the Hold, Exclusive Hold or Call Park
(system or station) function has been activated,
the party on Hold cannot be kept waiting longer
than a specific time. A call (when on-hook) or call
waiting tone (when off-hook) is generated to the
attendant console or extension as a reminder that
there is a party on Hold.
The alarm tone sent when the handset is off
hook, is heard through the speaker of a PITS and
through the handset of an SLT.
To execute this function, set “System-Operation”,
Held Call Reminder to “Yes.”
The extension and Attendant times for this
function to be activated are respectively set by
“System-System Timer”, Held Call Reminder and
Held Call Reminder (ATT).
In order for the call waiting tone to be sent, the
feature number for “Call Waiting Set” must be set.
Conditions
If more than one call is placed on hold at a PITS
extension, this function is executed starting with
the earliest held call.
In a PITS, the CO line and extension Held Call
Reminder call signals have respectively the
same ringing pattern as the CO line and
extension incoming call signals, and a monotone
call signal is sent.
While the Held Call Reminder call signal or call
waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a
display, it shows:
Held Reminder
In an SLT, the CO line and extension Held Call
Reminder call signals are exactly the same as
the CO line and extension incoming call signals.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Held Call Reminder
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Held Call Reminder
Held Call Reminder (ATT)
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,Call Waiting Set

3-E-2
(70695)
3.00 Transfer Recall
Description
If a call transferred by the Unscreened Call
Transfer, Camp-On Transfer or Ringing Transfer
function is not answered by the destination party
within a preprogrammed time period, the call will
return to the extension user or attendant console
that transferred the call.
When the handset is on-hook or off-hook, the
Transfer Recall call signal or call waiting tone,
respectively, enables the party attempting the
transfer to be advised that the call has not been
answered. The call waiting tone sent when the
handset is off-hook, is heard through the speaker
in the case of a PITS and through the handset in
the case of an SLT.
The time taken to activate this function for the
extension or attendant console is set by “System-
System Timer”, Transfer Recall.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Transfer Recall
3-E-3
Conditions
When there are more than one parties on hold,
this function is started from the earliest time for
the transfer operation.
In a PITS, the CO line and extension Transfer
Recall call signals have the same ringing pattern
as the CO line and extension incoming call
signals, and a monotone call signal is sent.
While the Transfer Recall call signal or call
waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a
display, it shows:
• When the transfer destination extension does
not have a name programmed:
<Example>
RCL: Ext 1234
Extension number (DN)
• When the transfer destination extension has a
name programmed:
<Example>
RCL: Jack
In an SLT, the CO line and extension Transfer
Recall signals are exactly the same as the CO
line and extension incoming call signals.
F. Other Features

1.00 Station Message Detail

Recording (SMDR)
Description SMDR Parameters
When an output device such as the printer Page Length
provided with RS-232C interface etc., is The page length may be selected to position a
connected to the system, it is possible to print out title and data on each page.
the following information. A page length code indicates the number of
lines per page.
• Information about outgoing CO calls A title will be printed on the first three lines of
• Information about incoming CO calls each page.
• Error log data
• Programming data
4 4 lines per page
• Traffic data • •
• •
To execute SMDR, connect the output device to • •
SIO #2 port of RS-232C on the basic shelf (KX- • •
T336100) and set “System-Operation”, SMDR to 99 99 lines per page
“Yes.”
To print out the information about outgoing CO
calls, set “System-Operation”, Outgoing Duration Standard Continuous Paper (11 inches)
Log to “Yes.”
To print out the information about incoming CO
calls, set “System-Operation”, Incoming Duration page
Log to “All Call.” length 66 lines skip
To print out error log data, set “System- (Default) perforation
Operation”, Error Log to “Yes.”
To print out programming data, set “System-
Operation”, Programming to “Yes.” machine
To print out traffic data, set “System-Operation”, perforation
Traffic to “Yes.”

Programming To print data, page length must be longer than

Reference skip perforation by four or more lines.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00 Skip Perforation

SMDR The skip perforation code indicates the number
Page Length (4~99) of lines to be skipped. When the print head
Skip Perf (0~95)
reaches the line designated, the print head
Outgoing Duration Log
Incoming Duration Log moves to the top position of the next page.
Attendant Duration
Special Carrier Name 0 Print head does not skip. (Default)
Print Secret Dial 1 Print head skips the last line.
Error Log/Programming/Traffic
2 Print head skips the last two lines.
“System-Communication Interface” 9-D-7.00 10-C-11.00
• •
• •
• •
• •
95 Print head skips the last 95 lines.

3-F-1
Typical SMDR Call Detail Report (Information about CO calls)

**********************************************************************
Date Time T CD Sour Dest DN Dial Number Duration Acc code
**********************************************************************
03/24/91 10:03AM 1 E1011 T1017 1011 1234567890123456 00:05’12 1234567890
03/24/91 10:05AM 1 E1012 T1014 1011 4222144 00:01’24

(1) (2) (3)(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

(1) Date (start of call) (6) Dest (destination: called party)

03 / 24 / 91 EXXX/EXXXX : extension number
year A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD
day A1/A2 : Attendant Console number
month TXXXX : trunk physical number

(2) Time (start of call) (7) DN (directory number)

10 : 05 AM XXX/XXXX : used directory number
a.m. or p.m. (Blank) : when using CO button
minute
hour (8) Dial Number
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
(3) T (tenant number) Dial Number printout type changes
1 or 2 depending on the setting of “System-
Operation”, Special Carrier Name.
(4) CD (condition code) When it is set to “Dial”:
A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD handling The dialed number sent to the CO line is
A1 : Attendant Console 1 handling printed out at a maximum of 21 digits.
A2 : Attendant Console 2 handling When it is set to “User Name”:
D1 : DISA code 1 The name stored in “Special Carrier
D2 : DISA code 2 Access”, Name is printed out in three
D3 : DISA code 3 letters or marks.
D4 : DISA code 4 When it is set to “Default”:
D5 : DISA code 5 When using Equal Access, “EQ1 to EQ4”
D6 : DISA code 6 is printed out.
D7 : DISA code 7 When using OCC Access, “OC1 to OC4”
D8 : DISA code 8 is printed out.
FW : Call Forwarding to Trunk
RM : Remote Maintenance (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
RA : Remote Alarm The dialed number sent to the CO line is
TR : Transfer printed out at a maximum of 21 digits.
OR : COS Override (Dial transfer,
Walking COS) (9) Duration (duration of call)
00 : 01 ’ 24
(5) Sour (source: calling party) second
EXXX/EXXXX : extension number minute
A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD hour
A1/A2 : Attendant Console number
TXXXX : trunk physical number (10) Acc code (account code)
Account code is printed out at a maximum of
10 digits.

3-F-2
(60395)
2.00 Off Premise Extension 3.00 Walking Station
(OPX)
Description
Description It is possible to move an extension to a new
location without re-programming.
Single line telephones installed off the premise
When moving a telephone, dial the feature
can be operated via a public or private network in
number for “Walking Station Set” at both the
exactly the same way as extension which are on
source and destination telephones.
the premise.
After the move, dial the feature number for
Up to 80 Off Premise Extensions can be installed
“Walking Station Cancel” and the original
per system.
extension number of the moved extension.
Up to two telephones in a system can be moved
The OPX card and OPX Power Unit are required.
simultaneously.
OPX must be set in the “Configuration-Slot
Before executing this function, assign “System-
Assignment.”
Class of Service (1/2)”, Walking Station to “Yes”
for the extension.
Programming
Reference
Programming
System Programming
VT Dumb Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Walking Station
Conditions “System-Numbering Plan (07/11)”, 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
Walking Station Set
When an incoming call is placed to OPX, ringing Walking Station Cancel
is heard in all the CO line incoming patterns.
A doorphone incoming call cannot be sent to an Conditions
OPX telephone.
It is possible to move a telephone to an extension
which is in the pre-install status. In this case, dial
the feature number for “Walking Station Set” only
at the extension to be moved, and dial the feature
number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the
original extension number at the destination
extension.
With a PITS, this function is executed from a
PDN.
The telephone type (PITS, SLT, OPX) must be the
same at the source and destination.
If a busy tone is heard when dialing the feature
number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the
extension number, it means that the moving
extension is being used (possibly by another
station with an SDN of the moving station) and
the function cannot be completed. In cases like
this, dial again. If your PITS has a display, it
shows: Try Again
Dialing the feature number for “Walking Station
Cancel” and the extension number at the move
destination in a PITS cannot be done with the SP-
PHONE on.
First lift the handset and then proceed.

3-F-3
(70695)
Operation
Before proceeding with the move, complete steps 6. Replace the handset or press the
1 to 3 at the source and destination extensions. SP-PHONE button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button.
(Supplement)
When moving to an extension in the pre-installed
status, follow steps 1 to 3 for the extension
2. Dial the feature number for
before moving it.
“Walking Station Set.”
No settings are required for an extension in the
pre-installed status.
• Confirmation tone 1 or 2 is
heard.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

WST (E xxxx) ON

Extension number

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

After the move, complete steps 4 to 6 at the

move destination extension.

4. Lift the handset.

5. First dial the feature number for

“Walking Station Cancel” and
then dial the original extension
number.

• Confirmation tone 1 or 2 is
heard.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

WST (E xxxx) OFF

3-F-4
(50195)
4.00 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back
Description
Up to four types of OGM’s can be recorded by the
Operator 1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so
that different messages can be used for different
situations.
The following four types of OGM can be recorded
respectively:
DISA, OGM1, OGM2 and W-UP (Wake-up)
OGM for outside parties
OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who
called the system via DISA feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA).”)
OGM for OGM1 and OGM2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature.
(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-with OGM.”)
OGM for extension users
OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wake-
up message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with
OGM (Wake-up Call).”)
Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.
A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to
four DISA cards can be installed to the system.
Usage of each DISA card is determined by the
system programming.
(See Section 9-K-1.00 “Special Attended-DISA.”)
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Numbering Plan (09/11)”, 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00
OGM Record
OGM Playback
“Special Attended-DISA”, For Use 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
3-F-5
(70695)
Conditions
(1)Tenant Service
If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each DISA card is determined by the system
programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.
The Operator 1 of each tenant can record and
play back the OGM within the same tenant.
(2) Recording of OGM
• OGM recording is executed by selecting an
OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the
following four types:
1. OGM1 for UCD with OGM
2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM
3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)
• If the type of multiple DISA cards are the
same in a tenant, the same message is
recorded for them at a time.
(3)Playing back of OGM
• The following two ways are available:
A. By selecting an OGM type
B. By designating the logical number of
each DISA card directly.
• If there are multiple DISA cards of the same
type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
type is selected to play back, playback starts
from the lowest DISA card physical number.
(4)Others
Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited
during OGM recording and playing.
Operation
Recording OGM from PITS (For Operation from • If your PITS has a display, it
Attendant Console, refer to Section 6-J-8.00 shows:
“Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing
Back.”) xxxxxxxx Play : 00
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. Indicates playback
time, counts up by
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. second.
UCD-OGM1 or
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
UCD-OGM2 or
Record “791” (default) and the
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM
resource number (1 to 4) in
succession.
• When playback is finished, the
MEMORY indicator goes out.
(Resource number)
You hear confirmation tone 3,
1 : OGM1 for UCD
then no tone.
2 : OGM2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
5. Replace the handset or press the
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
SP-PHONE button.
• The MEMORY indicator flashes
in red 60 wink, confirmation tone
3 is heard. (Supplement)
In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is
• If your PITS has a display, it
terminated and playback starts automatically.
shows:
Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4
afterward.
xxxxxxxx Rec. : 00
In step 3 if you wish to change the message
Indicates recording during recording, you can start recording again
time, counts up by by dialing “* .”
second.
UCD-OGM1 or In step 4 if you wish to interrupt and finish
UCD-OGM2 or playback, press the MEMORY button.
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM

3. Begin your message.

4. As soon as you finish, press the

MEMORY button.

• The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.

• After confirmation tone 3

sounds, the recorded message
is played back automatically.

3-F-6
(40993)
Playing back OGM (Supplement)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish
PHONE button. playback, press the MEMORY button.

During playback you can start playback again

from the beginning by dialing “* .”
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Playback “792” (default) and a
number below in succession.

(Resource number)
1 : OGM1 for UCD
2 : OGM 2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

(“* ” and DISA No.)

* 1: selects card 1
* 2: selects card 2
* 3: selects card 3
* 4: selects card 4

• The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.
You hear confirmation tone 3,
then the message.

• If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

<Example>
DISA-OGM Play: 00

• When playback is finished, you

hear confirmation tone 3, then
no tone.

• The MEMORY indicator goes

out.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

3-F-7
(40993)
5.00 Intercept Routing-No
Answer (IRNA)
Description Programming
If an incoming outside call directed to a single Reference
System Programming
extension is not answered in a specified time VT Dumb
period, it can be redirected to another destination
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
in the system. Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
Another destination can be: “System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
• An Attendant Console Intercept Routing Time-Out
• An extension user (System)
• A Voice Mail extension Intercept Routing Time-Out
(DISA)
For further information about IRNA and a Voice
Mail extension, refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice
Conditions
Processing System (VPS).”
Intercept Routing-No Answer works for the
This feature also applies to the following calls. following incoming CO calls.

• When an incoming outside call rings back at the
extension who once put the call on hold, is not
answered in a specified time period. (Held
Reminder Call)
• When an incoming outside call rings back at the
extension who once transferred the call to
another extension, is not answered in a
specified time period. (Transfer Recall)
The destination of Intercept Routing during day
and night are assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”,
Intercept Routing (Day) and Intercept Routing
(Night) on a trunk group basis.
Set the duration to start Intercept Routing in
“System-System Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-
Out (System).
The duration to start Intercept Routing for DISA
calls follows the setting in “System-System Timer”,
Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA).
For details about DISA, refer to Section 3-D-2.02
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA).”
1. All incoming CO calls other than calls
placed on DIL1 : N, Private CO, Attendant
Consoles, Remote and UCD
2. Transfer Recall calls (except those to
Attendant Consoles)
3. Held Call Reminder calls (except those to
Attendant Consoles, calls on Exclusive
Hold, calls on hold on Private CO lines)
4. An incoming outside call via DISA/DID
which comes in on an extension in the DND
mode.
Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature
assigned on the IRNA destination does not work
on the call which has been transferred to it by the
IRNA feature.
If the IRNA destination is not currently available to
answer the call transferred by the IRNA feature,
the call may receive the treatment of the Station
Hunting feature.
If the destination extension of a direct incoming
outside call is in the data line security mode,
IRNA feature does not work on it.
Refer to Section 4-I-6.00 “Data Line Security” for
further information.

If the destination is a PITS with display, it shows:

<Example>
CO: PANASONIC

3-F-8
(30393)
6.00 Rerouting
Description Programming
If an incoming outside call cannot be placed Reference
System Programming
anywhere, the call can be routed to another VT Dumb
destination. This is called Rerouting. “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Rerouting will take place in the following cases. Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
1. If the system cannot determine the
destination to place the call (for example,
no destination is assigned). Conditions
2. If the system determines the destination but If a call is rerouted to an extension user and the
the destination cannot currently receive the user's PITS has a display, it shows:
call (for example, it is not “In Service”).
3. If a call arrives at a trunk which is set to <Example>
“Outgoing Only.”
CO : PANASONIC
If a call is rerouted, the call will be sent to the
following destinations: Indicates the name of the CO line.

1. If “Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing

(Day/Night) is assigned, the call is sent to
the assigned destination.*
2. If it is not assigned, the call is sent to
Operator 1 in the receiving tenant.

* If the assigned destination is a Voice Mail

extension, the call is not sent to it.
Refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice Processing
System (VPS)” for further information.

3-F-9
(21292)
7.00 Calling Party Control (CPC)
Signal Detection
Description
CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is the on-hook
indication (disconnect signal) sent through the CO
line when either calling or called party goes on-
hook.
To support efficient utilization of the CO lines, the
system monitors the status of the CO lines, and
when CPC signal is detected, the system
disconnects the CO lines connected compulsorily.
In default mode, CPC signal detection works on
incoming CO calls, and does not work on outgoing
CO calls (except once they are placed on hold or
consultation hold).
In this case, if the extension user remains off-hook
after the completion of an outgoing CO call, the
system does not release all the switches used to
establish the connection, and a CO line connected
will continue to be seized by the extension user
ineffectively.
To prevent the extension users from such invalid
seizure of CO lines, it is administrable to make
CPC signal detection effect on outgoing CO calls
by using CPC command at dumb programming
mode.
This feature is assignable on a CO line basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-49.00 “CPC Detect Timing-
Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)” for further information.
3-F-10
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Trunk-CO Line”, CPC Detection 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
“CPC Signal Detect Timing- — 10-C-49.00
Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)”
Conditions
Some switching system of the central office may
send CPC-like signal in dialing sequence and the
attempt of making a call may be terminated.
If your switching system does not send CPC-like
signal in dialing sequence, we recommend to
make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO
calls.
CPC signal detection can be assigned to
incoming CO calls only or both on incoming and
outgoing CO calls. If CPC signal detection is
assigned to outgoing CO calls only, it does not
function.
8.00 CO Busy Out
Description Operation
Allows the operator 1 (extension user or attendant Setting CO Busy Out to a CO line (from operator
console) to busy out the invalid CO lines. 1)
Any user (including the operator at attendant
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
console) cannot seize the busied-out CO lines.
PHONE button.
To busy out the invalid CO line, dial the feature
number for “Busy Out Trunk” and trunk port
• You hear dial tone.
physical number of the associated CO line.
To return the busied-out CO line to service, dial the
2. Dial the feature number for “Busy
feature number for “Unbusy Trunk” and trunk-port
Out Trunk” and trunk port physical
physical number of the associated CO line.
number.
It is assignable to busy out the invalid CO lines
• You hear confirmation tone.
automatically by using ABC command at dumb
• If your PITS has a display, it
programming mode.
shows:
Refer to Section 10-C-50.00 “Automatic Busy-Out
Count (ABC)” for further information. Busy Out: T xxxx
For CO Busy Out from Attendant Console, refer to
Section 6-J-10.00 “CO Access Control.”
Trunk port physical
number
Programming
Reference
3. Replace the handset or press the
System Programming
VT Dumb SP-PHONE button.

“System-Numbering Plan (09/11)”, 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00

Busy Out Trunk
Unbusy Trunk
“Automatic Busy-Out Count — 10-C-50.00 Canceling CO Busy Out (from operator 1)
(ABC)”
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Conditions
None • You hear dial tone.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Unbusy Trunk” and trunk port
physical number.

• You hear confirmation tone.

• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Unbusy: T xxxx

Trunk port physical

number
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

3-F-11
(70695)
9.00 Parallel Connection of
Extensions
Description Programming
Any Single Line Telephone can be connected Reference
System Programming
parallely with a PITS telephone. VT Dumb
When parallel connection is made, an extension “Extension Station” 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
user can make and answer a call by using either of Parallel Connect
both telephones.

However, the operation of parallely connected Conditions

Single Line Telephone is somewhat restricted as
Not only a Single Line Telephone but an
follows:
answering machine, a facsimile, or a modem
Features not available are: (personal computer) can be connected parallely
• External Feature Access with certain PITS telephones.
• Conference
• Pickup Dialing The parallel connection of a Single Line
• Account Code Entry Telephone and a PITS telephone becomes
available under the following conditions.
Cannot make a call when parallely connected PITS
telephone is: — Parallely connected PITS telephones are
• In the BGM mode interfaced with HLC card.
• Being paged through built-in speaker — The number of Single Line Telephones which
• In the PITS programming mode can be connected parallely with PITS
telephones must be within 48 lines per shelf.
Will not ring if parallely connected PITS telephone
is:
• In the Intercom Automatic Answer mode
• In the Voice Alerting mode

To make parallel connection effective, assign

“Extension-Station,” Parallel Connect to “Yes” at
parallely connected PITS telephone side.

3-F-12
10.00 Voice Processing System (VPS)
Description
The KX-T336 system provides the following features to enhance the performance of the
Voice Processing System (VPS) — KX-TVP150.
• Voice Mail Integration (Section 3-F-10.01)
• DTMF Tone Integration (Section 3-F-10.02)

Voice Mail Integration

The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension's mailbox.
(Configuration)

Incoming DIL 1:1 DIL 1:1

DIL 1:N Mode DISA DISA
(Day):ATT DID DID

CO CO CO CO

Hunting Hunting
Ext. Ext. Ext. ATT Ext. Ext. VPS
Console FWD (Follow on ID is sent)
Transfer IRNA (Follow on ID is sent)
Transfer
FWD (Follow on ID is sent) VPS VPS
Ext.
FWD (Follow on ID is sent)
Ext.

VPS
Hunting Hunting

3-F-13
(21292)
DTMF Tone Integration
The KX-T336 system can send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,
ringing, disconnect, etc.) in addition to the normal call progress tones.
(Configuration 1)
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

CO

Ext.

Transfer Transfer
Ext. VPS Ext.

✕ Hunting Hunting Hunting

FWD (Follow on ID is sent) *

VPS VPS VPS ✕ VPS

Hunting
✕ Hunting Hunting

Ext. VPS *Available if the Voice Mail

Integration feature is enabled.

(Configuration 2)
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

CO

FWD (Follow on ID is sent) * Transfer

Ext. Ext. VPS Ext.
Busy
Hunting Hunting
Hunting Hunting

VPS VPS VPS ✕ VPS

Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting

Ext. VPS *Available if the Voice Mail

Integration feature is enabled.

3-F-14
(21292)
10.01 Voice Mail Integration
Description The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension's
voice mailbox, if the caller is forwarded to a Voice Mail Port (all calls, busy
or no answer) and this feature is enabled by the extension user.
The KX-T336 system automatically sends the digits of mailbox number of
the called extension with DTMF tones to the Voice Mail Port before
connecting the caller.
These digits are commonly known as the Follow on ID.
A max of 16 extension ports (HLC or SLC card) of the KX-T336 system
can be programmed for connection to the Voice Processing System
KX-TVP150.

This feature applies to the following calls.

Calls transferred by :
• Call Forwarding — All Calls
• Call Forwarding — Busy/Off-hook
• Call Forwarding — No Answer
• Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer
(including the calls transferred to the extensions on which one of the
above mentioned Call Forwarding feature is assigned.)
• Intercept Routing — No Answer (IRNA)
(including the transfer recalled outside call and held reminder outside
call)

Extensions assigned as Voice Mail Port are not allowed to connect to

each other. For example, an Automated Attendant Port is not allowed to
connect to another Voice Mail Port.

Note this feature can be programmed in Dumb mode only.

Programming
(Dumb programming mode) 1) Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu
screen is displayed at VT programming mode.

2) Enter P R G and press Return key when Dumb programming

mode initial prompt ( ; > ) is displayed. Then programming mode initial
prompt ( ; PRG > ) is displayed on the screen.

3) Program the required items as follows:

3-F-15
(21292)
Voice Mail Port Assignment:
Input Format PRG>VMD AT Item Number (01-16) CR

Input Value for Item Assigning Items Input Value

Item Number Number
01 Voice Mail DN DNxxxx:Directory Number
• 0: None
•
16 (Default = 0)

To remove the existing setting, use “$CLR” command.

For further information about programming, refer to Section 10-C-54.00
“Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD).”

Mailbox Number Assignment:

Input Format PRG>MBN AT Index Number CR
Index Number = Physical Number of Extension Port or DN

Input Value for Item Assigning Items Input Value

Item Number Number
None Mailbox Number Up to 10 digits of numeric
characters (0-9), “ ” and “ # ”
(Default = Extension Number)

Mailbox Number specific to each extension (same as the extension

number) is assigned to all extensions by default.

To remove the existing setting, use “$CLR” command.

For further information about programming, refer to Section 10-C-55.00
“Mailbox Number (MBN).”

Conditions
1) Station Hunting Group – Circular

To use the Voice Mail Integration feature efficiently, we recommend to

program a station hunting group among the Voice Mail (VM) Extensions,
this would reduce the possibility of the callers encountering the busy
status.

When “Station Hunting Group – Circular” is programmed among the VM

Extensions, a call transferred to the busy VM Extension (including “Not
INS” status) by Call Forwarding (FWD) or Intercept Routing No Answer
(IRNA) feature will be automatically transferred to an idle VM Extension.

3-F-16
(21292)
2) Call Forwarding and Station Hunting

The KX-T336 system can send the Follow on ID (the digits of mailbox
number of the called extension) to the Voice Mail Port, if the caller is
forwarded to a Voice Mail Port.
The following simplified flow chart shows the treatment of the call
forwarded to a VM extension.
No
Is FWD destination a VM extension?

Follow on ID is not sent. Yes

No
Is it busy or in “Not INS” status?

Yes
No
Does it have the next hunt station?

The treatment of the call
depends on the types of
the Call Forwarding
feature assigned.
(Refer to “5. Treatment
of the call forwarded to
the busy extension/VPS”
on page 3-F-46 for
further information.)
Yes
No Is there any idle VM extension within
a Station Hunting Group?
Yes
Callers are forwarded to the called
extension's mailbox directly.

3-F-17
(21292)
3) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) and Station Hunting
The KX-T336 system can send the Follow on ID (the digits of
mailbox number of the called extension) to the Voice Mail Port, if the
caller is transferred to a Voice Mail Port by IRNA feature.
The following simplified flow chart shows the treatment of the call
which has been transferred to a VM extension by the IRNA feature.

No
Is IRNA destination a VM extension?

Follow on ID is not sent. Yes

No
Is it busy or in “Not INS” status?

Yes
No
Does it have the next hunt station?*

Yes
(Refer to “8. Treatment of No Is there any idle VM extension within
the call transferred to the a Station Hunting Group?
busy extension/VPS” on
page 3-F-51 for further
information.) Yes

Caller are transferred to the called

extension's mailbox directly.

* If a call transferred to a busy VM extension by IRNA feature is “Transfer

recalled call” or “Held Reminder Call,” it will be put on the waiting status
whether the IRNA destination has the next station assignment or not.

3-F-18
(21292)
4) Call Transfer and Voice Mail Integration
Not only an incoming call directed to the extension, but a transferred call
(both screened and unscreened call transfer) is applied to the Voice Mail
Integration feature.
Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension and Transfer Recall
Example
VM.108 (busy) VM.107 (busy) VM.106 (busy)

Hunt Hunt
FWD
Ext.100 Ext.101 Ext.102

Making a Transferring
FWD–All Calls
call a call
to VM.106
1. The Ext.100 makes a call to the Ext.101.
2. The Ext.101 answers the call from the Ext.100. and transfers it to the
Ext.102 (Call Forwarding – All Calls to VM 106 is assigned). Then
replaces the handset.
3. Since FWD destination VM.106 and all other VM extensions in the
Station Hunting Group are busy, the call from Ext.100 is put on the
waiting status.

<Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension>

If VM.106 becomes idle before the transfer recall timer has been elapsed,
the call is connected to the VM.106, and the caller can access the
Mailbox of the Ext.100 automatically.
Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension is only available when “Call
Forwarding–All Calls” is assigned to the Ext.102.
<Transfer Recall>
If VM.106 is still busy after the transfer recall timer has been elapsed, the
call will ring back at Ext.101.
What if Call Forwarding (FWD)-No Answer is assigned on the
extension where a call has been transferred without announcement
(Unscreened Call Transfer) ?
A call is forwarded to the FWD destination after the Call Forwarding No
Answer timer has been expired.
If the FWD destination is busy, the forwarded call will ring back at the
extension who transferred the call.
(Note)
In above case, if the destination of Call Forwarding-No Answer is an
Attendant Console, the transferred call is not forwarded to an Attendant
Console.
The transferred call rings back at the extension who transferred the call
after the Call Forwarding No Answer timer has been expired.
3-F-19
(21292)
5) Others
(a) If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded itself is in a call
forward mode, a call will not be forwarded furthermore and it is
connected to the first forwarded extension.
Example
Ext.100 Ext.101 Ext.102
Not
FWD
An incoming call ×
(Programming) Forward to : Forward to :
Ext.101 Ext.102

An incoming call is forwarded to Ext.101 and connected to it, not

forwarded to Ext.102 furthermore.

(b) If an Operator calls to the extension in a call forward mode by

employing “One time FWD cancel” feature, a call is not forwarded
furthermore and rings on the FWD setting extension.

(c) Conference call

The VM extension can not originate a conference call.

(Example)
During a call with the Party 1 while putting the Party 2 on consultation
hold.
• If an SLT extension (not a VM extension) presses the switchhook, a
conference call among three parties is established.
• In case of a VM extension, it will be connected to the Party 2 and the
Party 1 is disconnected.

Reference Station Hunting — Circular (Section 3-D-5.02)

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) (Section 3-F-5.00)
Call Forwarding (FWD) (Section 4-F-2.00, Section 5-D-2.00)
Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD) (Section 10-C-54.00)
Mailbox Number (MBN) (Section 10-C-55.00)

3-F-20
(21292)
10.02 DTMF Tone Integration
Description On extensions with the Voice Mail Port parameter enabled, the KX-T336
system can send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the sate of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, disconnect, etc.) in addition to the normal call
progress tones. These codes enable the Voice Processing system to
immediately recognize the current state of the call and improve its call
handling performance. These codes apply to all incoming calls: Outside
calls only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-T336 system is
programmed properly for CPC detection and the Central Office sends the
CPC signal).

Programming 1) Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu
screen is displayed at VT programming mode.

2) Enter P R G and press Return key when Dumb programming

mode initial prompt (;>) is displayed. Then programming mode initial
prompt (; PRG>) is displayed on the screen.

3) At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:

; PRG > WS 3 AT 3 (↵ )
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration.............. N
; INPUT >>

4) At the Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:

; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration............... N
; INPUT >> Y (↵ )

5) The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) for Item 1 as
follows:
; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration............... N
; INPUT >> Y
; 1 : DIL 1:N CO Key Only ................. N
; INPUT >>

6) To store the new assignment to the system, at Input prompt

(INPUT >>), type:
; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration............... N
; INPUT >> Y
; 1 : DIL 1:N CO Key Only ................. N
; INPUT >> $ EOD (↵ )

This assigns the DTMF-Tone Integration feature to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG>) appears on the screen again.

3-F-21
(21292)
Conditions The following table describes the DTMF codes, call state and typical
condition where the KX-T336 system would send the code.

Code Call State Typical Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension it

dialed is ringing.

B 1 Busy Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension it

dialed is busy.

B 2 Reorder Tone Sent to the VPS if it dials an invalid

extension number or if it is
inadvertently connected to another
VPS.

B 3 DND Tone Sent to the VPS if the dialed extension

has set DND feature (Do Not Disturb).

A 2 Answer Sent to the VPS when the called

extension answers the call.

C 1 Forwarded to Voice Sent to the VPS if the caller is

Mail (Ringing) forwarded to a voice mail port and that
voice mail port is available to accept
the call.

C 2 Forwarded to Voice Sent to the VPS if the caller is

Mail (Busy) forwarded to a voice mail port and that
voice mail port is not available to
accept the call.

C 3 Forwarded to Sent to the VPS if the caller is

Extension (Ringing) forwarded to another, non-voice mail,
extension.

D 1 Confirmation Tone Sent to the VPS when it successfully

dials a message waiting lamp on or
message waiting lamp off code.

D D Disconnect Sent to the VPS when the calling party

(Reorder Tone) disconnects.

3-F-22
(21292)
A. Treatment of the call transferred by the VPS
The treatment of the call from a VPS extension varies depending on the
conditions.
The following detailed information explains the treatment of a call from a
VPS extension by the types of the call.

1. Direct Call
1-1. To an extension

Caller

Transfer
VPS 1 Ext. 1

The type of the DTMF tones sent to the VPS depends on the status of the
called extension as follows.

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.1 is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone The Ext.1 is busy.

B 3 DND Tone The Ext.1 is in the DND mode.

A 2 Answer The Ext.1 answers the call.

1-2. To another VPS extension

Caller

VPS 1 ✕
Transfer
VPS 2

A call from a VPS extension does ring on another VPS extension whether
it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

B 2 Reorder Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected

to the VPS 2

3-F-23
(21292)
2. Station Hunting
2-1. All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions

Caller Ext.4
Hunting Hunting

Transfer
VPS 1 Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.3

Hunting Hunting
Ext.2

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

2-2. All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions

✕ ✕
Caller VPS 5

VPS 1 ✕
Transfer
VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 4

✕ VPS 3
✕
A call from a VPS extension does not ring on another VPS extension
whether it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

B 2 Busy Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected

to another VPS.

3-F-24
(21292)
2. Station Hunting (continued)
2-3. Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group
A) When the destination is a VPS extension

Caller Ext.2
✕ Hunting

Transfer
VPS 1 VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 3

Hunting ✕
Ext.1

A call from a VPS extension does not ring on another VPS extension
whether it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

B 2 Busy Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected

to another VPS.

B) When the destination is a non-VPS extension.

Caller VPS 3 ✕
Hunting

Transfer
VPS 1 Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.2

✕ Hunting
VPS 2

The call hunts for the idle non-VPS extension only.

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.1 or 2 is idle.

C 2 Busy Tone Both Ext.1 and 2 are busy. *

* This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-25
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD)
3-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension

Caller

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 Ext.2
FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 3 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it)

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
The call is still ringing at the
Ext.1.

3-F-26
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD) (continued)
3-2. FWD to a VPS extension

Caller

Transfer Forward
VPS1 Ext.1 VPS 2
FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.

(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2.) *1

C 2 Busy Tone *2 The VPS 2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2.) *1

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is busy.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-27
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting
4-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)

Caller Ext.5
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

Ext.3

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 3 Ringback Tone At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone At least one extension

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) of a hunting group is
↓ idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle
extension of a hunting group
and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone All extensions of a

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
The call is still ringing at Ext.1.

3-F-28
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4-2. FWD to a VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)

Caller VPS 5
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 3

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 1 Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is forwarded to an idle VPS extension of a hunting
extension and ringing on it.) *1 group is idle.

C 2 Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) extension of a hunting
↓ group is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle VPS
extension and ringing on it.) *1

A 1 Ringback Tone All members of a

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
an idle VPS extension and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to an idle VPS extension.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-29
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4.3 FWD to a non-VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Caller VPS 3
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 2

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 3 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.2)

C 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but

(The call is forwarded to the the VPS 2 is idle.
VPS 2.) *1

C 3 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 2

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) are busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS
3 are idle.

C 2 Busy Tone *2 All members of a

hunting group are busy.

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-30
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) The VPS 2 is idle.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 2

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) are busy.
↓
The Ext.3 and the VPS
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
3 are idle.
has been elapsed.
↓
C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone All members of a

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-31
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4.4 FWD to a VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Caller Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 3

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.
(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.

(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

C 3 Ringback Tone The VPS 2,3 and 4 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) busy.
The Ext.3 is idle.

C 2 Busy Tone *2 All members of a

hunting group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

Continued

3-F-32
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
Continued

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2,3 and 4 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) busy.
↓
The Ext.3 is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.3 and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone All members of a

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-33
(21292)
B. Treatment of the call placed by the extension or outside party
The treatment of a call from the extension or outside party varies
depending on the conditions of the called extension.
The KX-T336 system does not send codes (DTMF tones).
The following detailed information explains the treatment of a call from
the extension or outside party by the types of the call.

1. Direct Call
1-1. To an extension

Ext./CO Ext.1/VPS 1

The type of call progress tones sent to the caller varies depending on the
status of the called extension/VPS as follows.

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1 The Ext.1/VPS 1 is idle.

Busy Tone The Ext.1/VPS 1 is busy.

DND Tone The Ext.1/VPS 1 is in the DND mode. *2

Answer The Ext.1/VPS 1 answers the call.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

If an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*2 In case of calls via DISA/DID
If a call via DISA/DID is directed to an extension in the DND mode, it will be
automatically redirected to another extension (including VPS extension) or an
attendant console assigned as the IRNA destination.
For further information, refer to Section 4-D-6.00, 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

3-F-34
(30393)
2. Station Hunting
2-1. All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions

Ext.4
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.3

Hunting Hunting
Ext.2

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone * At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

* In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

2-2. All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions

VPS 4
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3

Hunting Hunting
VPS 2

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone * At least one VPS extension of a

hunting group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

* The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-35
(21292)
2. Station Hunting (continued)
2-3. Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group
A) When the destination is a VPS extension

Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 2

Hunting Hunting
Ext.1

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1,*2 At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-36
(21292)
2. Station Hunting (continued)
B) When the destination is a non-VPS extension.

VPS 2
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.2

Hunting Hunting
VPS 1

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1,*2 At least one member of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are

busy.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-37
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD)
3-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 Ext.2
FWD mode
(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1 The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone *2 The Ext.2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
The call is still ringing at the
Ext.1. *2

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-38
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD) (continued)
3-2. FWD to a VPS extension

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 VPS 1
FWD mode
(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.

(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1.) *1

Busy Tone *2 The VPS 1 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1.) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is busy.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone *2
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1.)

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.

Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-39
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting
4-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)

Ext.5
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

Ext.3

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1 At least one extension of a hunting

group is idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members (including the Ext.1) of a

hunting group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one extension of

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) a hunting group is idle.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
The call is forwarded to an idle
extension of a hunting group
and ringing on it. *1

Ringback Tone All extensions of a

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
The call is still ringing at Ext.1. *2

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.
3-F-40
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4-2. FWD to a VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)

VPS 4
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 2

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is forwarded to an idle extension of a hunting
VPS extension and ringing on it.) *1 group is idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) extension of a hunting
↓ group is busy.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle
VPS extension and ringing on it.)*1

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone *2
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1.)

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-41
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4.3 FWD to a non-VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

VPS 2
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 1

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.2) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but the

(The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 is idle.
VPS 1 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) *1 busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS 2
are idle.

Busy Tone *3 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-42
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) The VPS 1 is idle.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the VPS
1 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) busy.
↓
The Ext.3 is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.3
and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1) *3

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

3-F-43
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

4.4 FWD to a VPS extension

(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 2

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.
(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.

(The call is forwarded to the VPS
2 and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1,2 and 3 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.2) *2 busy.
The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone *3 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

3-F-44
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.1)
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the VPS
1 and ringing on it) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1,2 and 3 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) busy.
↓
The Ext.2 is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting

(The call is ringing at Ext.1) group are busy.
↓
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.
↓
Ringback Tone
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1) *3

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)

In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-45
(21292)
 5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS
The following table shows the treatment of the call forwarded to the busy
extension or VPS (including all members of the Station Hunting Group are
busy) by types of the Call Forwarding feature assigned.
Outside Call
Extension Call
DID DIL 1:1 DISA

The call is put on the waiting status,

and it will be connected to the FWD
destination as soon as it becomes
idle. If the FWD destination is still
busy after the IRNA timer has been
elapsed, a call will be transferred to
the IRNA destination.

Call Forwarding – All Calls: The caller hears busy tone. If the IRNA destination is not
programmed.

The call is put The call will be

on the waiting disconnected
status until the within 60
FWD destination seconds after the
becomes idle. IRNA timer has
been elapsed.

Call Forwarding does not function.

The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be

transferred to the IRNA destination after a
specified time period* has been elapsed.
When the call ringing at The call
Ext.1 is not answered. continues to If the IRNA destination is not programmed.
ring at Ext.1.
The call The call is disconnected within 60
continues seconds after the IRNA timer has
to ring at been elapsed.
Ext.1.

Call Forwarding If Ext.1 is Call Forwarding does not function.

– Busy/Off-hook an SLT or a
– No Answer PITS with The caller hears busy tone.
–Busy/No Answer all PDN
buttons are
in use.

Call Forwarding does not function.

When
Ext.1 is The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be
busy or If Ext.1 is a transferred to the IRNA destination after the IRNA
off-hook. PITS and timer has been elapsed.
one or two The call
PDN continues to If the IRNA destination is not programmed.
buttons on ring on an idle
it are not in The call The call will be disconnected within
PDN of Ext.
use. continues 60 seconds after the IRNA timer
to ring at has been elapsed.
Ext.1.

* Call Forwarding No Answer timer + IRNA timer

3-F-46
(21292)
6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)
6-1. IRNA to a non-VPS extension

IRNA
CO Ext.1 Ext.2
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone * The Ext.2 is busy.

* Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

6-2. IRNA to a VPS extension

IRNA
CO Ext.1 VPS 1
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.

(The call is transferred to the
VPS 1.) *1

Busy Tone *2 The VPS 1 is busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-47
(21292)(E)
7. IRNA and Station Hunting
7-1. IRNA to a non-VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)
Ext.5
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.4
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
Ext.3

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one extension in a hunting group

is idle.

Busy Tone * All members in a hunting group are busy.

* Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

7-2. IRNA to a VPS extension

(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)
The call hunts for an idle VPS extension in a hunting group following the
programmed order.
VPS 4
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
VPS 2

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS

↓ extension in a hunting
(The call is transferred to an idle group is idle.
VPS extension.) *1

Busy Tone *2 All members in a hunting

group are busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-48
(21292)(E)
7. IRNA and Station Hunting (continued)
7.3 IRNA to a non-VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

VPS 2
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.3
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
VPS 1

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

(The call is ringing at Ext.2)

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but the

(The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 is idle.
VPS 1 and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.3) busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS 2
are idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-49
(21292)
7. IRNA and Station Hunting (continued)
7.4 IRNA to a VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
VPS 2

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.

(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1.) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1,2 and 3 are

(The call is ringing at Ext.2) busy.
The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting

group are busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called

extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-50
(21292)
8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA feature
The following table shows the treatment of the call transferred to the busy
extension or VPS (including all members of a Station Hunting Group are
busy.)

DID DIL 1:1 DISA

The call continues to The call is put on the waiting status, and it will
ring at the called be connected to the IRNA destination as soon
extension or VPS, and as it becomes idle.
it will not be
transferred to the If the IRNA destination does not become idle.
IRNA destination by
the IRNA feature. A call continues to be The call will be
on the waiting status disconnected if the
until the IRNA IRNA destination
destination becomes does not become idle
idle. within 1 minute.
(In case of the IRNA
destination is an
attendant console, a
call will be
disconnected within 3
minutes.)

3-F-51
(21292)
11.00 Call Accounting Summary
The KX-T336 System has the following three programming items related to Call
Accounting.

• System — Class of Service

“Forced Account Code Mode”
( Section 4-I-2.00, Section 5-G-2.00 “Account Code Entry”
Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”
Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1))

• Account Code Verified (ACV)

(Section 10-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified”)

• Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls

(Section 10-C-57.00 “Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL))

You can use any combination of those three programming items as follows.

Table 1. shows available combination of those three programming items.

Account Code Entry

Forced Account Account Code on Long Distance
Code Mode Verified (ACV) Calls (ACL)

1 Yes Yes

2 Yes No
Yes
(Forced mode)
3 No Yes

4 No No

5 Yes Yes

6 Yes No
No
(Option mode)
7 No Yes

8 No No

Table 1.

3-F-52
(21292)
Table 2. shows how each combination of programming items works.

Restriction by Toll
Account Code Entry Validity Check
Restriction Table

Not restricted, if a system

1 registered account code is
entered
Always checked

2 Restricted

Always required
Not restricted, if an
3 appropriate account code
is entered
Not checked

4 Restricted

Not restricted, if a system

5 registered account code is
Checked entered
(if the account code
is entered)
6 Restricted

Not required
Not restricted, if an
7 appropriate account code
is entered
Not checked

8 Restricted

Table 2.

3-F-53
(21292)
When both ACL and ACV features are assigned (for U.S.A. and Canada)

The extension user can override the restriction on numbers (registered in the
Toll Restriction Table) by entering the account code before making an outside
call if the validly of the account code entered is proved by the system.

The following example shows how to restrict the extension users from dialing a
specific outside number, and allow some of them to dial that number.

Example
(A) To prevent the extension users (whose COS No.=02) from dialing a
specific outside number, follow the steps below.

(For example)
(1) + 201 + 204 + XXXX

1. Assign TRLE of the extension lower than TRLL and TRLT as follows.
(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.”)

TRLL (Toll Restriction Level of Local Access)

System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 01

Level of Local Access

Group (TRLL)

Section 9-D-5.00 “Local Access Group”

Section 10-C-9.00 “Local Access Group (LAG)”

TRLE (Toll Restriction Level of Extension)

System-Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Level (Day) ............. 02

Toll Restriction Level (Night)........... 02

Level of Extension
(TRLE)

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1)”

3-F-54
(60395)
(In case of “Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.”)

TRLT (Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group) of a specific trunk group

Group - Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL

Trunk Group No.= 02 (1/2)

Type........................ DDD
Name......................

Intercept Routing (Night) EXT:5002 (Type:No.)

Toll Restriction Level ..... 01

Level of Trunk Group

(TRLT)

Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group (1/2)”

Section 10-C-14.00 “Trunk Group 1 (TG1)

TRLE (Toll Restriction Level of Extension)

System-Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Level (Day) ............. 02

Toll Restriction Level (Night) ........... 02

Level of Extension
(TRLE)

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1)”

3-F-55
(21292)
2. Program the Area/Office Code Tables as follows.

Select Y (In case of Type-D)

Enter Restriction Level of Area Code
Area/Office Code

Enter Restriction Level “02” in “AL” field of Area/Office Code 201.

If dialing plan type-D is applied in your area, select “Y” in “L” field of
Area/Office Code 201.

3. Register the last 7-digit (Office Code + Subscriber Number) of a specific

outside number to be restricted for COS.02 extensions as follows.

the last 7-digit of a specific outside number to be restricted.

Section 9-I-3.00 “7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table”

Section 10-C-34.00 “Toll Restriction 3 (TR3)”

Note:
The outside number registered applies to both local and long distance calls.
(Example)
(1) + 201 + 204 + XXXX (Long Distance)
204 + XXXX (Local)

3-F-56
(50195)
4. Register the Area/Office Code Table No. to be used as follows:
(Local Trunk Dial Access)

System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 01

Toll Restriction Table 1

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL

Area/Office Code Table No. =1 Entry 200

(Individual Trunk Group Dial Access and Direct Trunk Access)

Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL

Trunk Group No. =02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Table 1

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL

Area/Office Code Table No. =1 Entry 200

3-F-57
(21292)
(B) To allow the extension users (whose COS No.=02) to override the
restriction on numbers.
1. Assign System – Class of Service “Forced Account Code Mode” for COS.02
to “No.” as follows.

System-Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Level (Day) ............. 01

Toll Restriction Level (Night)........... 02

CO Transfer Mode........................... Yes

Forced Account Code Mode ........... No

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1)”

2. Assign ACV and ACL features to “Y (Yes)” for COS.02 extension users as
follows.

ACV
; PRG>ACV AT<CR>
; Class of Service No. 01........... N
; INPUT>> <CR>
; Class of Service No. 02........... N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 03........... N
; INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )

ACL
; PRG>ACL AT<CR>
; Class of Service No. 01........... N
; INPUT>> <CR>
; Class of Service No. 02........... N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 03........... N
; INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-57.00 “Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)” )

3-F-58
(21292)
3. To register the System Account Codes, first divide the System Speed Dialing
area into two areas by entering the SPB command as follows.

To assign 80 Speed Dialing Codes and 120 System Account Codes in the
Speed Dialing Screen, enter as follows.
; PRG>SPB AT<CR>
; Speed Dial Boundary............... 200
; INPUT>> 080 <CR>
; Speed Dial Boundary............... 080
; INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )

Then you can register the System Account Codes into the System Speed
Dialing Codes from No.081 to 200 as follows.

Section 9-D-8.00 “Speed Dialing – System”

Section 10-C-12.00 “Speed Dialing – System (SPD)”

3-F-59
(21292)
When the programming steps from (A)1 through (B)3 have already been
done, the treatment of an outside call made by an extension user (whose
COS.No. is 02) depends on the operation as follows.

(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.”)

PITS

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 9 + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx is Restricted by “Toll
Restricted. Restriction Table.”
(Call is not
completed.) The account code
2 9 + FWD/DND + 3456# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

3 9 + FWD/DND + 1234# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
(Call is completed.)

SLT

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 9 + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx is Restricted by “Toll
Restricted. Restriction Table.”
(Call is not
9 + + 3456# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx completed.) The account code
2 #
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

3 9 + # + 1234# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
(Call is completed.)

(In case of “Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.”)
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access

When making an outside call by specifying the trunk group 02.

PITS

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 8 1 2 + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx is Restricted by “Toll
Restricted. Restriction Table.”
(Call is not
completed.) The account code
2 8 1 2 + FWD/DND + 3456# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

3 8 1 2 + FWD/DND + 1234# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
(Call is completed.)

3-F-60
(21292)(E)
SLT

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 8 1 2 + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx is Restricted by “Toll
Restricted. Restriction Table.”
(Call is not
completed.) The account code
2 8 1 2 + # + 3456# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

3 8 1 2 + # + 1234# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
(Call is completed.)

Direct Trunk Access

PITS

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 CO button + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx is Restricted by “Toll
Restricted. Restriction Table.”
(Call is not
CO button + FWD/DND + 3456# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx completed.) The account code
2
entered is “Not valid.”

Restriction on number is overridden.

3 CO button + FWD/DND + 1234# + [(1) + 201+] 204xxxx
(Call is completed.)

CO buttons which belong to the trunk group 02.

3-F-61
(21292)
When both ACL and ACV features are assigned (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

The extension user can override the restriction on number by entering the
account code before making an outside call if the validly of the account code
entered is proved by the system.

The following example shows how to restrict the extension users from dialing a
specific outside number, and allow some of them to dial that number.

Example
1. Assign the first 3-digit of a specific number to be restricted for COS.02
extensions as follows.

the first 3-digit of a specific outside number to be restricted.

Section 9-I-4.00 “3 Digit Toll Restriction Table”

Section 10-C-34.00 “Toll Restriction 3 (TR3)”

(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.”)

2. Assign TRLE of the extension lower than TRLL as follows.

TRLE (Toll Restriction Level of Extension)

System-Class of Service OFL PRGSCR DIR

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Level (Day) ............. 02

Toll Restriction Level (Night) ........... 02

Level of Extension
(TRLE)

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1)”

3-F-61-1 (X)
(60395)
 TRLL (Toll Restriction Level of Local Access)
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 01

Level of Local Access

Group (TRLL)

Section 9-D-5.00 “Local Access Group”

Section 10-C-9.00 “Local Access Group (LAG)”

(In case of “Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.”)

2. Assign TRLE of the extension lower than TRLT of a specific trunk group as
follows.

TRLE (Toll Restriction Level of Extension)

System-Class of Service OFL PRGSCR DIR

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Level (Day) ............. 02

Toll Restriction Level (Night) ........... 02

Level of Extension
(TRLE)

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1)”

TRLT (Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group)

Group - Trunk Group OFL PRGSCR SEL

Trunk Group No.= 02 (1/2)

Type............................... DDD
Name.............................

Intercept Routing (Night) EXT:5002 (Type:No.)

Toll Restriction Level...... 01

Level of Trunk Group

(TRLT)

Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group (1/2)”

Section 10-C-14.00 “Trunk Group 1 (TG1) ”

3-F-61-2 (X)
(60395)
3. Assign System – Class of Service “Forced Account Code Mode” for COS.02
to “No.” as follows.

System-Class of Service OFL PRGSCR DIR

Class of Service (COS) No.= 02 (1/2)

Toll Restriction Level (Day) ............. 01

Toll Restriction Level (Night) ........... 02

CO Transfer Mode........................... Yes

Forced Account Code Mode........... No

Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service (1/2)”

Section 10-C-7.00 “Class of Service 1 (CS1)”

4. Assign ACV and ACL features to “Y (Yes)” for COS.02 extension users as
follows.

ACV
; PRG>ACV AT<CR>
; Class of Service No. 01........... N
; INPUT>> <CR>
; Class of Service No. 02........... N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 03........... N
; INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )

ACL
; PRG>ACL AT<CR>
; Class of Service No. 01........... N
; INPUT>> <CR>
; Class of Service No. 02........... N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 03........... N
; INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-57.00 “Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)” )

3-F-61-3 (X)
(60395)
5. To register the System Account Codes, first divide the System Speed Dialing
area into two areas by entering the SPB command as follows.

To assign 80 Speed Dialing Codes and 120 System Account Codes in the
Speed Dialing Screen, enter as follows.
; PRG>SPB AT<CR>
; Speed Dial Boundary............... 200
; INPUT>> 080 <CR>
; Speed Dial Boundary............... 080
; INPUT>> $ EOD <CR>
; PRG>

( Section 10-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified” )

Then you can register the System Account Codes into the System Speed
Dialing Codes from No.081 to 200 as follows.

Section 9-D-8.00 “Speed Dialing – System”

Section 10-C-12.00 “Speed Dialing – System (SPD)”

3-F-61-4 (X)
(60395)
When the programming procedures from 1 to 5 have already been done, the
treatment of an outside call made by an extension user (whose COS.No. is
02) depends on the operation as follows.

(In case of “Local Trunk Dial Access.”)

PITS

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 9 + 0xxxx is Restricted by “3 Digit
Restricted Toll Restriction Table”
(Call is not completed)
The account code
2 9 + FWD/DND + 3456# + 0xxxx
entered is “Not valid”

Restriction on number is overridden

3 9 + FWD/DND + 1234# + 0xxxx
(Call is completed)

SLT

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 9 + 0xxxx is Restricted by “3 Digit
Restricted Toll Restriction Table”
(Call is not completed)
9 + # + 3456# + 0xxxx The account code
2
entered is “Not valid”

Restriction on number is overridden

3 9 + # + 1234# + 0xxxx
(Call is completed)

(In case of “Individual Trunk Group Dial Access” and “Direct Trunk Access.”)
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access

When making an outside call by specifying the trunk group 02.

PITS

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 8 1 2 + 0xxxx is Restricted by “3 Digit
Restricted Toll Restriction Table”
(Call is not completed)
The account code
2 8 1 2 + FWD/DND + 3456# + 0xxxx
entered is “Not valid”

Restriction on number is overridden

3 8 1 2 + FWD/DND + 1234# + 0xxxx
(Call is completed)

3-F-61-5 (X)
(60395)
SLT

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 8 1 2 + 0xxxx is Restricted by “3 Digit
Restricted Toll Restriction Table”
(Call is not completed)
8 1 2 + + 3456# + 0xxxx The account code
2 #
entered is “Not valid”

Restriction on number is overridden

3 8 1 2 + # + 1234# + 0xxxx
(Call is completed)

Direct Trunk Access

PITS

Operation Result

The outside number dialed

1 CO button + 0xxxx is Restricted by “3 Digit
Restricted Toll Restriction Table”
(Call is not completed)
CO button + FWD/DND + 3456# + 0xxxx The account code
2
entered is “Not valid”

Restriction on number is overridden

3 CO button + FWD/DND + 1234# + 0xxxx
(Call is completed)

CO buttons which belong to the trunk group 02.

3-F-61-6 (X)
(60395)
12.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone
Description
In some areas, upon completion of area code entry, the extension user must
ensure the reception of the second dial tone from the central office before
continuing to dial the rest of the telephone number.

The following dialing procedures assume that the required system

programming has already been done.

Dialing Procedures
(1) Manual Dialing

1. Feature number for selecting a CO line + Area Code is dialed.

↓
2. CO line specified is seized instantly, if available. (* 1)
↓
3. Area code dialed is sent to the Central Office.
↓
4. Second CO dial tone is returned in a delayed timing. (* 2, * 3, * 4 )
↓
5. The rest of the telephone number dialed at an extension is sent to
the Central Office.

(2) Memory Dialing

1. One Touch Dialing / Speed Dialing / LNR / SNR

↓
2. CO line specified is seized instantly, if available. (* 1)
↓
3. Leading one through four digits (Area code) of the memorized
number is sent to the Central Office automatically. (* 2, * 3, * 4 )
↓
4. Second CO dial tone is returned in a delayed timing. (* 2, * 3, * 4 )
↓
5. The rest of the memorized number is sent to the CO line
automatically. (* 2, * 3, * 4 )

To support the WSD dialing procedure, the following system programming

should be done beforehand.

3-F-62
(30393)
Note:
(
* 1) Assign “CO Access Instantly (CAI)” feature to “Yes” on a trunk group by
entering the CAI command.
This feature is programmable on a trunk group basis.
In case of Local Trunk Dial Access, the system decides the mode by the
top trunk group of Local Trunk Hunt Sequence.
Refer to Section 10-C-58.00 “CO Access Instantly (CAI)” for further
information.
(
* 2) Set the WSD (Waiting Second Dial tone) mode to “Yes” by entering the
WS3 command.
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further
information.
(
* 3) Assign “External First Digit Time-out” timer longer than a delayed timing
of the second dial tone from Central Office.
(
* 4) Register the required area code and pause time by entering the WSD
command.
Refer to Section 10-C-61.00 “Waiting for Second Dial tone (WSD)” for
further information

Programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb

“System—System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00

External First Digit Time-Out
“World Select 3 (WS3)” — 10-C-53.00

“CO Access Instantly (CAI)” — 10-C-58.00

“Waiting Second Dial Tone (WSD)” — 10-C-61.00

Conditions
External First Digit Time-Out
This timer is usually used to set the waiting time allowed between CO dial
tone or pseudo dial tone and the Time-out first digit dialed.
However, if the WSD feature is utilized by system programming, this timer
works to set the waiting time allowed between area code dialed and the
remaining number dialed.

3-F-63
(30393)
13.00 Timed Reminder with OGM (Wake-up Call)
Description A wake-up call can be set either by any extension user to his or her own
extension, or by the Operator 1 or 2 (Attendant Console or Extension) to any
extension.
When this feature is activated, the extension user can hear a wake-up message
by going off-hook after being alerted by the alarm tone at a specified time.

To utilize this feature, a wake-up message should be recorded by the Operator

1 beforehand.
(Refer to Section 3-F-4.00, 4-I-13.00 and 6-J-8.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back.”)

This feature is functionally equivalent to “Timed Reminder” (if set by the

extension user himself) or “Remote Timed Reminder” ( if set by the Operators).
The difference is, this feature provides the wake-up message instead of the
second dial tone when the extension user goes off-hook.

Up to four extension users per DISA card can initially hear the wake-up
message at a time, and a maximum of four DISA cards can be installed to the
system. That is, up to 16 extension users can initially hear the wake-up
message at a time, if a maximum of four DISA cards are installed.

<Example>
Assuming that one DISA card (For Use is W-UP) is installed in the system, and
six extension users have set the wake-up call to ring at 7:30 A.M.

1. At 7:30 A.M, timed reminder tone (alarm tone) begins to ring at six
extensions simultaneously.

2. Each extension user goes off-hook respectively.

The first four extension users (who go off-hook earlier than two other
extensions) can hear the wake-up message and two other extensions hear
BGM. *1

3. Two other extension users will hear the wake-up message instead of BGM
when:
• Next playback of the message begins.*2
• A DISA resource is released, that is, the extension user goes on-hook after
hearing the wake-up message.

3-F-64
(40993)
 Note:
*1 To utilize BGM, set the usage of music source to “BGM” or “Hold & BGM.”
If set to “Hold,” other two extensions hear the second dial tone instead of BGM
and will not be able to hear a wake-up message.
(See Section 9-F-2.00 “Pager and Music Source.”)

*2 Endless loop OGM

A wake-up message is always played back from the beginning of it to the
extension user when he or she goes off-hook to hear a wake-up message.
It is played back repeatedly until the extension goes on-hook.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Special Attended — DISA”, 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00

For Use
“System — Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
External Music Source 1, 2
“Trunk — Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00
Music Source — For use
Music Source — Tenant

Conditions The following simplified flowchart shows the treatment of the extension user
who goes off-hook after being alerted by an alarm tone.

Alarm tone is
ringing

Off-hook *1

Intermittent tone (dial tone 2) *2

is sent to the extension when No DISA for
he or she goes off-hook. wake-up is
assigned?
Yes
No BGM is * 5 No DISA card *3
assigned? “INS”?

Yes Yes
No OGM resource *4
BGM is sent to the is idle?
extension when he or
she goes off-hook. Yes

Wake-up
*6
message is
sent to the
extension
when he or
she goes off-
hook.

3-F-65
(40993)
Note:
*1 This feature works if the extension user goes off-hook while the alarm tone is
ringing for 2 minutes.
*2 Tenant Service
If the tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and 2) can have its unique
wake-up message respectively.
In this case, affiliations of the wake-up message and the extension should be
the same tenant.
*3 Operating Status
Refer to Section 14-C-2.00 “Definition of Operating Status.”
*4 OGM busy
Up to four extensions per DISA card can initially receive a wake-up message at
a time.
*5 BGM
To utilize BGM, set the usage of music source to “BGM” or “Hold & BGM.”
(Refer to Section 9-F-2.00 “Pager and Music Source.”)
*6 From BGM to a wake-up message
The extension who currently hears BGM will hear the wake-up message instead
of BGM when:
• Next playback of the message begins.
• A DISA resource is released, that is, the extension user goes on-hook after
hearing the message.

3-F-66
(40993)
14.00 TIE Lines
Description A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs,
which provides cost effective communications between company members at
different locations.

TIE lines can be used to call through KX-T336 to reach another switching
system (PBX or CO). By utilizing the TIE lines, the KX-T336 can support not
only communications with the public network but with other locations of the
company in the private network which your KX-T336 can be a part of.

To make a call to a person in a distant company location, an extension user

must first obtain the appropriate TIE line to that person’s PBX, and then dial the
extension number only or a location number plus extension number.

A Network of TIE Lines

Numbering Plan: Extension users can make a call over the TIE Line Network to other extension
users in a distant location by one of the following procedures.

1. Extension Number only (See Section 3-F-14.01.)

• Extension Number
• CO (TIE) button + Extension Number
• Trunk Group Access Number + Extension Number

2. Location Number (PBX Code) + Extension Number (See Section 3-F-14.01.)

• TIE Trunk Access Code + PBX Code + Extension Number
• CO (TIE) button + PBX Code + Extension Number
• Trunk Group Access Number + PBX Code + Extension Number

3-F-67
(70695)
Routing Procedure 1: Routing Table
Provides for the routing of calls over the TIE Line Network.
Up to 36 routing patterns can be programmed in this table.
This table is referenced by the system to identify the trunk route, when an
extension user made a TIE call by dialing the feature number for “TIE Trunk
Access,” or Other PBX extension number. A routing pattern appropriate for
each call is decided by the first one, two or three digits (except TIE trunk access
code) of the dialed number.

• Routing Table Override

If a TIE call is made by pressing a CO key or dialing Trunk Group Access
Number, this table is not referenced by the system and the call is routed over
the specified TIE trunk directly.

(Programming Example)

A Network of TIE Lines

TIE Line Routing Table in PBX-1

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Digit Dial 01 02
01 951 0 10
02
:

When "84* (TIE Trunk Access Code)+951+100" is dialed by an extension user,

the routing pattern for this call is decided by "951."
Then the call is routed over TG10 (Trunk Group 10 whose type is "TIE").
* Default for Fixed 1.

3-F-68
(70695)
Routing Procedure 2: Routing Flow Chart
(1) When a TIE call is made by an extension user in your PBX

Analyzing extension dialed number

Extension TIE Trunk Access CO button or

Trunk Group
Access for TIE

No
Own Ext. No?
Yes
Other PBX Extension?
Yes

Is the first 1-3- No

digit registered
in the TIE
Routing Table?
Yes

Is TIE line
selected by hunt
No
sequence allowed
by Trunk Group
Access (COS)?

Yes

Calling to Extension Calling to TIE Reorder Tone Calling to TIE

(Note)
TRLE = Toll Restriction Level of Extension
TRLT = Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group

3-F-69
(70695)
Routing Procedure 2: (2) When a TIE call comes in on your PBX from other PBXs.

Analyzing digits sent

from the other PBX.

No Is there a PBX Code

in the received digits?

Yes
Does the leading 3-
No
digit of the received
digits match your
PBX Code?
Yes
Is your PBX’s CO
access code or No
extension number
included in the
received digits?
Yes
Is there a CO
No
access code of
your PBX in the
received digits?
Yes
Is "TIE - CO
Restriction" of the No
Calling to CO.
selected trunk group
set to "Yes"?
Yes
Sends reorder tone.

Does the leading 3- No

Is there your PBX’s No
digit of the received Sends reorder tone.
extension number in
digits match a “Code”
the received digits?
in a Routing Table?
Yes

Yes
Does that extension No
actually exist? Trunk group for
making an outgoing
Yes TIE call is decided
by a Routing Table.
No Sends busy
Is it idle?
tone.

Yes Is "TIE Trunk Relay

Sends digits
Restriction" of the No
Calling to the received from one
selected trunk group
specified extension. PBX to another.
set to "Yes"?

Yes
Sends reorder tone.

3-F-70
(70695)
Programming (1) Basic Programming
Always required to make use of TIE lines regardless of the
type of applications.

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb
“Configuration — Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
“Configuration — Channel 9-C-4.00 10-C-64.01
Assignment”
“Group — Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Type
“Trunk— CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
“World Select 1 (WS1)”,
Flash Detect (TIE) — 10-C-51.00
Answer Decision Timer

(2) Timer programming

System Programming Reference

VT Dumb
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
TIE Interdigit Time-Out

(3) Application programming

Programming items required vary depending on the type of
application. Refer to Section 3-F-14.01 through 14.05 for
further information about each application programming.

Conditions •The treatment of the TIE calls is the same as that of extension and CO calls.
TIE calls can be put on hold, be transferred to/forwarded to other extensions or
trunks (CO, TIE).

• Unscreened Call Transfer to TIE trunks (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
An extension user can transfer a call to TIE trunks without announcement.
If a tranferred call is not answered by the destination party within a
preprogrammed time (“Transfer Recall” timer), it will return to the party who
transferred the call.
This feature is available with software version 15.XX or higher.

3-F-71
(70695)
14.01 Calling from TIE to TIE
Description TIE calls among several different company locations can be done by dialing a 3
or 4-digit extension number only, or by dialing a location number (PBX Code)
and an extension number.

(1) By dialing Extension Number only

Description Extension users can make a call via TIE line to other extension users in other
PBXs within a private network by simply dialing a 3 or 4-digit extension number.

A Network of TIE Lines

Call Flow
1. Ext.100 dials 200.
2. Ext.100 is connected to Ext.200 of PBX-2.

Programming example: To make up the TIE Line Network above, the following system programming is
required at PBX-1 and -2 respectively.

PBX-1 • System - Operation (1/3)-PBX Code: (Blank)

• System - Numbering Plan (9-D-6.00, 10-C-10.00)
1st Hundred Extension 1
Other PBX Extension 01 2
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table (9-K-4.00,10-C-65.01)
No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Digit Dial 01 02
01 2XX 0 10

PBX-2 • System - Operation (1/3)-PBX Code: (Blank)

• System - Numbering Plan
1st Hundred Extension 2
Other PBX Extension 01 1
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 1XX 0 10
3-F-72
(70695)
Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation(1/ 3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Numbering Plan
“System-Numbering Plan”, 9-D-6.00 10-C-10.00
TIE Trunk Access 9-D-6.10
Other PBX Extension 01-16 9-D-6.11
“Special Attended-TIE Line Routing Table”, 9-K-4.00 10-C-65.01
Code
Delete Digit
Insert Dial
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
01-05

(2) By dialing Location Number (PBX code) and Extension Number

Description Extension users can make a call to other extension users in other PBXs within
a TIE line network by dialing a location number (PBX Code) and an extension
number. Each PBX in the same TIE Line Network can have its own flexible
extension numbering plan.

A Network of TIE Lines

Call Flow
1. Ext.100 of PBX-1 dials 84-951-100.
2. Ext.100 of PBX-1 is connected to Ext.100 of PBX-2.

Programming example To make up the TIE Line Network above, the following system programming is
required at PBX-1 and -2 respectively.

PBX-1 • System -Operation (1/3) (9-D-1.01, 10-C-4.00)

PBX Code: 950
• System - Numbering Plan (07/11)-TIE Trunk Access: 84 (default)
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table (9-K-4.00, 10-C-65.01)

3-F-73
(70695)
 No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Digit Dial 01 02
01 951 0 10
02
:

PBX-2 • System - Operation (1/3)

PBX Code: 951
• System - Numbering Plan (07/11)-TIE Trunk Access: 84 (default)
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table
No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Digit Dial 01 02
01 950 0 10
02
:

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation(1/ 3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
PBX Code
“System-Numbering Plan”, 9-D-6.00 10-C-10.00
TIE Trunk Access 9-D-6.10
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
TIE Incoming Delete Digit
TIE Incoming Insert Dial
“Special Attended-TIE Line Routing 9-K-4.00 10-C-65.01
Table”,
Code
Delete Digit
Insert Dial
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01-05
“TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)” — 10-C-65.03

3-F-74
(70695)
Operation Making a TIE call
(A) By dialing an extension number

1.Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4,

2.Dial the other PBX’s extension number.

• You hear ringback tone.

(B) By dialing a PBX code and an extension number

1.Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.

• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2.Dial the feature number for TIE Trunk Access “84” (default).
• You hear dial tone 1.

3.Dial the PBX code of the destination PBX and then the
extension number of your destination party.
• You hear ringback tone.

3-F-75
(70695)
14.02 Calling from TIE to CO
Description TIE Lines can be used to minimize the cost of calls to a distant location outside
of the TIE Line Network. A long distance call from one location may be a local
call from another location. This fact must be taken into consideration before
making a long distance call.
If the destination of the long distance call is outside of the TIE Line Network,
extension users first call to a distant PBX via TIE Line and then can make a
local CO call to the final destination through that PBX.

A Network of TIE Lines

Call Flow
1. Ext.100 dials 84-951-9 (TIE Trunk Access Code + PBX Code + CO Access
Code).
2. Ext.100 is required to enter a TIE account code*.
3. Ext.100 hears dial tone from an idle CO line of PBX-2.
4. Ext.100 dials xxx-xxxx (phone number of the outside party).

*Step 2 is required when “TIE Forced Account Code” Mode is set to “Yes” at
PBX-2.

Programming example: To make up the TIE Line Network above, the following system programming is
required at PBX-1 and -2 respectively.

PBX-1 • System - Operation (1/3) (9-D-1.01, 10-C-4.00)

PBX Code: 950

• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table (9-K-4.00, 10-C-65.01)

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 951 0 10
02
:

3-F-76
(70695)
 PBX-2 • System - Operation (1/3)
PBX Code: 951

• Group - Trunk Group (2/2) (9-E-1.02, 10-C-15.00)

Type: TIE
TIE - CO Restriction: No
TIE-Forced Account Code Mode: Yes
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table
No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Digit Dial 01 02
01 950 0 10
02
:

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
TIE-CO Restriction
TIE-Forced Account Code Mode
TIE Incoming Delete Digit
TIE Incoming Insert Dial
“Special Attended-TIE Line 9-K-4.00 10-C-65.01
Routing Table”,
Code
Delete Digit
Insert Dial
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01-05
“TIE Account Code (TAC)” — 10-C-65.02
“TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)” — 10-C-65.03

Conditions 1.TIE-CO Restriction

Used to restrict or not extension users from “Calling from TIE to CO.”
To restrict, set to “Yes.” To allow, set to “No.”

2.TIE Account Code

Used to allow certain extension users “Calling from TIE to CO.”
If “Forced Account Mode” of the trunk group is set to “Yes”, an extension user
must enter a valid TIE account code before “Calling from TIE to CO.” TIE
Account Codes can be registered by using TAC command in the Dumb
Programming mode. (Refer to Section 10-C-65.02 “TIE Account Code.”)

3.“Calling from TIE to CO” is available only when your system employs PBX
Code (Location number) method for making/receiving TIE calls.

3-F-77
(70695)
Operation 1.Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2.Dial the feature number for TIE Trunk Access “84” (default).
• You hear dial tone 1,

3.Dial the PBX code and a CO access code of the destination PBX.

4.Dial a TIE Account Code (if required).

5.Dial the telephone number of the outside party.

3-F-78
(70695)
14.03 Calling from CO to TIE
Description TIE lines are usually used to link two or more distant locations where high
volume calling traffic exists. However, a person at a location outside of the Tie
Line Network can also use it by first making a CO call via public network to the
nearest point of TIE Line Network for the purpose of saving the toll call charge.

A Network of TIE Lines

Call Flow
1. Employee-1 at a local branch makes a CO call to PBX-1 via DISA.
2. Employee-1 dials “84” (TIE trunk access code).
3. After hearing dial tone, Employee-1 dials 951-100.
4. Employee-1 at a local branch will be connected to Ext.100 of PBX-2.

Programming example: To make up the TIE Line Network above, the following system programming is
required at PBX-1 and -2 respectively.

PBX-1 • System -Operation (1/3) (9-D-1.01, 10-C-4.00)

PBX Code: 950

• Group - Trunk Group (2/2) (9-E-1.02, 10-C-15.00)

CO-TIE Restriction: No*

* This assignment is required at the trunk group whose

“Incoming Mode” is set to “DISA”.

• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 951 0 10
02
:

3-F-79
(70695)
 PBX-2 • System - Operation (1/3)
PBX Code: 951

• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 950 0 10
02
:

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (2/ 2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
CO-TIE Restriction
TIE Incoming Delete Digit
TIE Incoming Insert Dial
“Special Attended-TIE Line 9-K-4.00 10-C-65.01
Routing Table”,
Code
Delete Digit
Insert Dial
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01-05
“TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)” — 10-C-65.03

Operation 1.Dial the DISA phone number.

• You hear ringback tone.

2.You hear the DISA outgoing message.

3.Dial the feature number for TIE Trunk Access “84” (default).

4.Dial the PBX code of other PBX and then the extension number of
your party.
• You hear ringback tone.

3-F-80
(70695)
14.04 Alternate Routing
Description When more than two PBXs at different locations are interconnected with a
network of TIE Lines, your KX-T336 works as an intermediate switching office to
other PBXs in the network by relaying tie calls from one PBX to another.

A problem of telephone switching is that blocking sometimes occurs on the

network, and a call cannot be switched as required because all the lines on a
given route are occupied or unavailable.
By utilizing this relay function, several alternative routes can be set up
beforehand in addition to the primary-route. This permits TIE calls to be routed
from “A to B” or “A through C to B” and so on.
If the primary-route is poor because of equipment failure or congestion, KX-
T336 bypasses it and selects the secondary-route.

On receipt of a TIE call, KX-T336 analyzes it to determine the destination to

which the call must be sent or the route by which the calls will be sent, and then
transmit it.
Alternate Routing makes a TIE Line Network more flexible in adapting to peaks
of traffic and it provides a variety of different routing plans.

A Network of TIE Lines

: Primary-route
: Secondary-route

Call Flow
1.Ext.100 dials “84+952+200.”
2.When “952” is found in the table,TG10 (Hunt Sequence 01 for “952”)
is selected automatically.
• If TG10 is not available, TG11(Hunt Sequence 02) will be selected.
In this case, the call is sent to PBX-2 via PBX-3 and -4.
The treatment of the call is decided by Routing Table of PBX-3 and then
PBX-4.
3.The call is sent to PBX-2.

3-F-81
(70695)
Programming example: To realize the call flow mentioned in the previous page, the following system
programming is required at PBX-1, -3, and -4 respectively.

PBX-1 • System -Operation (1/3) (9-D-1.01, 10-C-4.00)

PBX Code: 951

• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table (9-K-4.00, 10-C-65.01)

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 952 0 10 11
02 953 11 10
:

• TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR) (10-C-65.03)

PBX-3 • System -Operation (1/3)

PBX Code: 953

• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 952 0 12
02
:

• TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)

PBX-4 • System -Operation (1/3)

PBX Code: 954

• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence

Digit Dial 01 02
01 952 0 13
02
:

• TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)

Note:
If you want to restrict “call relay from PBX-1 to PBX-2 via PBX-3”, set “TG11” to
“Yes” at PBX-3 using TRR command.

3-F-82
(70695)
Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (2/ 2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
CO-TIE Restriction
TIE-CO Restriction
TIE Incoming Delete Digit
TIE Incoming Insert Dial
“Special Attended-TIE Line 9-K-4.00 10-C-65.01
Routing Table”,
Code
Delete Digit
Insert Dial
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01-05
“TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)” — 10-C-65.03

3-F-83
(70695)
14.05 TIE Caller ID Identification (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
Description Provides the called party with the presentation of caller’s TIE Line ID (extension)
number. With this service, an extension user can find out who’s calling before
answering a TIE call. This service can be set on a TIE trunk group basis.
This feature is available with software version 15.XX or higher.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“TIE Caller ID Identification (TCI)” — 10-C-65.06

Conditions • To utilize this service, both two PBXs linked by a TIE Line must be KX-T336
System.
• If PBX Code is used for making TIE calls, “PBX Code and Extension No.” is
displayed on the display.
• This service does not apply to the following calls.

3-F-84(X)
(70695)
15.00 T-1 Carrier
Description The T-1 carrier is a hierarchy of digital systems designed to carry approx. 1.544
Mbps. speech and other signals in digital form. The T-1 carrier has 24
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) voice channels.

T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card (KX-T96187) and CSU (Channel Service Unit) are
required to utilize T-1 carrier with KX-T336 System. This card supports five
different trunk interfaces to provide desired connection at minimum expense.
One of the following five trunk types can be assigned to one of 24 voice channels
of T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK card individually according to tariffs and customer need.

type of interface : LCO/GCO/DID/OPX/TIE

T-1 line
The installer must arrange for the following parameters with the Central Office or
T-1 provider:
Type of Interface: LCO/GCO/DID/OPX/TIE, Frame format: D4 (SF)/ESF
Line coding: AMI/B8ZS, Signaling: DP/DTMF

CSU (Channel Service Unit)

The installer must provide a CSU to connect the T-1 line to the KX-T96187.
The CSU must support the following functions:
: Protection for the Central Office line
: Loop Back
: Performance Monitoring

Programming Reference
System Programming VT Dumb

“Configuration — Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00

“Configuration — DN Assignment” 9-C-3.00 10-C-3.01
“Configuration — Channel Assignment” 9-C-4.01 10-C-64.01
T-1 card
“System Clock Mode (CLK)” — 10-C-64.02
“Master Clock Priority (CLP)” — 10-C-64.03
“ESF Frame Option (EFO)” — 10-C-64.04

Description (1) Up to six T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK cards (144 ports) can be installed to the
system under the following conditions.

System Configuration
Basic shelf HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT+ 12 cards (96 ports)
GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
Expansion shelf HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT+ 15 cards (120 ports)
GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
Fully Expanded HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT+ 42 cards (336 ports)
system GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT

Note: Total 18 CO cards (144 ports) allowed per system

DID + LCOT + GCOT + T-1 + E-1 + E&M + PCOT +RCOT
*T-1 is counted as 3 cards, and E-1 is counted as 4 cards.

3-F-85
(70695)
 (2) Physical port number for each T-1 trunk channel is as follows:
Slot No. T-1 Channel Port No.
Slot 01 ch 01-08 X011-X018
ch 09-16 X021-X028
ch 17-24 X031-X038
Slot 05 ch 01-08 X051-X058
ch 09-16 X061-X068
ch 17-24 X071-X078
Slot 09 ch 01-08 X091-X098
ch 09-16 X101-X108
ch 17-24 X111-X118
X: Shelf No. (1=Basic, 2=Expansion 1, 3=Expansion 2)

(3) DN Assignment is required when a channel of T-1 card is assinged as “OPX.”

(4) Select the external clock mode, if your system is interfaced by T-1 interface
with another exchange. Refer to Section 10-C-64.02 “System Clock Mode
(CLK)” and Section 10-C-64.03 “Master Clock Priority (CLP).”

Maintenance The following two test commands are provided for T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card.
• Loop Back Test (LBT) - Section 15-E-3.01
• DTMF-Generator/Receiver Test (DTM) - Section 15-E-3.02

3-F-86
(70695)
16.00 E-1 Carrier
Description The E-1 carrier is a hierarchy of digital systems designed to carry approx. 2.048
Mbps speech and other signals in digital form. The E-1 carrier has 30 PCM voice
channels.
E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card (KX-T96188) is required to utilize E-1 carrier with the
KX-T336 System. This card supports the following three different trunk interfaces
to provide desired connection at minimum expense. One of the following three
trunk types can be assigned to one of 30 voice channels of E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK
Card individually according to tariffs and customer needs.

type of interface: DR2/E&M-C (Continuous E&M) /E&M-P (Pulsed E&M)

Trunk Group Types and CO Dial Mode available for each voice channel
Voice Channel Trunk Group Type CO Dial Mode
DR2 (Digital System R2) DID (Both-way DID) DP/DTMF/MFC-R2
DDD/FEX/WATS/PBX/
PVL*1
E&M-C (Continuous E&M) TIE (E&M Lines) DP/DTMF
E&M-P (Pulsed E&M) DDD/FEX/WATS/PBX/
PVL*2

*1 If DID service is not available in your area, you can choose one of these Trunk
Group Types.
*2 If the destination specifying signal is not sent from a local CO, you can choose
one of these Trunk Group Types.

The installer must arrange for the following parameters with the Central Office or
E-1 provider.

Type of Interface: DR2/E&M-C/E&M-P, Frame format: PCM30/PCM30-CRC

Line coding: AMI/HDB 3, Signaling: DP/DTMF/MFC-R2

Trunk Interface: (DR2 channel)

• DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Refer to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing (DID)” for further information.

(E&M-C/-P channel)
• E-1 TIE Line
Refer to Section 3-F-14.00 “TIE Lines” for further information.

Supplementary • Automatic Number Identification (ANI)

Service for DR2: Refer to Section 3-F-17.00 “Automatic Number Identification (ANI)” for further
information.

• Charge Management
Refer to Section 3-F-19.00 “Charge Management” for further information.

3-F-87(X)
(70695)
Programming • E-1 General
Reference
System Programming VT Dumb
“Configuration - Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
“Configuration - Channel Assignment” 9-C-4.02 10-C-64.01
E-1 card
“System Clock Mode (CLK)” — 10-C-64.02
“Master Clock Priority (CLP)” — 10-C-64.03

• DR2
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group - Trunk Group (1/2)” 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
“Group - Trunk Group (2/2)” 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
“Trunk - CO Line” 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
“Special Attended - DID” 9-K-2.00 10-C-43.00
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00
Tone Except Idle Status
“MFC Sequence Parameter” — 10-C-64.05
“Answer Signal Wait Time (AWT)” — 10-C-64.06
“MFC-R2 Option (MRO)” — 10-C-64.08

• Charge Management
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“E-1 Signaling Option (ESO)” — 10-C-64.07

Refer to Section 3-F-19.00 “Charge Management” for other

programming items required.

• E-1 TIE Line (E&M-P)

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Pulsed E&M (PEM)” — 10-C-64.09

Refer to Section 3-F-14.00 “TIE Lines” for further information.

Conditions (1) Up to four E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK Cards (120 ports) can be installed to the
system under the following conditions.
System Configuration
Basic shelf HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT+ 12 cards (96 ports)
GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
Expansion shelf HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT+ 15 cards (120 ports)
GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
Fully Expanded HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT+ 42 cards (336 ports)
system GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT

3-F-88(X)
(70695)
 Note: Total 18 CO cards (144 ports) allowed per system
DID + LCOT + GCOT + T-1 + E-1 + E&M + PCOT + RCOT
*T-1 is counted as 3 cards, and E-1 is counted as 4 cards.

(2) The physical port number for each E-1 Digital Trunk channel is as follows:
Slot No. E-1 Channel Port No.
Slot 01 ch 01-08 X011-X018
ch 09-16 X021-X028
ch 17-24 X031-X038
ch 25-32 X041-X048
Slot 05 ch 01-08 X051-X058
ch 09-16 X061-X068
ch 17-24 X071-X078
ch 25-32 X081-X088
Slot 09 ch 01-08 X091-X098
ch 09-16 X101-X108
ch 17-24 X111-X118
ch 25-32 X121-X128
X: Shelf No. (1=Basic, 2=Expansion 1, 3=Expansion 2)

Note:
• Channels 16 (signaling channel) and 32 of the E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card are
not available for CO line programming.

3-F-89(X)
(70695)
17.00 Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
Description Provides the called party with the presentation of caller’s phone number.
With the ANI service, an extension user can find out who’s calling before deciding
to answer a call.
One of the following three presentation ways of caller’s phone number can be
utilized depending on the system programming.

1. Incoming CO calls only

Provides the display PITS user with the presentation of calling outside party’s
phone number.

2. Outgoing CO calls only

Provides the outside party with the presentation of caller’s extension number.

3. Both Incoming and Outgoing CO calls

A combination of above mentioned two ways.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

MFC-R2 Option (MFC) — 10-C-64.08

3-F-90(X)
(70695)
Conditions • A special arrangement is required with a local Central Office to utilize ANI
service. Consult with your local Central Office about whether they provide this
service or not.
• ANI service can be utilized with an E-1 “DR2” Channel Trunk whose Dial Mode
is set to “MFC-R2.”
• DIL 1:N
If an incoming call comes in on more than two extensions simultaneously,
outside party’s phone number is displayed on all call receiver’s extensions
(display PITS only)
• Call Forwarding
If “Call Forwarding” (except Call Forwarding to Trunk) is set at the extension,
caller’s phone number will be displayed on the extension where an incoming
CO call will be forwarded.

<Display example>
→4771450
“ → ”indicates that the call has been forwarded from another extension.

3-F-91(X)
(70695)
18.00 Limited Call Duration
Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects a CO
call when a pre-specified time expires. A warning tone is sent to the extension
user 15 seconds before the time limit. Limiting the call duration can be enabled
or disabled on a COS (Class of Service) basis for each extension.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Limited Call Duration (LCD)” — 10-C-69.00

Conditions • This feature applies to incoming CO calls only, outgoing CO calls only or both
incoming and outgoing CO calls depending on the system programming.

• Call duration time limit is ranging from 01 to 60 minutes depending on the

system programming.

• Call duration time of any CO call (except a CO-to-CO call) can be limited by
this feature. CO-to-CO Call Duration timer applies to a CO-to-CO call.

• This feature does not apply to CO calls to/from an Attendant Console.

• This feature is available with the following version of the software.

V.12.XX, V.15.XX or higher version

3-F-92
(70695)
19.00 Charge Management (for areas other than U.S.A and Canada)
19.01 Budget Management
Description Used to limit the total amount of phone charge of each extension to a pre-
assigned amount. If the pre-assigned limit is reached, the extension user cannot
make further CO calls until his or her charge meter is reset. (See Section 3-F-
19.02 “Charge Fee Reference”)
Useful to keep phone bills down by restricting the excess amount of phone
charge.

Programming Reference
System Programming VT Dumb
“Configuration - Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
“World Select 2 (WS2)”, — 10-C-52.00
PAY-TONE Frequency
PAY-TONE Gain
“E-1 Signaling Option (ESO)” — 10-C-64.07
“Charge Limitation (CLT)” — 10-C-66.03

PITS System Programming Reference

Setting Charge Limitation 11-C-9.00

Conditions • This feature can be realized by utilizing either PCOT card (KX-T96189) or
E1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card* (KX-T96188).

*Available with the DR2 channel on E1 DIGITAL TRUNK Card when a local
Central Office (E-1 provider) supports “Metering Pulse Service”.

3-F-93(X)
(70695)
19.02 Charge Fee Reference
Description Allows a display PITS user to check, clear phone charges and print out the data
by SMDR. Phone charges are displayed per extension, ATT, CO line, account
code, or the total of each.

Programming Reference
System Programming VT Dumb
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00
Charge Display
“Charge Management ID Code — 10-C-66.01
(CPD)”

PITS System Programming Reference

Changing Charge Management ID Code 11-C-10.00

PITS Station Programming Reference

Charge Management 12-C-9.00

Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter – Extensions 12-C-9.03
Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter – ATT 12-C-9.04
Checking the Charge Meter – CO Line 12-C-9.05
Checking the Charge Meter – All CO Lines 12-C-9.06
Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter – Account Code 12-C-9.07
Clearing All Charge Meters 12-C-9.08
Printing Charge Information on SMDR 12-C-9.09
Setting Charge Rate 12-C-9.10
Setting Account Codes 12-C-9.11

3-F-94
(70695)
 Section 4

Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

 (Section 4)

Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)
Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 4-A-1

1.00 Outline ................................................................................................... 4-A-1

2.00 Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-A-1
2.01 Location of Feature Buttons ........................................................ 4-A-2
2.02 Controls....................................................................................... 4-A-15
3.00 LED Indication Patterns......................................................................... 4-A-19
4.00 Display-LCD........................................................................................... 4-A-20
4.01 Time and Date Display................................................................ 4-A-20
4.02 Dialed Number Display................................................................ 4-A-21
4.03 Duration Time of Call Display...................................................... 4-A-21
4.04 Incoming Call Source Display...................................................... 4-A-22
4.05 Station Programmed Data Display.............................................. 4-A-22
4.06 Station Name Display.................................................................. 4-A-23

B Feature Buttons ............................................................................................... 4-B-1

1.00 Fixed Feature Buttons ........................................................................... 4-B-1

2.00 Assignable Feature Buttons................................................................... 4-B-4
3.00 Line Access Buttons.............................................................................. 4-B-6
3.01 PDN Button.................................................................................. 4-B-6
3.02 SDN Button.................................................................................. 4-B-7
3.03 ICM Button................................................................................... 4-B-7
3.04 PCO Button ................................................................................. 4-B-8
3.05 SCO Button................................................................................. 4-B-9
3.06 GCO Button................................................................................. 4-B-10

C Outgoing Call Features.................................................................................... 4-C-1

1.00 Line Selection-Calling............................................................................ 4-C-1

1.01 Prime Line Preference-Calling..................................................... 4-C-2
1.02 Idle Line Preference-Calling........................................................ 4-C-3
1.03 No Line Preference-Calling ......................................................... 4-C-4
2.00 On-Hook Dialing .................................................................................... 4-C-4
3.00 Making Outside Calls............................................................................. 4-C-6
3.01 Local Trunk Dial Access.............................................................. 4-C-6
3.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access ............................................ 4-C-7
3.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) .................................................. 4-C-8
3.04 Direct Trunk Access .................................................................... 4-C-9

4-1
(60395)
 Page
4.00 Automatic Dialing................................................................................... 4-C-10
4.01 One Touch Dialing....................................................................... 4-C-10
4.02 Speed Dialing-System................................................................. 4-C-11
4.03 Last Number Redial (LNR).......................................................... 4-C-14
4.04 Automatic Redial ......................................................................... 4-C-15
4.05 Saved Number Redial (SNR)...................................................... 4-C-16
5.00 Making Internal Calls............................................................................. 4-C-17
5.01 Inter Office Calling....................................................................... 4-C-17
5.02 Intercom Calling........................................................................... 4-C-18
5.03 Intercom-Voice Calling................................................................. 4-C-19
5.04 Intercom-Busy Station Signaling (BSS)....................................... 4-C-20
5.05 Intercom Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)......................... 4-C-21
6.00 Automatic Callback................................................................................ 4-C-22
6.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk ........................................................... 4-C-22
6.02 Automatic Callback-Station......................................................... 4-C-24
7.00 Executive Busy Override ....................................................................... 4-C-25
8.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override............................................................. 4-C-26
9.00 Walking COS (Class of Service)............................................................ 4-C-27
10.00 Operator Call ......................................................................................... 4-C-28

D Receiving Features.......................................................................................... 4-D-1

1.00 Line Selection-Answering...................................................................... 4-D-1

1.01 Ringing Line Preference-Answering............................................ 4-D-1
1.02 Prime Line Preference-Answering............................................... 4-D-2
1.03 No Line Preference-Answering.................................................... 4-D-3
1.04 Direct Answering (Pre-selection)................................................. 4-D-3
2.00 Intercom Answer.................................................................................... 4-D-4
2.01 Intercom Hands-Free Answerback.............................................. 4-D-4
2.02 Intercom Answer Voice Calling Deny .......................................... 4-D-5
2.03 Intercom Answer BSS/OHCA Deny............................................. 4-D-6
3.00 Call Pickup............................................................................................. 4-D-7
3.01 Dial Call Pickup ........................................................................... 4-D-7
3.02 Directed Call Pickup.................................................................... 4-D-8
3.03 Call Pickup Deny......................................................................... 4-D-9
4.00 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service......................... 4-D-10
5.00 Executive Busy Override Deny.............................................................. 4-D-11
6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) ........................................................................... 4-D-12
7.00 Call Waiting............................................................................................ 4-D-15
8.00 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-Log Out............................................... 4-D-17

4-2
 Page
E Holding Features.............................................................................................. 4-E-1

1.00 Hold ...................................................................................................... 4-E-1

2.00 Exclusive Hold....................................................................................... 4-E-2
3.00 Consultation Hold .................................................................................. 4-E-3
4.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station..................................................................... 4-E-5
5.00 Call Park ............................................................................................... 4-E-6
5.01 Call Park-System......................................................................... 4-E-6
5.02 Call Park-Station ......................................................................... 4-E-8
6.00 Call Splitting........................................................................................... 4-E-10

F Transferring Features ...................................................................................... 4-F-1

1.00 Call Transfer.......................................................................................... 4-F-1

1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to Station............................................ 4-F-1
1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station................................................ 4-F-2
1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk.................................................. 4-F-3
1.04 Ringing Transfer.......................................................................... 4-F-4
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote.......................................... 4-F-5
1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer to Attendant Console......................... 4-F-5-1
1.07 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) ............. 4-F-5-2
2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD) ......................................................................... 4-F-6
2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls............................................................. 4-F-6
2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook................................................... 4-F-9
2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer......................................................... 4-F-12
2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer................................ 4-F-15
2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk............................................................. 4-F-18
2.06 Call Forwarding-Follow Me.......................................................... 4-F-21

G Conversation Features..................................................................................... 4-G-1

1.00 Programmable Privacy .......................................................................... 4-G-1

2.00 Privacy Release..................................................................................... 4-G-2
3.00 Privacy Attach........................................................................................ 4-G-3
4.00 Hands-Free Conversation...................................................................... 4-G-4
5.00 Conference............................................................................................ 4-G-5
5.01 Conference-One Appearance...................................................... 4-G-5
5.02 Conference-Two Appearances.................................................... 4-G-7
6.00 Unattended Conference......................................................................... 4-G-9
6.01 Unattended Conference-One Appearance.................................. 4-G-9
6.02 Unattended Conference-Two Appearances ................................ 4-G-11
7.00 Doorphone............................................................................................. 4-G-13
8.00 Flash...................................................................................................... 4-G-14
9.00 External Feature Access........................................................................ 4-G-15
10.00 Microphone Mute................................................................................... 4-G-16
11.00 Intercom Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)................................... 4-G-17
12.00 Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling)......................................... 4-G-18

4-3
(70695)
 Page
H Paging Features............................................................................................... 4-H-1

1.00 Paging.................................................................................................... 4-H-1

1.01 Paging All Extensions.................................................................. 4-H-1
1.02 Group Paging .............................................................................. 4-H-3
1.03 Paging External Pagers............................................................... 4-H-5
1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers ............................... 4-H-7
2.00 Background Music (BGM) through External Pager................................ 4-H-9

I Other Features ................................................................................................ 4-I-1

1.00 Night Service ......................................................................................... 4-I-1

1.01 Universal Night Answer (UNA).................................................... 4-I-1
1.02 Flexible Night Service.................................................................. 4-I-2
1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode ...................................................... 4-I-3
2.00 Account Code Entry............................................................................... 4-I-5
3.00 Timed Reminder .................................................................................... 4-I-7
4.00 Background Music (BGM)...................................................................... 4-I-9
5.00 Secret Dialing ........................................................................................ 4-I-10
6.00 Data Line Security ................................................................................. 4-I-11
7.00 Absent Message Capability.................................................................. 4-I-12
8.00 Message Waiting................................................................................... 4-I-15
9.00 Electronic Station Lock Out ................................................................... 4-I-18
10.00 Assigned Feature Clear......................................................................... 4-I-19
11.00 Remote Station Feature Control............................................................ 4-I-20
12.00 DSS Console......................................................................................... 4-I-22
12.01 Automatic Transfer.................................................................... 4-I-24
13.00 Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ...................... 4-I-25
14.00 Remote Timed Reminder – One Time................................................... 4-I-28

4-4
(40993)
A. Preparation

1.00 Outline
Panasonic EMSS PITS (Proprietary Integrated
Telephone System) telephones are provided to
utilize the various features of the KX-T336
system, in addition to supporting basic telephone
service (making and answering calls).
This section describes special features and
required operation of PITS telephones.

4-A-1
2.00 Configuration
PITS telephones can be categorized as the
following four types.

Type 20 KX-T30820, KX-T61620, KX-T123220

Type 30 KX-T30830, KX-T61630, KX-T123230, KX-T123230D, KX-T123235
Type 50 KX-T30850, KX-T61650, KX-T123250
7000 Series KX-T7020, KX-T7030, KX-T7050, KX-T7130

2.01 Location of Feature Buttons

(Type 20)
Common
Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is
common to all Type 20 PITS telephones.

1
Refer to the
following page.

4
2 5
3

6
7

9 10 11 12 Microphone

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 7 AUTO ANS/MUTE Button and Indicator

2 CONF Button and Indicator 8 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
3 FWD/DND Button and Indicator 9 SAVE Button
4 PAUSE Button 10 REDIAL Button
5 TRANSFER Button 11 FLASH Button
6 AUTO/MEMORY Button and Indicator 12 HOLD Button

4-A-2
Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.

KX-T123220 KX-T30820

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
1
DN12 (Message
2 Waiting) Button
DN11
3 and Indicator
DN10
4 CO1
DN9 DN3
5
DN8 CO2
6 DN2 DN (Directory
DN7 DN (Directory Number) Buttons
7 CO3
DN6 Number) Buttons DN1 and Indicators
8 and Indicators
DN5
9
DN4
10
DN3
11 ICM
DN2 ICM (Intercom)
12
DN1 Button and
ICM
ICM (Intercom) Indicator
Button and
Indicator

KX-T61620

CO1
DN6
CO2
DN5
CO3
DN4 DN (Directory
CO4
DN3 Number) Buttons
CO5
DN2 and Indicators
CO6
DN1

ICM
ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator

4-A-3
Programmable Feature buttons

PF05

PF02

1 2 3
PF01 PF03
4 5 6
PF04 PF06
7 8 9
PF07 PF09
10 11 12
PF10 PF12

PF11

PF08

4-A-4
(Type 30)
Common
Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is
common to all Type 30 PITS telephones.

Refer to the
following page.

5
3 6
4

7
8

10 11 12 13 Microphone

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 8 AUTO ANS/MUTE Button and Indicator

2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 9 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
3 CONF Button and Indicator 10 SAVE Button
4 FWD/DND Button and Indicator 11 REDIAL Button
5 PAUSE Button 12 FLASH Button
6 TRANSFER Button 13 HOLD Button
7 AUTO/MEMORY Button and Indicator

4-A-5
Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.

KX-T123230, KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 KX-T30830

MESSAGE 11
MESSAGE DSS8
1 12
DN12 (Message DSS7
2 13
DN11 Waiting) Button DSS6
3 14
DN10 and Indicator DSS5 DSS (Direct
4
DN9
15
DSS4
Station Selection)
5 16 Buttons and
DN8 DSS3 Indicators
6 17
DN7 DN (Directory DSS2
7 18
DN6 Number) DSS1
8
DN5 Buttons and CO1
DN3
9 Indicators CO2 DN (Directory
DN4 DN2
10 CO3 Number) Buttons
DN3 DN1
11 ICM and Indicators
DN2
12
DN12
ICM
ICM (Intercom) ICM (Intercom)
Button and Button and
Indicator Indicator

KX-T61630

CO1
DN6
CO2
DN5
CO3
DN4 DN (Directory
CO4
DN3 Number)
CO5 Buttons and
DN2
CO6 Indicators
DN1

ICM
ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator

4-A-6
Programmable Feature buttons

PF05

PF02

1 2 3
PF01 PF03
4 5 6
PF04 PF06
7 8 9
PF07 PF09
10 11 12
PF10 PF12

PF11

PF08

4-A-7
(Type 50)

Common
Location of Feature Buttons illustrated below is
common to all Type 50 PITS telephones.

Memory Card

Refer to the
following page.

3
4

6 7 8 9

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 6 CONF Button

2 TRANSFER Button 7 REDIAL Button
3 AUTO/MEMORY Button 8 FLASH Button
4 PAUSE Button 9 HOLD Button
5 MONITOR Button

4-A-8
Location of DN buttons is specific to each model as follows.

KX-T123250 KX-T30850

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
1
DN12 (Message
2 Waiting) Button
DN11
3 and Indicator
DN10
4 CO1
DN9 DN3
5
DN8 CO2
6 DN2 DN (Directory
DN7 DN (Directory Number) Buttons
7 CO3
DN6 Number) DN1 and Indicators
8 Buttons and
DN5
9 Indicators
DN4
10
DN3
11 ICM
DN2 ICM (Intercom)
12
DN1 Button and
ICM
ICM (Intercom) Indicator
Button and
Indicator

KX-T61650

CO1
DN6
CO2
DN5
CO3
DN4 DN (Directory
CO4
DN3 Number)
CO5
DN2 Buttons and
CO6
DN1
Indicators

ICM
ICM (Intercom)
Button and
Indicator

4-A-9
Programmable Feature buttons

F1 F2 F3 TRANSFER

PF01 PF02 PF03

4-A-10
(7000 Series)
Preliminary Remarks:
Some buttons provided for the KX-T7020, KX-T7030, KX-T7050 and KX-T7130 are
called by names other than the ones described in this manual.
If you use these models, please press the equivalent buttons shown below instead of
the buttons described in this manual.

Description here Equivalent button

ICM INTERCOM
MEMORY STORE
AUTO AUTO DIAL
AUTO ANS AUTO ANSWER

KX-T7020

HYBRID SYSTEM

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 9 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator

2 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and 10 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
Indicators Indicator
3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 11 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
4 CONF Button and Indicator 12 REDIAL Button
5 FWD/DND Button and Indicator 13 FLASH Button
6 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 14 HOLD Button
7 TRANSFER Button
8 PAUSE Button

4-A-11
KX-T7030

HYBRID SYSTEM

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 9 PAUSE Button

2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 10 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator
3 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and 11 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
Indicators Indicator
4 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 12 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
5 CONF Button and Indicator 13 REDIAL Button
6 FWD/DND Button and Indicator 14 FLASH Button
7 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 15 HOLD Button
8 TRANSFER Button

4-A-12
KX-T7050

HYBRID SYSTEM

1 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 7 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator

2 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and 8 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
Indicators Indicator
3 INTERCOM Button and Indicator 9 MONITOR Button and Indicator
4 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 10 REDIAL Button
5 TRANSFER Button 11 FLASH Button
6 PAUSE Button 12 HOLD Button

4-A-13
KX-T7130

HYBRID SYSTEM

1 LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 9 TRANSFER Button

2 PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons 10 PAUSE Button
3 DN (Directory Number) Buttons and 11 AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator
Indicators 12 AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and
4 INTERCOM Button and Indicator Indicator
5 CONF Button and Indicator 13 SP-PHONE Button and Indicator
6 FWD/DND Button and Indicator 14 REDIAL Button
7 SAVE Button 15 FLASH Button
8 MESSAGE Button and Indicator 16 HOLD Button

4-A-14
2.02 Controls
Various controls are provided for each type of PITS telephones as shown below.

Controls Usage Type Type 7020/ 7030/

20/50 30 7050 7130
MEMORY Switch SET: Normal operation
PROGRAM: Local station programming
(See Sections 11 and 12)

RINGER Volume HIGH/LOW: Sets the desired ringer volume

Selector OFF: The telephone does not ring

HANDSET VOLUME NORMAL/HIGH: Determines the desired

Selector handset volume

VOLUME Control A sliding lever used to control the speaker

volume

CONTRAST Selector Set to “LOW,” “MID” or “HIGH” to choose

the best display intensity

HANDSET/HEADSET HANDSET: Normal operation

Selector HEADSET: When using an optional
headset, KX-T30890

POWER FAILURE OFF: Normal operation

Switch ON: When power failure occurs
(See Section 14-H-1.00)

DIALING MODE This is used to set the dialing mode during

Selector power failure.
TONE: Sets tone dialing mode
PULSE: Sets pulse dialing mode

: provided

: not provided

4-A-15
Location
(Type 20/50)

1 2 3

1 VOLUME Control

2 RINGER Volume Selector

3 MEMORY Switch

4-A-16
(Type 30)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 VOLUME Control 5 POWER FAILURE Switch

2 RINGER Volume Selector

6 MEMORY Switch

3 CONTRAST Selector
7 HANDSET/HEADSET Selector

4 DIALING MODE Selector

4-A-17
(7000 series)
KX-T7020, KX-T7050

Left

HANDSET VOLUME Selector

RINGER VOLUME Selector
VOLUME Control

Rear

MEMORY Switch

KX-T7030, KX-T7130

Left

HANDSET VOLUME Selector

RINGER VOLUME Selector
VOLUME Control

Rear

MEMORY Switch
HANDSET/HEADSET Selector
CONTRAST Selector

4-A-18
3.00 LED Indication Patterns
Line conditions are displayed by three patterns of flashing LED indicators on PITS buttons, as follows.

Pattern 1
(240 wink)

Pattern 2
(60 wink)

Pattern 3
(120 wink)

1 sec

Pattern 1 : Shows call arriving with 240 winks/min and is called “240 wink.”
Pattern 2 : Shows holding a call with 60 winks/min and is called “60 wink.”
Pattern 3 : Shows Unattended Conference and Privacy Release with 120 winks/min and is called “120
wink.”

Light on steady shows busy status and light off shows idle status.

4-A-19
4.00 Display-LCD
4.01 Time and Date Display
Description Operation
This is a function for a PITS provided with the Changing the time display mode to the date
display to offer a display either of the present display mode
time or of the date and the day of the week. It is
indicated on the display when the PITS is on- Be sure the telephone set is on-hook and the SP-
hook and the SP-PHONE is off. PHONE is off.

Two display modes are available: the time 1. Dial “*.”

display mode and the date display mode. For
instance, the displays for “January 1, Friday, • The message on the display of
12:00 a.m., 1999” in each mode are as follows: PITS changes to the date
display mode.
In the time display mode:
Changing the date display mode to the time
Jan 1 12:00 AM display mode.

In the date display mode: 1. Dial “*.”

Jan 1, 1999 FRI
• The message on the display
To alternate the modes, dial “* ” while on-hook changes to the time display
and SP-PHONE off. mode.

Setting the time and date is executed by “Date &

Time Set Up Screen” and “Change Date & Time.”
Extensions assigned to a “Class of Service” in
which Maintenance Capability is set to “Yes” can
also set the time and date. Refer to Section 11-
C-2.00 “Setting Date and Time.”

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Date & Time Set Up Screen” 7-B-4.00 8-F-7.00

“Change Date & Time” 7-F-1.00 8-F-7.00
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Maintenance Capability

PITS System Programming Reference

Setting Date and Time 11-C-2.00

Conditions
None

4-A-20
4.02 Dialed Number Display 4.03 Duration Time of Call Display
Description Description
This is a function for the user of a PITS with the This function permits a PITS with the display to
display to see the dialed number of the other show the duration of an incoming or outgoing CO
party shown on the display. It is displayed when call by second.
the user is calling an extension or an outside This function does not apply to extension calls.
party and also when talking with it.
An example of the display is shown below:
Programming
DDD02 1 : 30' 25
None
second
minute
Conditions
hour
None
For an incoming call from an outside party, the
duration starts at the time an extension answers
Operation the call.
The following is an example of the display when
calling an extension. For outgoing calls to outside parties, the starting
time of count is assignable in “System-System
Operation: Display: Timer”, SMDR Duration Time.

Lift the handset. Programming

Reference
Dial “1.” 1 System Programming
VT Dumb

Dial “2.” 1 2 “System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00

SMDR Duration Time
Dial “3.” 1 2 3

Calling the extension. 1 2 3 : Jack Conditions

Holding of an outside party or in conference with
outside parties is also counted as part of the
duration. Consequently when returning to the
conversation with the party after retrieving the
hold or after concluding the conference, the
display shows the continued period including the
period of the hold or the conference.

The display duration is held for five seconds after

the handset is replaced.

Operation
None

4-A-21
4.04 Incoming Call Source Display 4.05 Station Programmed Data Display
Description Description
If the user of a PITS provided with the display is When a PITS provided with the display is on-hook
called by somebody, the user can see the name, if and the SP-PHONE button is off, pressing the
pre-assigned, of the calling party on the display. following buttons provides the display of the kind
of the pressed button or the content assigned to
The display contents differ according to the type of the button on the display for five seconds:
arriving calls as illustrated below:
• REDIAL or LNR (Last Number Redial) button
When called by an extension using the DN button : • SAVE or SNR (Saved Number Redial) button
• MESSAGE (Message Waiting) button
1 2 3 4: Tony • PF (Programmable feature) buttons
• FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb)
station name button
directory number
Programming
When called by an extension using the ICM
None
(intercom) button :
Conditions
ICM12: Tony
When the assigned data exceeds 16 characters,
station name “&” appears on the most right side of the display.
intercom number
Operation
When called by an outside party :
Press the button to be confirmed.
CO: PANASONIC

trunk name
trunk group name

A station name or a trunk name does not appear

unless they are assigned in “Extension-Station”,
Station Name or “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Name.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Name 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00

“Extension-Station (1/3)” 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Station Name

Conditions
None

Operation
None

4-A-22
4.06 Station Name Display
Description The example below shows the display on the
calling station when calling an extension
This is a function that shows the user of a PITS
assigned to Call Forwarding on the DN button :
with the display the other extension's directory
number and, if stored, its name. This is
[Example]
displayed when the user is calling or called by or
talking with an extension party. Extension 2000 calls extension 1000.
Extension 1000 sets the destination of Call
[Example] Forwarding-No Answer to extension 1001.
When calling/called by/talking with an extension
The following display appears on the display of
on the DN button :
extension 2000 :
1234: Tony → 1001: Jack

station name The following display appears on the display of

directory number extension 1001 :
→ 2000: Betty
When calling/called by/talking with an extension
on the ICM button :
Operation
ICM12: Tony None
station name
intercom number

Station names do not appear unless they are

assigned in “Extension-Station”, Station Name.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00

Station Name

Conditions
When calling an extension on the DN button, if
the called party answers on the SDN button, the
display on the calling station changes as follows:

When calling extension 1234 :

1234: Tony

After extension 1000, whose SDN is owned by

extension 1234, answers the call:
1000: Jack

4-A-23
B. Feature Buttons
1.00 Fixed Feature Buttons
Description
Feature Buttons, like features, are either fixed or assignable.
Fixed Feature Buttons, (for example HOLD ,) have specific functions permanently
associated with them.
The following table shows all Fixed Feature Buttons provided on the PITS telephone
by each type.

Feature Button Type 20/30 Type 50 7020/7030 7050 7130

SP-PHONE ★ 1 1

AUTO/MEMORY ★

AUTO DIAL/STORE ★

PAUSE ★

REDIAL (LNR)

None 2 None 2 None 2

SAVE (SNR)

ICM ★

INTERCOM ★

AUTO ANS/MUTE ★ None

AUTO ANSWER/MUTE ★ None

HOLD

TRANSFER

None 3 None 3
FWD/DND ★

CONF ★

FLASH ★
4 4
MESSAGE ★

[Note]
In the above list, Feature Buttons marked ★ have an LED indicator.
1
The MONITOR button is provided instead of the SP-PHONE button.
2
The SAVE button can be assigned to the PF1 button.
3
The FWD/DND button can be assigned to the PF 3 button.

4-B-1
 4
The MESSAGE button is not provided on the PITS's listed below, but can be assigned to the
assignable buttons respectively, as follows:

PITS not provided with MESSAGE Assignable Buttons

KX-T30830 DSS 8
KX-T30820, KX-T30850 DN 3
KX-T61620, KX-T61630, KX-T61650 DN 6

For the assignment of the FWD/DND, SAVE and MESSAGE buttons, refer to the
following.

FWD/DND button Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)”

SAVE button Section 12-C-2.00 “PF (Programmable Feature)
Button Assignment”

MESSAGE button Section 9-G-1.02 “Station (2/3)”

Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)”

Usage
SP-PHONE (MONITOR) Button and Indicator
This key allows the set user to receive or originate calls without using the handset.
Each time the SP-PHONE button is pressed, the speaker and microphone are
alternately switched on and off.
AUTO/MEMORY, AUTO DIAL/STORE Button and Indicator
This button is used for dialing system speed dial numbers and for storing the
results of a local programming operation.
PAUSE Button
This button is used to insert a pause in a speed dial number.
REDIAL (LNR) Button
This button is causes the last number dialed to be redialed when the key is
pressed.
SAVE (SNR) Button
This button allows the set user to store the telephone number to make the same
call again by pressing the key.
ICM, INTERCOM Button and Indicator
This button is used to make or receive an intercom call.
AUTO ANS/MUTE, AUTO ANSWER/MUTE Button and Indicator
This dual function button is used to automatically answer an intercom call or
disable the microphone during handsfree operation.
HOLD Button and Indicator
This button allows the set user to place any call at the set on hold.
TRANSFER Button
This is used to transfer an outside or an intercom call to another extension.

4-B-2
FWD/DND Button
This button can be used for setting or canceling the Call Forwarding or Do Not
Disturb feature.
CONF Button and Indicator
Allows the user to perform a three party conference.
FLASH Button
This button causes a flash signal to be sent to the Central Office.
MESSAGE Button and Indicator
This button can be used for Message Waiting feature.

4-B-3
2.00 Assignable Feature Buttons
Description
Assignable Feature Buttons can have features assigned to them, by the System
Programming or by the PITS Station Programming.

The following three types of Assignable Feature Buttons are provided on the PITS
telephones.
• DN button
• DSS button (KX-T30830 only)
• PF button

(Note)
DSS button and PF button are also provided on the DSS consoles.

The following list shows all features available to Assignable Feature Buttons by type of
buttons.

DN DSS button PF button

Features PITS DSS PITS DSS
PDN (Primary Directory Number)
SDN (Secondary Directory Number)
PRV-CO (Private CO)
SINGLE CO (Single CO)
GROUP CO (Group CO)
OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement)
MESSAGE (Message Waiting)
LOGIN (UCD Log In)
ALARM (Local Alarm)
DSS DN (Direct Station Selection-DN)
DSS ICM (Direct Station Selection-ICM)
ONETOUCH (One Touch Dialing)
PRV-CHG (Privacy Change)
EXT FEAT (External Feature Access)
CALL PAR (Call Park-System)
CALL STA (Call Park-Station)
RNG TRN (Ringing Transfer)
SPLIT (Call Split)
FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) 1

TONE-BRK (Tone Through Break)

SAVE (Saved Number Redial) 2

4-B-4
In the list on the previous page: Programming
“ ” indicates that the feature is assignable.
Conditions
“ ” indicates that the feature is not assignable.
A code number for any of the following features
For example, “PDN” is assignable to DN button can be assigned on only one DN button of a
only and “Call Park-System” is assignable to all PITS.
types of Assignable Feature Buttons (DN, DSS, Assigning the same number to multiple buttons of
PF). a PITS is impossible.

The assignable features in the shaded part can • Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
be assigned and canceled by the system • Private CO
programming only. • Single CO
• Group CO
❇1

The FWD/DND button is not provided on the <Example>

PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 as a Fixed Feature SDN 100 and SDN 100
Button but can be assigned to the PF3 button. Group CO 01 and Group CO 01
❇2
Each of the following features can be assigned to
The SAVE button is not provided on the following only one Assignable Feature button of a PITS.
PITS telephones, but the SAVE function can be Assigning the same feature to multiple buttons of
assigned to the PF1 button of them. a PITS is impossible.
PITS type 50
KX-T7020 • Off-Hook Call Announcement
KX-T7030 • Message Waiting
KX-T7050 • UCD Log In
• Local Alarm
• Privacy Change
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00

Primary Directory Number
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 10-C-25.00
PF Key Type and Number
DSS Key Type and Number
“Extension-DSS Console (2/3)”, 9-G-2.02 10-C-26.00
“Extension-DSS Console (3/3)” 9-G-2.03

PITS Station Programming Reference

Assigning DN (Directory Number) 12-C-1.00

Buttons
Assigning PF (Programmable Feature) 12-C-2.00
Buttons
Assigning DSS (Direct Station 12-C-3.00
Selection) Buttons

4-B-5
3.00 Line Access Buttons
3.01 PDN Button
Description Programming
When the KX-T336 System is installed, a Primary Reference
System Programming
Directory Number (PDN) button is always VT Dumb
assigned to every PITS telephone. “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
A PDN is a user's extension number. DN Key Type and Number
Each PITS telephone has at least one PDN
button that is used not only to make and receive Conditions
calls but to access system features. The table below shows the relationship between
The DN-01 button is fixed to PDN. the DN button and the CO line status.
Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned to
each PITS telephone. Indicator CO Line Status
If you assign three PDN buttons, they must be
arranged consecutively. Off Idle
PDN buttons are assigned in “Extension-Station”, Lights green I-use
Type and Number. Green 60 wink I-hold
By default setting, PDN button is seized Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation
automatically by simply lifting the handset or hold or unattended conference
pressing the SP-PHONE button. Green 240 wink Incoming call
Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold
Red 60 wink Other-hold
DN-03 Red 120 wink Privacy release possible

DN-02
PDN
DN-01

ICM

(DN buttons-PITS type 20, 30, 50)

(DN buttons - PITS 7000 series)

4-B-6
3.02 SDN Button 3.03 ICM Button
Description Description
Allows an extension user to assign PDN buttons Allows an extension user to make/receive an
of other extensions on DN buttons of PITS. This intercom call within an ICM (Intercom) group.
assigned DN buttons are called SDN buttons.
The assignment of SDN buttons make it easier to Programming
transfer or answer other extensions. Reference
SDN buttons are assigned in “Extension-Station”, System Programming
VT Dumb
Type and Number.
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Programming Intercom Number

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Conditions
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
The table below shows the relationship between
DN Key Type and Number
the indicator and the intercom status.

Indicator Intercom Status

Conditions
Off Idle
The table below shows the relationship between Lights green I-use, Off-Hook Call Announcement
the DN button and the CO line status. (OHCA)
Green 240 wink Incoming call
Indicator CO Line Status

Off Idle
Lights green I-use
Green 60 wink I-hold
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation
hold or unattended conference
Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold
Red 60 wink Other-hold
Red 120 wink Privacy release possible
Red 240 wink Incoming call

Preferential order of SDN indicators is as follows:

1. I-use, hold, exclusive hold, consultation
hold, unattended conference : Lights green,
Green 60 wink, Green 120 wink
2. Incoming call : Red 240 wink
3. Other-hold : Red 60 wink
4. Privacy Release : Red 120 wink
5. Busy : Lights red
6. Idle : Off

4-B-7
3.04 PCO Button
Description Conditions
It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were A Private CO button lights up red at the times
connected directly to a DN button on a PITS. below.
This operation is called Private CO.
1) When the Private CO line is not In Service.
It is then no longer possible to place outgoing
calls from other extensions using this CO line. 2) When the Private CO line has been set to
Also, an incoming call from the CO line will arrive Busy-Out.
only at this PITS.
3) When access using the Trunk Verify
function is made by the Attendant Console.
To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk
Group”, Type to PVL and program the CO line to
A call held on a Private CO button can not be
the Private trunk group in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
retrieved by other extensions, however, an
Group.
incoming call to a Private CO button can be
Also, program the DN button on the PITS to
transferred.
PRV-CO using “Extension-Station (2/3)”, Type
and assign the physical number of the Private
When an incoming call arrives, ringing occurs
CO line under Number.
instantly. Delayed ringing is not available.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Type
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
Type and Number

4-B-8
3.05 SCO Button
Description CO line which can be assigned as a SCO button
To support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO is:
line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS • A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
telephone. assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL
PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button. 1: N.
SCO button feature provides easy access to the
CO lines for extension users who make and • A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
receive many outside calls. assigned as Outgoing Only.
The PITS telephone user can access a CO line
by simply pressing the SCO button without Programming
dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming
Reference
outside call can be directed to the PITS System Programming
VT Dumb
telephone via dedicated SCO button without
assistance of the Operator. “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
In addition, the associated status LED provides Type and Number
busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

SCO button can be used either one-way service Conditions

(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways
• Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
service (Both-Way).
function is set, it is overridden by an outgoing
call made by pressing the Single CO button.
SCO button can be assigned to a PITS telephone
in conjunction with DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N feature.
• The Single CO button indicator will light up red
in the following circumstances.
SCO button with DIL 1: 1 feature
<1> When the Single CO is not In Service
When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SCO button
can be assigned to the PITS telephone <2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out
programmed as the destination of DIL 1: 1 status
feature.
<3> Idle status and Single CO in trunk route
If SCO button is not assigned on the PITS
control status
telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN
When the Single CO button is pressed in
button on it.
any of these statuses, its indicator lights up
green but busy tone is heard.
The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button programmed as Single CO and the
In the following cases, the Single CO button
CO line status:
indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is
sent.
Indicator CO Line Status
<1> When Calling Party Control signal has
Off Idle been detected during a call using the
Lights green I-use Single CO.
Green 60 wink I-hold
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold, <2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
unattended conference outgoing call made from the Single CO.
Green 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: 1)
Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold
Red 60 wink Other-hold
Red 120 wink Privacy release possible
Red 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

4-B-9
(30393)
3.06 GCO Button
Description Trunk group which can be assigned as a GCO
To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a button is:
group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned • A trunk group assigned as Bothway or
to a DN button on a PITS telephone. Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a (Day) is DIL 1:1 or DIL 1: N.
PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.
GCO button feature provides better service with • A trunk group assigned as Outgoing Only.
a given number of CO lines.
Programming
GCO button can be assigned to a PITS
Reference
telephone in conjunction with DIL 1: N feature. System Programming
VT Dumb
Incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group
can be directed to a maximum of eight “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
destinations (extension user, ICM group, pickup Type and Number
group) simultaneously.
In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons
on the PITS telephone. Conditions
If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls
When the ARS function is set, it is overridden by
via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.
outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.
To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user
Pressing a Group CO button when it is red
can access an idle CO line in the group by simply
serves to set the “Automatic Callback to Trunk”
pressing the dedicated GCO button.
function.
See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic
The table below shows the relationship between
Callback-Trunk” for details.
the DN button programmed as Group CO and the
CO line status:
In the following cases, the Group CO button
indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.
Indicator CO Line Status

Off Free CO line in trunk group and no <1> When Calling Party Control signal has
incoming CO call been detected during a call using the
Lights green I-use Group CO.
Green 60 wink I-hold
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold, <2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
unattended conference outgoing call made from a Group CO.
Green 240 wink —
Lights red No idle CO lines in trunk group
and no incoming call in trunk
group
Red 60 wink —
Red 120 wink —
Red 240 wink CO line receiving an incoming call
in trunk group

4-B-10
(30393)
C. Outgoing Call Features

1.00 Line Selection-Calling

Description Note
PITS telephones may have many line access Line access buttons that are available for a PITS
buttons and the set user can access a desired line telephone are:
either directly by pressing the button or by
employing automatic line selection feature. • DN buttons... Primary Directory Number
This Line Selection-Calling feature offers the (PDN) buttons
following three line-preferences and the user can Secondary Directory Number
select only one preference for his or her PITS set: (SDN) buttons
(Refer to Section 4-B-3.01
• Prime Line Preference-Calling (default)
through 3.02.)
• Idle Line Preference-Calling
• No Line Preference-Calling • CO buttons... Private CO (PCO), Single CO
(SCO), Group CO (GCO)
If Prime Line Preference or Idle Line Preference is
(Refer to Section 4-B-3.04
selected, the user can get the programmed line
through 3.06.)
automatically for making a call by simply lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button (On- • ICM (Intercom) button
Hook Dialing). (Refer to Section 4-B-3.03.)
If No Line Preference is selected, no line is
accessed until the user directly presses the
desired button.

Every PITS telephone is assigned to Prime Line

Preference on PDN button by default setting. This
can be changed on a PITS telephone basis using
PITS station programming. Refer to Section 12-C-
4.00 “Automatic Line Hunting (Calling).”
Line Preference-Calling feature newly assigned on
a PITS telephone overrides the previous
assignment.

4-C-1
1.01 Prime Line Preference-Calling
Description
Automatically connects a PITS telephone to a
line pre-assigned as Prime Line by simply lifting
the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
Once the Prime Line Preference is selected from
the Preference Calling features, one of the
following buttons should be assigned as the
Prime Line of the PITS telephone:
• DN button - PDN (default), SDN
• CO button - PCO, SCO, GCO
• ICM button
Programming
PITS Station Programming Reference
Automatic Line Hunting (Calling) 12-C-4.00
Selection
Conditions
A line access button except PDN and ICM cannot
be assigned as the Prime Line unless it has been
assigned to a PITS telephone by system
programming.
This feature is available when a PITS telephone
has no incoming call, or when a PITS telephone
does not answer an incoming call automatically
by going off-hook, that is, “Ringing Line
Preference-Answering” overrides “Prime Line
Preference-Calling.”
Refer to Section 4-D-1.01 “Ringing Line
Preference-Answering” for further information.
The user can override the preferred line
temporarily to access another line (Pre-
selection). To override the line, without lifting the
handset nor pressing the SP-PHONE button,
press the desired line access button listed below:
• PDN button • Group CO button
• Private CO button • ICM button
• Single CO button
Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• The indicator on the button
assigned as the prime line
lights in green.
• Dial tone 1 or 3 or 4 sounds.

PDN button and ICM button are fixed feature 2. Call the other party depending on
buttons and always provided on PITS the assigned line.
telephones.
However, SDN, PCO, SCO and GCO buttons are
assignable feature buttons.
If you assign SDN, PCO, SCO or GCO button as
Prime Line, pre-assignment as a line access
button on a PITS telephone must be done
beforehand by system programming.

Silence when going off-hook indicates that the

prime line is busy.

When two or more PDN buttons are assigned on

a PITS (up to three PDN buttons can be
assigned per PITS), line selection feature always
functions if at least one PDN button is available.

4-C-2
1.02 Idle Line Preference-Calling
Description Operation
One of the idle DN buttons (PDN, SDN) or CO 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
buttons (PCO, SCO, GCO) on a PITS telephone PHONE button.
will be automatically selected by lifting the
• The indicator on the selected
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
idle line access button lights in
It is determined by the system programming that green.
which button (DN or CO) will be selected as an • You hear dial tone 1.
idle line.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “System-Operation 2. Call the other party depending on
(1/3)” for programming. the selected line.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Idle Line Preference

PITS Station Programming Reference

Automatic Line Hunting (Calling) 12-C-4.00

Selection

Conditions
Silence when going off-hook indicates that no
idle line is available on the PITS telephone.
ICM button is not selected automatically by this
feature.
This feature is available when a PITS telephone
has no incoming call, or when a PITS telephone
does not answer an incoming call automatically
by going off-hook, that is, “Ringing Line
Preference-Answering” overrides “Idle Line
Preference-Calling.”
Refer to Section 4-D-1.01 “Ringing Line
Preference-Answering” for further information.

The user can override the preferred line

temporarily to access another line (Pre-
selection). To override the line, without lifting the
handset nor pressing the SP-PHONE button,
press the desired line access button listed below:
• PDN button • Group CO button
• Private CO button • ICM button
• Single CO button

4-C-3
1.03 No Line Preference-Calling
Description
If No Line Preference is assigned to a PITS
telephone, no line is automatically connected to a
PITS telephone when it goes off-hook.
To get a line for making a call, the extension user
must press the desired DN (PDN or SDN) or CO
(PCO, SCO or GCO) or ICM button on a PITS
telephone.
2.00 On-Hook Dialing
Description
On-Hook Dialing enables various hands-free
dialing operation. This permits the PITS
telephone users without lifting the handset to
access a line and dial telephone numbers,
intercom numbers, and feature numbers, or do
other dialing performances.

This feature can be assigned on a PITS Programming

telephone basis.
None
Programming
Conditions
PITS Station Programming Reference If Prime Line Preference or Idle Line Preference
is assigned to a PITS, pressing the SP-PHONE
Automatic Line Hunting (Calling) 12-C-4.00
button automatically selects the preprogrammed
Selection
line.

Condition If No Line Preference is assigned to a PITS

telephone, no tone sounds when SP-PHONE
Going off-hook selects no line and no tone is button is pressed, and to get a line for making a
heard. call, press the appropriate line access button.

Operation The SP-PHONE button is turned off

1. Lift the handset or press the SP- automatically, if no operation is made within 15
PHONE button. seconds in the following states after the SP-
PHONE button is pressed.
• You hear no tone.
The states are:
2. Press the desired line access
button. • While hearing one of the following tones;
Dial tone
• The indicator on the pressed Busy tone
button lights in green. Reorder tone
DND tone
3. Call the other party depending on
• While no tone is heard
the pressed button.

4-C-4
Operation
Without lifting the handset, press the desired line
access button listed below and perform an
appropriate dialing operation:
• SP-PHONE button • Single CO button
• PDN button • Group CO button
• Private CO button • ICM button
By pressing the SP-PHONE button
1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
• The indicator on the SP-
PHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the telephone number of the
other party.
By using the PDN button
1. Press the PDN button.
• The indicator on the SP-
PHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the telephone number of the
other party.
By using the Private CO button
1. Press the Private CO button.
• The indicator on the SP-
PHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the Private
CO button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1.
2. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.
4-C-5
By using the Single CO button
1. Press the Single CO button.
• The indicator on the SP-
PHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the Single CO
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1.
2. Dial the telephone number of the
external party.
By using the Group CO button
1. Press the Group CO button.
• The indicator on the SP-
PHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the Group CO
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1.
2. Dial the telephone number of the
external party.
By using the ICM button
1. Press the ICM button.
• The indicator on the SP-
PHONE button lights in red.
The indicator on the ICM
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 5.
2. Dial the intercom number of the
other extension.
3.00 Making Outside Calls
3.01 Local Trunk Dial Access
Description Operation
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
calls by automatic selection of an idle CO line. PHONE button.
Dialing the feature number for ARS/Local CO
Line Access” enables you to execute this • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
function.
2. Dial the feature number for
To activate this feature, set “System-Operation”, ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If set to (default)
“Yes,” ARS feature is activated instead of this
feature. • You hear dial tone 1.”
Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)” for further information. 3. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Automatic Route Selection
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Hunt Sequence
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
(02/11)”,
ARS/Local CO Line Access

Conditions
An idle CO line available and hunting sequence is
determined by the system programming “System-
Local Access Group”, Hunt Sequence.

If an extension user hears busy tone, there is no

idle CO line available.

If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user

is restricted from accessing this feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-1.01 “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access,” for further information.

If tenant service is employed, accessible trunk

groups are limited to the trunk groups within the
same tenant.

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk group
in hunt sequence 01 in “System-Local Access
Group.”

4-C-6
(70695)
3.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access
Description • Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO
as follows:
calls via an idle CO line in the specified trunk
group by dialing the feature number for “Trunk Trunk Group Trunk Group
Group 01-08 Access” or “Trunk Group 09-16 Specifying Number Number
Access.” 1 01
2 02
Programming 3 03
Reference 4 04
System Programming 5 05
VT Dumb
6 06
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 7 07
Trunk Group Access 8 08
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
(02/11)”, 2-2 Specifying one trunk group
Trunk Group 01-08 Access from 09 to 16
Trunk Group 09-16 Access
1) Dial the feature number for
Trunk Group 09-16 Access
Conditions “82” (default).
Trunk groups to be specified are limited to the 2) Dial the number for specifying
ones assigned in “System-Class of Service”, the trunk group: 1 to 8.
Trunk Group Access. • Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
If an extension user hears busy tone, all CO lines as follows:
in the specified trunk group are not available.
Trunk Group Trunk Group
If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user Specifying Number Number
is restricted from accessing the specified trunk 1 09
group. 2 10
Refer to Section 3-C-1.03 “Toll Restriction for 3 11
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct Trunk 4 12
Access,” for further information. 5 13
6 14
7 15
Operation 8 16
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. 3. Dial the telephone number of the
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. outside party.

2-1 Specifying one trunk group

from 01 to 08.
1) Dial the feature number for
Trunk Group 01-08 Access
“81” (default).
2) Dial the number for specifying
the trunk group: 1 to 8.

4-C-7
(70695)
3.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group
Dial Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Description Operation
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
calls using Special Carrier Facilities by simply PHONE button.
dialing the feature number for “Trunk Group 17-
24 Access.” • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Detailed data, such as access codes and
authorization codes, required to Special Carrier 2. Dial the feature number for Trunk
Access must be programmed beforehand in Group 17-24 Access “83”
“Special Carrier Access” screen. (default).
Trunk groups available for Special Carrier Access
is also defined in the same screen.

Special carriers available for each extension user 3. Dial the number for specifying
is defined in “System-Class of Service (2/2)” the virtual trunk group: 1 to 8.
Special Carrier Access.
• Virtual trunk group number
It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier matches virtual trunk group
Access on system-wide basis. specifying number and digit
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2- modification table number
EQU/OCC Access Assignment” for further (Equal access table number 1
information. to 4, OCC access table number
1 to 4 which should be
Programming assigned beforehand), as
Reference follows:
System Programming
VT Dumb
Virtual Trunk Virtual Trunk Digit Modification
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.02
Group Number Group Specifying Table Number
Special Carrier Access Number
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 17 1 Equal access 1
(02/11)”, 18 2 table number 2
Trunk Group 17-24 Access 19 3 3
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00 20 4 4
Access/OCC Access” 9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00 21 5 OCC access 1
“World Select 2” — 10-C-52.00 22 6 table number 2
23 7 3
24 8 4
Conditions
None 4. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

4-C-8
(70695)
3.04 Direct Trunk Access
Description Operation
Allows a PITS telephone user one-button access 1. Press the desired CO button.
to a CO line.
You can make an outgoing CO call without • The indicator on the CO button
dialing the feature number for CO line access. lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1.
This feature requires a CO button assignment on
a PITS telephone. 2. Dial the telephone number of the
There are three types of CO buttons available in outside party.
this system: Private CO (PCO), Single CO (SCO)
and Group CO (GCO) buttons.
For further information about CO button features,
refer to Section 3-D-2.07 through 2.09.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00

DN Key Type and Number

Condition
Direct trunk access (for making calls) can be
done by simply pressing the appropriate CO
button without lifting the handset or pressing the
SP-PHONE button.
Refer to Section 4-C-2.00 “On-Hook Dialing” for
related information.

4-C-9
4.00 Automatic Dialing
4.01 One Touch Dialing
Description <Example>
Extension users can program frequently dialed For calling an outside party automatically:
telephone numbers (of both extensions and ARS/Local CO Line Access - telephone number
outside parties) or feature numbers into memory
on the following PITS telephone's Assignable The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:
Feature buttons. • ARS/Local CO Line Access
• PF buttons • Trunk Group 01-08 Access
• DN buttons • Trunk Group 09-16 Access
• DSS buttons (KX-T30830 only) • Trunk Group 17-24 Access (Virtual Trunk
Group — ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
To dial a number stored in an assignable feature
button, the extension user just press the button Operation
and the PITS telephone automatically dials the Making a call using One Touch Dialing
number.
This feature can be programmed by either 1. Lift the handset or press the
system programming and PITS station SP-PHONE button.
programming.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Programming
Reference 2. Press the One Touch button.
System Programming
VT Dumb
• Stored number is sent.
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
DN Key Type, Number
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 (Supplement)
PF Key Type, Number 10-C-25.00
DSS Key Type, Number 10-C-26.00 In step 2, dialing a feature number for selecting a
“Extension-DSS Console (1/3)”, 9-G-2.01 CO line before pressing the One Touch button
DSS Key Type, Number 10-C-24.00 ignores the stored feature number and seizes the
“Extension-DSS Console (2/3)”, 9-G-2.02 CO line selected by manual operation.
PF Key Type, Number 10-C-25.00
Instead of the operation in step 1, pressing the
PITS Station Programming Reference Private CO, the Single CO, or the Group CO
button ignores the stored feature number for
DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00 selecting a CO line and seizes the CO line of the
Assignment pressed button.
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment One Touch Dialing, Speed Dialing, Last Number
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00 Redial, Saved Number Redial and manual dialing
Assignment can be used in combination.
<Example>
Conditions An extension user can store a number consisting
of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in
Each stored number can have up to 16 digits two assignable feature buttons.
including CO line access code. “0 to 9,” “* ,” “#,” In this case, feature number for selecting a CO
“PAUSE,” “FLASH,” “—” and “SECRET” can be line should not be stored on the second button.
registered.
For employing One Touch Dialing for calling an To dial the number, first press the first One Touch
outside party, stored number must include a button, and then press the second One Touch
feature number for selecting a CO line as leading button.
digits.

4-C-10
(60395)
4.02 Speed Dialing-System
Description Operation
Allows any extension user to call outside parties Calling an outside party using Speed Dialing-
by simply pressing the AUTO button and dialing a System
pre-assigned 3-digit code (001 to 200) common to
any extension user in the system. Up to 200 1. Lift the handset or press the
Speed Dialing Codes can be registered to the SP-PHONE button.
system
• The indicator on the SP-
The Speed Dialing Codes are registered in PHONE button lights in green.
“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and toll • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
restriction level unique to each speed dialing code
can be assigned in the same screen. 2. Press the AUTO button.
Refer to “Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed
Dialing” on next page for further information. • The indicator on the AUTO
button lights.
If Tenant Service is employed, Speed Dialing • You hear no tone.
Codes can be divided by two tenants. In this
case, one tenant cannot use the Speed Dialing 3. Dial the speed dialing code.
Codes which belong to the other tenant.
• The registered number is sent.

Programming
Reference (Supplement)
System Programming
VT Dumb Before pressing the AUTO button in step 2,
“System-Tenant”, Speed 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00 dialing a feature number for selecting a CO line
Dialing-System Boundary seizes the dialed CO line and starts outpulsing,
“System-Speed Dialing- 9-D-8.00 10-C-12.00 ignoring the feature number for selecting a CO
System” line registered in the speed dialing code.
Instead of the operation in step 1, pressing
Private CO, Single CO or Group CO ignores the
PITS System Programming Reference
feature number for selecting a CO line stored in
Storing Speed Dialing-System 11-C-3.00 the speed dialing codes and makes a call to an
outside party through the pressed CO line.
While dialing a speed dialing code in step 3,
Conditions canceling the code is possible by pressing the
Each stored number can have up to 32 digits AUTO button. Then repeat steps 2 to 3 for the
including CO line access code. “0 to 9,” “* ,” “#,” new entry.
“PAUSE,” “FLASH,” “—” and “SECRET” can be One Touch Dialing, Speed Dialing, Last Number
registered. Redial, Saved Number Redial and manual dialing
can be used in combination.
A feature number for selecting a CO line must be
stored as leading digits. <Example>
An extension user can store a number consisting
The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are: of 33 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in
• ARS/Local CO Line Access two speed dialing codes. In this case, a feature
• Trunk Group 01-08 Access number for selecting a CO line should not be
• Trunk Group 09-16 Access stored on the second speed dialing code.
• Trunk Group 17-24 Access (Virtual Trunk To dial the number, first press the AUTO button
Group — ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) and dial the first speed dialing code, and then
press the AUTO button and dial the second
speed dialing code.

4-C-11
(60395)
<Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing> Code (TRLSD=01 to 16), the system
compares Toll Restriction Level of Extension
The system administrator can assign Toll
(TRLE) with TRLSD.
Restriction Level of System Speed Dialing
(referred to as “TRLSD” in the following) to each
If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLSD
code as follows:
(TRLE≥TRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLE is
lower than TRLSD (TRLE<TRLSD), a call is
System - Speed Dialing - System checked against System Toll Restriction
feature.
System Speed Dial No. =001
For further information about TRLE, refer to
+
Section 3-C-1.00 “Toll Restriction.”
No. Type Dial
+ +
001 00 94113209 <Example>
If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
002 01 8114113209 outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
003 01 92093182 Dialing Code (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLE of 6
is higher than TRLSD of 7 (TRLE>TRLSD), so a
call is made.
Toll Restriction Level of System
Speed Dialing (TRLSD) If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
TRLSD consists of 17 levels (“00” and “01 to 16”) Dialing Code (TRLSD=4), in this case, TRLE of 6
TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from is lower than TRLSD of 4 (TRLE<TRLSD), so a
TRLSDs “01 to 16.” call is checked against the System Toll
In TRLSD “01 to 16,” “01” is the highest level and Restriction feature.
“16” is the lowest.

1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=00)

When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing

a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=00),
extension users receive standard toll
restriction treatment.

If selected speed dialing code includes Local

Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a
call is checked against “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access.”

If selected speed dialing code includes

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as
leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll
Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access.”
For further information about System Toll
Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-1.00
“Toll Restriction.”

2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=01 to 16)

When an extension user makes an outgoing

CO call by dialing a System Speed Dialing
4-C-12
The following flowchart shows the simplified procedure of toll restriction plan for
System Speed Dialing.

Start

When an outgoing CO call is made by When an outgoing CO call is made by

dialing a System Speed Dialing Code dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=01 to 16) (TRLSD=00)

Compares TRLSD with TRLE Checks a call against System Toll

Restriction feature
TRLE<TRLSD

TRLE≥TRLSD*
not restricted restricted
The call is made
(Transmit the registered The call is prohibited
number to CO line) (sends reorder tone)

* In this case, “Local Trunk Dial Access restriction” and “Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access restriction” assigned in Class of Service are disregarded.

4-C-13
4.03 Last Number Redial (LNR)
Description Operation
Automatically saves the last outside number Calling an outside party by LNR on the DN button
dialed from a PITS telephone and allows the or the CO button
extension user to make the same outgoing CO
call again by simply pressing the REDIAL (or 1. Press the DN button or the CO
LNR) button. button.

Programming • The indicator on the pressed

None button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Conditions
2. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.
Up to 32 digits except the feature number for
selecting a CO line can be memorized • If the last call was made on the
automatically as the last dialed number. CO button, calling by the DN
button is unavailable and
“* ,” “#,” “PAUSE,” or “SECRET” are counted as pressing the REDIAL
one digit respectively. (LNR)button is ignored.

Last number redialing memory is renewed Calling by LNR after dialing a feature number for
automatically every time you make a new selecting a CO line
outgoing CO call and even one digit is sent to CO
line. Dialing a feature number for selecting a CO 1. Press the DN button.
line only does not renew the memorized number.
• The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial a feature number for

selecting a CO line.

3. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

Interrupting redialing

While you hear busy tone, ring back tone, or

reorder tone,

1. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.

4-C-14
4.04 Automatic Redial
Description
Automatic Redialing is activated by pressing the
SP-PHONE button and REDIAL (LNR) button
successively (On-hook dialing).
By default, redialing will be repeated 10 or 15
times automatically at 40 or 60-second intervals
until the called party answers.
(These settings can be changed by system
programming. Default values for each area and
available range of values are described in
Section 10-C-51.00 “World Select 1 (WS1)”
No answer after dialing 10 or 15 times conclude
this function, turning the SP-PHONE button off.
Automatic Redialing is available with the
following PITS telephones only:
KX-T123230D, KX-T123235, KX-T7130, KX-
T7030, KX-T7050

Press the REDIAL (LNR) button in hands-free status

Redialing automatically

When no idle line is When the opposite When ringback tone sounds
available station is busy from the other party

The other party answers

Busy tone sounds
for five seconds
Conversation

Stand by for 40 or 60 seconds.

(During this time, the indicator
on the SP-PHONE button
flashes in red slowly. In other
status, indicator lights).

Programming If a CO line is not seized, busy tone sounds for

None five seconds.
Turning the SP-PHONE off while hearing busy
Conditions tone activates Automatic Callback-Trunk.
For further information, refer to Section 4-C-6.01
Besides the number, this function memorizes the “Automatic Callback-Trunk.”
button (DN or CO) used for the last call and
executes automatic redial on that button. Operation
Pressing the REDIAL (LNR) button while the last
used button is in use causes the system to wait 1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
until the button becomes idle. As soon as the
button becomes idle, this function is executed.
If the last used button was the PDN and multiple
PDNs are available, the system selects any idle
PDN. 2. Press the REDIAL (LNR) button.
• The indicator on the SP-
Automatic Redialing is terminated, if any key PHONE button flashes in red
operation is made during Automatic Redialing. slowly for 40 or 60 seconds of
standby status.

4-C-15
(60395)
4.05 Saved Number Redial (SNR)
Description 2. Press the SAVE (SNR)button.
Saved Number Redial allows the extension user
• If the saved call was on the CO
to store the telephone number of the outside
button, calling on the DN
party when the called line is busy or during a
button is ineffective: pressing
conversaion and make the same call again by
the SAVE (SNR) button is
simply pressing the dedicated feature button:
ignored.
SAVE or SNR button.
Calling by SNR after dialing a feature number for
Programming
selecting a CO line
None
1. Press the DN button.
Conditions
• The indicator on the pressed
Up to 32 digits of a dialing number can be stored
button lights in green.
for this function, not counting the feature number
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
for selecting a CO line.
“ * ,” “#,” “PAUSE” or “SECRET” is counted as
2. Dial a feature number for
one digit.
selecting a CO line.
Saved Number Redialing memory remains intact
until another number is stored in memory.

Operation 3. Press the SAVE (SNR)button.

Storing the phone number into SNR memory

When you are speaking on the CO line or when
the called CO line is busy Interrupting redialing

1. Press the AUTO button. While hearing busy tone, ring back tone, or
reorder tone from a CO line

1. Press the SAVE (SNR) button.

2. Press the SAVE (SNR) button.

• System saves the dialed

telephone number. (Supplement)
SAVE button is not provided on the following
3. Replace the handset or press the PITS telephones:
SP-PHONE button.
PITS type 50, KX-T7020, KX-T7030,
KX-T7050

Calling an outside party by SNR on the DN
button or the CO button
1. Press the DN button or the CO
button.
• The indicator on the pressed
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
However, the SAVE button can be assigned to
the PF1 button of the above listed PITS
telephones.
Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3) and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF (Programmable Feature)
Button Assignment” for further information.

4-C-16
5.00 Making Internal Calls
5.01 Inter Office Calling
Description Operation
Inter Office Calling allows the extension user to Calling an extension with the handset
call another extension user within the system by
dialing the directory number (three or four digits) 1. Lift the handset.
on a DN button.

Programming
None
2. Dial the directory number of the
Conditions other extension.

If Tenant Service is employed, Inter Office Calling • You hear ringback tone.
to the other tenant (inter-tenant calling) can be
enabled or disabled by programming. 3. When the other party answers,
Refer to Section 3-B-4.00 “Tenant Service” for start conversation.
further information.

4. After concluding conversation,

replace the handset.

Calling an extension hands-free

1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Dial the directory number of the

other extension.

• You hear ringback tone.

3. When the other party answers,

start conversation.

4. Press the SP-PHONE button

after concluding conversation.

4-C-17
5.02 Intercom Calling
Description Operation
Intercom Calling allows the extension user to call 1. Lift the handset or press
another extension user in the same Intercom the SP-PHONE button.
group by dialing the Intercom Number (one or
two digits) on the ICM button.
Refer to Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for
details about Intercom group. 2. Press the ICM button.

Besides Intercom Calling, Intercom facility offers • You hear dial tone 5.
the following features: • The indicator on the ICM
button lights in green.
• Intercom - Voice Calling
• Intercom - Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
3. Dial the intercom number of the
• Intercom - Off-Hook Call Announcement
other extension.
(OHCA)
Refer to descriptions on the following pages. • You hear ringback tone.
• An intercom number is one or
Programming
two digit(s).
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 4. When the other party answers,
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 start conversation.
Intercom Number
ICM Group

5. After finishing conversation,

Conditions replace the handset or press the
Intercom Calling is available within the same SP-PHONE button.
Intercom group.

SLT telephone users can neither execute nor (Supplement)

receive Intercom Calling. In step 3, you can also call the other party by
pressing “*,” then dialing the directory number of
the extension, instead of dialing the intercom
number.

4-C-18
5.03 Intercom-Voice Calling
Description Canceling the Voice Calling mode
Intercom-Voice Calling allows an extension user
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
to call another extension user in the same
PHONE button.
Intercom group through Intercom Calling with his
voice instead of ringing.
• The indicator on the PDN
While calling an extension, the user can change
button lights in green.
the voice calling mode to the ringing mode by
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
pressing “ *. ” The ringing mode cannot be
changed to the voice calling mode while calling. 2. Dial the feature number for Voice
Calling Mode Cancel “67#”
Programming (default).
Reference
System Programming • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
VT Dumb
2.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00
• If your PITS has a display, it
(06/11)”,
shows:
Voice Calling Mode Set
Voice Calling Mode Cancel Tone Ringing

Changing to the ringing mode during Intercom-

Conditions
Voice Calling in the Voice Calling mode.
If the called extension has enabled Voice Calling
Deny, Intercom-Voice Calling results in ringing 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
call even though the caller sets “Voice Calling PHONE button.
Mode Set.”

For further information about Voice Calling Deny,

refer to Section 4-D-2.02 “Intercom Answer Voice 2. Press the ICM button.
Calling Deny.”
Use PDN button to set or cancel this feature.

Operation
3. Dial the intercom number of the
Setting the Voice Calling mode
other extension.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
PHONE button.
• Start Intercom-Voice Calling to
the opposite party.
• The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. 4. Dial “ .”

2. Dial the feature number for • Ringing the other party starts .
• You hear ringback tone.
Voice Calling Mode Set “67 ”
(default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Voice Alerting

4-C-19
(70695)
5.04 Intercom-Busy Station Signaling
(BSS)
Description 3. Dial the intercom number of the
other extension.
When the called extension user is busy talking on
a DN or CO button, and the ICM button is idle,
• You hear ringback tone.
Intercom-Busy Station Signaling informs the
• The indicator on the ICM
other extension user that he or she is called by
button of the other station
another extension through Intercom Calling with
flashes in 240 wink.
the flashing ICM button.
The called extension user's telephone must be
(Supplement)
off-hook.
If the ICM button of the other station is occupied,
To activate this function, assign “System-Class of the caller hears busy tone.
Service”, BSS/OHCA to “Yes.”
Answering the call
If the called extension user's telephone is PITS
The indicator on the ICM button flashes in 240
KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 or KX-T7130, Busy
wink and you hear call waiting tone.
Station Signaling turns into Intercom Off-Hook
Talking to the second caller by disconnecting the
Call Announcement (OHCA).
first party
Refer to the next page for further information.
BSS feature is available between the extension
1. Press the ICM button.
users in the same Intercom group.
• Talk to the second party.
Programming
• The indicator on the ICM
Reference button lights.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 Talking to the second caller by holding the first
BSS/OHCA party

1. Press the HOLD button.

Conditions
• The first party is placed on
Intercom-Busy Station Signaling is effective if the hold.
called extension is preset to either of the
following functions:
2. Press the ICM button.
• “System-Class of Service”, BSS/OHCA
Deny is set to “Yes.” • Speak to the second party.
• “System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/ • The indicator on the ICM
Do Not Disturb is set to “Yes.” button lights.
Operation 3. Press the button that is flashing
Calling an extension in 60 wink to talk to the first party
again.
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. • The second party is
disconnected. Talk to the first
party.

2. Press the ICM button.

4-C-20
5.05 Intercom Off-Hook Call
Announcement (OHCA)
Description
When the called extension is busy talking on a
DN or CO button, and the ICM button is idle,
OHCA allows the calling extension user to inform
the called party that another call is waiting,
through the built-in speaker of the called party's
PITS telephone.
OHCA works under the following conditions:
• The ICM buttons on both the calling
extension's telephone and the called
extension's telephone are idle.
• The called extension's telephone is PITS
KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 or KX-T7130.
• The called extension's handset is off the
hook.
Conditions
OHCA does not work if the called extension is
under one of the following conditions:
• The ICM button is not idle.
• Talking in the speaker phone mode.
• “System-Class of Service”, BSS/OHCA
Deny is set to “Yes.”
• “System-Class of Service”, Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is set to “Yes.”
Operation
Executing OHCA
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.

To activate this function, install T-SW OHCA card

(KX-T336105) in the Basic Slot 02, and OHCA
card (KX-T96136) on the PLC or HLC card. 2. Press the ICM button.
Refer to Section 2-C-3.02 “T-SW OHCA Card
(KX-T336105)” and Section 2-C-3.03 “OHCA
Card (KX-T96136)” for further information.
In the system programming, assign “System-
Class of Service (1/2)”, BSS/OHCA to “Yes” at 3. Dial the intercom number of the
calling extension, and assign “Extension-Station extension.
(1/3)”, OHCA Circuit to “Yes” at the called
extension. • When the extension is off-
hook, you hear confirmation
Programming tone 3.

Reference 4. Talk to the other party.

System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

BSS/OHCA
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
OHCA Circuit

4-C-21
6.00 Automatic Callback
6.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk
Description Operation
If no idle CO line is available when dialing a Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk (1)
feature number for selecting a CO line and the
telephone number of an outside party, the caller 1. Lift the handset or press
hears special busy tone. the SP-PHONE button.
On-hook while hearing the special busy tone
calls back the caller as soon as a CO line • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
becomes idle: call-back ringing. Off-hook or • The indicator on the PDN
pressing the SP-PHONE button catches the CO button lights in green.
line automatically, and sends the last dialed
telephone number to the CO line. 2. Dial the feature number for
selecting a CO line.
Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing
cancels this function. • You hear dial tone 1.
Also no answer in four ringings (within 10
seconds) after the start of callback ringing 3. Dial the telephone number of the
cancels this function. outside party.

To activate “Automatic Callback-Trunk,” assign • You hear busy tone 3.

“Extension-Station”, Automatic Callback-Trunk to
“Yes.”
This setting is assignable on an extension basis. 4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
Programming
Reference • If your PITS has a display, it
System Programming shows:
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 Trunk Queuing

Automatic Callback-Trunk
(Supplement)
The following four feature numbers are available
Conditions for selecting a CO line:
Multiple extensions are able to set this function to
• ARS/Local CO Line Access
one or more CO lines at the same time.
• Trunk Group 01-08 Access
A maximum of 64 Automatic Callback-Trunk can
• Trunk Group 09-16 Access
be active in the system.
• Trunk Group 17-24 Access (Virtual Trunk
Group — for U.S.A. and Canada only)
If 64 extensions already set this function to one
or more CO lines, another caller's attempt to
execute this setting is rejected by normal busy
tone, not by special busy tone.

Even if an extension user sets Call Forwarding-

No Answer or Do Not Disturb, he or she can set
Automatic Callback-Trunk: callback ringing is
effective to the extension.

Automatic Callback-Trunk cannot be set by the

extension which has a consultation hold call.

4-C-22
(60395)
Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk (2) Answering callback ringing

1. Press the CO button (PCO, As soon as the specified CO line or a CO line in

SCO☛ or GCO) which is lit in the specified trunk group becomes idle, callback
red without lifting the handset. ringing starts.

• The indicator on the pressed 1. Lift the handset or press

CO button lights in green. the SP-PHONE button.
You hear dial tone 1.
• You are in hands-free mode. • The last dialed number is sent
to the line automatically and
2. Dial the telephone number of the calling the other party starts.
outside party.

• You hear busy tone 3.

3. Press the SP-PHONE button.

• If your PITS has a display, it

shows:
Trunk Queuing

☛ In non-privacy system, pressing the SCO

button does not set Automatic Callback-Trunk
but establishes a three-party conversation.
Refer to Section 4-G-1.00 “Programmable
Privacy” for further information.

4-C-23
6.02 Automatic Callback-Station
Description Operation
If busy tone is heard when calling an extension 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
user, dialing “6” and hanging up causes PHONE button.
Automatic Callback to the caller as soon as the
called party concludes conversation: • You hear dial tone 1.
• The indicator on the PDN
When callback ringing for the caller starts, button lights in green.
answering by off-hook or pressing the SP-
PHONE button offers calling the other party 2. Dial the directory number of the
automatically. other extension.

Off-hook prior to the start of call-back ringing • You hear busy tone 1 or 2.
cancels this function.
Also no answer during four ringings after the start
of call-back ringing cancels this function. 3. Dial “6.”

Programming • You hear confirmation tone 2

and reorder tone.
None
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Conditions
Callback Ext xxxx
Up to four extensions are able to assign this
function to one extension at the same time.
The fifth extension attempting to set this function Directory number
is rejected by reorder tone.
4. Replace the handset.
If you do not dial “6” within 10 seconds after
hearing busy tone, you hear reorder tone and
cannot execute this feature.

Even if an extension user sets Call Forwarding- Answering callback ringing

No Answer or Do Not Disturb, Automatic As soon as the other extension user concludes
Callback-Station is effective to that extension. the conversation, callback ringing starts.
Automatic Callback-Station cannot be set by the 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
extension which has a call on consultation hold. PHONE button.

• You hear ringback tone.

Calling the other extension
starts.

4-C-24
7.00 Executive Busy Override
Description Operation
Executive Busy Override allows the extension 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
user to intrude on a busy line, and then a 3-party PHONE button.
conversation is established. This feature is
accessed by dialing “1” while hearing busy tone. • The indicator on the PDN
button lights in green.
To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class of • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Service”, Executive Busy Override to “Yes,” at
overriding extension. 2. Dial the directory number of the
other extension.
In entering into a three-party conversation, all the
three parties hear confirmation tone. • You hear busy tone 1 or 2.
It is programmable to send this tone or not by
“System-Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-
in. 3. Dial “1.”

Programming • After you hear confirmation

tone 3, start a three-party
Reference
System Programming conversation.
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Executive Busy Override

Conditions
Busy status means that all PDN buttons on the
called extension are in use.
In this status, busy tone sounds.

Executive Busy Override does not function when

the other party is any one of the following status;

• Three-party conversation
• OHCA conversation
• ICM conversation
• Private CO conversation

Executive Busy Override does not function if

either of two parties in conversation has set the
followings.

• Executive Busy Override Deny

(Refer to Section 4-D-5.00.)
• Data Line Security
(Refer to Section 4-I-6.00.)

4-C-25
8.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Override
Description Operation
Do Not Disturb Override allows an extension to 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
call another extension which has set Do Not PHONE button.
Disturb.
Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides • The indicator on the PDN
calling the extension. button lights in green.
Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
(DND)” for further information about DND feature.
2. Dial the directory number of the
To activate this function, assign “System-Class of other extension.
Service”, Do Not Disturb Override to “Yes.”
• If the other extension sets DND
Programming (Do Not Disturb), you hear
DND tone.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
3. Dial “1.”
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Do Not Disturb Override • You hear ringback tone.
• Calling the other party starts.

Conditions
When dialing “1,” if the other extension is busy,
the caller hears busy tone. In this case, it is
possible to assign Automatic Callback-Station,
etc.,.
For Automatic Callback-Station, refer to Section
4-C-6.02 “Automatic Callback-Station.”

If “System-Class of Service,” Do Not Disturb

Override is set to “No,” the caller hears reorder
tone after dialing “1” and cannot call the other
party.

4-C-26
9.00 Walking COS (Class Of
Service)
Description
3. Dial the four-digit Walking COS
Allows an extension user to call an outside party
Password.
from another extension preset to a lower COS
(Class of Service) by using a higher COS of his
or her own extension temporarily.
This is generally used for making toll calls from a
4. Dial the extension number of
toll restricted extension.
your own station.
After conclusion of one call to an outside party,
• You hear confirmation tone 2.
Class of Service of the employed station returns
• If your PITS has a display, it
to the original class automatically.
shows:
Each tenant has a four digit Walking COS Set COS of Exxxx
Password programmed in system program.
The password allows a user to set Walking COS. Directory number

Programming 5. Call an outside party by using a

Reference higher COS of your own station.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-5.00

Walking COS Password
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Canceling Walking COS
Walking COS Password It is possible to cancel Walking COS without
(Tenant 2) making any call to an outside party as follows:
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
(07/11)”,
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
Walking COS Set
Walking COS Cancel PHONE button.

Conditions
2. Dial the feature number for
Use the PDN button to set and cancel Walking
Walking COS Cancel “#7”
COS.
(default).
Operation
• You hear confirmation tone 2.
Setting Walking COS • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
From a lower COS telephone,
Restored COS
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. • COS returns to the original
grade.

2. Dial the feature number for

Walking COS Set “ 7” (default).

4-C-27
(70695)
10.00 Operator Call
Description Operation
Allow extension users to call the operator by 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
dialing the feature number for “Operator Call PHONE button.
(General)” or “Operator Call (Specific).”

Up to two operators are assignable for the whole

system. If Tenant Service is available, two 2. Calling an operator without
operators are assignable for each tenant, that specifying
makes four operators available for the whole 1) Dial the feature number for
system. Operator Call (General) “0”
(default).
If two operators are assigned in the system, or in
the tenant (if tenant Service is employed), Calling an operator by specifying
extension users can specify the operator (in the 1) Dial the feature number for
same tenant) by dialing the feature number for “Operator Call (Specific).”
“Operator Call (Specific).” 2) Dial “1” to specify operator 1.
Dial “2” to specify operator 2.
Programming
Reference
(Supplement)
System Programming
VT Dumb • If your PITS has a display, the following
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 message appears on the display:
(02/11)”,
Operator Call (Specific) When the called operator is at an Attendant
Operator Call (General) Console:
ATT Console
Conditions
When the called operator is at an extension:
When calling an operator by dialing the feature <Example>
number for “Operator Call (General),” the
operator is selected according to the type of the 1000 : Mary
extension name
Type of Station Operator directory number
Operator 1 Operator 2 Selected
Operator 1 or
ATT ATT Operator 2
ATT EXT Operator 1 only
EXT EXT Operator 1 only
ATT — Operator 1 only
EXT — Operator 1 only

operators' stations as shown below:

When no operators are assigned, a user hears
reorder tone during executing Operator Call.
For the assignment of operators, refer to Section
3-B-5.00 “Operator.”

4-C-28
(70695)
D. Receiving Features
1.00 Line Selection-Answering
Description
Line Selection-Answering feature allows a PITS
telephone user to answer an incoming call on it
by simply lifting the handset or pressing the SP-
PHONE button.
One of the following three Line Selection-
Answering features can be assigned to a PITS
telephone individually.
• Ringing Line Preference - Answering
• Prime Line Preference - Answering
• No Line Preference - Answering
Ringing Line Preference-Answering is assigned
to all PITS telephones by default.
This assignment can be changed on a PITS
telephone basis in PITS station programming
mode.
To prevent a PITS telephone from automatically
answering an incoming call by simply going off-
hook, assign No Line Preference-Answering
feature to the PITS telephone.
If No Line Preference-Answering is assigned,
press the appropriate button on a PITS telephone
to answer a call.
Line Selection-Answering feature newly assigned
on a PITS overrides the pre-assigned Line
Selection-Answering feature.
4-D-1
1.01 Ringing Line Preference-Answering
Description
Automatically connects a PITS telephone user to
an incoming call ringing at PITS telephone by
simply lifting the handset.
Line access buttons that can be selected by this
feature include PDN, SDN, ICM, PCO, SCO and
GCO buttons.
Programming
PITS Station Programming Reference
Automatic Answering Selection 12-C-5.00
Conditions
It two or more line on a PITS are ringing
simultaneously, a PITS telephone user is
connected to the first line to start ringing.
If a PITS telephone user wishes to answer a line
other than the first ringing line, the desired line
access button must be pressed prior to going off-
hook (Refer to Section 4-D-1.04 “Direct
Answering (Pre-selection).”)
This feature functions only for incoming calls
ringing at a PITS telephone.
Consequently, if an incoming call arrives at a line
access button on which delayed ringing is
assigned, that is, no ringing occurs while the
indicator flashes in 240 wink, in this case
extension user must press the appropriate line
access button to answer the incoming call.
Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information about delayed ringing.
Operation
An incoming call is ringing at your telephone.
Also the indicator light on the call-receiving button
flashes in 240 wink, showing the arrival of the call.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• You can automatically answer
the incoming call ringing, and
the indicator on the button
lights in green.
• Talk to the caller.
1.02 Prime Line Preference-Answering
Description Operation
Automatically connects a PITS telephone to A call arrives at the assigned prime line and your
answer an incoming call assigned as “Prime Line telephone is ringing. The indicator on the line
(Answering)” on a PITS telephone. access button assigned as Prime line flashes in
Line access buttons that can be selected by this 240 wink.
feature include PDN, SDN, ICM, PCO, SCO and
GCO buttons. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Even if two or more lines on a PITS are ringing
simultaneously, PITS telephone is automatically • The indicator on the call-
connected to an incoming call on a line assigned receiving button lights in green.
as Prime Line-Answering by simply lifting the • Talk to the caller.
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

Programming

PITS Station Programming Reference

Automatic Answering Selection 12-C-5.00

Conditions
When a call or calls are coming on a line or lines
other than the prime line, lifting the handset or
pressing the SP-PHONE button is considered as
a calling operation. If you wish to answer the call
at the time, press the desired line access button.
Refer to Section 4-C-1.01 “Prime Line
Preference-Calling” for related information.

It is possible to answer desired incoming call by

pressing the appropriate DN or CO button
directly without lifting the handset or pressing the
SP-PHONE button (Direct Answering).
Refer to Section 4-D-1.04 “Direct Answering
(Pre-selection)” for further information.

4-D-2
1.03 No Line Preference-Answering
Description
If this feature is assigned to a PITS telephone,
the extension user cannot answer an incoming
call by simply lifting the handset or pressing the
SP-PHONE button.
To answer an incoming call, the user must press
the appropriate line access button.
Programming
PITS Station Programming Reference
Automatic Answering Selection 12-C-5.00
Conditions
In case your PITS telephone is KX-T30820 (only
three DN buttons are provided) and all DN
buttons are assigned as PDN buttons:
If all three PDN buttons are occupied by
incoming calls, no tone is heard when you lift
the handset or press the SP-PHONE buttons.
If two PDN buttons are occupied by the
incoming calls and the other one is idle, PITS
telephone is connected to the idle PDN
automatically and dial tone is heard, when
you lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button since going off-hook is regarded as
calling operation.
1.04 Direct Answering (Pre-selection)
Description
Allows the user to answer an incoming call by
simply pressing the appropriate DN button (PDN,
SDN), CO button (PCO, SCO, GCO) or ICM
button on which a call is coming without lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
Direct Answering provides hands-free
conversation mode automatically.
Programming
None
Conditions
None
Operation
A call arrives and the indicator on the DN, the CO
or the ICM button flashes in 240 wink.
1. Press the button that is flashing
in 240 wink.
• The pressed button lights in
green and hands-free
conversation is established
automatically.

Operation
A call arrives and your telephone is ringing. The
indicator on the button which the call is reaching
flashes in 240 wink.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

PHONE button, then press the
button on which the call is
coming.

• The indicator on the call-

receiving button lights in green.
• Talk to the caller.

4-D-3
2.00 Intercom Answer
2.01 Intercom Hands-Free
Answerback
Description Operation
Hands-Free Answerback enables the extension Setting Hands-Free Answerback
user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset
Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SP-
when he receives an intercom call.
PHONE is off.
When Intercom Hands-Free Answerback mode is
established, a calling extension user hears
1. Press the AUTO ANS button.
confirmation tone and a called extension hears a
beep tone.
• The indicator on the AUTO
This feature applies to Intercom calling only.
ANS button lights.
Programming
Canceling Hands-Free Answerback
None
Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SP-
PHONE is off.
Conditions
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones cannot 1. Press the AUTO ANS button.
use this function.
• The indicator light on the
AUTO ANS button goes out.

4-D-4
2.02 Intercom Answer Voice Calling
Deny
Description Operation
Allows extension users to deny the Intercom To deny Intercom Answer Voice Calling
Voice Calling from other extension users.
When an extension sets this function, another 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
extension's attempt to execute Voice Calling is PHONE button.
ignored and turned into normal ringing alert
automatically.
For further information about Voice Calling, refer
to Section 4-C-5.03 “Intercom-Voice Calling.” 2. Dial the feature number for
Voice Calling Deny Set “68 ”
To deny Intercom Voice Calling, dial the feature (default).
number for “Voice Calling Deny Set.”
To allow Intercom Voice Calling, dial the feature • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
number for “Voice Calling Deny Cancel.” 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
Programming shows:
Reference V. Alerting Deny
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00 3. Replace the handset or press the

(06/11)”, SP-PHONE button.
Voice Calling Deny Set
Voice Calling Deny Cancel

To allow Intercom Answer Voice Calling

Conditions
This setting must be executed on the PDN 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
button. PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

Voice Calling Deny Cancel
“68#” (default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
V. Alerting Allow

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-5
(70695)
2.03 Intercom Answer BSS/OHCA
Deny
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to deny “Intercom-Busy To deny Intercom Answer BSS/OHCA
Station Signaling (BSS)” and “Intercom Off-Hook
Call Announcement (OHCA)” from other 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
extension users. If an user sets this function, PHONE button.
another's attempt to execute BSS/OHCA is
rejected with busy tone.
For further information about BSS/OHCA
function, refer to Section 4-C-5.04 “Intercom- 2. Dial the feature number for “BSS/
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)” and Section 4-C- OHCA Deny Set “63 ” (default).
5.05 “Intercom-Off-Hook Call Announcement
(OHCA).” • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Assigning and canceling this function are • If your PITS has a display, it
executed by dialing the feature number for shows:
“BSS/OHCA Deny Set” and “BSS/OHCA Deny
Cancel.” BSS/OHCA Deny

To perform this function with the feature number 3. Replace the handset or press the
for “BSS/OHCA Deny Set,” assign “System-Class SP-PHONE button.
of Service”, BSS/OHCA Deny to “Yes” on an
extension user basis.

Programming To allow Intercom Answer BSS/OHCA

Reference 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-

System Programming
VT Dumb PHONE button.
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
BSS/OHCA Deny
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”, 2. Dial the feature number for
BSS/OHCA Deny Set BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel “63#”
BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel (default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

Conditions 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Use the PDN button to assign and cancel this • If your PITS has a display, it
function. shows:
BSS/OHCA Allow

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-6
(70695)
3.00 Call Pickup
3.01 Dial Call Pickup
Description
Dial Call Pickup allows an extension user to
answer the call that is ringing at another
telephone in the same call pickup group.
To answer a call at nearby extension, simply lift
the handset and dial the feature number for “Dial
Call Pickup.”
An extension user can be assigned to only one
call pickup group.
Up to 32 call pickup groups are assignable in the
whole system.
If extension users attempt to pick up the above
mentioned calls, reorder tone sounds after dialing
the feature number for “Dial Call Pickup” and the
following message appears on the display, if
provided:
No Incoming Call
Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.

For further information about call pickup group,

refer to Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup Group.”
Programming
System Programming
“System-Numbering Plan
(03/11)”,
Dial Call Pickup
2. Dial the feature number for Dial
Call Pickup “47” (default).
• After you hear confirmation
Reference tone 3, you can answer the call
VT Dumb arriving at another telephone in
9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 the same call pickup group.
3. Start Conversation.

Conditions
It is possible to execute this function after holding
the current call.
Note:
An extension user who has Do Not Disturb • Confirmation tone 3 for Call Pickup can be
assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
extensions. C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls:
<1> A call ringing at an extension outside of the
same call pickup group
<2> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 “Call Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
<3> A call ringing on PCO button
<4> A call ringing on ICM button
<5> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)

4-D-7
(70695)
3.02 Directed Call Pickup
Description Operation
Directed Call Pickup allows any extension user to Picking up a call ringing at an extension in the
answer the call ringing at an extension in any call different call pickup group
pickup group by dialing the feature number for 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
“Directed Call Pickup,” and then the directory PHONE button.
number of the ringing extension.

Programming
Reference 2. Dial the feature number for
System Programming
VT Dumb Directed Call Pickup “48”
9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(default).
“System-Numbering Plan
(03/11)”,
Directed Call Pickup

3. Dial the directory number of the

Conditions ringing extension.
It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup • You hear confirmation tone 3.
after holding the current call. • Talk to the caller.
An extension user who has Do Not Disturb 4. Start Conversation.
assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other
extensions.

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls: Note:
<1> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial • Confirmation tone 3 for Call Pickup can be
Call Pickup Deny is set eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 “Call Pickup C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
Deny” for further information.)
<2> A call ringing on PCO button
<3> A call ringing on ICM button
<4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)

For the above calls, reorder tone sounds after

dialing the feature number for “Directed Call
Pickup” and the following message appears on
the display, if provided:
No Incoming Call

4-D-8
(70695)
3.03 Call Pickup Deny
Description Operation
Call Pickup Deny allows an extension user to Assigning Call Pickup Deny
prohibit the other extension users from picking up
calls ringing at his or her extension by the call 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
pickup feature (whether Dial Call Pickup or PHONE button.
Directed Call Pickup).

To assign or cancel this function, dial the feature

number for “Dial Call Pickup Deny Set” or “Dial 2. Dial the feature number for Dial
Call Pickup Deny Cancel.” Call Pickup Deny Set “61 ”
(default).
Programming
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 shows:
(05/11)”,
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set C. Pickup Deny
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel
3. Replace the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.
Conditions
Use the PDN button to assign and cancel Call
Pickup Deny.
Canceling Call Pickup Deny
Even if an extension user has Call Pickup Deny
assignment, he or she can execute Dial Call 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
Pickup or Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing at PHONE button.
other extensions.

2. Dial the feature number for Dial

Call Pickup Deny Cancel “61#”
(default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
C. Pickup Allow

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-9
(70695)
4.00 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day
Service
Description Conditions
Incoming CO calls programmed for TAFAS will If tenant service is employed :
ring the external pager and any extension user in The affiliation of each external pager is
the system can answer the calls by dialing the determined by the system programming in
feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2” Tenant.
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2). Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager which belongs to the
To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk other tenant.
Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1 Operation
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Answering incoming CO calls programmed for
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
TAFAS
To utilize the external pager, assign “System-
Operation”, External Paging 1, 2” to “Yes.” An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to 2. If a call is ringing at external
Section 4-I-1.01 “Universal Night Answer (UNA).” pager 1: Dial the feature number
for Night Answer 1 “45” (default).
Programming
If a call is ringing at external
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb pager 2: Dial the feature number
for Night Answer 2 “46” (default).
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
External Paging 1, 2 • You hear confirmation tone 3.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
3. Start conversation.
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
“Group-Trunk-Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Incoming Mode (Day)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Trunk Group Note:
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00 • Confirmation tone 3 for TAFAS can be
External Pager-Tenant eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).

4-D-10
(70695)
5.00 Executive Busy Override
Deny
Description Operation
Assigning and canceling Busy Override Deny are Assigning Executive Busy Override Deny
available to each extension.
If an extension sets this function, another 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
extension's attempt to perform Executive Busy PHONE button.
Override on the extension is rejected with busy
tone.
Refer to Section 4-C-7.00 “Executive Busy
Override” for further information. 2. Dial the feature number for Busy
Override Deny Set “64 ”
To set or cancel this function, dial the feature (default).
number for “Busy Override Deny Set” or “Busy
Override Deny Cancel.” • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
System programming is required to assign this • If your PITS has a display, it
feature. shows:
Assign “System-Class of Service”, Executive
Busy Ovrde Deny
Busy Override Deny to “Yes.”

Programming
3. Replace the handset or press the
Reference SP-PHONE button.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Executive Busy Override
Deny
“System-Numbering Plan
(05/11)”,
Busy Override Deny Set
Busy Override Deny Cancel
Canceling Executive Busy Override Deny
9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.

Conditions
2. Dial the feature number for Busy
To assign and cancel Executive Busy Override Override Deny Cancel “64#”
Deny, use the PDN button. (default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Busy Ovrde Allow

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-11
(70695)
6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description (4) FWD/DND
Setting DND feature cancels any Call
Do Not Disturb allows an extension user to
Forwarding feature pre-assigned on the
appear busy to all incoming calls
extension and vice versa.
(intercom,extension and outside calls).
Refer to Section 4-F-2.00 “Call Forwarding
(FWD)” for further information.
To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes”
(5) BSS/OHCA
beforehand by system programming.
DND is effective for BSS/OHCA.
This feature can be assigned and canceled either
Refer to Section 4-C-5.04 and 4-C-5.05 for
by dialing the feature number or using the
further information.
FWD/DND button.
(6) DND Override
Programming
“Do Not Disturb Override” allows extension
Reference users to override “Do Not Disturb” feature
System Programming
VT Dumb assigned on the called extension user.
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 Refer to Section 4-C-8.00 “Do Not Disturb
Call Forwarding/Do Not Override” for further information.
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”, Operation
Do Not Disturb Set
Call Forwarding/Do Not Assigning Do Not Disturb (1)
Disturb Cancel
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.
Conditions
(1) IRNA – Automatically • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If a call via DISA/DID is directed to an
extension in the DND mode, it will be 2. Dial the feature number for Do
automatically redirected to another extension Not Disturb Set “ 1” (default).
(including VPS extension) or an Attendant
Console assigned as the IRNA destination. • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Refer to Section 3-F-5.00 “Intercept Routing 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
– No Answer (IRNA) for further information. • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
(2) Making Calls
An extension in the DND mode can still be Do Not Disturb
used to make calls and access any other
features available to that extension. 3. Replace the handset or press the
(3) Answering Calls SP-PHONE button.
An extension in the DND mode is available:
• The FWD/DND indicator lights.
• To answer a call if its indication of arrival is
shown on his or her extension.
Refer to (Supplement 2) on page 4-D-14 for
further information.
• To answer a call ringing at another
extension by “Call Pickup” feature.
Refer to Section 4-D-3.00 “Call Pickup” for
further information.

4-D-12
(70695)
Assigning Do Not Disturb (2) Canceling Do Not Disturb (2)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP- 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. PHONE button.
• The indicator light on the
FWD/DND button goes out.
2. Press the FWD/DND button.
2. Press the FWD/DND button.

3. Dial “1.”
3. Dial “0.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it • If your PITS has a display, it
shows: shows:
Do Not Disturb FWD/DND Cancel

4. Replace the handset or press the 4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button. SP-PHONE button.
• The FWD/DND indicator lights.
• The FWD/DND indicator
remains off.
Canceling Do Not Disturb (1)
(Supplement)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. Type 50 and the KX-T7050 PITS telephones are
not provided with the FWD/DND button. To do
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
step 2 using them, assign a PF button to be
• The FWD/DND indicator goes
FWD/DND button in “Extension-Station”, PF Key
out.
Type or PITS station program mode.
For further information about PITS station
2. Dial the feature number for Call
program mode, refer to Section 12-C-2.00 “PF
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Button Assignment.”
Cancel “##0” (default).
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
FWD/DND Cancel

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.
• The FWD/DND indicator
remains off.

4-D-13
(30393)
(Supplement 2)
The table below shows whether an extension which has DND assigned
rings or not and how its PDN indicator lights, when it receives a call.
Also shows whether the other extensions which has the extension's
PDN assigned rings or not and how their SDN indicators light, when the
extension having DND receives a call.

Type of call arriving at Other extensions Extension which Extension which has
setting extension has SDN assigned has DND assigned SDN assigned (SDN)
or not (PDN)
Extension call No Indicator off
No ring ☛1

Yes Green 240 wink Red 240 wink

No ring Ring

Attendant Console call No Indicator off

No ring ☛1

Yes Green 240 wink Red 240 wink

No ring Ring

DIL (1:N) call to PDN No

Green 240 wink
No ring
Yes Lights on in red
No ring

DIL (1:1) call to PDN No Green 240 wink

Ring

Yes Green 240 wink Red 240 wink

No ring Ring

DID call No
Indicator off
No ring
Yes Indicator off
No ring

DISA call No
Indicator off
No ring
Yes Indicator off
No ring

DIL (1:N) call to Group Red 240 wink

CO/Single CO No ring

DIL (1:1) call to Single Green 240 wink

CO Ring

Other calls Indicator off

No ring ☛1
☛1 DND tone is sent to the caller.

4-D-14
(30393)
7.00 Call Waiting

Description Call waiting tone can be assigned to two types by

Call waiting tone to a busy extension indicates
that another call (extension or CO line) is waiting.
To assign or cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Waiting Set” or “Call Waiting
Cancel.”
specifying the timing according to the type of
arriving calls: calls from outside parties or calls
from extensions, as illustrated below :
Tone 1
15.0 secs

Programming Tone 2
for calls from outside parties:
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“System-Numbering Plan (05/11)”, 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 for calls from extensions:
Call Waiting Set
Call Waiting Cancel
5.0 secs
Conditions
Use the PDN button to assign and cancel Call
Waiting. For selecting tone 1 or tone 2, refer to Section
12-C-6.00 “Call Waiting Tone Selection.”
While Call Waiting is active, the waiting tone and
the display, if provided, are executed by the
following timing :

Call waiting tone:

15.0 secs

LCD display:

The new caller is The current other The new caller

shown flashed party is shown is shown flashed

5.0 secs 10.0 secs

4-D-15
(70695)
Operation
Setting Call Waiting
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Waiting Set.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3.
3. Replace the handset.
Canceling Call Waiting
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Waiting Cancel.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Replace the handset.
4-D-16
Answering Call Waiting
A call from an extension or an outside party arrives
while having a conversation.
• The indicator on the DN or the CO button
flashes in 240 wink.
• You hear call waiting tone.
Talking to the new caller by concluding the current
call
1. Press the flashing DN or CO
button.
• The current call is disconnected.
• Talk to the new caller on the
pressed DN or CO button.
Talking to the new caller by holding the current call
1. Press the HOLD button to hold
the current party.
• You hear no tone.
2. Press the DN or CO button flashing
in 240 wink.
• Talk to the new caller.
• To conclude the new call and talk
to the held party again, press the
DN or CO button flashing in 60
wink.
8.00 Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-Log Out

Description Operation
UCD group members may leave the group Setting UCD Log Out (1)
temporarily by dialing the feature number for
“UCD Log Out” or using the programmable UCD 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
Log In button to prevent UCD calls being sent to PHONE button.
their extensions.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Refer to Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-without OGM” and Section 2. Dial the feature number for UCD
3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with Log Out “#0” (default).
OGM.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Programming 2.
Reference • If your PITS has a display, it
System Programming
VT Dumb shows:
“System-Numbering Plan (09/11)”, 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00 UCD Logout
UCD Log In
UCD Log Out 3. Replace the handset or press the
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
SP-PHONE button.
DN Key Type,
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 10-C-26.00
DSS Key Type

Condition Setting UCD Log Out (2)

To set or cancel UCD Log Out, use the PDN
button. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
When an extension of the UCD group set forLog
Out goes off-hook, dial tone 4 below can be • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
heard.
2. Press the UCD Log In button.
(second) 0 1 2 3 4 5
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
The indicator on the UCD Log
In button lights in red.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
UCD Logout

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-D-17
(70695)
Canceling UCD Log Out (1) Canceling UCD Log Out (2)

1. Lift the handset or press the SP- 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. PHONE button.

• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “UCD 2. Press the UCD Log In button.
Log In.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2.
2. The indicator light on the UCD
• If your PITS has a display, it Log In button goes out.
shows: • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
UCD Login
UCD Login
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button. 3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-D-18
E. Holding Features

1.00 Hold
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to hold the current call Placing a Call on Hold
and either call or answer another extension or In conversation on the DN, SCO, GCO or PCO
outside party. button
To place a call on hold, press the HOLD button. 1. Press the HOLD button.
To retrieve a held call, simply press the flashing
line access button on which a call is held. • If the call is on the DN or SCO
or GCO button, the indicator on
A call placed on hold can be retrieved at the the button flashes in green 60
extension that put the call on hold or at an wink. If the call is on the PCO
extension that shares the held line. button, the indicator on the
button flashes in green 120
A PITS telephone user can place as many calls wink. You hear confirmation
on hold as it has line access button (PCO, GCO, tone 2 and then no tone.
SCO, PDN, SDN). • The other party is placed on
Hold.
Programming • You can hang up without
None loosing a held call.

Conditions Retrieving a Held Call

The extension users can not hold the following From the holding extension
calls.
1. Press the green button that is
• A call on ICM button
flashing in 60 wink or 120 wink.
• A call with Attendant Console
• A call with Doorphone
• The indicator on the pressed
• Paging Announcement through built-in
button lights in green.
speaker of PITS
• Talk to the other party again.
A call held on PCO button can not be retrieved
From another extension that shares the held line
from the other extensions.
1. Press the red button that is
If a held call has not been answered more than a
slowly flashing in 60 wink.
pre-assigned time, a warning tone may sound at
extension which placed a call on hold.
• The indicator on the pressed
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”
button lights in green.
for further information.
• Start conversation with the
retrieved party.
If a held call is not answered more than 30
minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.
(Supplement)
Any extension user can retrieve the call held at
Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
another extension by dialing the feature number
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
for “Hold Extension Retrieve.”
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
For further information, refer to Section 4-E-4.00
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for further information.
“Call Hold Retrieve-Station.”

4-E-1
2.00 Exclusive Hold
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to place a call on hold Placing a Call on Exclusive Hold
exclusively and either make or answer another During a conversation with the other party
extension or outside call.
A call held by “Exclusive Hold” can not be 1. Press the HOLD button.
retrieved from any other extension.
• The indicator on the button in
To place a call on exclusive hold, press the use flashes in green 60 wink.
HOLD button twice. You hear confirmation tone 2
To retrieve a call placed on exclusive hold, simply and then no tone.
press the flashing line access button (PCO,
GCO, SCO, PDN, SDN) on which a call is held. 2. Press the HOLD button again.
A call on exclusive hold can be retrieved only at
the extension that put a call on exclusive hold. • The flashing indicator changes
to green 120 wink.
A PITS telephone user can place as many calls • The other party is held
on exclusive hold as it has line access buttons. exclusively.

Programming
None Retrieving a Call on Exclusive Hold

Conditions 1. Press the green button that is

flashing in 120 wink.
The extension users can not place the following
calls on exclusive hold. • The indicator on the pressed
• A call on ICM button button lights in green.
• A call with Attendant Console • The held party is retrieved.
• A call with Doorphone • Talk to the other party again.
• Paging Announcement through built-in
speaker of PITS (Supplement)
To change “Exclusive Hold” to “Hold,” press the
A call held on PCO button is always treated as HOLD button again. Exclusive Hold and Hold
exclusive hold and therefore it can not be alternate with each pressing of the HOLD button.
retrieved from any other extension.

If a held call has not been answered within the

pre-assigned time, a warning tone may sound at
extension which placed a call on hold.
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”
for further information.

If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes, it

will be disconnected automatically.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for further information.

4-E-2
3.00 Consultation Hold
Description Operation
Allows extension users to place a call on hold Placing a call on Consultation Hold on one DN
temporarily on purpose to transfer a call or make button
a conference call.
Other extension users cannot retrieve the calls 1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF
on Consultation Hold. button.

Consultation Hold is performed by pressing the • The DN button in use is still lit
or
TRANSFER button or the CONF button. If the in green, you hear confirmation
TRANSFER button is pressed, a call is held until tone 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or
the user dials the telephone number to transfer 4.
the call. If the CONF button is pressed, a call is • The call is placed on
held until the user dials the telephone number of Consultation Hold.
the conference member and presses the CONF • You can make another call on
button again. the same DN button.

Programming (Supplement)
In step 1, if the CO button is used instead of the
None
DN button, the CO button starts flashing in 120
wink, and an idle DN button is automatically
Conditions
selected.
The extension users can not place the following
calls on consultation hold. Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (1)
• A call on ICM button
1. Replace the handset or press the
• A call with Attendant Console
SP-PHONE button.
• A call with Doorphone
• Paging Announcement through built-in
• Consultation Hold Recall starts.
speaker of PITS
2. Lift the handset or press the SP-
Consultation Hold Recall tone sound immediately
PHONE button.
if the extension user replaces the handset while
having a call on consultation hold.
• A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved.
If an extension user makes a call by pressing the
• Talk to the other party.
FLASH button while having a call on consultation
hold, Consultation Hold Recall tone does not
Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (2)
sound.
You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and
Consultation Hold Recall tone sounds in the
are in conversation with another party on the DN
same way as Held Call Reminder.
button.
If a held call is not answered within 30 minutes, it
1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF
will be disconnected automatically.
button.
Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
or • A call on Consultation Hold is
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
retrieved and you can talk to
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
the retrieved party.
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for further information.
• Another party is placed on
Consultation Hold.
• The DN button is still lit in
green.

4-E-3
Placing a call on Consultation Hold on two DN
buttons
1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF
button.
or • The DN button in use is still lit
in green, you hear confirmation
tone 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or
4.
• The call is placed on
Consultation Hold.
2. Press another DN or CO button.
• The pressed button lights in
green, you hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.
You can call another party from
the selected DN or CO button.
• The DN button where a call
has been held changes from
being lit in green to flashing in
green 120 wink.
Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (1)
You placed a call on Consultation hold and press
another DN or CO button.
1. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
• The indicator light on the
pressed DN or CO button goes
out.
• Consultation Hold Recall starts.
2. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved. You can talk to the
party.
• The DN button changes from
flashing in 120 wink to being lit
in green.
4-E-4
Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (2)
You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and
are talking on another DN or CO button.
1. Press the TRANSFER or CONF
button.
or • A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved and you can talk to
the retrieved party.
• The DN or CO button changes
from flashing in green 120 wink
to being lit in green.
• Another party in conversation
is placed on Consultation Hold
and the DN button changes
from being lit in green to
flashing in green 120 wink.
Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold (3)
You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and
are talking on another DN or CO button.
1. Press the DN or CO button
where the call has been held and
flashing in green 120 wink.
• A call on Consultation Hold is
retrieved and you can talk to
the retrieved party.
• The DN or CO button changes
from flashing in green 120 wink
to being lit in green.
• Another call is disconnected
and the green indicator light on
the button goes out.
4.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to talk to the other party 1. Lift the handset or press
by retrieving a call held by another extension. the SP-PHONE button.
This function is performed by dialing the feature
number for “Hold Extension Retrieve” and
extension number on which a call is placed on
hold (directory number: three or four digits). 2. Dial the feature number for
Hold Extension Retrieve “49”
Programming (default).

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 3. Dial the directory number of the

(03/11)”, holding extension : three or four
Hold Extension Retrieve digits.

• You hear confirmation tone 3.

Conditions
Even if the other extension has held multiple
calls, there is no preferential order for retrieving 4. Start conversation with the
calls. retrieved party.

In case of a failure to retrieve a call (the other

extension holds no call), reorder tone is returned
and the following message appears on the
display, if provided:
No Hold Call

The following calls cannot be retrieved from other

extensions.
• A call held on PCO button
• A call placed on Exclusive Hold
• A call place on Consultation Hold

4-E-5
(70695)
5.00 Call Park
5.01 Call Park-System
Description Conditions
Allows an extension user to hold a call on the DN If Tenant Service is employed, 20 parking areas
or CO button (both extension and outside) into a can be split between two tenants in “System-
parking area common to the system. Tenant”, Call Park Boundary.
The parked call can be retrieved from any
extension in the system. A parked call will be disconnected automatically
Call Park can be used whenever an extension by the system, if it is not answered within 30
user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere, minutes.
and wishes to complete the call from another
extension. When a call on PCO or SCO button is parked in
the system parking area, the green indicator light
Two methods are available for Call Park-System. on PCO or SCO button turns to red.
<1> By dialing the feature number for “Call Park- When a call on DN or GCO button is parked in
System.” the system parking area, the green indicator light
<2> By pressing the Call Park System button on DN or GCO button turns off.
(Assignable Feature button).
Parking a call in the system parking area by
To retrieve a parked call, dial the feature number pressing the Call Park System button is ignored
for “Call Park Retrieve-System.” by the system if the extension user has already
consultation hold call.
20 parking areas are available common to the
system. Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
Programming assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
Reference 3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00

Call Park Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Park-System
Call Park Retrieve-System
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03
PF Key Type 10-C-25.00
DSS Key Type 10-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00

Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment

4-E-6
(70695)
Operation
Parking a call during a conversation on the DN or
CO button
1. Press the TRANSFER button,
then dial the feature number for
“Call Park-System,” or press only
the “Call Park System” button.
• The other party is placed on
Consultation Hold. You hear
confirmation tone 2 then dial
tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the parking area number in
two digits : 01 to 20.
• When you succeed in Call
Park-System, you hear
confirmation tone 2 then dial
tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Call Parked at xx
parking area
number (01 to 20)
• If a call cannot be parked on
the selected parking area,
(another call is already parked
in the parking area), you hear
busy tone 1 or 2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Parked at xx N/A
3. Replace the handset or press
SP-PHONE button.
(Supplement)
In step 1, when you are talking on the CO button,
pressing the Call Park System button is ignored if
there is no idle DN button.
Retrieving a call parked in the system parking
area
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Park Retrieve-System.”
3. Dial the parking area number :
01 to 20.
• When you succeed in retrieving
the parked call, you hear
confirmation tone 2. Then talk
to the other party.
• If no call is parked on the
selected parking area, you
hear reorder tone.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
No Hold Call

parking area
number (01 to 20) Note:
• Confirmation tone 2 for Call Park can be
• In this case, dialing another eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
parking area number (01 to 20) C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
allows you to try a new call
park destination.
• To talk to the party placed on
Consultation Hold again while
hearing busy tone 1 or 2, follow
the same procedure as
retrieving Consultation Hold.
Refer to Section 4-E-3.00
“Consultation Hold.”

4-E-7
(70695)
5.02 Call Park-Station
Description
Allows an extension user to hold a call on the DN
or CO button (both extension and outside) into
his own parking area, then retrieve the parked
call from any extension in the system.
Call Park also allows extension users to answer
a call from any extension or outside party when
paged.
Each extension has its own parking area.
Two ways are available for Call Park-Station.
<1> By dialing the feature number for “Call Park-
Station”
<2> By pressing the Call Park Station button
(Assignable Feature button).
To retrieve a parked call, dial the feature number
for “Call Park Retrieve-Station.”
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Conditions
A parked call will be disconnected automatically
by the system, if it is not answered within 30
minutes.
During a conversation on the PCO or SCO
button, executing Call Park-Station makes the
indicator on the button light in red.
During a conversation on the DN or GCO button,
executing Call Park-Station makes the indicator
light on the button go out.
Call Park-Station by pressing the Call Park
Station button is ignored if Consultation Hold is
executed at the extension beforehand.
Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00

(04/11)”,
Call Park-Station
Call Park Retrieve-Station
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03
PF Key Type 10-C-25.00
DSS Key Type 10-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00

Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment

4-E-8
(70695)
Operation
Executing Call Park-Station
During a conversation on the DN or CO button
1. Press the TRANSFER button,
then dial the feature number for
“Call Park-Station,” or press only
the “Call Park Station” button.
If you use the TRANSFER
button and the feature number:
• When you succeed in Call
Park-Station, you hear
confirmation tone 2, then dial
tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• When you fail, you hear busy
tone 1 or 2.
If you use the Call Park Station
button :
1) During a conversation on the CO
button,
• When you succeed in Call
Park-Station, you hear
confirmation tone 2, then no
tone.
• When you fail, you remain in
conversation status (pressing
the Call Park Station button is
ignored).
2) During a conversation on the DN
button,
• When you succeed, you hear
confirmation tone 2, then dial
tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• When you fail, you remain in
conversation (pressing the Call
Park Station button is ignored).
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Call Parked at ST
• If you fail in Call Park-Station
(another call is already
parked), you hear busy tone 1
or 2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Park at ST N/A
4-E-9
(70695)
• To talk to the other party placed
on Consultation Hold while
hearing busy tone 1 or 2, follow
the procedure identical to
retrieving Consultation Hold.
Refer to Section 4-E-3.00
“Consultation Hold.”
2. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
Retrieving a call parked in the station parking
area
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Park Retrieve-Station.”
3. Dial the extension number of the
parking extension : three or four
digits.
• When you succeed in retrieving
the parked call, you hear
confirmation tone 2. Then talk
to the other party.
• If no call is parked at the
extension, you hear reorder
tone.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
No Hold Call
Note:
• Confirmation tone 2 for Call Park can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
6.00 Call Splitting
Description Programming
When a new call arrives at the DN or CO button Reference
System Programming
during a conversation with another party, VT Dumb
pressing the SPLIT button (Assignable Feature “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
button) allows the called party to hold the current DN Key Type
party exclusively and at the same time answer “Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03
the new caller automatically. PF Key Type 10-C-25.00
DSS Key Type 10-C-26.00
If another new call arrives, another pressing of
the SPLIT button connects the new caller,
holding the previous caller exclusively. PITS Station Programming Reference

As the above procedure, every time a new call
arrives, it is possible to answer the call by
executing Exclusive Hold for the current other
party.
Calls placed on hold by pressing the SPLIT
button are joined one by one to the call splitting
chain.
Pressing the SPLIT button again while no call is
arriving connects the current call to the call
splitting chain and changes the chain into a
circle.
At this moment, the first held party is retrieved
from the chain and conversation with the
retrieved party is possible.
After the circular call splitting chain is
constructed, every pressing of the SPLIT button
provides Exclusive Hold on the current party
again and establishes a conversation with the
next oldest party.
DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00
Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment
Conditions
Pressing the SPLIT button during a doorphone
conversation, paging conversation etc., is
ignored: it is impossible to hold those
conversations.
Each extension is able to make one call splitting
chain.
After the call splitting chain changes to a circle,
pressing the SPLIT button during a conversation
if a new call arrives is ignored.
Any other operation than pressing the SPLIT
button cancels the call splitting chain, and
changes Exclusive Hold to common Hold.

4-E-10
Operation
Call Splitting operation

During a conversation, another call arrives at the

DN or CO button.

1. Press the SPLIT button.

• The current call is placed on

Exclusive Hold and connected
to the call splitting chain.
• Start conversation with the new
caller.

Another call arrives again.

2. Press the SPLIT button.

• The current call is placed on

Exclusive Hold and chained to
the call splitting chain.
• Start conversation with the new
caller.

3. During a conversation, press the

SPLIT button every time a new
call arrives. Then press the
SPLIT button again while no call
is arriving.

• The current party is joined to

the call splitting chain, that
completes a circular chain.
• Start conversation with the first
held party.

4. Press the SPLIT button.

• Every pressing of the SPLIT

button connects the current call
to the call splitting chain again.
• Start conversation with a held
call in the chained order.

4-E-11
F. Transferring Features

1.00 Call Transfer

1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to
Station
Description If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the
transferring operation until the destination party
Transfer is convenient to redirect a call to another answers, the system sends Music on Hold to the
extension user. transferred party.
Attendant assistance is not required and the caller For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00
does not have to redial. “Music on Hold.”
Unscreened Call Transfer allows an extension user
to transfer calls placed on the DN or CO button to Operation
another extension without announcement.
During a conversation with an extension or an
Programming outside party on the DN or CO button
None 1. Press the TRANSFER button.

Conditions • The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.
If transferred call is not answered by the • You hear confirmation tone 2
destination party, it will receive one of the following and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
treatments. • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Status of Destination Operation Resulted
Able to receive the Performs the call to the destination for Transfer to
call a specific period. In case of no
(sending ringback answer, interrupts ringing and starts 2. Dial the directory number of the
tone) ringing to the originator of transfer. ☛1
For detail, refer to Section 3-E-3.00 destination extension: three or
“Transfer Recall.” four digits.
Busy As soon as the destination goes on-
(sending busy tone) hook, starts calling the destination
(Camp-on Transfer). 3. Replace the handset or press the
If the destination party remains busy or
does not answer the call within a SP-PHONE button.
specified period, starts calling back the
originator of transfer. ☛1 • Calling the desired extension
For detail, refer to Section 3-E-3.00
“Transfer Recall.” starts and if the extension
answers, conversation
Setting Do Not Unscreened Call Transfer to extension
Disturb is ineffective. between the held party and the
(sending DND tone) Transferred party is treated simply as a extension is established.
party placed on Consultation Hold.
Hanging up causes the Consultation (Supplement)
Hold Recall to the originator of transfer.
After step 2, if you want to restore the
☛1 When the originator of transfer answers the call, conversation with the transferred party, (1) if the
conversation between the originator and the destination has already answered, press the
transferred party starts. FLASH button and then TRANSFER button. (2)
if the destination has not answered yet, press the
The extension users can not transfer the following TRANSFER button only.
calls.
To change the destination of transfer after
• A call on ICM button executing step 2, press the FLASH button while
• A call with Attendant Console hearing ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone.
• A call with Doorphone Then after hearing dial tone, dial the extension
• Paging Announcement through built-in number of the new destination.
speaker of PITS

4-F-1
1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to transfer a call placed During a conversation with an extension or an
on the DN or CO button to another extension with outside party on the DN or CO button
announcement.
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
Programming
• The other party is placed on
None Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
Conditions and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
The extension users can not transfer the • If your PITS has a display, it
following calls. shows:
• A call on ICM button Transfer to
• A call with Attendant Console
• A call with Doorphone 2. Dial the directory number of the
• Paging Announcement through built-in destination: three or four digits.
speaker of PITS
• You hear ringback tone.
If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the
transferring operation until the destination party 3. After the destination answers,
answers, the system sends Music on Hold to the make the announcement.
transferred party.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00
“Music on Hold.”
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

• The transferred party and the

destination party start
conversation.
(Supplement)
After step 2, you can interrupt the transfer and
talk to the held party, (1) if the destination has
already answered, by pressing the FLASH
button, and then the TRANSFER button. (2) if
the destination has not answered yet, by
pressing the TRANSFER button only.

After step 2, you can change the destination by

pressing the FLASH button while hearing
ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone. Then
after hearing dial tone, dial the directory number
of the new destination.

4-F-2
1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk
Description
Allows an extension user to transfer a call placed
on the DN or CO button to outside party with
announcement.
To execute this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, CO Transfer mode to “Yes.”
If outside call is transferred to another outside
party, CO-CO conversation mode is established
and the duration of the conversation is restricted
by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
CO Transfer Mode
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
CO-CO Duration Limit
Conditions
If a call from outside party is transferred to
another outside party, CO-CO conversation
mode is established. In this case, the system
uses the preset time limit for the trunk group that
the transferred party is placed on, not using the
time limit for the trunk group used to call the
destination and alarm tone is sent to parties 15
seconds before the assigned time limit, and when
time is out, both CO lines are disconnected.
The extension users can not transfer the
following calls.
• A call on ICM button
• A call with Attendant Console
• A call with Doorphone
• Paging Announcement through built-in
speaker of PITS
If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the
transferring operation until the destination party
answers, the system sends Music on Hold to the
transferred party.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00
“Music on Hold.”
4-F-3
(50195)
Operation
During a conversation with an outside party or an
extension on the DN or CO button
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• The other party is placed on
Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Transfer to
2. Call another outside party.
• You hear ringback tone from
the CO line.
3. When the destination answers,
make the announcement.
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the
destination party start
conversation.
(Supplement)
If an extension that cannot execute this function
by the restriction of COS attempts to do this
procedure, the system sends consultation hold
recall to the extension after step 4 and the
transfer is rejected.
After step 2, you can interrupt the transfer and
talk to the held party again, (1) if the destination
has already answered, by pressing the FLASH
button and the TRANSFER button in succession.
(2) If the destination has not answered yet, by
pressing the TRANSFER button only.
After step 2, you can change the destination by
pressing the FLASH button, and calling a new
outside party.
1.04 Ringing Transfer
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to transfer a call on the Executing screened Ringing Transfer
SDN button to the owner extension of the SDN During a conversation with an outside party or an
button by simply pressing the Ringing Transfer extension on the SDN button.
button (Assignable Feature Button). Ringing The indicator on the SDN button is lit in green.
Transfer can be done either with or without
announcement. 1. Press the Ringing Transfer
button .
To execute Ringing Transfer, assign the Ringing
Transfer button to the user's PITS by the system • You hear ringback tone.
programming or PITS station programming. • When the owner extension is
PITS, the indicator on the
Either PITS or SLT or OPX can be assigned as owner's PDN button changes
the destination of the transfer. from red light to green 240
wink.
Programming
2. When the owner extension
Reference
System Programming answers, start conversation.
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00

DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 3. Replace the handset or press the
PF Key Type 10-C-25.00 SP-PHONE button.
DSS Key Type 10-C-26.00

• The transferred party and the

owner extension start
System Programming Reference
conversation.
DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00 • The indicator on the SDN
Assignment button changes from green
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00 light to red light.
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00 Executing unscreened Ringing Transfer
Assignment
During a conversation with an outside party or an
extension on the SDN button.
Conditions The indicator on the SDN button is lit in green.
If the owner extension is in the PITS programming 1. Press the Ringing Transfer
mode, Ringing Transfer is ineffective. button.

If the owner extension is SLT, Ringing Transfer is • You hear ringback tone.
effective when the owner extension is on-hook • When the owner extension
and also able to ring. is PITS, the indicator of the
owner's PDN button changes
from red light to green 240
wink.

2. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

• When the owner extension

answers, the transferred party
and the owner extension start
conversation.
4-F-4
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to
Remote
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to transfer a call placed During a conversation with an extension or an
on the DN or CO button to Remote Maintenance outside party on the DN or CO button
Resource. (Available with Software Version 9.XX
and above). Modem answer tone is returned 1. Press the TRANSFER button.
instantly, if it is not in use.
This operation allows System Administrator to • The other party is placed on
perform System Administration from Remote Consultation Hold.
Location. • You hear confirmation tone 2,
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System Administration then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
from a Remote Location” for further information. • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
To transfer a call to Remote Maintenance Transfer to
Resource, “FDN for Remote” is used, which is
assigned in “System-Operation”, Remote Directory 2. Dial the “Remote Directory
Number. Number”: three or four digits.
See Section 3-B-3.00 “Floating Directory Number
(FDN)” for details about FDN. • You hear confirmation tone 3,
then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Programming • If your PITS has a display, it
Reference shows:
System Programming
VT Dumb
<Example>
“System-Operation (2/3)”, 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00
Remote Directory Number 1234: RMT Access

Remote Directory Number:

Conditions
three or four digits
If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends
Music on Hold to the transferred party during the • If Remote Maintenance
transferring operation. Resource is not in use, the
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00 “Music held party hears modem
on Hold.” answer tone and start
communication with Remote
If Remote Maintenance Resource is in use, busy instantly.
tone is returned to the held party. Automatic
Callback does not function in this case, so the 3. Replace the handset or press the
party should call Remote again when it becomes SP-PHONE button.
idle.

4-F-5
(50195)
1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer
— to Attendant Console
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to transfer a call (both During a conversation with an extension or an
extension and outside) to an Attendant Console outside party.
without announcement.
1 Press the TRANSFER button.
Programming • The other party is put on
Consultation Hold.
None
• You hear confirmation tone 2
Conditions and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
1) Transfer Recall • If your PITS has a display, it
A call transferred by this feature will not ring shows:
back at the extension who transferred the call Transfer to
even if the Attendant Console does not
answer the call after the transfer recall timer 2 Make a call to an Attendant
has been elapsed. Console.
2) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) • You hear ringback tone.
A call transferred to an Attendant Console will • Calling an Attendant Console
not be transferred to another extension by starts.
IRNA feature even if the Attendant Console
does not answer the call after the IRNA timer 3 Replace the handset or press the
has been elapsed. SP-PHONE button.
• At an Attendant Console:
3) What if all six Loop keys on the Attendant The call is displayed as a
Console are not idle? transfer recall.
A call is put in the call waiting queue of the
Attendant Console. (Supplement)
4) What if the Attendant Console is in ATT-FWD The feature numbers and DN's for making a call
mode? to an Attendant Console are:
This feature does not function. • Operator Call (General)
A call is simply put on Consultation Hold, that
• Operator Call (Specific)
is, a call will ring back at the extension who
tries to transfer the call as soon as he or she • FDN for General Operator Call
goes on-hook. • DN for ATT1 and ATT2
5) Music on Hold
If Music on Hold is available, the system
sends Music on Hold to the transferred party,
from the start of the transferring operation till
the destination party answers.

4-F-5-1
(21292)
1.07 Unscreened Call Transfer
— to a UCD Group (with OGM)
Description Feature References
Allows any extension user to transfer an outside Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)–with /without
call to a UCD Group from 01 to 04 (with OGM OGM (Section 3-D-2.06)
type).

From version 8.XX, not only the operators but

any extension user can transfer an outside call to
a UCD group (with OGM).

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Special Attended–UCD (1/2)” 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00

Conditions
If all group members are not available to answer
the call, it will be redirected to the Overflow
destination. In this case, the call will be
disconnected if not answered by the Overflow
destination within 60 seconds.
See page 3-D-13 for further information.

Operation
During a conversation with an outside party.
1 Press the TRANSFER button.
• The other party is put on
Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Transfer to

2 Dial the FDN for UCD group (01

to 04).
• You hear confirmation tone 3
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3 Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-F-5-2
(40993)
2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD)
2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls
Description Conditions
Call Forwarding-All Calls allows extension users To set or cancel this function, use the PDN
who are away from their phones to receive button.
incoming calls (both extension and CO) at
another extension. An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators (Attendant previously assigned type is canceled.
Console or Extension).
“FDN for General Operator Call” can be used to Call Forwarding-All Calls feature functions even if
assign operators as the destination of Call the extension is in the PITS programming mode.
Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for If the extension to which calls are to be
further information. forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
The following incoming calls do not receive Call first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
Forwarding treatment. call, if not answered in a specified time period,
• A call appearing on ICM button the call will be routed to another destination, if
• A call from doorphone available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
• A call appearing on PCO button Answer” feature.
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
To execute Call Forwarding-All Calls, assign this function is ineffective for the calls from
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do another tenant if the destination of Call
Not Disturb to “Yes.” Forwarding-All Calls is set to an Attendant
Console.
To set or cancel this function, the following two
methods are available: Calls from any VM extension will not be
<1> By pressing the FWD/DND button. forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
<2> By dialing the feature number for VM extension.
“Call Forwarding-All Calls Set” and
“Call Forwarding-Do Not Disturb Cancel.” An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if
he or she attempts:
Programming
• To set the destination to an extension in the
Reference other tenant when Tenant Service is employed.
System Programming
VT Dumb
• To call the other extension whose call
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 forwarding destination is set to his or her own
Call Forwarding/Do Not extension.
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
Call Forwarding-All Call Set can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
(05/11)”, Section 4-I-11.00 “Remote Station Feature
Call Forwarding/Do Not Control.”
Disturb Cancel

4-F-6
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status Busy tone is sent from destination.

Assigned to DND DND tone is sent from destination.

PITS programming mode Busy tone is sent from destination.

Conditions except In Service ☛ Call is placed on setting extension.

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

Assigned to DND Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

Conditions except In Service ☛ Call is placed on setting extension.

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status Busy tone is sent from destination

Assigned to DND Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode Busy tone is sent from destination

Conditions except In Service ☛ Call is placed on destination.

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-7
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-All Calls Canceling Call Forwarding-All Calls
1. Lift the handset or press 1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. the SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator light flashing on

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “2.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-All Call Set.”
the FWD/DND button goes out.
2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Dial the directory number of the • If your PITS has a display, it
extension or the Voice Mail port, shows:
or “FDN for General Operator
FWD/DND Cancel
Call” to be set as the destination.
3. Replace the handset or press the
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
SP-PHONE button.
2 and dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as (Supplement)
the destination:
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
FWD (All) Ext xxxx provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Directory number:
Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)” and
three or four digits
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
When setting operators as the further information.
destination:
If an operator is Attendant
Console
FWD (All) ATT
If an operator is extension
FWD (All) Ext xxxx

Directory number:
three or four digits

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

4-F-8
(21292)
2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook
Description
Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook provides
automatic call transfer to a preset destination
when the user's extension is busy.
Busy status means all PDNs are used, or off-hook
status (including hands-free status) or in the PITS
programming mode.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for
further information.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
• A call appearing on ICM button
• A call from doorphone
• A call appearing on PCO button
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group
To set this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes.”
For setting and canceling this function, two
methods are available:
<1> By pressing the FWD/DND button.
<2> By dialing the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-Busy Set” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-Busy Set
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
4-F-9
(70695)
Conditions
To set or cancel this function, use the PDN
button.
An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.
If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook is set to an Attendant
Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.
An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if
he or she attempts:
• To set the destination to an extension in the
other tenant when Tenant Service is employed.
• To call the other extension whose call
forwarding destination is set to his or her own
extension.
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-I-11.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-10
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook
1. Lift the handset or press 1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. the SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator light flashing on

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “3.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-Busy Set.”
the FWD/DND button goes out.
2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Dial the directory number of the • If your PITS has a display, it
extension or the Voice Mail ports, shows:
or “FDN for General Operator
FWD/DND Cancel
Call” to be set as the destination.
3. Replace the handset or press the
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
SP-PHONE button.
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as (Supplement)
the destination:
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
FWD (BSY) Ext xxxx provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Directory number:
Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)” and
three or four digits
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
When setting operators as the further information.
destination:
If an operator is Attendant
Console
FWD (BSY) ATT
If an operator is extension
FWD (BSY) Ext xxxx

Directory number:
three or four digits

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

4-F-11
(21292)
2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer
Description
Call Forwarding-No Answer provides automatic
call transfer to a preset destination if the
extension user cannot answer the call in a
determined period (that is, if the caller is not
answered while hearing ringback tone in a
specified period).
If the extension setting this function is in the PITS
programming mode, Call Forwarding-No Answer
is disabled and the caller hears busy tone.
Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for
further information.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
• A call appearing on ICM button
• A call from doorphone
• A call appearing on PCO button
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group
To set Call Forwarding-No Answer, assign
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb to “Yes.”
For setting or canceling this function, two
methods are available:
<1> By pressing the FWD/DND button.
<2> By dialing the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-No Answer Set” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
4-F-12
(70695)
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Time-Out
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Set
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
Conditions
An extension user may have only one type of Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any
time. If a second type is assigned, the previously
assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded
itself is in a call forward mode, a call is not
forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the first
forwarded extension. In case of an outside call, if
not answered in a specified time period, the call will
be routed to another destination, if available, based
on the “Intercept Routing-No Answer” feature.
When Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming, a call
from another tenant will not be forwarded if
forwarding destination is an Attendant Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be forwarded, if
forwarding destination is another VM extension.
An extension user is rejected with reorder tone if he
or she attempts to set the destination to an
extension in the other tenant when Tenant Service is
employed.
• This feature does not function if an extension user
attempts to call the other extension whose call
forwarding-no answer destination is set to his or
her own extension.
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-I-11.00 “Remote Station Feature Control.”
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-13
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-No Answer Canceling Call Forwarding-No Answer
1. Lift the handset or press 1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. the SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator light flashing on

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “4.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-No Answer Set.”
the FWD/DND button goes out.
2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Dial the directory number of the • If your PITS has a display, it
extension or the Voice Mail port, shows:
or “FDN for General Operator
FWD/DND Cancel
Call” to be set as the destination.
3. Replace the handset or press the
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
SP-PHONE button.
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as (Supplement)
the destination:
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
FWD (NA) Ext xxxx provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
FWD/DND button.
Directory number:
Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)” and
three or four digits
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
When setting operators as the further information.
destination:
If an operator is Attendant
Console
FWD (NA) ATT
If an operator is extension
FWD (NA) Ext xxxx

Directory number:
three or four digits

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

4-F-14
(21292)
2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No
Answer
Description
Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer
provides automatic call transfer to a preset
destination if the user's extension is busy or the
user cannot answer the call in a determined period
(that is, if the caller is not answered while hearing
ringback tone in a specified period).
Busy status means all PDNs are used, or off-hook
status (including hands-free status) or in the PITS
programming mode.
If the extension setting this function is in the PITS
programming mode, Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-
Hook/No Answer is disabled and the caller hears
busy tone.
Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for
further information.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
• A call appearing on ICM button
• A call from doorphone
• A call appearing on PCO button
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group
To set this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes.”
For setting or canceling this function, two methods
are available:
<1> By pressing the FWD/DND button.
<2> By dialing the feature number for
“Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer” and
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
4-F-15
(70695)
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Time-Out
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
“System-Numbering Plan
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
Conditions
An extension user may have only one type of Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any
time. If a second type is assigned, the previously
assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded
itself is in a call forward mode, a call is not
forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the first
forwarded extension. In case of an outside call, if
not answered in a specified time period, the call will
be routed to another destination, if available, based
on the “Intercept Routing-No Answer” feature.
When Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming, a call
from another tenant will not be forwarded if
forwarding destination is an Attendant Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be forwarded, if
forwarding destination is another VM extension.
An extension user will be rejected with reorder tone
if he or she attempts to set the destination to an
extension in the other tenant when Tenant Service is
employed.
• This feature does not function if an extension user
attempts to call the other extension whose call
forwarding-no answer destination is set to his or
her own extension.
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-I-11.00 “Remote Station Feature Control.”
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-16
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No
Answer
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. 1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator light flashing on

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “6.”
Or, dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-Busy/No Answer.”
the FWD/DND button goes out.
2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

3. Dial the directory number of the 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
extension or the Voice Mail port, or • If your PITS has a display, it
“FDN for General Operator Call” to shows:
be set as the destination.
FWD/DND Cancel
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2
3. Replace the handset or press the
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
SP-PHONE button.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting an extension as
the destination: (Supplement)
FWD (B/N) Ext xxxx Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
Directory number:
FWD/DND button.
three or four digits
Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)” and
When setting operators as the Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
destination: further information.
If an operator is Attendant
Console
FWD (B/N) ATT
If an operator is extension
FWD (B/N) Ext xxxx

Directory number:
three or four digits

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

4-F-17
(21292)
2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk
Description Programming
Call Forwarding to Trunk allows extension users Reference
System Programming
who are away from their phones to receive VT Dumb
incoming calls (both CO and extension) at outside
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
place. Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
The following incoming calls do not receive Call CO Forward Mode
Forwarding treatment. “System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
• A call appearing on ICM button Call Forwarding-to Trunk
• A call from doorphone “System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
• A call appearing on PCO button (05/11)”,
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature Call Forwarding/Do Not
• A call directed to a UCD group Disturb Cancel
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
When an incoming CO call is forwarded to the CO-CO Duration Limit
pre-assigned outside party by this feature, CO to
CO call via this system is established. Duration
Conditions
time of CO to CO call is restricted by “Group-
To set or cancel this function, use the PDN button.
Trunk Group,” CO-CO Duration Limit of receiving
CO line. The system sends alarm tone to both
An extension user may have only one type of Call
parties 15 seconds before the Duration Limit time
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect at any
is expired, and when expired the system
time. If a second type is assigned, the previously
disconnects both parties compulsively.
assigned type is canceled.
To set Call Forwarding to Trunk, assign both
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Not Disturb and CO forward Mode to “Yes.”
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 4-I-11.00 “Remote Station Feature
For setting and canceling this function, two
Control.”
methods are available:
<1> By pressing the FWD/DND button.
Up to 32 digits composed of “0 through 9” and
<2> By dialing the feature number for
“ ” can be entered as the telephone number of
“Call Forwarding-to Trunk” and
the destination. CO line access code must be
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
entered as the leading digit of each entry.

Note:
• If CPC signal is not supplied by the Central
Office in your area, KX-T336 cannot detect the
end of CO-CO call after one party disconnects
the call.
In this case, we recommend to use tone
detection feature of AGC Card (See Section 10-
C-67.00 “DISA/AGC Tone Detection Mode
(TDM)”).

4-F-18
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to external

destination.
Busy status
Call is placed on setting extension.
Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to external

destination.
Busy status
Call is placed on setting extension.
Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status

Busy status Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

4-F-19
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding to Trunk Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk
1. Lift the handset or press 1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “5.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding to Trunk.”
2. Press the FWD/DND button, then
dial “0.”
Or, dial the feature number for
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
3. Dial the feature number for shows:
selecting the CO line and the
FWD/DND Cancel
telephone number of the
destination and “#” in succession.
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
(Supplement)
<Example>
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
FWD (CO) 92011234 provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the PF3
button on them can be programmed to be the
If the assigned number exceeds FWD/DND button.
the display capacity: Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)” and
FWD (CO) 9201123 & Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
further information.
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button starts flashing.

(Supplement)
The system does not check the dialed number,
toll restriction level, and the feature number for
selecting a CO line when the extension user is
setting this function.

4-F-20
2.06 Call Forwarding-Follow Me
Description
You can set the “Call Forwarding-All calls” feature FWD (From) Ext xxxx
from the destination extension. This is useful if
you forget to set “Call Forwarding -All Calls”
feature before you leave your desk or when you Directory number: three or four
move from pre-set place to another. digits
This feature can be enabled or disabled on a
COS (Class of Service) basis. If enabled, an 4. Replace the handset or press the
extension user can set this feature. SP-PHONE button.
Programming • The indicator on the FWD/DND
Reference button starts flashing at your
System Programming own extension.
VT Dumb
“System-Numbering plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00
(09/11)”, Canceling “Call Forwarding-Follow Me” at the
Call Forwarding-Follow destination extension.
Me Set
Call Forwarding-Follow 1. Lift the handset or press the
Me Cancel SP-PHONE button.
“Call Forwarding-Follow Me — 10-C-68.00
(CFM)” • The indicator light flashing on
the FWD/DND button goes out.

Conditions 2. Press the FWD/DND button, then

dial “8.”
Same as “Call Forwarding-All Calls “(Section 4-F-
Or, dial the feature number for
2.01).
Call Forwarding-Follow Me
Operation Cancel “ 8” (default).

Setting “Call Forwarding-Follow Me” at the

destination extension
1. Lift the handset or press
the SP-PHONE button. 3. Dial the directory number of your
extension.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2. Press the FWD/DND button, then 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
dial “7.” • If your PITS has a display, it
Or, dial the feature number for shows:
Call Forwarding-Follow Me Set FWD Cancel Exxx
“ 7” (default).
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

3. Dial the directory number of your

Note:
extension.
You can cancel this feature at your own
extension by following the same procedure as
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2
canceling other call forwarding features.
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
4-F-21
(70695)
G. Conversation Features

1.00 Programmable Privacy

Description 2. In non-privacy system:
The extension user can intrude on a busy line by Pressing PDN Pressing SCO Pressing GCO
pressing the red lit PDN, SDN or SCO button, if or SDN or PCO
the system is set to non-privacy.
Allows a three Allows a three Cause Automatic
In default mode, the system is set to privacy. party conver- party conversation Callback-Trunk ☛
This means that a third party cannot intrude on a sation (reorder tone
busy line. (ignored if sounds if confer-
conference ence trunk is
It is administrable to make system privacy or non- trunk is unavailable
privacy by “System-Operation”, Privacy on DN unavailable)
Key.
☛
Refer to Section 4-C-5.01 “Automatic Callback-
Programming Trunk.”
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb Operation
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 Intruding on a busy line in non-privacy system
Privacy on DN Key
The following example shows the procedure to be
used by extension B whose SDN is owned by the
Conditions PDN of extension A, who is talking with party C
The table shows the other party to be barged in on the PDN button.
by pressing the red lit PDN, SDN and Single CO Extension A Extension C
buttons in the non-privacy system. • Extension A is talking
with Extension C.
Button Pressed A call to be barged in

PDN A call on the SDN button owned

by this PDN. Extension B
• Extension B has the
SDN A call on PDN button which is SDN button owned by
owner (including SLT) of this
extension A's PDN.
SDN.

SCO A call on the pressed Single CO

The indicator on the SDN button of extension B is
button.
lit in red.

Privacy and non-privacy can be temporarily 1. Press the SDN button (on
changed. extension B) lit in red.
For further details, refer to Section 4-G-2.00
“Privacy Release” and Section 4-G-3.00 “Privacy
Attach.” Extension A Extension C
• A three party
In privacy and non-privacy system, pressing a conversation is
button which is lit in red results in the following: established among
the extensions A, B
1. In privacy system: and C.
Extension B
Pressing PDN or SDN Pressing SCO, GCO, or PCO
Ignored Cause Automatic Callback-
Trunk ☛

4-G-1
2.00 Privacy Release
Description
In the privacy system, Privacy Release feature
temporarily releases the privacy by pressing the
Privacy Change button (Assignable Feature
button), and allows the extension user to let
another extension user intrude on a busy line on
PDN, SDN or SCO button then a 3-party
conference will be established.
Privacy change button must be assigned on a
PITS telephone beforehand.
For the assignment of Privacy Change button,
refer to Section 9-G-1.00 “Station” and Section 12
“Station Programming (PITS).”
Conditions
Privacy Release feature overrides Data Line
Security feature assigned to the extension.
Operation
The following example shows the procedure for
the extensions A and B.
Extension A is talking on the PDN button.
Extension B has the SDN button owned by the
PDN button of extension A.
Canceling the privacy system by extension A
1. Press the Privacy Change button.

The table shows the relationship between the • The indicator on the Privacy
employed button and the extension to be Change button lights in red.
released: • The indicator on the SDN
button of extension B changes
Button Employed The Other Extension to be from being lit in red to flashing
by the Talking Allowed to Override in red 120 wink.
Extension • Privacy system is canceled
SDN The PITS having the PDN that temporarily.
is the owner of the SDN
Overriding by extension B
PDN All PITS's having the SDN's
owned by the PDN 1. Press the red SDN button that is
flashing in 120 wink.
Single CO All PITS's having the same
Single CO • Start a three party conversation.

Programming (Supplement)

Reference Pressing the Privacy Change button on extension

System Programming
“System-Operation (1/3)”,
Privacy on DN Key
“Extension-Station (2/3)”,
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)”,
DSS Key Type
A again while the indicator is lit in red turns out
VT Dumb
the light and returns privacy system.
9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
At the same time the indicator on the SDN button
of extension B stops flashing and lights in red.
9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
9-G-1.03 10-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00

DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
Assignment 12-C-3.00

4-G-2
3.00 Privacy Attach
Description Operation
When the system is in non-privacy, pressing the Setting Privacy Attach
Privacy Change button (Assignable Feature 1. Press the Privacy Change button.
button) when the extension user is talking on the
PDN, SDN, or Single CO button enables system • The indicator on the Privacy
to be in privacy mode temporarily and prohibits Change button lights in red.
another extension from intruding on a busy line
by pressing the PDN, SDN, or Single CO button. Canceling Privacy Attach
While this function is enabled, the indicator on the 1. Press the Privacy Change button
Privacy Change button is lit in red. lit in red.

Programming • The indicator light on the

Privacy Change button goes
Reference
System Programming out.
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Privacy on DN Key
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 10-C-26.00
DSS Key Type

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00

Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment

Conditions
An extension user can assign Privacy Attach by
pressing the Privacy Change button in any status
such as on-hook, conversation and so on.

It is possible to cancel Privacy Attach by pressing

the Privacy Change button lit in red again,
regardless of the status of extensions such as on-
hook.

If either or both of the two extensions in

conversation in a non-privacy system sets
Privacy Attach, no other extension is able to
override the conversation by pressing the PDN,
SDN, or Single CO button.

4-G-3
4.00 Hands-Free Conversation
Description Operation
Turning the SP-PHONE button on without lifting Be sure the handset is on-hook and the SP-
the handset offers hands-free operation and PHONE button is off.
conversation status. 1. Press the SP-PHONE button.

• The microphone and the

Programming speaker for the speakerphone
None are activated and hands-free
operation and conversation is
available.
Conditions
Changing the handset conversation mode to the
One minute of hands-free status without any
hands-free conversation mode
operation after turning the SP-PHONE button on
cancels the status automatically, that is, turns the 1. Press the SP-PHONE button.
SP-PHONE button off.
• The microphone and the
speaker for the speakerphone
are activated, and the handset
sends no tone.

2. Replace the handset.

• Continue the conversation

using the speakerphone.

(Supplement)
Lifting the handset in the hands-free mode turns
the speakerphone off and changes to the handset
mode.

4-G-4
5.00 Conference
5.01 Conference-One Appearance
Description
During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party, the extension user can add another
party (extension or outside party) on the current
conversation and hold a three party conference
on one DN button : this is called Conference-One
Appearance.
On the TSW card, there are eight standard
conference trunks provided for this purpose.
By equipping the optional conference expansion
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.”
When two members in the conference are
outside parties, two conference trunks are
necessary. In all other cases, one conference
trunk is enough.
If a member in the conference is using the PITS
provided with a display, the following message
appears on the display of the PITS during the
conference, showing the other two members.
• When both of the other members are
extensions:
E1234 & E5678
Directory numbers of the
extensions
• When one is an extension and the other is an
outside party:
E1234 & Panas
Leading five digits of the
CO line's name
• When both of the other members are outside
parties:
Matsu & Panas
4-G-5
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Configuration-System Assignment”, 9-D-1.0110-C-1.00
TSW Additional CONF
Conditions
Pressing the HOLD button during a conference is
ignored.
Pressing the CONF button after calling the
second party offers conference status. If no
conference trunks are available, pressing the
CONF button is ignored and conference is not
established.
Pressing the TRANSFER button by the
conference originator during a conference
restores the conversation with the previous party,
placing the later party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the TRANSFER button again
establishes the conversation with the later party,
placing the previous party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the CONF button restores the
conference.
Pressing the TRANSFER button by a conference
member other than the conference originator
during the conference is ignored.
Operation
Establishing a Conference-One Appearance Concluding a Conference-One Appearance

Extension A is having a conversation with party B
(another extension or an outside party on the DN
button).
The following is the operation from the standpoint
of extension A.
1. Press the CONF button.
• The indicator on the CONF
button starts flashing in red 60
wink.
• The other party B is placed on
Consultation Hold. Extension A
hears dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Call another party C (an extension
or an outside party).
• Talk to station C on the DN
button.
3. Press the CONF button.
1. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
• If both B and C are outside
parties, both parties are
disconnected.
• If both B and C are extension
users, or either of them is an
extension user, a conversation
between B and C is
established.
(Supplement)
If the conference originator presses another DN,
ICM, or CO button during a conference, the
originator seizes the line on the pressed button
and leaves the conference. The remaining two
parties are treated in the same way as if the
originator concluded the conference by replacing
the handset or by pressing the SP-PHONE
button.

• The indicator on the CONF

button lights in red, conference
among the parties A, B and C
on the DN button is established.

(Supplement)
Pressing the TRANSFER button is available
instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1.
In this case, the indicator on the CONF button is
off in step 1, then in step 3 it lights in red by
pressing the CONF button.

To change the conference member after step 2,

press the FLASH button and execute step 2
again.

4-G-6
5.02 Conference-Two Appearances
Description
During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party on the DN or the CO button,
employing another DN or CO button instead of
currently using button allows another party (an
extension or an outside party) to join the
conversation and offers Conference-Two
Appearances.
On the TSW card, there are eight standard
conference trunks provided for this purpose.
By equipping the optional conference expansion
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.”
If two members of the conference are outside
parties, two conference trunks are necessary.
In other cases, one conference trunk is enough.
If a member of the conference is using the PITS
provided with a display, the following message
appears on the display, showing the other two
members:
• When both of the other members are
extensions:
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Configuration-System Assignment”, 9-C-1.0110-C-1.00
TSW Additional CONF
Conditions
Pressing the CONF button after calling the
second party establishes conference. If no
conference trunks are available, pressing the
CONF button is ignored and conference is not
established.
Pressing the TRANSFER button by the
conference originator during a conference
restores conversation with the previous party,
placing the latter party on Consultation Hold.
Pressing the TRANSFER button again offers
conversation with the latter party, placing the
previous party on Consultation Hold. Pressing
the CONF button in this status restores the
conference.
Pressing the TRANSFER buttons by a conference
member other than the conference originator
during the conference is ignored.

E1234 & E5678

Directory numbers of the

extensions

• When one is an extension and the other is an

outside party:

E1234 & Panas

Leading five digits of the

CO line's name

• When both of the other members are outside

parties:

Matsu & Panas

4-G-7
Operation
Establishing a Conference-Two Appearances
Extension A is having a conversation with party B
(an extension or an outside party) on the DN or
CO button.
The following is the operation from the standpoint
of extension A.
1. Press the CONF button.
• The indicator on the CONF
button starts flashing in red 60
wink.
• The other party B is placed on
Consultation Hold. Extension A
hears dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Press another idle DN or CO
button.
• The pressed DN or CO button
lights in green.
3. Call another party C through
extension call if the pressed
button is DN or through CO call if
the pressed button is CO.
• Start conversation with the party
C on the pressed DN or CO
button.
4. Press the CONF button.
• The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red. Conference
conversation among the parties
A, B and C is established.
(Supplement)
Pressing the TRANSFER button is available
instead of pressing the CONF button in step 1.
In this case, the indicator on the CONF button is
off in step 1, then it lights in red in step 4 by
pressing the CONF button.
To change the conference member after step 3,
press the FLASH button and execute step 3
again.
4-G-8
Concluding a Conference -Two Appearances
1. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
• If both B and C are outside
parties: both parties are
disconnected.
• If both B and C are extension
users, or either of them is an
extension users: a conference
between B and C is
established.
(Supplement)
If the conference originator presses another DN,
ICM, or CO button during a conference, the
originator seizes the line on the pressed button
and leaves the conference. The remaining two
parties are treated in the same way as if the
originator concluded the conference by replacing
the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
Placing the two other parties on hold during a
conference
1. Press the HOLD button.
• The two parties are held.
• The indicator on the DN or CO
button flashes in green 60 wink.
• You hear no tone.
Having a conversation with one party, by
dropping the other party
1. Press the DN or CO button of the
desired party.
• Conversation with the party of
the pressed button is
established.
• The other party is disconnected
and the indicator light on the
button goes out.
6.00 Unattended Conference
6.01 Unattended Conference-One
Appearance
Description Conditions
When an extension is in a conference with two If the extension is not allowed to execute this
outside parties on one DN button, the extension function in Class of Service, or either or both of
can leave the conference and establishes the the other parties are not outside ones, pressing
CO-to-CO call between other two parties by the CONF button during the conference is
pressing the CONF button: this is called ignored.
Unattended Conference-One Appearance.
When the two occupied CO lines belong to
During an unattended conference between the different trunk groups, the following time limits
two outside parties, the indicator on the DN apply to each case:
button flashes in 120 wink.
In the case one party is an outgoing CO
To execute this function, assign “System-Class of call, the other is an incoming CO call; The
Service”, CO Transfer Mode to “Yes.” duration limit follows to the trunk group of
the incoming CO call.
The duration of the Unattended Conference is
limited by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration If both are outgoing CO calls or both are
Limit. incoming CO calls; The longest duration
limit assigned to one of the two trunk
Programming groups is used.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Unattended Conference Recall starts 50 seconds
before the time limit.
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
CO Transfer Mode 30 seconds of no answer after the start of the
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Unattended Conference Recall causes Intercept
CO-CO Duration Limit
Routing-No Answer.
For further details, refer to Section 3-F-5.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”

Warning tone is sent to both outside parties 15

seconds before the time limit. When CO-CO
Duration Limit applied is expired, both outside
parties are disconnected.

4-G-9
(50195)
Operation
Establishing an Unattended Conference-One Answering Unattended Conference Recall
Appearance
If on-hook, Unattended Conference Recall starts.
During a conference with two outside parties on If off-hook, call waiting tone sounds.
one DN button
1. Press the green DN button that is
1. Press the CONF button. flashing in 120 wink.

• The indicator on the DN button • You return to the conference.

flashes in green 120 wink. • The indicator on the DN button
• You leave the conference. lights in green.
CO-to-CO call between the
other two parties is (Supplement)
established.
If no conference trunks are available at the time,
• The indicator light on the
returning to the conference and answering
CONF button goes out.
Unattended Conference Recall results in
conversation with the first party, placing the other
Returning to a conference
party on Consultation Hold.
1. Press the green DN button that is Pressing the TRANSFER button offers alternate
flashing in 120 wink. conversation with the two parties.
Pressing the CONF button again restores the
• You join the conference again. Unattended Conference.
• The indicator on the DN button
lights in green.
• The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red.

4-G-10
6.02 Unattended Conference-Two
Appearances
Description Conditions
When an extension is in a Conference-Two If the extension is not allowed to execute this
Appearances with two outside parties, the function in Class of Service, or either or both of
extension can leave the conference and the other parties are not outside ones, pressing
establishes the CO-to-CO call between other two the CONF button is ignored.
parties by pressing the CONF button: this is
called Unattended Conference Two When the two occupied CO lines belong to
Appearances. different trunk groups, the following time limits
apply to each case:
During an unattended conference between the
two outside parties, the indicators on both buttons If one party is an outgoing CO call and the
(both are DNs, or one is DN and the other is CO, other is an incoming CO call; The duration
or both are COs) flash in 120 wink. limit follows the trunk group of the incoming
CO call.
To execute this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, CO Transfer Mode to “Yes.” If both are outgoing CO calls or both are
incoming CO calls; The longest duration
The duration of the Unattended Conference is limit assigned to one of the two trunks is
restricted by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO used.
Duration Limit.
Unattended Conference Recall starts 50 seconds
Programming before the time limit.
Reference
System Programming 30 seconds of no answer after the start of the
VT Dumb
Unattended Conference Recall causes Intercept
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 Routing-No Answer.
CO Transfer Mode For the further detail, refer to Section 3-F-5.00
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
CO-CO Duration Limit

Alarm tone is sent to both outside parties 15

seconds before the time limit. When CO-CO
Duration Limit applied is expired, both outside
parties are disconnected.

4-G-11
(50195)
Operation
Establishing an Unattended Conference-Two
Appearances
During a Conference on Two Appearances with
two outside parties
1. Press the CONF button.
• The indicators on the two
buttons (both DN buttons or
one DN and one CO or both
CO buttons) flash in 120 wink.
• You leave the conference.
CO-to-CO call between the
other two parties is
established.
• The indicator light on the
CONF button goes out.
Returning to a conference
1. Press either of the two buttons
flashing in green 120 wink.
• You join the conference again.
• Both the indicators on the two
buttons light in green.
• The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red.
4-G-12
Answering Unattended Conference Recall
If on-hook, Unattended Conference Recall starts.
If off-hook, call waiting tone sounds.
1. Press either of the two buttons
flashing in green 120 wink.
• You join the conference again.
• Both the indicators on the
buttons light in green.
• The indicator on the CONF
button lights in red.
(Supplement)
If no conference trunks are available at the time,
returning to the conference and answering
Unattended Conference Recall results in
conversation with the party on the pressed
button, placing the other party on Consultation
Hold.
Pressing the TRANSFER button offers alternate
conversation with the two parties.
Pressing the CONF button again restores the
Unattended Conference.
7.00 Doorphone
Description
Up to four doorphones can be connected to the
system. This provides conversations between
extensions and doorphones.
Any extension user can call the doorphones
within the same tenant on the DN button by
dialing the feature number for “Doorphone Call
(1~4).” It is possible to direct calls from
doorphones to specified extensions, intercom
groups, pickup groups or Attendant Consoles in
“Extension-Doorphone”, Doorphone Call
Assignment.
If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
each doorphone can be determined by the
system programming in “Extension- Doorphone”,
Tenant.
Set the duration of the door opener in “Extension-
Doorphone”, Open Duration. When Open
Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is
unavailable.
Opening the door is available to Attendant
Consoles and the extensions which are able to
receive calls from doorphones: the extensions
belonging to intercom groups and pickup groups
that are able to receive calls from doorphones.
They can open the door by dialing “5” during
conversation with the doorphone.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Doorphone Call (1~4)
“Extension-Doorphone” 9-G-3.00 10-C-27.00
4-G-13
(70695)
Conditions
Only conversations are available for the door-
phone call. The other functions such as Hold,
Transfer are all ineffective.
When a visitor presses the button on the door-
phone, ping-pong tone sounds twice, then
doorphone call ringing starts.
No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the
doorphone call.
Dialing “5” again while the door is open enables
the user to prolong the opening duration to the
specified duration assigned in “Extension-
Doorphone”, Open Duration.
When a call from a doorphone reaches the preset
extensions, the indicators on the SDN buttons
whose owners are the receiving extensions light
in red.
Operation
Calling from a doorphone
1. Press the button on the
doorphone.
• You hear ping-pong tone.
• When the other party answers,
start talking to the other party.
Answering a doorphone call
When your telephone set receives a doorphone
call and rings,
1. Lift the hand set or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• Start conversation with the
caller from the doorphone.
Calling a doorphone
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. After dialing the feature number
for Doorphone Call (1-4) “40”
(default), dial the doorphone
number: 1 to 4.
• After hearing confirmation tone
3, start conversation over the
specified doorphone.
8.00 Flash
Description
Flash allows the extension user to get a line for
making a call on the selected line access button
again without hanging up. The FLASH button
can be used for this procedure. While still on the
CO, DN, or ICM line, press the FLASH button and
dial tone will be returned.
While or after talking on a CO line, the system
releases the CO DC loop after the FLASH button
is pressed for the specified period assigned in
“Group-Trunk Group”, Disconnect Time.

3. After concluding conversation, Programming

replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button. Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Opening the door Disconnect Time
During a conversation over the doorphone
1. Dial “5.” Conditions
While or after talking on a CO line, pressing the
• The door opens for the FLASH button renews conversation duration,
specified duration. inserts the automatic pause, and checks toll
• If your PITS has a display, it restriction level again.
shows:
Door Open Flash stored in “System-Speed Dial-System”,
Speed Dialing-Station or One Touch dialing etc.,
functions as External Feature Access, not as this
feature.

Operation
Using Flash
While hearing any tone, while dialing, or during a
conversation
1. Press the FLASH button.

• After hearing dial tone 1 or 3 or

4, dial the telephone number.

4-G-14
9.00 External Feature Access
Description Operation
Sending a flash signal through the CO line allows Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call
the extension to gain access to the features Waiting) (1)
offered by the host PBX, or to receive centrex A call arrives from another outside party during a
service provided by the central office, such as conversation with an outside party.
Call Waiting and so on.
• You hear call waiting tone.
External Feature Access is effective only during a
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
1:1 conversation with an outside party.
Programming • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 2. Dial the feature number for
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 External Feature Access “50”
(03/11)”, (default).
External Feature Access
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 • The first party is held. Talk to
Hook Switch Flash Time the second party.
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal Finishing conversation with the second party and
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
starting conversation with the first party again
DN Key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 1. Press the TRANSFER button.
PF Key Type 10-C-25.00
DSS Key Type 10-C-26.00
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

PITS Station Programming Reference

2. Dial the feature number for
External Feature Access “50”
DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00
(default).
Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment • Talk to the first party.
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call
Waiting) (2)
Conditions A call arrives from another outside party during a
conversation with an outside party.
External Feature Access is ineffective when
“Group-Trunk Group”, Hook Switch Flash Time is • You hear call waiting tone.
assigned to “None.” 1. Press the External Feature
The maximum dialing digits to be sent to the CO Access button.
line after sending the flash signal are restricted by
“Group-Trunk Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA • The first party is held. Talk to
Signal. The longest time limit among the following the second party.
assignments determines the time limit between
dialing digits. Finishing conversation with the second party and
• “System-System Timer”, External Firstdigit starting conversation with the first party again
Time-Out. 1. Press the External Feature
• “System-System Timer”, External Interdigit Access button again.
Time-Out.
• “System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction • Talk to the first party.
Guard Time-Out.

4-G-15
(70695)
10.00 Microphone Mute
Description Operation
Microphone Mute allows an extension user to Setting Microphone Mute
disable the microphone of the speakerphone.
During a hands-free conversation
This is useful when the user needs to speak
privately with someone in the office while on an 1. Press the AUTO ANS/MUTE
inside, an outside, or a door-phone call. button.
If the user presses the AUTO ANS/MUTE button
during a hands-free conversation with • The indicator on the AUTO
speakerphone on, the other party cannot hear the ANS/ MUTE button flashes in
user until he or she presses the button again. 60 wink.
• The microphone of the SP-
Programming PHONE becomes mute status.
None
Canceling Microphone Mute
Conditions 1. Press the flashing AUTO
ANS/MUTE button again.
Microphone Mute does not disable the
microphones in the handsets.
• The indicator light on the AUTO
ANS/MUTE button goes out.
Setting and canceling this function is available
• Microphone Mute is canceled.
only when the SP-PHONE is on. Pressing the
AUTO ANS/MUTE button when the SP-PHONE
is off sets Hands-Free Answerback.
Refer to Section 4-D-2.01 “Intercom Hands-Free
Answerback.”

While Microphone Mute is set, the indicator on

the AUTO ANS/MUTE button flashes in 60 wink.

4-G-16
11.00 Intercom Off-Hook Call
Announcement (OHCA)
Description Operation
During a conversation using the handset by PITS Answering OHCA
telephone KX-T7130, KX-T123235 or KX- You are having a conversation using the handset.
T123230D, the extension user can receive
another call from Intercom Calling or from 1. When the indicator on the ICM
Attendant Console, unless the current call is button lights in green, you hear
made by Intercom Calling. two beeps. At the same time the
microphone and the speaker for
To execute this function, optional T-SW OHCA hands-free turn on automatically.
Expansion card (KX-T336105) and OHCA card Talk to the caller over the
(KX-T96136) are necessary. speaker.

Programming Finishing the original call during a conversation by

OHCA
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb You are having conversations with the original
caller and the OHCA caller.
“Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 1. Replace the handset.
OHCA Circuit
• The original call is finished. The
Conditions OHCA call changes to hands-
free mode.
OHCA can be received only with the PITS KX-
T7130, KX-T123235, and KX-T123230D
telephones. 2. After finishing conversation, press
the SP-PHONE button.
OHCA does not work if the receiving extension is
in the following situations:

• Talking in speaker phone mode.

• Do Not Disturb is set.
• ICM button is not idle.
• “System-Class of Service”,
BSS/OHCA Deny is set to “Yes.”

4-G-17
12.00 Tone Through (End to End
DTMF Signaling)
Description Operation
During a call (extension, outside or doorphone), During a call (extension, outside or doorphone)
this function allows the PITS telephone user to
1. Dial the telephone number.
send DTMF (touch tone) signals to the voice path
when a dial pad button is pressed.
• DTMF signal is sent to the other
Tone Through mode is established automatically
party while dialing.
after the dialing sequence.

End-To-End DTMF Signaling permits the Canceling Tone Through

extension user to access network services such During an outside call
as OCC access which requires touch-tone
signals. 1. Press the Tone Through Break
button.
Only during a conversation with an outside party,
Tone Through mode can be canceled by pressing • Tone Through is canceled.
the Tone Through Break button (Assignable
Feature Button). 2. Dial the telephone number.

Programming • The dialed number is sent in

Reference accordance with the CO line
System Programming
VT Dumb dial mode.
• When the dialing sequence is
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
DN Key Type
finished, Tone Through mode is
“Extension-Station (3/3)”, 9-G-1.03 established again.
PF Key Type 10-C-25.00
DSS Key Type 10-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00

Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment

Conditions
The maximum dialing digits after canceling Tone
Through mode is restricted by “Group-Trunk
Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal.
The longest time limit among the following
assignments determines the time limit between
dialing digits:
• “System-System Timer”, External First Digit
Time Out
• “System-System Timer”, External Inter Digit
Time Out
• “System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction
Guard Time Out

4-G-18
H. Paging Features

1.00 Paging
1.01 Paging All Extensions
Description
Paging All Extensions allows any extension user
to perform paging on the DN button to the all
PITS telephone users at the same time through
the built-in speakers of PITS telephones.
The Class of Service of the user's extension
determines the extensions that can receive
paging. They are assigned to be paged by
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access and also if they belong to the same
tenant as the performer.
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for details
of paging groups.
To perform Paging All Extensions, dial the feature
number for “Station Paging” and “0.” To answer
paging, dial the feature number for “Station
Paging Answer.”
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Conditions
Single Line Telephones (SLT's) cannot be paged.
If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are
being paged by another page, busy tone is
returned to the new paging performer.
If any of the extensions is not being paged,
paging is executed.
If you hear busy tone when attempting to page,
you cannot set Automatic Callback function.
Refer to Section 4-C-6.02 “Automatic Callback-
Station” for further information.
When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”
in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access within the same tenant, the performer
hears reorder tone.
Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-
PHONEs of on-hook PITS telephones.

“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00

Station Paging Access
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Station Paging
Station Paging Answer

4-H-1
(70695)
Operation
Performing Paging All Extensions Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- During a conversation with an extension or
PHONE button. outside party
1. Press the TRANSFER button.

• The other party is placed on

2. Dial the feature number for
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
“Station Paging,” then dial “0.”
or 4.
• After hearing confirmation tone
2. Dial the feature number for
3, start paging.
“Station Paging” and dial “0.”
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
• If your PITS has a display, it
Group Page All
shows:
3. After making the announcement,
Group Page All
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
3. Start paging.

Answering Paging All Extensions while being

paged
4. When an extension answers,
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- replace the handset or press the
PHONE button. SP-PHONE button.

• The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”

• After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

4-H-2
1.02 Group Paging
Description Conditions
Group Paging provides paging on the DN button Single Line Telephones (SLT's) cannot be paged.
to a group of extensions specified from eight
paging groups through the built-in speakers of If the designated paging group is being paged by
their PITSs. another page, busy tone is returned to the new
paging performer.
The Class of Service of the user’s extension However, he can do paging within the range not
determines the paging groups that can receive overlapping the previous paging range.
paging. They are assigned to be paged by For instance, when paging is being done to group
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging 1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new
Access and also if they belong to the same paging.
tenant as the user’s extension.
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for details If you hear busy tone when attempting to page,
of paging groups. you cannot set Automatic Callback function.
Refer to Section 4-C-6.02 “Automatic Callback-
To execute Group Paging, dial the feature Station” for further information.
number for “Station Paging” and paging group
specifying number. To answer paging, dial the When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”
feature number for “Station Paging Answer.” in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access within the same tenant, the performer
Programming hears reorder tone.
Reference
System Programming Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-
VT Dumb
PHONEs of on-hook PITS sets.
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
Station Paging Access
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Station Paging
Station Paging Answer

4-H-3
(70695)
Operation
Performing Group Paging Transferring a call using Group Paging
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- During a conversation with an extension or an
PHONE button. outside party
1. Press the TRANSFER button.

• The other party is placed on

2. Dial the feature number for
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
“Station Paging.”
or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging” and paging
3. Dial the paging group number: 1
group number: 1 to 8.
to 8.
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
• After hearing confirmation tone
• If your PITS has a display, it
3, start paging.
shows:
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Group Page x
Group Page x
paging group
number: 1 to 8
paging group
number: 1 to 8
3. Start paging.
4. After paging, replace the handset
or press the SP-PHONE button.

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset or press the
Answering Group Paging while being paged
SP-PHONE button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. • The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Station Paging Answer.”

• After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

4-H-4
1.03 Paging External Pagers
Description
Allows extension users to perform paging through
the external pager belonging to the same tenant
by employing the DN button.
If two external pagers are available in the same
tenant, two methods are available: one is to page
by designating one external pager, and the other
is to page using two pagers simultaneously.
To execute this function, dial the feature number
for “External Pager” and to answer the paging,
dial the feature number for “External Paging
Answer”
Even if an external pager is connected to this
system, this function does not operate unless
“System-Operation”, External Paging 1, 2 is
assigned to “Yes.”
If Tenant Service is employed, assigning each
external pager to belong to a tenant is possible
by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External
Pager-Tenant.
Confirmation tone from external pagers is
selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Conditions
If the designated pager is being used, busy tone
is returned to the paging performer.
If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are
being used, it is not possible to page using two
pagers. Busy tone is returned to the user.
If external pagers are not assigned in system
programming, reorder tone sounds.
The following shows the paging priorities:
(1)Paging External Pager from an Attendant
Console
(2)TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
(Refer to Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer
From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”)
(3)Paging External Pager from an extension
(this function)
(4)BGM through External Pager
If a lower priority page is active, and a higher
priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower
one: for instance, if Paging External Pager is
overridden by another higher priority, reorder
tone is returned to the performer of Paging
External Pager. If TAFAS signal or BGM is
overridden by another higher priority, it is
interrupted and starts again when the higher
priority is finished.

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

External Paging 1, 2
“System-Class of Serice (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
External Paging
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
External Paging
External Paging Answer
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tenant
External Pager-Tone

4-H-5
(70695)
Operation
Paging External Pagers 3. Dial the number of the external
pager: 1 or 2.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• After you hear confirmation tone
3, talk to the caller who made
the page.
2. Dial the feature number for
Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers
“External Paging.”
During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party
1 Press the TRANSFER button.
3. Dial the number for specifying an
external pager or pagers: 0, 1 or
• The other party is placed on
2.
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.
0: specifies external pagers 1
and 2.
2. Dial the feature number for
1: specifies external pager 1.
“External Paging” and external
2: specifies external pager 2.
pager specifying number; 0, 1 or
2.
• After you hear confirmation
tone 3, start paging through
0: specifies external pagers 1
the external pager(s).
and 2
• If your PITS has a display, it
1: specifies external pager 1
shows:
2: specifies external pager 2
External page xxx
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
• If your PITS has a display, it
The number which shows:
specifies an
external pager or External page xxx
pagers:
All: specifies the external pagers
Pager specifying
1 and 2.
number
1: specifies external pager 1.
2: specifies external pager 2.
3. Start paging.
4. After paging, replace the handset
or press the SP-PHONE button.

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset or press the
Answering the external paging announcement
SP-PHONE button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. • The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging Answer.”

4-H-6
1.04 Paging All Extensions and
External Pagers
Description Operation
Paging All Extensions and External Pagers offers Performing Paging All Extensions and External
both Paging All Extensions and Paging External Pagers
Pagers at the same time. It provides paging
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
through the preprogrammed external pagers and
PHONE button.
the built-in speakers in PITSs of the extensions
within the range of the tenant that the user
belongs to.
2. Dial the feature number for
The user's “System-Class of Service”, Station
Station Paging “42” (default), or
Paging Access determines the paging groups of
the feature number for External
the extensions that can receive paging and also
Paging “41” (default), then dial
External Paging determines the external pagers
that can receive paging. “ .”

Programming • After hearing confirmation tone

3, start paging.
Reference • If your PITS has a display, it
System Programming
VT Dumb shows:
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
Station Paging Access All Call Page
External Paging 1, 2
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 3. After paging, replace the handset
(03/11)”, or press the SP-PHONE button.
External Paging
Station Paging
External Paging Answer
Station Paging Answer

Conditions
Refer to Section 4-H-1.01 “Paging All Extensions”
and Section 4-H-1.03 “Paging External Pagers.”

4-H-7
(70695)
Answering paging while being paged
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer,” or the
feature number for “External
Paging Answer” and the number
of the external pager: 1 or 2.
• After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.
4-H-8
(70695)
Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions
and External Pagers
During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party
1. Press the TRANSFER button.
• The other party is placed on
hold. You hear dial tone 1 or 3
or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” or the feature
number for “External Paging,”
then dial “* .”
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
All Call Page
3. Start paging.
4. When an extension answers,
replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
• The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.
Note:
• The following tones for paging can be eliminated
by WS4 command (See Section 10-C-62.00
“World Select 4 (WS4)”).
— Beep tone and confirmation tone 3 at paged
extension.
— Confirmatione tone 3 at paging originator’s
extension.
2.00 Background Music (BGM)
through External Pager
Description Programming
The system can provide up to two external music Reference
System Programming
sources. The music source can be broadcast as VT Dumb
background music (BGM) through external “System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
pagers. External Paging 1, 2
External Music Source 1, 2
Starting or stopping BGM can be executed by the “System-Numbering Plan (08/11)”, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
operator 1 (Attendant Console or extension user) BGM Through External Paging
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00
in the same tenant that the external pagers and
External Pager-Tenant 10-C-19.00
external music equipment belong to. For
External Pager-BGM
executing this function by PITS, use the DN Music Source-Tenant 10-C-20.00
button. Music Source-For Use

To start and stop this function, use the same

feature number for “BGM Through External Conditions
Pager.”
This function is effective when an external pager
Dialing the feature number while BGM is on stops
and an external music equipment are connected
BGM, and reversely starts BGM while BGM is off.
and programming has been completed.
Otherwise, the user hears reorder tone after
To utilize this feature, first connect external music
executing the operation to activate this function.
equipments and external pagers to the system,
then assign “System-Operation”, External Music
Source 1, 2 and External Paging 1, 2 to “Yes.”

If Tenant Service is employed, assigning each

external music equipment and external pager to a
tenant is possible by using “Trunk-Pager & Music
Source”, External Pager-Tenant and Music
Source-Tenant.

Assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External

Pager-BGM to “Yes” to use this function. This
assignment can be done to each external pager.

Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,

Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold &
BGM.” This assignment can be done to each
external music equipment individually.

4-H-9
(70695)
Operation
Turning BGM on when BGM is off Turning BGM off when BGM is on
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM 2. Dial the feature number for “BGM
Through External Pager.” Through External Pager.”

• After you hear confirmation tone • After you hear confirmation tone
2, BGM sounds from the 2, BGM from the external
external pager(s). pager(s) stops.
• If your PITS has a display, it • If your PITS has a display, it
shows: shows:

External BGM On External BGM Off

3. Replace the handset or press the 3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button. SP-PHONE button.

4-H-10
I. Other Features
1.00 Night Service
1.01 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Description
Allows any extension user in the system to
answer the incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Answer 1 or 2.”
To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. All CO lines that belong to this trunk
group are covered by this assignment.
External pager must be connected to the system
beforehand.
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
the system.
To answer a call ringing at external pager 1, dial
the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to
answer a call ringing at external pager 2, dial the
feature number for “Night Answer 2.”
For further information about external pager
assignment, refer to Section 4-H-1.03 “Paging
External Pagers.”
Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
4-I-1
(70695)
Conditions
To execute the system administration from a
remote location at night, select “RMT” for “Trunk-
CO Line” Night Answer Point assignment.
For further information about remote
administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Location.”
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and
2) can have unique Night Service arrangement
individually.
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
Tenant.
The extension user cannot answer the UNA call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.
Operation
Answering incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager
An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. If a call is ringing at external
pager 1: Dial the feature number
for Night Answer 1 “45” (default).
If a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature number
for Night Answer 2 “46” (default).
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
3. Start conversation.
Note:
• Confirmation tone for UNA (TAFAS) can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
1.02 Flexible Night Service
Description 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1
(Attendant Console or extension user) to change
the assigned night answer destination on a CO
line basis by dialing the feature number for
“Flexible Night Service.” 2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service “72”
To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group” (default) and CO physical
Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO number and destination
lines that belong to this trunk group are covered extension number.
by this assignment.
If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
assigned night answer destination can not be 2.
changed by the Operator 1. • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service NAP: Txxxx => Exxxx
is almost the same.
The difference is: Physical Extension
number number
Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
or Extension) can change the night 3. Replace the handset or press the
answer destination. SP-PHONE button.
Fixed A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode Changing a night answer destination to the
remote maintenance port
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
Programming
PHONE button.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00

(08/11)”, 2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service Flexible Night Service “72”
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 (default) and CO physical
Incoming Mode (Night) number and FDN for remote.
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Night Answer Point • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
“Night Answer Group (NAG)” — 10-C-59.00
2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
Conditions shows:
If tenant service is employed, the night answer NAP: Txxxx => RMT
destination can only be changed for a CO line in
the same tenant by the Operator 1. Physical
number
Operation
Changing a night answer destination to an 3. Replace the handset or press the
extension SP-PHONE button.

4-I-2
(70695)

Changing a night answer destination to a UNA
(Universal Night Answer)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service “72”
(default) and CO physical number,
* and 1 for external pager 1 or *
and 2 for external pager 2.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
NAP: Txxxx => UNAx
Physical 1 or 2
or
number
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
4-I-3
(70695)
1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode
Description
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or
Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the
Operator 1 must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode
Cancel” for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system
will switch the day and night modes at the
programmed time each day.
To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and
assign desired mode switching time to “Auto
Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”
The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode is
established, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the
Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
If tenant service is employed, night service
assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
In this case, the assignment in “System-
Operation (3/3)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the
assignment in “System-Tenant” is applied to
Tenant 2.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-4.00
Night Service
Auto Start Time
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
(08/11)”,
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual Mode
Set
Night Service Manual Mode
Cancel
Conditions Switching Auto mode to Manual mode
If Auto Start Time on a certain day is not 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
assigned, the current mode is continued until a PHONE button.
new start time is encountered.
If the Start Time for Day mode and Night mode
on the same day are set identically, the current
2. Dial the feature number for “Night
mode is continued.
Service Manual Mode Set.”
If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
at all, the current mode is continued. In other
2.
words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode
• If your PITS has a display, it
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
shows:
then Night Mode is continued.
Day/Night : Man
Operation
Switching Day mode to Night mode 3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.

Switching Manual mode to Auto mode

2. Dial the feature number for 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
“Night Mode Set.” PHONE button.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.
• If your PITS has a display, it 2. Dial the feature number for “Night
shows: Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
Night Mode • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
3. Replace the handset or press the • If your PITS has a display, it
SP-PHONE button. shows:
Day/Night : Auto

Switching Night mode to Day mode 3. Replace the handset or press the
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- SP-PHONE button.
PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Cancel.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Day Mode

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-I-4
2.00 Account Code Entry
Description Operation
Account Code Entry is used to identify incoming Entering an account code when calling an
and outgoing CO calls for accounting and billing outside party in the Forced mode
purposes.
Entry of the code is appended to the SMDR call 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
record and can be used later. PHONE button.
The account code can include up to 10 digits.
The validity of the entered account code is not • You hear dial tone1 or 3 or 4.
checked by the system.
2. Dial the feature number for
Entry of account codes can be forced or optional. selecting a CO line.
In the forced mode, the account code must be
entered before making an outgoing CO call. • You hear dial tone 1.
In the option mode, enter the account code, if • The indicator on the FWD/DND
necessary. button flashes.

Programming 3. Press the FWD/DND button.

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
• You hear dial tone 2.
• The indicator on the FWD/DND
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 button lights in red.
Forced Account Code Mode • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

Conditions Enter ACCNT Code

Only numerical characters “0 to 9” can be 4. Dial the account code.

entered as account codes.
• Up to 10 digits can be entered
Entering an account code over 10 digits sounds as an account code.
the alarm tone.
5. Dial “#.”
Be sure to enter “#” after dialing a code, since “#”
delimits the code. • The indicator light on the
FWD/DND button goes out.
• You hear dial tone 1.

6. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

4-I-5
Entering an account code when receiving a call Correcting an error after dialing a wrong account
from an outside party in the Forced mode code
1. Press the handset or press the 1. Press the FWD/DND button.
SP-PHONE button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button flashes.
• Talk to the other party 2. Dial the correct account code.

2. Press the FWD/DND button.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button lights. 3. Dial “#.”
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Enter ACCNT Code
(Supplement)
3. Dial the account code.
Type 50 and KX-T7050 PITS telephones are not
• Maximum digits for an account provided with the FWD/DND button. Only the
code is 10. PF3 button on them can be programmed to be
the FWD/DND button.
4. Dial “#.” Refer to Section 9-G-1.03 “Station (3/3)” and
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment” for
• The indicator light on the further information.
FWD/DND button goes out.

Entering an account code after calling an outside

party or after receiving a call from an outside
party in the Option mode
1. Press the FWD/DND button
during a conversation with the
outside party.

• The indicator on the FWD/DND

button lights.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Enter ACCNT Code

2. Dial the account code.

• Maximum digits for an account

code is 10.

3. Dial “#.”

• The indicator light on the FWD/

DND button goes out.

4-I-6
3.00 Timed Reminder (Alarm Clock)

Description (4)Newly programmed time overrides the old one.

The extension user can use his or her PITS Only the latest setting is valid at a single
telephone as an alarm clock. extension whether it was set by the extension
When this feature is set, alarm tone will ring for 2 itself or by the operator.
minutes at the programmed time from the built-in
(5)Tone Pattern
speaker of your PITS telephone.
Alarm tone sounds in the following manner:
Wake-up Call
By going off-hook, the extension user can hear
the wake-up message, if it has been recorded
beforehand. 5.0 sec
The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent
tone (dial tone 2) instead of the wake-up Operation
message.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with Setting the alarm time
OGM (wake-up call).”) 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
This feature can be set to operate only once or
everyday at a specified time.

Programming
2. Dial the feature number for Timed
Reference Reminder set “* 51” (default).
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00

(06/11)”,
Timed Reminder Confirm 3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to
Timed Reminder Set 12.
Timed Reminder Cancel

Conditions 4. Dial “minute” with two digits: 00 to

(1) What if the extension is busy or off-hook at the 59.
programmed time?
Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes
on-hook. 5. Dial “0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m..
(2)What if a call comes in when alarm tone is
ringing?
The call comes in on an extension (call
indication is shown)* but does not ring. 6. Dial “0” for Timed Reminder-one
It will ring after alarm tone stops to ring. time, or dial “1” Timed Reminder-
every day.
*The caller hears busy tone if the call is
coming to a PDN button and the extension
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
has only one PDN.
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
(3)Remote Timed Reminder
shows:
This feature can also be set by the Operator 1
or 2 to any extension.
(See Section 4-I-14.00 and Section
6-J-13.00.)
4-I-7
(70695)
 <Example>
Executing once at 10:15 a.m.:
Alarm 10:15 AM
Executing every day at 10:15 a.m.:
Alarm 10:15 AM*
7. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
Canceling the alarm time programmed
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for Timed
Reminder Cancel “#5” (default).
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Alarm Cancelled
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
Confirming the alarm time programmed (PITS with
display only)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for Timed
Reminder Confirm “* 50” (default).
• The display on your PITS
shows:
When no time is set:
Alarm Not Stored
4-I-8
(40993)
If executing every day at 9:00 a.m.
is preset:
<Example>
Alarm 9:00 AM *
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
(Supplement)
When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set
without display, reorder tone is heard.
To stop the ringing of alarm tone
When the preset time comes, alarm tone sounds.
If your PITS has a display, it shows:
<Example>
Alarm 5:00 PM
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
• Alarm tone stops and you hear a
wake-up message or BGM, or
“intermittent tone” (dial tone 2).*
2. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
* This is determined by the system programming.
Refer to Section 3-F-13-00 “Timed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).”
(Supplement)
In step 1, if you press any button (including dial
keypad) except SP-PHONE without going off-
hook, alarm tone stops and then no tone sounds.
Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following timing:
1.0 sec
4.00 Background Music (BGM)
Description Operation
Background Music can be supplied to any PITS Hearing BGM
telephone user in the system through the built-in
1. Dial “1” in on-hook status.
speaker of the PITS, when the PITS is on-hook.
An external music source (customer-supplied)
• BGM sounds from the built-in
should be connected to the system beforehand.
speaker of PITS.
• If your PITS has a display, it
Lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE
shows:
button stops BGM temporarily.
Going back on-hook restarts BGM. BGM On

To set and cancel this function, use the same Canceling BGM
feature number “1.” While hearing BGM
While BGM is set, dialing “1” cancels BGM,
reversely it sets BGM when BGM is not set. 1. Dial “1” in on-hook status.

To execute this function, connect an external • BGM from the built-in speaker of
music source, then set “System-Operation”, PITS stops.
External Music Source 1, 2 to “Yes” and set • If your PITS has a display, it
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-For shows:
Use to either “BGM” or “Hold & BGM.” BGM Off
This setting (BGM or Hold & BGM) is assignable
to each external pager.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

External Music Source 1, 2
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00
Music Source-Tenant
Music Source-For Use

Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of the
external pager is determined by the following
system programming.
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-
Tenant.

4-I-9
5.00 Secret Dialing
Description
When using the PITS with a display, Secret
Dialing provides concealing all or part of the
registered telephone numbers that appear on the
display.
The telephone numbers are registered by
“System-Speed Dial-System” or stored into
Programmable Feature buttons on PITS and DSS
consoles. When storing a number, bracket the
secret part that you want to hide with [ ]. Then
the part does not appear on the display when the
number is sent.
It is assignable to print out the secret part onto
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) or not
by “System-Operation”, Print Secret Dial.
Conditions
The feature numbers for selecting a CO line can
not be concealed by this feature.
If the telephone number “9-1-[201]-431-2111” is
stored in speed dialing code 01 by “System-Speed
Dial-System”, the following message appears on
the display when call is made:
9-1 - • • • - 431-2111
When storing a speed dialing code, entering “ [ ”
only without entering “ ] ” causes all the digits
entered after “ [ ” to be hidden.
Operation
None

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (2/3)”, 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00

Print Secret Dial
“System-Speed Dialing-System”, 9-D-8.00 10-C-12.00
Dial

PITS Station Programming Reference

DN (Directory Number) Button 12-C-1.00

Assignment
PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment

4-I-10
6.00 Data Line Security
Description Operation
Used to maintain the communication properly by Assigning Data Line Security
prohibiting various tones such as call waiting tone
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
or Held Call Reminder from sounding at the
PHONE button.
extension in data communication mode. It also
prohibits other extensions from executing
overriding functions such as Busy Override.
2. Dial the feature number for Data
To assign Data Line Security, assign “Extension-
Station”, Data Line Security to “Yes.” Line Security Set “65 ” (default).

Setting or canceling this function is executed • You hear confirmation tone 1 or

using the feature number for “Data Line Security 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Set” or “Data Line Security Cancel.” • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Programming Data Mode On
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
3. Replace the handset or press the
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 SP-PHONE button.
(05/11)”,
Data Line Security Set
Data Line Security Cancel
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Data Line Security Canceling Data Line Security
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Conditions
Use the PDN button to set and cancel Data Line
Security mode.
2. Dial the feature number for Data
Assigning Data Line Security always offers the Line Security Cancel “65#”
user conversation privacy unless Privacy Release (default).
is executed.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
If there is a conversation between the extension 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
setting Data Line Security and the extension not • If your PITS has a display, it
setting it, Data Line Security applies to the both shows:
extensions. Data Mode Off

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-I-11
(70695)
7.00 Absent Message Capability
Description
Provides an absent message on the display of a
calling extension if the called extension has
assigned an absent message.
An absent message appears only on the PITS
telephones provided with the display.
Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, 10 programmable
messages can be split between two tenants by
assigning the boundary number in “System-
Tenant”, Absent Message Boundary.
Six fixed absent messages are shared with two
tenants.

There are six fixed and 10 programmable absent An extension user can select only one message
messages that are common to the system and from six fixed and 10 programmable messages to
can be assigned by system programming. assign at a time. Setting multiple messages is
The following are the six fixed messages (the “x” impossible.
means a parameter to be entered when assigning
a message at individual stations): When setting fixed messages 4), 5), 6) at a
station, the system checks the parameters entered
1) Will Return Soon : for example, the parameters of “hour,” “minute,”
2) Gone Home “a.m./p.m.” are checked in fixed message 4). In
3) In a Meeting case of a wrong entry, the user hears reorder tone.
4) Back At x x : x x x x
a.m/p.m. When setting a flexible message by the system
minute programming, up to six parameters: “%” can be
hour entered. These are used to allow an extension
5) Out Until x x / x x user to enter the desired parameters later at his
day PITS set.
month
6) At Ext xxxx
If a flexible message contains any parameter to be
directory number
(three or four digits) entered, use “0 to 9”, “ * ” and “#.”
If the user enters fewer or more parameters than
To set and cancel this function at individual PITS the assigned parameters, or enters characters
sets, use the feature numbers for “Absent except “0 to 9” “* ” and “#,” reorder tone is heard.
Message Set” and “Absent Message Cancel.”
When an extension has set both an absent
Programming message and Call Forwarding-No Answer feature,
Call Forwarding-No Answer is activated when the
Reference
System Programming extension is called.
VT Dumb
Refer to Section 4-F-2.03 “Call Forwarding-No
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00 Answer” for further information.
Absent Message Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00
(06/11)”,
Absent Message Set
Absent Message Cancel
“System-Absent Message”, 9-D-9.00 10-C-13.00
Fixed Message
Flexible Message

4-I-12
(70695)
Operation
Setting fixed message 1), 2), or 3)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Absent Message Set.”
3. Dial “01” for fixed message 1), or
dial “02” for fixed message 2), or
dial “03” for fixed message 3).
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2, then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting fixed message 1):
Will Return Soon
When setting fixed message 2):
Gone Home
When setting fixed message 3):
In a Meeting
4. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
4-I-13
Setting fixed messages 4), 5) or 6)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Absent Message Set.”
3. Dial “04” for fixed message 4), or
dial “05” for fixed message 5), or
dial “06” for fixed message 6).
4. Dial “TIME” for fixed message 4),
or dial “DATE” for the fixed
message 5), or dial “directory
number” for fixed message 6) as
follows:
Input format
for “TIME” : HH MM AM/PM
01 to 12 (hour)
00 to 59 (minute)
0 for a.m., 1 for p.m.
Input format for “DATE” : MM DD
01 to 12 (month)
01 to 31 (day)
Input format for “directory number”:
three or four digits.
• You hear confirmation tone, then
dial tone.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When setting fixed message 4):
Back at x x : x x x x
When setting fixed message 5):
Out Until x x / x x
When setting fixed message 6):
At Ext. x x x x
5. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
Setting a flexible message Canceling the assigned message
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for 2. Dial the feature number for
“Absent Message Set.” “Absent Message Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Dial the two digit message
number: 07 to 16.
If the message requires any 3. Replace the handset or press the
parameters, enter all the SP-PHONE button.
parameters.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2, then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows the entered message.

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-I-14
8.00 Message Waiting
Description (1) Receiver's extension is:
Allows an extension user to indicate to another • A PITS telephone without a MESSAGE
extension that a message is waiting for him or her, button.
by turning on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on
• A Single Line Telephone without
the called extension.
MESSAGE lamp.
The extension user who received the message
waiting indication can call back the message (2) The maximum number of message waiting
sender by simply going off-hook and pressing the indications available for the system or
red lit MESSAGE indicator (button). tenant 1/2 has been assigned.
If your PITS has a display, it shows:
This feature is useful when the called extension is
busy or does not answer the call. MW Not Accepted

Up to 500 message waiting indications can be set 3. Tenant Service

for the whole system. The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is
Programming determined by "System–Tenant” Message
Reference Waiting Boundary.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00 4. Setting of the multiple message waiting

Message Waiting Boundary indications
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
(1) More than one message sender can leave
(07/11)”,
Message Cancel message waiting indications to the same
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00 extension at the same time.
DN Key Type
9-G-1.03 10-C-26.00
(2) Even if the same message sender sets
“Extension-Station (3/3)”,
DSS Key Type message waiting indications to the same
extension more than once, this leaves only
one message on the called extension.
Conditions
1. Suitable Telephones: 5. The MESSAGE indicator on the message
(1) Message Sender receiver's extension will be turned off when:
• Attendant Console (1) The message receiver calls back the
• A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE message sender by pressing the red lit
button.* MESSAGE button, and it was answered by
• Any Single Line Telephone the message sender (or by another
extension using Call Pickup or an SDN
(2) Message Receiver
button).* 1
• A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE
button.* (2) Message waiting indication is canceled by
• A Single Line Telephone with the message sender.* 1
MESSAGE lamp. (3) Message waiting indications are canceled
* Refer to <Supplement> on page 4-I-17 for by the message receiver.* 2
further information. * 1 The indicator may not be turned off, if there are
other message waiting indications sent by other
2. Reorder Tone extensions.
A caller who attempts to leave message waiting * 2 All message waiting indications are canceled at
indication may hear the reorder tone in the once.
following cases:

4-I-15
(70695)
Operation by Caller
(At message sender's extension)
Setting the Message Waiting Indication
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Operation by Receiver
(At message receiver's extension)
Calling back the message sender
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.

2. Dial the extension number of the 2. Press the MESSAGE button that
other party. is lit.

• You hear ringback tone, or • You hear ringback tone. When

busy tone 1 or 2, or DND tone. the message sender answers,
start conversation.
3. Press the MESSAGE button.
• If you received multiple
messages, calling back the first
• You hear confirmation tone 2
message sender is performed.
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
At the conclusion of the
• The MESSAGE indicator of the conversation, the first message
other extension lights. is canceled.
• At the conclusion of the
4. Replace the handset or press the
conversations with all the
SP-PHONE button.
message senders, the
MESSAGE indicator goes out.

Canceling all Message Waiting Indications on

Canceling the Message Waiting Indication on
your extension
receiver's extension set by a caller
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

2. Dial the feature number for
Message Cancel “#9”
Message Cancel “#9” (default)
(default)and your own extension
and the extension number of the
number in succession.
message receiver successively.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• The MESSAGE indicator on
• If the other extension received
receiver's extension goes out.
only one message, the
MESSAGE indicator of the
3. Replace the handset or press the
other extension goes out.
SP-PHONE button.
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

4-I-16
(30393)
Confirming the message sender by the message
receiver (for PITS with the display only) and
changing the calling order if multiple messages
are left (for all PITSs).
In on-hook condition or SP-PHONE off
1. Press the MESSAGE button that
is lit.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
When the message sender is
an extension user:
<Example>
1234 : Tony
When the message sender is
an Attendant Console:
<Example>
ATT Console
1 The first caller
The order of The second
2 The last caller
calling back caller
3 The last caller
Displaying Time and Date
<Supplement>
A MESSAGE button is not provided on the PITS's listed below, but can be
assigned to the assignable buttons respectively, as follows:
PITS not provided with MESSAGE button
KX-T30830
KX-T30820, KX-T30850
KX-T61620, KX-T61630, KX-T61650
2. Press the MESSAGE button that
is lit again.
• If multiple messages are left,
the second message sender is
displayed. The calling order of
the first message sender
becomes the last, and the
second message sender
becomes the first.
(Note)
Repeating step 2 displays the message sender
on the display of PITS type 30 one by one in
receiving order.
The calling order also changes at the same time.
The illustration below shows the change at every
pressing of the MESSAGE button:
“ ” in the illustration means pressing of the
MESSAGE button.
The second
The first caller
caller
The second
caller
The last caller The first caller
Displaying the first caller Displaying the second caller
Assignable Buttons
DSS 8
DN 3
DN 6
4-I-17
(30393)
9.00 Electronic Station Lock Out
Description Operation
Electronic Station Lock Out allows an extension Setting Electronic Station Lock Out
user to prohibit other extension users from making
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
outgoing CO calls from his or her extension.
PHONE button.
Any three-digit number (000 to 999) can be used
as a lock code.
2. Dial the feature number for Station
To execute this function, assign “System-Class of Lock Set “ 6” (default).
Service”, Station Lock to “Yes.”

Programming
3. Dial the lock code: 000 to 999.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Station Lock 4. Dial the same lock code again.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
(07/11)”,
Station Lock Set • You hear confirmation tone 2.
Station Lock Cancel • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Locked No. : xxx
Conditions
Set and cancel Electronic Station Lock Out on the lock code
PDN button.
5. Replace the handset.
Both Operator 1 and 2 (extension user or
Attendant Console) can lock and unlock the other
extensions remotely without dialing the lock code
as shown in the following format. Canceling Electronic Station Lock Out

[Remote Station Lock cancel + Extension no.] 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Once locked by an Operator, the extension user
cannot unlock it.
See Section 4-I-11.00 “Remote Station Feature 2. Dial the feature number for Station
Control” for the details. Lock Cancel “#6” (default).

3. Dial the lock code.

• You hear confirmation tone 2.

• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Unlocked
4. Replace the handset.

4-I-18
(70695)
10.00 Assigned Feature Clear
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to clear the following 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
features assigned on it by dialing the feature PHONE button.
number for “Station Program Clear” :
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
(a) Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb • The indicator on the PDN
(b) Absent Message button lights in green.
(c) Timed Reminder
2. Dial the feature number for
Programming Station Program Clear “###”
Reference (default).
System Programming
VT Dumb

9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
“System-Numbering Plan
(07/11)”, • If your PITS has a display, it
Station Program Clear shows:
Ext Data Clear

Conditions 3. Replace the handset.

Execute Assigned Feature Clear on the PDN
button.

4-I-19
(70695)
11.00 Remote Station Feature
Control
Description Operation
Allows the Operator 1 and 2 (extension user or Setting/canceling Do Not Disturb to/from an
Attendant Console) to cancel or set the following extension
features assigned to each extension:
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Features to be canceled:
• DND (Do Not Disturb)
• Electronic Station Lock Out
• FWD (Call Forwarding)
2. Setting : Dial the feature number
(It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily.)
for Remote DND Set
Features to be set: “74 ” (default).
• DND (Do Not Disturb)
• Electronic Station Lock Out Canceling : Dial the feature
number for Remote
Programming DND Cancel “74#”
(default).
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 3. Dial the directory number of the
“System-Numbering Plan (08/11)”, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00 extension.
Remote Station Lock Set
Remote Station Lock Cancel • Confirmation tone 1 or 2 sounds.
Remote DND Set • If your PITS has a display, it
Remote DND Cancel shows:
Remote FWD Cancel
Remote FWD Cancel-OneTime When setting:
DND Set: E xxxx
Conditions
When an extension is locked by the operator, Extension Number
unlocking by the locked extension itself is When canceling:
impossible.
DND Cancel: E xxxx

Extension Number

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-I-20
(70695)
Setting/canceling Electronic Station Lock Out Canceling Call Forwarding from an extension
to/from an extension
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- PHONE button
PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

2. Setting : Dial the feature number “Remote FWD Cancel.”
for “Remote Station Lock
Set.”

Canceling : Dial the feature 3. Dial the directory number of the

number for “Remote extension.
Station Lock Cancel.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
3. Dial the directory number of the 2.
extension. • If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
FWD cancel: E xxxx
2.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows: Extension number

When setting: 4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.
Locked: E xxxx

Extension number
Canceling Call Forwarding from an extension
When canceling:
temporarily
Unlocked: E xxxx
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Extension number

4. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button. 2. Dial the feature number for
“Remote FWD Cancel-One Time.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

• Call Forwarding is canceled

temporarily.
• Calling the extension starts.

4-I-21
12.00 DSS Console
Description
DSS buttons (32) PF buttons (16)
The DSS Console is used to monitor the
busy/idle status of the extension users in the
system, and make a call to an extension user by
simply pressing the associated DSS (Direct
Station Selection) button.
The DSS Console provides a convenient way to
transfer an incoming CO call to an extension user
by simply pressing the associated DN•DSS
button instead of pressing the TRANSFER button
and dialing the extension number.
(See 4-I-12.01 “Automatic Transfer.” )

The DSS Console can also be used to make an

outgoing CO call and to access certain
programmable feature (e.g. Call Park-System).

Up to 16 DSS Consoles (one per extension port)

can be connected to the system in conjunction KX-T123240
with a PITS telephone.

Place the DSS Console and the paired PITS DSS buttons (32) PF buttons (16)
telephone side by side on your desk.

We provide three types of DSS Console as

illustrated below:

DSS buttons (16) PF buttons (16)

KX-T7040

The DSS Console has an array of 32 DSS

buttons plus 16 PF (Programmable Feature)
buttons.
KX-T61640
The KX-T61640 has only 16 DSS buttons.

4-I-22
Any extension directory number can be
programmed to each DSS button, and the
associated LED indicator for each button
provides a busy/idle indication of the
programmed extension. Various features can be
programmed to the DSS and PF buttons.

The assignment for the DSS buttons and PF

buttons are programmed and changed either by
the system programming or PITS station
programming.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-DSS Console” 9-G-2.00 10-C-23.00

10-C-25.00
10-C-26.00

PITS Station Programming Reference

PF (Programmable Feature) Button 12-C-2.00
Assignment
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button 12-C-3.00
Assignment

Conditions
None

4-I-23
12.01 Automatic Transfer
Description Pressing the DN•DSS button in the following
modes causes the corresponding operations.
Allows the DSS console operator to transfer the
CO call to an extension user by simply pressing Modes of call Operations caused by
the associated DN•DSS button on the DSS pressing the DN•DSS button.
console.
Talking to an Calls the extension by ☛1
This performance is, as a result, equivalent to the
outside party placing the current call on
operation of Call Transfer of a CO call to an on the DN Consultation Hold.
extension on a DN button. button

To execute Automatic Transfer, assign “System- Talking to an Calls the extension by

extension on disconnecting the current
Operation”, DSS Operation Mode to “With
the DN button call.
Transfer.”
Default is set to “With Transfer.” Talking on the By placing the current call on ☛1
CO button Consultation Hold, selects ☛2
the DN button automatically,
If DSS Operation Mode is set to “Without
and calls the extension.
Transfer,” pressing the DN•DSS button
disconnects the other party and only calls the Talking on the By disconnecting the current ☛3
extension user. ICM button call, selects the DN button
automatically, and calls the
extension.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
☛1 : If it is impossible to place the current call on
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 Consultation Hold, the system ignores the
DSS Operation Mode pressing of the DN•DSS button.

☛2 : If there is no idle PDN button, the current

Conditions
Automatic Transfer is effective only during a
conversation with an outside party when the DSS
console does not have a call on Consultation
Hold.
If the DSS console has a call on Consultation
Hold, the system ignores the pressing of the
DN•DSS button.
call is placed on Consultation Hold and no
tone sounds.
☛3 : If there is no idle PDN button, the current
call is disconnected and no tone sounds.
Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for further information.

Operation
During a conversation with an outside party

1. Press the DN•DSS button on the

DSS Console.

• As soon as the other party is

placed on Consultation Hold,
extension calling starts and
ringback tone sounds.

4-I-24
13.00 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back
Description Conditions
Up to four OGM’s can be recorded by the Operator (1)Tenant Service
1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so that If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
different messages can be used for different each DISA card is determined by the system
situations. programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.
The Operator 1 of each tenant can record and
The following four types of OGM can be recorded play back the OGM within the same tenant.
respectively:
DISA, OGM1, OGM2 and W-UP (Wake-up) (2) Recording of OGM
• OGM recording is executed by selecting an
OGM for outside parties OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the
OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who following four types:
called the system via DISA feature. 1. OGM1 for UCD with OGM
(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System 2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM
Access (DISA).”) 3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
OGM for OGM1 and OGM2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature. • If the type of multiple DISA cards are the
(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution same in a tenant, the same message is
(UCD)-with OGM.”) recorded for them at a time.

OGM for extension users (3)Playing back of OGM

OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wake-
up message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with
OGM (Wake-up Call).”)
Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.
A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to
four DISA cards can be installed to the system.
Usage of each DISA card is determined by the
system programming.
(See Section 9-K-1.00 “Special Attended-DISA.”)
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
• The following two ways are available:
A. By selecting an OGM type
B. By designating the logical number of
each DISA card directly.
• If there are multiple DISA cards of the same
type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
type is selected to play back, playback starts
from the lowest DISA card physical number.
(4)Others
Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited
during OGM recording and playing.

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00

(09/11)”,
OGM Record
OGM Playback
“Special Attended-DISA”, For Use 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00

4-I-25
(70695)
Operation
Recording OGM from PITS (For Operation from • If your PITS has a display, it
Attendant Console, refer to Section 6-J-8.00 shows:
“Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing
Back.”) xxxxxxxx Play : 00
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. Indicates playback
time, counts up by
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. second.
UCD-OGM1 or
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
UCD-OGM2 or
Record “791” (default) and the
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM
resource number (1 to 4) in
succession.
• When playback is finished, the
MEMORY indicator goes out.
(Resource number)
You hear confirmation tone 3,
1 : OGM1 for UCD
then no tone.
2 : OGM2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
5. Replace the handset or press the
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
SP-PHONE button.
• The MEMORY indicator flashes
in red 60 wink, confirmation tone
3 is heard. (Supplement)
In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is
• If your PITS has a display, it
terminated and playback starts automatically.
shows:
Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4
afterward.
xxxxxxxx Rec. : 00
In step 3 if you wish to change the message
Indicates recording during recording, you can start recording again
time, counts up by by dialing “* .”
second.
UCD-OGM1 or In step 4 if you wish to interrupt and finish
UCD-OGM2 or playback, press the MEMORY button.
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM

3. Begin your message.

4. As soon as you finish, press the

MEMORY button.

• The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.

• After confirmation tone 3

sounds, the recorded message
is played back automatically.

4-I-26
(40993)
Playing back OGM (Supplement)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish
PHONE button. playback, press the MEMORY button.

During playback you can start playback again

from the beginning by dialing “* .”
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Playback “792” (default) and a
number below in succession.

(Resource number)
1 : OGM1 for UCD
2 : OGM 2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

(“* ” and DISA No.)

* 1: selects card 1
* 2: selects card 2
* 3: selects card 3
* 4: selects card 4

• The MEMORY indicator lights in

red.
You hear confirmation tone 3,
then the message.

• If your PITS has a display, it

shows:

<Example>
DISA-OGM Play: 00

• When playback is finished, you

hear confirmation tone 3, then
no tone.

• The MEMORY indicator goes

out.

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

4-I-27
(40993)
14.00 Remote Timed Reminder
– One Time
Description Operation
Allows the Operator 1 or 2 (Attendant Console or Setting Timed Reminder to another extension
PITS with display) to set “Timed Reminder” 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
feature to any extension. PHONE button.
(Refer to Section 4-I-3.00, 5-G-3.00 “Timed
Reminder.”)
If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed
beforehand, the extension user (on which 2. Dial the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder is set) hears a wake-up Remote Timed Reminder Set
message. “7* 1” (default) and the extension
(Refer to Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder number to be set Timed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).”) in succession.

Programming 3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to 12.

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00

(09/11)”,
Remote Timed Reminder 4. Dial “minute” with two digits: 00 to
Confirm 59.
Remote Timed Reminder
Set
Remote Timed Reminder
Cancel 5. Dial “0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m..

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2

Conditions and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(1) The difference between “Timed Reminder” • If your PITS has a display, it
and “Remote Timed Reminder” is: shows:

Validity of the E100 11:11 AM

Setting setting
Extension number
Timed by extenison Once or
Reminder itself everyday at the 6. Replace the handset or press the
programmed SP-PHONE button.
time

Remote by Operator Once

Timed 1 or 2
Reminder

(2)At a single extension, only the latest setting is

valid whether it was set by the extension itself
(Timed Reminder) or by the Operator 1 or 2
(Remote Timed Reminder).

4-I-28
(70695)
Canceling Timed Reminder set to another 3. Replace the handset or press the
extension SP-PHONE button.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
(Supplement)
When a user executes step 2 by a PITS set
2. Dial the feature number for without display, reorder tone is heard.
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel
“7#” (default) and the extension
number to be canceled Remote
Timed Reminder in succession.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
E100 Cancelled

3. Replace the handset or press the

SP-PHONE button.

Confirming the alarm time programmed to another

extension (PITS with display only)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.

2. Dial the feature number for

Remote Timed Reminder Confirm
“7* 0” (default) and the extension
number to be confirmed the
setting in succession.

• The display on your PITS

shows:
When no time is set:
Alarm Not Stored

If executing at 9:00 a.m. is preset at

Extension 100:
<Example>

E100 9:00 AM

4-I-29
(40993)
 Section 5

Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)

 (Section 5)

Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)
Contents

Page
A Outgoing Call Features.................................................................................... 5-A-1

1.00 Making Outside Calls............................................................................. 5-A-1

1.01 Local Trunk Dial Access.............................................................. 5-A-1
1.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access ............................................ 5-A-2
1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) .................................................. 5-A-3
2.00 Automatic Dialing................................................................................... 5-A-4
2.01 Speed Dialing-Station.................................................................. 5-A-4
2.02 Speed Dialing-System................................................................. 5-A-6
2.03 Last Number Redial (LNR).......................................................... 5-A-9
2.04 Pickup Dialing.............................................................................. 5-A-9
3.00 Making Internal Calls............................................................................. 5-A-11
3.01 Inter Office Calling....................................................................... 5-A-11
4.00 Automatic Callback................................................................................ 5-A-12
4.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk ........................................................... 5-A-12
4.02 Automatic Callback-Station ......................................................... 5-A-13
5.00 Executive Busy Override ....................................................................... 5-A-14
6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override............................................................. 5-A-15
7.00 Walking COS (Class of Service)............................................................ 5-A-16
8.00 Operator Call ......................................................................................... 5-A-17

B Receiving Features.......................................................................................... 5-B-1

1.00 Call Pickup............................................................................................. 5-B-1

1.01 Dial Call Pickup ........................................................................... 5-B-1
1.02 Directed Call Pickup.................................................................... 5-B-2
1.03 Call Pickup Deny......................................................................... 5-B-3
2.00 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service......................... 5-B-4
3.00 Executive Busy Override Deny.............................................................. 5-B-5
4.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) ........................................................................... 5-B-6
5.00 Call Waiting............................................................................................ 5-B-8
6.00 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-Log Out............................................... 5-B-10

C Holding Features.............................................................................................. 5-C-1

1.00 Hold ...................................................................................................... 5-C-1

2.00 Consultation Hold .................................................................................. 5-C-2
3.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station ..................................................................... 5-C-3
4.00 Call Park ............................................................................................... 5-C-4
4.01 Call Park-System......................................................................... 5-C-4
4.02 Call Park-Station ......................................................................... 5-C-5

5-1
(60395)
 Page
D Transferring Features ...................................................................................... 5-D-1

1.00 Call Transfer .......................................................................................... 5-D-1

1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to Station............................................ 5-D-1
1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station................................................ 5-D-2
1.03 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote.......................................... 5-D-3
1.04 Unscreened Call Transfer to Attendant Console......................... 5-D-3-1
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) ............. 5-D-3-2
1.06 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk.................................................. 5-D-3-3
2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD) ......................................................................... 5-D-4
2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls............................................................. 5-D-4
2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook................................................... 5-D-7
2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer......................................................... 5-D-10
2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer................................ 5-D-13
2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk............................................................. 5-D-16
2.06 Call Forwarding-Follow Me.......................................................... 5-D-19

E Conversation Features..................................................................................... 5-E-1

1.00 Conference............................................................................................ 5-E-1

2.00 Doorphone............................................................................................. 5-E-2
3.00 External Feature Access........................................................................ 5-E-3

F Paging Features............................................................................................... 5-F-1

1.00 Paging.................................................................................................... 5-F-1

1.01 Paging All Extensions.................................................................. 5-F-1
1.02 Group Paging .............................................................................. 5-F-3
1.03 Paging External Pagers............................................................... 5-F-5
1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers ............................... 5-F-7
2.00 Background Music (BGM) through External Pager................................ 5-F-8

G Other Features ................................................................................................ 5-G-1

1.00 Night Service ......................................................................................... 5-G-1

1.01 Universal Night Answer (UNA).................................................... 5-G-1
1.02 Flexible Night Service.................................................................. 5-G-2
1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode...................................................... 5-G-3
2.00 Account Code Entry............................................................................... 5-G-5
3.00 Timed Reminder .................................................................................... 5-G-7
4.00 Data Line Security ................................................................................. 5-G-9
5.00 Absent Message Capability.................................................................. 5-G-10
6.00 Message Waiting................................................................................... 5-G-12
7.00 Electronic Station Lock Out ................................................................... 5-G-14
8.00 Assigned Feature Clear......................................................................... 5-G-15
9.00 Remote Station Feature Control............................................................ 5-G-16
5-2
(70695)
A. Outgoing Call Features

1.00 Making Outside Calls

1.01 Local Trunk Dial Access
Description Operation
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO calls 1. Lift the handset .
by automatic selection of an idle CO line.
Dialing the feature number for ARS/Local CO Line • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Access” enables you to execute this function.

To activate this feature, set “System- 2. Dial the feature number for
Operation”,Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
set to “Yes,” ARS feature is activated instead of (default).
this feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route • You hear dial tone 1.”
Selection (ARS)” for further information.
3. Dial the telephone number of the
Programming outside party.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Automatic Route Selection
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Hunt Sequence
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
(02/11)”,
ARS/Local CO Line Access

Conditions
An idle CO line available and hunting sequence is
determined by the system programming “System-
Local Access Group”, Hunt Sequence.

If an extension user hears busy tone, there is no

idle CO line available.

If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user

is restricted from accessing this feature.
Refer to Section 3-C-1.01 “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access,” for further information.

If tenant service is activated, accessible trunk

group is limited to the trunk groups within the
same tenant.

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk group
in hunt sequence 01 in “System-Local Access
Group.”

5-A-1
(70695)
1.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access
Description Operation
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO 1. Lift the handset.
calls via an idle CO line in the specified trunk
group by dialing the feature number for “Trunk • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Group 01-08 Access” or “Trunk Group 09-16
Access.”
2-1 Specifying any one of trunk
groups 01 to 08
Programming
1) Dial the feature number for
Reference
System Programming Trunk Group 01-08 Access
VT Dumb
“81” (default).
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 2) Dial the trunk group
Trunk Group Access specifying number : 1 to 8.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
(02/11)”, • Trunk group specifying number
Trunk Group 01-08 Access matches trunk group number,
Trunk Group 09-16 Access as follows:
Trunk Group Trunk Group
Conditions Specifying Number Number
1 01
Trunk groups to be specified are limited to the 2 02
ones assigned in “System-Class of Service”, 3 03
Trunk Group Access. 4 04
5 05
If an extension user hears busy tone, all CO lines 6 06
in the specified trunk group are not available. 7 07
8 08
If an extension user hears reorder tone, the user 2-2 Specifying any one of trunk
is restricted from accessing the specified trunk groups 09 to 16
group.
Refer to Section 3-C-1.03 “Toll Restriction for 1) Dial the feature number for
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct Trunk Trunk Group 09-16 Access
Access,” for further information. “82” (default).
2) Dial the trunk group
specifying number : 1 to 8.
• Trunk group specifying number
matches trunk group number,
as follows:
Trunk Group Trunk Group
Specifying Number Number
1 09
2 10
3 11
4 12
5 13
6 14
7 15
8 16

3. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

5-A-2
(70695)
1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group
Dial Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Description Operation
Allows extension users to make outgoing CO 1. Lift the handset.
calls using Special Carrier Facilities by simply
dialing the feature number for “Trunk Group 17- • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
24 Access.”
Detailed data, such as access codes and
authorization codes, required to Special Carrier 2. Dial the feature number for Trunk
Access must be programmed beforehand in Group 17-24 Access “83”
“Special Carrier Access” screen. (default).
Trunk groups available for Special Carrier Access
is also defined in the same screen.

Special carriers available for each extension user 3. Dial the virtual trunk group
is defined in “System-Class of Service (2/2)” specifying number : 1 to 8.
Special Carrier Access.
• Virtual trunk group number
It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier matches virtual trunk group
Access on system-wide basis. specifying number and digit
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2- modification table number
EQU/OCC Access Assignment” for further (Equal access table number 1
information. to 4, OCC access table number
1 to 4 which should be
Programming assigned beforehand), as
Reference follows:
System Programming
VT Dumb
Virtual Trunk Virtual Trunk Digit Modification
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.02
Group Number Group Specifying Table Number
Special Carrier Access Number
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 17 1 Equal access 1
(02/11)”, 18 2 table number 2
Trunk Group 17-24 Access 19 3 3
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00 20 4 4
Access/OCC Access”, 9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00 21 5 OCC access 1
“World Select 2” — 10-C-52.00 table number 2
22 6
23 7 3
24 8 4
Conditions
None 4. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.

5-A-3
(70695)
2.00 Automatic Dialing
2.01 Speed Dialing-Station
Description Each stored number can have up to 16 digits
Allows SLT telephone users to program frequently including CO line access code.
dialed telephone numbers (both extension and Numbers from “0 to 9” and “ ” can be
outside numbers) in the Speed Dialing code (0 to registered.
9 : dedicated to each SLT telephone user) by To store “PAUSE,” dial “ .”
dialing the feature number for “Speed Dialing-
Station Programming.” When SLT is connected with HLC card, the SLT
To make a call using pre-assigned Speed Dialing can use One Touch Dialing and the special dials
code, dial the feature number for “Speed Dialing- such as secret dialing etc. which are stored for
Station” and appropriate Speed Dialing code (0 to PITS.
9). It is performed by connecting PITS with HLC card
temporarily and registering One Touch Dialing by
Up to 10 codes can be registered for each SLT using the PITS.
telephone. In this case, One Touch Dialing codes stored on
PF1 to PF10 on a PITS match speed dialing
Programming codes by SLT (Single Line Telephone), as
follows:
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
PITS SLT
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 One Touch Dialing Speed Dialing-Station
(02/11)”, PF1....................................0
Speed Dialing-Station PF2....................................1
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00 PF3....................................2
(07/11)”, PF4....................................3
Speed Dialing-Station
PF5....................................4
Programming
PF6....................................5
PF7....................................6
PF8....................................7
Conditions PF9....................................8
To register the outside number in a speed dialing PF10..................................9
code, the feature number for selecting a CO line
must be registered as leading digits.

When calling an outside party automatically:

9 - 411 - 3209

Feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line

Access”

When calling an outside party by specifying the

trunk group:
811 - 411 - 3209

Feature number for “Trunk Group 01-08

Access” or
Feature number for “Trunk Group 09-16
Access” or
Feature number for “Trunk Group 17-24
Access” (Virtual Trunk Group
— ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

5-A-4
(70695)
Operation
Storing the telephone number Executing Speed Dialing-Station
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for 2. Dial the feature number for
“Speed Dialing-Station “Speed Dialing-Station.”
Programming.”
• No tone is heard.

3. Dial the speed dialing code : 0 to 3. Dial the speed dialing code: 0 to
9. 9.

• Registered telephone number

is sent.
4. Dial the telephone number that
you want to store.

5. Dial “#.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

6. Replace the handset.

(Supplement)
When using a rotary telephone (pulse type), wait
until you hear confirmation tone in step 5 without
dialing “#.”

5-A-5
2.02 Speed Dialing-System
Description When the mark “ ” or “#” is stored in the feature
Allows any extension user to call outside parties number for “Speed Dialing-System,” the rotary
by dialing the feature number for “Speed Dialing- telephone users can not use this feature.
System” and a pre-assigned 3-digit code (001 to
200) common to any extension user in the Operation
system. Calling an outside party using System Speed
Up to 200 Speed Dialing Codes can be registered Dialing Code
to the system.
1. Lift the handset.
The speed dialing codes are registered in
“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4
specific toll restriction level for each speed dialing .
code can be assigned in the same screen.
Refer to “Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed 2. Dial the feature number for
Dialing” on next page for further information. Speed Dialing-System “ 1”
(default).
Programming
Reference
• You hear no tone.
System Programming
VT Dumb
3. Dial the appropriate speed
“System-Tenant”, Speed Dialing- 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00 dialing code : 001 to 200.
System Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
• The registered number is sent
(02/11)”,
Speed Dialing-System to CO line automatically.
“System-Speed Dialing-System” 9-D-8.00 10-C-12.00

Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, Speed Dialing
Codes can be split by two tenants. In this case,
one tenant cannot use the Speed Dialing Codes
which belong to another tenant.

Each stored number can have up to 32 digits

including CO line access code.
“0~9,” “ ,” “#,” “PAUSE,” “FLASH,” “—” and
“SECRET” can be registered.

Speed Dialing and manual dialing can be used in

combination. In this case, execute Speed Dialing
before manual dialing.

A feature number for selecting a CO line must be

stored as leading digits.

The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:

• ARS/Local CO Line Access
• Trunk Group 01-08 Access
• Trunk Group 09-16 Access
• Trunk Group 17-24 Access (Virtual Trunk
Group — ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

5-A-6
(70695)
<Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing> Code (TRLSD=01 to 16), the system
compares Toll Restriction Level of Extension
The system administrator can assign Toll
(TRLE) with TRLSD.
Restriction Level of System Speed Dialing
(referred to as “TRLSD” in the following) to each
If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLSD
code as follows:
(TRLE≥TRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLE is
lower than TRLSD (TRLE<TRLSD), a call is
System - Speed Dialing - System checked against System Toll Restriction
feature.
System Speed Dial No. =001
For further information about TRLE, refer to
+
Section 3-C-1.00 “Toll Restriction.”
No. Type Dial
+ +
001 00 94113209 <Example>
If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
002 01 8114113209 outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
003 01 92093182 Dialing Code (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLE of 6
is higher than TRLSD of 7 (TRLE>TRLSD), so a
call is made.
Toll Restriction Level of System
Speed Dialing (TRLSD) If an extension user (TRLE=6) makes an
outgoing CO call by selecting a System Speed
TRLSD consists of 17 levels (“00” and “01 to 16”) Dialing Code (TRLSD=4), in this case, TRLE of 6
TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from is lower than TRLSD of 4 (TRLE<TRLSD), so a
TRLSDs “01 to 16.” call is checked against the System Toll
In TRLSD “01 to 16,” “01” is the highest level and Restriction feature.
“16” is the lowest.

1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=00)

When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing

a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=00),
extension users receive standard toll
restriction treatment.

If selected speed dialing code includes Local

Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a
call is checked against “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access.”

If selected speed dialing code includes

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as
leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll
Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access.”
For further information about System Toll
Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-1.00
“Toll Restriction.”

2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=01 to 16)

When an extension user makes an outgoing

CO call by dialing a System Speed Dialing
5-A-7
The following flowchart shows the simplified procedure of toll restriction plan for
System Speed Dialing.

Start

When an outgoing CO call is made by When an outgoing CO call is made by

dialing a System Speed Dialing Code dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=01 to 16) (TRLSD=00)

Compares TRLSD with TRLE Checks a call against System Toll

Restriction feature
TRLE<TRLSD

TRLE≥TRLSD*
not restricted restricted
The call is made
(Transmit the registered The call is prohibited
number to CO line) (sends reorder tone)

* In this case, “Local Trunk Dial Access restriction” and “Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access restriction” assigned in Class of Service are disregarded.

5-A-8
2.03 Last Number Redial (LNR) 2.04 Pickup Dialing
Description Description
Automatically saves the last number dialed from Pickup Dialing allows SLT telephone users to
an extension and allows the user to make the make calls automatically by simply lifting the
outgoing CO call again by simply dialing the handset.
feature number for “Redial.”
To program the desired number for this feature,
Programming dial the feature number for “Pickup Dialing
Reference
Programming.”
System Programming To activate this feature, dial the feature number
VT Dumb
for “Pickup Dialing Set.”
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 To cancel this feature, dial the feature number for
(03/11)”, “Pickup Dialing Cancel.”
Redial
This feature works only when an extension user
goes off-hook from on-hook status. Period from
Conditions
off-hook to Pickup Dialing is assigned in
Up to 32 digits except the feature number for “System-System Timer”, Pickup Dial Waiting.
selecting a CO line can be memorized as the last
dialed number. Programming
Reference
“ ,” “#,” “PAUSE,” or “SECRET” are counted as System Programming
VT Dumb
one digit respectively.
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Pickup Dial Waiting
The memorized telephone number is replaced
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00
automatically by a new one every time you make
(06/11)”,
a new outgoing CO call and even one digit is Pickup Dialing Programming
sent to a CO line. That is, dialing a feature Pickup Dialing Set
number for selecting a CO line only does not Pickup Dialing Cancel
renew the memorized number.

Operation Conditions
Executing LNR It is available to override this feature temporarily
1. Lift the handset. by dialing another telephone number before
“System-System Timer”, Pickup Dial Waiting
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. timer expires.

This feature does not function when a call is

2. Dial the feature number for
Redial “ 3” (default).
arriving or the user has a call on Consultation
Hold.
UP to 32 digits can be stored as a telephone
number including “0 through 9,” and “ .”
To store “PAUSE,” use “ .”

5-A-9
(70695)
Operation
Storing the telephone number for Pickup Dialing Executing Pickup Dialing

1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for “Pickup 2. Wait until the time preprogrammed
Dialing Programming.” in “System-System Timer”, Pickup
Dial Waiting is over.

• The system sends the stored

3. Dial the telephone number that telephone number automatically.
you want to store.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or Canceling Pickup Dialing temporarily

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
1. Lift the handset.

4. Replace the handset. • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial a telephone number before

the time preprogrammed in
Setting or canceling Pickup Dialing “System-System Timer”, Pickup
Dial Waiting is over.
1. Lift the handset.
• The system sends the dialed
telephone number.

2-1 Setting : Dial the feature number

for “Pickup Dialing Set.”

2-2 Canceling : Dial the feature

number for “Pickup
Dialing Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-A-10
3.00 Making Internal Calls
3.01 Inter Office Calling
Description Operation
Inter Office Calling allows the extension user to 1. Lift the handset.
call another extension user within the system by
dialing the directory number of extensions (three
or four digits).

Programming 2. Dial the directory number of the

None other extension.

Conditions • You hear ringback tone.

• A directory number consists of
If Tenant Service is employed, Inter Office Calling three or four digits from 0 to 9.
to the extension users in the other tenant (inter-
tenant calling) can be enabled by programming. 3. When the other extension
Refer to Section 3-B-4.00 “Tenant Service” for answers, start conversation.
further information.

4. After concluding conversation,

replace the handset.

5-A-11
4.00 Automatic Callback
4.01 Automatic Callback-Trunk
Description Operation
When no idle CO line is available after dialing a Setting Automatic Callback-Trunk
feature number for selecting a CO line and the
telephone number of an outside party, the caller 1. Lift the handset.
hears special busy tone, if this feature is
assigned. • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

On-hook while hearing the special busy tone

calls back the caller as soon as a CO line 2. Dial the feature number for
becomes idle: call-back ringing. Off-hook selecting a CO line.
catches the CO line automatically, and sends the
last dialed telephone number to the CO line. • You hear dial tone 1.

Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing 3. Dial the telephone number of the
cancels this feature. outside party.
Also no answer in four ringing tones (within 10
seconds) after the start of callback ringing • You hear busy tone 3.
cancels this feature.

To execute this feature, assign “Extension- 4. Replace the handset

Station”, Automatic Callback-Trunk to “Yes” on an
extension user basis.

Programming
Reference
(Supplement)
System Programming
VT Dumb The following four feature numbers are available
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 for selecting a CO line:
Automatic Callback-Trunk
• ARS/Local CO Line Access
• Trunk Group 01-08 Access
Conditions • Trunk Group 09-16 Access
• Trunk Group 17-24 Access (Virtual Trunk
Multiple extensions are able to set this function to
Group — ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
one or more CO lines at the same time.
A maximum of 64 Automatic Callback-Trunk can
Answering callback ringing
be active in the system.
As soon as a CO line in the specified trunk group
If 64 extensions already set this function to one
becomes idle, callback ringing starts.
or more CO lines, another caller's attempt to
execute this setting is rejected by normal busy
1. Lift the handset.
tone, not by special busy tone.
• The last dialed number is sent
Even if Call Forwarding-No Answer or Do Not
to the line automatically and
Disturb is assigned on the extension, the
calling the other party starts.
extension user can set Automatic Callback-
Trunk: callback ringing starts on the extension.

Automatic Callback-Trunk cannot be set by the

extension which has a call on Consultation Hold.

5-A-12
(60395)
4.02 Automatic Callback-Station
Description Operation
If busy tone is heard when calling an extension, Setting Automatic Callback-Station
dialing “6” and hanging up causes Automatic 1. Lift the handset.
Callback to the caller as soon as the called party
concludes conversation. • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
When callback ringing for the caller starts,
answering by off-hook offers calling the other 2. Dial the directory number of the
party automatically. other extension.
Off-hook prior to the start of callback ringing • You hear busy tone 1 or 2.
cancels this function.
Also no answer during four ring tones after the
start of callback ringing cancels this function. 3. Dial “6.”
Programming • You hear confirmation tone 2,
None then reorder tone.

Conditions 4. Replace the handset.

Up to four extensions are able to assign this
function to one extension at the same time.
The fifth extension attempting to set this function
is rejected by reorder tone.
Answering callback ringing
If you do not dial “6” within 10 seconds after As soon as the other party concludes the
hearing busy tone, you hear reorder tone and conversation, callback ringing starts.
cannot execute this feature.
1. Lift the handset .
Even if Call Forwarding-No Answer or Do Not
Disturb is assigned to the extension, the • You hear ringback tone.
extension user can set Automatic Callback- Calling the other extension
Station: callback starts on the extension. starts.

Automatic Callback-Station cannot be set by the

extension which has a call on consultation hold.

5-A-13
5.00 Executive Busy Override
Description Operation
Executive Busy Override allows an extension 1. Lift the handset.
user to intrude on a busy line, and then a 3-party
conversation is established. This feature is • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
accessed by dialing “1” while hearing busy tone.

To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class of 2. Dial the directory number of the
Service”, Executive Busy Override to “Yes,” at other extension.
overriding extension.
• You hear busy tone 1 or 2.
Setting can be made by system programming
“System-Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-
in to determine whether the overriding tone is be 3. Dial “1.”
sent or not when entering into a three-person
conversation. • After you hear confirmation
tone 3, start a three party
Programming conversation.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Executive Busy Override

Conditions
Executive Busy Override does not function when
the other party is in the following status.

• Three-party conversation status

• OHCA conversation status
• ICM conversation status
• Private CO conversation status

Executive Busy Override does not function if any

of two parties in conversation has set the
following.

• Executive Busy Override Deny

(Refer to Section 4-D-5.00.)
• Data Line Security
(Refer to Section 4-I-6.00.)

If you do not dial “1” within 10 seconds after

hearing busy tone, you cannot execute this
function.

5-A-14
6.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Override
Description Operation
Do Not Disturb Override allows an extension to 1. Lift the handset.
call another extension which has set Do Not
Disturb. • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides
calling the extension.
Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb 2. Dial the directory number of the
(DND)” for further information about DND feature. other extension.

To activate this function, assign “System-Class of • If the other extension sets DND
Service”, Do Not Disturb Override to “Yes” at (Do Not Disturb), you hear
overriding extension. DND tone.

Programming 3. Dial “1.”

Reference
System Programming • You hear ringback tone.
VT Dumb
• Calling the other party starts.
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Do Not Disturb Override

Conditions
Make sure to dial “1” within 10 seconds after
hearing DND tone to execute Do Not Disturb
Override.

When dialing “1,” if the other extension is busy,

the caller hears busy tone. In this case, it is
possible to assign Automatic Callback-
Station.For Automatic Callback-Station, refer to
Section 5-A-4.02 “Automatic Callback-Station.”

If “System-Class of Service,” Do Not Disturb

Override is set to “No,” the caller hears reorder
tone after dialing “1” and cannot call the other
party.

5-A-15
7.00 Walking COS (Class of
Service)
Description 4. Dial the extension number of
your own station.
Allows an extension user to call an outside party
from another extension preset to a lower COS
• You hear confirmation tone 2.
(Class of Service) by using higher COS of his or
her own extension temporarily.
5. Call an outside party by using
COS of your own station.
When an outgoing CO call is finished, COS
grade of the employed extension returns to the
original grade automatically.
Canceling Walking COS
Dialing a Walking COS Password (four digits) is
required to execute this feature. One call to an outside party after setting Walking
COS cancels this function automatically.
Programming
It is also possible to cancel Walking COS without
Reference
System Programming making outgoing CO calls as follows:
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-5.00 1. Lift the handset.

Walking COS Password
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Walking COS Password
(Tenant 2)
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
(07/11)”, 2. Dial the feature number for
Walking COS Set Walking COS Cancel “#7”
Walking COS Cancel (default).

• You hear confirmation tone 2.

Conditions • COS returns to the original
If tenant service is employed, each tenant can grade.
have its own walking COS Password.
Operation
Setting Walking COS
From another telephone,

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

Walking COS Set “ 7” (default).

3. Dial the four-digit Walking COS

Password.

5-A-16
(70695)
8.00 Operator Call
Description Operation
Allows the extension users to call the operator by Calling an operator
dialing the feature number for “Operator Call
(General)” or “Operator Call (Specific).” 1. Lift the handset.

Up to two operators are assignable for the whole

system. If Tenant Service is available, two
operators are assignable for each tenant, that
makes four operators available for the whole 2. Calling an operator without
system. specifying
1) Dial the feature number for
If two operators are assigned in the system, or in Operator Call (General) “0”
a tenant (if tenant Service is employed), (default).
extension users can specify the operator (in the
same tenant) by dialing the feature number for Calling an operator by specifying
“Operator Call (Specific).” 1) Dial the feature number for
“Operator Call (Specific).”
Programming 2) Dial “1” to specify operator 1.
Reference
Dial “2” to specify operator 2.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00

(02/11)”,
Operator Call (General)
Operator Call (Specific)

Conditions
When calling an operator by dialing the feature
number for “Operator Call (General),” the
operator is selected according to the type of the
operator's stations as shown below:

Type of Station Operator

Operator 1 Operator 2 Selected
Operator 1 or
ATT ATT Operator 2
ATT EXT Operator 1 only
EXT EXT Operator 1 only
ATT — Operator 1 only
EXT — Operator 1 only

When no operators are assigned, a user hears

reorder tone during executing Operator Call.
For the assignment of operators, refer to Section
3-B-5.00 “Operator.”

5-A-17
(70695)
B. Receiving Features

1.00 Call Pickup

1.01 Dial Call Pickup
Description If extension users attempt to pick up the those
calls, reorder tone sounds after dialing the
Dial Call Pickup allows an extension user to
feature number for “Dial Call Pickup.”
answer the call that is ringing at another
telephone in the same call pickup group by
Operation
dialing the feature number for “Dial Call Pickup.”
Answering a call using Dial Call Pickup
An extension user can be assigned to only one
1. Lift the handset.
call pickup group.
Up to 32 call pickup groups are assignable in the
whole system.

For further information about call pickup group,

2. Dial the feature number for Dial
refer to Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup Group.”
Call Pickup “47” (default).
Programming
• After you hear confirmation
Reference tone 3, you can answer the call
System Programming
VT Dumb arriving at another telephone in
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 the same call pickup group.
(03/11)”,
Dial Call Pickup
3. Start conversation.

Conditions
It is possible to execute this function after holding
the current call.
Note:
An extension user who has Do Not Disturb • Confirmation tone 3 for Call Pickup can be
assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
extension. C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls:
<1> A call ringing at an extension outside of the
same call pickup group
<2> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 5-B-1.03 “Call Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
<3> A call ringing on PCO button of PITS
telephone
<4> A call ringing on ICM button of PITS
telephone
<5> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)

5-B-1
(70695)
1.02 Directed Call Pickup
Description Operation
Directed Call Pickup allows any extension user to Answering a call ringing at extension in the
answer the call ringing at extension in any call different call pickup group.
pickup group by dialing the feature number for 1. Lift the handset.
“Directed Call Pickup,” and the directory number
of ringing extension.

Programming
Reference 2. Dial the feature number for
System Programming Directed Call Pickup “48”
VT Dumb
(default).
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Directed Call Pickup

3. Dial the directory number of the

ringing extension.
Conditions
It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup • You hear confirmation tone 3.
after holding the current call. • Talk to the caller.

An extension user who has Do Not Disturb

assigned can answer a call that is ringing at other 4. Start conversation.
extensions.

This feature is not available to answer the

following calls:
<1> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial Note:
Call Pickup Deny is set • Confirmation tone 3 for Call Pickup can be
(Refer to Section 5-B-1.03 “Call Pickup eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
Deny” for further information.) C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
<2> A call ringing on PCO button of PITS
telephone
<3> A call ringing on ICM button of PITS
telephone
<4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)

If the extension users attempt to pick up the

above mentioned call, reorder tone sounds after
dialing the feature number for “Directed Call
Pickup.”

5-B-2
(70695)
1.03 Call Pickup Deny
Description Operation
Call Pickup Deny allows an extension user to Setting Call Pickup Deny
prohibit the other extension users from picking up 1. Lift the handset.
calls ringing at his or her extension by a call
pickup feature (Both Dial Call Pickup and
Directed Call Pickup).

To assign or cancel this function, dial the feature 2. Dial the feature number for Dial
number for “Dial Call Pickup Deny Set” or “Dial
Call Pickup Deny Set “61 ”
Call Pickup Deny Cancel.”
(default).
Programming
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Reference 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 3. Replace the handset.

(05/11)”,
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel

Canceling Call Pickup Deny

Conditions 1. Lift the handset
Even if an extension user has Call Pickup Deny
assignment, he or she can execute Dial Call
Pickup or Directed Call Pickup feature for calls
ringing at other extensions.
2. Dial the feature number for Dial
Call Pickup Deny Cancel “61#”
(default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-3
(70695)
2.00 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day
Service
Description
Incoming CO calls programmed for TAFAS will
ring the external pager and any extension user in
the system can answer the calls by dialing the
feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2”
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2).
To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk
Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
To utilize the external pager, assign “System-
Operation”, External Paging 1, 2” to “Yes.”
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2.
Conditions
If tenant service is employed :
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
Tenant.
Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.
Operation
Answering incoming CO calls programmed for
TAFAS
An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.
1. Lift the handset.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to 2-1 If a call is ringing at external
section 5-G-1.01 “Universal Night Answer (UNA).” pager 1: Dial the feature
number for Night Answer 1 “45”
Programming (default).
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 2-2 If a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 number for Night Answer 2
External Paging 1, 2 “46” (default).
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
“Group-Trunk-Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 3. Start conversation.
Incoming Mode (Day)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Trunk Group
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tenant Note:
• Confirmation tone 3 for TAFAS can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).

5-B-4
(70695)
3.00 Executive Busy Override
Deny
Description Operation
Allows the extension user to prohibit other Assigning Executive Busy Override Deny
extensions from intruding on the current call 1. Lift the handset.
using Executive Busy Override feature.
If this feature is assigned to the extension,
another extension's attempt to execute Executive
Busy Override is rejected with busy tone.
Refer to Section 5-A-5.00 “Executive Busy 2. Dial the feature number for Busy
Override” for further information.
Override Deny Set “64 ”
(default).
To assign or cancel this feature, dial the feature
number for “Busy Override Deny Set” or “Busy
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Override Deny Cancel.”
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
System programming is required to assign this
3. Replace the handset.
feature.
Assign “System-Class of Service”, Executive
Busy Override Deny to “Yes.”

Programming Canceling Executive Busy Override Deny

Reference 1. Lift the handset.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Executive Busy Override
Deny
“System-Numbering Plan
(05/11)”,
Busy Override Deny Set
Busy Override Deny Cancel
Conditions
None
9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 2. Dial the feature number for Busy
Override Deny Cancel “64#”
(default).
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Replace the handset.

5-B-5
(70695)
4.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description (5) DND Override
“Do Not Disturb Override” allows extension
Do Not Disturb allows an extension user to
users to override “Do Not Disturb” feature
appear busy to all incoming calls (intercom,
assigned on the called extension user.
extension and outside calls).
Refer to Section 5-A-6.00 “Do Not Disturb
Override” for further information.
To utilize this feature, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb to “Yes”
beforehand by system programming.
Operation
This feature can be assigned and canceled by
dialing the feature number “Do Not Disturb Set” Setting Do Not Disturb
and “Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
1. Lift the handset.
Programming
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 2. Dial the feature number for Do
Call Forwarding/Do Not Not Disturb Set “ 1” (default).
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
(05/11)”, 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Do Not Disturb Set
Call Forwarding/Do Not
3. Replace the handset.
Disturb Cancel

Conditions
(1) IRNA – Automatically Canceling Do Not Disturb
If a call via DISA/DID is directed to an 1. Lift the handset.
extension in the DND mode, it will be
automatically redirected to another extension • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
(including VPS extension) or an Attendant
Console assigned as the IRNA destination.
Refer to Section 3-F-5.00 “Intercept Routing 2. Dial the feature number for Call
– No Answer (IRNA) for further information. Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
(2) Making Calls Cancel “##0” (default).
An extension in the DND mode can still be
used to make calls and access any other • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
features available to that extension. 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
(3) Answering Calls
An extension in the DND mode is available: 3. Replace the handset.

• To answer a call ringing at another

extension by “Call Pickup” feature.
Refer to Section 5-B-1.00 “Call Pickup” for
further information.
(4) FWD/DND
Setting DND feature cancels any Call
Forwarding feature pre-assigned on the
extension and vice versa.
Refer to Section 5-D-2.00 “Call Forwarding
(FWD)” for further information.
5-B-6
(70695)
(Supplement)
The table below shows whether an extension which has DND assigned rings
or not and the other extensions which has the extension's directory number
assigned (PITS) rings or not and how their SDN indicators light, when the
extension setting DND receives a call.

Type of call arriving at Other extensions Extension which Extension which has
setting extension has SDN assigned has DND assigned SDN assigned (SDN)
or not (PDN)
Extension call No No ring ☛1

Yes No ring Red 240 wink

Ring

Attendant Console call No No ring ☛1

Yes No ring Red 240 wink

Ring

DIL (1:N) call No

No ring
Yes Lights on in red
No ring

DIL (1:1) call No Ring

Yes No ring Red 240 wink

Ring

DID call No

No ring
Yes Indicator off
No ring

DISA call No
No ring
Yes Indicator off
No ring

Other calls No ring ☛1

☛1 DND tone is sent to the caller.

5-B-7
(30393)
5.00 Call Waiting
Description Operation
Call waiting tone to a busy extension indicates Setting Call Waiting
that another call (extension or outside) is waiting.
1. Lift the handset.
To set or cancel Call Waiting feature, dial the
feature number for “Call Waiting Set” or “Call
Waiting Cancel.”
2. Dial the feature number for Call
Programming
Waiting Set “62 ” (default).
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 2, and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
(05/11)”,
Call Waiting Set 3. Replace the handset.
Call Waiting Cancel

Conditions
Call waiting tone is sent in the following mode: Canceling Call Waiting
1. Lift the handset.

15 secs

2. Dial the feature number for Call

Waiting Cancel “62#” (default).

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2, and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-8
(70695)
Operation Talking to the new party by holding the current
party
Answering Call Waiting
1. Press the switchhook for
A call from another extension or outside party
approximately one half second
arrives during a conversation.
and release.
• You hear call waiting tone.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Talking to the new party by disconnecting the
current call
2. Dial the feature number for “Hold”
1. Replace the handset to
to hold the current party.
disconnect the current call.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
• Your telephone set rings.
then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3. Replace the handset.

2. Lift the handset.
• Your telephone set rings.
• Talk to the new party.

4. Lift the handset.

• Talk to the new caller.

• To conclude the new
conversation and return to the
held party again, replace the
handset and lift the handset
again, then dial the feature
number for “Hold Retrieve.”

(Supplement)
See Section 5-C-1.00 “Hold” for further information
about Hold.

5-B-9
6.00 Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)-Log Out
Description Operation
UCD group members may leave the group Setting UCD Log Out (Leaving a UCD group)
temporarily by dialing the feature number for
1. Lift the handset.
“UCD Log Out” to avoid UCD calls being sent to
their extensions.
• You hear dial tone 4.
Refer to Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-without OGM” and Section
2. Dial the feature number for UCD
3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with
Log Out “#0” (default).
OGM” for further information about UCD call.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Programming
2.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 3. Replace the handset.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00
(09/11)”,
UCD Log In
UCD Log Out
Canceling UCD Log Out (Returning to a UCD
group)
Conditions
1. Lift the handset.
When an extension of the UCD group set for
Log Out goes off-hook, dial tone 4 below can be • You hear dial tone 4.
heard.

(second) 0 1 2 3 4 5 2. Dial the feature number for UCD

Log In “ 0” (default).

3. Replace the handset.

5-B-10
(70695)
C. Holding Features

1.00 Hold
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to hold the current call Placing a call on hold.
and either make or answer another call 1. Press the switchhook for
(extension or outside). approximately one half second
and release it.
To hold a call, dial the feature number for “Hold.”
To retrieve a held call, dial the feature number for • The other party is held
“Hold Retrieve.” temporarily.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
Programming and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 2. Dial the feature number for Hold
“51” (default).
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Hold • The other party is placed on
Hold Retrieve hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Conditions
Retrieving a held call
SLT telephone user cannot hold the multiple calls
at a time. So if the SLT telephone users attempt 1. Lift the handset.
to hold another call while holding a current call,
reorder tone is heard. If SDN button for SLT • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
telephone user is busy, the SLT telephone users
cannot hold a call even though no call is held by
SLT. 2. Dial the feature number for Hold
Retrieve “52” (default).

The extension users can not hold the following • You hear confirmation tone 3
calls. and a held call is retrieved.
• A call with Attendant Console
• A call with Doorphone
3. Start conversation again.
If a held call has not been answered more than a
pre-assigned time, a warning tone may sound at
extension which placed a call on hold.
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”
for further information.

If a held call is not answered more than 30

minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for further information.

5-C-1
(70695)
2.00 Consultation Hold
Description Operation
Allows the extension user to hold the current call Placing a call on Consultation Hold
temporarily on purpose to transfer it or establish
1. Press the switchhook for
a conference. Other extensions cannot retrieve
approximately one half second
the call during Consultation Hold.
and release.
Programming
• The call is placed on
None Consultation Hold, and you
hear confirmation tone 2 then
Conditions dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• You can call another party.
The extension users can not place the following
calls on consultation hold.
Retrieving a call on Consultation Hold
• A call with Attendant Console
You have placed a call on Consultation Hold and
• A call with Doorphone
are not in conversation.
Consultation Hold Recall tone sound immediately 1. Press the switchhook for
if the extension user replaces the handset while approximately one half second
having a call on consultation hold. and release.

Consultation Hold Recall tone sounds in the • The call is retrieved and you
same way as Held Call Reminder. can talk to the party.

If a held call is not answered more than 30

minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

When you have a call on Consultation Hold and

are talking to another party, pressing the
switchhook for approximately one half second
and releasing it enables you to have conference
if a conference trunk is available. If there is no
conference trunk available, the party in
conversation is placed on Consultation Hold and
you can talk to the retrieved party.
For further information about conference, refer to
Section 5-E-1.00 “Conference.”

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for further information.

5-C-2
3.00 Call Hold Retrieve-Station
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to talk to the other party 1. Lift the handset.
by retrieving a call held by another extension.
This function is performed by dialing the feature
number for “Hold Extension Retrieve” and
extension number on which a call is placed on
hold (directory number: three or four digits). 2. Dial the feature number for Hold
Extension Retrieve “49” (default).
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
3. Dial the directory number of the
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 holding extension: three or four
(03/11)”, digits.
Hold Extension Retrieve
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
Conditions 4. Start conversation with the
Even if the other extension has held multiple other party.
calls, there is no preferential order for retrieving
calls.

In case of a failure to retrieve a call (the other

extension holds no call), reorder tone is returned.

The following calls cannot be retrieved from other

extensions.
• A call held on PCO button
• A call placed on Exclusive Hold
• A call place on Consultation Hold

5-C-3
(70695)
4.00 Call Park
4.01 Call Park-System
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to hold a call (both Parking a call to the system parking area
extension and outside) into a parking area
1. Press the switchhook for
common to the system.
approximately one half second
The parked call can be retrieved from any
and release.
extension in the system.
Call Park can be used whenever an extension
• The other party is placed on
user engaged on a call needs to go elsewhere,
Consultation Hold. You hear
and wishes to complete the call from another
confirmation tone 2 and then
extension.
dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Call Park feature is also convenient to be used in
2. Dial the feature number for Cal
combination with paging feature since any
Park-System “53” (default).
extension user can retrieve a parked call after
being paged.

20 parking areas are available common to the

3. Dial the parking area number in
system.
two digits: 01 to 20.
To execute Call Park-System, dial the feature
• When you succeed in Call Park-
number for “Call Park-System.”
System, you hear confirmation
To retrieve a call parked in the system parking
tone 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3
area, dial the feature number for “Call Park
or 4.
Retrieve-System.”
• If you fail in Call Park-System
(another call is already parked
Programming
in the specified parking area),
Reference you hear busy tone 1 or 2.
System Programming
VT Dumb • In this case, dialing another
“System-Tenant”,
parking area number (01 to 20)
9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Call Park Boundary allows you to try a new call park
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00 destination.
(04/11)”, • To talk to the party placed on
Call Park-System Consultation Hold again while
Call Park Retrieve-System hearing busy tone, follow the
same procedures as retrieving
Consultation Hold. Refer to
Conditions Section 5-C-2.00 “Consultation
If Tenant Service is employed, 20 parking areas Hold.”
can be split between two tenants in “System-
Tenant”, Call Park Boundary. 4. Replace the handset.

A parked call will be disconnected automatically

by the system, if it is not answered within 30
minutes.

Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if

available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”

5-C-4
(70695)

Retrieving a call parked in the system parking
area
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number for Call
Park Retrieve-System “54”
(default).
3. Dial the parking area number: 01
to 20.
• When you succeed in retrieving
the parked call, you hear
confirmation tone 2. Start
conversation with the retrieved
party.
• If you fail, you hear reorder
tone.
Note:
• Confirmation tone 2 for Call Park can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
5-C-5
(70695)
4.02 Call Park-Station
Description
Allows an extension user to hold a call (both
extension and outside) into the parking area
dedicated to each extension.
The parked call can be retrieved from any
extension in the system.
Call Park feature can be used whenever an
extension user engaged on a call needs to go
elsewhere, and wishes to complete the call from
another extension.
Call Park feature is also convenient to be used in
combination with paging feature since any
extension user can retrieve a parked call after
being paged.
Any extension user can park only one call to the
parking area dedicated to each extension.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Park-Station
Call Park Retrieve-Station
Conditions
A parked call will be disconnected automatically
by the system, if it is not answered within 30
minutes.
Music on Hold will be sent to the held party if
available. For sending Music on Hold, prior
assignment is necessary. Refer to Section
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”
Operation
Executing Call Park-Station
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release it.
• The current call is placed on
Consultation Hold. You hear
confirmation tone 2 and then
dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Park-Station.”
• When you succeed in Call
Park-Station, you hear
confirmation tone 2 and then
dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• When you cannot park a call
(another call is already
parked), you hear busy tone 1
or 2.
• To talk to the party placed on
Consultation Hold again while
hearing busy tone 1 or 2, follow
the same procedures as
retrieving Consultation Hold.
Refer to Section 5-C-2.00
“Consultation Hold.”
3. Replace the handset.
5-C-6
(70695)
Retrieving Call Park-Station
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Park Retrieve-Station.”
3. Dial the directory number of the
parking extension : three or four
digits.
• When you succeed in retrieving
Call Park-Station, you hear
confirmation tone 2. Then start
conversation with the retrieved
party.
• If no call is parked at the
extension, you hear reorder
tone.
Note:
• Confirmation tone 2 for Call Park can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
D. Transferring Features

1.00 Call Transfer

Description 1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to
Transfer is convenient to redirect a call to another Station
place. Attendant assistance is not required and Description
the caller does not have to redial.
Allows an extension user to transfer calls (both
SLT Transfer Operation extension and outside calls) to another extension
without announcement.
When SLT Transfer Operation mode is set to
“Mode 2”, an SLT user can transfer a call to an Programming
outside party.
Reference
System Programming
Reference VT Dumb

• Section 5-D-1.06 “Screened call Transfer to “World Select 3 (WS3)” — 10-C-53.00

Trunk” SLT Transfer Operation
• Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3”
Conditions
If transferred call is not answered by the
destination party, it will receive one of the
following treatments.

Status of Destination Operation Resulted

Able to receive the Performs the call to the destination for
call a specific period. In case of no
(sending ringback answer, interrupts ringing and starts
tone) ringing to the originator of transfer. ☛1
For detail, refer to Section 3-E-3.00
“Transfer Recall.”
Busy As soon as the destination goes on-
(sending busy tone) hook, starts calling the destination
(Camp-on Transfer).
If the destination party remains busy or
does not answer the call within a
specified period, starts calling back the
originator of transfer. ☛1
For detail, refer to Section 3-E-3.00
“Transfer Recall.”
Setting Do Not Unscreened Call Transfer to extension
Disturb is ineffective.
(sending DND tone) Transferred party is treated simply as a
party placed on Consultation Hold.
Hanging up causes the Consultation
Hold Recall to the originator of transfer.

☛1 When the originator of transfer answers the call,

conversation between the originator and the
transferred party starts.

The extension users can not transfer the

following calls.
• A call with Attendant Console
• A call with Doorphone

5-D-1
(70695)
If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the Operation -2 (Mode 2)
transferring operation until the destination party
While having a conversation;
answers, the system sends Music on Hold (See
Section 3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold,”) to the party
1. Press the switchhook for
while he or she is being transferred.
approximately one half second
and release it.
Instead of Music on Hold, Ringback Tone can be
sent to the caller while he or she is being
• The other party is placed on
transferred (See Section 10-C-53.00 “World
Consultation Hold.
Select 3 (WS3)”).
• You hear confirmation tone 2
Operation -1 (Mode 1) and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

While having a conversation; 2. Dial the feature number for

1. Press the switchhook for Transfer “58” (default).
approximately one half second
and release it. • You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone.
• The other party is placed on
Consultation Hold. 3. Dial the directory number of the
• You hear confirmation tone 2 destination: there or four digits.
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• You hear ringback tone.
2. Dial the directory number of the • Ringing starts at the
destination: three or four digits. destination extension.

• You hear ringback tone. 4. Replace the handset.

• Ringback starts at the
destination extention.

3. Replace the handset.

Note:
• If you want to return to the held party, press the
switchhook for approximately one half second
and release it before the destination extension
answers.
Note:
• It the feature number for “Transfer” is not dialed
at step 2, the call will be disconnected after
replacing the handset.
• If you want to return to the held party at step 3
above, press the switchhook for approximately
one half second and release it before the
destination extension answers.

5-D-1-1
(70695)
1.02 Screened Call Transfer to Station
Description
4. Replace the handset.
Allows an extension user to transfer the calls
(both extension and outside calls) to another • The call is transferred to the
extension with announcement. destination.
Programming Note:
If you want to return to the held party, press the
Reference
System Programming switchhook for approximately one half second
VT Dumb
and release before the destination extension
"World Select 3(WS3)" — 10-C-53.00 answers.
SLT Transfer Operation
Operation - 2 (Mode 2)
Conditions While having a conversation;
The extension user cannot transfer the following
1. Press the switchhook for
calls.
approximately one half second
• A call with Attendant Console and release it.
• A call with Doorphone
• The other party is placed on
If Music on Hold is assigned, Music on Hold is Consultation Hold.
sent to the transferred party since the party starts • You hear confirmation tone 2
being transferred until he starts conversation with and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
the destination party.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00 2. Dial the feature number for
“Music on Hold.” Transfer "58" (Default).
• You hear confirmation tone 2
The user can execute this function even after and then dial tone.
holding another party.
3. Dial the directory number of the
Operation - 1 (Mode 1) destination: there or four digits.
While having a conversation; • You hear ringback tone.

1. Press the switchhook for

approximately one half second 4. Wait for the answer and
and release it. announce.

• The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the directory number of the
destination: three or four digits.
• You hear ringback tone.
3. Wait for the answer and
announce.
5. Replace the handset.
• The call is transferred to
the destination.
Note:
•If you want to return to the held party, press the
switchhook for approximately one half second
and release it before the destination extension
answers.
•If the feature number for "Transfer" is not dialed
at step 2, the call will be disconnected after
replacing the handset.

5-D-2
(70695)
1.03 Unscreened Call Transfer to
Remote
Description
2. Dial the “FDN for Remote”: three
Allows an extension user to transfer a call to the
or four digits.
remote maintenance resource. (Available with
Software Version 9.5X and above). Modem
• You hear confirmation tone 3,
answer tone is returned instantly, if it is not in use.
then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
This operation allows System Administrator to
• If the remote maintenance port
perform System Administration from Remote
is not in use, the held party
Location.
hears answer tone and can
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
start communication instantly.
Administration from a Remote Location” for
further information.
3. Replace the handset.
To transfer a call to remote maintenance
resource, “FDN for Remote” is used, which is
assigned in “System-Operation”, Remote
Directory Number.
Operation -2 (Mode 2)
See Section 3-B-3.00 “Floating Directory Number
(FDN)” for details of FDN. While having a conversation;
1. Press the switchhook for
Programming
approximately one half second
Reference and release it.
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation (2/3)”, 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00 • The other party is placed on
Remote Directory Number Consultation Hold.
"World Select 3 (WS3)" —
• You hear confirmation tone 3,
SLT Transfer Operation 10-C-53.00
then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2. Dial the feature number for

Conditions
Transfer "58" (Default).
If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends
Music on Hold to the transferred party during the • You hear confirmation tone 2
transferring operation. For details, refer to and then dial tone.
Section 3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”
3. Dial the "FDN for Remote": three
If the remote maintenance port is in use, busy or four digits.
tone is returned to the held party. Automatic
Callback does not function in this case, so the • You hear confirmation tone
caller should call again when it becomes idle. 3,then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If the remote maintenance port
Operation -1 (Mode 1) is not in use, the held party
While having a conversation; hears answer tone and can
start communication instantly.
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second 4. Replace the handset.
and release it.

• The other party is placed on

Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2,
then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

5-D-3
(70695)
1.04 Unscreened Call Transfer
— to Attendant Console
Description 1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
Allows an extension user to transfer calls (both
and release it.
extension and outside) to an Attendant Console
without announcement. • The other party is put on
Consultation Hold.
Programming
• You hear confirmation tone 2
System Programming
Reference and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
VT Dumb 2. Make a call to an Attendant
"World Select 3(WS3)" Console.
10-C-53.00
SLT Transfer Operation • You hear ringback tone.
• Calling an Attendant Console
Conditions starts.
3. Replace the handset.
1) Transfer Recall
• At an Attendant Console:
A call transferred by this feature will not ring
The call is displayed as a
back at the extension who transferred the call
transfer recall.
even if the Attendant Console does not
answer the call after the transfer recall timer Operation -2 (Mode 2)
has been elapsed.
While having a conversation;
2) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)
1. Press the switchhook for
A call transferred to an Attendant Console will
approximately one half second
not be transferred to another extension by
and release it.
IRNA feature even if the Attendant Console
does not answer the call after the IRNA timer • The other party is put on
has been elapsed. Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
3) What if all six Loop keys on the Attendant
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Console are not idle?
2. Dial the feature number for
A call is put in the call waiting queue of the
Transfer "58"(Default).
Attendant Console.
4) What if the Attendant Console is in ATT-FWD
mode?
This feature does not function. 3. Make a call to an Attendant
A call is simply put on Consultation Hold, that Console.
is, a call will ring back at the extension who • You hear ringback tone.
tries to transfer the call as soon as he or she • Calling an Attendant Console
goes on-hook. starts.
5) Music on Hold 4. Replace the handset.
If Music on Hold is available, the system • At an Attendant Console:
sends Music on Hold to the transferred party, The call is displayed as a
from the start of the transferring operation till transfer recall.
the destination party answers.
Note:
Instead of Music on Hold, Ringback Tone can
The feature numbers and DN's for making a call
be sent to the caller while he or she is being
to an Attendant Console are:
transferred (See Section 10-C-53.00 “World
Select 3 (WS3)”). • Operator Call (General)
Operation -1 (Mode 1) • Operator Call (Specific)
• FDN for General Operator Call
While having a conversation;
• DN for ATT1 and ATT2
5-D-3-1
(70695)
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer
— to a UCD Group (with OGM)
Description Operation -2 (Mode 2)
Allows an extension user to transfer an outside While having a conversation;
call to a UCD Group from 01 to 04 (with OGM
type). 1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
From version 8.XX, not only the operators but and release it.
any extension user can transfer an outside call to • The other party is put on
a UCD group (with OGM). Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Programming
Reference
2. Dial the feature number for
System Programming Transfer "58"(Default).
VT Dumb
• You hear confirmation tone 2
“Special Attended–UCD (1/2)” 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00 and then dial tone.
"World Select 3 (WS3)"
— 10-C-53.00
SLT Transfer Operation
3. Dial the FDN for UCD group (01
to 04).
Conditions • You hear confirmation tone 3
If all group members are not available to answer and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4
the call, it will be redirected to the Overflow
destination. In this case, the call will be 4. Replace the handset.
disconnected if not answered by the Overflow
destination within 60 seconds.
See page 3-D-13 for further information.

Operation -1 (Mode 1) Feature References

While having a conversation; Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)–with/without
OGM (Section 3-D-2.06)
1 Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release it.
• The other party is put on
Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

2 Dial the FDN for UCD group (01

to 04).
• You hear confirmation tone 3
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

3 Replace the handset.

5-D-3-2
(70695)
1.06 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk
Description Operation (Mode 2)
Allows an extension user to transfer calls (both While having a conversation;
extension and outside) to an outside party with
announcement. 1. Press the switchhook for
Available when “SLT Transfer Operation” is set to approximately one half second
“Mode 2”. and release it.

To execute this function, assign “System-Class of • The other party is placed on

Service”, CO Transfer mode to “Yes.” Consultation Hold.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
If outside call is transferred to another outside and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
party, CO-CO conversation mode is established
and the duration of the conversation is restricted 2. Dial the feature number for
by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit. Transfer “58” (Default).

Programming • You hear confirmation tone 2

Reference
and then dial tone.
System Programming
VT Dumb
3. Call another outside party
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
CO Transfer Mode
• You hear ringback tone from
“System-Numbering Plan (11/11)”, 9-D-6.11 10-C-10.00
the CO line.
Transfer
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
CO-CO Duration Limit
— 10-C-53.00
“World Select 3 (WS3)” 4. When the destination answers,
SLT Transfer Operation make the announcement.

Conditions
If a call from outside party is transferred to
another outside party, CO-CO conversation
mode is established. In this case, the system
uses the preset time limit for the trunk group that
the transferred party is placed on, not using the
time limit for the trunk group used to call the
destination and alarm tone is sent to parties 15
seconds before the assigned time limit, and when
time is out, both CO lines are disconnected.
The extension users can not transfer the
following calls.
• A call with Attendant Console
• A call with Doorphone
5. Replace the handset.
• The call is transferred to
the destination.
Note:
•If an extension that cannot execute this function
(by COS restriction) attempts to do this
procedure, the system sends a consultation hold
recall to the extension after step 5 and the
transfer is rejected.
•If you want to return to the held party, press the
switchhook for approximately one half second
and release it before the destination answers.

If Music on Hold is available, from the start of the
transferring operation until the destination party
answers, the system sends Music on Hold to the
transferred party.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00
“Music on Hold.”
• If CPC signal is not supplied by the Central
Office in your area, KX-T336 cannot detect the
end of CO-CO call after one party disconnects
the call. In this case, we recommend to use
tone detection feature of AGC Card (See
Section 10-C-67.00 “DISA/AGC Tone Detection
Mode (TDM)”).

5-D-3-3
(70695)
2.00 Call Forwarding (FWD)
2.01 Call Forwarding-All Calls
Description Conditions
Call Forwarding-All Calls allows extension users An extension user may have only one type of
who are away from their phones to receive Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
incoming calls (both extension and CO) to them at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
at another extension. previously assigned type is canceled.

Incoming calls can be forwarded either to
extension users, Voice Mail port, or operators
(Attendant Console or Extension).
“FDN for General Operator Call” can be used to
assign operators as the destination of Call
Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for
further information.
If the extension to which calls are to be
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.

The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
• A call from doorphone
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group
To execute Call Forwarding-All Calls, assign
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb” to “Yes.”
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-All Calls Set” and
“Call Forwarding-Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-All Calls is set to an Attendant
Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.
The following attempt will be rejected with
reorder tone.

Programming • If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot

System Programming
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
“System-Numbering Plan
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-All Call Set
“System-Numbering Plan
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
set the destination to an extension in the other
Reference tenant.
VT Dumb
• To call the other extension whose call
forwarding destination is set to his or her own
extension.
9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

5-D-4
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status Busy tone is sent from destination.

Assigned to DND DND tone is sent from destination.

PITS programming mode Busy tone is sent from destination.

Conditions except In Service ☛ Call is placed on setting extension.

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

Assigned to DND Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode Call is forwarded and kept waiting

at destination.

Conditions except In Service ☛ Call is placed on setting extension.

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status Busy tone is sent from destination

Assigned to DND Same as call reaching DND. See

Section 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

PITS programming mode Busy tone is sent from destination

Conditions except In Service ☛ Call is placed on destination.

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-5
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-All Calls Canceling Call Forwarding-All Calls
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call 2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-All Call Set.” Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

3. Dial the directory number of the 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
extension or the Voice Mail port,
or the “FDN for General Operator 3. Replace the handset.
Call” to be set as the destination:

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-6
(21292)
2.02 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook
Description Conditions
Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook provides An extension user may have only one type of
automatic call transfer to a preset destination Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
when the user's extension is busy or off-hook. at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators. If the extension to which calls are to be
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding. not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
further information. call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
The following incoming calls do not receive Call available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Forwarding treatment. Answer” feature.
• A call from doorphone
If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
• A call directed to a UCD group
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook, assign
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook is set to an Attendant
“System-Class of Service”, “Call Forwarding/Do
Console.
Not Disturb” to “Yes.”
Calls from any VM extension will not be
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
number for “Call Forwarding-Busy Set,” and
VM extension.
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
The following attempt will be rejected with
Programming
reorder tone.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb • If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 set the destination to an extension in the other
Call Forwarding/Do Not tenant.
Disturb
• To call the other extension whose call
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”, forwarding destination is set to his or her own
Call Forwarding-Busy Set extension.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”, The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
Call Forwarding/Do Not can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Disturb Cancel feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”

5-D-7
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-8
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call 2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-Busy Set.” Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

3. Dial the directory number of the 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
extension or the Voice Mail
ports,or the “FDN for General 3. Replace the handset.
Operator Call” to be set as the
destination.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-9
(21292)
2.03 Call Forwarding-No Answer
Description
Call Forwarding-No Answer provides automatic
call transfer to a preset destination if the
extension user cannot answer the call in a
determined period (that is, if the caller is not
answered while hearing ringback tone in a
specified period).
Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for
further information.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
Conditions
An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.
If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-No Answer is set to an Attendant
Console.

• A call from doorphone Calls from any VM extension will not be

• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
• A call directed to a UCD group VM extension.

To set Call Forwarding-No Answer, assign The following attempt will be rejected with
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do reorder tone.
Not Disturb” to “Yes.”
• If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature set the destination to an extension in the other
number for “Call Forwarding-No Answer Set” and tenant.
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
This feature does not function if an extension
Programming user attempts to call the other extension whose
Reference call forwarding-no answer destination is set to his
System Programming or her own extension.
VT Dumb

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00

The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Time-Out
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Call Forwarding/Do Not Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Disturb Control.”
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-No Answer
Set
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

5-D-10
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-11
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-No Answer Canceling Call Forwarding-No Answer
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call 2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding-No Answer Set.” Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

3. Dial the directory number of the 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
extension or the Voice Mail port,
or the “FDN for General Operator 3. Replace the handset.
Call” of the destination.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-12
(21292)
2.04 Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No
Answer
Description
Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer
provides automatic call transfer to a preset
destination if the user's extension is busy off-hook
or the user cannot answer the call in a determined
period (that is, if the caller is not answered while
hearing ringback tone in a specified period).
Determine the duration from the arrival of a call to
the start of Call Forwarding (period of no answer)
by “System-System Timer”, Call Forwarding-No
Answer Time-Out.
Incoming calls can be forwarded to extension
users, Voice Mail ports, or operators.
“FDN for General Operator Call” is used to assign
operators as the destination of Call Forwarding.
Refer to Section 9-D-1.01 “Operation (1/3)” for
further information.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
• A call from doorphone
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group
To set Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer,
assign “System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding
/Do Not Disturb” to “Yes.”
Conditions
An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.
If the extension to which calls are to be
forwarded itself is in a call forward mode, a call is
not forwarded furthermore. The call rings at the
first forwarded extension. In case of an outside
call, if not answered in a specified time period,
the call will be routed to another destination, if
available, based on the “Intercept Routing-No
Answer” feature.
If Tenant Service is employed and “Inter Tenant
Calling” is assigned to “Yes” by programming,
this function is ineffective for the calls from
another tenant if the destination of Call
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer is set to
an Attendant Console.
Calls from any VM extension will not be
forwarded, if forwarding destination is another
VM extension.
The following attempt will be rejected with
reorder tone.

To set and cancel this function, dial the feature • If Tenant Service is employed, the user cannot
number for “Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer” and set the destination to an extension in the other
“Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.” tenant.

This feature does not function if an extension

Programming user attempts to call the other extension whose
Reference call forwarding-no answer destination is set to his
System Programming
VT Dumb or her own extension.
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Call Forwarding-No Answer The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
Time-Out
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Disturb Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00 Control.”
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-Busy/No
Answer
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel

5-D-13
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status Call is forwarded to destination.

Busy status

Assigned to DND
Call is placed on setting extension.
PITS programming mode

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-14
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer Canceling Call Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No
Answer
1. Lift the handset.
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call

Forwarding-Busy/No Answer.” 2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

3. Dial the directory number of the • You hear confirmation tone 1 or

extension or the Voice Mail port, or 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
the “FDN for General Operator
Call” to be set as the destination. 3. Replace the handset.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-15
(21292)
2.05 Call Forwarding to Trunk
Description
Call Forwarding to Trunk allows extension users
who are away from their phones to receive
incoming calls (both CO and extension) at outside
place.
Conditions
An extension user may have only one type of
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature in effect
at any time. If a second type is assigned, the
previously assigned type is canceled.

When an incoming CO call is forwarded to the
pre-assigned outside party by this feature, CO to
CO call via this system is established. Duration
time of CO to CO call is restricted by “Group-
Trunk Group,” CO-CO Duration Limit of receiving
CO line. The system sends alarm tone to both
parties 15 seconds before the Duration Limit time
is expired, and when expired the system
disconnects both parties compulsively.
The following incoming calls do not receive Call
Forwarding treatment.
• A call from doorphone
• A call routed via DIL 1: N feature
• A call directed to a UCD group
To set Call Forwarding to Trunk, assign both
“System-Class of Service”, Call Forwarding/Do
Not Disturb and CO Forward Mode to “Yes.”
To set and cancel this function, dial the feature
number for “Call Forwarding-To Trunk” and “Call
Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel.”
The Operators (Attendant Console or Extension)
can cancel the Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
feature assigned to the extension users. Refer to
Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station Feature
Control.”
Up to 32 digits composed of “0 through 9” and
“ ” can be entered as the telephone number of
the destination. CO line access code must be
entered as the leading digit of each entry.
Note:
• If CPC signal is not supplied by the Central
Office in your area, KX-T336 cannot detect the
end of CO-CO call after one party disconnets
the call.
In this case, we recommend to use tone
detection feature of AGC Card (See Section 10-
C-67.00 “DISA/AGC Tone Detection Mode
(TDM)”).

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb
CO Forward Mode
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”,
Call Forwarding-to Trunk
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,
Call Forwarding/Do Not
Disturb Cancel
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
CO-CO Duration Limit

5-D-16
(70695)
The following table shows the results of the calls arriving at an extension setting
this function depending on the conditions of the preset destination.

Type of Call Arriving Forwarding

Condition of Destination Result
at Setting Extension Execution

Extension call Idle status Call is forwarded to external

destination.
Busy status
Call is placed on setting extension.
Conditions except In Service ☛

DIL (1:1) or DISA call Idle status Call is forwarded to external

destination.
Busy status
Call is placed on setting extension.
Conditions except In Service ☛

DID call Idle status

Busy status Call is placed on setting extension.

Conditions except In Service ☛

: Forwarding possible
: Forwarding impossible
☛ Conditions are “Out of Service,”
“Fault” and “Pre-Installed.” See
Section 14-C-2.02 “Port” for details.

5-D-17
Operation
Setting Call Forwarding to Trunk Canceling Call Forwarding to Trunk
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Call 2. Dial the feature number for “Call
Forwarding to Trunk.” Forwarding/Do Not Disturb
Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

3. Dial the feature number for 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
selecting the CO line and the
telephone number of the 3. Replace the handset.
destination and “#” in succession.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

(Supplement)
The system does not check the dialed number,
toll restriction level, and the feature number for
selecting a CO line at the time of setting this
function.

5-D-18
2.06 Call Forwarding-Follow Me Canceling “Call Forwarding-Follow Me” at the
destination extension.
Description
1. Lift the handset.
You can set a “Call Forwarding” feature from the
destination extension. This is useful if you forget
to set “Call Forwarding -All Calls” before you
leave your desk or when you move from pre-set
place to another. 2. Dial the feature number for Call
This feature can be enabled or disabled on a Forwarding-Follow Me Cancel
COS (Class of Service) basis. If enabled, an “ 8” (default).
extension user can set this feature.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Programming 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Reference
System Programming 3. Dial the directory number of your
VT Dumb
“System-Numbering plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00 extension.
(09/11)”,
Call Forwarding-Follow • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Me Set 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Call Forwarding-Follow
Me Cancel
“Call Forwarding-Follow Me — 10-C-68.00
4. Replace the handset.
(CFM)”

Note:
Conditions
You can cancel this feature at your own
Same as “Call Forwarding-All Calls “(Section 5- extension by following the same procedure as
D-2.01). canceling other forwarding features.

Operation
Setting “Call Forwarding-Follow Me” at the
destination extension
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for Call

Forwarding-Follow Me Set “
7” (default).

3. Dial the directory number of your

extension.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

4. Replace the handset.

5-D-19
(70695)
E. Conversation Features

1.00 Conference
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to add a third-party to a Establishing a conference - 1 (Default mode)
two-party conversation and make a three-party (SLT Transfer Operation is in Mode 1)
conference.
An extension user can have the following While having a two-party conversation;
combination of calls on the line: 1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
• three extensions and release it.
• one extension and two outside parties
• two extensions and one outside party • The other party is placed on
Consultation Hold.
On the TSW card, there are eight standard • You hear confirmation tone 2
conference trunks provided for this purpose. and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
By equipping the optional conference expansion
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference 2. Dial the phone number of the
trunks increases to 64. third party.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.”
3. Press the switchhook for
When two members in the conference are both approximately one half second
outside parties, two conference trunks are and release after the third party
necessary. In all other cases, one conference answers.
trunk is enough.
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
Programming • A three-party conference is
Reference now established.
System Programming
VT Dumb Establishing a conference - 2
“Configuration-System Assignment”, 9-C-1.00 10-C-1.00 (SLT Transfer Operation is in Mode 2)
TSW Additional CONF
“System-Numbering Plan (11/11)” 9-D-6.11 10-C-10.00 While having a two-party conversation;
Conference
“World Select 3 (WS)” — 10-C-53.00
1. Press the switchhook for
SLT Transfer Operation approximately one half second
and release it.

Conditions • The other party is placed on

Pressing the switchhook by the conference Consultation Hold.
originator during the conference restores a • You hear confirmation tone 2
conversation with the first party. and then a dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
This places the second party on Consultation
Hold. 2. Dial the feature number for
conference “58” (default).
Pressing the switchhook again establishes the
conference again if the conference trunk is • You hear confirmation tone 1
available. If the conference trunk is not available, and then a dial tone.
conversation with the held (second) party starts,
placing the first party on Consultation Hold. 3. Dial the phone number of the
third party.

5-E-1
(70695)
 4. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release it after the third party
answers.

• You hear confirmation tone 3.

• A three-party conference is
now established.

Note:
If the conference trunk is not available in step 3,
you cannot establish conference by pressing the
switchhook, which puts the third party on
Consultation Hold, and conversation with the
held party starts.

Concluding a conference
1. Replace the handset.

• The other two parties may

continue their conversation.
• If the other two parties are both
outside parties, they will be
disconnected.

Talking to the original party while holding the third

party
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release it.

• You hear confirmation tone.

• You can talk to the original
party.

5-E-1-1
(70695)
2.00 Doorphone
Description Operation
Up to four doorphones can be connected to the Calling from a doorphone
system. This provides conversations between
1. Press the button on the
extensions and doorphones.
doorphone.
Any extension user can call the doorphones
• You hear ping-pong tone.
within the same tenant by dialing the feature
• When the other party answers,
number for “Doorphone Call (1 to 4).” It is
start conversation.
possible to direct calls from doorphones to
specified extensions, intercom groups, pickup
Answering a doorphone call
groups or Attendant Consoles in “Extension-
Doorphone”, Doorphone Call Assignment. When your telephone set receives a doorphone
call and rings,
If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
1. Lift the handset.
each doorphone can be determined by the
system programming in “Extension- Doorphone”,
• Start conversation with the
Tenant.
caller from the doorphone.
Set the duration of the door opener in “Extension-
Calling a doorphone
Doorphone”, Open Duration. When Open
Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is 1. Lift the handset.
unavailable.

Programming
Reference
System Programming 2. After dialing the feature number
VT Dumb
for Doorphone Call (1 to 4) “40”
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 (default), dial the doorphone
(03/11)”, number : 1 to 4.
Doorphone Call (1 to 4)
“Extension-Doorphone” 9-G-3.00 10-C-27.00
• After hearing confirmation tone
3, start conversation over the
specified doorphone.
Conditions
Only conversations are available for the 3. After concluding conversation,
doorphone. The other functions such as Hold, replace the handset.
Transfer are all ineffective.

When a visitor presses the button on the

doorphone, he hears ping-pong tone twice, then Opening the door
doorphone call ringing starts at the designated
extension. During a conversation over the doorphone
No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the
doorphone call. 1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release it.

2. Dial “5.”

• The door opens for the

specified duration.

5-E-2
(70695)
3.00 External Feature Access
Description Operation
Sending a flash signal through the CO line allows Gaining access to a feature (in this case, Call
the extension user to gain access to the features Waiting)
offered by the host PBX, or to receive CENTREX
When a call arrives from another outside party
service provided by the central office, such as
while in conversation with an outside party,
Call Waiting and so on.
• You hear call waiting tone.
External Feature Access such as Call Waiting is
effective only in 1:1 conversation with an outside
1. Press the hookswitch for
party.
approximately one half second
and release it.
Programming
Reference • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

(03/11)”, 2. Dial the feature number for
External Feature Access 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 External Feature Access “50”
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, (default).
Hook Switch Flash Time
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
• The first party is held. Start
Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal
conversation with the second
party.
Conditions
Finishing the conversation with the second party
External Feature Access is ineffective when and starting the conversation with the first party
“Group-Trunk Group”, Hook Switch Flash Time is again
assigned to “None.”
1. Press the hookswitch for
The maximum dialing digits to be sent to the CO approximately one half second
line after sending the flash signal are restricted and release it.
by “Group-Trunk Group”, Max. Dial No. after EFA
Signal. • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
The longest time limit among the following
assignments determines the time limit between
dialing digits. 2. Dial the feature number for
• “System-System Timer”, External First Digit External Feature Access “50”
Time-Out. (default).
• “System-System Timer”, External Interdigit
Time-Out. • Start conversation with the first
• “System-System Timer”, Toll Restriction party.
Guard Time-Out.

5-E-3
(70695)
F. Paging Features

1.00 Paging
1.01 Paging All Extensions
Description
Paging All Extensions allows any extension user
to perform paging through the built-in speakers of
all PITS telephones that can receive paging.
The Class of Service of the user's extension
determines the extensions that can receive
paging. They are assigned to be paged by
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
Access and also if they belong to the same
tenant as the user's extension.
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for further
information about paging groups.
Conditions
Single Line telephone (SLT's) cannot be paged.
If all of the extensions assigned to be paged are
being paged by another page, busy tone is
returned to the new paging performer. If any of
the extensions is not being paged, paging is
executed.
Automatic Callback feature does not function
during paging operation.
Refer to Section 5-A-4.01 “Automatic Callback-
Trunk” for further information.

To page all extensions, dial the feature number When there is no paging group assigned to “Yes”
for “Station Paging” and “0.” in “System-Class of Service”, Station Paging
To answer paging, dial the feature number for Access within the same tenant, the performer
“Station Paging Answer.” hears reorder tone.

Programming Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-

Reference
PHONES of on-hook PITS sets.
System Programming The PITSs actuated by paging send confirmation
VT Dumb
tone and are ready to be paged.
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
Station Paging Access
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Station Paging
Station Paging Answer

5-F-1
(70695)
Operation
Performing Paging All Extensions
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and dial “0.”
• After hearing confirmation tone
3, start paging.
3. After paging, replace the handset.
Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions
During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.
• The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging” and dial “0.”

• You hear confirmation tone 3.

Answering Paging All Extensions when PITSs are
3. Start paging.
paged
1. Lift the handset.

4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.” • The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.
• After hearing confirmation tone
3, talk to the paging performer.

5-F-2
1.02 Group Paging
Description Conditions
Group Paging provides paging to a group of Single Line Telephones (SLT's) cannot be paged.
extensions specified from eight paging groups
through the built-in speakers of their PITSs. If the designated paging group is being paged by
another page, busy tone is returned to the new
The Class of Service of the user's extension paging performer.
determines the paging groups that can receive
paging. They are assigned to be paged by However, he can page within the range not
“System-Class of Service”, Station Paging overlapping the preset paging range.
Access and also if they belong to the same For instance, when paging is being done to group
tenant as the user's extension. 1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new
paging.
To execute Group Paging, dial the feature
number for “Station Paging” and paging group Automatic Callback feature does not function
specifying number. during paging operation.
To answer paging, dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.” When there is no paging group allowed to
receive paging in “System-Class of Service”,
Programming Station Paging Access, the performer hears
Reference
reorder tone.
System Programming
VT Dumb
Paging is broadcast over idle speakers in SP-
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 PHONEs of on-hook PITS sets.
Station Paging Access The PITSs actuated by paging send confirmation
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
tone and then are ready to be paged.
(03/11)”,
Station Paging
Station Paging Answer

5-F-3
(70695)
Operation
Performing Group Paging Transferring a call using Group Paging
1. Lift the handset. During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging.”
• The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
3. Dial the paging group number : 1
2. Dial the feature number for
to 8.
“Station Paging” and paging
group number : 1 to 8.
• After hearing confirmation tone
3, start paging.
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
4. After paging, replace the handset.
3. Start paging.

Answering Group Paging when PITSs are paged

1. Lift the handset. 4. When an extension answers,
replace the handset.

• The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.
2. Dial the feature number for
“Station Paging Answer.”

• After hearing confirmation tone

3, talk to the paging performer.

5-F-4
1.03 Paging External Pagers
Description Conditions
Allows the extension users to perform paging If the designated pager is being used, busy tone
through the external pager(s) belonging to the is returned to the paging performer.
same tenant.
If two external pagers are available in the same If either or both of the pagers in a tenant are
tenant, two methods are available: one is to page being used, it is not possible to page using two
by designating one external pager, and the other pagers. Busy tone is returned to the user.
is to page using two pagers.
If external pagers are not assigned by system
To execute this function, dial the feature number programming, reorder tone sounds when paging.
for “External Pager” and to answer the paging,
dial the feature number for “External Paging The followings show the paging priorities:
Answer.”
(1)Paging External Pager from an Attendant
Even if an external pager is connected to the Console
system, Paging External Pagers does not (2)TAFAS (Trunk Answer from Any Station )
operate unless “System-Operation”, External (Refer to Section 5-B-2.00 “Trunk Answer
Paging 1, 2 is assigned to “Yes”. From Any Station (TAFAS)–Day Service.” )
(3)Paging External Pagers from an extension
If Tenant Service is available, it is possible to (this function)
attach each external pager to a tenant in “Trunk- (4)BGM through External Pager
Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-Tenant.
If a lower priority page is active, and a higher
Confirmation tone from external pagers is priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower
selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, one: for instance, if Paging External Pager is
External Pager-Tone. overridden by another higher priority, reorder
tone is returned to the performer of Paging
Programming External Pager. If TAFAS signal or BGM is
Reference overridden by another higher priority, it is
System Programming interrupted and starts again when the higher
VT Dumb
priority is finished.
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
External Paging 1, 2
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
External Paging
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
External Paging
External Paging Answer
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tenant
External Pager-Tone

5-F-5
(70695)
Operation
Performing Paging External Pagers
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number for
“External Paging.”
3. Dial the number for specifying an
external pager or pagers: 0, 1 or
2.
0: specifies external pagers 1
and 2
1: specifies external pager 1
2: specifies external pager 2
• After you hear confirmation tone
3, start paging through the
external pager(s).
Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers
During a conversation with an extension or an
outside party
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.
• The other party is placed on
hold.
You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and external
pager specifying number : 0, 1
or 2.
0: specifies external pagers 1
and 2
1: specifies external pager 1
2: specifies external pager 2
• You hear confirmation tone 3.

4. After paging, replace the 3. Start paging.

handset.

Answering during external paging 4. When an extension answers,

replace the handset.
1. Lift the handset.
• The held party and the paged
extension start conversation.

2. Dial the feature number for

“External Paging Answer.”

3. Dial the number of the external

pager: 1 or 2.

• After you hear confirmation tone

3, talk to the caller who made
the page.

5-F-6
1.04 Paging All Extensions and
External Pagers
Description 3. After paging, replace the handset.
Paging All Extensions and External Pagers offers
both Paging All Extensions and Paging External
Pagers at the same time. It provides paging
through the preprogrammed external pagers and Answering Paging All Extensions and External
the built-in speakers in PITSs of the extensions Pagers
within the range of the tenant that the user
belongs to. 1. Lift the handset.
The user's “System-Class of Service”, Station
Paging Access” determines the paging groups of
the extensions that can receive paging and also
External Paging determines the external pagers
that can receive paging. 2. Dial the feature number for
Station Paging Answer “44”
Programming (default), or the feature number
for External Paging Answer “43”
Reference (default), and the number of the
System Programming
VT Dumb external pager : 1 or 2.
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
Station Paging Access • After hearing confirmation tone
External Paging 1, 2 3, talk to the paging performer.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”, Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions
External Paging and External Pagers
Station Paging
External Paging Answer During a conversation with an extension or an
Station Paging Answer outside party
1. Press the switchhook for
Conditions approximately one half second
and release it.
Refer to Section 5-F-1.01 “Paging All Extensions”
and Section 5-F-1.03 “Paging External Pagers.” • The other party is placed on
hold.
Operation You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Performing Paging All Extensions and External
Pagers 2. Dial the feature number for
Station Paging “42” (default), or
1. Lift the handset. the feature number for External
Paging “41” (default), then dial
“ .”

• You hear confirmation tone 3.

2. Dial the feature number for
Station Paging “40” (default), or 3. Start paging.
the feature number for External
Paging “41” (default), then dial
“ .”

• After hearing confirmation tone 4. When an extension answers,

3, start paging. replace the handset.

• The held party and the paged

extension start conversation.
5-F-7
(70695)
Note:
• The following tones for paging can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
— Beep tone and confirmation tone 3 at paged
extension.
— Confirmatione tone 3 at paging originator’s
extension.

5-F-7-1
(70695)
2.00 Background Music (BGM)
through External Pager
Description Programming
The system can provide up to two external music Reference
System Programming
sources. The music source can be broadcast as VT Dumb
background music (BGM) through external “System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
pagers. External Paging 1, 2
External Music Source 1, 2
Starting or stopping BGM can be executed by the “System-Numbering Plan (08/11)”, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
Operator 1 (Attendant Console or extension user) BGM Through External Paging
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00
in the same tenant that the external pagers and
External Pager-Tenant 10-C-19.00
external music equipment belong to.
External Pager-BGM
Music Source-Tenant 10-C-20.00
To start and stop this function, use the same Music Source-For Use
feature number for “BGM Through External
Paging.”
Dialing the feature number while BGM is on Conditions
stops BGM, and reversely starts BGM while BGM
If Tenant Service is employed, it is possible to
is off.
attach each external music equipment and
external pager to a tenant by using “Trunk-Pager
To activate this feature, external music
& Music Source”, External Pager-Tenant and
equipment and an external pager should be
Music Source-Tenant.
connected to the system, and assign “System-
Operation”, External Music Source 1, 2 and
This function is effective only when an external
External Paging 1, 2 to “Yes” by the system
pager and an external music equipment are
programming.
connected and programming has been
completed. Otherwise, the user hears reorder
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
tone after executing the operation to activate this
BGM should be assigned to “Yes” to use this
function.
function. This assignment can be done to each
external pager.
Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold
& BGM.” This assignment can be done to each
external music equipment.

5-F-8
(70695)
Operation
Turning BGM on when BGM is off Turning BGM off when BGM is on
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “BGM 2. Dial the feature number for “BGM
Through External Paging.” Through External Paging.”

• After you hear confirmation • After you hear confirmation

tone 2, BGM sounds from the tone 2, BGM from the external
external pager(s). pager(s) stops.

3. Replace the handset. 3. Replace the handset.

5-F-9
G. Other Features
1.00 Night Service
1.01 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Description
Allows any extension user in the system to
answer the incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Answer 1 or 2.”
To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. All CO lines belong to this trunk group
are covered by this assignment.
External pager must be connected to the system
beforehand.
Up to two external pagers can be connected to
the system.
To answer a call ringing at external pager 1, dial
the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to
answer a call ringing at external pager 2, dial the
feature number for “Night Answer 2.”
For further information about external pager
assignment, refer to Section 5-F-1.03 “Paging
External Pagers.”
Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. The
difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
Section 5-B-2.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
5-G-1
(70695)
Conditions
To execute the system administration from a
remote location at night, select “RMT” for “Trunk-
CO Line” Night Answer Point assignment.
For further information about remote
administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Location.”
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and
2) can have unique Night Service arrangement
individually.
The affiliation of each external pager is
determined by the system programming in
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
Tenant.
The extension user cannot answer the UNA call
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant.
Operation
Answering incoming CO calls ringing at an
external pager.
An incoming CO call is ringing at an
external pager.
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4
.
2. If a call is ringing at external
pager 1: Dial the feature number
for Night Answer 1 “45” (default).
If a call is ringing at external
pager 2: Dial the feature number
for Night Answer 2 “46” (default).
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
3. Start conversation.
Note:
• Confirmation tone for UNA (TAFAS) can be
eliminated by WS4 command (See Section 10-
C-62.00 “World Select 4 (WS4)”).
1.02 Flexible Night Service
Description Operation
Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1 Changing a night answer destination to an
(Attendant Console or extension user) to change extension
the assigned night answer destination on a CO 1. Lift the handset.
line basis by dialing the feature number for
“Flexible Night Service.”

To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”

Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO 2. Dial the feature number for
lines belong to this trunk group are covered by Flexible Night Service “72”
this assignment. (default) and CO physical number
If FIXED is selected for above setting, the and destination extension number.
assigned night answer destination can not be
changed by the Operator 1. • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
is almost the same. 3. Replace the handset.
The difference is:

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console

or Extension) can change the night
answer destination. Changing a night answer destination to the remote
maintenance port
Fixed A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as 1. Lift the handset.
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode

2. Dial the feature number for

Programming Flexible Night Service “72”
Reference (default) and CO physical number
System Programming and FDN for remote.
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00 • You hear confirmation tone 1 or

(08/11)”,
Flexible Night Service
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”,
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”,
Night Answer Point
“Night Answer Group (NAG)”
2.
9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
3. Replace the handset.
9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
— 10-C-59.00

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the night answer
destination can only be changed for a CO line in
the same tenant by the Operator 1.

5-G-2
(70695)

Changing a night answer destination to an UNA
(Universal Night Answer)
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the feature number for
Flexible Night Service “72”
(default) and CO physical number,
and 1 for external pager 1 or
and 2 for external pager 2.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
or
3. Replace the handset.
5-G-3
(70695)
1.03 Switching of Day/Night Mode
Description
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or
Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the
Operator 1 must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode
Cancel” for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system
will switch the day and night modes at the
programmed time each day.
To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and
assign desired mode switching time to “Auto
Start Time” on a per day of the week basis.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.”
The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode is
established, by dialing the feature number for
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the
Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
If tenant service is employed, night service
assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
In this case, the assignment in “System-
Operation (3/3)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the
assignment in “System-Tenant” is applied to
Tenant 2.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-4.00
Night Service
Auto Start Time
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
(08/11)”,
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual Mode
Set
Night Service Manual Mode
Cancel
Conditions Changing from Auto mode to Manual mode
If Auto Start Time on a certain day is not 1. Lift the handset.
assigned, the current mode is continued until a
new start time is encountered.
If the Start Time for Day mode and Night mode
on the same day are set identically, the current
2. Dial the feature number for “Night
mode is continued.
Service Manual Mode Set.”
If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
at all, the current mode is continued. In other • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode 2.
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
then Night Mode is continued. 3. Replace the handset.

Operation
Changing Day mode to Night mode
1. Lift the handset. Changing from Manual mode to Auto mode
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Set.” 2. Dial the feature number for “Night
Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2. • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
3. Replace the handset.
3. Replace the handset.

Changing Night mode to Day mode

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Night Mode Cancel.”

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

3. Replace the handset.

5-G-4
2.00 Account Code Entry
Description Operation
Account Code Entry is used to associate an Entering an account code when calling an
account code with incoming and outgoing CO outside party in the Forced mode
calls.
1. Lift the handset.
The account code is appended to the SMDR call
record and can be used later for accounting and
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
billing purposes.
The account code can include up to 10 digits.
The validity of the entered account code is not
2. Dial the feature number for
checked by the system.
selecting a CO line.
Entry of account code may be optional, or the
extension user may be forced to enter the
• You hear no tone.
account code.
3. Dial the feature number for
In the forced mode, the account code must be
entered before making an outgoing CO call. Account Code “ #” (default).
In the option mode, enter the account code, if
necessary. • You hear dial tone 2.

Programming 4. Dial the account code.

Reference • Up to 10 digits can be dialed as

System Programming
VT Dumb an account code.
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Forced Account Code Mode 5. Dial “#.”
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
(04/11)”, • You hear dial tone 1.
Account Code

6. Dial the telephone number of the

Conditions
outside party.
In the option mode, it is possible to dial an
account code even after the conversation before
hanging up.

Only numerical characters of “0 to 9” can be

dialed as account codes.

Entering an account code over 10 digits sounds

alarm tone.

Be sure to dial “#” after dialing a code, since “#”

delimits the code.

If you use a rotary telephone, dial “99” instead of

“#” to delimit the code.
You cannot use “99” and what ends with “9” as
account codes by the rotary telephone.

5-G-5
(70695)
Entering an account code when receiving a call Entering an account code after calling an outside
from an outside party in the Forced mode party or after receiving a call from an outside
party in the Option mode
1. Lift the handset.
While having a conversation
• Talk to the other party.
1. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
and release.
2. Press the switchhook for
approximately one half second
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
and release.
2. Dial the feature number for
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
“Account Code.”
3. Dial the feature number for
• You hear dial tone 2.
“Account Code.”
3. Dial the account code.
• You hear dial tone 2.
• Maximum digits for an account
4. Dial the account code.
code is 10.
• Maximum digits for an account
4. Dial “#.”
code is 10.
• Start conversation again.
5. Dial “#.”

• Start conversation again.

Correcting an error after dialing a wrong account
code (not available with rotary type SLT
telephones)
1. Dial “* .”

• You hear dial tone 2.

2. Dial the correct account code.

3. Dial “#.”

5-G-6
3.00 Timed Reminder (Alarm
Clock)
Description Operation
The extension user can use his or her telephone Setting Timed Reminder
as an alarm clock. 1. Lift the handset.
When this feature is set, alarm tone will ring for 2
minutes at the programmed time.

Wake-up Call
By going off-hook, the extension user can hear 2. Dial the feature number for Timed
the wake-up message, if it has been recorded Reminder set “* 51” (default).
beforehand.
The extension user may hear BGM or intermittent
tone (dial tone 2) instead of the wake-up
message. 3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with 12.
OGM (wake-up call).”)

This feature can be set to operate only once or

everyday at a specified time. 4. Dial “minute” with two digits: 00 to
59.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
5. Dial “0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00
(06/11)”,
Timed Reminder Set
Timed Reminder Cancel

6. Dial “0” for Times Reminder-one

Conditions time, or dial “1” for Timed
(1)What if the extension is busy or off-hook at Reminder-every day.
the programmed time?
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Alarm tone will ring after the extension goes 2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
on-hook.
7. Replace the handset.
(2)What if a call comes in when alarm tone is
ringing?
The caller hears busy tone.

(3)Newly programmed time overrides the old

one.
Only the latest setting is valid at a single
extension whether it was set by the extension
itself or by the operator.
(4)Tone Pattern
Alarm tone sounds in the following manner:

5.0 sec
5-G-7
(70695)(E)
Canceling the Timed Reminder Assignment Answering alarm tone
1. Lift the handset. When the preset time comes, alarm tone sounds.
1. Lift the handset.

• Alarm tone stops and you hear a

wake-up message or BGM, or
2. Dial the feature number for
intermittent tone (dial tone 2).*
Timed Reminder Cancel “#5”
(default).
2. Replace the handset.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
* This is determined by the system
3. Replace the handset.
programming.
Refer to Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).”

(Supplement)
Dial tone 2 in step 1 sounds in the following
timing:

1.0 sec

5-G-8
(40993)
4.00 Data Line Security
Description Operation
Used to maintain the communication properly by Setting Data Line Security
prohibiting various tones such as Call Waiting
1. Lift the handset.
tone or Held Call Reminder from sounding at the
extension in data communication mode. It also
prohibits other extensions from executing
overriding functions such as Busy Override.
2. Dial the feature number for Data
To assign Data Line Security, assign “Extension-
Station” Data Line Security to “Yes.” Line Security Set “65 ” (default).

You can set and cancel this function by dialing • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
the feature numbers for “Data Line Security Set” 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
and “Data Line Security Cancel.”
3. Replace the handset.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00 Canceling Data Line Security

(05/11)”,
Data Line Security Set
1. Lift the handset.
Data Line Security Cancel 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
“Extension-Station (1/3)”
Data Line Security

2. Dial the feature number for Data

Conditions Line Security Cancel “65#”
Assigning this function always offers the (default).
extension user Privacy mode unless Privacy
Release is executed. • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
If there is a conversation between the extension
setting Data Line Security and the extension not 3. Replace the handset.
setting it, Data Line Security is applied to the
both extensions.

5-G-9
(70695)
5.00 Absent Message Capability
Description
Provides an absent message on the display of a
calling extension, if the called party has assigned
an absent message.
An absent message appears only on the display
of PITS (if provided).
There are six fixed and 10 programmable absent
messages.
The following is the six fixed messages (“x”
shows a parameter to be entered when a user
sets a message).
The user cannot set multiple messages at the
same time.
When a user sets fixed message 4), 5), or 6), the
system checks the parameters entered : for
example, when the user sets fixed message 4),
the parameters of “hour,” “minute,” “a.m./p.m.” are
checked. In case of an error entry, the user hears
reorder tone.
When a user sets a flexible message by the
system programming, he can enter up to six
parameters: “%.”

1) Will Return Soon If a flexible message contains any parameter, use

2) Gone Home “0 to 9,” “* ,” and “#” to enter it.
3) In a Meeting If the user enters fewer or more parameters than
4) Back At x x : x x x x the assigned parameters, or enters characters
a.m./p.m. except “0 to 9,” “* ” and “#,” he hears reorder
minute tone.
hour
5) Out Until x x / x x When a user calls an extension that sets both
day Absent Message and Call Forwarding-No Answer,
month Call Forwarding-No Answer is activated.
6) At Ext xxxx Refer to Section 5-D-2.03 “Call Forwarding-No
directory number Answer” for further information.
(three or four digits)
Operation
To set and cancel this function, use the feature
Setting fixed message 1), 2), or 3)
numbers for “Absent Message Set” and “Absent
Message Cancel.” 1. Lift the handset.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
2. Dial the feature number for
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Absent Message Set “ 4”
Absent Message Boundary
(default).
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.06 10-C-10.00
(06/11)”,
Absent Message Set
Absent Message Cancel 9-D-9.00 10-C-13.00 3. Dial “01” for fixed message 1),or
“System-Absent Message”, dial “02” for fixed message 2), or
Fixed Message dial “03” for fixed message 3).
Flexible Message
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2 and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, 10 programmable 4. Replace the handset.
messages can be split between two tenants.
To split the messages, execute “System-Tenant”,
Absent Message Boundary.
Six fixed messages are shared with two tenants.

5-G-10
(70695)
Setting fixed message 4), 5) or 6) Setting a flexible message
1. Lift the handset. 1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for “Absent 2. Dial the feature number for
Message Set.” “Absent Message Set.”

3. Dial “04” for fixed message 4),or 3. Dial the two digit message
dial “05” for fixed message 5), or number: 07 to 16.
dial “06” for fixed message 6). If the message requires any
parameters, enter all the
parameters.
4. Dial “TIME” for fixed message 4), or
dial “DATE” for fixed message 5), or • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
dial “directory number” for fixed 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
message 6) as follows:
4. Replace the handset.
Input format for “TIME” :
HH MM AM/PM

01 to 12
(hour) Canceling the assigned message
00 to 59
(minute)
1. Lift the handset.
0 for a.m., 1 for p.m.

Input format for “DATE” :

MM DD

01 to 12
2. Dial the feature number for
(month) “Absent Message Cancel.”
01 to 31 (day)
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or
Input format for “directory number” : 2 then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
three or four digits
3. Replace the handset.
• You hear confirmation tone 1 or 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

5. Replace the handset.

5-G-11
6.00 Message Waiting
Description
Allows an extension user to indicate to another
extension that a message is waiting for him or her,
by turning on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on
the called extension.
This feature is useful when the called extension is
busy or does not answer the call.
Any SLT user can set message waiting indication
to other extensions (PITS with MESSAGE button
or SLT with MESSAGE lamp), but cannot receive it
unless your extension is an SLT with MESSAGE
lamp.
(For SLT with MESSAGE lamp users)
To receive message waiting indication, “Extension-
–Station” Message Waiting Indication should be
set to “Lamp” beforehand.
To call back the message sender, dial the feature
number for “Message Waiting Reply.”
2. Reorder Tone
A caller who attempts to leave a message
waiting indication may hear the reorder tone in
the following cases:
(1) Receiver's extension is:
• A PITS telephone without a MESSAGE
button.
• A Single Line Telephone without
MESSAGE lamp.
(2) The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for the system or
tenant 1/2 has been assigned.
3. Tenant Service
The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is
determined by "System–Tenant” Message
Waiting Boundary.

Up to 500 message waiting indications can be set 4. Setting of the multiple message waiting
for the whole system. indications

Programming (1) More than one message sender can leave

message waiting indications to the same
Reference extension at the same time.
System Programming
VT Dumb
(2) Even if the same message sender sets
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
message waiting indications to the same
Message Waiting Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
extension more than once, this leaves only
(07/11)”, one message on the called extension.
Message Set
Message Cancel 5. The MESSAGE indicator on the message
Message Waiting Reply 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 receiver's extension will be turned off when:
“Extension-Station”,
Message Waiting Indication (1) The message receiver calls back the
message sender by dialing the feature
number for “Message Waiting Reply”, and it
Conditions was answered by the message sender (or
1. Suitable Telephones: by another extension using Call Pickup or
(1) Message Sender an SDN button).* 1
• Attendant Console (2) Message waiting indication is canceled by
• A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE the message sender.* 1
button. (3) Message waiting indications are canceled
• Any Single Line Telephone. by the message receiver.* 2
(2) Message Receiver * 1 The indicator may not be turned off, if there are
• A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE other message waiting indications sent by other
button. extensions.
• A Single Line Telephone with
* 2 All message waiting indications are canceled at
MESSAGE lamp.
once.
5-G-12
(70695)
Operation by Caller
(At message sender's extension—Any SLT)
Setting the Message Waiting Indication
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for
Message Set “*9” (default) and
then extension number of the
other party.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• The MESSAGE indicator on the
message receiver’s extension is
turned on.
3. Replace the handset.
Canceling the Message Waiting Indication on
receiver's extension set by a caller
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for
Message Cancel “#9” (default)
and the extension number of the
message receiver successively.
• You hear confirmation tone 2
and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• If the other extension received
only one message, the
MESSAGE indicator on the
message receiver’s extension
goes out.
3. Replace the handset.
5-G-13
(30393)
Operation by Receiver
(At message receiver's extension—SLT with
MESSAGE lamp only)
Calling back the message sender
1. Lift the handset.
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
2. Dial the feature number for
Message Waiting Reply “57”
(default).
• You hear ringback tone. When
the message sender answers,
start conversation.
• If you received multiple
messages, calling back the first
message sender is performed.
At the conclusion of the
conversation, the first message
is canceled.
• At the conclusion of the
conversations with all the
message senders, the
MESSAGE lamp on your
extension goes out.
3. Replace the handset.
(Note)
• Callback order
If more than one message waiting indication is
left on your extension, callback order is always
from the oldest to the newest (First In First Out).
This order cannot be changed.
• Confirming the message sender's extension is
not available.
Canceling all Message Waiting Indications on
your extension
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

Message Cancel “#9”
(default)and your own extension
number in succession.

• You hear confirmation tone 2

and then dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.
• The MESSAGE lamp on your
extension goes out.

3. Replace the handset.

<Supplement>
Light pattern of the MESSAGE lamp for an SLT with MESSAGE lamp.
▼ ▼
LAMP ON
LAMP OFF
1.28sec 3.72sec

5-G-13-1
(60395)
7.00 Electronic Station Lock Out
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to prohibit other Setting Electronic Station Lock Out
extension users from making outgoing CO calls
1. Lift the handset.
from his or her extension.

The user can select any three digit lock code from
000 to 999.
2. Dial the feature number for
To execute this function, assign “System-Class of
Service”, Station Lock to “Yes.” Station Lock Set “ 6” (default).

Programming
Reference
System Programming 3. Dial the lock code: 000 to 999.
VT Dumb

“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00

Station Lock
“System-Numbering Plan 9-G-6.07 10-C-10.00
(07/11)” 4. Dial the same lock code again.
Station Lock Set
Station Lock Cancel
• You hear confirmation tone 2.

Conditions
5. Replace the handset.
Both Operator 1 and 2 (Attendant Console or
extension user) can lock and unlock the other
extensions remotely without dialing the lock code
as shown in the following format.
Canceling Electronic Station Lock Out
[Remote Station Lock Cancel + Extension no.]
1. Lift the handset.
Once locked by an Operator, the extension user
cannot unlock it.
Refer to Section 5-G-9.00 “Remote Station
Feature Control” for further information.
2. Dial the feature number for
Station Lock Cancel “#6”
(default).

3. Dial the lock code.

• You hear confirmation tone 2.

4. Replace the handset.

5-G-14
(70695)
8.00 Assigned Feature Clear
Description Operation
Allows an extension user to clear the following 1. Lift the handset.
feature assigned on it by dialing the feature
number for “Station Program Clear.” • You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4.

(a) Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

(b) Absent Message 2. Dial the feature number for
(c) Timed Reminder Station Program Clear “###”
(default).
Programming
Reference • You hear confirmation tone 3.
System Programming
VT Dumb
3. Replace the handset.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-G-6.07 10-C-10.00
(07/11)”
Station Program Clear

Conditions
None

5-G-15
(70695)
9.00 Remote Station Feature
Control
Description 3. Dial the directory number of the
Allows the Operator 1 and 2 (extension user or extension.
Attendant Console) to set or cancel the following
features assigned to each extension: • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
2.
Features that can be canceled :
• DND (Do Not Disturb) 4. Replace the handset.
• Electronic Station Lock Out
• FWD (Call Forwarding)
(It is also possible to cancel FWD
temporarily)
Setting/canceling Electronic Station Lock Out
Features that can be set : to/from an extension
• DND (Do Not Disturb) 1. Lift the handset.
• Electronic Station Lock Out

Programming
Reference
System Programming 2-1. Setting : Dial the feature number
VT Dumb
for Remote Station Lock Set
“System-Numbering Plan (08/11)”, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
Remote Station Lock Set “73 ” (default).
Remote Station Lock Cancel
Remote DND Set 2-2. Canceling : Dial the feature
Remote DND Cancel number for Remote Station Lock
Remote FWD Cancel Cancel “73#” (default).
Remote FWD Cancel-One Time

3. Dial the directory number of the

Conditions
extension.
When an extension is locked by the operator,
unlocking by the locked extension itself is • You hear confirmation tone 1 or
impossible. 2.

Operation 4. Replace the handset.

Setting/canceling Do Not Disturb to/from an
extension
1. Lift the handset.

2. Setting : Dial the feature number

for Remote DND Set “74 ”
(default).

Canceling : Dial the feature

number for Remote DND Cancel
“74#” (default).

5-G-16
(70695)
Canceling Call Forwarding from an extension.
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Remote FWD Cancel.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

• You hear confirmation tone 1 or

2.

4. Replace the handset.

Canceling Call Forwarding temporarily from an

extension
1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the feature number for

“Remote FWD Cancel-One Time.”

3. Dial the directory number of the

extension.

• Call Forwarding is canceled

temporarily.
• Calling the extension starts.

5-G-17
 Section 6

Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)

 (Section 6)

Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)
Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 6-A-1

1.00 Location of Controls............................................................................... 6-A-1

2.00 Display through LED Indicator............................................................... 6-A-5

B Mode Structure................................................................................................ 6-B-1

C Useful Screens................................................................................................. 6-C-1

1.00 Layout of Screen Display....................................................................... 6-C-1

2.00 LOOP Key and Trunk Group Screen..................................................... 6-C-3
3.00 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen.............................................................. 6-C-7
4.00 Speed Dial Screen................................................................................. 6-C-15
5.00 Extension Directory Screen................................................................... 6-C-17
6.00 Call Park System Screen....................................................................... 6-C-19
7.00 Extension Management Screen............................................................. 6-C-21
8.00 Pickup Group Management Screen....................................................... 6-C-26
9.00 CO Management Screen....................................................................... 6-C-28
10.00 Attendant Management Screen............................................................. 6-C-31
11.00 Help Screen........................................................................................... 6-C-35

D Outgoing Call Features.................................................................................... 6-D-1

1.00 Making Outside Calls............................................................................. 6-D-1

1.01 Local Trunk Dial Access.............................................................. 6-D-1
1.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial Access............................................. 6-D-2
1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) .................................................. 6-D-3
2.00 Automatic Dialing .................................................................................. 6-D-4
2.01 Speed Dialing-System................................................................. 6-D-4
2.02 Last Number Redial (LNR) .......................................................... 6-D-8
3.00 Making Internal Calls ............................................................................ 6-D-9
3.01 Inter Office Calling-Manual Dialing.............................................. 6-D-9
3.02 Inter Office Calling by Extension Directory Screen...................... 6-D-9
3.03 Inter Office Calling by BLF Screen.............................................. 6-D-11
3.04 Inter Office Calling by Extension Management Screen............... 6-D-12
3.05 Inter Office Calling by Name/Department.................................... 6-D-13
3.06 Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)........................................ 6-D-14
4.00 Executive Busy Override ...................................................................... 6-D-15
5.00 Do Not Disturb (DND) Override............................................................. 6-D-16

6-1
(60395)
 Page
E Receiving Features.......................................................................................... 6-E-1

1.00 Answering by the ANSWER Key........................................................... 6-E-1

2.00 Answering by a LOOP Key.................................................................... 6-E-2
3.00 Directed Call Pickup .............................................................................. 6-E-3

F Holding Features.............................................................................................. 6-F-1

1.00 Hold ....................................................................................................... 6-F-1

2.00 Automatic Hold ...................................................................................... 6-F-2
3.00 Call Park-System................................................................................... 6-F-3

G Transferring Features ..................................................................................... 6-G-1

1.00 Call Transfer.......................................................................................... 6-G-1

1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to Station............................................ 6-G-1
1.02 Call Transfer by Camp-on to Station........................................... 6-G-2
1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Station ............................................... 6-G-3
1.04 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk.................................................. 6-G-4
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote.......................................... 6-G-5
1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer to a UCD Group (with OGM) ............. 6-G-5-1
2.00 Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station............................................ 6-G-6
3.00 Serial Call .............................................................................................. 6-G-7
4.00 Interposition Call Transfer...................................................................... 6-G-8
5.00 Call Transfer via Attendant Console...................................................... 6-G-9
6.00 Released Link Operation....................................................................... 6-G-10
7.00 Automatic Redirection If No Answer...................................................... 6-G-11

H Conversation Features..................................................................................... 6-H-1

1.00 Conference............................................................................................ 6-H-1

2.00 Unattended Conference......................................................................... 6-H-2
3.00 Call Splitting........................................................................................... 6-H-3
4.00 Doorphone Calling................................................................................. 6-H-4
5.00 Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling)......................................... 6-H-5
6.00 Cancel Key Function.............................................................................. 6-H-6

I Paging Features .............................................................................................. 6-I-1

1.00 Paging.................................................................................................... 6-I-1

1.01 Paging All Extensions.................................................................. 6-I-1
1.02 Group Paging.............................................................................. 6-I-2
1.03 Paging External Pagers............................................................... 6-I-3

6-2
(40993)
 Page
1.04 Paging All Extensions and External Pagers................................ 6-I-5
1.05 Call Park and Paging................................................................... 6-I-6
2.00 Background Music (BGM) through External Pager................................ 6-I-7

J Other Features ................................................................................................ 6-J-1

1.00 Night Service ......................................................................................... 6-J-1

1.01 Flexible Night Service.................................................................. 6-J-1
1.02 Switching of Day/Night Mode...................................................... 6-J-5
2.00 Account Code Entry............................................................................... 6-J-6
3.00 Secret Dialing ........................................................................................ 6-J-8
4.00 Message Waiting................................................................................... 6-J-9
5.00 Remote Station Feature Control............................................................ 6-J-10
6.00 Dial Tone Transfer ................................................................................. 6-J-16
7.00 Search by Name/Department................................................................ 6-J-17
8.00 Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ...................... 6-J-19
9.00 Trunk Verify............................................................................................ 6-J-21
10.00 CO Access Control................................................................................ 6-J-22
11.00 Power Failure Operation........................................................................ 6-J-25
12.00 Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)..................................................... 6-J-26
13.00 Remote Timed Reminder – One Time................................................... 6-J-27
14.00 Call Display at Attendant Console ........................................................ 6-J-29

6-3
(30393)
A. Preparation

1.00 Location of Controls

CRT Display

Brightness
FULL keyboard Control

Handset/Headset Function Keyboard

Full Keyboard (Option)

Handset/Headset Connector

Volume Control
Power Switch
Ringer Volume Selector

Local Switch
Reset Switch

Switch Function

Local Switch Sets the attendant console to "LOCAL” mode.

Ringer Volume Selector Selects the ringing tone level (Off-Low-High).

Volume Control Adjusts the volume level of the handset or headset.

Reset Switch Resets the attendant console.

6-A-1
Function keyboard

ATT FWD (Attendant

Foward) Switch

Power Indicator PGM MODE (Program

Mode) Switch
Function Keys ALARM Key
(F1 to F8) and Indicator

F1 F2 ATT-FWD PRG MODE

NIGHT Key
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
OFF ON OFF ON and Indicator

P-01 P-02 P-03

DES DES DES DES DES DES
SRC SRC SRC SRC SRC SRC
1 2 3
ALARM NIGHT

P-04 P-05 P-06

LOOP1 LOOP2 LOOP3 LOOP4 LOOP5 LOOP6
4 5 6
CANCEL
P-07 P-08 P-09
7 8 9

P-10 P-11 P-12 HOLD MSG SPLIT PAGE ANSWER

*
RELEASE
0 #

Programmable
Keys RELEASE Key
CANCEL Key
HOLD Key
MSG (Message Waiting) Key Dial Pad

SPLIT Key LOOP Keys and

Indicators
PAGE Key
ANSWER Key

Full keyboard (Option)

6-A-2
Functions of various keys on the function keyboard

Function keys : Functions of these keys vary according to the displayed screen.
(F1 to F8)

LOOP keys : Used to make and answer the calls (both extension and outside) etc..
(LOOP1 to
LOOP6)

RELEASE key : Releases a call held on the LOOP key.

ANSWER key : Used to answer incoming calls in first come first served basis.

HOLD key : Places a call on hold.

CANCEL key : Cancels any key operation while holding a call on the LOOP key.

SPLIT key : Switches between the SRC (Source) side party and DES (Destination) side party.

PAGE key : Used to execute parking a call and paging functions.

ALARM key : Displays major/minor alarm when the ALARM LED is flashing/lit.

NIGHT key : Switches between day and night modes.

MSG key : Used to leave a message on the LED of an extension which does not answer.

DIAL PAD : Used to dial the telephone number and the feature number.
(0 to 9, #)

Programmable There are 12 programmable keys on the keyboard, which can be assigned to be any
keys: of 11 function keys listed below:

AUTO, TRG, CALL-PARK, TOLL-CHG, ACCOUNT, SERIAL,

OHCA, CONF, REDIAL, E-E and One Touch (direct input)

Refer to 6-C-10.00 “Attendant Management Screen,” for further information about

Programmable key.

PRG MODE • The attendant console is operable as call processing terminal and system
switch : administration terminal by setting this switch ON and OFF.

• When you set this switch to ON, the initial display of VT programming mode appears
on the screen.
Now you can operate the attendant console as the system administration device.
(System administration device name must be set to “ATT 1 or ATT 2” in the system
programming beforehand.)

• You can enter into Dumb programming mode by pressing CTRL key + V key
simultaneously at main menu screen of VT programming mode.

• Set this switch to OFF, to return to the call processing mode.

6-A-3
ATT-FWD • Turning the ATT-FWD switch ON stops the arrival of all CO and extension calls (except
switch : recall) to the attendant console temporarily and provides for transfer of the incoming
calls to the extension programmed in system programming “Extension-Attendant Con-
sole-Busy-Out Extension” in advance.
It is available to make calls in this mode.

• CO calls arrived at the attendant console before this switch is set to ON and remained in
the queue are transferred to another attendant console, if it belongs to the same tenant.
If there is no other attendant console belonging to the same tenant; the calls are trans-
ferred to the above mentioned extension preset in system programming.

6-A-4
2.00 Display through LED Indicator

• SRC, DES indicators of LOOP key

Line conditions are displayed by three patterns of flashing LED indicators as follows.

Pattern 1
(240 wink)

Pattern 2
(60 wink)

Pattern 3
(120 wink)

1 sec

Pattern 1: Shows call arriving with 240 winks/min and is called “240 wink.”
Pattern 2: Shows holding a call with 60 winks/min and is called “60 wink.”
Pattern 3: Shows Unattended Conference with 120 winks/min and is called “120 wink.”

Light on steady shows busy status and light off shows idle status.

• ALARM Indicator • NIGHT Indicator

ALARM indicator shows the following conditions. Not lit indicates Day mode and lit indicates
Night mode.
Lit steadily : Indicates minor trouble.
Blinking : Indicates major trouble. • POWER Indicator
Not lit : Indicates the system is in normal Not lit indicates POWER switch☛ is turned OFF.
operation. and lit indicates POWER switch is turned ON.

☛
Pressing the ALARM key while ALARM indicator
lights or flashes displays the detail of the trouble
on the message line of the CRT screen and the
ALARM indicator light goes out.
Pressing the ALARM key again causes the
trouble message disappear.
This POWER switch is used to turn on and off
the CRT display.
The attendant console is operable during power
failure, if it is connected to the main unit.
(For details, refer to Section 6-J-11.00 “Power
Failure Operation.”)

6-A-5
B. Mode Structure
Attendant console is operable in the following
modes:

• Call processing mode (On-line) • System Programming

The attendant operates the console in this mode • Off-line programming
ordinarily. Executes programming in off-line mode.

• Local operation mode • On-line programming

Set the LOCAL switch to ON. Executes programming in on-line mode.
In this mode, the following five functions are
available:

• Editing Extension Directory

• Editing Speed Dial Dictionary
• Diagnosing the Attendant Console
• Making back-up data of Attendant Console
database
• Clearing Attendant Console database

(Refer to Section 13 “Station Programming-

Attendant Console” for further information about
LOCAL mode operation)

Setting positions of the switches executing the preceding operations are shown below:

SystemOperation
Power switch
Operation mode Local switch Program switch administration
on CRT
device
Call processing OFF OFF ON/OFF
mode (On-line)

Local operation ON ON/OFF ON

ATT1
Programming operation OFF ON/OFF ON
or
(Off-line)
ATT2
Programming operation ATT1
(On-line) OFF ON ON or
ATT2

• For the assignment of system administration device, refer to Section 9-D-1.00

“Operation (2/3).”

• In the case of a power failure, the attendant console is operable in call process-
ing mode except that the CRT screen is blank.
(Refer to Section 6-J-11.00 “Power Failure Operation.”)

6-B-1
C. Useful Screens

1.00 Layout of Screen Display

Description
• Input column
Explains the layout of the screen display, and the
Details of the operations performed through the
type of screens on the CRT display in the call
function keyboard or the full keyboard appear
processing mode of the attendant console.
here.
Layout of screen
• SRC column
(1) (2)
The LOOP key number currently in use, and the
condition of SRC (Source) side party appear
here.
(3) For instance, when extension 100 is making
outgoing call on LOOP1 , the displays is as
follows :

L-1 SRC : Ext. 100 (Jack)Outgoing

(4) (5)
(6) • DES column
Condition of DES side party currently active
The screen is constructed with six fields as appears here.
illustrated above, and they are called as follows:
• Message column
(1) Title field Information message for the various operations
(2) Date & time field appears here.
(3) Application field
(4) Input/output (I/O) field 5. Answer field
(5) Answer field The party which will be answered by pressing
(6) Function field the ANSWER key appears here.

1. Title field <Example 1> When incoming call is from inside

The display in this area varies with the mode party:
of the console. LOOP-1 - - -LOOP key number
There are 10 different modes.
Ext.100 - - -Extension number calling
2. Date & time field Betty - - -Extension name;
Current year, month, date and time are Incoming - - -Type of call
displayed in this field (blinking display)

3. Application field <Example 2> When incoming call is from outside

In conjunction with the function keys, 10 party:
screens are available.
LOOP-2 - - -LOOP key number
4. Input / output field TRG.10 - - -Trunk group number
This field consists of the following columns.
Panasonic - - -Trunk group name
Incoming - - -Type of call
Input :
(blinking display)
SRC:
DES:
Message: 6. Function field
Displays the functions of the F1 through F8 keys.

6-C-1
Classification of the screens
The screen will change depending on the function key pressed.

LOOP key and Busy Lamp Field

Trunk Group F2 screen
Busy Lamp Field
Speed Dial
F3 screen

Speed Dial
Extension Directory
F4
screen
Extension Directory
Call Park System
F5
screen
Call Park

F7 Help screen

Help
Extension
F8 F2
Management screen
Function Select Extension manage

F3 Pickup Group
Management screen
Pickup G. manage

F4 CO Management
screen
CO Manage

F5 Attendant
Management screen
Attendant Manage

F7 Help screen

Help

6-C-2
2.00 LOOP Key and Trunk Group
Screen
LOOP key and Trunk Group ATT-FWD Jan. 1 "99 FRI 12:00 AM
Wait call= Overflow=

DES of
LOOP key
LOOP key (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
area SRC of
LOOP key

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Trunk Group
area

Description
Ext. 2001 - - -Extension number
This screen displays the status of the LOOP keys
and trunk groups. Tony - - -Extension name
Also displays the number of waiting calls and C=01 T=02 O - - -Class
overflowed calls. Calling - - -Status of the extension

Conditions
The following explains the use of the various The followings are example displays of the LOOP
areas of the screen. key field about extension, trunk and paging.

(1) Wait call <Extension>

Number of the calls that cannot arrive at any
LOOP keys. These calls are put in the queue Ext. 2001 - - -Extension number ☛
when all the six LOOP keys are in use. Tony - - -Extension name
C=01 T=02 O - - -Service class (01 to 32), Toll
(2) Overflow restriction level (01 to 16), Account
Number of the calls remaining in the queue Calling
code (O: Option, F: Forced)
when “System-System Timer” Attendant
Status of the extension
Overflow Time has expired.
☛
In case “Call Forwarding” or “Call Hunting,”
(3) LOOP key area indicated with “ .”
Displays the status of calls on individual LOOP
key by displaying SRC (source) and DES <Trunk>
(destination).
The status of the individual LOOP key is TRG. 01 - - -Trunk group number
displayed with four items as illustrated in the Panasonic - - -Trunk name.
following examples. T=02 - - -Toll restriction level (01 to 16)
Talk - - -Status of the trunk

6-C-3
<Paging> (4)Trunk Group area
Trunk group number, trunk group name (Up to
☛
G. Page 1 - - -Type of paging 10 alphanumeric characters) and trunk group
status are displayed in the trunk group area.
Display for trunk group status is as follows.

Paging - - -Status : An idle trunk is available in the

displayed trunk group.
: All trunks are busy in the displayed
trunk group.
☛
G. page x : Group paging -- : The trunk is not used.
1 to 8
(5)When the ATT-FWD switch is set to ON, the
G. page All : Group paging all
ATT-FWD indicator flashes.
The ATT-FWD indicator is not lit when the
E. page x : External paging
switch is set to OFF.
1 or 2

E. page All : External paging all

All page : Group paging all

and External paging all

<Attendant console>

ATT 1 - - -Attendant console number

Talk - - -Status of attendant console

<Doorphone>

Door 1 - - -Doorphone number

Talk - - -Status of doorphone

• The LOOP key number currently in use is

displayed in reverse-video.
<Example>

< 3 >

6-C-4
Function field
• Types of function fields
Following two types of function fields are available for operation in LOOP key and
Trunk Group screen.

• Selection of function fields

Function field display changes by every pressing of the F8 key (function select).

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP
LOOPMode Busy Lamp
Next Speed
Previous Extension Function
Call Park Help
Change
& TRG Field
Page Dial
Page Directory Select

<Field 2>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Mode Extension Pickup G. CO Attendant Function

Help
Change Manage Manage Manage Manage Select

6-C-5
The following flow charts show the options available from each function field.
Advance to your desired screen by pressing a corresponding function key.

<Field 1> <Field 2>

Field 1 Field 2

F1 Changing LOOP Mode F1 Changing LOOP Mode

(LOOP Mode Change) (LOOP Mode Change)

Busy Lamp Extension
F2 F2
Field screen Management
screen
(Busy Lamp Field) (Extension Manage)
Speed Dial Pickup Group
F3 F3
screen Management
screen
(Speed Dial) (Pickup G. Manage)

F4 Extension Directory F4 CO Management

screen screen
(Extension Directory) (CO manage)
Attendant
F5 Call Park F5 Management
screen
screen
(Call Park) (Attendant Manage)

F7 Help screen F7 Help screen

(Help) (Help)

F8 Field 2 F8 Field 1

(Function Select) (Function Select)

6-C-6
3.00 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen
<Example>

Busy Lamp Field Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

(1/4)
: idle : Busy
1000 2000 3000

1001 3001

1002

1010

1011

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous No./Name PGM Mode Function

& TRG Page Page Change Entry Select

Description
This screen is available both for monitoring the
status (Idle or Busy) of extensions and for placing
inter office calling.
The symbols below are used to indicate the
current extension status.

: Idle
: Busy

Conditions
• For monitoring the extension status, or placing
Inter Office Calling by this screen, the extension
numbers must have been registered in this
screen beforehand. For registration of extension
numbers, refer to Function Field 4 described
succeedingly.
Extension names do not appear when they are
not assigned in LOCAL mode. Refer to Section
13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”

• For an extension to be considered busy, all

PDNs buttons are in use.
• For making Inter Office Call by this screen, see
Section 6-D-3.03 “Inter Office Calling by BLF
Screen.”

6-C-7
Function fields
• Types of function fields
Following five types of function fields are available for operation in the Busy Lamp
Field screen.

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Page No./Name PGM Mode Function

& TRG Page Change Entry Select

<Field 2>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Function
& TRG Call
Select

<Field 3>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Speed Extension Function

Call Park Help
& TRG Dial Directory Select

<Field 4>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous PGM Mode Function

& TRG Page Page Exit Select

<Field 5>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Function
Clear Memory
& TRG Select

6-C-8
• Switching of function fields
The following flow chart shows how to move from field to field.

Field 1

F8 F7

(Function Select) (Program Mode Entry)

Field 2 Field 4

F8 F7 F8

(Function Select) (Program Mode Exit) (Function Select)

Field 3 Field 5

F8 Press the F8 key for field F8

switching
(Function Select) (Function Select)

BLF BLF
Monitor Mode Program Mode

BLF Monitor Mode: BLF Program mode:

Monitoring the status of Programming of BLF screen.
extension, or making an
extension call

6-C-9
<Field 1>
This function field is available for advancing to the next screen or returning to the
previous screen in the Busy Lamp Field screen. You can see the extension name
screen by pressing the F6 key at extension number screen, Busy Lamp Field
program mode is obtained by pressing the F7 key.

Field 1

LOOP & TRG

F1
screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 Advancing to next screen

(Next Page)

F3 Returning to previous screen

(Previous. Page)
Changing to Changing to
F6 F6
Ext. Number column Ext. Name column
(Example) (Example)
(No./Name Change)
1001 Betty

1002 Frank

F7 Field 4 (BLF Program mode)

(PGM Mode Entry)

F8 Field 2

(Function Select)

Program Mode Entry function (F7) appears only when the extension number column
is displayed.
Press the F6 key if required to switch screens to extension name column.

6-C-10
<Field 2>
This function field is available for Inter Office-Calling.

Field 2

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 F3 F4 F5 Move the cursor onto the desired extension for

Inter Office Calling.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

F7 Calling the extension selected by the cursor.

(Call)

F8 Field 3

(Function Select)

<Field 3>
This function field is available for concluding the Busy Lamp Field screen and
moving to the screen corresponding to the selected function key.

Field 3

LOOP & TRG

F1 screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F3 Speed Dial
screen
(Speed Dial)

F4 Extension Directory
screen
(Extension Directory)

F5 Call Park
screen
(Call Park)

F7 Help
screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)
6-C-11
<Field 4>
Pressing the F7 key (PGM Mode Entry) in Field 1 introduces this field. That is, this
function field appears in the Busy Lamp Field program mode.
This field is available for advancing to next screen or returning to previous screen in
the Busy Lamp Field program mode.

Field 4

LOOP & TRG

F1
Screen
(LOOP & TRG))

F2 Advancing to the next BLF Screen

(Next Page)

F3 Returning to previous BLF Screen

(Previous Page)

F7 Field 1 (Exiting BLF Program mode, returning to field 1 screen.)

(PGM Mode Exit)

F8 Field 5 (Programming BLF)

(Function Select)
<Field 5>
This field is available for programming Busy Lamp Field screen.

Field 5

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 F3 F4 F5 Move the cursor onto the extension to be as-

signed or changed.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

F6 Clearing the extension number at the cursor

position.
(Clear)

F7 Storing extension number at the cursor position.

(Memory)

F8 Field 4
(Function Select) 6-C-12
• Procedure for storing / changing Busy Lamp
Field screen

1. Press the F7 key (PGM Mode Entry) in the (7)

PGM Mode
function field 1.
field 1 Entry

• Function field 4 appears on the screen.

F7

2. Obtain appropriate extension screen by (2) (3)

pressing the F2 key (Next page) or the F3 key Next Previous
(Previous page). field 4 Page Page

F2 or F3

3. Press the F8 key (Function Select)

• Function field 5 appears on the screen. (8)

field 4 Function
Select

F8
4. Move the cursor onto the extension to be
stored / changed.

(2) (3) (4) (5)

field 5

5. Enter the extension number to be stored /

changed through the numeric keypad on the F2 F3 F4 F5
function keyboard.
For correcting errors, or changing current
data, reenter data after pressing the F6 key
(clear).
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
* 0 #

6-C-13
 (7)
6. Pressing the F7 key (memory) stores entered
Memory
data. field 5

F7

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to store or change other

extensions if necessary.

(8)
8. After storing or changing, press the F8 key
field 5 Function
(function select).
Select

• Function field 5 appears on the screen.

F8

9. Press the F7 key (PGM mode exit).

• Exiting BLF PGM mode, changes to BLF

(7)
Monitor mode.
PGM Mode
field 4 Exit

F7

6-C-14
4.00 Speed Dial Screen

<Example>
Speed Dial Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM
(1/5)
Speed Dial Name No. Speed Dial Name No.

Matsushita 100 20
Panasonic 001

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

& TRG Page Page Call Select

No. : Speed Dial code

Description Function field

Allows the attendant to make a call using speed • Types of function fields
dial code by selecting the name programmed in the Two types of function fields, Field 1 and Field 2,
attendant console LOCAL mode. shown below are available to operate Speed
Dial screen.
Conditions
• Switching of function Fields.
Speed dial names are listed in alphabetical order. To switch the two function fields, press the F8
key (function select).
Storing of speed dial name will be performed in
attendant console LOCAL mode.
For further details, refer to Section 13-C “Speed
Dial Dictionary Mode.”

For making a call using this screen, refer to Section

6-D-2.01 “Speed Dialing-System.”

<Field 1>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

& TRG Page Page Call Select

<Field 2>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Busy Lamp Extension Call Function

& TRG Field Directory Park Help
Select

6-C-15
<Field 1>
This function field is available for making a call through Speed Dial screen.
If there are multiple speed dial screens, it is used to advance to the next screen or
to return to the previous screen.

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Advance to the next Speed Dial screen.
F2 No change if only one screen.
(Next Page)
F3 Return to previous Speed Dial screen.
No change if only one screen.
(Previous Page)
F4 F5 F6 For Speed Dial calling, move the cursor to the
desired speed dial code.
( ) ( ) ( )
F7 Perform Speed Dial on the cursor position.
(Call)
F8 Field 2
(Function Select)
<Field 2>
This function field is available for exiting Speed Dial screen, and moving to the
other screens as selected by the function keys.

Field 1

LOOP & TRG

F1
screen
(LOOP Mode Change)
BLF
F2 screen
(Busy Lamp Field)
Extension
F4
Directory screen
(Extension Directory)

F5 Call Park
screen
(Call Park)
Help
F7
screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select) 6-C-16
5.00 Extension Directory Screen
<Example>
Extension Directory Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

<B-J> : Idle : Busy

(1/7)
Extension Name Department No. BLF Extension Name Department No. BLF

Betty Account
Account 2000
Jack Sales
Sales 1000

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Call Function

& TRG Page Page Select

Description
The attendant can make the extension call by
selecting desired extension name in this screen.
It is available to search an extension number by
specifying it's name and department.
It is also available to monitor the current exten-
sions status as follows.
: Idle
: Busy
Conditions
For displaying contents of extension directory on
the screen, the information must be entered in
attendant console LOCAL mode beforehand.
See Section 13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”
The extension names are listed in alphabetical
order.
For calling, refer to Section 6-D-3.02 “Inter Office
Calling by Extension Directory Screen.”
On this screen, <B-J> in the upper left corner
shows the boundary of the initial letter of the first
and last entries.
Function field
• Types of function fields.
Two types of function fields, Field 1 and Field 2
shown below are available to operate Extension
Directory Screen.
• Switching of function fields.
To switch the two function fields, press the F8
key (function select).

<Field 1>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

Page Call Select
& TRG Page

<Field 2>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Busy Lamp Speed Call Function

Help
& TRG Field Dial Park Select

6-C-17
<Field 1>
This function field is available for advancing to the next screen or returning to the
previous screen, when there are a number of extension directory screens.
Also, this field is available for making Inter Office Call.

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Advance to next Extension Directory screen.
F2 No change if only one screen.
(Next Page)
F3 Returning to previous screen.
No change if only one screen.
(Previous Page)
F4 F5 F6 For extension call, move cursor to the extension
to be called.
( ) ( ) ( )

F7 Call the extension at the cursor position.

(Call)
F8 Field 2
(Function Select)

<Field 2>
This function field is available for concluding this screen and moving to the screens
depending on the function key pressed.

Field 1

LOOP & TRG

F1 screen
(LOOP & TRG)
BLF
F2 screen
(Busy Lamp Field)
Speed Dial
F3
screen
(Speed Dial)

F5 Call Park
screen
(Call Park)

F7 Help
screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)
6-C-18
6.00 Call Park System Screen

<Example>

Call Park System Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

No. Parked Parking No. Parked Parking

01 11 TRG 01 (DDD01) ATT#1

02 12
03 13
04 14
05 Ext. 1000 (Jack) Ext.2000 15
06 16
07 17
08 18
09 19
10 20

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Park Function

& TRG Retrieve Select

Description Function field

This screen displays extensions and CO calls • Types of function field.
parked in the call park area in the system, as well Two types of function fields, Function Field 1
as retrieving the parked calls. and Function Field 2 shown below are available
to operate Call Park System screen.
Conditions
• Switching of function fields.
For retrieving a parked call, refer to Section 6-F-
To switch the two function fields, press the F8
3.00 “Call Park-System.”
key (function select).

<Field 1>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Park Retrieve Function

& TRG Page Page Select

<Field 2>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Busy Lamp Speed Extension Function

Help
& TRG Field Dial Directory Select

6-C-19
<Field 1>
This function field is available for retrieving the parked calls.

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Move the cursor to
F4 F5 F6 retrieve a parked call.
( ) ( ) ( )
Retrieve a parked
F7 extension or CO call
at the cursor position.
(Park Retrieve)

F8 Field 2
(Function Select)

<Field 2>
This function field is available for concluding this screen and moving to other
screens depending on the function key pressed.

Field 2

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 BLF screen
(Busy Lamp Field)

F3 Speed Dial screen

(Speed Dial)

F4 Extension Directory
screen
(Extension Directory)

F7 Help screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)

6-C-20
7.00 Extension Management Screen

<Example>
Extension Management Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM
: FWD, X: DND, : Lock (1/11)

No. FWD/DND Lock No. FWD/DND Lock No. FWD/DND Lock

1000 1000
1001 X 1001 X
1002 1002
1003 1003

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous No./Name Function

& TRG Page Page Change Select

Legend :
: FWD set
X : DND set
: Station lock set

Description Conditions
Enables the attendant to monitor the status of Extension number is displayed in ascending order
extensions about following three features : of extension directory number.

• Call Forwarding
• Do Not Disturb
• Electronic Station Lock

The attendant can assign or cancel those features

to/from the extension user (refer to Section 6-J-
5.00 “Remote Station Feature Control”) and make
Inter-Office call (refer to Section 6-D-3.04 “Inter
Office Calling by Extension Management Screen”).

6-C-21
Function field
• Types of function fields
Following four types of function fields are available for operation in Extension
Management screen.

• Switching of function fields

For switching between the four function fields, press the F8 (Function Select) key.

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous No./Name Function

& TRG Page Page Change Select

<Field 2>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Select Memory Function

& TRG Select

<Field 3>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Function
Call
& TRG Select

<Field 4>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Pickup G. CO Attendant Function

Help
& TRG Page Manage Manage Manage Select

6-C-22
<Field 1>
This function field is available for advancing to the next screen or returning to the
previous screen when there are multiple extension management screens, and
changing the display from extension number to extension name.

Field 1

LOOP & TRG

F1
screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 Move to the next Extension Management screen.

No change if only one screen.
(Next Page)

F3 Returning to the previous Extension Management

screen.
(Previous Page) No change if only one screen.

F7 Changing to Changing to
F7
Extension Number Extension Name
(No./Name Change) (Example) (Example)
No. FWD/DND Name FWD/DND

1001 X Betty X
1002 Frank

F8 Field 2

(Function Select)

6-C-23
<Field 2>
This function field is available for canceling Call Forwarding, and setting/canceling
Do Not Disturb and Electronic Station Lock.

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Move the cursor to the extension to
F2 F3 F4 F5 be set or reset.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

F6 Select Setting/Canceling.

(Select)

F7 Storing the data.

(Memory)

F8 Field 3
(Function Select)

<Field 3>
This function field is available for making Inter Office Call through the Extension
Management screen.

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Move the cursor to desired exten-
F2 F3 F4 F5 sion for Inter Office Calling.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
Execute Inter Office Calling for the
F7 selected extension.
(Call)

F8 Field 4
(Function Select)

6-C-24
<Field 4>
This function field is available for concluding Extension Management screen and
moving to other screens as selected by the function keys.

Field 4

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Pickup Group
F3
Management screen
(Pickup. G. Manage)

F4 CO Management
screen
(CO Manage)
Attendant
F5
Management screen
(Attendant Manage)

F7 Help screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)

6-C-25
8.00 Pickup Group Management Screen
<Example>

Pickup Group Management Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

: Group Station Lock

Group #01-#08 Group #09-#16 Group #17-#24 Group #25-#32

01 09 17 25
02 10 18 26
03 11 19 27
04 12 20 28
05 13 21 29
06 14 22 30
07 15 23 31
08 16 24 32

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Select Memory Function

& TRG Select

Legend

: Group station lock is assigned

Description Function field

This screen is used for monitoring whether the • Types of function fields
pickup groups are group-locked or not. Two types of function fields, Field 1 and Field
Also used for setting/canceling group station lock 2, shown below are available to operate Pickup
for individual pickup group. Group Management Screen.
Refer to Section 6-J-5.00 “Remote Station
Feature Control” for further information. • Switching of function Fields.
To switch the two function fields, press the F8
Conditions key (function select).
All extensions in the same pickup group assigned
to Group Station Lock are locked.

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Select Memory Function

& TRG Select

<Field 2>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Extension Previous Attendant Function

CO Manage Help
& TRG Manage Page Manage Select

6-C-26
<Field 1>
This function field is available for setting/canceling group locking.

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Move the cursor to the position to be
F2 F3 F4 F5 set or cancelled group lock.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

F6 Select setting/canceling group lock.

(Select)

F7 Store setting/canceling group lock

data.
(Memory)

F8 Field 2
(Function Select)

<Field 2>
This function field is available for concluding Pickup Group Management screen,
and moving to other screens as selected by function keys.

Field 2

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Extension
F2
Management screen
(Extension Manage)

F4 CO Management
screen
(CO Manage)

F5 Attendant
Management screen
(Attendant Manage)

F7 Help screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)

6-C-27
9.00 CO Management Screen
<Example>
CO Management
Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM
: Idle, : Busy, ★ : Ringing, X : OUS/Fault
CO ID & BLF TRG No. & CO Name CO Status Night Answer

1011 01 : BBBB CO busy out UNA 1

1012 01 : CCCCCCC UNA 2
1013 ★ 01 : DDDDD CO access ctrl
1014 01 : AAA Ext. 1000
1015 X 01 : ZZ12345

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Park Function

& TRG Page Page Retrieve Select

Legend :

CO ID : Physical number of CO line

BLF : Busy Lamp Field
: Idle
: Busy
★ : Ringing
X : OUS/Fault
TRG No. : Trunk group number (01 to 16)
CO Name : Name of trunk (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
CO Status : Assigns status of CO access control or CO busy out
Night Answer : Assigns call arrival destination of CO line in the night service mode
(UNA 1, UNA 2, Extension or RMT)

CO ID & BLF TRG No. & CO Name CO Status Night Answer

1 0 1 1 01 BBBB CO busy out UNA 1

Shelf No. Trunk Group Assigns CO Call answer point

Slot No. number busy out in Night Service
Port No.
Line Condition Trunk Name

Description Conditions
This screen is available for setting/canceling the CO IDs are listed in ascending order.
following functions.
For details about CO busy out and CO access
• CO busy out control, refer to Section 6-J-10.00 “CO Access
• CO access control Control.”
• Night answer point
For details about Night Answer, refer to Section
This screen also allows the attendant to confirm 6-J-1.01 “Flexible Night Service.”
the current CO line status.
6-C-28
Function field
• Types of the function fields
Following three types of function fields are available for operation in CO Manage-
ment screen.

• Switching of function fields.

For switching between three function fields shown below, press the F8 (Function
Select) key.

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

& TRG Page Page Select

<Field 2>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Function
Select Memory
& TRG Select

<Field 3>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Extension Pickup G. Attendant Function

Help
& TRG Manage Manage Manage Select

<Field 1>
This function field is available for advancing screen to the next screen or returning
to the previous screen, when there are multiple screens.

Field 1

LOOP & TRG

F1
screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 Advances to the next CO Management screen.

No change if only one screen.
(Next Page)

Returning to the previous CO Management screen.

F3
No change if only one screen.
(Previous Page)

F8 Field 2
(Function Select)

6-C-29
<Field 2>
This function field is available for setting/canceling “CO access control,” “CO
busy out” and “Night answer point.”

Field 2

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Move the cursor to CO Status
F2 F3 F4 column, Night Answer column for
( ) ( ) ( ) the CO ID to be set/canceled.

F6 Select options for CO Status, Night

Answer.
(Select)

F7 Store the selected data.

(Memory)

F8 Field 3
(Function Select)

<Field 3>
This function field is available for concluding CO Management screen and
moving to other screens as selected by function keys.

Field 3

LOOP & TRG

F1
screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Extension
F2 Management screen
(Extension Manage)
Pickup Group
F3
Management screen
(Pickup G. Manage)
Attendant
F5
Management screen
(Attendant Manage)

F7 Help screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1

(Function Select)

6-C-30
10.00 Attendant Management Screen

<Example>
Attendant Management Jan 1. '91 FRI 12:00 AM

<Operation Data> <Programmable key>

Released link operation Yes AUTO TRG CALL-PARK
Overflow transfer No
Automatic hold No TOLL-CHG ACCOUNT SERIAL

<Tone/Ringer data> OHCA CONF REDIAL

Dial key click tone Yes E-E

Operation key click tone No
Ringer on talking No

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Select Memory Function

& TRG Select

The programmable key arrangement matches the operation keyboard as shown below.

P-01 P-02 P-03

P-04 P-05 P-06

P-07 P-08 P-09

P-10 P-11 P-12

Description
This screen is used to assign and monitor the
various functions of the attendant console itself.
Conditions
For details of the three functions in <Operation
Data> on this page, refer to the followings respec-
tively.
Section 6-G-6.00 “Released Link Operation”
Section 6-G-2.00 “Heavy Traffic Overflow
Transfer to Station”
Section 6-F-2.00 “Automatic Hold”
Operation key click tone :
Determines whether key click tone is heard or not
when pressing any key other than dial keys of the
operation keyboard.
Ringer on talking :
Determines whether ringer tone is heard or not
while in the conversation.
All functions in <Operation data> or <Tone/Ringer
data> are effective if set to “Yes”, and ineffective
if set to “NO.”

Concerning <Tone / Ring data>

Dial key click tone :

Determines whether key click tone is heard or not
when pressing dial keys of the operation key-
board.

6-C-31
<Programmable key> Ten function keys except One Touch are preas-
signed as default values, which can be changed
There are 12 programmable keys provided on the
to other function keys. These keys are selected
attendant console. It is possible to assign the
by pressing the PF6 (select) key.
keys to be any of the following 11 function keys:
AUTO, TRG, CALL-PARK, TOLL-CHG,
The features assignable to One Touch key are
ACCOUNT, SERIAL, OHCA, CONF, REDIAL,
listed below. These functions are selected by
E-E, One Touch
dialing the feature numbers, and other numbers if
necessary, with up to eight digits.

Feature Number Other Number Needed

Extension directory number None

Operation Call (Specific) Operator specifying number: 1 or 2

ARS/Local CO Line Access At least one digit

Trunk Group 01-08 Access Trunk group specifying number: 1 to 8 and

at least one digit

Trunk Group 09-16 Access Trunk group specifying number: 1 to 8 and

at least one digit

Trunk Group 17-24 Access Trunk group specifying number: 1 to 8 and

at least one digit

Doorphone Call (1-4) Doorphone number: 1 to 4

External Paging Pager specifying number: 0, 1 or 2

Station Paging “0” or “ ” or paging group number: 1 to 8

External Paging Answer Pager specifying number: 1 or 2

Station Paging Answer None

Message Cancel Extension directory number

Night Service Manual None

Mode Set

Night Service Manual None

Mode Cancel

Flexible Night Service CO ID and pager specifying number: 1 or

2, extension directory number or Remote

(Continued)

6-C-32
 (Continued)
Feature Number Other Number Needed

Remote Station Lock Set Extension directory number

Remote Station Lock Cancel Extension directory number

Remote DND Set Extension directory number

Remote DND Cancel Extension directory number

Remote FWD Cancel Extension directory number

Remote FWD Cancel-One Time Extension directory number

BGM through External Pager None

Busy Out Trunk Trunk port physical number

Unbusy Trunk Trunk port physical number

OGM Record Resource number: 1 to 3

OGM Playback Resource number: 1 to 3, *1 to *4

Function field
• Types of function fields • Switching of function fields
Following two types of function fields are For switching between the function fields shown
available for operation in Attendant Manage- below, press the F8 (Function Select) key.
ment screen.

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Select Memory Function

& TRG Select

<Field 2>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Extension Pickup G. Function

Manage Manage CO Manage Help
& TRG Select

6-C-33
<Field 1>
This function field is available for assigning
various functions

Field 1

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Move the cursor to the item to be
F2 F3 F4 F5
assigned.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

F6 Select the options.

(Select)

F7 Stores selected value at the cursor

position.
(Memory)

F8 Field 2
(Function Select)

<Field 2>
This function field is available for concluding
Attendant Management screen and moving to
other screens as selected by function keys.

Field 2

LOOP & TRG

F1
screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Extension
F2
Management screen
(Extension Manage)
Pickup Group
F3
Management screen
(Pickup G. Manage)
CO Management
F4
screen
(CO Manage)

F7 Help screen
(Help)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)
6-C-34
11.00 Help Screen

Description
This screen displays the functions of the fixed keys and programmable keys.

Help Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

<Fixed Keys> (1/3)

Key Feature

ALARM Displays major/minor alarm when the ALARM LED is flashing/lit.

ANSWER Used to answer incoming calls in sequence.
CANCEL Cancel any key operation.
HOLD Place the current call on hold.
LOOP Control the source or destination of a call on a switch loop.
MSG Leave a message waiting indication at any extension.
NIGHT Select night (LED on) or day (LED off) mode.
PAGE Park the call, and make a voice announcement.
RELEASE Release a call; functions as a hook switch.
SPLIT Switch between the source and destination parties.

Input :
SRC :
DES :
Message:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Select Memory Function

& TRG Page Page Select

<Programmable keys (1)>

Help Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

<Programmable Keys (1)> (2/3)

Key Feature

ACCOUNT Enter an account number (max. 10 digits) into the SMDR call record.
AUTO Make a system speed dial call. Press AUTO key and dial a 3-digit code (001-200)
CALL-PARK Place and retrieve calls from the system call park zones (01~20).
CONF Conference with the source and destination parties.
E-E Transmit DTMF signals by depressing this key.
OHCA Access the off hook call announcement feature.
REDIAL The last number is redialed automatically.
SERIAL Dial a series of extension numbers, so that an incoming call can be extended
sequentially to three extensions.

Input :
SRC :
DES :
Message :
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

& TRG Page Page Select

6-C-35
<Programmable keys (2)>

Help Jan 1. '99 FRI 12:00 AM

<Programmable Keys (2)> (3/3)

Key Feature

TOLL-CHG Change the toll restriction level of any extension temporarily.

TRG Place a CO call. Press TRG key and dial trunk group No. (01~16)

<Command with Full Keyboard>

Command Format Feature

CALL CALL NAME/DEPT Call by Name and/or Department.

SEARCH SEARCH NAME/DEPT Search by Name and/or Department.

Input :
SRC :
DES :
Message :
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

& TRG Page Page Select

6-C-36
Function field
• Types of function fields
Following three types of function fields are available for operation in Help screen.

<Field 1>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

& TRG Page Page Select

<Field 2>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Busy Lamp Speed Extension Function

Call Park
& TRG Field Dial Directory Select

<Field 3>
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Extension Pickup G. Attendant Function

CO Manage
& TRG Manage Manage Manage Select

• Switching of function fields

For switching between the function fields shown above, press the F8 key (Func-
tion Select).

Field 1

F8
(Function Select)

Field 2 Field 3

F8 F8
(Function Select) (Function Select)

6-C-37
<Field 1>
This function field is available for switching Help screen to next or previous
page.

Field 2

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 Advancing to the next Help screen.

(Next Page)
Returning to the previous Help
F3
screen.
(Previous Page)

F8 Field 2
(Function Select)
Field 3

<Field 2>
This function field is available for concluding this screen and switching to
another screen as selected by the corresponding function key.

Field 2

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)

F2 BLF screen
(Busy Lamp Field)

F3 Speed Dial screen

(Speed Dial)

F4 Extension Directory
screen
(Extension Directory)

F5 Call Park screen

(Call Park)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)
6-C-38
<Field 3>
This function field is available for concluding Help screen and switching to another
screen as selected by a function key.

Field 3

F1 LOOP & TRG

screen
(LOOP & TRG)
Extension
F2
Management screen
(Extension Manage)

F3 Pickup Group
Management screen
(Pickup G. Manage)

F4 CO Management
screen
(CO Manage)
Attendant
F5
Management screen
(Attendant Manage)

F8 Field 1
(Function Select)

6-C-39
D. Outgoing Call Features

1.00 Making Outside Calls

1.01 Local Trunk Dial Access
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to make outgoing CO calls Dial tone sounds.
using automatically selected idle CO line by (For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed and
dialing the feature number for “ARS/Local CO the SRC indicator is lit and dial tone sounds.)
Line Access.”
1. Dial the feature number for
To activate this feature, set “System- ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
Operation”,Automatic Route Selection to “No.” If (default).
set to “Yes,” ARS feature is activated instead of
this feature. • You hear dial tone.
Refer to Section 3-C-2.00 “Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)” for further information. 2. Dial the telephone number of the
outside party.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

Automatic Route Selection
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Hunt Sequence
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
(02/11)”,
ARS/Local CO Line Access

Conditions
An idle CO line available and hunting sequence
is determined by the system programming
“System-Local Access Group”, Hunt Sequence.

If busy tone is heard, there is no idle CO line

available.

If tenant service is employed, accessible trunk

group is limited to the trunk groups within the
same tenant.

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

The dialing plan followed is that of the trunk
group in hunt sequence 01 in “System-Local
Access Group.”

6-D-1
(70695)
1.02 Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to make outgoing CO calls Dial tone sounds:
via an idle CO line in the specified trunk group by (For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed, SRC
dialing the feature number for “Trunk Group 01- indicator is lit and dial tone sounds.)
08 Access” or “Trunk Group 09-16 Access.”
1. Press the TRG Key (Program-
TRG key (Programmable key) can be used for TRG
mable key ), then dial the trunk
this purpose instead of dialing the feature
group number (01 to 16 ).
number.
Refer to Section 6-C-10.00 “Attendant
Management Screen” for further information • Another dial tone sounds, and
about programmable key. an idle line in specified trunk
group is selected automatically.
Programming
Reference 2. Dial the telephone number of the
System Programming
VT Dumb outside party.
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
(02/11)”,
Trunk Group 01-08 Access (Supplement)
Trunk Group 09-16 Access
The following procedure substitutes operation for
step 1.
Conditions
• To select one of trunk groups 01 to 08:
If busy tone is heard, all CO lines in the specified Dial the feature number for Trunk Group 01-08
trunk group are in use. Access “81” (default), then dial the trunk group
specifying number (1 to 8).
In this case, dialed number matches trunk
group number as follows:

Specifying Number Trunk Group Number

1 01
: :
8 08

• To specify one of trunk groups 09 to 16, dial the

feature number for Trunk Group 09-16 Access
“82” (default), then dial the trunk group
specifying number (1 to 8).
In this case dialed number matches trunk
group number as follows:
Specifying Number Trunk Group Number
1 09
: :
8 16

(Supplement)
For recalling after selecting a CO line, press the
CANCEL key. After dial tone sounds, repeat the
same procedure from step1.

6-D-2
(70695)
1.03 Individual Virtual Trunk Group
Dial Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to make outgoing CO calls Dial tone sounds:
using Special Carrier Facilities by simply dialing (For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed and
the feature number for “Trunk Group 17-24 the SRC indicator is lit, and dial tone sounds.)
Access.”
1. Press the TRG Key (Program-
TRG key (Programmable key) can be used for TRG
mable key ), then dial the virtual
this purpose instead of dialing the feature
trunk group number: 17 to24.
number.
Detailed data, such as access codes and
authorization codes, required to Special Carrier • Another dial tone sounds, an
Access must be programmed beforehand in idle trunk in the specified virtual
“Special Carrier Access” screen. trunk group is selected
Trunk groups available for Special Carrier Access automatically.
is also defined in the same screen.
2. Dial the telephone number of the
It is programmable to restrict Special Carrier
outside party.
Access on system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2-
EQU/OCC Access Assignment” for further
information. (Supplement)
The following procedure substitutes operation for
Programming step 1.
Reference
System Programming • Dial the feature number for “Trunk Group 17-24
VT Dumb
Access” “83” (default) then dial the virtual trunk
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 group specifying number: 1 to 8.
(02/11)”,
Trunk Group 17-24 Access
• Virtual trunk group number matches virtual
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00 trunk group specifying number and digit
Access/OCC Access” 9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00 modification table number (Equal access table
number 1 to 4, OCC access table number 1 to
4 which should be assigned beforehand), as
Attendant Management Reference follows:

TRG (Trunk Group) key 6-C-10.00

Virtual Trunk Virtual Trunk Digit Modification
Group Number Group Specifying Table Number
Number
Conditions
17 1 Equal access 1
None 18 2 table number 2
19 3 3
20 4 4
21 5 OCC access 1
22 6 table number 2
23 7 3
24 8 4

6-D-3
(70695)
2.00 Automatic Dialing
2.01 Speed Dialing-System
Description The feature numbers for selecting a CO line are:
Speed Dialing-System allows the attendant to • ARS/Local CO Line Access
make an outgoing call☛ by dialing speed dialing • Trunk Group 01-08 Access
code common to the whole system. • Trunk Group 09-16 Access
Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be registered • Trunk Group 17-24 Access (Virtual Trunk
to the system. Group — ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
There are two way of speed dialing:
<1> By using AUTO key (programmable key). Operation
<2> By employing Speed Dial screen. Prior
registration of Speed Dial dictionary in Speed Dialing-manual
LOCAL mode is necessary. 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
The Speed Dialing Codes are registered in • The SRC indicator lights and
“System-Speed Dialing-System” screen, and toll dial tone sounds.
restriction level unique to each speed dialing code
can be assigned in the same screen. 2. Press the AUTO key (program-
AUTO
Refer to “Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed mable key) or dial the feature
Dialing” on next page for further information. number for “Speed Dialing-
If Tenant Service is employed, speed dialing System.”
codes (001 through 200) can be divided by two • Dial tone stops.
tenants. In this case, speed dial codes for tenant
1 can not be used by tenant 2 and vice versa. 3. Dial “Speed dial code” (001 to
☛
200).
Not only outside number but extension number
and feature number can be registered to the • Registered telephone number
Speed Dialing-System. is dialed.
(Supplement)
Programming
In step 2, before pressing the AUTO key, dialing
Reference the feature number for selecting a CO line (listed
System Programming
VT Dumb below) cancels the feature number for a CO line
stored in the speed dialing code temporarily and
“System-Tenant”, Speed Dialing- 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
allows you to call on the manually selected line.
System Boundary
“System-Speed Dialing-System” 9-D-8.00 10-C-12.00 Either of speed dialing and manual dialing can be
used in combination.
Attendant Management Reference Speed dialing codes can be used in succession.
<Example>
AUTO key 6-C-10.00
AUTO 0 0 1 AUTO 0 0 2 — —
It is available to register a number consisting of
Conditions 33 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in
Each speed dialing code can have up to 32 digits two speed dialing codes. In this case, a feature
including CO line access code. “0~9,” “* ,” “#,” number for selecting a CO line should not be
“PAUSE,” “FLASH,” “—” and “SECRET” can be stored on the second speed dialing code.
registered. To dial the number, first press the AUTO key and
dial the first speed dialing code, and then press
To register a telephone number to a System the AUTO key and dial the second speed dialing
Speed Dialing Code, a feature number for code.
selecting a CO line must be stored as leading
digits.

6-D-4
(60395)
Operation
Speed dial calling through Speed Dial screen

(3) 1. Press the F3 (speed dial). Speed Dial

screen appears on the CRT display.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial Name No.
Panasonic 001
Matsushita 002
F3
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function

Call
& TRG Page Page Select

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 2. Move the cursor to the desired name by
Next Previous pressing the F4 through F6 keys (F4:
Page Page
F5: F6: ).
In case of multiple screens, scroll screen by
pressing the F2 key (next page) or the F3
key (previous page) then press the F4
through F6 keys.
F2 ~ F6

3. Press an idle LOOP key.

LOOP
• The SRC indicator lights and dial tone
sounds.

(7)
4. Press the F7 key (call).
Call
• Registered telephone number is dialed
automatically.

F7

6-D-5
<Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing> (TRLSD=01 to 16), the system compares Toll
Restriction Level of Attendant Console
The system administrator can assign Toll
(TRLA) with TRLSD.
Restriction Level of System Speed Dialing
(referred to as “TRLSD” in the following) to each
If TRLA is equal to or higher than TRLSD
code as follows:
(TRLA≥TRLSD) a call is made, and if TRLA is
lower than TRLSD (TRLA<TRLSD), a call is
System - Speed Dialing - System checked against System Toll Restriction
feature.
System Speed Dial No. =001
+ <Example>
No. Type Dial If the attendant (TRLA=6) makes an outgoing CO
+ + call by selecting a System Speed Dialing Code
001 00 94113209 (TRLSD=7), in this case, TRLA of 6 is higher
002 01 8114113209 than TRLSD of 7 (TRLA>TRLSD), so a call is
003 01 92093182 made.

If the attendant (TRLA=6) makes an outgoing CO

call by selecting a System Speed Dialing Code
Toll Restriction Level of System (TRLSD=4), in this case, TRLA of 6 is lower than
Speed Dialing (TRLSD) TRLSD of 4 (TRLA<TRLSD), so a call is checked
against the System Toll Restriction feature.
TRLSD consists of 17 levels (“00” and “01 to 16”)
TRLSD “00” receives a treatment different from
TRLSDs “01 to 16.”
In TRLSD “01 to 16,” “01” is the highest level and
“16” is the lowest.

1. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=00)

When an outgoing CO call is made by dialing

a System Speed Dialing Code (TRLSD=00),
the attendant receive standard toll restriction
treatment.

If selected speed dialing code includes Local

Trunk Dial Access code as leading digits, a
call is checked against “Toll Restriction for
Local Trunk Dial Access.”

If selected speed dialing code includes

Individual Trunk Group Dial Access Code as
leading digits, a call is checked against “Toll
Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access.”
For further information about System Toll
Restriction feature, refer to Section 3-C-1.00
“Toll Restriction.”

2. Toll Restriction Plan for System Speed Dialing

Code (TRLSD=01 to 16)

When the attendant makes an outgoing CO

call by dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
6-D-6
The following flowchart shows the simplified procedure of toll restriction plan for
System Speed Dialing.

Start

When an outgoing CO call is made by When an outgoing CO call is made by

dialing a System Speed Dialing Code dialing a System Speed Dialing Code
(TRLSD=01 to 16) (TRLSD=00)

Compares TRLSD with TRLA Checks a call against System Toll

Restriction feature
TRLA<TRLSD

TRLA≥TRLSD*
not restricted restricted
The call is made
(Transmit the registered The call is prohibited
number to CO line) (sends reorder tone)

6-D-7
2.02 Last Number Redial (LNR)
Description Operation
Last Number Redial feature automatically saves 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
the last dialed telephone number of the outside LOOP

party and allows the attendant to make the call to • The SRC indicator lights and
the same destination again by simply pressing dial tone sounds.
the REDIAL key (programmable key).
Assign REDIAL key to programmable key in 2. Press the REDIAL key
REDIAL
advance. (programmable key).

• After dial tone, ringback tone

Programming sounds.
• When the called party answers,
Attendant Management Reference start the conversation.

REDIAL key 6-C-10.00

Conditions
Up to 32 digits except the feature number for
selecting a CO line can be memorized
automatically as the last dialed number.

“* ,” “#,” “PAUSE,” or “SECRET” are counted as

one digit respectively.

Last number redialing memory is renewed

automatically every time a new outgoing CO call
is made (including when ringback tone, DND
tone or busy tone is returned) and even one digit
is sent to CO line. Dialing a feature number for
selecting a CO line only does not renew the
memorized number.

6-D-8
3.00 Making Internal Calls
3.01 Inter Office Calling-Manual Dialing 3.02 Inter Office Calling by Extension
Description Directory Screen
Inter Office Calling allows the attendant to call Description
extension users within the system by dialing the Allows the attendant to make an extension call by
directory number (three or four digits). searching extension name or department at the
Extension Directory screen. To use this function,
Programming extension number, extension name and
None department should be registered in Extension
Directory beforehand.
Conditions
Programming
If Tenant Service is employed, Inter Office Calling
to the other tenant (inter-tenant calling) can be For storing in Extension Directory in Local mode,
enabled by programming. refer to Section 13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”
Refer to Section 3-B-4.00 “Tenant Service” for
further information. Conditions
None
Operation
Dial tone sounds. (For instance, an idle LOOP Operation
key is pressed, the SRC indicator is lit, and dial See the following page.
tone sounds.)

1. Dial the directory number (DN) of

the desired extension user.
• Ringback tone sounds.
If called party answers, begin
speaking.

(Supplement)
• After dialing the directory number, the tone
returned indicates the following:

Ringback tone : Calling the extension.

Busy tone : The called extension is
busy.
DND tone : The called extension has
DND assigned.
Reorder tone : Incorrect number is dialed.

• To make a call again, press the CANCEL key

and after hearing dial tone, dial the directory
number (DN).

6-D-9
Operation
Dial tone sounds. (For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed, the SRC indicator is lit,
and dial tone sounds.)

(4) 1. Press the F4 (extension directory).

Extension
Directory • Extension Directory screen appears on the
display.

2. Move the cursor to the desired extension by

pressing the F4 ( ), F5 ( ), F6 ( ) keys.
F4
• If there are multiple extension directory
screens, search the desired extension by
pressing the F2 or F3 key (F2: next page,
F3: previous page) then move the cursor
by pressing F4 through F6 keys.

(7) 3. Press the F7 key (call) to call the extension

Call at the cursor position.

• Ringback tone sounds.

When the called party answers, begin
speaking.
F7

(Supplement)
• The attendant can monitor the busy/idle status of the extension users at Extension
Directory screen.
: Idle : Busy

Extension Name Department No. BLF

Betty Project 1000

Jack Account 1010

• For canceling an extension call and placing a call again, press the CANCEL key and
after hearing dial tone, repeat the same procedure from step2.

6-D-10
3.03 Inter Office Calling by BLF
Screen
Description Programming
Allows the attendant to make an extension call BLF screen: refer to Section 6-C-3.00 “Busy
after monitoring the extension status through BLF Lamp Field (BLF) Screen.”
screen. To use this function, directory number
should be registered in the Extension Directory Conditions
beforehand.
None

Operation
Dial tone sounds. (For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed, the SRC indicator is
lit, and dial tone sounds.)

(2) 1. Press the F2 key (busy lamp field).

Busy Lamp
Field • One of four BLF screens appears.
• Search the screen to find the desired
extension by pressing the F2 key (next
page) or the F3 key (previous page).

F2

(8) 2. After searching the desired page, press the

Function F8 key (function select ).
Select
• The following function field appears on the
screen.

(2) (3) (4) (5)

F8

(7) 3. Move the cursor to the desired extension by

pressing the F2 to F5 keys (F2: F3:
Call F4: F5: ).

4. Press the F7 key (call).

• Ringback tone sounds.

F7 When called extension party answers,
begin speaking.

(Supplement)
For canceling an extension call and placing a call again, press the CANCEL key and
after hearing dial tone, repeat the same procedure from step 2.

6-D-11
3.04 Inter Office Calling by Extension
Management Screen
Description Programming
Allows the attendant to make an extension call Refer to Section 6-C-7.00 “Extension
through Extension Management screen. Before Management Screen.”
the operation, directory number should be
registered in the Extension Directory screen. Conditions
None

Operation
Dial tone sounds. (For instance, an idle LOOP key is pressed, the SRC indicator is
lit, and dial tone sounds.)

(2) 1. Press the F2 key (extension manage).

Extension
Manage • One of Extension Management screens
appears.
• Search the screen to find the desired
extension by pressing the F2 key (next
page) or the F3 key (previous page).
F2

(8) 2. After searching the desired page, press the

Function F8 key (function select ).
Select
• The following function field appears on the
screen.

(2) (3) (4) (5)

F8

(7) 3. Move the cursor to the desired extension by

pressing the F2 to F5 keys (F2: F3:
Call F4: F5: ).

4. Press the F7 key (call).

• Ringback tone sounds.

F7 When called party answers, begin
speaking.

(Supplement)
For canceling an extension call and placing a call again, press the CANCEL key and
after hearing dial tone, repeat the same procedure from step 2.

6-D-12
3.05 Inter Office Calling by Name/
Department
Description
Allows the attendant to make an extension call by
directly entering extension name and/or
department using numeric key pad.
The following three entry types are available
provided name means extension name, and (CR)
means pressing RETURN key.
• Calling by specifying only extension name
Entry type 1- Call Name (CR)
• Calling by specifying only department
Entry type 2- Call/Department (CR)
• If there are two or more same extension
names, all of them will be displayed.
Move the cursor to the desired extension and
press the F7 key to place an extension call.
For further details, refer to Section 6-D-3.02
“Inter Office Calling by Extension Directory
Screen.”
<Example>
• In case there are two or more same extension
names in the list.
Extension Directory is displayed as follows:
Extension No. Extension Name Department

• Calling by specifying both extension name and 1000 Jack Sales

Department 2000 Jack Account
Entry type 3- Call Name/Department (CR)
Then enter “Call Jack” and press the RETURN
Programming
key.
For registering the extension number and name
in Extension Directory in Local mode, refer to Then the screen is displayed as:
Section 13-B “Extension Directory Mode.”
Extension Name Department Number BLF
Conditions Jack Account 2000
The attendant console can place an extension Jack Sales 1000
call by entering only department, if there is an idle
extension in the specified department. Message: Can not call ( Same Name exist )
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Operation
Dial tone sounds. (For instance, an idle LOOP
key is pressed, the SRC indicator is lit and dial
tone sounds.) Make the extension call using the same
procedure as Section 6-D-3.02 “Inter Office
Enter the name/department using full keyboard Calling by Extension Directory Screen.”
following the above mentioned format.
After ringback tone sounds, when called party
answers, start conversation.

(Supplement)
• If designated extension name or department
name are not listed in the Extension Directory,
the call is not placed, and the following
message appears on the message line.

Message: The Name/Department does not exist.

6-D-13
3.06 Off-Hook Call Announcement
(OHCA)
Description Operation
When called extension is busy (busy tone is 1. Dial the extension number.
returned), OHCA allows the attendant to in form
the busy party that another call is waiting through • Busy tone sounds.
built-in speaker of the called user's PITS
telephone.
OHCA works under the following conditions:
2. Press the OHCA key (program-
OHCA
• OHCA key (Programmable key) is assigned the mable key).
Attendant Console.
• The called extension's telephone is PITS KX- • Confirmation tone sounds.
T123230D, KX-T123235 or KX-T7130 and Start talking.
OHCA button is assigned on it. In case OHCA is available for
• The called extension is off-hook, all PDN the extension, the OHCA
buttons are busy, and OHCA button is not in indicator on the called
use. extension lights in green, and
confirmation tone of two beeps
To utilize this function, install T-SW OHCA card sounds.
(KX-T336105) in the Basic Slot 02, and OHCA
card (KX-T96136) on the PLC or HLC card. (Supplement)
Refer to Section 2-C-3.02 “T-SW OHCA Card
When a call is transferred to the extension in
(KX-T336105)” and Section 2-C-3.03 “OHCA
OHCA conversation status, the transferred call
Card (KX-T96136)” for further information.
will be placed on a PDN as soon as any PDN
becomes idle by pressing the RELEASE key.
In the system programming, assign “Extension-
Station (1/3)”, OHCA Circuit to “Yes” at the called <Example>
extension. When answering an incoming CO call and
transferring it to the extension, if the extension is
Programming busy, talk to the extension that you will transfer
Reference the CO call by pressing the OHCA key. Then
System Programming press the RELEASE key.
VT Dumb
As soon as any PDN becomes idle, the CO call is
“Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-1.00 placed on the PDN on the called extension.
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
OHCA circuit

Attendant Management Reference

OHCA key 6-C-10.00

Conditions
Busy status of PITS telephone user means all
PDNs on called extension are in use. In this
status, busy tone is returned.

OHCA does not function if “System-Class of

Service (1/2)”, BSS/OHCA Deny is set to “Yes” at
called extension.

6-D-14
4.00 Executive Busy Override
Description Operation
Executive Busy Override allows the attendant to 1. Dial the extension number.
intrude on a busy line, and then a 3-party
conversation is established. The feature is • Busy tone sounds.
accessed by dialing “1” while hearing busy tone.

In entering into a three-party conversation, all the 2. Dial “1.”

three parties hear confirmation tone.
It is programmable to send this tone or not by • Overriding tone sounds at the
“System-Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg- three parties. Start a three-
in. person conversation.
• In case overriding is
Programming impossible, busy tone
Reference continues.
System Programming
VT Dumb
(Supplement)
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in • To complete a three-person conversation after
overriding on the SRC side, press the
RELEASE key.
Conditions
• To complete a three-person conversation after
Busy status means that all PDNs on the called
overriding on the DES side party and holding a
extension are in use. In this status, busy tone
party on SRC side, press the RELEASE key.
sounds.
In this case, the held station on SRC side is
transferred. This is camp-on transfer.
Executive Busy Override does not function when
the other party is any one of the following status;
<Example>
• Three-party conversation When answering an incoming CO call, dial the
• OHCA conversation extension number to transfer the call to the
• ICM conversation extension.
• Private CO conversation (CO call is held on SRC side and busy tone
• In conversation with another attendant sounds on DES side), dialing “1” offers a three-
console. person conversation.
After informing the extension of transferring the
Executive Busy Override does not function if CO call, press the RELEASE key.
either of two parties in conversation has set the As soon as any PDN becomes idle, the CO call
following; arrives at the PDN.

• Executive Busy Override Deny For further detail of transferring a camped-on

(Refer to Section 4-D-5.00.) party, refer to Section 6-G-1.02 “Call Transfer by
• Data Line Security Camp-on to Station.”
(Refer to Section 4-I-5.00.)

6-D-15
5.00 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Override
Description Operation
Do Not Disturb Override makes the attendant 1. Dial the extension number.
possible to call the extension which has set Do Not
Disturb. • If DND feature is assigned to
Dialing “1” after hearing DND tone provides calling the called extension, DND tone
the extension. sounds.
Refer to Section 4-D-6.00 “Do Not Disturb (DND)”
for further information about DND feature. 2. Dial “1.”

Programming • Ringback tone sounds, and

calling starts.
None
(Supplement)
Conditions
To transfer a call to extension which has DND
If busy tone is heard after dialing “1,” Executive
assigned.
Busy Override can be done by dialing “1” again.
<Example>
After answering an incoming CO call, to transfer
the call to an extension, dial the extension
number (the incoming call on SRC side is held,
on DES side DND tone is heard). Dialing “1”
cancels DND function temporarily, and while
hearing ringback tone, press the RELEASE key.
Then a call is transferred to the destination party.

6-D-16
E. Receiving Features

1.00 Answering by the ANSWER

Key
Description Operation
The attendant can answer an incoming call Incoming call appears on the answer field.
displayed on the answer field by pressing the
1. Press the ANSWER key.
ANSWER key. An incoming call appears on the
ANSWER
answer field in preferential order, that is assigned
• The attendant can answer the
by the system programming in advance.
call appearing on the answer
field.
For instance, if CO calls are assigned for higher
preference than extension calls and if an
extension call arrives first and then a CO call
arrives, the answer field displays the extension
call first, then changes to show the CO call as
soon as it reaches.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Attendant Console” 9-G-4.02 10-C-28.00

Attendant Console (Call
Priority) (2/2)

Conditions
If another call arrives during a conversation, the
attendant can answer it by simply pressing the
ANSWER key.
In this case, the previous call will be placed on
hold or disconnected depending on the attendant
console programming.
For further information, refer to Section 6-F-2.00
“Automatic Hold.”

6-E-1
2.00 Answering by a LOOP Key
Description
If there are multiple incoming calls, the attendant In the example below, pressing the ANSWER key
can answer a desired call by pressing a LOOP automatically connects a call from Jack. Press
key associated with it. the LOOP 2 key to answer the call from Manager.
For instance, when there are two incoming
extension calls, you can confirm the callers on
the screen below and answer a desired call by
pressing a LOOP key associated with it.

LOOP Key and Trunk Group Jan. 1 99 FRI 12:00 AM

Wait Call = 0 Overflow = 0

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

EXT. 100 EXT. 200
Jack Manager
C=01 T=08 O C=01 T=01 O
Incoming Incoming

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Input : LOOP-1
SRC : EXT. 100
DES : Jack
Message : Incoming

Programming Operation
None DES
1. Multiple incoming calls are
arriving at LOOP keys.
SRC
Conditions
LOOP
• Multiple SRC indicators start to
During a conversation, the attendant can answer
flash in 240 winks.
another incoming call by pressing a LOOP key
associated with it.
2. Press the desired LOOP key.
In this case, the previous call will be placed on LOOP
hold or disconnected depending on the attendant
• The SRC indicator of the
console programming.
pressed LOOP key lights. Talk
For further information, refer to Section 6-F-2.00
to the caller.
“Automatic Hold.”

6-E-2
3.00 Directed Call Pickup
Description Operation
Directed Call Pickup allows the attendant to Picking up a call ringing at an extension
answer the call ringing at any extension by 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
dialing the feature number for “Directed Call LOOP
Pickup,” and then the directory number of the • The SRC indicator lights and
ringing extension. dial tone sounds.

Programming
Reference 2. Dial the feature number for
System Programming
VT Dumb Directed Call Pickup. “48”
(default).
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
Directed Call Pickup

3. Dial the directory number of the

Conditions ringing extension.
It is possible to execute Directed Call Pickup
• You hear confirmation tone 3.
after holding the current call.
• Talk to the caller.
This feature is not available to answer the
following calls:
<1> A call ringing at an extension on which Dial
Call Pickup Deny is set
(Refer to Section 4-D-3.03 “Call Pickup
Deny” for further information.)
<2> A call ringing on PCO button
<3> A call ringing on ICM button
<4> A call arriving at an extension but not ringing
(Refer to Section 3-D-3.02 “Flexible Ringing
Assignment-Delayed Ringing” for further
information.)

For the above calls, reorder tone sounds after

dialing the feature number for “Directed Call
Pickup” and the directory number of the ringing
extension and the following message appears on
the Message line.
Message: No Incoming Call

6-E-3
(70695)
F. Holding Features

1.00 Hold
Description
Operation
Allows the attendant to hold the current call
Holding a call
temporarily by pressing the HOLD key.
This is effective only for a call on the SRC side of During a conversation with an outside or inside
a LOOP key. party, the SRC indicator of the corresponding
A call on the DES side of the LOOP key can not LOOP key is lit.
be placed on hold.
1. Press the HOLD key.
HOLD
To place a call on hold, press the HOLD key.
• The other party is placed on
To retrieve a held call, press the LOOP key in
hold. The SRC indicator of the
holding status.
corresponding LOOP key starts
flashing in 60 wink.
Programming
• The DES indicator of that
None LOOP key lights, and dial tone
sounds.
Conditions
Retrieving a held call
Up to six calls can be placed on hold at the
attendant console. The SRC indicator is flashing and the DES
indicator is lit.
Calls held by the attendant console can not be
DES
1. Press the LOOP key in holding
retrieved by other extensions.
SRC
status.
Holding the other attendant console and LOOP
• Conversation with the SRC
doorphone calls is impossible.
side party is established.
• The SRC indicator of the
If a held call has not been answered more than a
corresponding LOOP key is lit,
pre-assigned time, transfer recall tone may
the DES indicator light goes
sound at attendant console.
out.
Refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held Call Reminder”
for further information.

If a held call is not answered for more than 30

minutes, it will be disconnected automatically.

6-F-1
2.00 Automatic Hold

Description Operation
Making a call during a conversation with an outside Executing Automatic Hold by pressing the
or extension party causes holding the current ANSWER key or the LOOP key
conversation automatically, and performs calling
on the DES side. During a conversation with a CO call or an
extension on the SRC side of the LOOP key,
Another call arriving during the conversation can another call arrives on another LOOP key.
be answered by pressing the ANSWER key or the
LOOP key, holding the current party automatically, Press the ANSWER key, or the
LOOP
if “Automatic Hold” is set to “Yes” in the Attendant LOOP key where the call is
Management screen. arriving.
To answer the new call by holding or disconnecting
the current call can be assigned by programming. • The first call is held, and the
SRC indicator starts to flash in
Music on Hold is sent to the held party if available. green 60 wink.
For sending Music on Hold, prior assignment is • The SRC indicator of the LOOP
necessary by programming. Refer to Section 3-E- key where call is arriving lights.
1.00 “Music on Hold.” • Speak to the second party.

Programming
(Supplement)
Attendant Management Reference
Executing Automatic Hold without pressing the
Automatic Hold 6-C-10.00 ANSWER key or the LOOP key

While in a conversation with an outside party or

Conditions extension on SRC side of a LOOP key, execute
any of the following operations on DES side of
None
the LOOP key, then the current call is held
automatically.

<Operations>
• Using dial pad
• Pressing the CALL PARK key (programmable
key)
• Pressing the SERIAL key (programmable key)
—Only during a conversation with a CO call.
• Pressing the TOLL CHG key (programmable
key)
—Only during a conversation with an extension
• Pressing the AUTO key (programmable key)
• Pressing the PAGE key
• Pressing the TRG key (programmable key)
• Pressing the One Touch key (programmable
key)

6-F-2
3.00 Call Park-System

Description Operation
This function provides putting a call into the Parking a call
parking place common to the whole system.
Up to 20 calls can be parked with each call park During a conversation with an extension or
area number (01 to 20). outside party,
CALL-PARK key should be assigned as
programmable key in advance. CALL PARK
1. Press the CALL-PARK key
Parked call can be retrieved from any extension (programmable key).
in the system.
• The call is held.
Programming • The SRC indicator starts
Reference
flashing in green 60 wink, the
System Programming
VT Dumb DES indicator is lit, dial tone
“System-Tenant”, Call Park 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00 sounds.
Boundary
2-1 To park the call to an idle
parking area: Dial “*.”
Attendant Management Reference

CALL-PARK key 6-C-10.00 • The call is parked in an idle

parking area. After
confirmation tone sounds, it
Conditions becomes silent.
• Both SRC, DES indicator lights
A call on the DES side of the LOOP key can not
on the LOOP key go out.
be parked.
• The following message appears
on the message line:
In case of no answer in preassigned time, Held
Call Reminder starts.
Message : Call parked at xx
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-2.00 “Held
Call Reminder.”
xx: parking area number (01 to
20)
In case of no answer in 30 minutes after starting
hold, the held party is disconnected.
2-2 To park a call by specifying a
parking area number: Dial the
If Tenant Service is employed, 20 parking areas
parking area number: 01 to 20.
can be split between two tenants in “System-
Tenant”, Call Park Boundary. In this case, each
• Results is the same as dialing
tenant cannot use the other's parking place.
“*” key.
If music source is connected to the system, Music
(Supplement)
on Hold (such as radio) is sent to the parked
Busy tone sounds if all the parking areas or a
party. For sending Music on Hold, prior
specified parking area are occupied.
assignment is necessary by programming.
The following message appears on the message
Refer to Section 3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”
line of CRT.

If all the parking areas are in use:

Message: Call park deny

6-F-3
If the specified parking area is occupied: Retrieving a parked call employing Call Park
System screen
Message : Call park at xx deny
1. Press the F5 key (call park).
F5
xx: parking area number
• Call Park System screen appears
To start conversation again, press the LOOP key. on the screen.

Retrieving a parked call 2. Move the cursor to the desired

There are two ways to retrieve a parked call. F number to be retrieved by pressing
the F4, F5, F6 keys ( , , ).
Retrieving a parked call by pressing the CALL
PARK key (programmable key)
3. Press an idle LOOP key.
1. Press an idle LOOP key. LOOP
LOOP
• The SRC indicator of the LOOP
• The SRC indicator of the LOOP key is lit and dial tone sounds.
key is lit.
Dial tone sounds. 4. Press the F7 key (park retrieve).
F7

2. Press the CALL PARK key. • After hearing confirmation tone,

CALL PARK
speak with the parked party.
• No tone is heard. • The following message appears
on the message line of CRT:

3. Dial the call park area number Message : Call park retrieve from xx.
(01 to 20).
xx : parking area number
• After you hear confirmation
tone, speak with a parked
caller.
• The following message appears
on the message line on CRT
screen:

Message : Call park retrieve from xx

xx: call park area number (01 to 20)

(Supplement)
If no call is parked in a specified parking area,
reorder tone sounds and the following message
appears on the message line:

Message : Call park retrieve deny

6-F-4
G. Transferring Features

1.00 Call Transfer

1.01 Unscreened Call Transfer to
Station
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to transfer a call (extension, During a conversation with an extension or
CO) to an extension user without announcement. outside party
1. Dial the extension number of the
Programming
destination.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb • Ringback tone sounds.
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Transfer Recall 2. Press the RELEASE key.
RELEASE
• Both SRC, DES indicator lights
Conditions go out and the attendant
console becomes silent.
In case of no answer from the destination
extension in 30 minutes, the line will be
• The following message
disconnected.
appears on the message line.
If Music on hold is available, during transferring
<Example>
operation, Music on Hold is sent to the transferred
party until conversation starts. Refer to Section If transferring a call routed via
3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.” trunk group 01 to extension 100:

If transferred call is not answered in preassigned Message : TRG 01 is transferred to Ext.100

interval, Transfer Recall starts to the attendant
console. The time taken to activate this function Changing the transfer destination before pressing
is set by “System-System Timer”, Transfer Recall. the RELEASE key
Refer to Section 3-E-3.00 “Transfer Recall” for 1. Press the CANCEL key.
further information.
CANCEL

2. Dial the extension number of the

new party.

(Supplement)
Instead of pressing the CANCEL key, if you press
the LOOP key whose SRC indicator is flashing in
60 wink, you can talk to the held party again.

6-G-1
1.02 Call Transfer by Camp-on to
Station
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to transfer a call to busy During a conversation with an outside party or
extension. extension. The SRC indicator is lit.
Transferred call will ring the busy extension
1. Press the HOLD key.
automatically when it becomes idle. HOLD

• The SRC indicator starts to

Programming
flash in 60 wink, and the DES
Reference indicator lights.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00 2. Dial the extension number of the

Transfer Recall destination.

• Busy tone sounds on DES side

Conditions of the LOOP key.
Busy status of PITS telephone means all PDNs
3. Press the RELEASE key.
on the destination extension are in use.
RELEASE
• Both SRC and DES indicator
If Camp-on Transfer cannot be set (for example,
lights go out and the attendant
the destination extension is in program mode),
console becomes silent.
the following message appears on the message
• Transferred party is placed on
line on the screen:
hold until the destination
extension answers.
Message: Camp-on deny.
• Ringing starts at the
destination extension, as soon
If camped on call is not answered in preassigned
as it becomes idle.
interval, transfer recall starts at the attendant
If the destination answers,
console.
conversation with the
The time taken to activate transfer recall is set by
transferred party starts.
“System-System Timer”, Transfer Recall.

6-G-2
1.03 Screened Call Transfer to Station
Description Changing the transfer destination before pressing
Allows the attendant to transfer a call (extension, the RELEASE key
CO) to an extension with announcement. 1. Press the CANCEL key.
CANCEL
Programming
None

Conditions 2. Dial the extension number of the

new destination.
If Music on Hold is available, a held party
receives Music on Hold during transfer.
Refer to Section 3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold.”
(Supplement)
Operation
Instead of pressing the CANCEL key, if you press
During a conversation with an outside party or an the LOOP key whose SRC indicator is flashing in
extension 60 wink, you can talk to the held party again.
1. Dial the extension number of the
destination. Retrieving the transferred party if the destination
party does not answer
• Ringback tone sounds. 1. Press the LOOP key which is
DES
flashing in 60 wink.
SRC
2. The called extension on the DES
side answers. LOOP
• Conversation with the
transferred party starts.
• Speak with the called party on
DES side.

3. Press the RELEASE Key.

RELEASE
• Both SRC, DES indicator lights
go out and attendant console
becomes silent.
• The following message
appears on the message line.

<Example>
If transferring a call routed via
trunk group 01 to extension 100:

Message : TRG 01 is connected with Ext.100

6-G-3
1.04 Screened Call Transfer to Trunk
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to transfer a call (extension, During a conversation with an extension or
CO) to an outside party with announcement. outside party
1. Select a CO line.
Programming
None • After selecting the CO line on
DES side of the LOOP key, dial
Conditions tone sounds.
A call placed on hold during call transfer receives
Music on Hold, if available. 2. Dial the telephone number of the
Refer to Section 3-E-1.00 “Music on Hold” for outside party.
further information
• Ringback tone sounds from the
CO line. When the called party
answers, make the announce-
ment.

3. Press the RELEASE key.

RELEASE
• Held call is connected with the
outside destination party, and
the attendant console becomes
silent.
• The following message
appears on the message line
on the screen.

<Example>
If transferring extension 100 via
CO line in the trunk group 01:

Message: Ext.100 is connected with TRG 01

(Supplement )
If busy tone sounds after selecting the CO line,
1. Press the CANCEL key, then
CANCEL repeat the pre-described
operation from step1.

If busy tone or reorder tone sounds after calling

an outside party,
1. Press the CANCEL key, then
CANCEL repeat the pre-described
operation from step 1.

6-G-4
1.05 Unscreened Call Transfer to
Remote
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to transfer a call (extension, During a conversation with an outside party or
CO) to the remote maintenance feature. extension
Modem answer tone is returned instantly, if it is
not in use. 1. Dial the FDN for Remote.

This operation allows the System Administrator • Confirmation tone sounds.

to perform System Administration from a Remote The attendant console is free
Location. to handle another call.
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System • The following message
Administration from a Remote Location” for appears on the message line in
further information. I/O field:

To transfer a call to Remote Maintenance <Example> If an outside party is transferred:

Resource, “FDN for Remote” is used, which is
assigned in “System-Operation”, Remote
Directory Number.
See Section 3-B-3.00 “Floating Directory Number
(FDN)” for details about FDN.
Message : TRG 01 is connected with
Remote Term.
<Example> If an extension is transferred:

For accessing the remote maintenance feature, Message : Ext. 100 is connected with
RMT card must be installed and assigned to the Remote Term.
system.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Configuration-Slot Assignment”, 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00

“System-Operation”,
Remote Directory Number 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00

Conditions
If Music on Hold is assigned, the system sends
Music on Hold to the transferred party during the
transferring operation.
For further detail, refer to Section 3-E-1.00
“Music on Hold.”

If Remote Maintenance Resource is in use, busy

tone is returned to the held party. Automatic
Callback does not function in this case, so the
party should call Remote again when it becomes
idle.

6-G-5
1.06 Unscreened Call Transfer
— to a UCD Group (with OGM)
Description
Allows the attendant to transfer an outside call to
a UCD Group from 01 to 04 (with OGM type).

From version 8.XX, not only the operators but

any extension user can transfer an outside call to
a UCD group (with OGM).

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Special Attended–UCD (1/2)” 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00

Conditions
If all group members are not available to answer
the call, it will be redirected to the Overflow
destination. In this case, the call will be
disconnected if not answered by the Overflow
destination within 60 seconds.
See page 3-D-13 for further information.

Operation
During a conversation with an outside party.
1 Dial the FDN for UCD group (01
to 04).

• The LOOP key is released

automatically.

Feature References
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)–with/without
OGM (Section 3-D-2.06)

6-G-5-1
(40993)
2.00 Heavy Traffic Overflow
Transfer to Station
Description
Up to six calls can arrive at the attendant console
at the same time.
If six calls have arrived and other calls arrive, the
number of the other calls is displayed in the “wait
call” on “LOOP key and Trunk Group” screen.
If the waiting calls remain in the “wait call” for a
specified duration programmed in “System-
System Timer”, Attendant Overflow Time, they will
be transferred automatically to the specified
extension assigned by “Extension-Attendant
Console”, Overflow.
To transfer those calls, set “Overflow transfer” to
“Yes” in the Attendant Management screen.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Conditions
If a call in the queue cannot be transferred to the
preassigned destination, it is called an
overflowed call.
The number of overflowed calls is displayed in
“Over flow = ” of “LOOP key and Trunk Group”
screen.
Calls cannot be transferred in the following
cases:
• The transfer destination is not assigned.
• The destination extension is busy.
• The destination extension has DND assigned.
Operation
None

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00

Attendant Overflow Time
“Extension-Attendant Console”, 9-G-4.01 10-C-28.00
Overflow

Attendant Management Reference

Overflow transfer 6-C-10.00

6-G-6
3.00 Serial Call
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to transfer a CO call to CO call arrives at attendant console.
multiple extensions (up to three extensions)
1. Answer the call by pressing the
sequentially.
ANSWER ANSWER key (programmable
When the first extension hangs up, a call is
key).
transferred to the second extension and the third
extension in sequence automatically without
• SRC indicator lights.
assistance of the attendant console.
Start conversation.
For this function prior assigning of SERIAL key to
a programmable key is necessary.
2. Press the SERIAL key
SERIAL
(programmable key).
Programming

Attendant Management Reference • Outside party is placed on

hold, SRC indicator starts to
SERIAL key 6-C-10.00 flash in 60 winks.
• DES indicator lights.

Conditions 3. Dial the required extension

number.
In case the specified extension is busy or does
not answer within specified duration, call
advances to the next extension.
Specified duration is the preset time assigned in 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each
“Call Forwarding No-Answer Time-Out” by system required extension (up to three)
programming. during silence.
If all of the called extensions answer, serial call is
concluded. If any of the called extensions is busy 5. Press the RELEASE key.
or does not answer, calling the attendant console
RELEASE
starts again automatically. • The SRC and DES indicator
lights go out.

Making a CO outgoing call and transfer it to

extensions
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP

2. Make an outgoing CO call.

Steps 3 to 5 are same as

mentioned above.

6-G-7
4.00 Interposition Call Transfer
Description Conditions
This function allows the attendant console to Transferring a call to another attendant console
make Screened Call Transfer (transferring after is limited to screened call transfer. Unscreened
informing it) to the other attendant console in the call transfer (automatic transfer ) is ineffective.
same tenant, after answering and placing a call
on hold.

Programming
None

Operation
When attendant console 1 receives a call from
extension 100, and transfer it to attendant
console 2.
< I / O Field of Attendant Console 1 > < I / O Field of Attendant Console 2 >
1. Attendant console 1 answers the incoming call
from extension 100 and holds it.
SRC: Ext. 100 Hold SRC:
DES: DES:

2. Attendant console 1 calls attendant console 2.

SRC: Ext. 100 Hold SRC: Ext. 100 Hold
DES: ATT2 Outgoing DES: ATT1 Incoming

3. Attendant console 2 answers.

SRC: SRC: Ext. 100 Hold
DES: ATT2 Talk DES: ATT1 Talk

4. Attendant console 1 presses the RELEASE

key.
SRC: SRC: Ext. 100 Hold
DES: DES:
• Reorder tone sounds.
5. Attendant console 2 presses the
corresponding LOOP key.
SRC: SRC: Ext. 100 Talk
DES: DES:

6-G-8
5.00 Call Transfer via Attendant
Console
Description Operation
The attendant can transfer an outside call held by An extension which has held an outside party
an extension to another extension. calls the attendant console.
The SRC indicator starts flashing in 60 wink, the
Programming DES indicator starts flashing in 240 wink.
None 1. Press the ANSWER key .
ANSWER
Conditions • The DES indicator lights. Start
conversation with the DES side
None
party.
• The SRC indicator remains
flashing in 60 wink.

2. Press the CANCEL key.

CANCEL
• Dial tone sounds from DES
side, and calling starts.
• The SRC indicator is flashing in
60 wink.

3. Dial the telephone number of the

destination.

• Ringback tone sounds.

4. Press the RELEASE key.

RELEASE
• The held call is transferred
automatically and the called
party answers it.
• Both SRC and DES indicator
lights go out and the attendant
console becomes silent.

6-G-9
6.00 Released Link Operation
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to transfer a call by simply During a conversation with an outside or inside
dialing the extension number of the destination party
without pressing the RELEASE key.
If any PDN button on the destination extension is 1. Dial the extension number of the
idle, the call is released from the console and call destination party.
ringing starts at the destination party.
• The first party is placed on
Set “Released link operation” to “Yes” in Attendant hold, and if the destination
Management screen beforehand. party is idle, call ringing starts.
• Both SRC, DES indicator lights
Programming on the LOOP key go out.

Attendant Management Reference

Released link operation 6-C-10.00

Conditions
If the destination is busy or has DND assigned,
transferring is ineffective .
In the former case, pressing the RELEASE key
provides Camp-on Transfer.

6-G-10
7.00 Automatic Redirection If No
Answer
Description
If an incoming outside call ringing on a LOOP key
is not answered within a specified time, it can be
redirected to the extension assigned as the
overflow destination of Attendant Consoles.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00

Attendant Overflow Time
“Extension-Attendant Console”, 9-G-4.01 10-C-28.00
Overflow

Attendant Management Reference

Overflow transfer 6-C-10.00

Conditions
1. Incoming Mode (Day) : ATT
This feature works only for the incoming call
routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is
assigned as “ATT.”

2. “Overflow Transfer” assignment

Set “Overflow transfer” to “Yes” in the
Attendant Management screen of an attendant
console assigned as the Operator 1.

3. “Overflow” extension assignment

If the extension assigned as the overflow
extension is busy, or not assigned, this feature
does not work.
The call continues to ring at an LOOP key.

4. Attendant Overflow Time

The timer which applies to the feature is
“System–System Timer”, Attendant Overflow
Time.

5. Single and Dual Console mode

This feature works in both Single and Dual
Console mode.
Refer to Section 3-D-1.00 “Attendant Console
Operation” for further information.

Operation
None
6-G-11
(30393)
H. Conversation Features

1.00 Conference
Description Operation
The attendant can set up a three-person During a conversation with an outside or inside
conference that includes inside party as well as party
outside party by adding a new party to the
established call. 1. Place a new call while holding
the current party.
The CONF key (programmable key) must be • If the called party answers,
assigned to the attendant console in advance. begin speaking.

On the TSW card, there are eight standard 2. Press the CONF key
CONF
conference trunks provided for this purpose. (programmable key).
By equipping the optional conference expansion
• Both SRC and DES indicators
card (KX-T336104), the number of conference
light. Start a conference.
trunks increases to 64.
To utilize optional conference expansion card,
Finishing the conference
assign “Configuration-System Assignment”, TSW
Additional CONF to “Yes.” 1. Press the RELEASE key.
RELEASE • Both SRC, DES indicator lights
When two members in the conference are outside
go out.
parties, two conference trunks are necessary. In
• If both B and C are outside
all other cases, one conference trunk is enough.
parties, both parties are
disconnected.
If there are no idle conference trunks, pressing
• If both B and C are extension
the CONF key does not function.
users, or either of them is an
extension user, a conversation
Programming
between B and C is
Reference established.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Configuration System Assignment”, 9-C-1.00 10-C-1.00 The following message appears on the message
TSW Additional CONF line:
<Example>
Attendant Management Reference
Message: Ext.100 is connected with TRG (01)
CONF key 6-C-10.00
Changing from conference to conversation with
DES side party by holding SRC side party
Conditions 1. Press the corresponding LOOP
LOOP
key.
Conference call is available in the following
combinations. • The SRC side party is placed
on hold, speak with the DES
• Two outside parties and an attendant
side party.
console
• An outside party, an inside party and an
(Supplement)
attendant console
• Two inside parties and an attendant console To change from conference to conversation with
the SRC side party by holding the DES side
Conference call including another attendant party, press the SPLIT key (call splitting function).
console is unavailable. For further information, refer to Section 6-H-3.00
“Call Splitting.”

6-H-1
2.00 Unattended Conference
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to change a three-party Setting up an unattended conference call
conference including two outside parties to a CO-
During a three-person conference including two
CO call by pressing the CONF key, and observing
outside parties
conversation status through SRC, DES indication
is possible. 1. Press the CONF key
CONF
(programmable key).
For this function, prior assignment of the CONF
key to programmable key is necessary in the • A three-party conference
Attendant Programming. Conversation duration changes to a CO-CO call, and
of the CO-CO call is limited, and can be changed both SRC, DES indicators start
by “Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit. flashing in 120 wink.

Programming Returning to a three-party conference

Reference Both SRC, DES indicators are flashing in 120
System Programming
VT Dumb wink.
“Group-Trunk Group” 9-E-1.00 10-C-14.00 1. Press the associated LOOP key.
DES
CO-CO Duration Limit
SRC
• Establishes a three-person
LOOP
Attendant Management Reference conference, both SRC, DES
indicators light.
CONF key 6-C-10.00
(Supplement)
If there is no idle conference trunk, the attendant
Conditions
can speak with only one outside party.
During a CO-CO call through Unattended
Conference, Unattended Conference Recall Answering unattended conference recall
begins 60 seconds before the CO-CO call
duration is over. During a CO-CO call through the unattended
conference, unattended conference recall starts
During the conversation status between CO-CO 60 seconds before the time limit. Both SRC and
through Unattended Conference, warning tone is DES indicators flash in 240 wink.
sent to both outside parties 15 seconds before the
CO-CO call duration expires. DES 1. Press the associated LOOP key.
SRC
• A three-party conference starts.
LOOP
Both SRC, DES indicators light.

6-H-2
3.00 Call Splitting
Description
The attendant can speak with the SRC side party
and the DES side party alternately while holding
the other party by pressing the SPLIT key.
Programming
None
Conditions
Pressing the CONF key during Call Splitting
introduces a conference call.
Pressing the RELEASE key during Call Splitting
releases the attendant console from the call and a
conversation between the SRC and DES parties
starts.
(Supplement)
During a conversation with the DES side party
while holding the SRC side party, pressing the
LOOP key disconnects the DES side party and
enables a conversation with the SRC side party.
During a conversation with the DES side party
while holding the SRC side party, the attendant
can make a call from the DES side while holding
the SRC side party by pressing the CANCEL key.
During a conversation with the SRC side party
while holding the DES side party, pressing the
LOOP key or CANCEL key does not function.

Operation
During a conversation with an outside or inside
party on SRC side
1. Call another extension or outside
party from DES side.

• The SRC side party is placed

on hold.
• When the called party answers,
begin speaking.

2. Press the SPLIT key.

SPLIT

• Conversation with the SRC side

party starts and the DES side
party is placed on hold.
• The SRC indicator is lit, and the
DES indicator flashes in 60 wink.

3. Press the SPLIT key again.

SPLIT

• Conversation with the DES side

party starts, and the SRC side
party is placed on hold.
• The DES indicator is lit, the
SRC indicator flashes in 60
wink.

4. The attendant can speak with the

SPLIT SRC side party and the DES side
party alternately by every
pressing of the SPLIT key.

6-H-3
4.00 Doorphone Calling
Description Operation
The attendant can make and answer a doorphone Making a doorphone call
call.
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
Up to four doorphones can be connected to the LOOP
system.
• Dial tone sounds.
During a doorphone call, dialing “5” opens the
door for a specified period.
2. Dial the feature number for Door-
Set the duration of the door opener in “Extension-
phone Call (1 to 4) “40” (default),
Doorphone”, Open Duration. When Open
then, dial the doorphone number
Duration is set to “0,” the door opener is
(1 to 4)
unavailable.
• After hearing dial tone, start
Programming
conversation over the door-
Reference phone.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 Opening a door

(03/11)”, 1. Dial “5.”
Doorphone Call (1 to 4) 9-G-3.00 10-C-27.00
“Extension-Doorphone”
• The door opens for the
specified duration.
Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
each doorphone can be assigned by the system
programming in “Extension-Doorphone,”
Tenant.The attendant can place a call to the
doorphone within the same tenant, but cannot
hold or transfer the doorphone call.

When a visitor presses the button on the door-

phone, ping-pong tone sounds twice, then
doorphone call ringing starts.
No answer of the call in 15 seconds cancels the
doorphone call.

Dialing “5” again while the door is open enables

the attendant to prolong the opening duration to
the specified duration assigned in “Extension-
Doorphone”, Open Duration.

6-H-4
(70695)
5.00 Tone Through (End to End
DTMF Signaling)
Description Operation
During a call (extension, outside or doorphone), During a call (extension, outside or doorphone),
this function allows the attendant to send DTMF
1. Press the E-E key
(touch tone) signals to the voice path while E-E
(programmable key).
pressing dial pad buttons after pressing the E-E
key (programmable key).
End to End DTMF Signaling is used to access
network services such as OCC access which
2. Dial the telephone number.
requires touch-tone signals.
• DTMF signal is transmitted
The E-E key should be assigned in Attendant
while dialing.
Management screen.

Programming

Attendant Management Reference

E-E key 6-C-10.00

Conditions
None

6-H-5
6.00 Cancel Key Function
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to get a line for making a call While hearing tone, dialing, or speaking
on the selected LOOP key again by simply
pressing the CANCEL key. 1. Press the CANCEL key.
When CANCEL key is pressed while seizing the CANCEL

selected LOOP key, dial tone will be heard. • Dial tone sounds.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)” 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00

Disconnect Time

Conditions
Pressing the CANCEL key does not function
during a conference call and during a
conversation with the SRC side party with holding
the DES side party.

Cancel Key Function does not work while talking

on DES side without holding a call on SRC side.

When a call is made after pressing the CANCEL

key, it is checked against the system toll
restriction procedure, and a call duration time
count is renewed.

6-H-6
I. Paging Features

1.00 Paging
1.01 Paging All Extensions
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to make paging 1. Press an idle LOOP key and dial
LOOP
announcement through built-in speakers of all the feature number for Station
PITS telephones by dialing the feature number Paging “42” (default), and “0” in
for “Station Paging” and “0.” succession.

Programming • After confirmation tone sounds,

Reference all extension paging through
System Programming built-in speakers is possible.
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00

(03/11)”,
2. Perform paging.
Station Paging

Conditions
Single line telephones (SLT's) can not be paged. 3. An extension answers the page.

If Tenant Service is employed, paging is only

available within the same tenant as the attendant
console.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
If an extension is off-hook or its SP-PHONE is
RELEASE
active, paging is unavailable for the extension.

Current call is parked and paging all extensions

through built-in speaker of all PITS telephones
can be carried out by pressing the PAGE key
during a conversation.
For further information, refer to Section 6-I-1.05
“Call Park and Paging.”
Transferring a call using Paging All Extensions
During a conversation with an extension or
outside party,
1. Dial the feature number for
Station Paging “42” (default), and
“0” in succession.

• After confirmation tone sounds,

extension paging starts.
• The first party is placed on
hold.

2. Perform paging.

3. After an extension answers the

RELEASE page, press the RELEASE key.

• Conversation between the held

party and the paged party
starts. Attendant console
becomes silent.
6-I-1
(70695)
1.02 Group Paging
Description 2. Perform paging.
Allows the attendant to make paging
announcement through built-in speakers of PITS
telephones by specifying the desired Paging
Group.
3. An extension answers the page.
Up to eight paging groups can be assigned to the
system.

Programming
4. Press the RELEASE key.
Reference
System Programming RELEASE
VT Dumb • The call is released from the
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00 attendant console.
(03/11)”,
Station Paging
Transferring a call using Group Paging
During a conversation,
Conditions
1. Dial the feature number for
Single line telephones (SLT's) can not be paged.
Station Paging “42” (default) and
desired paging group number (1
If Tenant Service is employed, paging is only
to 8) in succession.
available within the tenant where the attendant
console belongs.
• Confirmation tone sounds.
The specified paging group
If the designated paging group is being paged by
gets ready to be paged.
another page, busy tone is heard.
• The call is held.
However, group paging can be done within the
range not overlapping the previous paging range.
2. Perform paging.
For instance, when paging is being done to group
1, paging groups 2 to 8 are available for new
paging.

If an extension is off-hook or its SP-PHONE is

3. An extension answers the page.
active, paging is unavailable for the extension.

Current call is parked and Group Paging through

built-in speaker of PITS telephones can be
carried out by pressing the PAGE key during a
4. Press the RELEASE key.
conversation.
For further details, refer to Section 6-I-1.05 “Call RELEASE
• The call is released from the
Park and Paging.”
console.
• Conversation between the held
Operation
party and the paged party
1. Press an idle LOOP key and dial starts.
LOOP the feature number for Station
Paging “42” (default) and paging
group number (1 to 8) in
succession.

• Confirmation tone sounds.

The specified paging group
gets ready to be paged.
6-I-2
(70695)
1.03 Paging External Pagers
Description
Allows the attendant to make paging
announcement through the external pagers by
dialing the feature number for “External Paging.”
Up to two external pagers can be equipped with
this system.
Employing two external pagers or selecting one
pager will be assigned by “System-Operation”,
External Pager 1, 2.
External paging is effective when an external
pager or pagers are connected and assigned for
use by “System-Operation”, External Pager 1, 2.
Confirmation tone from external pagers is
selected by “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone.
Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, paging is available
only in the same tenant.
External paging originated by the attendant can
override external paging from an extension. The
extension will hear reorder tone.
The followings show the paging priorities:
(1)Paging External Pager from an Attendant
Console
(2)TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
(Refer to Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer
From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”)
(3)Paging External Pager from an extension
(this function)
(4)BGM through External Pager

Programming If a lower priority page is active, and a higher

System Programming
“System-Operation (1/3)”,
External Paging 1, 2
“System-Numbering Plan
(03/11)”,
External Paging
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tone
Reference
priority page is actuated, it overrides the lower
one: for instance, if Paging External Pager from
VT Dumb
extension is overridden by Paging External Pager
9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 from an Attendant Console, reorder tone is
returned to the extension who initiates the Paging
9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
External Pager. If TAFAS call or BGM is
9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00 overridden by another higher priority, it is
interrupted and starts again when the higher
priority is finished.

6-I-3
(70695)
Operation
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
• The SRC indicator is lit, and
dial tone is heard.
2. (Selecting external pager 1)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “1” in
succession.
(Selecting external pager 2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “2” in
succession.
(Selecting external pagers 1 and
2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “0” in
succession.
• After confirmation tone, the
attendant console is connected
to the external paging
equipment.
3. Perform paging.
4. An extension answers the page.
5. Press the RELEASE key.
RELEASE
• The call is released from the
console.
6-I-4
Transferring a call using Paging External Pagers
During a conversation,
1. (Selecting external pager 1)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “1” in
succession.
(Selecting external pager 2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “2” in
succession.
(Selecting external pagers 1 and
2)
Dial the feature number for
“External Paging” and “0” in
succession.
• After confirmation tone sounds,
the attendant console is
connected to the external
pager.
• The other party is held.
2. Perform paging.
3. An extension answers the page.
4. Press the RELEASE key.
RELEASE
• The call is released from the
console.
• Conversation between the held
party and the paged party
starts.
1.04 Paging All Extensions and
External Pagers
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to make paging 1. Press an idle LOOP key and dial
LOOP
announcement through all built-in speakers of the feature number for Station
PITS and external pagers 1 and 2 at the same Paging “42” (default) and “ ” in
time. succession.
External paging access tone can be set in the
system program. • Confirmation tone sounds.

Programming 2. Perform paging.

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00

External Paging 1, 2
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
(03/11)”,
External Paging
Station Paging 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 3. An extension answers the page.
External Pager-Tone

Conditions
4. Press the RELEASE key.
If Tenant Service is employed, paging is available
RELEASE
only in the same tenant. • The call is released from the
console.
If an extension is off-hook or its SP-PHONE is
active, paging is unavailable for the extension.
Transferring the held party using Paging All
Paging All Extensions and External Pagers can Extensions and External Pagers
be carried out after parking a call by pressing the
PAGE key during conversation. 1. Dial the feature number for
For further information, refer to Section 6-I-1.05 Station Paging “42” (default)
“Call Park and Paging.” and “ ” in succession.

Paging All Extensions and External Pagers • After the confirmation tone
originated by the attendant can override external sounds, the other party is held.
paging from an extension unless the extension is
paging other extensions at the same time. The 2. An extension answers the page.
extension will hear reorder tone when overridden.

This function originated by the attendant

overrides TAFAS call and BGM through External
Pager, which are interrupted and start again 3. Press the RELEASE key.
when the paging is finished. RELEASE

For further information about TAFAS, refer to • The call is released from the
Section 3-D-2.04 “Trunk Answer From Any console.
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.” • Conversation between the held
party and the paged party
starts.

6-I-5
(70695)
1.05 Call Park and Paging
Description Operation
Allows the attendant to park a call (extension or During a conversation
outside) and perform paging by simply pressing
1. Press the PAGE key.
the PAGE key (Programmable key). PAGE
When the PAGE key is pressed during a
• The other party is parked and
conversation, a call is parked in an idle call
paging is possible.
parking area and paging mode is established
• The following display appears
automatically.
on the message line:
One of the following five types of paging can be
Message: Call Parked at xx
assigned to the PAGE key by the system
programming:
parking area
Paging All Extensions number: 01
Paging External Pager 1 to 20
Paging External Pager 2
Paging External Pagers 1 and 2 2. Announce the call park
Paging All Extensions and External Pagers. destination number : 01 to 20.

Programming
Reference
System Programming 3. An extension answers the page.
VT Dumb

“Extension-Attendant Console”, 9-G-4.01 10-C-28.00

ATT 1-PAG
ATT 2-PAG
4. Press the RELEASE key.
Conditions RELEASE
• The call is released from the
This function is available only during a console.
conversation. • The paged extension retrieves
a parked call and starts
speaking.

6-I-6
2.00 BGM through External
Pager
Description
The system can provide up to two external music
sources. The music source can be broadcasted
as background music (BGM) through external
pagers.
The attendant can switch on/off the BGM within
the same tenant.
To switch on/off the BGM, same feature number
for “BGM Through External Pager” is used.
Dialing the feature number while BGM is on
stops the BGM, and starts the BGM while BGM is
off.
Conditions
If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
each external music equipment and external
pager can be determined by the system
programming “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
External Pager-Tenant and Music Source-Tenant.
BGM will be terminated during external paging.
Operation
Switching on the BGM
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP

If external music equipment and an external • The SRC indicator lights and
pager are connected, this function is not dial tone sounds.
executed unless “System-Operation”, External
Music Source 1, 2 and External Paging 1, 2 are 2. Dial the feature number for BGM
assigned to “Yes.” through External Pager “77”
(default).
Assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External
Pager-BGM to “Yes” to use this function. This • Confirmation tone sounds, then
assignment can be done to each external pager. BGM is heard from external
pager.
Also assign “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”,
Music Source-For Use to either “BGM” or “Hold & Switching off the BGM
BGM.” This assignment can be done to each 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
external music equipment. LOOP

• The SRC indicator lights, dial

Programming tone sounds.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 2. Dial the feature number for BGM
External Paging 1, 2 through External Pager “77”
External Music Source 1, 2 (default).
“System-Numbering Plan (08/11)”, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
BGM Through External Paging • After confirmation tone sounds,
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 BGM from external pager
External Pager-Tenant 10-C-19.00
stops.
External Pager-BGM
Music Source-Tenant 10-C-20.00
Music Source-For Use

6-I-7
(70695)
J. Other Features

1.00 Night Service

1.01 Flexible Night Service
Description Operation
Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1 Changing Night Answer Point by dialing the
(Attendant Console or extension user) to change feature number
the assigned night answer destination on a CO
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
line basis. LOOP
The attendant assigned as Operator 1 can
• The SRC indicator lights and
change the night answer destination by
dial tone sounds.
employing one of the following two ways.
<1> By dialing the feature number for “Flexible
Night Service.”
2. Dial the feature number for
<2> By employing the CO Management Screen
Flexible Night Service “72”
of the attendant console.
(default) and “CO ID (physical
number).”
To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO
lines belong to this trunk group are covered by
3-1 (Setting night answer point to
this assignment.
external pager 1)
If FIXED is selected for above setting, the
assigned night answer destination can not be
Dial “ 1.”
changed by the Operator 1.
• Confirmation tone sounds, and
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service the LOOP key is released
is almost the same. automatically.
The difference is: • The following display appears
on the message line:
Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
or Extension) can change the night Message : Flexible Night Service Set-UNA1
answer destination.
Fixed A group of extensions (Night 3-2 (Setting night answer point to
Answer Group) can be assigned as external pager 2)
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode Dial “ 2.”

• Confirmation tone sounds, and

Programming the LOOP key is released
automatically.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb • The following display appears
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 on the message line:
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00 Message : Flexible Night Service Set-UNA2
Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
(08/11)”,
Flexible Night Service

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, the night answer
destination can only be changed for a CO line in
the same tenant by the Operator 1.
6-J-1
(70695)
 3-3 (Setting night answer point to 3-4 (Setting night answer point to
an extension) Remote)

Dial the extension directory Dial “Remote Directory

number. Number.”

• Confirmation tone sounds and • Confirmation tone sounds, the

the LOOP key is released LOOP key is released
automatically. automatically.
• The following display appears • The display below appears on
on the message line: the message line:

<Example> <Example>
Message : Flexible Night Service Set-Ext.1000 Message : Flexible Night Service Set-Remote

6-J-2
Operation
Changing Night Answer point by employing CO Management screen

(4) 1. Press the F4 key (CO manage).

CO
Manage • CO Management screen appears on the display.

CO ID TRG No.& CO Name CO Status Night Answer

1011 16 : DDD01
1012 01 : DDD02 UNA 1
F4

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function
& TRG Page Page Select

(2) (3)
2. Press the F2 key (next page), or the F3 key (previous page).
Next Previous
Page Page
• Obtain the desired screen.

F2 or F3

(8)
3. Press the F8 key (function select).
Function
Select • The following function field appears.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
LOOP Function
Select Memory
& TRG Select

F8

(4)
4. Move the cursor to Night Answer field by pressing the F4 key
( ).

CO Status Night Answer

UNA 1

F4

6-J-3
(2) (3)
5. Move the cursor to the target CO ID by pressing the F2 key
( ) or the F3 key ( ).

F2 or F3

(6) 6. Select “UNA1,” “UNA2” “Ext.” or “Remote” by pressing the F6

Select key (select).

UNA 1 : External Pager 1

UNA 2 : External Pager 2
Ext. : Extension ☛
Remote: Remote maintenance port
F6
☛ If “EXT.” is selected, the extension directory number must
be entered successively.
(7)
7. Press the F7 key (memory).
Memory

F7

6-J-4
1.02 Switching of Day/Night Mode
Description Operation
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either Changing DAY mode to NIGHT mode
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually
While the NIGHT key indicator is off,
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or
Extension) at any time desired. 1. Press the NIGHT key for more
If Manual Switching mode is selected, the than one second.
attendant assigned as Operator 1 can switch day NIGHT

mode to night and vice versa by pressing the • The indicator on the NIGHT key
NIGHT key. lights.
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “System- • The system is now in NIGHT
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.” mode.

The attendant assigned as Operator 1, however, Changing NIGHT mode to DAY mode
can override the Auto Mode setting, that is
While the NIGHT key indicator is lit in green,
Manual Mode is established, by dialing the
feature number for “Night Service Manual Mode 1. Press the NIGHT key for more
Set.” To restore the Auto mode, dial the feature than one second.
NIGHT
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
• The indicator light on the
Programming NIGHT key goes out.
Reference
• The system is now in DAY
System Programming mode.
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-4.00 Changing to “Manual” mode from “Auto” mode
Night Service
Auto Start Time 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
(08/11)”, 2. Dial the feature number for Night
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel Service Manual Mode Set “71 ”
Night Service Manual Mode (default).
Set
Night Service Manual Mode • The following message appears
Cancel on the message line:

Message: Night Service Manual Mode Set

Conditions
If tenant service is employed, night service Changing to “Auto” mode from “Manual” mode
assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
In this case, the assignment in “System-
Operation (3/3)” is applied to Tenant 1 and the
assignment in “System-Tenant” is applied to
Tenant 2. 2. Dial the feature number for Night
Service Manual Mode Cancel
“71#” (default).

• The following message appears

on the message line:

Message: Night Service Manual Mode Cancel

6-J-5
(70695)
2.00 Account Code Entry
Operation
Description
Entering an account code when calling an outside
When placing an outgoing call or during a party.
conversation, account codes can be recorded on
the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
by entering an account code (up to 10 digits) for
accounting and billing purposes. • The SRC indicator lights, dial
Assigning the ACCOUNT key to a programmable tone sounds .
key must be done by Attendant Management
screen. 2. Dial the feature number for
“ARS/Local CO Line Access.”
Programming
• Dial tone 2 sounds.
Attendant Management Reference
3. Press the ACCOUNT key
ACCOUNT
ACCOUNT key 6-C-10.00 (programmable key).

• Dial tone sounds.

Conditions • The following message appears
You can enter an account code during or after a on the message line in I/O field:
call before hanging up.
Message: Enter account code
Only numbers 0 through 9 can be entered as an
account code. 4. Dial an account code (0 through
9, up to 10 digits).
Entering 11 or more digits as an account code
without the delimiter is invalid and causes alarm • The account code appears on
tone. the message line in I/O field.

Enter “#” as the delimiter to conclude an account 5. Dial “#.”

code.
• The account code is stored.
• The message on the
Input/Output field disappears,
and dial tone sounds .

6. Dial the telephone number of the

outside party.

(Supplement)
To correct input errors in step 4, enter an account
code again after pressing “* .”

6-J-6
Entering an account code during a conversation Correcting an input error
with an outside party
While entering an account code (before entering
ACCOUNT
1. Press the ACCOUNT key the delimiter “#”)
(programmable key).
1. Dial “* .”
• The following message
appears on the message line in
I/O field:
2. Dial the intended account code.
Message: Enter Account Code

2. Dial an account code (0 through

9, up to 10 digits).
After entering the delimiter “#”
• The account code appears on
the message line in I/O field. 1. Press the ACCOUNT key
ACCOUNT
(programmable key).
3. Dial “#.”

• The account code is stored and

the messages on the message 2. Dial the intended account code.
line disappears.

Note: You can continue a conversation while

entering the account code.
(Supplement)
Entering an account code after finishing Correcting the error after entering the delimiter
conversation before going on-hook “#” is possible only when making a call or during
1. While hearing reorder tone, a conversation.
ACCOUNT
press the ACCOUNT key
(programmable key). Canceling the account code before entering “#”
key
• Dial tone sounds and the 1. Press the ACCOUNT key
ACCOUNT
following message appears: (programmable key).

Message: Enter Account Code

2. Dial an account code (0 through

9, up to 10 digits).

• The account code appears on

the message line in I/O field.

3. Dial “#.”

• The account code is stored and

the messages on the message
line disappear.
• Reorder tone sounds again.

6-J-7
3.00 Secret Dialing
Description Conditions
During speed dialing or calling by Extension When storing a speed dialing code, entering “[”
Directory, all or part of the telephone numbers that only without entering “]”, causes all the digits
appear on the CRT screen can be concealed. The entered after “[” to be hidden.
secret portion appears with “ .”
Operation
The dialing numbers are registered by “System-
None
Speed Dial-System.” When storing a number,
bracket the secret part that you want to hide with
[ ]. Then the part does not appear on the CRT
screen.

It is assignable to print out the secret part onto

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) by
assigning “System-Operation”, Print Secret Dial to
Yes.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.00 10-C-4.00

Print Secret Dial 9-D-8.00 10-C-12.00
“System-Speed Dialing-System”

6-J-8
4.00 Message Waiting
Description
Allows the attendant to indicate to an extension
that a message is waiting for him or her, by turning
on the MESSAGE indicator (button) on the called
extension.
The extension user who received the message
waiting indication can call back the message
sender by simply going off-hook and pressing the
red lit MESSAGE indicator (button).
This feature is useful when the called extension is
busy or does not answer the call.
UP to 500 message waiting indications can be set
for the whole system.
Programming
• A Single Line Telephone without
MESSAGE lamp.
(2) The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for the system or
tenant 1/2 has been assigned.
In this case, the following message is
shown on the message is line of Attendant
Console screen:
Message: MW(Message Waiting) isn’t accepted.
3. Tenant Service
The maximum number of message waiting
indications available for Tenant 1 and 2 is
determined by "System–Tenant” Message
Waiting Boundary.

Reference 4. Setting of the multiple message waiting

System Programming
VT Dumb
indications
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
(1) More than one message sender can leave
Message Waiting Boundary
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00 message waiting indications to the same
(07/11)”, extension at the same time.
Message Cancel
(2) Even if the same message sender sets
message waiting indications to the same
Conditions extension more than once, this leaves only
one message on the called extension.
1. Suitable Telephones:
5. The MESSAGE indicator on the message
(1) Message Sender
receiver's extension will be turned off when:
• Attendant Console (1) The message receiver calls back the
• A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE message sender by pressing the red lit
button.* MESSAGE button or by dialing the feature
• Any Single Line Telephone number for “Message Waiting Reply”, and
(2) Message Receiver it was answered by the message sender
(or by another extension using Call Pickup
• A PITS telephone with a MESSAGE
or an SDN button).* 1
button.*
• A Single Line Telephone with MESSAGE (2) Message waiting indication is canceled by
lamp the message sender.* 1
* Refer to <Supplement> on page 4-I-17 for (3) Message waiting indications are canceled
further information. by the message receiver.* 2
2. Reorder Tone * 1 The indicator may not be turned off, if there
The attendant who attempts to leave message are other message waiting indications sent by
waiting indication may hear the reorder tone in other extensions.
the following cases. * 2 All message waiting indications are canceled
(1) Receiver's extension is: at once.

• A PITS telephone without a MESSAGE

button.

6-J-9
(70695)
Operation
Setting the Message Waiting Indication of
another extension
1. Dial the extension number.

• Ringback tone, busy tone or

DND tone sounds.

2. Press the MSG key.

MSG

• After confirmation tone sounds,

the following message is
shown on the message line.

<Example>
Message: MW(Message Waiting) at EXT. 100

Canceling the Message Waiting Indication left on

the extension
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP

2. Dial the feature number for

Message Cancel “#9” (default)
and the extension number of the
message receiver in succession.

6-J-9-1
(30393)
5.00 Remote Station Feature
Control
Description Programming
Allows the attendant to cancel or set the following Reference
System Programming
features assigned to each extension: VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (08/11)”, 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00

Features to be canceled: Remote Station Lock Set
• DND (Do Not Disturb) Remote Station Lock Cancel
• Electronic Station Lock Out Remote DND Set
• FWD (Call Forwarding) Remote DND Cancel
(It is also possible to cancel FWD temporarily.) Remote FWD Cancel
Remote FWD Cancel-OneTime
Features to be set:
• DND (Do Not Disturb)
Conditions
• Electronic Station Lock Out
When an extension is locked by the operator,
This operation can be done by employing one of unlocking by the locked extension itself is
the following ways. impossible.
<1> By employing Extension Management
Screen
<2> By dialing the associated feature number

The attendant can also set or cancel the

electronic station lock on each pickup group by
employing Pickup Group Management Screen of
the attendant console.
For further information, refer to Section 6-C-8.00
“Pickup Group Management Screen.”

6-J-10
(70695)
Operation
Setting/Canceling “DND”; and Canceling “FWD” by employing Extension Management
screen

(2) 1. Press the F2 key (extension manage).

Extension
Manage • Extension Management screen appears on the display.

No. FWD/DND Lock

100
101
F2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous No./Name Function
& TRG Page Page Change Select

(2) (3)
Next Previous 2. By pressing the F2 key (next page) or the F3 key (previous
Page Page page), obtain the desired screen.

F2 or F3

(8)
3. Press the F8 key (function select).
Function
Select
• The following function field appears.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
LOOP Function
Select Memory
& TRG Select

F8

(4) (5)
4. Move the cursor to the FWD/DND field by pressing the F4 key
( ) or the F5 key ( ).

No FWD/DND Lock

F4 or F5

6-J-11
(2) (3)
5. By pressing the F2 key ( ) or the F3 key ( ), move the
cursor to the target extension number to be set/canceled “DND”
or canceled “FWD.”

Note: Assigning FWD is unavailable by this operation.

F2 or F3

(6)
6. Select setting item by pressing the F6 key (select).
Select For canceling the function, select mark.

F6

(7) 7. Press the F7 key (memory) to store the selected data.

Memory

F7

6-J-12
Setting/Canceling “Electronic Station Lock Out” by employing Extension Management screen
For step 1 to 3, refer to the procedure for Setting/Canceling DND.

(4) (5) 4. Move the cursor to Lock field by pressing the F4 key ( ) or the
F5 key ( ).
No FWD/DND Lock
100

F4 or F5

(2) (3) 5. Move the cursor to the target extension number to be set/
canceled “Electronic Station Lock” by pressing the F2 key ( )
or the F3 key ( ).

F2 or F3

(6) 6. Select the setting item by pressing the F6 key (select).

For canceling “Electronic Station Lock,” select mark.
Select

F6

(7) 7. Press the F7 key (memory) to store the selected data.

Memory

F7

6-J-13
Setting/Canceling “Electronic Station Lock Out” to Pickup Group by employing
Pickup Group Management screen

(3)
1. Press the F3 key (pickup G. manage).
Pickup G.
Manage • Pickup Group Management screen appears on the display.

Pickup Group Management Jun. 15, '91 THU 12:00 PM

: Group Station Lock

F3 Group #01 ~ #08 Group #09 ~ #16
01 09
02 10
03
04
05
06

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Function
Select Memory
& TRG Select

(2) (3) (4) (5)

2. Move the cursor to the pickup group number to be set/canceled
“Electronic Station Lock” by pressing the F2 key through the F5
keys ( , , , ).

F2 ~ F5

(6)
3. Select “ ” for locking , “ ” for canceling locking by
Select pressing the F6 key (select).

F6

(7)
4. Press the F7 key (memory) to store the selected data.
Memory

F7

6-J-14
Using the feature number for “Remote Station Using the feature number for “Remote FWD
Lock Set”/“Remote Station Lock Cancel” Cancel”

1. Press an idle LOOP key. 1. Press an idle LOOP key.

LOOP LOOP

• The SRC indicator lights and • The SRC indicator lights and
dial tone sounds. dial tone sounds.

2-1 (For setting “Electronic Station 2. Dial the feature number for
Lock”) “Remote FWD Cancel” and the
Dial the feature number for extension number to be canceled
“Remote Station Lock Set” and FWD in succession.
the extension number to be set
Station Lock in succession. • Confirmation tone sounds and
the LOOP key is released
2-2 (For canceling “Electronic automatically.
Station Lock”)
Dial the feature number for (Supplement)
“Remote Station Lock Cancel”
For canceling “FWD” feature temporarily, dial the
and the extension number to be
feature number for “Remote FWD Cancel-One
canceled electronic station lock
Time” and the extension number to be canceled
in succession.
FWD in succession.
• Confirmation tone sounds, and
the LOOP key is released
automatically.

Using the feature number for “Remote DND Set”/

“Remote DND Cancel”

LOOP
1. Press an idle LOOP key.

• The SRC indicator of the LOOP

key lights, and dial tone
sounds.

2-1 (For setting “DND”)

Dial the feature number for
“Remote DND Set” and the
extension number to be set
DND in succession.

2-2 (For canceling “DND”)

Dial the feature number for
“Remote DND Cancel” and the
extension number to be
canceled DND in succession.

• Confirmation tone sounds, and

the LOOP key is released
automatically.

6-J-15
6.00 Dial Tone Transfer
Description Operation
The attendant can alter the toll restriction level of Altering the toll restriction level of the extension
the extension user for only one call. user for only one call

TOLL-CHG key must be assigned as a program- There comes an incoming extension call.
mable key by the Attendant Management screen.
1. Press the ANSWER key.
Programming ANSWER
• The SRC indicator lights. Start
Attendant Management Reference conversation with the
extension. The extension asks
TOLL-CHG key 6-C-10.00 the attendant to change the toll
restriction level.

Conditions 2. Press the TOLL-CHG key

TOLL CHG
(programmable key).
Toll restriction level to be assigned for an exten-
sion must be the same or lower than that of
• The extension is placed on
attendant console.
hold.
• The SRC indicator flashes in 60
wink, and the DES indicator
lights.

3. Dial the desired toll restriction

level (01 to 16).

• The SRC indicator light goes

out and the call is released
from the console.
• New dial tone is returned to the
extension.

6-J-16
7.00 Search by Name/Department
Description
Conditions
The attendant can search the desired extension
number by entering the name and department of The attendant can make an extension call after
the extension in the Extension Directory screen. searching.

The following three basic entry patterns are
available for searching, assuming that number
means extension number, name means exten-
sion name, and (CR) means pressing the RE-
TURN key.
“*” can be entered as a wild card for searching
extension names and departments.
• For displaying all contents of Extension Direc-
tory.

• Search Name (CR) - Seaching by specifying SEARCH * (CR)

extension name only. SEARCH /* (CR)
• Search/Department (CR) - Searching by SEARCH */* (CR)
specifying department only.
• Search Name/Department (CR) - Searching by This procedure assumes the following exten-
specifying extension name and department. sions are in the Extension Directory.

Programming No. Ext. Name Department

Refer to Section 13-B “Extension Directory 1000 Jack Account

Mode.” 1001 James Project
1002 Betty Sales

Execute: SEARCH Ja * (CR).

Extension name of “Jack” and “James” will be
listed.

• For searching by specifying a part of extension

name.
SEARCH - - - *

Input a part of extension name

• For searching by specifying a part of depart-

ment name.
SEARCH / ∆∆*
Input a part of Department Name

• For searching by specifying a part of extension

name and department name:
SEARCH * / ∆∆*

6-J-17
Operation (Supplement)
Searching by specifying extension name and In case several extensions match the search
department name. criteria, all subjects appear.

This procedure assumes the following extensions In case no extension match the search criteria,
are in the Extension Directory. the following message appears on the message
line.
No. Ext. Name Department
Message: Cannot search by Name/Department
1000 Jack Account
1001 James Project For calling the searched extension, refer to
1002 Betty Sales Section 6-D-3.02 “Inter Office Calling by Exten-
2000 Jack Account
sion Directory Screen.”
1. Enter “SEARCH.”

• The following message appears on the Input

line:

Input: SEARCH

2. Press the space key once, then enter the

extension name “Jack.”

• The following message appears on the Input

line:

Input: SEARCH Jack

3. Enter “/” and the department name “account.”

• The following message appears on the Input

line:

Input: SEARCH Jack/account

4. Press the RETURN key.

• The corresponding extensions will be

searched and displayed on the Extension
Directory screen.

Extension Name Department No. BLF

Jack Account 1000

Jack Account 2000

6-J-18
8.00 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back
Description Conditions
Up to four OGM’s can be recorded by the Operator (1)Tenant Service
1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so that If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
different messages can be used for different each DISA card is determined by the system
situations. programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.
The Operator 1 of each tenant can record and
The following four types of OGM can be recorded play back the OGM within the same tenant.
respectively:
DISA, OGM1, OGM2 and W-UP (Wake-up) (2) Recording of OGM
• OGM recording is executed by selecting an
OGM for outside parties OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the
OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who following four types:
called the system via DISA feature. 1. OGM1 for UCD with OGM
(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System 2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM
Access (DISA).”) 3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
OGM for OGM1 and OGM2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature. • If the type of multiple DISA cards are the
(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution same in a tenant, the same message is
(UCD)-with OGM.”) recorded for them at a time.

OGM for extension users (3)Playing back of OGM

OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wake-
up message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with
OGM (Wake-up Call).”)
Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.
A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to
four DISA cards can be installed to the system.
Usage of each DISA card is determined by the
system programming.
(See Section 9-K-1.00 “Special Attended-DISA.”)
• The following two ways are available:
A. By selecting an OGM type
B. By designating the logical number of
each DISA card directly.
• If there are multiple DISA cards of the same
type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
type is selected to play back, playback starts
from the lowest DISA card physical number.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00

(09/11)”,
OGM Record
OGM Playback
“Special Attended-DISA”, For Use 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00

6-J-19
(70695)
Operation
Recording OGM Playing back OGM
1. Press an idle LOOP key. 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP LOOP
• The SRC indicator lights and
dial tone sounds. • The SRC indicator lights and
dial tone sounds.
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Record “791” (default) and the 2. Dial the feature number for OGM
resource number (1 to 4) in Playback “792” (default) and a
succession. number below in succession.
(Resource number) (Resource number)
1: OGM1 for UCD 1: OGM1 for UCD
2: OGM2 for UCD 2: OGM2 for UCD
3: OGM for DISA 3: OGM for DISA
4: OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) 4: OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
• The following message appears
on the screen and confirmation (“* ” and DISA No.)
tone sounds. * 1 : selects Card 1
* 2 : selects Card 2
Message: xxxxxxxx recording: 00 sec * 3 : selects Card 3
* 4 : selects Card 4
UCD-OGM1 or
UCD-OGM2 or • The following message
DISA-OGM or appears on the screen. After
Wake Up OGM confirmation tone sounds,
playback starts.
3. Begin your message.
Message: xxxxxxxx playing: 00 sec

4. Dial “#” to conclude recording. UCD-OGM1 or

UCD-OGM2 or
• Playback starts automatically
DISA-OGM or
through the handset or headset,
Wake Up OGM
the following message appears
on the screen.
• After playback finishes, the
SRC indicator remains lit, and
Message: xxxxxxxx playing: 00 sec
no tone sounds.
• After playback finishes, the
(Supplement)
SRC indicator remains lit, and
no tone sounds. In step 2, if you wish to interrupt and finish
playback, press “#.”
(Supplement) During playback you can start playback again
In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is from the beginning by dialing “* .”
terminated and playback starts automatically.
Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4
afterward.
In step 3, if you wish to change the message
during recording, you can start recording again by
dialing “* .”
In Step 4, if you wish to interrupt and finish
playback, dial “#.”
6-J-20
(40993)
9.00 Trunk Verify

Description Operation
Allows the attendant to verify the status of 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
specified trunk.
• The SRC indicator lights and dial
The TRG key (programmable key) must be tone sounds.
assigned to the attendant console.
TRG
2. Press the TRG key (programmable
Programming key).
Reference
System Programming VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, PITS
9-D-1.03 10-C-5.00
Programming Password 3. Dial “ * .”

Attendant Management Reference

TRG key 6-C-10.00

4. Dial the four-digit password
(PITS programming password). ☛1

Conditions
The attendant can place a call by specifying a
trunk but cannot hold or transfer it. 5. Dial the desired trunk port physical
number (four digits) ☛2
When specified trunk is busy, busy tone sounds.
• Another dial tone sounds, and the
Verifying a trunk can be done only when a call is specified trunk is seized.
placed from SRC side.
☛1 The PITS programming
password is used for PITS
programming and Trunk Verify.

☛2 Refer to Section 14-F-4.00

“Testing the Ports” for details
about trunk port physical
number.

6-J-21
10.00 CO Access Control
Description Operation
The attendant can control CO lines to prevent Setting CO busy out by dialing the feature
them from being accessed from extensions by number
employing CO Management screen.
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP
If CO busy out is assigned to a CO line, both
extensions and attendant consoles cannot access • The SRC indicator lights and
the line. dial tone sounds.
Refer to Section 3-F-8.00 “CO Busy Out” for
further information. 2. Dial the feature number for Busy
Out Trunk “78 ” (default) and
If CO access ctrl is assigned to a CO line, exten- trunk port physical number in
sions cannot access the line. succession.

CO busy out can also be set by dialing the • Confirmation tone sounds and
feature number for “Busy Out Trunk.” the LOOP key is released
automatically.
Programming
Reference Note:
System Programming
VT Dumb
To cancel “CO Busy Out,” dial the feature number
“System-Numbering Plan (09/11)”, 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00 for “Unbusy Trunk” and trunk port physical
Busy Out Trunk
number in succession.
Unbusy Trunk

Conditions
None

6-J-22
(70695)
Operation
CO access control by employing CO Management screen

(4) 1. Press the F4 key (CO manage).

CO
Manage • CO Management screen appears on the display.

CO ID & BLF TRG No.& CO Name CO Status Night Answer

1111 01 : DDD02 UNA 1
1112 02 : EEE03
F4

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

LOOP Next Previous Function
& TRG Page Page Select

(2) (3)
Next Previous 2. By pressing the F2 key (next page) or the F3 key (previous
Page Page page), obtain the desired screen.

F2 or F3

(8)
3. Press the F8 key (function select).
Function
Select
• The following function field appears.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
LOOP Function
& TRG Select Memory
Select

F8

(4)
4. By pressing the F4 key ( ), move the cursor to the CO status
field.

CO Status Night Answer

UNA 1

F4

6-J-23
(2) (3)
5. Move the cursor to the target CO ID by pressing the F2 key
( ) or the F3 key ( ).

F2 or F3

(6)
6. Select “CO busy out” or “CO access ctrl” by pressing the F6 key
Select (select).
If mark is selected, the CO is returned to normal
status.

F6

(7) 7. Press the F7 key (memory).

Memory
• Entered data is stored.

F7

6-J-24
11.00 Power Failure Operation

Description Programming
At the time of power failure, power is supplied to None
the attendant console from backup battery of the
system. Conditions
During power failure, the attendant console can When the backup battery is not provided, the
execute any other operations than the operations attendant console is not operable.
below:
Call processing is not interrupted when power is
• Operation using CRT display failed and when power is restored.
• Operation using function keys (F1 through
F8).
• Operation using full keyboard.

6-J-25
12.00 Intercept Routing-No
Answer (IRNA)
Description
If an incoming CO call is not answered in a
specified period, or if a held incoming CO call is
not answered in a programmed period after Held
Call Reminder or Unscreened Call Transfer
Recall or Unattended Conference Recall, the calls
can be transferred to an Attendant Console
programmed.
The destination of Intercept Routing during day
and night are assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”,
Intercept Routing (Day) and Intercept Routing
(Night) on a trunk group basis.
Set the time taken to start Intercept Routing in
“System-System Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-
Out (System) and Intercept Routing Time-Out
(DISA) for DISA calls.
For details of DISA, refer to Section 3-D-2.02
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA)”.
If the destination is not currently available to
receive the transferred call, Intercept Routing
does not work. However, Hunting function
becomes active, if programmed.
If the destination extension of direct dialing-in CO
calls is in the data line security mode, IRNA
feature does not work on it.
Refer to Section 4-I-6.00 “Data Line Security” for
further information.
Operation
Answering an incoming call from trunk, un-
screened call transfer recall, Held Call Reminder,
or call park recall
1. The SRC indicator is flashing.
DES

SRC
Programming LOOP

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb 2. Answer the incoming call by
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 ANSWER
pressing the ANSWER key or the
Intercept routing (Day) LOOP key.
Intercept routing (Night)
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00 • The SRC indicator of the LOOP
Intercept Routing Time-Out LOOP key changes from flashing to
(System) being lit.
Intercept Routing Time Out
(DISA)
Answering Unattended Conference Recall
Conditions DES 1. Both SRC, DES indicators are
flashing (SRC, DES are both CO
Intercept Routing-No Answer works for the SRC
lines).
following incoming CO calls. LOOP

1. All incoming CO calls other than calls

2. Answer the calls by pressing the
placed on DIL1 : N, Private CO, Attendant
ANSWER key or the LOOP key.
Consoles, Remote and UCD ANSWER

2. Transfer Recall calls (except those to

• Both SRC, DES indicators of
Attendant Consoles)
the LOOP key change from
3. Held Call Reminder calls (except those to
LOOP flashing to being lit.
Attendant Consoles, calls on Exclusive
Hold, calls on hold on Private CO lines)
4. An incoming outside call routed via DISA/
3. Conference call is established.
DID which comes in on an extension in
Begin speaking.
DND mode.
Call Forwarding and Do not Disturb are not • If conference trunk or AGC
effective for this function. trunk is not available, the SRC
side party is held and conversa-
tion continues on the DES side.

6-J-26
(30393)
13.00 Remote Timed Reminder
– One Time
Description Operation
Allows the Operator 1 or 2 (Attendant Console or Setting Timed Reminder to an extension
PITS with display) to set “Timed Reminder” 1. Press an idle LOOP key.
feature to any extension. LOOP

(Refer to Section 4-I-3.00, 5-G-3.00 “Timed
Reminder.”)
If Timed Reminder with OGM is programmed
beforehand, the extension user can hear the
wake-up message.
(Refer to Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder
with OGM (Wake-up Call).”)
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT
• The SRC indicator lights and dial
tone sounds.
2. Dial the feature number for
Remote Timed Reminder Set “7
1” (default) and the extension
number to be set Timed Reminder
in succession.
3. Dial “hour” with two digits: 01 to 12.
Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00

(09/11)”,
Remote Timed Reminder
Confirm 4. Dial “minute” with two digits: 00 to
Remote Timed Reminder 59.
Set
Remote Timed Reminder
Cancel
5. Dial “0” for a.m. or dial “1” for p.m..
Conditions
• The LOOP key is released
(1)The difference between “Timed Reminder” automatically and the following
and “Remote Timed Reminder” is: message appears on the
Message line.
Validity of the
Setting Message: Alarm Ext. 100 10:00 AM
setting

Timed by extenison Once or

Reminder itself everyday at the
programmed
time

Remote by Operator Once

Timed 1 or 2
Reminder

(2)At a single extension, only the latest setting is

valid whether it was set by the extension itself
(Timed Reminder) or by the Operator 1 or 2
(Remote Timed Reminder).

6-J-27
(70695)
Canceling Timed Reminder set to an extension
1. Press an idle LOOP key.
LOOP

• The SRC indicator lights and

dial tone sounds.

2. Dial the feature number for

Remote Timed Reminder Cancel
“7#” (default) and the extension
number to be canceled Timed
Reminder in succession.

• The LOOP key is released

automatically and the following
message appears on the
Message line.

Message: Alarm Cancelled Ext. 100

Confirming the assigned alarm time

LOOP
1. Press an idle LOOP key.

• The SRC indicator lights and

dial tone sounds.

2. Dial the feature number for

Remote Timed Reminder Confirm
“7* 0” (default) and the extension
number to be confirmed the
setting in succession.

• The LOOP key is released

automatically and the following
message appears on the
Message line.
Message: Alarm Ext. 100 10:00 AM
When no time is set:

Message: Alarm Not Stored Ext.100

6-J-28
(30393)
14.00 Call Display at Attendant Console
Description Display of the following calls directed to an Attendant Console has been
changed.

Call Forwarding and IRNA

CO DIL 1:1
DID

KX-T336

FWD/IRNA

EXT.100 ATT

Call Display at SRC area of a LOOP key

Call Forwarding (FWD)
Old version New version
<1>
TRG.02
T2083
T=01 <1>
Incoming TRG.02 ....... 1
T2083 ....... 2
Intercept Routing <1> T=01 ....... 3
No Answer (IRNA) R : 100 ....... 4
TRG.02
T2083
T=01
IRNA

Item No. Display Description

1 TRG.02 The call is forwarded/redirected by IRNA to an Attendant Console

via a CO line of Trunk Group (TRG) 02.

2 T2083 Name of a CO line mentioned in Item 1.

3 T=01 Toll Restriction Level of TRG.02 is 01.

4 R:100 The call is forwarded/redirected by IRNA to an Attendant Console

from Ext.100.

Programming None

6-J-29
(30393)
KX-T336 SYSTEM

System Reference Manual

Vol. 2

Matsushita Consumer Electronics Company,

Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),

Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infanteria, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,
Puerto Rico 00985

Matsushita Electric of Canada Limited

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W2T3

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.

Central P.O.Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan

KX - A220
Printed in Japan PQQX6485WA KW0691O2045

C Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 1997

 Contents

Vol. 1
Section 1 ---- System Outline

Section 2 ---- Installation

Section 3 ---- System Features and Operation

Section 4 ---- Station Features and Operation

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 5 ---- Station Features and Operation

Single Line Telephone (SLT)

Section 6 ---- Station Features and Operation

Attendant Console (ATT)

Vol. 2
Section 7 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles

Section 8 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 9 ---- System Programming

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 10 ---- System Programming

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 11 ---- System Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 12 ---- Station Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 13 ---- Station Programming

Attendant Console (ATT)

Section 14 ---- Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

Section 15 ---- Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

Section 16 ---- Backup Utility-On-Site

Section 17 ---- Backup Utility-Remote Location

Section 18 ---- Abbreviations

Section 19 ---- Index

 Section 7

Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles
 (Section 7)

Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

Contents

Page
A Introduction ............................................................................... 7-A-1

1.00 On-Site Administration .................................................... 7-A-1

2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location............. 7-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure................................................................ 7-A-3
4.00 Layout of Screen ............................................................. 7-A-4
5.00 Correspondence between Setting Screen and
Explanation Table ........................................................... 7-A-6

B Pre-entering Mode....................................................................... 7-B-1

1.00 Initial Screen.................................................................... 7-B-1

2.00 Installation Screen........................................................... 7-B-2
3.00 Password Entry Screen................................................... 7-B-4
4.00 Date and Time Set Up Screen ........................................ 7-B-5
5.00 Main Menu Screen .......................................................... 7-B-6
6.00 Operating Flow Chart ...................................................... 7-B-7

C Menu Screen ............................................................................... 7-C-1

1.00 Introduction...................................................................... 7-C-1

2.00 Operation of Switching Screens...................................... 7-C-2
3.00 Returning to Previous Screen ......................................... 7-C-3
4.00 Programming Main Menu................................................ 7-C-4
5.00 Test Main Menu .............................................................. 7-C-6
6.00 Monitor Main Menu ......................................................... 7-C-6
7.00 Print Out .......................................................................... 7-C-7
8.00 Change Password........................................................... 7-C-7
9.00 Change Date and Time ................................................... 7-C-8
10.00 Backup Utility .................................................................. 7-C-8
11.00 Restart............................................................................. 7-C-9
12.00 Exit ............................................................................... 7-C-9

D Printing Out ............................................................................... 7-D-1

E Changing Password .................................................................... 7-E-1

F Changing Date and Time............................................................. 7-F-1

G Returning to Initial Screen ........................................................... 7-G-1

1.00 Exit ............................................................................... 7-G-1

2.00 Restart............................................................................. 7-G-1

7-1
 Page
H Key Functions.............................................................................. 7-H-1

1.00 Moving Cursor by TAB B.S............... 7-H-1

2.00 Command Execution by RETURN or ENTER ................ 7-H-1
3.00 Returning to Previous Menu Screen by PF2 .................. 7-H-2
4.00 Entry of Value by SPACE or Directly .............................. 7-H-3
5.00 Storage of Set Value by PF4 .......................................... 7-H-4
6.00 Advancing to Next Screen by NEXT ............................... 7-H-5
7.00 Returning to Previous Screen by PREV ......................... 7-H-6
8.00 Cancelling Set Value by PF3 .......................................... 7-H-7
9.00 Concluding Function Mode by CTRL + C ....................... 7-H-7
10.00 Key Operation Table for Various Terminals.................... 7-H-8

I Operation of Function Keys......................................................... 7-I-1

1.00 Relation between Function Keys and Screens ............... 7-I-1

2.00 Features Assigned to Function Keys .............................. 7-I-1
3.00 Function Mode ................................................................ 7-I-2

J Execution of Function Modes ...................................................... 7-J-1

1.00 COMMON (F1) and EXIT (F7) ........................................ 7-J-1

2.00 SHOW LV (Show Level).................................................. 7-J-2
3.00 CHG LV (Change Level) ................................................. 7-J-3
4.00 INS (In Service) ............................................................... 7-J-5
5.00 OUS (Out of Service) ...................................................... 7-J-7
6.00 REMOVE......................................................................... 7-J-9
7.00 INDEX ............................................................................. 7-J-11
8.00 COPY .............................................................................. 7-J-13
9.00 READ .............................................................................. 7-J-16
10.00 HRD CPY (Hard Copy) ................................................... 7-J-18
11.00 AUTO CNF (Automatic Configuration)............................ 7-J-19
12.00 SET Function (F8) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) ....... 7-J-20

7-2
(60395)
A. Introduction

1.00 On-Site Administration

Description Successful Login
You can administer the system programming and When you enter the correct password, the
maintenance of the system using a VT220 (100), terminal displays the Main Menu screen from
Compatibles. For details about communication which you can select administration functions.
parameters, refer to Section 9-D-7.00 By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
“Communication Interface.” enter a system programming area and can
access specific system parameters and features.
System Security
For security reasons, access to the administration
capabilities of the system is controlled by a
password. To prevent an unauthorized person
from learning the password, the password
characters are not displayed when they are
entered.

Password
To gain access to the system administration
feature, a valid password (four-digit,
alphanumeric characters*) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, a password
must be entered exactly as stored in memory.
Factory programmed eight passwords are
provided from the first to fourth levels for on-site
operation and the first to fourth levels for
operation from a remote location.

The followings are the functions available to each

password level.

The 1st Level : To access to all levels

The 2nd Level : To set system level parameters.
The 3rd Level : To set port level parameters.
The 4th Level : To read parameters only.

When you log in to the system using the first level

password, you can execute all functions, but are
increasingly restricted when entering levels 2, 3
and 4.
Passwords are originally factory programmed, but
may be changed when logging in to the system
by entering the first level password.
Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.”

* Alphanumeric characters
ASCII codes except special codes (DEL, ESC
etc.) But entering “/” “~” are not available,
because these characters cannot be displayed
on the LCD of PITS.
Both uppercase and lowercase characters can
be recognized by the system.

7-A-1
2.00 System Administration
from a Remote Location
Description
From a remote location, you can execute system
programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements
using a VT220 (100), Compatibles.
For details about communication parameters, refer
to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication Interface.”
Conditions
• RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
system and register the telephone number of
modem in the System-Operation “Remote
Directory Number” (FDN: three or four digits) for
accessing the remote administration feature.
For the assignment of Remote Directory
Number, refer to Section 9-D-1.02 “Operation
(2/3).”
• For remote access, a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
• Factory programmed four types of password
from the first to fourth levels for remote operation
are provided. Passwords are originally factory
programmed, but may be changed at any time.
(Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.”)
• You can execute remote system administration
during on-line communication mode only. But
when you load the system programming data
from a remote location, the system shifts to off-
line communication mode automatically.
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure”
for further information.
• Starting up system administration from a remote
location can be done only in Dumb mode, so to
enter VT mode, press CTR key + V key
simultaneously at the dumb mode initial screen.
7-A-2
Operation
Starting up system administration from a remote
location can be done in the following ways:
• Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
For further information about “Remote
Directory Number,” refer to Section 9-D-1.02
“Operation (2/3).”
For further information about DISA feature,
refer to Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward
System Access (DISA).”
• Program DID feature so that the incoming
telephone number is converted to the “Remote
Directory Number.”
For further information about DID feature, refer
to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing
(DID).”
• Assign that a call from a remote-location can
access the Remote Administration feature
automatically using DIL (1:1) feature.
For further information about DIL (1:1) feature,
refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In Line (DIL).”
• Remote access by operator transfer
The call from a remote location can be made
on any trunk into the system, and be answered
by the operator.
The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
Directory Number of the system dialed is
received. The operator transfers the call after
receiving the modem answer tone. The caller
at a remote location will then hear the modem
answer tone and can proceed with sign-on.
Refer to Section 4-F-1.05 “Unscreened Call
Transfer to Remote,” for further information.
When the system administrator at a remote
location accesses the system remote
administration feature, the following message
appears on the display of operator's telephone if
display is provided:
1234: RMT Access
After you log in to the system from a remote
location, you can operate the system in the same
way as if you were on-site.
Only one system administration terminal can be
connected to the system at a time.
3.00 Mode Structure
The administration using VT compatible terminal Programming Main Menu
consists of the following modes. Consists of 10 submenu screens and allows you
to administer system-wide programming
parameters.
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-4.00
Pre-entering Mode
“Programming Main Menu.”
Initial Screen Test Main Menu Screen
Enables you to test the cards, ports, PIT’s and
Attendant Consoles in on-line communication
Installation Screen mode.
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-5.00 “Test
Main Menu.”
Password Entry Screen
Monitor Main Menu
Consists of three menus and allows you to see
Date and Time Set Up error log, device status and traffic
Screen measurements.
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-6.00
“Monitor Main Menu.”
Main Menu Screen Print Out Menu
Allows you to print out the system programming
parameters and traffic information.
Programming Main Menu For further details, refer to Section 7-C-7.00
“Print Out.”
Test Main Menu
Change Password
Enables you to change the password for “On
Monitor Main Menu
Site” and “Remote.”
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-8.00
Print Out Menu “Change Password.”

Change Password Change Date & Time

Enables you to change the date and time.
Change Date & Time For further details, refer to Section 7-C-9.00
“Change Date and Time.”
Backup Utility Main Menu Backup Utility Main Menu
Consists of two submenus, and enables you to
Restart save or load the system programming data and
attendant console database.
Exit For further details, refer to Section 7-C-10.00
“Backup Utility.”
Restart
Functions same as if you press the RESET
Pre-entering Mode button.
Consists of five screens starting from Start For further details, refer to Section 7-G-2.00
Screen through Main Menu Screen. “Restart.”
For further details, refer to Section 7-B “Pre-
entering Mode.” Exit
Enables you to return to the initial screen.
For further details, refer to Section 7-G-1.00
“Exit.”

7-A-3
4.00 Layout of Screen
<1> <2> <3> <4>
Title

OFL PRG SCR SEL

Screen Editing Field

Command Line
Message Line

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function field

<1> Displays On-line or Off-line communication <3> Displays whether the cursor is in the Screen
mode. Editing Field or in the Command Line.

Display Mode Display Location

ONL On-line SCR Screen Editing Field

LIN Command Line
OFL Off-line

<2> Displays the stage selected in the main <4> Displays the entry method, select or direct.
menu screen.

Display Stage Display Entry Method

PRG Programming SEL Select value by space key

TST Test DIR Enter value directly
MON Monitor
PRT Print Out
PSW Change Password
D&T Change Date & Time
BCK Backup Utility

7-A-4
Title
Displays the title of the programming screen.

Screen Editing Field

Used for displaying or entering data.

Command Line
When pressing the menu number or function
key, displays the messages to execute the
function.

Message Line
Displays messages such as error messages in
programming.

Function Field
Displays each function key.

7-A-5
5.00 Correspondence between
Setting Screen and
Explanation Table
When there are some assigning items in the
screen, the explanation table describes the items
in detail.

<Example> Configuration-System Assignment

screen

Configuration - System Assignment OFL PRG SCR SEL

Version 1.0
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Expansion Shelf | 1 Shelf |
| TSW Additional CONF | Yes |
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

<1> <2> <3>

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Expansion Shelf Automatic set No : expansion shelf not installed 1-E-2.00

1 Shelf : expansion shelf 1 available
2 Shelves: both expansion shelves 1 and 2
available

TSW Additional CONF Automatic set Yes : conference expansion card installed 4-G-5.01
No : conference expansion card not installed 4-G-5.02
5-E-1.00
6-H-1.00

The relationship between the screen and the explanation table is shown
by the arrows above.
<1> Shows the assigning items which depend on the screen items.
<2> Shows the optional and default values.
<3> Shows the reference for the assigning items.
For example, interprets “4-G-11.00” as follows. “4” indicates
section number, “G” indicates subsection number and “11.00”
indicates title number.

7-A-6
B. Pre-entering Mode

1.00 Initial Screen

Summary
This screen is displayed first when administration
is activated.
To conclude this screen and advance to the next
screen, press the RETURN key.

7-B-1
2.00 Installation Screen

Summary
A screen for setting various data relating to the
installation of the system, and for setting system
passwords.
This screen does not appear when administration
data has already been assigned in on-line mode
or if you start up the system when CPU Operation
Switch (Mode) is set to 0 to 4 and 8 to 9. Refer to
Section 2-F-2.00 “CPU Rotary-Switch Features”
for details.
To advance to the next screen without any entry,
press the PF2 key.
For storing the entered parameters, press the
PF2 or the PF4 key. For storing operation, refer
to Section 7-H “Key Functions.”

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value

<Customer & Installation Data>
Customer Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Location Up to 64 letters, numbers or marks
Phone No. Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks
Modem No. Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks
Customer Contact blank Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Date of Installation Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks
Unit ID Up to 8 letters, numbers or marks
Installers Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Programmers Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Continued
7-B-2
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value

<System Password>
Protection Level 1 LVL 1
Protection Level 2 LVL 2 Four digits consisting of letters, numbers or marks
Protection Level 3 LVL 3
Protection Level 4 LVL 4
Comments blank Up to 70 letters, numbers or marks

7-B-3
3.00 Password Entry Screen

Summary
The screen is for entering passwords which is
necessary to enter into system administration
mode. Enter the passwords which are assigned
in System Password “Protection level 1 to 4” of
the installation.
To prevent an unauthorized person from learning
the password, the password characters are not
displayed when they are entered.
If no characters are entered within 30 seconds
after this screen is displayed, the display returns
to the initial screen.
When you enter the correct password and press
the RETURN key, the terminal displays the next
screen.

Displays ON-LINE PROCESS screen in on-line

mode, and OFF-LINE PROCESS screen in off-
line mode.
The above screen appears when the system is in
on-line mode.

7-B-4
4.00 Date and Time Set Up Screen

Summary
A screen for setting the date and time.
This screen may not appear depending on the
setting of the CPU rotary switch. For setting of
the CPU rotary switch, refer to Section 2-F-
2.00 “CPU Rotary-Switch Features.”
Enter “Year,” “Day,” “Hour” and “Minute”
directly and select “Month,” “Day of the Week,”
AM/PM” by pressing the space key.
To advance to the next screen without entering the
data, press the PF2 key.
To store the entered data, press the PF2 or PF4
key.
For the storing operation, refer to Section 7-H “Key
Functions.”

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value

Year 99 Last two digits of the year

Month JAN JAN/FEB/MAR/APR/MAY/JUN/JUL/AUG/SEP/

OCT/NOV/DEC

Day 1 1 to 31 : day

Day of the week FRI SUN/MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT

Hour 12 1 to 12 : hour

Minute 00 00 to 59 : minute

Morning/Afternoon AM AM : morning
PM : afternoon/evening

7-B-5
5.00 Main Menu Screen

Summary
By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
enter a system programming area and can
access specific system parameters and
features.
To select an item from the Main Menu, just type the
number of the item you want followed by the return
key.

Menu Number Reference

Programming 1 7-C-4.00
Test 2 7-C-5.00
Monitor 3 7-C-6.00
Print Out 4 7-C-7.00
Change Password 5 7-C-8.00
Change Date & Time 6 7-C-9.00
Backup Utility 7 7-C-10.00
Restart 8 7-C-11.00
Exit 9 7-C-12.00

7-B-6
6.00 Operating Flow Chart

********************
Setting Screen * Panasonic Hybrid PBX *
* * Initial Screen
* KX-T336 System *
Menu Screen * *
********************

RETURN Press the RETURN

key

**Panasonic Hybrid PBX Installation System Installation

Please set the following initial data Screen

ON/OFF Line Switch ON/OFF line select

RETURN Press the RETURN

key

Welcome to the Panasonic Hybrid PBX Welcome to the Panasonic Hybrid PBX Password Entry
System Administration System Administration Screen

ON-LINE PROCESS OFF-LINE PROCESS

PASSWORD : PASSWORD :

Password Entry Enter the password

RETURN Press the RETURN

key

RETURN Set Date & Time

Date & Time : ’99 JAN. 1 FRI 12:00 AM
Enter 9
(EXIT)
Enter year, month, day,
Year, Month, Day, Day of the day of the week, hour,
week, Hour, Minute, AM/PM minute, a.m./p.m.
Press the RETURN
RETURN
key

Main Menu Main Menu Screen

1. Programming
2. Test
3. Monitor
•
•
•
9. Exit.

7-B-7
C. Menu Screen

1.00 Introduction

Enables you to assign or change system

programming data by selecting the required
screen. This section explains the procedures for
starting from the menu screen through the
programming main menu screen, to the sub menu
screen.

7-C-1
2.00 Operation of Switching
Screens

(A) Operation (B) Example

Type the item number on the screen. Then press The illustration below shows the procedures for
the RETURN key to advance to the next screen. selecting a programming screen, starting from
the Main Menu screen.

<Example>

Main Menu

1. Programming Main Menu screen

Type the item number, then

press the RETURN key. RETURN
The screen advances to the
1
Programming Main Menu
screen.

Programming Main Menu

01. Configuration Programming Main Menu

screen

Type the item number, then

press the RETURN key. RETURN The screen advances to the
01 1
Configuration Submenu screen.

Configuration-Submenu

1. System Assignment Configuration Submenu

screen

Type the item number, then

press the RETURN key. 1 RETURN The screen advances to the
Setting screen.

Configuration-System Assignment

Version 1.0 Setting screen

7-C-2
3.00 Returning to Previous Screen

To return to the previous screen, press the PF2

key.
The illustration below shows the operation,
staring from the Setting Screen and returning to
the Main Menu screen.

<Example>

Configuration-System Assignment

Version 1.0 Setting Screen

PF2 Pressing the PF2 key returns the

screen to the Sub Menu screen.

Configuration-Submenu

1. System Assignment Programming Submenu screen

PF2 Pressing the PF2 key returns the

screen to the Programming Main
Menu screen.

Programming Main Menu

01. Configuration Programming Main Menu screen.

PF2 Pressing the PF2 key returns the

screen to the Main Menu screen.

Main Menu

1. Programming Main Menu screen

Pressing the PF2 key while the
Main Menu screen is displayed
causes no change of the screen
and error entry tone sounds.

7-C-3
4.00 Programming Main Menu

Type “1” and press the RETURN key in the Main The illustration below shows the submenu
Menu screen then the Programming Main Menu screens and the setting screens of Programming
is displayed on the screen. Mainmenu.
Configuration System Assignment
Slot Assignment
DN Assignment
Channel Assignment
System Operation
Tenant
System Timer
Main Menu
Class of Service
Local Access
Numbering Plan
1 RETURN Communication Interface
Speed Dialing-System
Absent Message
Programming Group Trunk Group
Main Menu ICM/Paging Group
Call Pickup Group
Trunk CO Line
Pager & Music Source
AGC
Extension Station
DSS Console
Doorphone
Attendant Console
Special Carrier Access Equal Access
( for U.S.A. and OCC Access
Canada only)
Toll Restriction Area/Office Code Tables
(for U.S.A. and Canada) Office Code Tables (TRS)
7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table
Toll Restriction 7-Digit Toll Restriction Table
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

ARS Leading Digit Table

( for U.S.A., Canada Office Code Table (ARS)
and New Zealand) Route Plan Tables
Route Lists Table
Modified Digit Table
Special Attended DISA
DID
UCD
TIE Line Routing Table
Miscellaneous Installation Information
Power Failure Transfer
7-C-4
(70695)
Configuration
Assigns the data concerning cards, slots, T-1/E-1
channels and DNs (directory numbers).
For further details, refer to Section 9-C
“Configuration Screen.”
Miscellaneous
Assigns the installation information and cards for
effectuating Power Failure Transfer.
Refer to Section 9-L “Miscellaneous Screen.”

System
Assigns the elemental data common to the whole
system.
For further details, refer to Section 9-O “System
Screen.”

Group
Assigns the data for trunk groups, ICM paging
groups and pickup groups.
For further details, refer to Section 9-E “Group
Screen.”

Trunk
Assigns various parameters for CO lines, external
pagers and music sources or tenant number for
AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
Refer to Section 9-F “Trunk Screen.”

Extension
Assigns the parameters for each extension, DSS
consoles, Doorphones and Attendant consoles.
Refer to Section 9-G “Extension Screen.”

Special Carrier Access ( for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Assigns available trunk groups and parameters
necessary for making Equal Access or OCC
(Other Common Carrier) Access calls.
Refer to Section 9-H “Special Carrier Access
Screen.”

Toll Restriction
Assigns parameters for Toll Restriction.
Refer to Section 9-I “Toll Restriction Screen.”

Automatic Route Selection (for U.S.A., Canada

and New Zealand)
Assigns the parameters for Automatic Route
Selection.
Refer to Section 9-J “Automatic Route Selection
Screen.”

Special Attended
Assigns parameters for DISA (Direct Inward
System Access), DID (Direct Inward Dialing),
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) and TIE Line
Routing Table.
Refer to Section 9-K “Special Attended Screen.”
7-C-5
(70695)
5.00 Test Main Menu 6.00 Monitor Main Menu

Type “2” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Test Main Menu is
displayed on the screen.
This menu consists of three submenus as
illustrated below.
Type “3” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Monitor Main Menu is
displayed on the screen.
The illustration below shows the submenu screen
and the setting screens.

Main Menu Main Menu

2 RETURN 3 RETURN

Test Main Menu Card Test Monitor Main Menu

Port Test
PITS and ATT Test Error Log
Station
Device Status Trunk Group
Card Test Attendant console
Verifies the card conditions and enables you to Traffic DISA
detect whether troubles are caused by a card or OGM1
telephone instruments. OGM2
AGC
Port Test
Verifies the port conditions and enables you to
detect troubles when telephone instruments don’t Error Log
function well while card condition is good. Displays up to 15 major and minor alarms and up
to 15 light alarms.
PITS and ATT Test For further details, refer to Section 14-G-2.00
Verifies the conditions of PITS and the Attendant “Error Log screen.”
Console (ATT) and enables you to detect troubles
when telephone instruments don’t function well Device Status
while card condition is good. Displays the status of the system, cards, ports
and the conference trunk.
For further details, refer to Section 14-G-3.00
For further details of testing, refer to Section 14-F “Device Status screen.”
“Functional Test by Entering Commands.”
Traffic
Displays traffic measurements of extensions ,
trunk groups, attendant consoles and resources
(DISA, OGM1, OGM2, AGC).
For further details, refer to Section 14-G-4.00
“Traffic Submenu screen.”

7-C-6
7.00 Print Out 8.00 Change Password

Type “4” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Print Out Menu screen is
displayed on the screen.
This screen consists of the following three setting
screens.
Main Menu
Type “5” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Change Password screen
is displayed on the screen.
Allows you to change passwords for “On-Site
operation” and “Remote operation” respectively.
For further details, refer to Section 7-E “Changing
Password.”

Main Menu
4 RETURN

5 RETURN

Print Out Menu Programming

Monitor
Change Password
Print Stop

Programming
Programming Main Menu for printing out appears
on the screen.

Monitor
Monitor Main Menu for printing out appears on
the screen.

Print Stop
Enables you to stop printing.

For further details of printing out operations, refer

to Section 7-D “Printing Out.”

7-C-7
9.00 Change Date and Time 10.00 Backup Utility

Type “6” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Change Date & Time
screen is displayed which is same as the Date &
Time Set Up screen in pre-entering mode.
However, you can change the date and time
anytime in this screen.
For further details, refer to Section 7-F “Changing
Date and Time.”
Type “7” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Backup Utility Main Menu
is displayed on the screen.
The illustration below shows the submenu
screens and the setting screens.
Main Menu

Main Menu RETURN

7

6 RETURN
Backup Utility
Main Menu
All Data
Change Date & Time Load PBX Data
ATT Local Data

All Data
Save PBX Data
ATT Local Data

Load
Loading the system programming data and
attendant console database from backup device
to the system can be done during off-line mode
only.

Save
Saving the system programming data and
attendant console database from the system to
the backup device can be done during on-line
mode as well as off-line mode.

For further details of Backup Utility, refer to

Section 16 “Backup Utility-On Site.”

7-C-8
(50195)
11.00 Restart 12.00 Exit

Type “8” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen initializes the system and the initial
screen is displayed, the result is the same as if
you press the RESET button.
For further details, refer to Section 7-G-2.00
“Restart.”
Type “9” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the initial screen is displayed.
Refer to Section 7-G-1.00 “Exit.”
Main Menu

Main Menu
9 RETURN

8 RETURN
Exit

Restart

7-C-9
D. Printing Out
Description Operation
Enables you to print parameters of programming 1. When the following Print Out Menu screen
and monitor. appears, type “1” for Programming submenu
“System-Operation”, SMDR should be assigned screens.
to “Yes.” Type “2” for Monitor submenu screens, and “3”
Refer to Section 9-D-1.02 “Operation (2/3)” for for stop printing. When you want to stop
the assignment of SMDR. printing, return to this screen and type “3.”
Connect your printer to SIO#2 port on the main
unit of the system.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface” for information about communication
parameters.

7-D-1
For example, when you select “1”, the following
Print Out Menu screen appears.

2-1 When you want to print all programming,

press the F8 (ALL PRT) key.

2-2 When you want to print each of the screen,

press the key of the desired screen and the
RETURN key. The submenu screen appears.

7-D-2
Note : In the following programming submenu screens, specify-
ing the screen number is available.

• Class of Service
==> Class of Service No. (01-32) =

• Trunk Group
==> Trunk Group No. (01-16) =

• CO Line
==> Trunk Equipment No. (Physical No.) =

• Station
==> Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx) =

• DSS Console
==> Station Equipment No. (Physical No.) =

• Equal Access
==> Equal Access No. (1-4) =

• OCC Access
==> OCC Access No. (1-4) =

• Area/Office Code Table (TRS)

==> Area/Office Code Table No. (1-8) =

• Office Code Table (TRS)

==> Office Code Table No. (01-64) =

• Office Code Table (ARS)

==> Office Code Table No. (01-32) =

• Route Plan Table

==> Route Plan Table No. (01-32) =

7-D-3
E. Changing Password
Description
Enables you to change passwords for “On Site”
and “Remote.”

Operation
Enter four digit alphanumeric characters for each
password if you want to change the factory
setting default value.
Default values are as follows:

Items Default Items Default

<On Site> <Remote>

Protection Level 1 LVL1 Protection Level 1 LVL1
Protection Level 2 LVL2 Protection Level 2 LVL2
Protection Level 3 LVL3 Protection Level 3 LVL3
Protection Level 4 LVL4 Protection Level 4 LVL4

7-E-1
F. Changing Date and Time
Description
Allows you to change the date and time.

Operation
Enter “Year”, “Day”, “Hour” and “Minute” directly
and select “Month”, “Day of the Week”, “AM/PM”
by pressing the space key.
For the input value, refer to the table below.

Assigning items Default Selection of Value

Year 99 last two digits of the year

Month JAN JAN/FEB/MAR/APR/MAY/JUN/JUL/AUG/SEP/OCT/NOV/DEC

Day 1 1 to 31 : day

Day of the week FRI SUN/MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT

Hour 12 1 to 12 : hour

Minute 00 00 to 59 : minute

Morning/Afternoon AM AM : morning
PM : afternoon/evening

7-F-1
G. Returning to Initial
Screen
1.00 Exit
Description
Allows you to return to the initial screen and
displays the screen below.

2.00 Restart
Description
Allows you to initialize the system.

Operation
When you execute Restart, the following
message appears at the bottom of the screen.

Are you sure? (Y: yes/N: no)

Type “Y,” and press the RETURN key to restart.

If you do not want to restart the system, type “N,”
and press the RETURN key.

7-G-1
H. Key Functions
1.00 Moving Cursor by 2.00 Command Execution by
TAB B.S RETURN or ENTER

The cursor ( ) is displayed in reverse video on
the screen and indicates the position for entering
the setting values.
You can move the cursor only in the entry field.
You can move the cursor as follows.
To store the entered data in the line mode or in
the function mode, press the RETURN key or the
ENTER key.

: Moves the cursor to the previous line.

: Moves the cursor to the next line.
: Moves the cursor to left.
: Moves the cursor to right.

TAB : Moves the cursor to the beginning of the

next field or to the beginning of the field.
B.S : Moves the cursor to left while deleting the
displayed character.

7-H-1
3.00 Returning to Previous Menu
Screen by PF2

To return to the previous menu screen, press the
PF2 key.
When no data has been entered:
• Returns to the previous menu screen
When data has been entered, but not stored by
pressing the PF4:
1) To store entered data, enter “Y” and press
the RETURN key.
Not to save, enter N, then press the RETURN
key.
The screen returns to the previous screen.
2) To cancel the entered data, enter “C,” then
press the RETURN key.
The screen does not change.

• The following message appears at the bottom

of the screen.

Parameter Save OK? (Y:yes/ N:no/ C:cancel)

<Example>
Setting Screen

PF2
With data entry, but not stored by PF4
The following message is displayed on the
No data entry screen:

Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)

Y N C Press “Y” or “N” or “C” key.

or or

RETURN RETURN Press the RETURN key.

Sub Menu Screen The screen returns to the previous

menu screen.
PF2
Press the PF2 key.

Programming Main Menu The screen returns to the previous menu

Screen screen.

PF2 Press the PF2 key.

The screen returns to the Main Menu

Main Menu Screen screen.

7-H-2
4.00 Entry of Value by SPACE or
Directly

Entering the value directly or selecting it by

pressing the SPACE key is available.
When “SEL” (Select Input) is displayed at the
right end on the top line, pressing the SPACE key
enables you to select the desired value from
factory programmed parameters.

When the screen displays “DIR” (Direct Input),

enter the appropriate parameters directly.

<Example>

1. (SEL) Select Input by SPACE key 2. (DIR) Direct Input

In System-Operation (2/3) screen, the first item 1) After entering “Yes” for SMDR, move the cursor
is System Administration Device. To select the to Page Length field.
desired device from the four options: VT220/
Dumb/ATT1/ATT2, press the SPACE key. One • The display “SEL” changes to “DIR.”
of the four options is displayed in the following
order. 2) Enter the appropriate number directly from 4 to
99 for Page Length .
VT220 Dumb ATT1 ATT2
When storing the entered data, press the PF2 or
PF4 key.

SEL or DIR

System-Operation OFL PRG SCR SEL

Operation (2/3)

System Administration Device VT220

SMDR Yes
Page Length (4-99) 60
Skip Perforation (0-95) 60

7-H-3
5.00 Storage of Set Value by PF4

Storing the entered data

1. Press the PF4 key. 2. Press “Y” key when storing the entered data.
Press “N” key when not storing the entered
• The following message appears at the bottom data.
of the screen: Press “C” key to cancel the entered data.

Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel) 3. Press the RETURN key.

<Example>

System-Operation

Operation (1/3)

Tenant Service
Automatic Route Selection

PF4 Press the PF4 key.

The following message appears

at the bottom of the screen.

Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)

Press Y or N or C Press “Y” or “N” or “C” key.

RETURN
RETURN Press the RETURN key.

7-H-4
6.00 Advancing to Next Screen
by NEXT

To advance to the next page of the same setting 1) To save the entered data, enter “Y,” then
screen, press the NEXT key. press the RETURN key.
Not to save the entered data, enter “N,”
When no data has been entered: then press the RETURN key.
The screen advances to the next screen.
• Advances to the next page.
2) To cancel the entered parameters, press
When data has been entered, but not stored by “C” key, then press the RETURN key. The
PF4: screen does not change.

• The following message appears at

the bottom of the screen.

Parameter save OK? (Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)

<Example>
System-Operation
Operation (1/3)

Tenant Service
Automatic Route Selection

Press NEXT key. NEXT

With data entry, but not

No data entry stored by PF4
The following message is
displayed on the screen.

Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)

Y N C
Press “Y” or “N” or
or or “C” key.

System-Operation RETURN Press RETURN.

RETURN
Operation (2/3)

System Administration Device

SMDR The screen shows
the next page of the
same setting
screen.

7-H-5
7.00 Returning to Previous
Screen by PREV

To return to the previous page of the same setting 1) To store the entered data, enter “Y” and
screen, press the PREV key. not to store, enter “N.”
Pressing the RETURN key causes the
When no data has been entered: screen to return to the previous page.

• Returns to the previous page. 2) To cancel the entered parameters, press

“C” key, then the RETURN key.
When data has been entered, but not stored by The screen does not change.
PF4 key:

• The following message appears at the

bottom of the screen.

Parameter Save OK ? (Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)

<Example>
System-Operation
Operation (2/3)

System Administration Device

SMDR

Press PREV key. PREV

With data entry, but not stored by

No data entry PF4

The following message is displayed

at the bottom of the screen:

Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)

Y N C Press “Y” or “N” or “C”

or or
key.

System-Operation RETURN RETURN Press RETURN.

Operation (1/3)

Tenent Service
Automatic Route Selection The screen shows the
previous page.

7-H-6
8.00 Canceling Set Value by PF3 9.00 Concluding Function Mode
by CTRL+C

To cancel the set values, move the cursor to the For concluding the function mode, press CTRL +
value to be canceled by using “TAB,” “ ,” “ ,” C keys simultaneously.
“ ,” “ ,” keys etc. Then press the PF3 key. For details about the function mode, refer to
The results are as follows: Section 7-I-3.00 “Function Mode.”

• Canceling DIR data : becomes blank

• Canceling SEL data : default value appears on
that position.

To change the entered values, move the cursor on

that value, then enter the new value.

7-H-7
10.00 Key Operation Table for
Various Terminals

FUNCTIONS VT220 VT100 Attendant Console

(1) To previous screen PREV / PF1 + PF1 + EMU +

EMU + PF1 ,

(2) To next screen NEXT / PF1 + PF1 + EMU +

EMU + PF1 ,

(3) Ending PF2 PF2 EMU + PF2

PF3 PF3 EMU + PF3

(4) Canceling value
CTRL + C CTRL + C CTRL + C
(5) Canceling command
PF4 PF4 EMU + PF4
(6) Data storage
RETURN / ENTER RETURN RETURN
(7) Command execution

(8) Output stop CTRL + S CTRL + S

(9) Output Start CTRL + Q CTRL + Q

(10) Function key PF1 ••••••••••• PF8 PF1 + 1 ••• PF1 + 8 PF1 ••••••••••• PF8
or or
PF1 + 1 ••• PF1 + 8 PF1 + 1 ••• PF1 + 8

(11) Mode change CTRL + V CTRL + V CTRL + V

(12) To previous
CTRL + U CTRL + U CTRL + U
selection value

7-H-8
I. Operation of Function Keys

1.00 Relation between Function 2.00 Features Assigned to Func-

Keys and Screens tion Keys

Features assigned to function keys are shown in

the drawing below.
For details, refer to Section 7-J “Execution of
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Function.”

Function keys

Function display line F1 : COMMON

(Common for
SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS,
OUS, REMOVE, EXIT )
Numbers 1, 2, - - - - 8 displayed in the function
field correspond to the function key 1, function
key 2, - - - -, function key 8 respectively. F1 : SHOW LV
In the following explanations, F1 stands for (Show Level)
function key 1, F2 stands for function key 2 and
F2 : CHG LV
so on. (Change Level)

Usable function keys may change depending on F4 : INS

the selected screen. For unavailable function (In Service)
keys, “space” appears in the function field. Features
F5 : OUS
assigned to
<Example> (Out of Service)
the function
In the System-Numbering Plan screen, the keys
F6 : REMOVE
following display appears in the function field.
(Remove)

F7 : EXIT
(Exit)
1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8

In this case, F1 is assigned to COMMON feature. F2 : INDEX

F2 is assigned to INDEX feature. (Index)
F6 is assigned to HRDCPY feature.
F3 : COPY
and F3, F4, F5, F7 and F8 are assigned (Copy)
to no feature.
F4 : READ
(Read)

F6 : HRD CPY
(Hard Copy)

F7 : AUTO CONF
(Automatic Configuration)

F8 : SET
(Set)

7-I-1
3.00 Function Mode
Pressing the function key creates a prompt at the
bottom of the screen. The prompt that appears
on the screen is called “Function Mode.”
• When pressing the following function keys, the
prompts below are displayed.
• In function mode, the following keys are not
available: NEXT, PREV, PF2 and PF4.
• To conclude function mode, press the EXIT
(F7) key. Pressing CTRL and C keys
simultaneously also concludes function mode or
other modes such as SHOW LV, CHG LV and
so on.

Function key Prompt

F1 COMMON CMD>

F2 INDEX INDEX>

F3 COPY COPY>

F4 READ READ>

F7 AUTO CNF AUTOCNF>

F8 SET SET>

7-I-2
J. Execution of Function Modes

1.00 COMMON (F1) and EXIT (F7)

Description Operation Chart

When you want to execute the functions SHOW LV
(Show Level), CHG LV (Change Level), INS (In
Service), OUS (Out of Service) and REMOVE Press the COMMON key F1
(Remove), press the COMMON (F1) key. Pressing
the EXIT (F7) key allows you to conclude the
function mode.

Operation <Function mode>

Entering into COMMON mode
To execute
1. Press the F1 key. F1
SHOW LV, press F1
• The prompt (CMD>) appears and function CHG LV, press F2
mode is established. INS, press F4
The cursor is flashing and you can choose a
OUS, press F5
desired function from functions displayed on
the function field as follows. REMOVE, Press F6

CMD>
Concluding
1 SHOW LV 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS 5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8
function mode

Concluding the function mode

1. Press the F7 key. F7 Press the EXIT key F7

• The function mode is concluded.

Condition
Available for all the setting screens and all the
menu screens.

7-J-1
2.00 SHOW LV (Show Level)
Description Conditions
Enables you to confirm the current password Press the EXIT (F7) key to return to COMMON
level by pressing the SHOW LV (F1) key after mode.
entering the COMMON mode.
When back in COMMON mode, executing other
Operation COMMON mode functions is possible.
Press the F1 key. F1
SHOW LV is available for all the menu screens
• The screen shows the current password and the setting screens.
level.

CMD >
*****Current Level 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Operation Chart

Press the COMMON key F1

<Function mode>

Concluding function mode Press the EXIT key F7

Showing password level Press the SHOW LV key F1

Concluding show level

mode and returning to
function mode

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-2
3.00 CHG LV (Change Level)
Description
Enables you to raise or lower the current password Conditions
level by pressing the CHG LV (F2) key after
Password level can be raised one by one as
entering COMMON mode.
follows: 4 3 2 1

To lower the current password level, simply press

the RETURN key when “CMD>Enter Password
(Current Level 1)=” is displayed.
1 COMMON 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS 5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8
By every pressing of the RETURN key, password
level is lowered one by one as follows: 1 2
Operation 3 4

Raising a password level To return to the COMMON mode from the change
level mode, press the EXIT (F7) key.
1. Press the F2 key.
F2 The Change Level function is available for all the
menu screens and the setting screens.

CMD > Enter Password (Current Level 4) =

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

2. Enter 4-digit new password (one level higher

than current level).

CMD > Enter Password (Current Level 4) =

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

• To prevent an unauthorized person from

learning the password, the password
characters are not displayed when they are
entered.

3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

CMD > Enter Password (Current Level 3) =

* * * * * OK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

• When newly entered password is allowed by

the system, “ *****OK ” appears and new
password level is displayed.

7-J-3
Operation Chart

Press the COMMON key F1

<Function mode>

Concluding Press the EXIT key F7

function mode

Changing
Press the CHG LV key F2
password level

<Change level mode>

Enter password, then press

RETURN key

Changing password
in succession

Finishing change level

mode and returning to
function mode

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-4
4.00 INS (In Service)
Description Conditions
Allows you to change the status of shelves, cards The system should be in on-line communication
and ports from “Out of Service” to “In Service” in mode.
the following screen, after pressing the COMMON
(F1) key. For changing lower device such as station, port
etc.. to “In Service,” upper device such as card
and shelf should be In Service beforehand.

The table below shows the devices to be

1 SHOW LV 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS 5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8
changed to “In Service” and their Entry numbers.
Elements In Entry numbers
Operation Service
Shelf physical number (1 to 3)
<Example>
Card physical number (101 to 315)
Changing the status of station (physical number Port physical number (1011 to 3158)
2158) from “Out of Service” to “In Service.” Station extension directory number
(DNxxxx: three or four digits), or
1. Press the F4 key. F4 physical number (1011 to 3158)
Attendant A1, A2 or Port number (1011 to
Console 3158)
CMD > In Service No.= DTMF Receiver Rxxxy
xxx : card physical number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8
y : 1 for DTMF Receiver 1
2 for DTMF Receiver 2
Conference Trunk Basic conference trunk number
CFBxx (xx : 01 to 08)
Optional conference trunk number
2. Enter the physical number of the station “2158.” CFOyy (yy : 01 to 64)

2 1 5 8
If it is impossible to execute the “In Service”
CMD > In Service No.=2158 operation, one of the following error messages
appears on the screen.
The error message types depend on the situation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

***** ERROR : Illegal parameter

***** ERROR : Not installed
3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN ***** ERROR : Diagnostic failure
***** ERROR : Invalid status
CMD > In Service No.=2158
* * * * * OK For details about the error messages, refer to
Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 To repeat the “In Service” operation, repeat from
STEP 2.
• “ * * * * * OK” appears when the station
(physical number: 2158) becomes “In- To return to the COMMON mode, press the EXIT
Service.” (F7) key.

7-J-5
Operation Chart

Press the COMMON key F1

<Function mode>

Concluding
Press the EXIT key F7
function mode

Changing
stations, etc. to Press the INS key F4
In Service

<In Service mode>

Enter physical number etc.,

then press RETURN key

To repeat the “In Service”

operation, return to the
previous step.

Finishing INS mode and

returning to function mode

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-6
5.00 OUS (Out of Service)

Description Conditions
Allows you to change the status of shelves, cards The system should be in on-line communication
and ports from “In Service” to “Out of Service” as mode.
shown below after pressing the COMMON (F1)
key. Devices to be changed to “Out of Service” and
their entry numbers are as same as that of “In
Service.” Refer to Section 7-J-4.00 “INS (In
Service).”
1 SHOW LV 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS 5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8

When setting the shelf or card to “Out of Service,”

their lower device such as stations & ports
Operation become “Out of Service” simultaneously.
<Example>
Changing the status of the station (physical number If it is impossible to set “Out of Service”, one of
2158) from “In Service” to “Out of Service.” the following error messages appears on the
screen.
1. Press the F5 key. A type of error message depends on the situation.
F5

*****Error : Illegal parameter

CMD > Out of Service No.= *****Error : No installed
*****Error : Diagnostic failure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8
*****Error : Invalid status

For details about the error messages, refer to

Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
2. Enter the physical number of the station “2158.”
To repeat the “Out of Service” operation, repeat
2 1 5 8 from STEP 2.

To return to COMMON mode, press the EXIT (F7)

COMMON > Out of Service No. = 2158 key.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

CMD > Out of Service No. = 2158

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

• “ * * * * * OK” appears when the station

(physical number 2158) becomes “Out of
Service.”

7-J-7
Operation Chart

Press the COMMON key F1

<Function mode>

Concluding
Press the EXIT key F7
function mode

Changing sta-
tions, cards etc. Press the OUS key F5
to Out of Service

<Out of Service mode>

Enter physical number etc.,

then press RETURN key

To repeat the OUS operation,

return to the previous step.

Finishing Out of Service mode

and returning to function
mode.

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-8
6.00 REMOVE

Description Conditions
Enables you to delete the stored data by The system should be in On-line communication
specifying the devices. This operation should be mode.
done before actually removing the devices.
This function is available in the screen where The specified terminal should be “Out of Service”
“REMOVE” is displayed on the function field. or “Fault.”

Operation When it is impossible to execute “REMOVE”

<Example> operation, one of the following error messages
Remove the programming data of an extension appears on the screen.
with physical number 1011. The error message type depends on the situation.

1. Press the F1 key. F1

1 SHOW LV 2 CHG LV 3 4 INS
2. Press the F6 key.
*****ERROR : Illegal parameter
*****ERROR : Parameter is not consecutive set
*****ERROR : Not installed
*****ERROR : Invalid status
*****ERROR : Parameter is empty
5 OUS 6 REMOVE 7 EXIT 8
For details about the error messages, refer to
Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
F6

CMD>Remove Port No. (Physical No./DN xxxx/Ax)=

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

3. Enter the physical number 1011.

1 0 1 1

CMD>Remove Port No. (Physical No./DN xxxx/Ax)=10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

4. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

CMD>Remove Port No. (Physical No./DN xxxx/Ax)=1011

* * * * *OK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

• When the message below appears, the

programming data of physical number 1011
is deleted without failure.
*****OK

7-J-9
Operation Chart

Press the COMMON key F1

Press the REMOVE key F6

Enter physical number or DN

or Attendant Console num-
ber.
Then press RETURN

To repeat the REMOVE

operation, return to the
previous stage.

Concluding function mode

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-10
7.00 INDEX

Description Operation Chart

Enables you to enter the desired screen
immediately without using the NEXT or PREV Press INDEX key F 2
key.

Operation
<Example>
Entering the Class of Service No.=32 screen. <Function mode>

The current screen is Class of Service (COS)

No.=01

System-Class of Service Enter the number of the

setting screen, and press
Class of Service (COS) No. = 01 (1/2) RETURN key.
After showing the desired
screen, function mode ends
automatically.
1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8

Condition
1. Press the F2 key. F2 If “INDEX” operation cannot be executed, one of
the following error messages appears on the
screen.
INDEX>Class of Service No. (01-32)= A type of error message depends on the situation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8
*****Error : Illegal parameter
*****Error : Not installed
*****Error : Please save data
2. Enter COS number 32 that you want to enter. *****Error : Parameter is empty

3 2 For details about the error messages, refer to

Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
INDEX>Class of Service No. (01-32)=32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

System Class of Service

Class of Service (COS) No. = 32 (1/2)

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8

• COS No.=32 screen appears, and the

function mode is finished automatically.
7-J-11
In the screen, Toll Restriction “Area/Office Code Reference
Table,” both Area/Office Code Table number and
The INDEX function is available for the screen
Entry number must be entered after depressing
listed below. For the input values, refer to
the INDEX (F2) key.
Section 9 “System Programming (VT).”

INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (1-8)=2
1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7
The example below shows the procedures to
display the screen of Entry 251 of Area/Office
code Table No.2.
1. Enter the Area/Office code table number 2.
INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (1-8)=2
Entry (200-999)= • System-Class of Service (1/2) (2/2)
• System-Numbering Plan (1/8) to (8/8)
8 • System-Speed Dialing-System
• Group-Trunk Group (1/2) (2/2)
• Trunk-CO Line
• Extension-Station (1/3) (2/3) (3/3)
• Extension-DSS Console (1/3) (2/3) (3/3)
• Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table
2 • Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables
• Automatic Route Selection-Leading Digit Table
• Automatic Route Selection-Office Code Table
• Automatic Route Selection-Route Plan Tables
Entry (200-999)=
• Automatic Route Selection-Route List Table

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

2. Enter 251 after moving the cursor to the Entry

position by using key.

2 5 1

INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (1-8)=2 Entry (200-999)=251

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table

Area/Office Code Table No.=2 Entry=251
CODE L, PL, OC
250 Y, 16
251 Y, 16

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8

• Area/Office Code Table No.=2 Entry=251

screen appears and the function mode
finishes automatically.

7-J-12
8.00 COPY
Description
5. Press the RETURN key. RETURN
This function enables you to copy the desired
system programming data from specified screen
System-Class of Service
to multiple screens at a time, and is available in
the screens where COPY is displayed in the Class of Service (COS) No. = 01 (1/2)
function field.
COPY>COS No. (01-32)= 01 COS No.= 30-32
Operation ***** OK
<Example> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

Copying the data in System “Class of Service”

No.01 to COS No.30 through No.32 • The message below appears when the
original data of COS No.=01 is properly
System-Class of Service
copied to COS No.=30 through 32
Class of Service (COS) No. = 01 (1/2) *****OK
• Press the EXIT (F7) key to finish this mode.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ
1. Press the F3 key.
Conditions
5 6 HRDCPY 7 8 To copy the original to only one destination, enter
the same destination number in the first and last
positions. In this case, READ function is useful.
F3

COPY>COS No. (01-32)= COS= –

<Example>
Copying COS No.=01 into COS No. 02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 COPY>COS No. (01-32)=01 COS No.= 02-02

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

2. Enter the original COS number, 01. 0 1

COPY>COS No. (01-32)=01 COS No.= – Enter the destination numbers in ascending order.
To repeat the “COPY” operation, repeat from step
2. Then press the RETURN key.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

If the COPY operation is unsuccessful, one of the

3. Move the Cursor to the first COS No. position error messages below appears.
to be copied by using . Then enter the Error message types depend on the situation.
COS number, 30. 0 3 *****Error : Illegal parameter
*****Error : Not installed
COPY>COS No. (01-32)=01 COS No.=30 –
For details about the Error messages, refer to
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”

4. Move the cursor to the last COS No. position

to be copied by using . Then enter the
COS number, 32
3 2

COPY>COS No. (01-32)=01 COS No.=30-32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

7-J-13
In the Toll Restriction “Area/Office Code Table,” Reference
“TABLE” and “ENTRY” appear in the function
The Copy function is available in the following
display line as below after pressing the COPY
screens.
(F3) key.
For the input values, refer to Section 9 “System
For copying the whole table, press the TABLE
Programming (VT).”
(F1) key and for copying entries in the same
table, press the ENTRY (F2) key.
• System-Class of Service (1/2) (2/2)
• Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table
• Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables
COPY> • Automatic Route Selection-Leading Digit Table
• Automatic Route Selection-Office Code Table
1 TABLE 2 ENTRY 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 • Automatic Route Selection-Route Plan Tables
• Automatic Route Selection-Route List Table

Copying the whole Table

Depress the F1 key. F1

COPY>Table No. (1-8)= Table No.= –

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

Copying Entry
Depress the F2 key. F2

COPY>Entry No. (200-999)= Entry No. = –

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

7-J-14
Operation Chart

Press the COPY key F 3

<Function mode>

After entering the COPY

source and destination
numbers, press RETURN

To repeat the “COPY”

operation, set the cursor to the
entry position then return to
the previous stage.

Concluding function mode.

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-15
9.00 READ

Description 3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

This function enables you to copy the desired
system programming data from specified screen
into the currently displayed screen quickly. System-Class of Service
This is available in the screens where READ is
Class of Service (COS) No. = 32 (1/2)
displayed in the function field.

READ>COS No. (01-32)=01

Operation * * * * * OK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8
<Example>
Copying the system programming data of “Class
of Service (COS) No.=01” into “COS No.=32.” • The message below appears when the
stored data of COS No.=01 is copied
The current screen is Class of Service (COS) properly to COS No.=32.
No.=32.
* * * * * OK
System-Class of Service
Class of Service (COS) No. = 32 (1/2) Conditions
To repeat “READ” operation, repeat from step 2.

When READ operation is unsuccessful, one of the

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8 following error messages appears on the screen:
Error message types depend on the situation.

1. Press F4. F4 ***** Error : Illegal parameter

***** Error : Not installed

READ>COS No. (01-32)= For details about the error messages, refer to
Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

To store the copied data, press PF4 or PF2.

To conclude this mode, press the EXIT (F7) key.

Reference
2. Enter the COS number 01 to copied. The READ function is available in the screens
listed below. For the input values, refer to Section
0 1
9 “System Programming (VT).”

READ>COS No. (01-32)=01 • System-Class of Service (1/2) (2/2)

• Group-Trunk Group (1/2) (2/2)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 • Trunk-CO Line
• Extension-Station (1/3) (2/3) (3/3)
• Extension-DSS Console (1/3) (2/3) (3/3)
• Automatic Route Selection-Route Plan Tables

7-J-16
Operation Chart

Press the READ key F4

<Function mode>

After entering number to be

copied, press RETURN

To repeat the “READ” opera-

tion, return to the previous
step.

Concluding function mode

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-17
10.00 HRD CPY (Hard Copy)

Description
When an output device such as printer provided
with RS-232C interface etc., is connected to the
system, it is possible to print out the data on the
screen.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface” for further information about
communication parameters.
This function is available in the screens
displaying HRD CPY on the function field.
Extension - Station
Condition
When HRD CPY operation is unsuccessful, one of
the following error messages appears on the
screen.
An error message type depends on the situation.
*****ERROR : Printer is not ready
*****ERROR : Service Violation
For details about the error contents, refer to
Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”

Reference
The HRD CPY operation is available in the System
Installation screen and all setting screens.
1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 AUTO CNF 8

Operation
1. Press the F6 key. F6

• All data displayed on the screen is printed

out.

7-J-18
11.00 AUTO CNF (Automatic
Configuration)
Description Operation Chart
This function sets the telephone type and DSS
consoles automatically. This function is available
in the screens where AUTO CNF is displayed in Press the AUTOCNF key F 7
the function field.
Extension-Station

Press Y to execute Automatic Configu-

ration.
1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 AUTOCNF 8 Press N not to execute Automatic
Configuration.
Then press RETURN .
Operation
<Example>
When the Telephone Type is set to PITS in
Extension-Station screen and actually SLT
telephone is connected.
Function mode ends automatically
1. Press the F7 key. F7

• The following message appears at the

bottom of the screen. Conditions
Extension-Station When Automatic Configuration operation fails,
Station Equipment No. = 1031 one of the following error messages appears on
the screen.
Telephone Type- - - - - - PITS An error message type depends on the situation.
Model- - - - - - - - - - - - - KX-T123250
*****ERROR : Illegal parameter
AUTOCNF > Automatic Configuration OK? (Y: yes/N: no)= *****ERROR : Not installed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8
*****ERROR : Diagnostic failure

For details of the error contents, refer to Section

9-M “Error Message Tables.”
2. Press “Y” key to execute AUTO CNF.
Y
Reference
Press “N” key not to execute AUTO CNF.
The AUTO CNF function is available in the
N
following setting screens.
3. Press the Return key. RETURN
• Extension-Station (1/3)
• Extension-DSS Console (1/3)
Extension-Station
Station Equipment No. = 1031
Telephone Type- - - - - - SLT
Model- - - - - - - - - - - - -

• Telephone Type changes to SLT automatically.

7-J-19
12.00 SET Function (F8) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description 3. Move the cursor to the right by using “ ”,

Enables you to add or delete office codes without and depress Y.
Y
moving the cursor to the code position. It also
enables you to designate wide range of codes.
This function is effective in the “Toll Restriction- SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) =200 (Y:yes/N:no) Y
Office Code Tables” and “Automatic Route
Selection-Office Code Tables.”
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

Operation
<Example 1>
Adding office code 200 in Toll Restriction Office 4. Press the RETURN key. RETURN
Code Table

Toll Restriction-Office Code Table Toll Restriction-Office Code Table

Office Code Table No.=01 (1/4) Office Code Table No.=01 (1/4)

2 Hundred Office code 2 Hundred Office code

,01,02,03 --- 09 00,01,02,03 --- 09
10,11,12,13 --- 19 10,11,12,13 --- 19
20,21,22,23 --- 29

Office code 200 is added

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 SET

Adding office code 200

1. Press the F8 key.
• “00” appears on the screen and Office code
200 is added. Also the message below
appears to show that the code 200 is added
properly:
F8
***** OK

SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) (Y:yes/N:no)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

2. Enter the office code number 200.

2 0 0

SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) =200 (Y:yes/N:no)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

7-J-20
(60395)
<Example 2> 4. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

Deleting Office code 220 in Toll Restriction Office

Toll Restriction-Office Code Table
Code Table
Office Code Table No.=01 (1/4)
1. Press the F8 key. F8
2 Hundred Office code 3 Hundred Office code
,01,02,03 --- 09
SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) (Y:yes/N:no) 10,11,12,13 --- 19
,21,22,23 --- 29

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 SET>Office code No. (200-999) =200 (Y:yes/N:no) N

* * * * * OK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

2. Enter the office code number 220. Office code 220 is deleted

2 2 0

• Office code 220 is deleted and “ ” (blank)

SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) =220 (Y:yes/N:no) appears on the screen. Also the following
message shows that code 220 is deleted
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8 properly:
***** OK

Conditions
3. Move the cursor to the right by using “ ”,
and press N. When the SET operation is unsuccessful, the
N
following error message appears:

SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) =200 (Y:yes/N:no) N ***** ERROR: Illegal parameter

For details of the error contents, refer to Section

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8
9-M “Error Message Tables.”

It is also possible to designate wide range of

office code by using N, P, X instead of the
number:
N : 2 to 9
P : 0,1
X : 0 to 9
For example, then designating the office codes
200 through 209, enter : 20X

7-J-21
(60395)
Operation Chart

Press the SET key F8

<Function mode>

After entering Office code,

press Y to add or N to
delete.
Then press RETURN

To execute SET functions

successively, return to the
previous step.

Concluding Function mode

Press the EXIT key F7

7-J-22
(60395)
 Section 8

Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal

 (Section 8)

Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal
Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 8-A-1
1.00 On-Site Administration........................................................................... 8-A-1
2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location.................................... 8-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure...................................................................................... 8-A-3
4.00 Correspondence between Input Format and Explanation Table............ 8-A-4

B Entering/Finishing a Mode............................................................................... 8-B-1

1.00 Entering a Mode .................................................................................... 8-B-1
1.01 Initial Mode.................................................................................. 8-B-1
1.02 Pre-entering Mode....................................................................... 8-B-2
1.03 Programming Mode..................................................................... 8-B-2
1.04 Operation Mode........................................................................... 8-B-3
1.05 Changing the Current Mode........................................................ 8-B-4
2.00 Finishing a Mode ................................................................................... 8-B-5
2.01 EXIT............................................................................................. 8-B-5
2.02 Restart......................................................................................... 8-B-5
3.00 Flow Chart for Changing Modes............................................................ 8-B-6

C Fixed Key Operation........................................................................................ 8-C-1

D Input Format-General....................................................................................... 8-D-1

1.00 Programming Mode............................................................................... 8-D-1
2.00 Operation Mode..................................................................................... 8-D-4

E Function Commands........................................................................................ 8-E-1

1.00 $ EOD.................................................................................................... 8-E-1
2.00 $ J Item Number.................................................................................... 8-E-1
3.00 $ CLR..................................................................................................... 8-E-2
4.00 $ CPY .................................................................................................... 8-E-3
5.00 $ SET (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only).................................................. 8-E-4
6.00 $ CNF .................................................................................................... 8-E-5

8-1
(60395)
 Page
F Maintenance Command................................................................................... 8-F-1
1.00 Change Level (CHL).............................................................................. 8-F-1
2.00 Show Level (SHL).................................................................................. 8-F-1
3.00 In Service (INS) ..................................................................................... 8-F-2
4.00 Out of Service (OUS)............................................................................. 8-F-3
5.00 Remove (REM)...................................................................................... 8-F-3
6.00 Print Out (PRT)...................................................................................... 8-F-4
7.00 Set Date and Time (SDT)...................................................................... 8-F-4

G Help Function................................................................................................... 8-G-1

1.00 Programming Mode............................................................................... 8-G-1
2.00 Operation Mode..................................................................................... 8-G-1

8-2
A. Introduction

1.00 On-Site Administration

Description
You can administer the system programming and
maintenance of the system using a Dumb
terminal.
For details about communication parameters,
refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface.”
Successful Login
When you enter the correct password, the
terminal displays the Main Menu screen from
which you can select administration functions.
By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
enter a system programming area and can
access specific system parameters and features.

System Security
For security reasons, access to the
administration capabilities of the system is
controlled by a password. To prevent an
unauthorized person from learning the password,
the password characters are not displayed when
they are entered.

Password
To gain access to the system administration
feature, a valid password (four-digit,
alphanumeric characters*) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, the password
must be entered exactly as stored in memory.
Factory programmed eight passwords are
provided from the first to fourth levels for on-site
operation and the first to fourth levels for
operation from a remote location.

The followings are the functions available to each

password level.

The 1st Level : To access to all levels.

The 2nd Level : To set system level parameters.
The 3rd Level : To set port level parameters.
The 4th Level : To read parameters only.

When you log in to the system using the first

level password, you can execute all functions,
but are increasingly restricted when entering the
levels 2, 3 and 4.
Passwords are originally factory programmed,
but may be changed when logging in to the
system by entering the first level password.
Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.”
* Alphanumeric characters
ASCII codes except special codes (DEL, ESC
etc.) But entering “/” “~” are not available,
because these characters cannot be displayed
on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) of a PITS.
Both uppercase and lowercase characters can
be recognized by the system.

8-A-1
2.00 System Administration from
a Remote Location
Description Operation
From a remote location, you can execute system Starting up system administration from a remote
programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements location can be done in the following ways:
using a Dumb terminal.
For details about communication parameters, • Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
Interface.” For further information about DISA feature,
refer to 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System Access
Conditions (DISA).”
• RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
• Program DID feature so that the incoming
system and register the telephone number of
telephone number is converted to the “Remote
modem in the System-Operation “Remote
Directory Number.”
Directory Number” (FDN: 3 or 4 digits) for
For further information about DID feature, refer
accessing the remote administration feature.
to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing.”
For further information about “Remote Directory
Number,” refer to Section 10-C-4.00 “Operation
• Assign that a call from a remote-location can
(OPR).”
access the Remote Administration feature”
automatically using DIL (1:1) feature.
• For remote access, a data terminal and modem
For further information about DIL (1:1) feature,
are required at a remote location.
refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In Line (DIL).”
• Factory programmed 4 types of password from
• Remote access by operator transfer
1st to 4th level for remote operation are
The call from a remote location can be made
provided. Passwords are originally factory
on any trunk into the system, and be answered
programmed, but may be changed at any time.
by the operator.
Refer to Section 8-F-1.00 “Change Level
The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
(CHL).”
Directory Number of the system dialed is
received. The operator transfers the call after
• You can execute remote system administration
receiving the modem answer tone. The caller
during on-line communication mode only. But
at a remote location will then hear the modem
when you load the system programming data
answer tone and can proceed with sign-on.
from a remote location, the system shifts to off-
Refer to Section 4-F-1.05 “Unscreened Call
line communication mode automatically.
Transfer to Remote” for further information.
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure”
for details.
When the system administrator at a remote
location accesses the system remote
• Starting up system administration from a remote
administration feature, the following message
location can be done only in Dumb mode.
appears on the display of operator's telephone if
display is provided.
1234:RMT Access
After you log in to the system from a remote
location, you can operate the system in the same
way as if you were on-site.
Only one system administration terminal can
access the system at a time.

8-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure
Administration employing a dumb terminal consists When entering a mode except Initial mode, the
of the following four modes: prompt depending on the mode appears on the
display. That is, the displayed prompt shows the
• Initial mode current mode.
• Pre-entering mode
• Programming mode The table below shows the mode and the prompt
• Operation mode displayed on the screen:

Administration employing a dumb Mode Prompt

terminal
Pre-entering mode ;>
Programming mode ; PRG >
Initial mode Operation mode ; OPE >

Pre-entering mode

Programming mode Operation mode

8-A-3
4.00 Correspondence between Input
Format and Explanation Table
The following example shows the relation between the
input format and the explanation table.

Input Format

D N A Type of Mode Index Number Item Number CR

The ( ) mark above means that it can

be omitted depending on the commands.
Enter SH, AT or BT
(Refer to Section 8-D-1.00 “Programming Mode” for
details about SH, AT, and BT.
Index Number

Index Number Explanation

X XX Physical number (101 to 315)

slot (01 to 15)
shelf (1 to 3)

Enter the index number as explained in the table.

Input Value for Item

Item
Assigning Item Input Value
Number

1 Port 1

2 Port 2

3 Port 3

4 Port 4 Three or four digit number : Directory number

5 Port 5

6 Port 6

7 Port 7

8 Port 8

Enter the item number depending on the assigning items.

When the assigning item appears, enter the For example, if you assign DN of Port 1, enter
value explained in “Input Value” of the table. Item Number 1 and when Port 1 appears, enter
three or four-digit number.

8-A-4
(E)
 B. Entering/Finishing a Mode

1.00 Entering a Mode

1.01 Initial Mode

The mode before going into the Pre-entering mode
is defined as “Initial mode.”
Entering the password level four (forced password)
in the “Initial mode” advances the mode to “Pre-
entering mode.”
The following flow chart illustrates the procedures
for advancing the mode from “Initial mode” to
“Pre-entering mode.”

Initial mode

; * *
; * Panasonic Hybrid PBX: KX-T336 System*
; * * Initial display
;

Press the RETURN key

; PASSWORD :
Password Entry screen

Press RETURN after entering the forced

password

Pre-entering mode

; Select the mode

; Programming mode -------- PRG Mode Selection screen
; Operation mode ------------ OPE
; (displays command information-- HLP)
Pre-entering mode ;>
prompt

Note :To prevent an unauthorized person from learning the

password, the password characters are not displayed
when they are entered.

8-B-1
1.02 Pre-entering Mode 1.03 Programming Mode

The mode before going into the Programming
mode or Operation mode is defined as “Pre-
entering mode,” that is, for entering the
“Programming mode” or “Operation mode.”
This mode is used to assign or change the
system programming data.
The flow chart below illustrates the procedures for
advancing the mode from “Pre-entering mode” to
“Programming mode.”

Pre-entering mode

; Select the mode

; Programming mode -------- PRG Mode Selection
; Operation mode ------------ OPE screen
; (displays command information-- HLP)
;>

After entering PRG, press RETURN.

Programming mode

Programming ; PRG >

mode prompt

For details about operation in the Programming

mode, refer to Section 8-D “Input Format-
General” and Section 10 “System Programming
(Dumb Type Terminal).”

8-B-2
1.04 Operation Mode

This mode is for confirming and changing the The following flow chart illustrates the procedures
password level, system maintenance and monitor for advancing the mode from “Pre-entering mode”
etc. except the programming for the system data. to “Operation mode.”

Pre-entering mode

; Select the mode

; Programming mode -------- PRG
; Operation mode ------------ OPE
; (displays command information-- HLP)
;>

After entering OPE, press RETURN.

Operation mode

Operation ; OPE >

mode prompt

For details about operation in the Operation

mode, refer to Section 8-E-2.00 “Operation
Mode.”

8-B-3
1.05 Changing the Current Mode

It is possible to change “Programming mode” to

“Operation mode” and vice versa.

The flow charts show the procedures.

• Changing Programming mode to Operation • Changing Operation mode to Programming

mode mode

Programming mode Operation mode

; PRG> ; OPE>

After entering OPE, press RETURN. After entering PRG, press RETURN.

Operation mode Programming mode

; OPE > ; PRG >

The system prompt changes from PRG> to The system prompt changes from OPE> to
OPE>. PRG>.

The current mode now is the Operation Mode. The current mode now is the Programming
Mode.

8-B-4
2.00 Finishing a Mode

2.01 EXIT 2.02 Restart

The flow chart below shows how to conclude the Description

Programming mode or the Operation mode and
return to the Initial mode. Initializes the whole system. Same condition as
the RESET button is pressed.
(Password level : One)

Input Format
; OPE > RST
Programming Operation
mode or mode

After entering EXIT, press RETURN.

Pre-entering mode

;>

After entering EXIT, press RETURN.

Initial mode

; * *
; * Panasonic Hybrid PBX: KX-T336 System*
; * *
;

8-B-5
3.00 Flow Chart for Changing Modes

The procedure for changing modes is illustrated below:

Initial mode
; * *
; * Panasonic Hybrid PBX: KX-T336 System*
; * *
;

Press RETURN

; Password :

After entering the

password, press
RETURN.
To conclude Pre-entering mode

Pre-entering mode After entering EXIT,

press RETURN.
; Select the mode
; Programming mode ---------- PRG
; Operation mode -------------- OPE
; (displays command information --- HLP
; >

To enter Programming mode To enter Operation mode

After entering PRG, After entering OPE,

press RETURN. press RETURN.

To change the mode

Programming mode After entering Operation mode
OPE, press
RETURN.
; PRG > ; OPE >

Execution of operation in Execution of operation in

Programming mode After entering Operation mode
PRG, press
RETURN.

To conclude Programming mode or Operation mode

After entering EXIT, press RETURN.

8-B-6
C. Fixed Key Operation

BS

Moves the cursor one character left and deletes the character in that position.

Function command key used for concluding AT or BT mode with characters

($EOD) or ($CPY) etc. For details, refer to Section 8-E “Function Commands.”

In BT mode, entered between indexes as a delimiter.

'

In BT mode, entered between items as a delimiter.

"

When entering characters such as names and locations etc., used for identifying
them.

CTRL + C

Cancels an operation during programming.

CTRL + S

Stops scrolling information on the screen to let you view it.

CTRL + Q

Resumes screen scrolling.

CTRL + V

Changes the mode to VT mode.

Repeats the execution of the last entered command.

Cancels the command line and displays the prompt.

8-C-1
D. Input Format-General
1.00 Programming Mode Auto Gain Control AGC
Extension EXT
Input Format-General DSS Console DSS
DN Button Assignment DNK
In the programming mode (when PRG> is PF Button Assignment PFK
displayed on the screen), enter as follows: DSS Button Assignment DSK
Doorphone DPH
1 2 3
Attendant Console ATT
; PRG> Command Type of Mode Index Number Attendant Queue Priority AQP
4 Equal Access EQU
Item Number Carriage Return (CR) OCC Access OCC
TRS Area/Office Code Tables TR1
TRS Office Code Tables TR2
Note: Be sure to enter one space between the TRS 7/10 - Digit Table TR3
items. The ( ↵ ) in the followings indicates ARS Leading Digit Table AR1
pressing the RETURN key. ARS Office Code Tables AR2
ARS Route Plan Tables AR3
<Example> ARS Route Lists Table AR4
ARS Modified Digit Table AR5
Displaying “Operation (OPR)” command, SMDR
DISA DIS
(Index number 2, Item number 02) DISA Code DIC
DISA Password DIP
Enter as follows: DID DID
; PRG>OPR SH 2 02 ( ↵ ) UCD (1/2) UC1
UCD (2/2) UC2
TIE Line Routing Table TIE
Displays the following: Installation Information INF
Power Failure Transfer PFT
Change Password CHG
; INDEX=2 CPC Detect Time-Outgoing CPC
World Select 1 WS1
; 02 : SMDR Y
World Select 2 WS2
; PRG> Automatic Busy-out Count ABC
World Select 3 WS3
1. Commands CO Access Instantly CAI
Account Code Verified ACV
The following programming commands are Account Code Entry on Long ACL
available in the programming mode. Distance Calls
Speed Dialing Boundary SPB
For further information about programming, refer
Night Answer Group NAG
to Section 10 “System Programming-Dumb Type Polarity Reversal Detection PRD
Terminal.” Voice Mail Directory Number VMD
Mail Box Number MBN
Programming Command Waiting for Second Dial Tone WSD
Equal Access Code EQC
System Assignment SYA
World Select 4 WS4
Slot Assignment SLA
TIE Account Code TAC
DN Assignment DNA
Clock Mode CLK
Channel Assignment CHA
Clock Priority CLP
Operation OPR
TIE Trunk Relay Restriction TRR
Tenant TNN
MFC Sequence Parameter MFC
System Timer TIM
Charge Password CPD
Class of Service 1 CS1
Charge Rate RAT
Class of Service 2 CS2
Charge Limitation CLT
Local Access Group LAG
E&M Selection EMS
Numbering Plan NBP
Tone Detection Mode TDM
Communication Interface COM
Line Hunting Sequence LHS
Speed Dialing-System SPD
ESF Frame Option EFO
Absent Message ABS
UCD Auto Log-out Operation ULO
Trunk Group (1/2) TG1
MFC-R2 Option (E-1) MRO
Trunk Group (2/2) TG2
E-1 Signaling Option ESO
ICM/Paging Group IPG
Limited Call Duration LCD
Call Pickup Group CPG
Call Forwarding-Follow Me CFM
CO Line COL
Pulsed E&M PEM
External Paging PAG
TIE Caller ID Integration TCI
Music Source MUS
Answer Signal Wait Time AWT

8-D-1
(70695)
2.Type of Mode 2) Auto Type-AT
Three types of Show type, Auto type and Batch Enables you to show or edit the data in an
type are available. interactive format.

1) Show Type-SH Showing the data

Each item appears one by one by every pressing
Enables you only to read the preset data.
of the RETURN key.
The preset data cannot be changed by this type.
Editing the data
<Example>
If you do not want to change the data, press the
Displaying the data in System Assignment
RETURN key when ; INPUT>> is displayed.
If you want to change the data, enter the
Enter:
appropriate values after ; INPUT>> , then press
; PRG>SYA SH ( )
the RETURN key.
Displays the follows: To save the data after changing it, be sure to
enter $EOD after ; INPUT>> , then press the
RETURN key.
; 1 Expansion Shelf N
; 2 Additional CONF N
<Example>
; PRG> Changing the data in System Assignment

Enter:
; PRG>SYA AT ( )

Displays:

; 1 : Expansion shelf N
; INPUT>>

To change N to Y, enter Y ( ).

Next item appears:

; 2 : Additional CONF Y
; INPUT>>

To save the data of item 1, enter $EOD ( ):

Concludes AT mode

; PRG>

8-D-2
(70695)
3) Batch Type-BT 3. Index Number
Enter the index number if required. For the
Enables you to edit the data in batch processing.
commands without indexes and the commands
which can omit the index numbers, entry of index
Entry of data by batch type
number is not necessary. Refer to the list below.
• Enter comma (,) between items.
• Enter slash (/) between indexes.
When the index number is omitted, Item number
• Enter only comma (,) or slash (/) when not
should be also omitted.
entering the parameter.
The date of the parameter is not changed.
(Commands without indexes)
• To conclude BT mode in the middle of entry, enter
SYA, TIM, LAG, NBP, ABS, ATT, TR3, INF,
$EOD after the entry of comma (,) or slash (/).
WS1, WS2, WS3
<Example 1>
(Commands possible to omit the Index number)
Entering External Pager (PAG) in Batch type mode
SLA, COM, CPG, PAG, MUS, DPH, DIC, DIP,
DID, UC1, UC2, PFT
Enter:
; PRG>PAG BT ( )
4. Item Number
Displays:
Enter when you want to specify an item number.
Possible to be omitted in all commands.
PAG BT

Enter the appropriate numbers and letters:

1, Y,1, Y, Y ( )

Concludes Batch type mode

; PRG

<Example 2>
Concluding entry in the middle of the entry of
operation (OPR) in the Batch type mode

Enter:
; PRG>OPR BT 1 ( )

Displays:

OPR BT 1

Enter the appropriate data and conclude in the

middle:

Y, Y, 2, 2, $EOD ( )

Concludes Batch type mode

; PRG

8-D-3
(70695)
2.00 Operation Mode

Input Format-General 1. Commands

In the operation mode (when ; OPE> is displayed The following operation commands are available
on the screen), enter as follows: in Operation mode. Enter a command depending
1 2 3 on an operation.
; OPE> Command ( Index Number ) ( Item 1 )
( item 2 )• • • • + ( item n ) Operation Command

Carriage Return (CR)( ) Test TST

System Maintenance Monitor SYM
Note: Be sure to enter one space between the In Service INS
items. Out of Service OUS
The ( )in the followings indicates pressing Remove REM
the RETURN key. Error Log Display ERR
Traffic Display TFD
<Example> Print Out PRT
Displaying the first half of Traffic Information Set Date and Time SDT
(Index number 1) System Programming Data LOD
and Attendant Console
Enter: Database Load
; OPE>TFD 1 1 ( ) System Programming Data SAV
and Attendant Console
The following information appears: Database Save
Change Level CHL
Show Level SHL
Traffic Information - Station (1/2)
Restart RST

Feb. 22 1990
2. Index Number
Start Time --------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM When the command is provided with indexes, enter
Incoming Calls --- 498 637 590 120 803 760
Answer Calls ----- 360 503 476 88 711 662
the index number. For the command without
Outgoing Calls --- 405 602 555 103 763 731 indexes or the command which is able to omit the
Completed Calls- 241 430 411 48 509 500 index number, entry of Index number is not
CCS----------------- 723 811 780 230 998 889 necessary.
Start Time --------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM
Incoming Calls --- 632 721 611 598 420 311 (Commands without indexes)
Answer Calls ----- 531 603 482 449 289 192 SDT, LOD, SAV, CHL, RST
Outgoing Calls --- 600 654 600 531 301 191
Completed Calls- 442 488 503 461 188 119
CCS----------------- 800 830 762 750 680 620
(Command which is able to omit the index number)
PRT

3. Item 1 to item n
Enter the value depending on the item.
Do not enter the item number for the command
without items.

(Commands without items)

SYM, PRT, CHL, SHL, RST

8-D-4
Reference
For details about the following commands, refer to:

TST Section 15-E-3.00 “TST command (Test)

SYM Section 15-F-1.00 “SYM command (System

Maintenance Monitor)
ERR Section 15-D-1.02 “Error Log”
TFD Section 15-F-2.00 “TFD command (Traffic
Display)”

SAV Section 16-B-4.01 “Saving Procedure”

Section 17-B-2.01 “Saving Procedure”
LOD Section 16-B-4.02 “Loading Procedure”
Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure”

RST Section 8-B-2.02 “Restart”

8-D-5
E. Function Commands

In Auto type (AT) and Batch type (BT) modes of 2.00 $ J Item Number
Programming mode, the following function com-
mands are used for ending the modes, copying
data and so on. In AT mode, this command enables you to read
For details about types of modes, refer to Section the desired item immediately.
8-D-1.00 “Programming Mode.” This function is effective for all the commands
provided with items.

<Example>
1.00 $ E O D
Reading Operation command Index 1, Item 17
(FDN for General Operator Call)
• In AT mode
If the following is already displayed:
After storing data, concludes AT mode.
Enter this command after “INPUT<< ” is
displayed. ; INDEX=1
; 01 : Tenant Service Y
• In BT mode ; INPUT>>

Concludes BT mode in the middle of entry.

Be sure to enter this command after comma (,)
or slash (/).
Enter:
$J17 ( )

Displays:

; 17 : FDN for General Operator Call

; INPUT>>

Every pressing of the RETURN key displays the

next item. After the last item is displayed, the first
item is displayed by pressing the RETURN key.

8-E-1
(60395)
3.00 $ C L R

Clears data (no data setting) in AT and BT modes. Enter:

This function is effective for the following item $CLR ( )
numbers of the respective command.
To execute the clearing function, make sure to Displays:
enter $EOD after $CLR.
Command Item number ; 14 : Start Time of Test
OPR (Index 2) 13, 14, 17 ; INPUT>>
TNN 04 to 19
LAG 03 to 18
NBP 01 to 87
SPD 2
Enter:
ABS 07 to 16
$EOD ( )
TG1 02
TG2 10 to 25
The value “09: 00A” is cleared from “13:
COL 2
Start Time of Traffic Measurement” and
EXT 05, 06
concludes this mode:
DNK 04, 09, 14, 19, 24, 29, 34,
39, 44, 49, 54
PFK 02, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12, 14,
16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, ; PRG>
30, 32
DSK 02, 04, 06, 08, 10, • • • •, 64
EQU 02, 07, 09, 11 • In BT mode
OCC 02, 07, 09, 11
AR2 001 Enter:
AR3 01 to 32 ; PRG>OPR BT2 13 ( )
AR4 01 to 14
AR5 2 Displays:
DIP 1 to 8
DID 3 OPR BT2 13
INF 01 to 10
PFT 1, 2

<Example> Enter
Clearing “Operation” Index 2, Item 13 Start Time $CLR ( )
of Traffic Measurement. The value of item 13 is cleared.

• In AT mode

Enter as follows:
; PRG>OPR AT 2 13 ( )

Displays the following:

; INDEX=2
; 13 : Start Time of Traffic Measurement 09:00A
; INPUT>>

8-E-2
(60395)
4.00 $ C P Y

In AT and BT modes, copies the setting data.

This function is effective for the following index
numbers of the respective command. Enter:
Command Index number $CPY 01 02-02 ( )

CS1 01 to 32 CS No.1 is copied to No.2 and displays

CS2 01 to 32 like the following:
TR1 *1 to 8
or Entry number 200 to 999 ; Class of Service No. 01
TR2 01 to 64 ; 01:Toll Restriction Level (Day) 08
AR1 200 to 999 ; INPUT>>
AR2 01 to 32
AR3 01 to 32
AR4 01 to 64 • In BT (Batch type) mode

* See Note on the next page. Enter:

; PRG>CS1 BT 01 ( )
Input Format
$CPY XXX XXX- XXX Displays:

<1> <2> <3>

CS1 BT01
<1> Enter the index number of copy source
data.
<2> <3> Enter the first and last index numbers.

Note: Enter the index numbers in ascending order. Enter:

If you want to copy the source data to one $CPY 01 02-02 ( )
destination, enter the same index numbers The data of “Class of Service No.1” is copied to
into <2> and <3> . that of No.2

In AT mode, enter $CPY when the first item is Note: In TR1 command, copying by the Index
displayed. Copying is unavailable after the entry of number or the entry number is available.
another item. In this case, the input format is as follows:
$CPY 1 or 2 XXX XXX-XXX
<Example>
Enter 1 to copy by the entry number.
Copying the data of “Class of Service No.1” to Enter 2 to copy by the index number.
“Class of Service No.2.”
<Example>
• In AT mode Copying data of entry number 200 to entry
numbers 201 through 900, enter as follows:
Enter:
; PRG>CS1 AT 01 ( ) $CPY 1 200 201-900
by Entry number
Displays:
Copying data of Index numbers 1 to Index
number 2 through 8, enter as follows:
; Class of Service No. 01
; 01:Toll Restriction Level (Day) 08 $CPY 2 1 2-8
; INPUT>>
by Index number

8-E-3
(60395)
5.00 $ S E T (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

In AT and BT modes, used for the entry numbers Enter:

200 through 999 in TR 2 and AR2 commands, to $SET NXX N ( )
set “Y” or “N” to all the entry numbers that you
All the entry numbers are set to “N”
designated.
and displays:
Input Format
; Office Code Table No. 01
$SET XXX Y/N ; 001 : Area code N
; INPUT>>
<1> <2>

<1> Enter the Entry number that you want to set. • In BT (Batch type) mode
When you want to designate multiple
numbers, use N, P, X. Enter:
; PRG>AR2 BT 02 ( )
N: designates 2 through 9
P: 0 and 1 Displays:
X: 0 through 9.

<Example>
AR2 BT 02
When specifying 200 through 209, enter:
20X
When specifying 200 through 999, enter:
NXX
When specifying 200, 300, 400, • • •, 800, 900, Enter:
enter: $SET NXX N ( )
N00 All the entry numbers are set to “N.”

<2> Set “Y” or “N”.

In AT mode, enter the number while the first item is

displayed.
$SET is ineffective after entering another item.

<Example>
Setting all the entry numbers in the Index number
1 of AR2 to “N.”

• In AT mode

Enter:
; PRG>AR2 AT 01 ( )

Displays:

; Office Code Table No. 01

; 001 : Area code Y
; INPUT>>

8-E-4
(60395)
6.00 $ C N F

Used in AT mode, and sets the Telephone Type

of the extension and DSS consoles automatically.

<Example>
When the telephone type of DN 103 is set to “2”
(PITS) and actually connected telephone type is
“1” (SLT).

Enter:
; PRG>EXT AT DN 103 ( )

Displays:

; 01 : Telephone Type 2
; INPUT >>

Enter:
$CNF
Telephone Type changes to “1”
automatically and displays:

; 01 : Telephone Type 1
; INPUT >>

8-E-5
(60395)
F. Maintenance Command

1.00 Change Level (CHL) 2.00 Show Level (SHL)

Description Description
Allows you to change the password level. Allows you to confirm the current password level.
(Password level : Four or higher) (Password level : Four or higher)

Input Format Input Format

; OPE> CHL ; OPE> SHL

After pressing the RETURN key and “= ”

appears, enter the password. However, the
password characters are not displayed when they
are entered.

8-F-1
3.00 In Service (INS)
Description cards and shelves should be “In Service” already.
(Password level : Two or higher)
Allows you to change the status of shelves,
For further information about In Service, refer to
cards, ports and stations from “Out of Service” to
Section 15-C-1.01 “INS (In Service) command.”
“In Service.”
The system should be in on-line communication
Input Format
mode.
For changing lower devices such as stations and ; OPE> INS Item Number
ports etc. to “In Service,” upper devices such as

Device Item Number Explanation

Shelf 1 to 3 Physical number

1: Basic Shelf
2: Expansion Shelf 1
3: Expansion Shelf 2

Card 101 to 315 Physical number

101 to 112: Service Cards in the Basic Shelf
201 to 215: Service Cards in the Expansion Shelf 1
301 to 315: Service Cards in the Expansion Shelf 2

Port 1011 to 3158 Physical number

1011 to 1128: Port number assigned to Service Cards in
the Basic Shelf
2011 to 2158: Port number assigned to Service Cards in
the Expansion Shelf 1
3011 to 3158: Port number assigned to Service Cards in
the Expansion Shelf 2

Station DNXXXX Extension directory number (XXXX: three or four digit number)
or Physical number
1011 to 3158

Attendant Console A1 or A2 Attendant Console number

1011 to 3158 Port physical number

DTMF Receiver Rxxxy xxx:card physical number (101 to 315)

y:1 or 2

Conference Trunk CFBxx(01 to 08) Basic conference trunk number

CFOyy(01 to 64) Optional conference trunk number

8-F-2
4.00 Out of Service (OUS)

Description For further information about Out of Service, refer

to Section 15-C-1.02 “OUS (Out of Service)
Allows you to change the status of cards, ports
command.”
and stations from “In Service” to “Out of Service.”
The system should be in on-line communication
Input Format
mode.
When setting the shelves or cards to “Out of ; OPE> OUS Item Number
Service,” then lower devices, such as stations,
ports etc. become “Out of Service” automatically. Item numbers are same as those listed in 3.00 “In
(Password level : Two or higher) Service (INS)” on the previous page.

5.00 Remove (REM)

Description Before you detach the installed devices, remove
the system programming data of associated
Enables you to delete the stored system
device using this command.
programming data by specifying stations, Attendant
Consoles and so on.
Input Format
The system should be in on-line communication
mode. ; OPE> REM Item Number
Specified terminal must be in Out of Service.
(Password level:one)

Device Item Number Explanation

Port 1011 to 3158 Physical number

Station DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX: three or four

or digit number)
1011 to 3158 Physical number

Attendant console A1 or A2 Attendant Console number

or
1011 to 3158 Physical number

8-F-3
6.00 Print Out (PRT) 7.00 Set Date and Time (SDT)

Description Description
You can print out the system programming data, Allows you to set the date and time
system status, error log, and traffic information
respectively by entering one of the print out Input Format
commands described in the following Input Format.
; OPE> SDT Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4

Item 5 Item 6 Item 7

Input Format
1. Printing out the system programming data All items from 1 through 7 must be entered.
associated with all commands of programming
mode. Item Assigning Item Input Value

; OPE> PRT ( )
1 Year XX: last two digits of the year

2. Printing out the system programming data by 2 Month 01 to 12: Jan. through Dec.
specifying a command name.
3 Day 01 to 31
(Example)
; OPE> PRT Command Name
4 Week 1 : Sunday
2 : Monday
3 : Tuesday
; OPE> PRT SLA 4 : Wednesday
5 : Thursday
6 : Friday
3. Printing out the data by specifying the index 7 : Saturday
number.
5 Hour 01 to 12
; OPE> PRT Command Name
6 Minute 00 to 59
Index number
7 AM/PM 1: a.m.
(Example) 2: p.m.

; OPE> PRT TFD 1 to 7

For only reading the preset data, enter ;
; OPE> PRT EXT DN100 OPE> SDT

4. Stopping the print out.

; OPE> PRT 0

8-F-4
G. Help Function

1.00 Programming Mode 2.00 Operation Mode

Description Description
Used to display brief instructions and a list of Used to display brief instructions and a list of
commands available in the Programming Mode. commands available in the Operation Mode.

Input Format Input Format

; PRG> HLP ; OPE> HLP

Display
Display

;OPE>HLP<CR>
;<< Command + (Index) + (Item No.1) + (Item No.2) + •••• + (Item No.n) >>
;Command are..
; TST ...Test
; INS ...In Service
; REM ...Remove
; TFD ...Traffic Display
; SDT ...Set Date and Time
; SAV ...Program Data Save
; SHL ...Show Level
; DTM ...DTMF-G/R Diagnosis
; VUP ...ROM version up
; OPE>
SYM ...System Maintenance Monitor
OUS ...Out of Service
ERR ...Display Error Log
PRT ...Print Out
LOD ...Initial Program Load
CHL ...Change Level
RST ...Restart
LBT ...Loop Back Test

(Note)
In the list above, the commands in the shaded
parts are not available for areas other than
U.S.A. and Canada.

8-G-1
(70695)
 Section 9

System Programming
VT220 and Compatibles
 (Section 9)

System Programming
VT220 and Compatibles

Contents

Page
A Introduction ............................................................................... 9-A-1

B Construction of Programming Mode............................................ 9-B-1

C Configuration Screen................................................................... 9-C-1

1.00 System Assignment ........................................................ 9-C-1

2.00 Slot Assignment .............................................................. 9-C-3
3.00 DN Assignment ............................................................... 9-C-6
4.00 Channel Assignment ....................................................... 9-C-8
4.01 T-1 card .................................................................. 9-C-8
4.02 E-1 card.................................................................. 9-C-9

D System Screen ............................................................................ 9-D-1

1.00 Operation......................................................................... 9-D-1

1.01 Operation (1/3)....................................................... 9-D-1
1.02 Operation (2/3)....................................................... 9-D-7
1.03 Operation (3/3)....................................................... 9-D-11
2.00 Tenant ............................................................................. 9-D-14
3.00 System Timer .................................................................. 9-D-18
4.00 Class of Service .............................................................. 9-D-22
4.01 Class of Service (1/2)............................................. 9-D-22
4.02 Class of Service (2/2)............................................. 9-D-27
5.00 Local Access Group ........................................................ 9-D-31
6.00 Numbering Plan .............................................................. 9-D-33
6.01 Numbering Plan (01/11)......................................... 9-D-33
6.02 Numbering Plan (02/11)......................................... 9-D-36
6.03 Numbering Plan (03/11)......................................... 9-D-40
6.04 Numbering Plan (04/11)......................................... 9-D-44
6.05 Numbering Plan (05/11)......................................... 9-D-48
6.06 Numbering Plan (06/11)......................................... 9-D-52
6.07 Numbering Plan (07/11)......................................... 9-D-56
6.08 Numbering Plan (08/11)......................................... 9-D-59
6.09 Numbering Plan (09/11)......................................... 9-D-63
6.10 Numbering Plan (10/11)......................................... 9-D-64-2
6.11 Numbering Plan (11/11)......................................... 9-D-64-3
7.00 Communication Interface ................................................ 9-D-65
8.00 Speed Dialing-System..................................................... 9-D-68
9.00 Absent Message ............................................................. 9-D-70

E Group Screen .............................................................................. 9-E-1

1.00 Trunk Group .................................................................... 9-E-1

1.01 Trunk Group (1/2) .................................................. 9-E-1
9-1
(70695)
 Page
1.02 Trunk Group (2/2) .................................................. 9-E-9
2.00 ICM/Paging Group .......................................................... 9-E-12
3.00 Call Pickup Group ........................................................... 9-E-14

F Trunk Screen ............................................................................... 9-F-1

1.00 CO Line ........................................................................... 9-F-1

2.00 Pager and Music Source................................................. 9-F-5
3.00 AGC ............................................................................... 9-F-8

G Extension Screen ........................................................................ 9-G-1

1.00 Station ............................................................................. 9-G-1

1.01 Station (1/3)............................................................ 9-G-1
1.02 Station (2/3)............................................................ 9-G-7
1.03 Station (3/3)............................................................ 9-G-12
2.00 DSS Console................................................................... 9-G-15
2.01 DSS Console (1/3) ................................................. 9-G-15
2.02 DSS Console (2/3) ................................................. 9-G-18
2.03 DSS Console (3/3) ................................................. 9-G-21
3.00 Doorphone....................................................................... 9-G-24
4.00 Attendant Console........................................................... 9-G-27
4.01 Attendant Console (1/2)......................................... 9-G-27
4.02 Attendant Console (2/2)......................................... 9-G-30

H Special Carrier Access Screen (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) ..... 9-H-1
1.00 Equal Access .................................................................. 9-H-1
2.00 OCC Access.................................................................... 9-H-5

I Toll Restriction Screen (for U.S.A. and Canada) ........................ 9-I-1

1.00 Area/Office Code Tables................................................. 9-I-1
2.00 Office Code Tables ......................................................... 9-I-4
3.00 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table ...................................... 9-I-6

I Toll Restriction Screen (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) .... 9-I-8
4.00 7-Digit Toll Restriction Table........................................... 9-I-8

J Automatic Route Selection Screen (for U.S.A. and Canada)...... 9-J-1

1.00 Leading Digit Table ......................................................... 9-J-1
2.00 Office Code Tables ......................................................... 9-J-3
3.00 Route Plan Tables........................................................... 9-J-6
4.00 Route Lists Table ............................................................ 9-J-9
5.00 Modified Digit Table ........................................................ 9-J-13

9-2
(70695)
 Page
J Automatic Route Selection Screen (for New Zealand) ............... 9-J-15
6.00 Leading Digit Table ......................................................... 9-J-15
7.00 Route Plan Tables........................................................... 9-J-17
8.00 Route Lists Table ............................................................ 9-J-20
9.00 Modified Digit Table ........................................................ 9-J-24

K Special Attended Screen ............................................................. 9-K-1

1.00 DISA ............................................................................... 9-K-1

2.00 DID ............................................................................... 9-K-5
3.00 UCD ............................................................................... 9-K-7
3.01 UCD (1/2) ............................................................... 9-K-7
3.02 UCD (2/2) ............................................................... 9-K-9
4.00 TIE Line Routing Table ................................................... 9-K-11

L Miscellaneous Screen ................................................................. 9-L-1

1.00 Installation Information .................................................... 9-L-1

2.00 Power Failure Transfer Assignment................................ 9-L-3

M Error Message Tables ................................................................. 9-M-1

1.00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items

in the Same Screen......................................................... 9-M-1
2.00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items
in the Other Screens ....................................................... 9-M-2
3.00 Other Error Messages..................................................... 9-M-7

9-3
(70695)
(X)
A. Introduction
This section provides system programming using
VT compatible terminals. Before starting system
programming, Section 7 “Preparation for
Programming and Maintenance (VT220 and
Compatibles)” must be read. This section
provides the basic operations required for system
programming.
Programming consists of 10 submenu screens
and each submenu consists of various setting
screens.

The setting screens are used to assign or change

various parameters concerning the system
administration such as Tenant, Class of Service,
Numbering Plan and so on.

The setting screens should be programmed in

order of “First Set,” “Second Set” and “Third Set”
which is illustrated in “Construction of
Programming Mode” on the following page. If
you program a screen in the second set before
setting the first-set screens, an error message
will appear. For example, if you program
“Extension” before programming “Configuration-
DN Assignment,” an error message is displayed.

In this section, each setting screen is explained

using a screen and an explanation table.

9-A-1
B. Construction of Programming Mode
Password Level

1 Programming 01 Configuration 1 System Assignment 1

2 Slot Assignment 1
First Set 3 DN Assignment 1
4 Channel Assignment 1

02 System 1 Operation 2
2 Tenant 2
3 System Timer 2
4 Class of Service 2
5 Local Access Group 2
6 Numbering Plan 2
Second Set 7 Communication Interface 2
8 Speed Dialing-System 3
9 Absent Message 3

03 Group 1 Trunk Group 2

2 ICM/Paging Group 2
3 Call Pickup Group 2

04 Trunk 1 CO Line 3
2 Pager & Music Source 3
3 AGC 3

05 Extension 1 Station 3
2 DSS Console 3
3 Doorphone 3
4 Attendant Console 2

06 Special Carrier Access 1 Equal Access 2

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) 2 OCC Access 2
Third Set
07 Toll Restriction 1 Area/Office Code Tables 2
(for U.S.A. and Canada) 2 Office Code Tables 2
3 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table 2

07 Toll Restriction 1 7-Digit Toll Restriction Table 2

(for areas other than U.S.A.
and Canada)
08 ARS 1 Leading Digit Table 2
(for U.S.A. and Canada) 2 Office Code Tables 2
3 Route Plan Tables 2
4 Route Lists Table 2
5 Modified Digit Table 2

08 ARS 1 Leading Digit Table 2

(for New Zealand) 2 Route Plan Tables 2
3 Route Lists Table 2
4 Modified Digit Table 2

9-B-1
(70695)
09 Special Attended 1 DISA 2
2 DID 2
3 UCD 2
4 TIE Line Routing Table 2

10 Miscellaneous 1 Installation Information 2

2 Power Failure Transfer Assignment 2

9-B-2
(70695)
C. Configuration Screen

1.00 System Assignment

Summary
This screen is used to configure the system for:
• Expansion shelf (1, or both 1 and 2)
• T-SW Conference Expansion Card
To expand the conference trunks, T-SW
Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104) must
be installed.
(Password level : One)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Expansion Shelf Automatic set No : expansion shelf not installed 1-E-2.00

1 Shelf : expansion shelf 1 available
2 Shelves: both expansion shelves 1 and 2
available
4-G-5.00
TSW Additional CONF Automatic set Yes : conference expansion card installed 4-G-6.00
No : conference expansion card not installed 5-E-1.00
6-H-1.00
6-H-2.00

9-C-1
Description of Assigning Items
Expansion Shelf Enables the expansion shelf 1 when set to “1 Shelf” and both
expansion shelves 1 and 2 when set to “2 Shelves.”

TSW Additional CONF Enables the expansion of conference trunks when set to “Yes.”

Conditions
None

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-C-2
2.00 Slot Assignment

Summary
Assigns the type of service cards, inserted in the (Password level : One)
free slots in the basic and expansion shelves.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Basic Shelf FS (Free Slot)
(01 to 12)
Automatic set Blank : Not assigned 1-A-5.00
PLC : Proprietary Integrated Telephone 1-E-1.00
System Line Circuit card to 2.00
HLC : Hybrid Line Circuit card 1-E-7.00
SLC : Single Line Telephone Circuit card to 27.00
MSLC : SLC card with Message Waiting
LCOT : Loop Start Central Office Trunk card
GCOT : Ground Start Central Office Trunk card
RCOT : LCOT card with Polarity Reversal Detection
PCOT : LCOT card with Pay Tone Detection
DID : Direct Inward Dialing card
E&M : E&M Trunk card
T-1 : T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD
E-1 : E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD
AGC : Automatic Gain Control card
DISA : Direct Inward System Access card
OPX : Off Premise Extension card
ATLC : Attendant Console Line Circuit card
DPH : Door Phone Circuit card
RMT : Remote Circuit card
(◆ GCOT is available for U.S.A. and Canada
only)

Continued
9-C-3
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Basic Shelf BS (Basic Slot) (02) Automatic set Blank : Not assigned 1-A-5.00
OHCA : T-SW Off-Hook Call Announcement 1-E-1.00
card to 2.00
1-E-7.00
Expansion Shelf 1 FS (01 to 15) Automatic set Same as Basic Shelf FS to 21.00
Expansion Shelf 2 FS (01 to 15) Automatic set Same as Basic Shelf FS

Description of Assigning Items

Basic Shelf FS (01 to 12) Defines the type of card installed in the free slots (01 to 12) of the
basic shelf.

Basic Shelf BS (02) Used to utilize the T-SW OHCA card or not.

Expansion Shelf 1 FS (01 to 15) Defines the type of card installed in the free slots (01 to 15) of the
expansion shelf 1.

Expansion Shelf 2 FS (01 to 15) Defines the type of card installed in the free slots (01 to 15) of the
expansion shelf 2.

Conditions
The cursor does not move to BS01 and BS03. In BS02, assignable value is OHCA or Blank.
T-1/E-1 card should be assigned to FS01, 05 or 09 of any shelf.
One T-1 card occupies three slots. If you assign a T-1 card to FS01, FS02 and FS03 are not available for
other cards. A '– (hyphen)' is displayed in these two slots and the cursor skips them.
One E-1 card occupies four slots. If you assign an E-1 card to FS01, FS02 through FS04 are not available
for other cards. A '– (hyphen)' is displayed in these three slots and cursor skips them.
If no CO trunk card is assigned, “Trunk-CO Line” screen cannot be selected.
If no Extension card is assigned, “Extension-Station” screen cannot be selected.
If AGC card is not assigned, “Trunk-AGC” screen cannot be selected.
If DPH card is not assigned, “Extension-Doorphone” screen cannot be selected.
If ATLC card is not assigned, “Extension-Attendant Console” screen cannot be selected.
If DISA card is not assigned, “Special Attended-DISA” screen cannot be selected.
If DID card is not assigned, “Special Attended-DID” screen cannot be selected.
When assigning a card, the card status is Out of Service (OUS). When utilizing the card, the card status
should be set to In Service (INS).
For In Service (INS) and Out of Service (OUS), refer to Section 7-J-4.00 “INS (In Service)” and Section 7-
J-5.00 “OUS (Out of Service).”
For confirming whether the card status is INS or OUS, refer to Section 14-G-3.02 “Card Status screen.”
When deleting (selecting blank) or changing the pre-assigned card type, the conditions should be the
followings:
• The card status is OUS or Fault. • All of the port data has been deleted.

9-C-4
(70695)
However, if there exist port data, it is possible to change the cards as follows:
• PLC card HLC card
• SLC card HLC card

Deleting the ATLC card will be an error if there is one of the following assignments:

• “Group-Trunk Group”,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “ATT.”
Intercept Routing (Day) is set to “ATT.”

• “Extension-Doorphone”,
Doorphone Call Assignment is set to “ATT.”

Deleting the DISA card will be an error if there is one of the following assignments:

• “Group-Trunk Group”,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “DISA.”
Incoming Mode (Night) is set to “DISA.”

Deleting the HLC, SLC, LCOT or GCOT card will be an error if there is the
following assignment to the slot to be deleted:

• Miscellaneous-Power Failure Transfer Assignment.

See Section 1-A-5.00 “Service Cards Description” for installing the cards in
combination.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-C-5
(70695)
3.00 DN Assignment

Summary
Assigns a DN (directory number) to each exten-
sion port.
Four DN Assignment screens are provided.
(Password level : One)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DN 100 to 387 in Three or four numeric digits : directory number 3-B-2.00

physical number
order

Description of Assigning Item

DN Assigns a default directory number to every port of installed extension cards.

Conditions
If no Extension card (PLC, SLC, HLC, OPX) is assigned, DN assignment screen will not be
displayed.

9-C-6
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-C-7
4.00 Channel Assignment
4.01 T-1 card

Summary
Assigns the type of T-1 interface to each channel. (Password level : One)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Slot No. Automatic set Physical slot no. (101,105,109,201,205,209,301, 3-F-15.00

305,309)

Frame Sequence ESF D4 / ESF 10-C-64.04

Line Coding B8ZS AMI / B8ZS 3-F-15.00

Channel (01 to 24) Blank: Not assigned LCO / GCO / DID / OPX / TIE

Description of Assigning Item

Frame Sequence Assigns the type of Frame Sequence for each T-1 card.
Line Coding Assigns the type of Line Coding for each T-1 card.
Channel Assigns the type of T-1 interface to each channel.
(01 to 24)
Conditions
The number of “Channel Assignment screens” may vary depending on the number of T1 DIGITAL TRUNK
cards installed to the system. Up to six T1 DIGITAL TRUNK cards can be installed to the system. Channel
numbers 25 through 32 are not available. A “– (hyphen)” is displayed in these columns and the cursor
skips them.
If you assign “OPX” to a channel, “DN Assignment” is also required. Refer to Section 9-C-3.00 “DN
Assignment”. 9-C-8
(70695)
4.02 E-1 card

Summary
Assigns the type of E-1 interface to each channel. (Password level : One)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Slot No. Automatic set Physical slot no. (101,105,109,201,205,209,301, 3-F-16.00

305,309)

Frame Sequence PCM30-CRC PCM30 / PCM30-CRC

Line Coding HDB3 AMI / HDB3

Channel (01 to 32) Blank: Not assigned DR2 / E&M-C (Continuous E&M) / E&M-P
(Pulsed E&M)

Description of Assigning Item

Frame Sequence Assigns the type of Frame Sequence for each E-1 card.
Line Coding Assigns the type of Line Coding for each E-1 card.
Channel Assigns the type of E-1 interface to each channel.
(01 to 32)
Conditions
The number of “Channel Assignment screens” may vary depending on the number of E1 DIGITAL TRUNK
cards installed to the system. Up to four E1 DIGITAL TRUNK cards can be installed to the system.

9-C-9
(70695)
D. System Screen
1.00 Operation
1.01 Operation (1/3)

Summary
Assigns elemental data common to the whole Operation screen. This is the first of three
system, such as Tenant Service, Automatic screens.
Route Selection, etc., through the first System- (Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Tenant Service No No : Tenant Service is unavailable 3-B-4.00

Yes : Tenant Service enabled
3-C-2.00
Automatic Route Selection No Yes : Automatic Route Selection enabled 4-C-3.01
(for U.S.A., Canada and New No : Automatic Route Selection is unavailable 5-A-1.01
Zealand)
6-D-1.01

Numbering Plan Fixed 1 Flex : feature numbers can be changed 3-B-1.00

Fixed 1: feature numbers are set to Default 1
Fixed 2: feature numbers are set to Default 2

Privacy on DN Key Yes 4-G-1.00

No : barge in allowed (privacy disabled)
4-G-2.00
Yes : barge in disallowed (privacy enabled)
4-G-3.00
Restriction Level-Operator 01 01 to 16 : the restriction level for a telephone 3-C-1.05
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) company operator call
Continued
9-D-1
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Restriction Level-International 01 01 to 16 : the restriction level for an interna- 3-C-1.05

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) tional call

Home Dialing Plan Type-A Type-A : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX 3-C-1.02

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) NXX+XXXX 3-C-1.04
Type-B : NPX+NXX+XXXX 3-C-1.06
NNX+XXXX 3-C-1.07
Type-C : 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX 3-C-2.00
1+ NNX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
Type-D : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
Area Code
Office Code
Subscriber Number
[N : 2 to 9, P : 0,1, X : 0 to 9]

DSS Operation Mode With Transfer With Transfer : hold and transfer 4-I-12.01
Without Transfer : disconnect and call

Busy Tone Tone-2 Tone-1 : busy tone 1 3-B-14.00

Tone-2 : busy tone 2

Held Call Reminder Yes Yes : Held Call Reminder is enabled. 3-E-2.00
No : Held Call Reminder is not enabled.

Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr / Brg-in Yes Yes : overriding with beep tone 3-B-15.00
No : overriding without beep tone 4-C-7.00
5-A-5.00
6-D-4.00

External Paging 1, 2 Yes, Yes Yes : using external pager 1, 2 2-D-1.00

No : not using external pager 1, 2 3-B-8.02
3-D-2.04
4-D-4.00
4-H-1.03
4-H-1.04
4-H-2.00
5-B-2.00
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04
5-F-2.00
6-I-1.03
6-I-1.04
6-I-2.00

Continued

9-D-2
(60395)
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

External Music Source 1, 2 Yes, Yes Yes : using external music source 1, 2 2-D-2.00
(for U.S.A. and Canada) No : not using external music source 1, 2 3-E-1.00
4-H-2.00
4-I-4.00
5-F-2.00
6-I-2.00

External Music Source 1, 2 Yes, Yes If the music source selector switch (See Section
(for areas other than U.S.A. 2-D-2.00 “External Music Source”) is set to “INT
and Canada) MUS,” set to “No, Yes.”

If the music source selector switch is set to

“MUS 2,”
Yes : using external music source 1, 2
No : not using external music source 1, 2

Idle Line Preference DN DN : Off-hook selects an idle line by DN 4-C-1.02

CO : Off-hook selects an idle line by CO 12-C-4.00

FDN for General Operator Call blank Three or four numeric digits : floating directory 3-B-3.00
number for general operator call 1, 2 3-D-2.02
3-D-2.03
3-D-2.05
3-D-2.06
4-F-2.00
5-D-2.00
PBX Code blank Up to three numeric digits (0-9) 3-F-14.01

9-D-3
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Tenant Service Enables or disables the Tenant Service feature.

Automatic Route Selection Enables or disables the ARS (Automatic Route Selection) feature.

Numbering Plan Selects the type of numbering plan; The user can assign the desired
feature numbers or use the default setting 1 or 2.

Privacy on DN Key Determines whether or not a PITS telephone user is allowed to barge in
on an existing conversation on a PDN, SDN or SCO button.

Restriction Level-Operator Assigns the restriction level for calls to the telephone company operator
from an extension.

Restriction Level- Assigns the restriction level for international calls from an extension.
International

Home Dialing Plan Selects the home dialing plan. This setting applies to ARS, EQA and
OCC calls.

DSS Operation Mode When “With Transfer” is selected, allows the DSS console operator to
transfer the CO call to an extension user by simply pressing the associ-
ated DN•DSS button on the DSS console.
When “Without Transfer” is selected the CO call is disconnected when
the DN•DSS button is pressed.

Busy Tone Selects busy tone 1 or 2. Busy tone 2 has a unique pattern allowing
users with automatic release SLT's an extended amount of time to enter
codes when encountering a busy party.

Held Call Reminder When assigned to Yes, the system reminds the user that there is a call on
hold. When disabled there is no reminder tone given to the user. In either
case the call will be disconnected after 30 minutes if it is not retrieved.

Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/ If “Yes” is selected, a beep tone will be heard when executing Busy
Brg-in Override or Barge-in. If “No” is selected, there will not be any tone
heard when Busy Override or Barge-in is executed.

External Paging 1, 2 Assigns external pagers 1 and 2 .

External Music Source 1, 2 Either Internal or External Music Source can be used depending on the
(for areas other than U.S.A. selection of the Music Source Selector Switch.
and Canada)

Idle Line Preference This assignment applies to a PITS telephone when “Idle Line Preference-
Calling” is assigned on it. If “DN” is selected, an idle DN button is auto-
matically seized by simply going off-hook, and an idle CO button is seized
automatically if “CO” is selected.

FDN for General Assigns the FDN (Floating Directory Number) for General Operator Call.
Operator Call This is used for the following attendant-seeking calls: DID, DISA, Call
Forwarding and Overflowed UCD calls.
There are two entries to allow for two tenants.

PBX Code Required when your KX-T336 is a part of a TIE Line Network.

9-D-4
(70695)
Conditions
Tenant Service
Automatic Route Selection
Numbering Plan
Home Dialing Plan
Held Call Reminder
External Paging 1, 2
External Music Source 1, 2
When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:
Operation Operation
(1/3)
Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.
If “No” is selected, some setting screens do not appear. Also some
assigning items display “—,” which indicates programming is impossible.
Setting screens which do not appear are:
“System-Tenant”
“Group-ICM/Paging Group”
Assigning items which indicate “—” and cannot be programmed are:
“Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Tenant
“Trunk-AGC”, Tenant
“Extension-Doorphone”, Tenant
“Special Attended-DISA”, Tenant
If set to “No,” it is impossible to program “Special Attended-DISA”, ARS
Override (“—” is displayed).
If set to “Flex,” “System-Numbering Plan” is changeable.
Dialing Plan must be selected depending on the type of the area where
this system is installed.
If set to “ No,” Held Call Reminder does not function. However, program-
ming the following items is possible:
“System-System Timer”, Held Call Reminder/Held Call Reminder
(ATT)
“Extension-Attendant Console”, Held Call Reminder
If set to “No,” Paging through External Pagers does not function.
However, it is possible to program the items below:
“System-Class of Service”, External Paging 1/2
“System-Numbering Plan”, External Paging/External Paging Answer
If either or both of the External Paging 1/2 are assigned to “No”, the
following item cannot be programmed (“—” appears on the item):
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-Tone/BGM
If either or both of the External Music Source 1/2 are assigned to “No,” the
following item cannot be programmed (“—” appears on the item):
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-For Use
If “No” is selected for all the four items of External Music Source 1/2,
External Paging 1/2, the following screen does not appear:
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”
Operation
(2/3) (3/3)
9-D-5
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-6
(70695)
1.02 Operation (2/3)

Summary
Assigns elemental data common to the whole parameters for SMDR, etc., through the second
system, such as System Administration Device, System-Operation screen.
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording), (Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

System Administration Automatic VT220 : VT100/VT220 Terminal 1-A-3.00

Device set Dumb : Dumb Terminal
ATT 1 : Attendant Console 1
ATT 2 : Attendant Console 2

SMDR No No : not using SMDR (Station Message 3-F-1.00

Detail Recording ) 9-D-7.00
Yes : using SMDR

Page Length (4 to 99) blank 4 to 99 : page length (number of lines) 3-F-1.00

Continued

9-D-7
(60395)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

SMDR ( cont.) 3-F-1.00

Skip Perf (0 to 95) blank 0 to 95: how many lines to skip
• Note : in case of printing out system data :
(page length) (skip perforation)≥ 23
in case of printing out call processing
information :
(page length) (skip perforation)≥ 6
in case of printing out error log
(page length) (skip perforation)≥ 4
Outgoing Duration Log blank No : outgoing calls not printed 3-F-1.00
All Call : print all outgoing calls
Toll Only : print outgoing toll calls only
(◆ “Toll Only” is available for U.S.A. and Canada
only.*) *See “Note:” on page 9-D-9.
Incoming Duration Log blank No : incoming calls not printed 3-F-1.00
Yes : print all incoming calls
Attendant Duration blank Separate: charge call duration to Attendant 3-F-1.00
Console
Summary : charge call duration to destination
Special Carrier Name blank Default : print default name; OC 1- 4, 3-F-1.00
(◆ for U.S.A. and EQ1- 4
Canada only) User Name: print user's name
Dial No. : print dialed number
Print Secret Dial blank No : not printed 3-F-1.00
Yes : print the secret dial numbers 4-I-5.00
6-J-3.00
Error Log /Programming/ blank No : do not print out these items 3-F-1.00
Traffic Yes : print each item 7-D
14-D-1.02
14-G
15-D-1.02
Start Time of Traffic blank 1 to12 : hour 14-G-4.00
Measurement 00 to 59 : minute 15-F-2.00
AM/PM : a.m. / p.m.
Start Time of Test blank 1 to12 : hour 14-D-1.01
00 to 59 : minute 15-D-1.01
AM/PM : a.m. / p.m.
Remote Directory Number 399 :for Three or four numeric digits: Floating Directory 3-B-3.00
“with RMT” Number for the 4-F-1.05
blank : for remote mainte- 5-D-1.03
“without RMT” nance port 6-G-1.05
14-B-2.00
15-B-2.00
Remote Alarm No No : not providing Remote Alarm 14-D-1.05
Yes : providing Remote Alarm 15-D-1.05

Destination Address blank Maximum 26 numeric digits : telephone (modem)

number of the destination for Remote Alarm

9-D-8
(60395)
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
System Administration Assigns the terminal device to be used for setting system administration
Device data.

SMDR Enables or disables SMDR ( Station Message Detail Recording).

Page Length (4~99) Assigns the printer page length (number of lines).

Skip Perf (0~95) Determines the number of lines to be skipped and the number of lines to be
printed on each page. The number of lines to skip is simply the number
specified in this parameter. The number of lines printed is the difference
between the page length number and the skip perforation number.
If system data is being printed the difference must be equal to or greater
than 23 to allow one full screen to be printed on each page. If SMDR data
is being printed the difference must be equal to or greater than six to allow
the header and at least one line of SMDR data to be printed.

Outgoing Duration Log Determines which types of outgoing calls will be printed, if any.
Note:
“Toll Only” is not available from software version 9.5X or higher in all areas.

Incoming Duration Log Determines if incoming calls will be printed or not.

Attendant Duration Determines whether the attendant or the destination will be charged with
the time for an attendant handled call. If “Separate” is selected, there will be
two lines of SMDR for every attendant handled and transferred call.

Special Carrier Name Assigns the special carrier name type to be printed out.

Print Secret Dial Determines if secret dial numbers will be printed out.

Error Log /Programming/ Determines if error logs will be printed out.

Traffic
Determines if programming data is printed out.

Determines if traffic measurement data is printed out.

Start Time of Traffic Assigns the starting time for traffic measurement.
Measurement

Start Time of Test Assigns starting time of the self- test. The system must be idle
for the test to be performed.

Remote Directory Number Assigns a floating directory number for the remote maintenance port.
If "RMT" is not preset in the “Configuration-Slot Assignment” screen, the
default value is blank.

Remote Alarm If this option is enabled alarms will be automatically sent to the telephone
number in the destination address.

Destination Address The destination telephone number for remote alarms.

9-D-9
(70695)
(60395)
Conditions
SMDR If set to “No,” the following items cannot be programmed (“—” appears on
the items).
“System-Operation”,
Page Length (4~99)
Skip Perf (0~95)
Outgoing Duration Log
Incoming Duration Log
Attendant Duration
Special Carrier Name
Print Secret Dial
Error Log/Programming/Traffic

Remote Directory Number To assign this item, RMT card is necessary.

Remote Alarm If “RMT” is not assigned in the “Configuration-Slot Assignment”

Destination Address screen, these items cannot be programmed (“—” appears on the items).
If Remote Alarm is set to “Yes,” Destination Address can be programmed.
If Remote Alarm is set to “No,” Destination Address displays “—” and
cannot be programmed.

To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System-Operation (1/3)” screen.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-10
(60395)
1.03 Operation (3/3)

Summary
Assigns elemental data common to the whole the third System-Operation screen.
system, such as setting terminal type for opera- (Password level : Two or higher)
tors, parameters for Night Service etc., through

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Operator 1 ATT1 : for “with None / EXT / ATT : terminal type 3-B-5.00
ATLC” None : no operator
EXT100 : for EXT : setting an extension to Operator 1
“without ATLC” ATT : setting Attendant Console to Operator1
Number:assign number when terminal type is
set to "EXT" or "ATT"
blank : when terminal type is set to "None"
Three or four digit DN :
when terminal type is set to "EXT"
1 or 2 : when terminal type is set to "ATT,"
select Attendant Console 1 or 2

Operator 2 ATT 2 : for “with Same as Operator 1. 3-B-5.00

ATLC”
None : for
“without ATLC”
Continued
9-D-11
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Night Service Manual Manual : an operator can set day or night 3-B-8.00
service 4-I-1.00
Auto : automatic change 5-G-1.00
6-J-1.00
Auto Start Time
: MON. ( Day, Night) blank 1 to 12 : hour
: TUE. ( Day, Night) 00 to 59 : minute
: WED. ( Day, Night) AM / PM : a.m. / p.m.
: THU. ( Day, Night) blank : if “blank” is assigned for a day or
: FRI. ( Day, Night) days, the previously assigned values
: SAT. ( Day, Night) are maintained for the days until
: SUN. ( Day, Night) other values are set for another day.
6-J-9.00
PITS Programming 1234 Four numeric digits : password 11-C-1.00
Password

Walking COS Password blank Four numeric digits: password 4-C-9.00

5-A-7.00
11-C-8.00

9-D-12
Description of Assigning Items
Operator 1 Assigns the terminal device for operator 1.
If selecting “EXT” for the terminal type, be sure to assign the directory
number beforehand.

Operator 2 Same as Operator 1.

Night Service If this is set to “Manual,” the operator 1 must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode Cancel” for day service.
If this is set to “Auto,” the system will switch the day and night modes at
the programmed time each day. The operator 1, however, can override
the auto setting by dialing the feature number for “Night Service Manual
Mode Set.” To restore the auto mode, the operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

Auto Start Time Assigns automatic change-over time for each day of the week for
: MON. ( Day, Night) Day/Night Service.
: TUE. ( Day, Night)
: WED. ( Day, Night)
: THU. ( Day, Night)
: FRI. ( Day, Night)
: SAT. ( Day, Night)
: SUN. ( Day, Night)

PITS Programming Assigns the password for PITS system programming. This password is
Password used when a PITS allowed to program by COS wishes to change PITS
system programming or an Attendant Console wishes to perform CO
verify.

Walking COS Password Assigns the password for Walking COS. Walking COS allows a user to
temporarily change the COS of another extension to that of the user's
extension. This is generally used for making toll calls from a toll restricted
telephone.

Conditions
Operator 1 This system can accommodate up to two Attendant Consoles.
Operator 2 When Tenant Service is employed and if two Attendant Consoles are
assigned to tenant 1, no Attendant Console operator can be assigned to
tenant 2.
If only one Attendant Console is accommodated, it must be always
assigned to Operator 1.

To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System-Operation (2/3)” screen.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”
9-D-13
2.00 Tenant

Summary
Assigns parameters for tenant 2, such as terminal
type for operators, method of changing Night
Service, password for PITS programming etc..
Also assigns boundaries for functions, such as
Speed Dialing, Call Park etc., which are split
between tenant 1 and tenant 2.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Operator 1 (Tenant 2) None None / EXT /ATT: terminal type 3-B-4.00

None : no operator 3-B-5.00
EXT : setting an extension to Operator 1
ATT : setting Attendant Console to Operator 1
Number: Assign number when terminal type is
set to "EXT" or "ATT"
blank : when terminal type is set to "None"
Three or four digit DN:
when terminal type is set to "EXT"
1 or 2 : when terminal type is set to "ATT,"
selects Attendant Console 1 or 2

Continued

9-D-14
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Operator 2 (Tenant 2) None Same as Operator 1 3-B-4.00

3-B-5.00

Night Service (Tenant 2) Manual Manual : manual change 3-B-4.00

Auto : automatic change 3-B-8.00
4-I-1.00
Auto Start Time 5-G-1.00
6-J-1.00
: MON. (Day, Night) blank 1 to 12 : hour
: TUE. (Day, Night) 00 to 59 : minute
: WED. (Day, Night) AM / PM : a.m. / p.m.
: THU. (Day, Night) blank : if “blank” is assigned for a day or days,
: FRI. (Day, Night) the previously assigned values are
: SAT. (Day, Night) maintained for the days until other
: SUN. (Day, Night) values are set for another day.

PITS Programming Password blank Four numeric digits of numbers : password 3-B-4.00
(Tenant 2 ) 6-J-9.00
11-C-1.00

Walking COS Password blank Four numeric digits of numbers : password 3-B-4.00
(Tenant 2 ) 4-C-9.00
5-A-7.00
11-C-8.00

Inter - Tenant Calling No Yes : Inter-Tenant Calling is available 3-B-4.00

No : Inter-Tenant Calling is unavailable

Speed Dialing - System 200 000 to 200 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

Boundary 000 : tenant 2 only can use all the codes 4-C-4.02
200 : tenant 1 only can use all the codes 5-A-2.02
6-D-2.01

Call Park Boundary 20 00 to 20 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

00 : tenant 2 only can use all call park areas 4-E-5.01
20 : tenant 1 only can use all call park areas 5-C-4.01
6-F-3.00

Message Waiting Boundary 500 000 to 500 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

000 : tenant 2 only can use the whole 4-I-8.00
capacity 5-G-6.00
500 : tenant 1 only can use the whole 6-J-4.00
capacity

Absent Message Boundary 16 06 to16 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

06 : tenant 2 only can use all the numbers 4-I-7.00
16 : tenant 1 only can use all the numbers 5-G-5.00

9-D-15
Description of Assigning Items
Operator 1 (Tenant 2) Assigns a terminal device for operator 1.

Operator 2 (Tenant 2) Assigns a terminal device for operator 2.

Night Service (Tenant 2) If this is set to “Manual,” an operator must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode Cancel” for day service.
If this is set to “Auto,” the system will switch the day and night modes at
the programmed time each day. An operator,however, can override the
auto setting by dialing the feature number for “Night Service Manual
Mode Set.” To restore the auto mode, the operator must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

Auto Start Time Assign automatic change-over time for each day of the week for
: MON. (Day, Night) Day/Night Service.
: TUE. (Day, Night)
: WED. (Day, Night)
: THU. (Day, Night)
: FRI. (Day, Night)
: SAT. (Day, Night)
: SUN. (Day, Night)

PITS Programming Assigns the password for PITS programming. This password is used
Password (Tenant 2) when a PITS allowed to program by COS wishes to change system
programming or an attendant console wishes to perform CO verify.

Walking COS Password Assigns the password for Walking COS. Walking COS allows a user to
(Tenant 2) temporarily change the COS of another station to that of the user's
station. This is generally used for making toll calls from a toll restricted
telephone.

Inter-Tenant Calling If this option is set to “Yes” then calling is allowed between extensions in
different tenants. However, it is not possible for an operator to transfer
calls to an extension in another tenant. If this option is set to “No” then no
inter tenant calling is allowed.

Speed Dialing-System Assigns tenant-boundary number for Speed Dialing ( the last number of
Boundary the codes that tenant 1 can use).

Call Park Boundary Assigns tenant-boundary number for Call Park (the last number that
Tenant 1 can use).

Message Waiting Assigns tenant-boundary quantity for Message Waiting (the largest
Boundary quantity that tenant 1 can use).

Absent message Assigns tenant-boundary number for Absent Message (the last number
boundary that tenant 1 can use).

9-D-16
Conditions
This screen does not appear if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is assigned to “No.”

Operator 1 (Tenant 2) This system can accommodate up to two Attendant consoles. If two
Operator 2 (Tenant 2) Attendant Consoles are assigned to tenant 1, no Attendant consoles can
be assigned to tenant 2.

Speed Dialing-System
Boundary/Call Park
Boundary/Message
Waiting Boundary/Absent
Message Boundary
If Tenant Service is available, the following items can be split between
tenant 1 and tenant 2. The boundaries are to set tenant-boundary
numbers. The last number that tenant 1 can use must be assigned in
each boundary for the functions below:
Speed Dialing-System
Call Park-System
Message Waiting
Absent Message

<Example>
Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be programmed for the system. If you
wish to assign 150 codes to tenant 1 and 50 codes to tenant 2, enter
“150” in Speed Dialing-System Boundary.

Speed dialing codes 001

002
•
•
Only tenant 1 can use
•
• the codes.
•
150
151 Only tenant 2 can use
the codes.
200

If tenant 1 uses no code and tenant 2 uses 200 codes, enter “000.”

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-17
3.00 System Timer

Summary
Executes time-setting on various system timers.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Held Call Reminder 60 15 to 240 : s 3-B-10.00

3-E-2.00

Held Call Reminder (ATT) 60 15 to 240 : s 3-B-10.00

3-E-2.00

Transfer Recall 30 15 to 240 : s 3-B-10.00

3-E-3.00
4-F-1.01
5-D-1.01
6-G-1.01
6-G-1.02

Pickup Dial Waiting 1 1 to 5 :s 3-B-10.00

5-A-2.04

Continued
9-D-18
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

External First Digit Time-Out 10 5 to 120 : s 3-B-10.00

3-B-12.00
3-F-12.00
10-C-58.00
10-C-61.00

External Interdigit Time-Out 5 3 to15 :s 3-B-10.00

3-B-12.00

External Interdigit Time-Out 5 3 to10 :s 3-B-10.00

(PBX) 3-B-12.00

Toll Restriction Guard Time- 10 0 to 25 :s 3-B-10.00

Out

Call Forwarding-No Answer 15 5 to 60 :s 3-B-10.00

Time-Out 3-D-2.05
3-D-2.06
4-F-2.03
4-F-2.04
5-D-2.03
5-D-2.04

Intercept Routing Time-Out 60 5 to 240 : s 3-B-10.00

(System) 3-F-5.00
6-J-12.00

Intercept Routing Time-Out 30 5 to 240 : s 3-B-10.00

(DISA) 3-D-2.02
3-F-5.00

Attendant Overflow Time 60 5 to 240 : s 3-B-10.00

3-D-1.03
6-G-2.00
6-G-7.00
10-C-53.00

SMDR Duration Time 5 0 to 15 :s 3-B-10.00

3-F-1.00
4-A-4.03

3-F-14.00
TIE Interdigit Time-Out 5 3 to 30 :s

DISA Interdigit Time-Out 10 1 to 10 :s 3-D-2.02

9-D-19
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Held Call Reminder Sets the time for Held Call Reminder for extensions. When this timer
expires, the extension is alerted that there is a call held for an extended
period of time

Held Call Reminder (ATT) Sets the time for Held Call Reminder for the Attendant Console. When
this timer expires, the Attendant is alerted that there is a call held for an
extended period of time.

Transfer Recall Sets the time for Transfer Recall on both extensions and Attendant
consoles.

Pickup Dial Waiting Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dialing. The waiting time gives the user
an opportunity to dial digits prior to the automatic dialing taking place.

External First Digit Sets the maximum time allowed between CO dial tone or pseudo dial
Time-Out tone and the Time-Out first digit dialed.

External Interdigit Sets the maximum time allowed between digits on a CO call. This timer
Time-Out does not apply for CO operator calls.

External Interdigit Sets the maximum time between dialed digits (Behind PBX).
Time-Out (PBX)

Toll Restriction Guard Sets the time limit between dialing digits for CO operator calls. This
Time-Out prevents a user from attempting to defeat toll restriction.

Call Forwarding-No Sets the Call Forwarding-No Answer timer. This also functions as UCD-
Answer Time -No Answer timer.

Intercept Routing Time- Sets the time limit for Intercept Routing (System). This timer is used
out (System) when an incoming CO call (DIL 1:1, DID, TAFAS or night answer and so
on) is not answered. Call forward no answer will override this timer if an
extension has enabled Call Forwarding-No Answer Time-Out.

Intercept Routing Time- Sets the time limit for Intercept Routing (DISA). This is used when a
Out (DISA) DISA destination does not answer.

Attendant Overflow Time Sets the overflow time for the Attendant Console. When this timer
expires, a call will be routed to the overflow destination.

SMDR Duration Time Determines the length of the SMDR duration timer. This timer starts
when the system has sent all the digits to the Central Office.

TIE Interdigit Time-Out Sets the maximum time allowed between digits on a TIE call after it was
received by the system.

DISA Interdigit Time-Out Sets the maximum time allowed between digits on a DISA call after it was
received by the system.
9-D-20
(70695)
Conditions
Held Call Reminder If these items are programmed however “System-Operation” Held Call
Held Call Reminder (ATT) Reminder is not set to “Yes,” Held Call Reminder does not function.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-21
(21292)
4.00 Class of Service
4.01 Class of Service (1/2)

Summary
Sets parameters for toll restriction level, maxi- System-Class of Service screen, which consists
mum dialing digits, Call Forwarding, Do Not of 32 groups, each of which has two screens.
Disturb, Do Not Disturb Override, etc., in the first (Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Toll Restriction Level (Day) 01 to16 : toll restriction level (Day) 3-B-6.00
3-C-1.00

Toll Restriction Level (Night) 01 to16 : toll restriction level (Night) 3-B-6.00
3-C-1.00

Max. Dialing Digits Refer to 2 to 255 : possible to dial the [input value-1] digits 3-B-6.00
Table of 0 : no limit to the number of dialed digits
Defaults 1 : internal calls only

Call Forwarding / Do Not Yes : Call Forwarding / DND is available 3-B-6.00

Disturb No : Call Forwarding / DND is unavailable 4-D-6.00
4-F-2.00
5-B-4.00
5-D-2.00

Continued
9-D-22
(X)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Do Not Disturb Override Yes : DND Override is available 3-B-6.00

No : DND Override is unavailable 4-C-8.00
5-A-6.00

CO Forward Mode Yes : Call Forwarding to CO is available 3-B-6.00

No : Call Forwarding to CO is unavailable 4-F-2.05
5-D-2.05

CO Transfer Mode Yes : Call Transfer to CO is available 3-B-6.00

No : Call Transfer to CO is unavailable 4-F-1.03
4-G-6.00

Forced Account Code Mode No : Account codes not required for outgoing 3-B-6.00
CO calls 4-I-2.00
Yes : User must enter an account code for 5-G-2.00
outgoing CO calls
Refer to
BSS / OHCA Table of No : Override is unavailable 3-B-6.00
Defaults Yes : Override is available 4-C-5.04
4-C-5.05

BSS / OHCA Deny No : Override Deny is impossible 3-B-6.00

Yes : Override Deny is possible 4-D-2.03

Executive Busy Override No : Executive Busy Override is unavailable 3-B-6.00

Yes : Executive Busy Override is available 4-C-7.00
5-A-5.00

Executive Busy Override Yes : Executive Busy Override Deny is available 3-B-6.00
Deny No : Executive Busy Override Deny is 4-D-5.00
unavailable 5-B-3.00

3-B-6.00
Station Lock No : Station Lock is unavailable
4-I-9.00
Yes : Station Lock is available
5-G-7.00

Walking Station No : Walking Station is impossible 3-B-6.00

Yes : Walking Station is possible 3-F-3.00

Maintenance Capability Yes : PITS system programming is possible 3-B-6.00

No : PITS system programming is impossible 11-A
11-C

ARS/Local Access W/RSTR : ARS/Local Access is restricted ☛1 3-B-6.00

No RSTR : no restriction ☛2 3-C-1.01
No ACCS : calling is impossible 3-C-1.02

☛1 When an extension user attempts to make an outside call by “Local Trunk Dial
Access” or “Automatic Route Selection (ARS),” available trunks are
determined by both Local Hunt Sequence and “System-Class of Service”,
Trunk Group Access.
☛2 Available trunks are determined by Local Hunt Sequence.

9-D-23
(40993)
(X)
 Table of Defaults

Assigning Items COS 01 COS 02 COS 03 to COS 32

31

Toll Restriction 01 01 01 16
Level ( Day )

Toll Restriction 01 01 01 16
Level ( Night )

Max. Dialing Digits 0 0 0 0

Call Forwarding Yes Yes Yes No

/ Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb Yes No No No

Override

CO Forward Mode Yes No No No

CO Transfer Mode Yes No No No

Forced Account No No No No
Code Mode

BSS / OHCA Yes Yes Yes No

BSS / OHCA Deny No No No No

Executive Busy Yes No No No

Override

Executive Busy No No No No
Override Deny

Station Lock No No No No

Walking Station No No No No

Maintenance Yes No No No
Capability

ARS/Local Access W/RSTR W/RSTR W/RSTR No Accs

9-D-24
(X)
Description of Assigning Items
Toll Restriction Level (Day) Sets toll restriction level (day).

Toll Restriction Level (Night) Sets toll restriction level (night).

Max. Dialing Digits Sets the maximum number of digits which can be dialed for a CO
call.

Call Forwarding / Do Not Assigns whether Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb is possible or
Disturb not.

Do Not Disturb Override Assigns Do Not Disturb Override .

CO Forward Mode Assigns whether Call Forwarding to CO is possible or not .

CO Transfer Mode Assigns whether Call Transfer to CO is possible or not.

Forced Account Code Mode Assigns whether entering Account Code in outgoing CO calls is
necessary or not.

BSS/OHCA Assigns whether BSS (Busy Station Signaling) and OHCA (Off
Hook Call Announcement) are possible or not.

BSS/OHCA Deny Assigns whether BSS / OHCA Deny is possible or not .

Executive Busy Override Assigns whether Executive Busy Override is possible or not.

Executive Busy Override Assigns whether Executive Busy Override Deny is available or not.
Deny

Station Lock Assigns whether Electronic Station Lock is possible or not.

Walking Station Assigns whether Walking Station is possible or not.

Maintenance Capability Enables the maintenance capability of PITS sets to perform

operations such as time and date set, station name change , etc.

ARS/Local Access Assigns whether ARS/Local Access is restricted or not.

Conditions
When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Class of Class of Class of Class of

Service Service Service ------ Service
No. 01 (1/2) No. 01 (2/2) No. 02 (1/2) No. 32 (2/2)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-D-25
(X)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 NDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. Other function keys such as INDEX, COPY and
READ are also available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are
described in Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided
here.

INDEX>Class of Service No. (01-32)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>COS No. (01-32)= – –> COS No.= –

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>COS No. (01-32)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-26
(X)
4.02 Class of Service (2/2)

Summary
The second screen of the System-Class of (Password level : Two or higher)
Service screen sets the trunk groups available for
access and so on.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Trunk Group Access Yes Y : trunk group available for access 3-B-6.00
Trunk Group (01 to16) N : trunk group unavailable for access 3-C-1.01
3-C-1.03
4-C-3.01
4-C-3.02
5-A-1.01
5-A-1.02

Special Carrier Access No N : special carrier unavailable for access 3-B-6.00

EQA (1 to 4) OCC (1 to 4) Y : special carrier available for access 3-C-1.04
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada 4-C-3.03
only) 5-A-1.03

Continued

9-D-27
(60395)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Station Paging Access Yes N : paging group unavailable for access 3-B-6.00
PAG (1 to 8) Y : paging group available for access 4-H-1.01
4-H-1.02
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.01
5-F-1.02
5-F-1.04

External Paging (1 and 2 ) Yes N : not available to access external pager 3-B-6.00
Y : available to access external pager 4-H-1.03
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04

9-D-28
(60395)
Description of Assigning Items

Trunk Group Access When set to “Yes,” the associated trunk group is available during direct
Trunk Group (01 to 16) trunk group access. When set to “No” the trunk group is not available
during direct trunk group access.

Special Carrier Access When set to “Yes” the Equal Access trunk group and OCC Access trunk
EQA (1 to 4) OCC (1 to 4) group are available during virtual trunk group access. When set to
“No,” the Equal Access trunk group and OCC access trunk groups are
not available during virtual trunk group access.

Station Paging Access Assigns which paging groups are available for access.
PGA (1 to 8)

External Paging (1 and 2) Assigns which external pagers are available for access.

Conditions
Special Carrier Access If “Y” is selected but if “Special Carrier Access-Equal Access”, Service
and “Special Carrier Access-OCC Access”, Service are set to “No,”
Special Carrier Access via virtual trunk group access does not work.
It is administrable to activate or deactivate the EQU access and/or OCC
access features on a system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-52 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further information.

Station Paging Access If an extension does not belong to the same tenant as the paging groups
assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the paging groups.

External Paging If “Y” is selected but if “System-Operation” External Paging 1/2 is set to
“No,” paging through external pagers is impossible. If an extension
belongs to the different tenant from the tenant of the External Paging 1
or 2 assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the external pager.

To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System-Class of Service (1/2)”
screen.
Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:

cursor
9-D-29
(60395)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. Other function keys such as INDEX, COPY and
READ are also available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are
described in Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.” Only messages are
provided here.

INDEX>Class of Service No. (01-32)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>COS No. (01-32)= – –> COS No.= –

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>COS No. (01-32)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-30
(60395)
 5.00 Local Access Group

Summary
Assigns toll restriction level and Area/Office Code after automatic access to an idle CO line.
Table number for outgoing CO calls and the (Password level : Two or higher)
hunting sequence for selecting idle trunk groups

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Toll Restriction Level 16 01 to 16 : restriction level 3-C-1.01

3-C-1.02

Toll Restriction Table 1 1 to 8 : restriction table number

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Local Access
3-C-1.01
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
4-C-3.01
Hunt Sequence 01 01 01 to 16 : trunk group number
5-A-1.01
blank : not assigned
6-D-1.01
Hunt Sequence (02 to 16) blank Same as Hunt Sequence 01

9-D-31
(60395)
Description of Assigning Items
Toll Restriction Level
Assigns the toll restriction level. This is used during toll restriction to
determine if calls will be allowed (if Extension toll restriction level is
equal to or greater than local access toll restriction level) or
whether they must pass through toll restriction checking.

Toll Restriction Table Assigns the Area code/Office code toll restriction table number.
This table is used during 3/6 digit toll restriction.

Local Access Determines the trunk group hunt sequence to be used when
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence placing a CO call using local access. The sequence is used by
Hunt Sequence (01 to 16) both tenants but trunk groups will be skipped if they do not belong to
the same tenant as the caller.

Conditions
None

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-32
(60395)
6.00 Numbering Plan
6.01 Numbering Plan (01/11)

Summary
The first screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
screen sets the extension numbers for the 1st
through 12th Hundred Block Extension groups.

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2

1st Hundred Block Extension
2nd Hundred Block Extension
3rd Hundred Block Extension
4th through 12th Hundred Block
Extension
1 0 to 9: set “DG1” and leave “DG2” blank 3-B-1.00
when the extension numbers are 3-B-2.00
2 to be composed of three digits,
and set both “DG1” and “DG2”
3 when the extension numbers are
to be composed of four digits.
blank

9-D-33
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
1st through 12th Hundred Block Assigns the leading one or two digits for extension DN (Directory
Extension Number). If the leading digit is not programmed, the DN assignment
is not possible.

Conditions
“System-Numbering Plan” setting cannot be changed if “System-Operation”,
Numbering Plan is set to “Fixed 1” or “Fixed 2.” If “Flex” is selected, this setting is
changeable.

When entering “DG 1” to “DG 2,” the cursor does not advance nor return automati-
cally. Use the and keys to move the cursor.

“Parameter Save OK?” will be displayed on this screen, if you attempt to exit this
screen without saving the data change you've made.
Different from other screens, “Parameter Save OK?” is not displayed on this screen
when you press the NEXT/PREV key.

Data storage is executed by the PF 4 (Memory) key or the PF 2 (End) key for all
screens at the same time. Logical check is also performed according to the follow-
ing logic:

Extension numbers and other PBX extension numbers are three or four
digits and the leading one or two digits are assigned in “Numbering Plan”
screens.
Feature numbers may be one, two, three or four digits.
Those numbers assigned in Numbering Plan screens cannot include the
same number assigned to other feature number as the part or whole of it.
For example, if the digit “2” is assigned to the feature number for “Trunk
Group 01-08 Access” and another digits “21” is assigned for “Trunk Group
09-16 Access,” it is checked at the time of data storage. Similarly, “35” and
“351” cannot be present at the same time.

It is possible to store “0” through “9,” “ ,” “#,” as the feature numbers.

However, if “ ” or “#” is included in the feature numbers, those features are not
accessed by the rotary telephone extensions.

1st to 12th Hundred Extension numbers cannot include “ ” and “#.”

Block Extension

9-D-34
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7–I “Operation of Function
Keys.” Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-35
(70695)
6.02 Numbering Plan (02/11)

Summary
The second screen of the System-Numbering
Plan screen sets the numbers for 13th through
16th Hundred Block Extension groups and
functions 17 to 24.
Default
Assigning Items
Fixed 1
13th Hundred Block Extension
14th Hundred Block Extension
blank
15th Hundred Block Extension
16th Hundred Block Extension
(Password level : Two or higher)
Reference
Selection of Value
Fixed 2
0 to 9: set “DG1” and leave “DG2” 3-B-1.00
blank when the extension 3-B-2.00
numbers are to be composed of
three digits, and set both “DG1”
and “DG2” when the extension
numbers are to be composed of
four digits.

Operator Call (General) 0 3-B-1.00

3-B-5.00
Operator Call (Specific) blank Enter one through four digits number 4-C-10.00
consisting of 0 through 9, and # . 5-A-8.00
ARS/Local CO Line Access 9 3-B-1.00
3-C-2.00
4-C-3.01
5-A-1.01
6-D-1.01
Continued
9-D-36
(70695)
 Continued
Default
Assigning Items Selection of Value Reference
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
3-B-1.00
Trunk Group 01-08 Access 81
4-C-3.02
5-A-1.02
Trunk Group 09-16 Access 82 6-D-1.02
Enter one through four digits number 3-B-1.00
Trunk Group 17-24 Access 83 consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 4-C-3.03
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada
5-A-1.03
only)
6-D-1.03
Speed Dialing-System 1 6 1 3-B-1.00
5-A-2.02

Speed Dialing-Station 3-B-1.00

2 6 2
5-A-2.01

9-D-37
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
13th through 16th Hundred Block Assigns the leading one or two digits for extension DN (Directory
Extension Number). If the leading digit is not programmed the DN assign-
ment is not possible.

Operator Call (General) Assigns the feature number for general operator calling. Calls will
always arrive at an Attendant Console if it is connected to the
system.

Operator Call (Specific) Assigns the feature number for specific operator calling. The
required operator is specified by dialing the feature number and “1”
for operator 1 and “2” for operator 2.

ARS/Local CO Line Access Assigns the feature number for Automatic Route Selection or local
access.

Trunk Group 01-08 Access Assigns the feature number for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
(01 to 08).

Trunk Group 09-16 Access Assigns the feature number for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
(09 to 16).

Trunk Group 17-24 Access Assigns the feature number for the specified EQA or OCC Trunk
Group Access.

Speed Dialing-System Assigns the feature number for Speed Dialing-System.

Speed Dialing-Station Assigns the feature number for Speed Dialing-Station.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

13th to 16th Hundred Extension numbers cannot include “ ” and “#.”

Block Extension

9-D-38
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7–I “Operation of Function
Keys.” Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-39
(70695)
6.03 Numbering Plan (03/11)

Summary
The third screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
screen sets the feature numbers for functions 25
to 36.

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Doorphone Call (1~4) 3-B-1.00
40 640
4-G-7.00
Enter one through four digits number 5-E-2.00
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 6-H-4.00

External Paging 41 641 3-B-1.00

4-H-1.03
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04
6-I-1.03
6-I-1.04

Continued

9-D-40
(70695)
 Continued
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Station Paging 42 642 3-B-1.00
4-H-1.01
4-H-1.02
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.01
5-F-1.02
5-F-1.04
6-I-1.01
6-I-1.02
6-I-1.04

External Paging Answer 43 643 3-B-1.00

4-H-1.03
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04
Station Paging Answer 44 644 Enter one through four digits number 3-B-1.00
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 4-H-1.01
4-H-1.02
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.01
5-F-1.02
5-F-1.04

Night Answer 1 45 645 3-B-1.00

3-B-8.02
3-D-2.04
46 646 4-D-4.00
Night Answer 2
4-I-1.01
5-B-2.00
5-G-1.01

Dial Call Pickup 47 647 3-B-1.00

4-D-3.01
5-B-1.01
Directed Call Pickup 48 648 3-B-1.00
4-D-3.02
5-B-1.02
Hold Extension Retrieve 49 649 3-B-1.00
4-E-4.00
5-C-3.00
Redial 3 6 3 3-B-1.00
5-A-2.03
External Feature Access 50 650 3-B-1.00
4-G-9.00
5-E-3.00

9-D-41
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Doorphone Call (1~4) Assigns the feature number for Doorphone calling. After dialing the
feature number, dial 1 to 4 to specify the required doorphone.

External Paging Assigns the feature number for External Paging. After dialing the feature
number, dial 0 (external pagers 1 and 2), 1 (external pager 1), 2 (external
pager 2), or (all extensions and external pagers).

Station Paging Assigns the feature number for Internal Paging. After dialing the feature
number, dial the paging group number (1 to 8), 0 (to page all internal
zones) or (to page all internal and external zones).

External Paging Answer Assigns the feature number for External Paging Answer. After dialing the
feature number, dial 1 (for pager 1) or 2 (for pager 2).

Station Paging Answer Assigns the feature number for Station Paging Answer.

Night Answer 1 Assigns the feature number for Night Answer 1. This feature number is
used to answer calls assigned to UNA 1 in night service or TAFAS 1 in
day service.

Night Answer 2 Assigns the feature number for Night Answer 2. This feature number is
used to answer calls assigned to UNA 2 in night service or TAFAS 2 in
day service.

Dial Call Pickup Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup. This allows a user to
pickup a call arriving at an extension in the same pickup group.

Directed Call Pickup Assigns the feature number for Directed Call Pickup (General). This
allows an extension user to pickup a call ringing at any extension in the
same tenant.

Hold Extension Retrieve Assigns the feature number for Hold Retrieving. This allows an extension
user to retrieve a call held at another extension in the same tenant.

Redial Assigns the feature number for Redial. This is used by an SLT to redial
the last CO number.

External Feature Access Assigns the feature number for sending a switchhook flash to a host PBX
or Centrex service.
Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

9-D-42
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7–I “Operation of Function
Keys.” Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-43
(70695)
6.04 Numbering Plan (04/11)

Summary
The fourth screen of the System-Numbering (Password : Two or higher)
Plan sets the feature numbers for function 37 to
48.
Default
Assigning Items Selection of Value Reference
Fixed 1 Fixed 2

3-B-1.00
Account Code # #
4-I-2.00
5-G-2.00

Hold 51 651 3-B-1.00

5-C-1.00
Hold Retrieve 52 652 Enter one through four digits number
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #.
Call Park-System 53 653 3-B-1.00
4-E-5.01
Call Park Retrieve-System 54 654 5-C-4.01

Call Park-Station 55 655 3-B-1.00

4-E-5.02
Call Park Retrieve-Station 56 656 5-C-4.02

Continued

9-D-44
(70695)
 Continued
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Call Forwarding-All Call Set 2 3-B-1.00
4-F-2.01
5-D-2.01

Call Forwarding-Busy Set
Call Forwarding-No Answer Set
3-B-1.00
3 4-F-2.02
Enter one through four digits number 5-D-2.02
consisting of 0 through 9, ,and #.
3-B-1.00
4 4-F-2.03
5-D-2.03

3-B-1.00
Call Forwarding-to Trunk 5 4-F-2.05
5-D-2.05

3-B-1.00
Call Forwarding-Busy/No 6 4-F-2.04
Answer 5-D-2.04

9-D-45
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Account Code Assigns the feature number for entering account codes which may be
forced or optional depending on system programming (Class of
Service).

Hold Assigns the feature number for Hold. This is used by an SLT to place
the other party on hold.

Hold Retrieve Assigns the feature number for retrieving Hold. This is used by an SLT
to retrieve a held call.

Call Park-System Assigns the feature number for Call Park-System. This is used by any
extension user to park a call in one of twenty system call park zones.

Call Park Retrieve-System Assigns the feature number for retrieving a call parked by Call Park-
System.

Call Park-Station Assigns the feature number for Call Park-Station. This is used by any
extension user to park a call in that extension's call park zone.

Call Park Retrieve-Station Assigns the feature number for retrieving a call parked by Call Park-
Station.

Call Forwarding-All Call Set Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of all calls.

Call Forwarding-Busy Set Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to busy
extensions.

Call Forwarding-No Answer Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to no answer
Set extensions.

Call Forwarding-to Trunk Assigns the feature number for Call Forward to an outside party.

Call Forwarding-Busy/No Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to extensions
Answer which are in busy or no answer status.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

9-D-46
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7–I “Operation of Function
Keys.” Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-47
(70695)
6.05 Numbering Plan (05/11)

Summary
The fifth screen of the System-Numbering Plan various functions.
screen, constructed with nine screens, sets (Password level : Two or higher)
feature numbers for executing or canceling

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
3-B-1.00
Do Not Disturb Set 1
4-D-6.00
5-B-4.00
3-B-1.00
Call Forwarding/Do Not ##0
4-D-6.00
Disturb Cancel 4-F-2.01
to 2.05
Enter one through four digits number 5-B-4.00
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 5-D-2.01
to 2.05

Dial Call Pickup Deny Set 61 3-B-1.00

4-D-3.03
5-B-1.03
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 61#

Continued

9-D-48
(70695)(E)
(70695)
 Continued
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2

Call Waiting Set 62 3-B-1.00

4-D-7.00
5-B-5.00

Call Waiting Cancel 62#

Enter one through four digits number

BSS/OHCA Deny Set 63 consisting of 0 through 9 , , and #. 3-B-1.00
4-D-2.03
BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel 63#

Busy Override Deny Set 64 3-B-1.00

4-D-5.00
Busy Override Deny Cancel 64# 5-B-3.00

Data Line Security Set 65 3-B-1.00

4-I-6.00
Data Line Security Cancel 65# 5-G-4.00

9-D-49
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Do Not Disturb Set Assigns the feature number for Do Not Disturb Set.

Call Forwarding/Do Not Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding /Do Not Disturb Cancel.
Disturb Cancel

Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup Deny Set. This allows
an extension user to prohibit other extensions from answering calls
arriving at his extension.

Dial Call Pickup Deny Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel.
Cancel

Call Waiting Set Assigns the feature number for Call Waiting Set. This allows an
extension user to hear a call waiting tone when another call arrives
during a conversation.

Call Waiting Cancel Assigns the feature number for Call Waiting Cancel.

BSS / OHCA Deny Set Assigns the feature number for BSS/OHCA Deny Set.

BSS / OHCA Deny Assigns the feature number for BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel. BSS/OHCA
Cancel Deny Cancel is used when the called extension is off-hook. BSS and
OHCA allows a call to be made using the ICM button. BSS sets green
240 wink on the called party's ICM button while OHCA allows Hands-free
Answerback to PITS KX-T7130, KX-T123230D or KX-T123235.

Busy Override Deny Set Assigns the feature number for Busy Override Deny Set. Enabling this
feature prevents other extensions from using Executive Busy Override
on this extension.

Busy Override Deny Assigns the feature number for canceling Busy Override Deny.
Cancel

Data Line Security Set Assigns the feature number for setting data communication mode.
When set this feature prevents any call progress tones from being sent
to the extension.

Data Line Security Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling data communication mode.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

9-D-50
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”
Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-51
(70695)
6.06 Numbering Plan (06/11)

Summary
The sixth screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
sets the feature numbers for executing or cancel-
ing various functions.

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
3-B-1.00
Pickup Dialing Programming 660 5-A-2.04

Pickup Dialing Set 66

Pickup Dialing Cancel 66#

Absent Message Set 3-B-1.00

4 6 4 Enter one through four digits number 4-I-7.00
consisting of 0 through 9, ,and #. 5-G-5.00
Absent Message Cancel #4 6#4

Timed Reminder Confirm 3-B-1.00

50
4-I-3.00

Timed Reminder Set 3-B-1.00

51
4-I-3.00
5-G-3.00

Continued

9-D-52
(70695)
 Continued
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Timed Reminder Cancel #5 #50 3-B-1.00
4-I-3.00
5-G-3.00

Voice Calling Mode Set 67 Enter one through four digits number 3-B-1.00
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 4-C-5.03
Voice Calling Mode Cancel 67#

Voice Calling Deny Set 68 3-B-1.00

4-D-2.02
Voice Calling Deny Cancel 68#

9-D-53
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Pickup Dialing Programming Pickup Dialing is a feature of SLT telephones which allows automatic
calling when going off-hook. This feature allows the extension user to
program the number to be called.

Pickup Dialing Set This feature number enables Pickup Dialing.

Pickup Dialing Cancel This feature number cancels Pickup Dialing.

Absent Message Set Assigns the feature number for setting Absent Message. This is used
by a user when he wants to inform callers of the reason he is away
from his desk. The message will only appear on PITS equipped with
display or Attendant Consoles.

Absent Message Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Absent Message.

Timed Reminder Confirm Assigns the feature number for confirming the time set by Timed
Reminder. This feature is available only for PITS equipped with
display.

Timed Reminder Set Assigns the feature number for setting Timed Reminder.

Timed Reminder Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Timed Reminder.

Voice Calling Mode Set Assigns the feature number for setting Voice Calling Mode. This is set
at the calling extension. Voice calling uses the ICM button to make an
announcement through the speaker of the called extension when the
called extension is idle.

Voice Calling Mode Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Voice Calling Mode. This
sets signal alerting.

Voice Calling Deny Set Assigns the feature number for setting Voice Calling Deny. This is set
by the called extension to deny voice calling.
If “Voice Calling Deny” is set, the extension rings as usual (not voice
alerted) when it receives a call.

Voice Calling Deny Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Voice Calling Deny.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

9-D-54
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”
Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-55
(70695)
6.07 Numbering Plan (07/11)

Summary
The seventh screen of the System-Numbering (Password level : Two or higher)
Plan sets feature numbers for executing or
canceling various functions.

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2

Speed Dialing-Station 6 6 5 3-B-1.00

Programming 5-A-2.01

Station Lock Set 6 6 6 3-B-1.00

4-I-9.00
Station Lock Cancel 5-G-7.00
#6 6#6 Enter one through four digits number
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #.
Walking COS Set 7 6 7 3-B-1.00
4-C-9.00
Walking COS Cancel 5-A-7.00
#7 6#7

Walking Station Set 8 6 8 3-B-1.00

3-F-3.00

Continued

9-D-56
(70695)
 Continued
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2

Walking Station Cancel #8 6#8 3-B-1.00

3-F-3.00

Message Set 9 6 9 5-G-6.00

Message Cancel #9 6#9 Enter one through four digits number 3-B-1.00
consisting of 0 through 9 , , and #. 4-I-8.00
5-G-6.00
6-J-4.00

Station Program Clear ### ### 3-B-1.00

4-I-10.00
5-G-8.00

Message Waiting Reply 57 657 5-G-6.00

TIE Trunk Access 84 7 3-F-14.00

9-D-57
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Speed Dialing-Station Assigns the feature number for setting Speed Dialing to SLT(Single Line
Programming Telephone).

Station Lock Set Assigns the feature number for setting Electronic Station Lock. When set
the extension user cannot place outgoing CO calls from that extension.

Station Lock Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Electronic Station Lock.

Walking COS Set Assigns the feature number for setting Walking COS. This allows an
extension user to temporarily change the COS of an extension to that of
another extension.

Walking COS Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Walking COS.

Walking Station Set Assigns the feature number for starting to move a telephone set to another
location.

Walking Station Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling the moved extension.

Message Set Assigns the feature number for setting Message Waiting indication.
This feature number is available only for SLT's not for PITS's.

Message Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Message Waiting indication.

Station Program Clear Assigns the feature number for clearing data assigned by other feature
numbers, such as Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb/Timed Reminder, etc..

Message Waiting Reply Assigns the feature number for replying the Message Waiting Indication set
by other extensions.
This feature number is available only for a Single Line Telephone with
MESSAGE lamp.

TIE Trunk Access Assigns the feature number for TIE Trunk Access.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”
Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-58
(70695)
6.08 Numbering Plan (08/11)

Summary
The eighth screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
sets feature numbers for executing or canceling
various functions.
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Night Mode Set 70 69 3-B-8.05
4-I-1.03
Night Mode Cancel 70# 69# 5-G-1.03

Night Service Manual Mode 71 51 3-B-1.00

Set Enter one through four digits number 4-I-1.03
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 5-G-1.03
Night Service Manual Mode 71# 51# 6-J-1.02
Cancel

Flexible Night Service 72 520 3-B-1.00

3-B-8.03
4-I-1.02
5-I-1.02
6-J-1.01

Continued

9-D-59
(70695)
 Continued
Default
Assigning Items Selection of Value Reference
Fixed 1 Fixed 2

Remote Station Lock Set 73 53 3-B-1.00

4-I-11.00
Remote Station Lock Cancel 73# 53# 5-G-9.00
6-J-5.00
Remote DND Set 74 54

Remote DND Cancel 74# 54# Enter one through four digits number
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #.
Remote FWD Cancel 75 675

Remote FWD Cancel- 76 676

One Time

BGM Through External 77 677 3-B-1.00

Pager 4-H-2.00
5-F-2.00
6-I-2.00

9-D-60
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Night Mode Set Assigns the feature number for setting Night mode manually (for
operator 1 only). This is used when night mode is set to “Manual.”

Night Mode Cancel Assigns the feature number for setting Day mode manually (for
operator 1 only).

Night Service Manual Mode Assigns the feature number for starting Night Service mode manually
Set (for operator 1 only). This is used when night mode is set to “Auto.”

Night Service Manual Mode Assigns the feature number for starting Night Service mode automati-
Cancel cally (for operator 1 only).

Flexible Night Service Assigns the feature number for setting an answering point in Night
mode (for operator 1 only).

Remote Station Lock Set Assigns the feature number for setting Electronic Station Lock to
extensions (for operators 1 and 2 only).

Remote Station Lock Assigns the feature number for unlocking extensions (for operators 1
Cancel and 2 only).

Remote DND Set Assigns the feature number for setting Do Not Disturb to extensions (for
operators 1 and 2 only).

Remote DND Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Do Not Disturb for
extensions (for operators 1 and 2 only).

Remote FWD Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Call Forwarding feature for
extensions (for operators 1 and 2 only).

Remote FWD Cancel- Assigns the feature number for canceling Call Forwarding feature for
One Time extensions only once (for operators 1 and 2 only).

BGM Through External Assigns the feature number for sending BGM (background music)
Paging through External Pager (for operator 1 only).

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

9-D-61
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys are
available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”
Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-62
(70695)
6.09 Numbering Plan (09/11)

Summary
The ninth screen of the System-Numbering Plan various functions.
sets feature numbers for executing or canceling (Password level : Two or higher)

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Busy Out Trunk 78 57 3-B-1.00
3-F-8.00
Unbusy Trunk 78# 57# 6-J-10.00

OGM Record 791 691 3-B-1.00

3-F-4.00
OGM Playback 792 692 6-J-8.00
Enter one through four digits number
UCD Log In 0 6 0 consisting of 0 through 9, , and #. 3-B-1.00
4-D-8.00
5-B-6.00
UCD Log Out #0 6#0

Remote Timed Reminder Confirm 7 0 5 0 4-I-14.00

6-J-13.00
Remote Timed Reminder Set 7 1 5 1

Remote Timed Reminder Cancel 7# 50#

9-D-63
(70695)
 Assigning Items Default Reference
Fixed 1 Fixed 2 Selection of Value
Call Forwarding-Follow Me Set Enter one through four digits number 4-F-2.06
7
10-C-68.00
consisting of 0 through 9, , and #.
Call Forwarding-Follow Me Cancel 5-D-2.05
8
10-C-68.00

Description of Assigning Items

Busy Out Trunk Assigns the feature number for manually putting a trunk into busy status
(for operator 1 only).

Unbusy Trunk Assigns the feature number for canceling Busy Out Trunk (for operator 1
only).

OGM Record Assigns the feature number for recording OGM (for operator 1 only).

OGM Playback Assigns the feature number for playback of OGM (for operator 1 only).

UCD Log In Assigns the feature number for setting extensions to UCD (Uniform Call
Distribution) service.

UCD Log Out Assigns the feature number for removing extensions from UCD service.

Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for confirming the time set by Remote Timed
Confirm Reminder.
This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con-
soles or PITS with display.

Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for setting Remote Timed Reminder.
Set This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con-
soles or PITS with display.

Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for canceling Remote Timed Reminder.
Cancel This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con-
soles or PITS with display.

Call Forwarding-Follow Me Assigns the feature number for setting Call Forwarding-Follow Me feature.
Set
Call Forwarding-Follow Me Assigns the feature number for canceling Call Forwarding-Follow Me
Cancel. feature.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”

9-D-64
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX keys is also available in this screen.
The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of Function
Keys.” Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>Numbering Plan (01-11)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-64 -1
(70695)
6.10 Numbering Plan (10/11)

Summary
The tenth screen of the System-Numbering Plan through 12.
sets the other PBX extension numbers for 01 (Password level : Two or higher)

Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Other PBX Extension 01 through blank 3-B-1.00
0 to 9: set “DG1” and leave “DG2”
12 3-F-14.01
blank when the other PBX exten-
sion numbers are to be composed
of three digits, and set both “DG1”
and “DG2” when the other PBX
extension numbers are to be
composed of four digits.

Description of Assigning Items

Other PBX Extension 01 Assigns the leading one or two digits of other PBX extension numbers.
through 12 If you employ PBX Code method for TIE calls (See Section 3-F-14.00),
this programming is not required.

Conditions
Other PBX Extension 01 through 12 Cannot include “ ” and “#”.

9-D-64-2
(70695)
6.11 Numbering Plan (11/11)

Summary
The eleventh screen of the System-Numbering (Password level : Two or higher)
Plan sets the other PBX extension numbers for
13 through 16 and feature number for Transfer
and Conference.
Default Reference
Assigning Items Selection of Value
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Other PBX Extension 13 through blank 3-B-1.00
0 to 9: set “DG1” and leave “DG2”
16 3-F-14.01
blank when the other PBX exten-
sion numbers are to be composed
of three digits, and set both “DG1”
and “DG2” when the other PBX
extension numbers are to be
composed of four digits.

Transfer 58 Enter one through four digits number 5-D-1.00

consisting of 0 through 9, ,and #.
Conference 59 5-E-1.00

9-D-64-3
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Other PBX Extension 13 Assigns the leading one or two digits of other PBX extension numbers. If
through 16 If you employ PBX Code method for TIE calls (See Section 3-F-14.00),
this programming is not required.

Transfer Assigns the feature number for SLT Transfer Operation

This feature number is available for an SLT user when “SLT Transfer
Operation” (See section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)”) is set to
“Mode 2”.

Conference Assigns the feature number for SLT Conference Operation.

This feature number is available for an SLT user when “SLT Transfer
Operation” (See section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)”) is set to
“Mode 2”.

Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (01/11).”
Other PBX Extension 13 through 16 Cannot include “ ” and “#”.

9-D-64-4
(70695)
7.00 Communication Interface

Summary
Assigns parameters for the RS-232 C ports and
Modem (Modulator and Demodulator).
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

NL-Code <CR+LF> <CR+LF>: Carriage Return and Line Feed 2-D-3.00

<CR> : Carriage Return 3-F-1.00
14-B-2.00
15-B-2.00
Baud Rate 1200 : for 110/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600 : 16
SIO#1,2 Baud rate for SIO 17
300 : for 300/1200 : Baud rate for Remote
Remote

Word Length 7 bits : for 7 bits/8 bits: number of bits for SIO
SIO#1,2 6 bits/7 bits/8 bits: number of bits for Remote
8 bits : for
Remote

Continued

9-D-65
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Parity Mark : for None/Mark/Space/Even/Odd : Parity for SIO 2-D-3.00

SIO#1,2 3-F-1.00
14-B-2.00
None : for None/Even/Odd : Parity for Remote
15-B-2.00
Remote 16
17
Stop Bit 1 bit 1 bit/2 bits : Stop bit for SIO
1 bit/1.5 bits/2 bits: Stop bit for Remote

9-D-66
Description of Assigning Items
NL-Code Assigns the New Line code, for Carriage Return, for SIO #1 (Terminal),
SIO #2 (SMDR : Station Message Detail Recording) and Remote (MODEM).

Baud Rate Assigns the Baud rate for SIO #1, SIO #2 and Remote. The baud rate is the
number of bits transmitted per second between this system and the device.

Word Length Assigns the data length for SIO #1, SIO #2 and Remote. The data length is the
number of bits required per character.

Parity Assigns the type of Parity check for SIO #1, SIO #2 and Remote. Mark and
space means that there is a fixed polarity parity bit for each character. Even and
odd means that the number of bits including the parity bits is even or odd.
(1,3,5,7,9 etc. is odd 2,4,6,8, etc. is even)

Stop Bit Assigns the number of Stop bit for SIO #1, SIO #2 and Remote. Stop bits are
used to signal the end of a character and that the next bit received is the start bit
of the next character.

Conditions
It is possible to change assigning items in “System-Communication Interface” while
On-site administration or Remote administration is performed or SMDR is being
printed out. New setting becomes effective when those operation modes are
finished.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-67
8.00 Speed Dialing - System

Summary
Assigns toll restriction levels and speed dialing Dialing-System.
codes for Speed Dialing. (Password level : Three or higher)
There are 15 screens provided for Speed

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Type 00 00 : checked against the system toll 4-C-4.02

restriction feature 5-A-2.02
01 to 16 : first checked against toll restriction 6-D-2.01
level of extension users.

Dial blank Maximum 32 digits composed of numbers, ,# 4-C-4.02

and marks below: 4-I-5.00
P (Pause) 5-A-2.02
6-D-2.01
F (Flash)
6-J-3.00
- (Hyphen)
[ (Start of secret dialing)
] (End of secret dialing)

9-D-68
Description of Assigning Items
No. Speed dialing codes appear on the CRT screen.

Type Assigns the toll restriction level for each of the speed dialing codes.

Dial Assigns the actual digits to be dialed including numbers, , #, P, F, -, [, ] . There is

a maximum of 32 digits. For hiding the digits, surround them with brackets [ ]. The
dialed digits are not appeared on the display of PITS (if provided) and SMDR call
record.

Conditions
If “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to “Yes,” 200 speed dialing codes
can be split between tenant 1 and tenant 2. To split them, “System-Tenant”,
Speed Dialing-System Boundary must be executed.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”
Only a message is provided here.

INDEX>System Speed Dial No. (001-200)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-D-69
9.00 Absent Message

Summary
Sets absent messages.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Fixed Message (1 to 6) all displayed Fixed messages which cannot be changed 4-I-7.00
% : enter these at extensions 5-G-5.00

Flexible Message (7 to 16) blank Flexible message

A maximum of 16 digits composed of characters,
numbers, and up to five %
% : enter these at extensions

9-D-70
Description of Assigning Items
Fixed Message (1 to 6)
Fixed messages to be displayed on a PITS telephone with the display.
These messages cannot be changed by system programming.
Extension user can set the desired one to his or her PITS telephone set.
If the message assigned contains parameters, these should be entered
by the extension user.

Flexible Message (07 to 16)
Assigns variable messages to be displayed on a PITS telephone with
the display. These messages can be assigned and changed by system
programming. Extension user can set the desired one to his or her
PITS telephone and if the message contains any parameters, these
should be entered by the extension user.

Conditions
If “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is assigned to “Yes,” 10 flexible messages
(7 to 16) can be split between tenants 1 and 2. To split them, “System-Tenant”,
Absent Message Boundary is used. Six fixed messages cannot be split between
tenants. They are used by both tenants in common.

A flexible message in use by an extension user cannot be changed or deleted.

If you attempt, the changed data cannot be saved and the following error message
appears on the screen.
***** ERROR: Some extensions are using that message.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-D-71
(30393)
E. Group Screen

1.00 Trunk Group

1.01 Trunk Group (1/2)

Summary
The Group-Trunk Group screen consists of 16 data for trunk groups.
groups, each of which includes two screens. This (Password level : Two or higher)
screen is the first screen used to assign various

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Type DDD DDD : Direct Distance Dialing 3-B-7.05

FEX : Foreign Exchange 3-C-1.01
WATS : Wide Area Telecommunication Service 3-C-1.03
PVL : Private Line 3-C-4.00
PBX : Behind PBX 3-D-2.03
DID : Direct Inward Dialing 3-D-2.07
TIE : TIE Line 3-F-14.00

Name CO A maximum of three digits consisting of charac- 3-B-7.05

ters, numbers and marks : Trunk group name

Tenant blank 1 or 2 : tenant number 3-B-7.05

3-B-4.00

Incoming/Outgoing Both-Way Incoming Only : for Incoming calls only 3-B-7.05

Outgoing Only : for Outgoing calls only
Both-Way : for both
9-E-1 Continued
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Incoming Mode (Day) ATT: for ATT : placing calls to the Attendant Console 3-B-7.05
“with ATLC” DIL 1:1 : placing calls by Direct In Line 1:1 3-D-1.00
DIL 1:1 : DIL 1:N : placing calls by Direct In Line 1:N 3-D-2.01
for “without DISA : placing calls by Direct Inward 3-D-2.02
ATLC” System Access 3-D-2.04
TAFAS 1 : placing calls by Trunk Answer from 4-D-4.00
Any Station-1 5-B-2.00
TAFAS 2 : placing calls by Trunk Answer from
Any Station-2

Incoming Mode (Night) FLEXIBLE Day Mode : placing calls in Day mode 3-B-7.05
FIXED : placing calls to a Fixed destination 3-B-8.00
FLEXIBLE : placing calls to a Flexible destination
DISA : placing calls by Direct Inward
System Access

Intercept Routing (Day) None (Type) 3-B-7.05

None: not intercepting 3-F-5.00
ATT : transferring to Attendant Console 3-F-6.00
EXT : transferring to an extension

(No.) : setting is unnecessary if “None” is

selected for type
Directory number: if “EXT” is selected for type

Intercept Routing (Night) None (Type)

None: not intercepting
EXT : transferring to an extension

(No.) : if “None” is selected for type,

setting is unnecessary
Directory number: when “EXT” is selected for type

Toll Restriction Level 16 01 to 16: toll restriction level 3-B-7.05

3-C-1.03

Toll Restriction Table 1 1 to 8 : area office code table 3-B-7.05

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada 3-C-1.03
only) 9-I-1.00

Continued

9-E-2
(60395)
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Dialing Plan None Type-A : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX 3-B-7.05

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada NXX+XXXX 3-C-1.00
only) Type-B : NPX+NXX+XXXX 3-C-2.00
NNX+XXXX
Type-C : 1+NPX +NXX+XXXX
1+ NNX+XXXX
NNX+XXXX
Type-D : 1+NXX +NXX+XXXX
NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
Area Code
Office Code
Subscriber Number
None : no Toll Restriction
[N: 2 to 9, P: 0,1, X : 0 to 9]

CO-CO Duration Limit 10 1 to 64 : CO-CO duration limit (minute(s)) 3-B-7.05

3-B-10.00
3-D-2.02
4-F-1.03
4-F-2.05
4-G-6.01
4-G-6.02
5-D-2.05
6-G-1.04
6-H-2.00

Disconnect Time 1.5 1.5/4.0 : disconnecting time (second(s)) 3-B-7.05

3-B-10.00
4-G-8.00
6-H-6.00

Pause Time 3.5 1.5/2.5/3.5/4.5 : pause time (second(s)) 3-B-7.05

3-B-10.00
3-C-4.00

Hook Switch Flash Time None None : no Flash Service 3-B-7.05

80/300/600/900/1200 : Flash Service hooking 3-B-10.00
time. (milliseconds) 4-G-9.00
5-E-3.00

9-E-3
(60395)
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Type
Name
Tenant
Incoming/Outgoing
Incoming Mode (Day)
Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
Toll Restriction Level
Toll Restriction Table
Dialing Plan
CO-CO Duration Limit
Disconnect Time
Pause Time
Hook Switch Flash Time
Conditions
The assigning items:Type, Incoming Mode (Day/Night), Destination (DIL 1:N Only)
Type and Number, CO Appearance Type can be changed only when all the trunks
belonging to the trunk group are not in use. If any trunk is used, it is impossible to
change.
Tenant
Incoming Mode (Day)
Assigns a type for each trunk group.
Assigns a name to each trunk group.
Assigns the tenant to which each trunk group belongs.
Assigns each trunk group to incoming only, outgoing only, or both.
Assigns the destination for incoming calls during day service.
Assigns the destination for calls during night service.
Assigns the destination for Intercept Routing (Day).
Assigns the destination for Intercept Routing (Night).
Assigns TRLT (Toll Restriction Level of trunk group).
Assigns Area/Office code table number for Toll Restriction.
Selects the dialing plan, selecting “None” causes no Toll Restriction.
Sets the maximum duration for a CO-CO call.
Sets disconnecting time. This allows the CO time to release its resources
before another call is placed outgoing from the PBX.
Sets the pause time used in speed dialing and hook switch below.
Assigns whether Flash Service is available or not.
If available, set the hooking time (pause length).
If “—” is displayed here, “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to
“No.”
If “ATT” “DISA,” “TAFAS 1” or “TAFAS 2” is selected, the followings are
checked:
ATT: Checks whether ATLC card is equipped or not.
DISA: Checks whether DISA card is equipped or not.
TAFAS 1: Checks whether “System-Operation”, External Paging 1 is set
to “Yes.”
TAFAS 2: Checks whether “System-Operation”, External Paging 2 is set
to “Yes.”
9-E-4
(70695)
 Incoming Mode (Night) If “FIXED” or “FLEXIBLE” is changed to another option, it cancels all the
settings of CO lines in “Trunk-CO Line”, Night Answer Point (Type:No.)
which belong to the trunk group.
If “FLEXIBLE” is changed to “FIXED”, the Night Answer Points are not
canceled.
If “FIXED” is changed to “FLEXIBLE”, the Night Answer Points are not
canceled except that “NAG” is assigned as a Night Answer Point.

Dialing Plan The difference between this and “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan
is as follows:

“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan selects the type of the office

where this system is installed.

“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan” selects the type of the office which
each trunk group is connected to.

<Example>

Trunk Group 2
System

Trunk Group 1 Office 2

Office 1 Type-B
Type-A
Office 2 is:
Office 1 is: connected to the
located where this trunk group 2.
system is installed.
connected to the
trunk group 1.

In the example above, programming is as follows:

Assign “Type A” in “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan.
Assign “Type-A” for trunk group 1 and “Type-B” for trunk group 2 in
“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan.

Relation between trunk group/CO line setting and PITS DN button setting

1. Private CO setting

If “Extension-Station”, Type is set to “PRV-CO” (Private CO) and Number is set to

the physical number of a CO line,

(1) Conditions for assigning DN buttons

• The designated CO line is assigned to a trunk group by “Trunk-CO Line”,

Trunk Group.
The trunk group should have “Group-Trunk Group”, Type assigned to “PVL”
(Private Line).

• The designated CO line should not be assigned by other extensions.

9-E-5
(30393)
(2) Conditions for setting trunk groups

If a trunk group changes “Group-Trunk Group”, Type assigned to “PVL” (Private

Line) to another type and if any CO lines belonging to the trunk group are
selected to be “PRV-CO” (Private CO) in “Extension-Station, Type/Number,
those CO lines are canceled from “Extension-Station”, Type/Number automati-
cally.

2. Single CO, Group CO setting

If “Single CO” or “Group CO” is selected in “Extension-Station”, Type,

(1) Conditions of assigning DN buttons

• The designated CO line is assigned to a trunk group in “Trunk-CO Line”,

Trunk Group.
The trunk group should have “Group-Trunk Group”, Type assigned to other
than “PVL” or “DID.”

(2) Conditions of setting “Incoming Mode (Day)”

1) If “Incoming Mode (Day)” is changed from “DIL 1:1” to another mode,

The trunk group changed to another mode in “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group. The “Trunk-CO
Line”, Direct Termination setting is canceled.

2) If “Incoming Mode (Day)” is changed from “DIL 1:N” to another mode,

“Group-Trunk Group”, Destination (DIL 1: N only) setting is canceled.

(3) Conditions of setting “Type”

Changing “Type” to “PVL” (Private Line) from any other modes cancels “Single
CO” or “Group CO” assigned to a DN button of an extension belonging to this
trunk group in “Extension-Station”, Type.

It is impossible to change from “DID” or “TIE” to any other modes and vice versa
if any CO line in “Trunk-CO Line” belongs to the “Group-Trunk Group.”

9-E-6
(70695)
3. Other Conditions

The following tabular listings of items by trunk group type shows the items that
cannot be assigned (“—” is displayed) when Incoming/Outgoing mode of the trunk
group is set to “Both-Way (default).”

Trunk Group(1/2)

DDD
Type FEX PVL PBX DID TIE
WATS
Incoming/Outgoing Both-Way
ATT (1/2) or ATT (1/2) or
Incoming Mode(Day) — — —
DIL 1:1 DIL 1:1
Incoming Mode(Night) FLEXIBLE — FLEXIBLE — —
Intercept Routing(Day) blank blank blank blank —
Intercept Routing(Night) blank blank blank blank —

Trunk Group(2/2)
Destination (DIL 1:N Only) blank — blank — blank
Type and Number
DID Digit Modification Table — — — 1 —
PBX Access Code (No Restriction) — — blank — —
PBX Access Code (Restriction) — — blank — —
CO-TIE Restriction Yes Yes Yes Yes —
TIE-CO Restriction — — — — Yes
TIE Forced Account Code Mode — — — — No
TIE Incoming Delete Digit — — — — 0
TIE Incoming Insert Dial — — — — blank

* From software version 9.XX and above, Incoming/Outgoing mode of the trunk
group with DID can be assigned to “Both-Way,” “Incoming Only,” or “Outgoing
Only.” However, please select “Incoming Only” if DID lines are available with
only receiving incoming calls in your area.

[Note]
When “Incoming Only” is selected in the trunk group with DID, the following items
are assignable but they do not work at all in Incoming Only mode.
• Disconnect Time • Pause Time
• Hook Switch Flash Time • Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal

(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

In some areas, DID lines can be used for both receiving incoming calls and making
outside calls. Both-way DID card (KX-T96182D) and DID card with MFC (KX-
T96182CE) are provided for this usage.
Detailed information on KX-T96182D and KX-T96182CE are described in Refer-
ence Guide for KX-T96182D and KX-T96182CE respectively.

9-E-7
(70695)
If the following types are selected for “Incoming/Outgoing,” the items below cannot be as-
signed:
Incoming/Outgoing Items Impossible to Assign

Incoming Only Toll Restriction Level

Toll Restriction Table
Dialing Plan
PBX Access Code (No Restriction), (Restriction)

Outgoing Only Incoming Mode (Day), (Night)

Destination (DIL 1:N Only)

If the following types are selected for “Incoming Mode (Day),” the item below cannot
be assigned:

Incoming Mode (Day) Items Impossible to Assign

ATT Destination (DIL 1:N Only)

DIL 1:1 Type and Number
DISA
TAFAS 1
TAFAS 2
If “System-Operation” External Paging 1, 2 is set to“No,” “TAFAS 1/TAFAS 2”
cannot be assigned to “Incoming Mode (Day).”

When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk

Group Group Group ------ Group
No. 01 (1/2) No. 01 (2/2) No. 02 (1/2) No. 16 (2/2)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-E-8
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHO LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys are
available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ keys are also available in this
screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of
Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Trunk Group No. (01-16)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Trunk Group No. (01-16)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-E-8-1
9-E-9
(70695)
1.02 Trunk Group (2/2)

Summary
The Group-Trunk Group screen consists of a assign various data for trunk groups.
maximum of 16 groups, each of which includes (Password level : Two or higher)
two screens. This is the second screen used to

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Destination (DIL 1:N Only) blank Type : destination 3-B-7.05

Type and Number blank : if not assigned 3-D-2.01
ICM : selecting intercom group
PCKUP : selecting pickup group
EXT : selecting extension

blank Number
blank : when “blank” is selected for type
01 to 32: pickup group number
three or four digits : extension number
1 to 8 : intercom group number

DID Digit Modification Table blank 1 to 4 : table number 3-B-7.05

3-D-2.03
9-K-2.00

Continued

9-E-9
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

PBX Access Code (No blank Host PBX access code 3-B-7.05
Restriction) A maximum of three digits composed of numbers 3-C-1.01
Up to eight codes can be assigned. 3-C-1.03
blank : not assigning 3-C-4.00

PBX Access Code (Restriction) blank Access codes with restriction 3-B-7.05
A maximum of three digits composed of numbers 3-C-1.01
Up to eight codes can be assigned. 3-C-1.03
blank : not assigning 3-C-4.00

Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal 0 0 : dialing is not acceptable 3-B-7.05
1 to 32 : maximum dialing digit(s) 4-G-9.00
5-E-3.00

3-F-14.03
CO-TIE Restriction Yes Yes : CO-TIE connection is restricted.
No : CO-TIE connection is allowed.

TIE-CO Restriction Yes Yes : TIE-CO connection is restricted. 3-F-14.02

No : TIE-CO connection is allowed.

TIE Forced Account Code No Yes : TIE callers are required to enter 3-F-14.02
10-C-65.02
Mode account code when making CO calls.
No : Entering Account Code is not required.

TIE Incoming Delete Digit 0 0 : deleting no digit 9-K-4.00

1 to 4 : number of deleting digit(s)

TIE Incoming Insert Dial blank blank : Inserting no digit

A maximum of four digits number
composed of 0 through 9 can be
entered.

9-E-10
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Destination (DIL 1:N only)
Type and Number
Assigns destination type and number only when “Incoming Mode (Day)” is
set to DIL 1: N (the function which enables an incoming call from one CO
line in one trunk group to arrive at one to eight destinations simultaneously
without assistance of operator).
Orderly setting is not necessary and inserting blanks between the items is
permissible.

DID Digit Modification Table Assigns the digit modification table to be used for DID calls. This allows
the DID incoming digits to be modified to match the numbering plan.

PBX Access Code (No In behind PBX or Centrex operation it is necessary for the system to
Restriction) send an access code to the host PBX or Centrex followed by a pause.
This feature assigns the access code to be sent.

PBX Access Code This is the same as PBX Access Code with Pause except that the digits
(Restriction) following the access code are checked by the system for toll restriction.

Max. Dial No. after EFA Assigns maximum dialing digits after sending EFA (External Feature
Signal Access) signal.

The following item is assignable when "Type" of the Trunk Group is set to any type other than "TIE."
CO-TIE Restriction Used to restrict or not outside users from "Calling from CO to TIE."
To restrict, set to "Yes." To allow, set to "No."

The following four items are assignable when "Type" of the Trunk Group is set to "TIE."
TIE-CO Restriction Used to restrict or not extension users from "Calling from TIE to CO."
To restrict, set to "Yes." To allow, set to "No."

TIE Forced Account Used to allow certain extension users "Calling from TIE to CO."
Code Mode If set to "Yes", an extension user must enter a valid tie account code
before "Calling from TIE to CO."

TIE Incoming Used to set the number of digit to be deleted from the digits received from
Delete Digit* other PBXs via TIE lines.

TIE Incoming Used to set one through four digits number to be added to the digits
Insert Dial* received from other PBXs via TIE lines.

* Required when there is a need to modify the digits from other PBXs.

Conditions
Same as “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)” screen.
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

9-E-11
(70695)
COMMON (SHO LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys are
available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ keys are also available in this
screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of
Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Trunk Group No. (01-16)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Trunk Group No. (01-16)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-E-12
11-1
(70695)
2.00 ICM / Paging Group

Summary
Assigns intercom groups and paging groups to
tenant 1 or 2
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

ICM Group (1 to 8) 1 1 or 2 : tenant number 3-B-7.01

Tenant

PAG Group (1 to 8) 1 1 or 2 : tenant number 3-B-7.04

Tenant 4-H-1.02
5-F-1.02
6-I-1.02

9-E-12
Description of Assigning Items
ICM Group (1 to 8)
Tenant Assigns intercom groups from 1 to 8 to tenant 1 or 2.

PAG Group (1 to 8)
Tenant Assigns paging groups from 1 to 8 to tenant 1 or 2.

Conditions
This screen must be programmed before programming “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen.
However, this screen does not appear if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to “No.”

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-E-13
3.00 Call Pickup Group

Summary
Assigns ICM (Intercom) group number, UCD pickup groups belong to.
(Uniform Call Distribution) group number and (Password level : Two or higher)
PAG (Paging) group number which the call

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

PICK (01 to 32) Pickup group number 3-B-7.01

ICM 1 1 to 8 : intercom group number 3-B-7.02

UCD blank 01 to 32 : UCD group number 3-B-7.03

blank : the call pickup group does not belong 3-D-2.05
to any UCD group 3-D-2.06

PAG blank 1 to 8 : paging group number 3-B-7.04

blank : the call pickup group does not belong 4-H-1.02
to any paging group 5-F-1.02
6-I-1.02

9-E-14
Description of Assigning Items
PICK (01 to 32)
ICM Assigns the intercom group number which the call pickup groups belong to.

UCD Assigns the UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) group number which the call
pickup groups belong to. UCD Group is comprised of more than one pickup
group.

PAG Assigns the paging group number which the call pickup groups belong to.
Paging Group is comprised of more than one pickup group.

Conditions
If “System-Operation (1/3)”, Tenant Service is set to “Yes,” “Group-ICM/Paging
Group” setting must be done before setting this screen.

Pickup Groups must belong to any of the ICM groups. The tenant of a pickup group
is determined by the tenant of the ICM group to which the pickup group belongs.

When assigning a pickup group to a paging group, the tenant of the two groups
must be the same.
A UCD Group is composed of multiple pickup groups.

Conditions of changing ICM Groups

1) The tenant of the old and new intercom groups must be the same, unless the
system is off-line.

2) All the extensions which belong to the old and newly entered intercom groups
must not be currently used.
If any line is used, it is impossible to change.

Conditions of changing UCD group

All the extensions which belong to the current and newly entered UCD groups
must not be currently used.
If any line is used, it is impossible to change.

Conditions of changing paging group

1) The tenant of the old and new paging groups must be the same, unless the
system is off-line.

2) All the extensions which belong to the old and newly entered paging groups
must not be currently used.
If any line is in use, it is impossible to change.

Table of relation between groups

A pickup group cannot belong to multiple intercom groups.

A paging group cannot belong to two tenants. A UCD group cannot belong to
multiple ICM groups.

9-E-15
 S y s t e m

Tenant 1

TRK TRK
group 1 group 2

ICM group 1 ICM group 2 ICM group 3

Paging group 1 Paging group 2 Paging group 3

UCD UCD
group 1 group 2

Pickup Pickup Pickup Pickup Pickup Pickup Pickup

group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 group 5 group 6 group 7

••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• •••

CO 1 • • • • • • • • • CO n EXT 1 EXT 2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • EXT n

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-E-16
F. Trunk Screen

1.00 CO Line

Summary

Assigns various parameters for CO lines. 144 screens are provided for CO Line.
This screen does not appear if any CO trunk card (Password level : Three or higher)
is not assigned in Configuration-Slot Assignment
screen.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Trunk Group 01 : for CO 01 to 16 : trunk group number 3-B-7.05

15 : for TIE
16 : for DID

Trunk Name TXXXX A maximum of ten digits composed of letters, 4-A-4.04

Physical number numbers and symbols
blank : no trunk name programmed

Direct Termination blank : for “with ATLC” DN and directory number (three or four digits): 3-D-2.01
Directory number : for call destination (Extension, Remote FDN,
“without ATLC” in UCD FDN)
physical number order None : no direct termination
of extensions paired
with CO lines
Continued
9-F-1
(60395)
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Night Answer Point Directory number : Type (select input) 3-B-8.00

(Type : No.) for each extension in None : no Night Answer Point 10-C-59.00
physical number order UNA : Universal Night Answer
EXT : Extension User
RMT : Remote Administration
NAG : Night Answer Group
No.
1 or 2 : for “UNA”
three or four digits : extension number
for “EXT”

Dial Mode (for U.S.A. and Canada) DTMF : DTMF mode 3-C-3.00
DTMF Pulse : Pulse mode 10-C-51.00
(for areas other than MFC-R2 : MFC-R2 mode
U.S.A. and Canada)
Pulse

DTMF Duration Time (for U.S.A. and Canada) 80 ms/160 ms : duration time 3-B-10.00
80 ms
(for areas other than
U.S.A. and Canada)
blank

Pulse Speed (for U.S.A. and Canada) Low Speed/High Speed : pulse speed None
blank
(for areas other than
U.S.A. and Canada)
Low Speed

% Break (for U.S.A. and Canada) 60% / 67% : % break 10-C-51.00

blank
(for areas other than
U.S.A. and Canada)
60%

CPC Detection 50 00 : unavailable for CPC detection 3-B-10.00

(400 ms) 01 : 6.5 ms detection 3-F-7.00
02 to 75 : 8 N ms detection 10-C-49.00

Start Arrangement Send Delay Wink Immediate Start : immediate start type 3-D-2.03
Send Delay Wink : wink start type

Wink Signal 16 1 : 64 ms
Time–Out (1.024 s) 2 : 128 ms
•
•
•
127 : 8.128 s

9-F-2
(60395)
(70695)(F)
Description of Assigning Items
Trunk Group Assigns the trunk group number of the CO line.

Trunk Name Assigns the name of the CO line. This will appear on the CRT screen of
the Attendant Console and the display of PITS telephone (if provided)
when making or receiving a CO call.

Direct Termination Assigns the directory number of the destination, when the trunk group of
the line is set to “DIL 1:1” in Incoming Mode (Day).

Night Answer Point Assigns Night Answer point when the “Incoming Mode (Night)” is assigned
(Type : No.) to “FIXED” or “FLEXIBLE.”
“NAG” can be selected only when Trunk Group “Incoming Mode (Night)” is
assigned to “FIXED.”
If it is not assigned to “FIXED” nor “FLEXIBLE,” “—” appears in the setting
field, and it is impossible to assign a destination.

Dial Mode Assigns the dial type (DTMF, Pulse or MFC-R2). This is the output mode
regardless of the dial mode of the telephone used.
If Pulse is selected, refer to Section 10-C-51.00 “World Select 1 (WS1)”
about the following items.
• Interdigit Pause
• Pulse Type
• % Break Detect

DTMF Duration Time Assigns the duration of the DTMF tones sent.
It is possible to assign this option only when the “Dial Mode” is set to
“DTMF. When the dial mode is set to “Pulse,” this field is blank.

Pulse Speed Assigns the pulse speed.

It is possible to assign this option only when the “Dial Mode” is set to
“Pulse.” When the dial mode is set to “DTMF,” this field is blank.

% break Assigns the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between on and off
hook signals during digit transmission.

CPC Detection Assigns the expected minimum duration for detecting CPC (Calling Party
Control) signal.

Start Arrangement Assigns DID/TIE/E&M start type.

When the trunk group of the line is set to “DID/TIE/E&M”, there are two
methods of initiating a call. One is immediate start where the system
outpulses the digits as soon as the trunk is seized and the other is where
the system waits for a signal (wink start) from the far end before any digits
are sent.

Wink Signal Assignable when Start Arrangement is set to “Send Delay Wink.”
Time-Out

Conditions
Before setting this screen, “Group-Trunk Group” screen must be programmed.
This screen cannot be selected from Trunk-submenu screen, if no CO trunk card is
programmed in “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment. If any one of the CO trunk
cards is programmed, this screen can be selected.
9-F-3
(70695)
(60395)
When selecting “1. CO Line” in Trunk submenu screen, the setting screen which has
the smallest Trunk Equipment No. appears on the screen first.
If the “Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to “DID,” the
following items cannot be entered : “ —” is displayed :
• Direct Termination
• Night Answer Point (Type : No)
• Dial Mode
• DTMF Duration Time
• Pulse Speed
• % Break
• CPC Detection

If “the Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to anything
other than “DID” or "TIE", the following items cannot be entered : “ —” is displayed :
• Start Arrangement
• Wink Signal Time-Out

Direct Termination This is assignable only when the “Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO
line has “Incoming Mode (Day)” assigned to “DIL 1:1,” Otherwise, “ —” is
displayed and setting is impossible.

Night Answer This is assignable only when the “Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO
Point (Type : No) line has “Incoming Mode (Night)” assigned to “FIXED” or “FLEXIBLE.”
Otherwise, “ —” is displayed and setting is impossible.

When pressing the NEXT key, this screen appears in ascending order of Trunk
Equipment number. After the largest number appears, the smallest one appears.
Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in this
screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation of
Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Trunk Equipment No. (Physical No.)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Physical No.=
F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-F-4
(70695)
(60395)
2.00 Pager and Music Source

Summary
Assigns external pagers and music sources. Music Source 1, 2” are set to “No” in the Sys-
This screen does not appear when all the assign- tem-Operation (1/3) screen.
ing items of “External Paging 1, 2” and “External (Password level : Three or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

External Pager 1/2 3-D-2.04

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 4-D-4.00
2 : tenant 2 4-H-1.03
4-H-1.04
4-H-2.00
5-B-2.00
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04
5-F-2.00
6-I-1.03
6-I-1.04
6-I-2.00

Continued

9-F-5
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

External Pager 1/2 3-B-15.00

Tone No Yes : sending confirmation tone 4-H-1.03
No : not sending confirmation tone 4-H-1.04
4-H-2.00
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04
5-F-2.00
6-I-1.03
6-I-1.04
6-I-2.00

BGM No Yes : sending BGM 4-H-2.00

No : not sending BGM 5-F-2.00
6-I-2.00

Music Source 1/2 3-E-1.00

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 3-F-13.00
2 : tenant 2 4-H-2.00
4-I-4.00
5-F-2.00
For Use Hold & BGM Hold : using for source of Music on Hold
6-I-2.00
BGM : using for source of BGM
Hold & BGM: using for source of Music on Hold
or BGM

9-F-6
(40993)
Description of Assigning Items
External Pager 1/2 Assigns the tenant number which the pager and music source belong to.
Tenant
Determines whether confirmation tone will be sent or not at the beginning
Tone of using the external pager.

Assigns whether BGM will be sent or not when the external pager is idle.
BGM

Music Source 1/2 Assigns the tenant number which the pager and music source belong to.
Tenant
Assigns usage. This determines at which times the music sources will be
For Use used.

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Operation”, External Paging 1, 2/External
Music Source 1, 2 are all set to “No.”

External Pager
Tenant “—” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to
“No.”

Tone/BGM “—” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, External Paging 1, 2 is

set to “No.”

Music Source “—” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to
Tenant “No.”

For Use “—” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, External Music Source
1, 2 is set to “No.”

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-F-7
3.00 AGC

Summary
Assigns tenant number which the AGC (Password level : Three or higher)
(Automatic Gain Control) card belongs to, and
executing tone detection or not.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

AGC card (1 to 4) 3-D-2.02

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 4-G-5.00
2 : tenant 2 4-G-6.00
5-E-1.00
6-H-1.00
Tone Detect Yes Yes : tone detection is available
6-H-2.00
No : tone detection is unavailable

9-F-8
Description of Assigning Items
AGC card (1 to 4)
Tenant Assigns the tenant number which the AGC card belongs to.

Tone Detect Assigns whether detecting of the CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is done
at the end of the CO-CO conversation or not.

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration,” Slot Assignment has no
AGC card programmed.

AGC card
Tenant “ ” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set
“No.”

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-F-9
G. Extension Screen
1.00 Station
1.01 Station (1/3)

Summary
This is the first screen of Extension-Station each of which has three screens.
which sets the parameters for each extension. (Password level : Three or higher)
There are 288 screens are provided for Station,

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Telephone Type SLT : for SLC PITS: Proprietary Integrated Telephone System 3-B-9.00
PITS : for PLC SLT : Single Line Telephone 3-F-2.00
and HLC OPX: Off Premise Extension
OPX : for OPX
Model KX-T123235 KX-T123250 4-A-2.00
(7130) KX-T123220
KX-T123230
KX-T123235 (7130)
KX-T61650
KX-T61620
KX-T61630
KX-T30850
KX-T30820
KX-T30830
KX-T7050
KX-T7020
KX-T7030
Continued
9-G-1
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

OHCA Circuit No No : without OHCA circuit 4-C-5.05

Yes : with OHCA circuit 4-G-11.00

Primary Directory Number 100~: for each Three or four digit extension number 4-B-3.01
extension number
in physical
number order

Intercom Number blank One or two digit intercom number 3-B-7.01

blank : no intercom number 4-B-3.03
4-C-5.02
to 5.05

Station Name blank A maximum of ten digits using letters and/or 4-A-4.06
numbers 11-C-5.00

ICM Group 1 1 to 8 : intercom group number 3-B-7.01

4-C-5.02
to 5.05

Pickup Group None Type (select input) 3-B-7.02

None : when not in a pickup group 4-D-3.00
pckup : when in a pickup group 5-B-1.00
No. 6-C-8.00
01 to 32 : pickup group number when
“Pickup” is selected

Next Hunt Station None Type (select input) 3.D-5.01

None : no setting “Next Hunt Station” to 5.02
EXT : Next Hunt Station
No.
Three or four digits : extension directory
number when setting
“Next Hunt Station”

Class of Service 01 : for DN 100 01 to 32: COS number 3-B-6.00

02 : for the others

Data Line Security No Yes : Data Line Security mode is available 4-I-6.00
No : Data Line Security mode is unavailable 5-G-4.00
(normal mode only)

Automatic Callback-Trunk Yes Yes : Automatic Callback-Trunk is available 4-C-6.01

No : Automatic Callback-Trunk is 5-A-4.01
unavailable

Parallel Connect No Yes : Parallel Connection is available 2-C-4.00

No : Parallel Connection is not available 3-F-9.00

Message Waiting None None : The KX-T7051 can not receive the 5-G-6.00
Indication message waiting indication
Lamp : The KX-T7051 can receive the message
waiting indication

9-G-2
(30393)
Description of Assigning Items
Telephone Type Selects the telephone type to be connected.

Model Selects the model number when PITS is set as the telephone type in the
above item.

OHCA Circuit Determines whether the selected phone supports OHCA or not.

Primary Directory Number When a “DN” is assigned in the Configuration-DN Assignment screen,
the PDN (Primary Directory Number) is assigned automatically. It is
possible to select a new PDN provided it matches the numbering plan
and there is no conflict.

Intercom Number Assigns an intercom number. This field is optional.

Station Name Assigns the station name of the extension. This is displayed on the CRT
display of Attendant Console and display of PITS telephone (if provided).

ICM Group Assigns the intercom group number of the extension.

Pickup Group Assigns the pickup group number of the extension. This item is optional.

Next Hunt Station Assigns the next hunting destination in the hunting sequence. This item
is optional.

Class of Service Assigns the COS (Class of Service) level for the extension.

Data Line Security Assigns whether “Data Line Security mode” is available or not.
When set to “No,” setting “Data Line Security mode” by dialing the
feature number is impossible.

Automatic Callback-Trunk Assigns whether the Automatic Callback-Trunk feature is available or

not.

Parallel Connect Assigns whether the Parallel connection of PITS and SLT is available or
not.

Message Waiting Indication Assigns whether a Single Line Telephone with MESSAGE lamp can
receive the message waiting indication or not.
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected from Extension-submenu screen if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assign-
ment does not have any of extension cards (PLC, SLC, HLC, OPX) programmed or if “System-Configura-
tion”, DN Assignment does not have the extension number programmed.

If PITS telephone KX-T123230D is connected, select KX-T123235 (7130) for PITS Model. PITS KX-
T123230D is functionally equivalent to KX-T123235 and KX-T7130.

If PITS telephone KX-T7130 is connected, select KX-T123235 (7130) for PITS Model.

If PITS telephone KX-T7320 is connected, select KX-T7020 for PITS Model.

If PITS telephone KX-T7330 is connected, select KX-T7030 for PITS Model.

If PITS telephone KX-T7350 is connected, select KX-T7050 for PITS Model.

9-G-3
(70695)
Telephone Type Assignable telephone types differ depending on the card types connected
to the extensions, as follows:

Card Type Telephone Type Assignable

PLC PITS
SLC SLT
HLC PITS or SLT
OPX OPX

If “SLT” or “OPX” is selected, “—” will appear in the following items in

“Extension-Station (1/3)” screen and setting is impossible:
• Model
• OHCA Circuit
• Intercom Number
• Parallel Connect
OHCA Circuit This setting applies not to executing side but to receiving side.

Intercom Number Intercom numbers can be one or two digits.

Within an intercom group, if one digit intercom number is assigned, it is
prohibited to use the digit as the leading digit of another two-digit intercom
number.
For instance, if the digit “2” is assigned as an intercom number, the digits
“20” cannot be assigned as another intercom number in the same intercom
group.

Next Hunt It is impossible to store the extension number of the setting extension, as well
Station as the extension numbers assigned by other extensions as to be their Next
Hunt Station.

Parallel Connect Parallel Connection with SLT is available only when PITS telephone
interfaced with HLC card is selected.
If PITS telephone interfaced with PLC card is selected, “ - ” will appear in
Parallel Connect field and parallel connect assignment is not available.

Message Waiting Indication The setting of “Lamp” is valid only when the extension is an SLT with
MESSAGE lamp which is interfaced with the KX-T96175 (SLC card with
Message Waiting).

If an extension card other than the KX-T96175 is installed, “—” appears

and this item cannot be assigned.

Note:
Be sure to select “None” for this setting if an SLT without MESSAGE lamp
is interfaced with the KX-T96175.

When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Station Station Station Station

Equipment Equipment Equipment ------ Equipment
No. 1 (1/3) No. 1 (2/3) No. 1 (3/3) No. n (3/3)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-G-4
(30393)
Conditions for Assigning the MESSAGE button

• KX-T1232XX series PITS’s:

The MESSAGE button cannot be assigned, for
these PITS’s are already provided with the
MESSAGE button.

• KX-T616XX series PITS’s:

Assignable to the DN-06 button only.

DN-06 button

ICM button

• KX-T30820, KX-T30850
Assignable to the DN-03 button only.

DN-03 button

ICM button

• KX-T30830
Assignable to the DSS 8 button only.

DSS 8 button
•
•
•
•
•
•
ICM button

9-G-5
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 AUTO CNF 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ and AUTO CNF keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I
“Operation of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

AUTO CONF>Automatic Configuration OK? (Y: yes/N: no)=

F7 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-G-6
1.02 Station (2/3)

Summary
Assigns DN buttons when “Telephone Type” is (Password level : Three or higher)
set to “PITS” in the Extension-Station (1/3)
screen.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DN-(01 to 12) 3-D-2.07

Type PDN for PDN : Primary Directory Number button to 2.09
DN-01 SDN : Secondary Directory Number button 4-B-2.00
blank for the PRV-CO : Private CO button 4-B-3.00
4-C-3.04
others OHCA : Off Hook Call Announcement button
4-C-4.01
MW : Message Waiting button 4-D-8.00
LOGIN : UCD Log In button 4-E-5.01
ALARM : Local Alarm button 4-E-5.02
SINGLE CO: Single CO button 4-E-6.00
GROUP CO: Group CO button 4-F-1.04
CONF : Conference button 4-G-2.00
DSS (DN) : Direct Station Selection (DN) button 4-G-3.00
DSS (ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-G-9.00
(cont.)
ONETOUCH: One Touch button
PRV-CHG : Privacy Change button
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button
9-G-7 Continued
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DN-(01 to 12) (cont.) (cont.)

Type CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-G-12.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-I-8.00
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 14-D-1.05
SPLIT : Call Split button
FWD/DND : FWD/DND button
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button
SNR : Saved Number Redial button

Number blank Three or four digits : directory number for “PDN,” 3-B-7.01
“SDN”, “DSS (DN)” 3-D-2.07
1011 to 3158 : physical number for “PRV-CO,” to 2.09
“Single CO” 4-B-3.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)” 4-B-3.02
4-B-3.04
01 to 16 : trunk group number for “Group
to 3.06
CO” 4-C-3.04
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for 4-C-4.01
“ONETOUCH”

SDN COS blank Station : using COS of own extension 4-B-3.02

DN : using COS of PDN

Day Ring blank No ring : with lamp only, not ringing 3-B-10.00
Instantly : instantly ringing 3-D-3.01
Delayed 1 : delayed 1 ring to 3.02
Delayed 3 : delayed 3 rings
Delayed 6 : delayed 6 rings

Night Ring blank Same as “Day Ring”

9-G-8
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
DN-(01 to 12)
Type Assigns the use of the DN buttons. The DN-01 button is fixed to PDN and cannot
be changed or deleted.

Number Assigns the number for each DN button which is preset to “PDN,” “SDN,” “PRV-
CO,” “DSS (DN),” “DSS (ICM),” “Group CO” or “ONETOUCH”

SDN COS Assigns whether the COS of the SDN button is that of the extension (PDN-Primary
Directory Number) or the COS of the SDN (Secondary Directory Number)
extension.

Day Ring Assigns whether incoming calls have immediate or delayed ringing on PDN, SDN,
SCO or GCO buttons in Day mode. The ringing assignment of the first PDN can
also be changed with this option.

Night Ring Assign similarly as the above item except this applied in Night mode.

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “Extension-Station (1/3)”, Telephone Type is set
to “SLT” or “OPX.”

Some items cannot be programmed depending on the setting of “Extension-Station

(1/3)”, Model. They are indicated by “—.”

Assignable items are DN buttons of the programmed model. For example, if KX-
T30830 is programmed as the model, assignable items will be as follows:

<Example>

Automatic
setting
Programmable
items

Not program-
mable items

9-G-9
The DN-01 through 03 buttons are assigned as the PDN buttons automatically.
The DN-01 button is fixed to a PDN button and cannot be changed to another
assignable feature button.
The PDN buttons assigned to the DN-02 and 03 buttons can be changed to an-
other assignable feature button and vice versa.
When two or three PDN buttons are used, they must be arranged consecutively.

For example, it is not possible to program as follows:

DN-03
PDN SDN PDN
PDN
DN-02
DN-3 DN-2 DN-1
SDN
DN-01
PDN
ICM (DN buttons on PITS 7000 series)

(DN buttons on PITS type 20, 30 and 50)

Type If “PRV-CO” (Private CO) is selected, a physical number of the selected

CO line must be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
Group.
The trunk group where the CO line belongs must have “Group-Trunk
Group”, Type assigned to “PVL” (Private Line).

If “Single CO” is selected, a physical number of the selected CO line must

be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
Group. The trunk group of the CO line must have “Group-Trunk Group”,
Type assigned to “DDD” or “FEX” or “WATS”, or “PBX.”

If “Group CO” is selected, a trunk group number of the selected trunk

group must be programmed in “Number.”
The programmed trunk group must have “Group-Trunk Group”, Type
assigned to “DDD” or “FEX” or “WATS” or “PBX.”

To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-Station (1/3)”
screen.

9-G-10
(30393)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-G-11
1.03 Station (3/3)

Summary
Assigns PF (Programmable Feature) buttons and
DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons (model
KX-T30830 only) when “Telephone Type” is
preset to “PITS” in the Extension-Station (1/3)
screen.
This screen does not appear when “Telephone
Type” is preset to any other type.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

PF Key (01 to 16) 4-B-2.00

Type blank DSS (ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-C-4.01
ONETOUCH : one touch button 4-C-4.05
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-D-6.00
CALL PAR : Call Park system button 4-E-5.01
4-E-5.02
CALL STA : Call Park station button
4-E-6.00
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 4-F-1.04
FWD / DND : FWD/DND button 4-F-2.01
SPLIT : Call Split button to 2.05
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button 4-G-9.00
SNR : Saved Number Redial button 4-G-12.00

Number blank Maximum 16 digits: destination number for 3-B-7.01

“ONETOUCH” 4-C-4.01
One or two digits: intercom number for “DSS(ICM)”
Continued
9-G-12
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DSS Key ( 1 to 8) 4-B-2.00

Type blank MW : Message Waiting button 4-C-4.01
LOGIN : UCD Log In button 4-D-8.00
ALARM : Local Alarm button 4-E-5.01
DSS(DN) : Direct Station Selection(DN) button 4-E-5.02
4-E-6.00
DSS(ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button
4-F-1.04
ONETOUCH : One Touch button 4-G-2.00
PRV-CHG : Privacy Change button 4-G-3.00
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-G-9.00
CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-G-12.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-I-8.00
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 14-D-1.05
SPLIT : Call Split button
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button
blank : not assigned

Number blank Three or four digits: directory number for “DSS(DN)” 3-B-7.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)” 4-C-4.01
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for
“ONETOUCH”

Description of Assigning Items

PF Key (01 to 16)
Type Assigns the type of the programmable feature buttons.

Number Assigns the number for individual PF button which is preset to “ONE
TOUCH” or “DSS (ICM)” .

DSS Key (1 to 8 )
Type Assigns the type of the DSS buttons.

Number Assign the number for each DSS button which is preset to “ONETOUCH,”
“DSS (DN),” or “DSS (ICM)”.

9-G-13
Conditions
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-Station (2/3)”
screen.

Only the PF3 button on PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 can be programmed to the
FWD/DND button.

Only the PF1 button on PITS type 50, KX-T7020 and KX-T7030 can be
programmed to the SNR button.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-G-14
2.00 DSS Console
2.01 DSS Console (1/3)

Summary
This is the first screen of Extension-DSS Console There are 16 screens provided for DSS
which assigns parameters and PF (Program- Console, each of which has three screens.
mable Feature) buttons on DSS consoles. (Password level : Three or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Model KX-T123240 KX-T123240 (7040) 1-B-2.00

(7040) KX-T61640 4-I-12.00

Pair Extension blank Three or four digits : directory number

PF Key (01 to 16) 4-C-4.01

Type blank ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-E-5.01
DSS (ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-E-5.02
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-E-6.00
CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-F-1.04
4-G-9.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button
4-G-12.00
RNG TRN : Ringing Transfer button
SPLIT : Call Split button
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button
blank : not assigned
Continued
9-G-15
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

PF key (01 to 16) (cont.) 3-B-7.01

Number blank One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)” 4-C-4.01
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for
“ONETOUCH”

9-G-16
Description of Assigning Items
Model Assigns the type of DSS console used.

Pair Extension Assigns the DSS Console and paired extension's directory number.
A DSS Console does not work without this assignment.

PF key (01 to 16)

Type Assigns the type of each of the programmable feature buttons.

Number When presetting each PF button to “ONETOUCH” or “DSS (ICM),” set the
number .
This assignment is not necessary when the PF key type is preset to any
other types than “ONETOUCH” or “DSS (ICM)” and “ ” appears in the
setting field.

Conditions
This screen is not displayed, if no DSS console is connected to the system.
When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Station Station Station Station

Equipment Equipment Equipment ------ Equipment
No. 1 (1/3) No. 1 (2/3) No. 1 (3/3) No. n (3/3)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ and AUTO CNF keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I
“Operation of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

AUTO CNF>Automatic Configuration OK? (Y:yes/N:no)=

F7 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-G-17
2.02 DSS Console (2/3)

Summary
This is the second screen of Extension-DSS Console.
Console used to assign DSS (Direct Station (Password level : Three or higher)
Selection) buttons from 01 to 16 on the DSS

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DSS Key ( 01 to 16) 4-B-2.00

Type blank MW : Message Waiting button 4-C-4.01
LOGIN : UCD Log In button 4-D-8.00
ALARM : Local Alarm button 4-E-5.01
4-E-5.02
DSS(DN) : Direct Station Selection(DN) button
4-E-6.00
DSS(ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button
4-F-1.04
ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-G-2.00
PRV-CHG : Privacy Change button 4-G-3.00
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-G-9.00
CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-G-12.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-I-8.00
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 14-D-1.05
SPLIT : Call Split button
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button
blank : not assigned
Continued
9-G-18
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DSS Key (01 to 16) (cont.) 3-B-7.01

Number blank Three or four digits : directory number for “DSS(DN)” 4-C-4.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)”
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for
“ONETOUCH”

9-G-19
Description of Assigning Items
DSS Key (01 to 16)
Type Assigns the type for each of the DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons.

Number Used to set the number for each DSS button programmed to “ONETOUCH,”
“DSS (DN)” or “DSS (ICM).”

Conditions
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-DSS Console (1/3)”
screen.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-G-20
2.03 DSS Console (3/3)

Summary
The third screen of the Extension-DSS Console (Password level : Three or higher)
is used to assign DSS (Direct Station Selection)
buttons from 17 to 32 on the DSS Console.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DSS Key ( 17 to 32) 4-B-2.00

Type blank MW : Message Waiting button 4-C-4.01
LOGIN : UCD Log In button 4-D-8.00
ALARM : Local Alarm button 4-E-5.01
DSS(DN) : Direct Station Selection (DN) button 4-E-5.02
4-E-6.00
DSS(ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button
4-F-1.04
ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-G-2.00
PRVT-CHG : Privacy Change button 4-G-3.00
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-G-9.00
CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-G-12.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-I-8.00
RNG TRN : Ringing Transfer button 14-D-1.05
SPLIT : Call Split button
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button
blank : not assigned
Continued
9-G-21
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DSS Key (17 to 32) (cont.) 3-B-7.01

Number blank Three or four digits : directory number for “DSS(DN)” 4-C-4.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)”
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for
“ONETOUCH”

9-G-22
Description of Assigning Items
Type Assigns the type for each of the DSS (Direct Station Selection) button.

Number Used to set the number for each DSS button programmed to “ONETOUCH,”
“DSS (DN)” or “DSS (ICM)”

Conditions
This screen does not appear if “Model” is assigned to “KX-T61640” in the
Extension-DSS Console (1/3) screen.
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-
DSS Console (2/3)” screen.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DN xxxx)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DN xxxx)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-G-23
3.00 Doorphone

Summary
Assigns parameters for each doorphone.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Doorphone No. (1 to 4) 4-G-7.00

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 5-E-2.00
2 : tenant 2 6-H-4.00

Open Duration 0 1 to 10 : door opening duration in second

0 : Door cannot be opened.

Doorphone Call Assignment

Type ATT : for Call destination
“with ATLC” ICM : intercom group
EXT 100 : for PICKUP: pickup group
“without ATLC" ATT : Attendant Console
EXT : extension
blank : not assigned

Continued

9-G-24
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Doorphone Call Assignment

(cont.)
No. 1 to 8 : Intercom group number for “ICM”
01 to 32 : pickup group number for “PICKUP”
1 or 2 : Attendant console 1 or 2
Three or four digits : directory number for “EXT”

9-G-25
Description of Assigning Items
Doorphone No. (1 to 4)
Tenant Assigns the tenant number which the doorphone belongs to.

Open Duration Assigns the door opening duration (seconds).

Doorphone call Assignment

Type Assigns the destination for incoming calls from doorphones.

No. Assign group number or directory number when type of call placing is set
to “ICM,” “PICKUP” or “EXT”. Assign the console number when the
destination of the doorphone call is the Attendant Console.

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment has no
“DPH” card programmed.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are described in
Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-G-26
4.00 Attendant Console
4.01 Attendant Console (1/2)

Summary
The first screen of Extension-Attendant Console is (Password level :Two or higher)
used to assign parameters for the Attendant
Consoles. The screen consists of two subscreens.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

ATT 1 & ATT 2 3-B-3.00

DN blank Three or four digits of numbers : Floating DN
blank : not assigned

TRS LV 01 01 to 16 : toll restriction level 3-C-1.00

PAG E1&E2 INT : Paging All Extensions 6-I-1.05

E1 : Paging External Pager 1
E2 : Paging External Pager 2
E1&E2 : Paging External Pagers 1 and 2
ALL : Paging All Extensions and External
Pagers
Continued

9-G-27
 Continued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Alt Position 6-G-2.00

Tenant 1 & Tenant 2 blank Three or four digit numbers : extension directory
Overflow number
blank : no destination

Night blank Three or four digit numbers : extension directory 3-B-8.00

number
blank : no destination

Busy-Out Extension blank Three or four digit numbers : extension directory 6-A-1.00
number
blank : no destination

9-G-28
Description of Assigning Items
DN Assigns the Floating DN of the Attendant Console. This is used to call the
Attendant directly.

TRS LV Assigns the toll restriction level for the Attendant Console.

PAG Assigns the available Paging types for the Attendant Console. This can
be set to internal, external or all.
The types of External Paging are limited to those preset to “Yes” in the
System-Operation (1/3) screen. If Paging External Pagers 1 and 2 are
both preset to “ No” in the screen, “—” appears on this item.

Overflow Assigns the destination of Overflow calls in the Day mode. Overflow
occurs when all the loop keys are active, another call arrives and one of
the calls has exceeded the time allowed for overflow. The calls are
queued at the overflow destination as well as the console.

Night Assigns the destination of the attendant-seeking calls (DPH, DID, DISA,
Extension) in the Night mode.

Busy-Out Extension Assigns the destination of incoming calls, if the trunk group's call destina-
tion is programmed to Attendant Console but the Attendant Console is in
Busy Out status (ATT-FWD switch on the attendant console is set to ON).

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment has
no “ATLC” card programmed.

Tenant “—” will be displayed if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to “No.”

When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Attendant Attendant
Console Console
(1/2) (2/2)

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are described
in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-G-29
4.02 Attendant Console (2/2)

Summary
Assigns the priority to incoming calls when the screen of Extension-Attendant Console
ANSWER key is used at the Attendant Console. (Password level : Two or higher )
Assignment is performed through the second

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Internal Calling Station 6-E-1.00

Internal Calling Doorphone

Console Calling

Transfer Recall 01 01 to 24 : Priority

Serial Calling Recall

Call Park Recall

Intercept Routing

Continued

9-G-30
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Held Call Reminder 6-E-1.00

01 01 to 24 : Priority
External Calling
( TG 01 to TG 16 )

9-G-31
Description of Assigning Items
Internal Calling Station

Internal Calling Doorphone

Console Calling

Transfer Recall
Assigns the call priority level for each of the 24 items.
Serial Calling Recall “01” is the highest level, “24” is the lowest level.
Call Park Recall It is permissible to assign the same level to multiple items. In this case
calls are processed in FIFO (First In First Out) order.
Intercept Routing

Held Call Reminder

External Calling
( TG 01 to TG 16 )

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment has no
“ATLC” card programmed.

Held Call Reminder Regardless of this program, Held Call Reminder will not
function if “System-Operation”, Held Call Reminder is not
programmed to “Yes.”

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are described
in Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-G-32
H. Special Carrier Access Screen (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

1.00 Equal Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Summary
Assigns available trunk groups and parameters number from 1 to 4.
necessary for making Equal Access calls. (Password level : Two or higher)
Four screens are provided for Equal Access

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Service No Yes : Equal Access is available 3-C-1.04

No : Equal Access is unavailable 4-C-3.03
5-A-1.03
Name blank letters, numbers, marks within three digits 6-D-1.03
blank: not assigning

Equal Access Carrier Code blank three or tour digits number

Toll Restriction Level blank 01 to 16

Toll Restriction Table blank 1 to 8: Area/ Office Code table number

Continued

9-H-1
(60395)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Digit Modification 3-C-1.04

Long Distance 4-C-3.03
Local Toll 5-A-1.03
Local 6-D-1.03
(Delete) blank 1 to 4 : digits to be deleted
0 : deleting no digits

(Insert) blank maximum four digit number : dialing number

to be inserted

Trunk Group (01 to 16) blank Yes : calling is available

No : calling is unavailable

9-H-2
Description of Assigning Items
Service Assigns whether Equal Access is available or not.
If set to “No,” “—” appear in all the setting fields of this screen, and
setting is impossible.

Name Assigns the Carrier’s name to be used in making Equal Access calls.

Equal Access Carrier Code Assigns the Carrier code for making Equal Access calls.

Toll Restriction Level Assigns the toll restriction level on Special Carrier Access used for
Toll Restriction.

Toll Restriction Table Assigns the Area/ Office Code table number used for Toll Restriction.

Digit Modification
Long Distance
Local Toll
Local
(Delete) Assigns the number of leading digits to be deleted.

(Insert) Assigns the number to be inserted which follows the Carrier code.

Trunk group (01 to 16) Assigns the available trunk groups for making Equal Access calls.

Conditions
Service If “No” is selected, all the assigning items below this display “—” and
setting is impossible.

If “No” is assigned, it is possible to program “System-Class of

Service”, Special Carrier Access. However, Equal Access of the
screen which has “No” assigned will not be active.

It is administrable to activate or deactivate the EQU access and/or

OCC access features on a system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2(WS2)” for further
information.

Digit Modification When making a long distance call using Equal Access function, the
dialed number will be modified as the following example.

<Example>
Programmings are:
Equal Access Carrier Code : 2222
Digit Modification
Long Distance (Delete) : 1
(Insert) : blank

Dialed number is:

1 201 123 4567

9-H-3
(50195)
 Modification procedures are:
(1) Deletes the initial digit.
201 123 4567
(2) Inserts no digit.
201 123 4567
(3) The final digits to be sent to trunk are
101 2222 201 123 4567

[Note] Above example is based on a New Dialing Plan.

Refer to Section 10-C-63.00 “Equal Access Code (EQC)” for
further information.

When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Equal Equal Equal Equal

Access Access Access Access
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-H-4
(50195)
2.00 OCC Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Summary
Assigns available trunk groups and parame- Four screens are provided for OCC Access
ters necessary for making OCC (Other numbers from 1 to 4.
Common Carrier) Access calls. (Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Service No Yes : OCC Access is available 4-C-3.03

No : OCC Access is unavailable 5-A-1.03
6-D-1.03
Name blank three digit letters, numbers or marks
blank: not assigned

Local Access Code blank maximum eight digit numbers

Toll Restriction Level blank 01 to 16 3-C-1.04

Toll Restriction Table blank 1 to 8: Area/ Office Code table number 3-C-1.04

Continued

9-H-5
(60395)
 Continued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Digit Modification 4-C-3.03

Long Distance, 5-A-1.03
Local Toll, 6-D-1.03
Local
(Delete) blank 1 to 15: number of digits to be deleted
0 : no digit deletion

(Insert) blank maximum of 20 digits consisting of numbers

, * , # and marks below :
H : Home position
P : Pause
D : Switch to DTMF
[ : start of secret number
] : end of secret number
(enter secret marks in a pair)
- : Hyphen
3-C-1.03
Trunk Group (01 to 16) blank Yes : calling is available 4-C-3.03
No : calling is unavailable 5-A-1.03
6-D-1.03

9-H-6
(60395)
Description of Assigning Items
Service Assigns whether OCC Access is available or not.

Name Assigns the Carrier’s name to be used in making OCC calls.

Local Access Code Assigns the Carrier code for making OCC Access calls.

Toll Restriction Level Assigns the Toll Restriction level for special Carrier Access which is
used for Toll Restriction.

Toll Restriction Table Assigns the Area /Office Code table number used for Toll Restriction

Digit Modification
Long Distance
Local Toll
Local
(Delete) Assigns the number of leading digits to be deleted.

(Insert) Assigns the number to be inserted, which follows the Carrier code.

Trunk group (01 to 16) Assigns the available trunk groups for making OCC Access calls.

Conditions
Service If set to “No,” all the assigning items below display “—” and setting is
impossible.

If set to “No,” it is possible to program “System-Class of Service”, Special

Carrier Access. However, OCC Access of the screen which has “No”
assigned will not be active.

Digit Modification When making a call using OCC Access function, the dialed number will be
modified as the following example.

<Example 1>
Programmings are:
Local Access Code: 9501001
Digit Modification
Long Distance (Delete): 1
(Insert) : P123456 PH

Dialed number is :
1 201 123 4567

Modification procedures are :

(1) Deletes the initial digit.
201 123 4567
(2) Inserts the dial programmed.
P123456 P 201 123 4567
(3) The final digits to be sent to trunk are:
9501001 P P 123456 P 201 123 4567

Automatically added.

9-H-7
(60395)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-H-8
(60395)
I. Toll Restriction Screen (for U.S.A. and Canada)

1.00 Area/Office Code Tables (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Summary
Assigns local call control, toll restriction level and Table numbers from 1 to 8.
office code table number for area or office codes. (Password level : Two or higher)
Eight screens are provided for Area/Office Code

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

AL 16: for 411, 800, 01 to 16 : toll restriction level for area code 3-C-1.06
911, NNX
01: for NPX
except the
above codes

OL 16 01 to 16 : toll restriction level for office code

OC blank Office Code table number

blank : for 3 digits Toll Restriction
01 to 64 : for 6 digits Toll Restriction

L N Y: Area Code for 10 digits local call

N: Not 10 digits local call
This setting effective when dialing plan type-D is
adopted.

9-I-1
(60395)
Description of Assigning Items
AL Assigns toll restriction level for Area Code.
This setting does not restrict the extension user when AL ≤ TRLE
(toll restriction level of each extension).
When “411” or “911” is dialed, it will be checked against the restriction level in “AL”
field.

OL Assigns toll restriction level for Office Code.

This setting does not restrict the extension user when OL ≤ TRLE (toll restriction
level of each extension)

OC Office Code table number

blank : Call is restricted if TRLE<AL
0 to 64 : Office Code table number, for 6 Digits Toll Restriction. If the office code
dialed is found in the office code table, the call proceeds to 7/10 digit toll restriction.
If it is not then the call is restricted.

L Y: The leading 3 digits of the dialed number is checked against the restriction level
in “AL” field.
N: The leading 3 digits of the dialed number is checked against the restriction level
in “OL” field.

Conditions
When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:

Area/Office Area/Office Area/Office Area/Office

Code Table Code Table Code Table ------ Code Table
No.1 No.1 No.1 No.8
Entry 200 Entry 250 Entry 300 Entry 950

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-I-2
(50195)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (1-8)= , Entry (200-999)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

F3 :
1 TABLE 2 ENTRY 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

Copying all the tables

Press F1 (TABLE)

COPY > Table No. (1-8)= Table No.= —

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

Copying an entry
within the table

Press F2 (Entry)

COPY > Entry No. (200-999)= Entry No.= —

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-I-3
2.00 Office Code Tables (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Summary
Assigns the office codes which are restricted and
which are allowed to proceed to the 7/10 digit
restriction check.
64 screens are provided for Office Code Table
numbers from 01 to 64, each of which consists of
four screens.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Hundred Office Code blank blank : restricts 3-C-1.06

00 to 99: allowable number for outgoing calls

Description of Assigning Items

Hundred Office Code Assigns office codes to be admitted for 6 Digits Toll Restriction.
blank :Call denied based on office code dialed.

9-I-4
(60395)
Conditions
Pressing the NEXT button changes this screen as follows:

Office Code Office Code Office Code Office Code

Table Table Table ------ Table
No. =01 (1/4) No. =01 (2/4) No. =01 (3/4) No. =64 (4/4)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:

cursor

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Office Code Table No.(01-64)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Table No. (01-64) Table No. —

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

SET> Set Office Code No. (200-999) (Y: yes / N: no)

F8 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-I-5
(60395)
3.00 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Summary
Assigns 10 Digit Toll Restriction when the call is (Password level : Two or higher)
a long distance call, and assigns 7 Digit Toll
Restriction when the call is a local call.

Assigning Item Default Selection of Value Reference

ENT. (Entry) 3-C-1.07

Number (01 to 64) blank The last seven digits of the dialed number
blank : not assigned

Description of Assigning Items

ENT. (Entry)
Number (01 to 64) Assigns the office code and subscriber number to be checked by toll
restriction.

9-I-6
(60395)
Conditions
None

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-I-7
(60395)
I. Toll Restriction Screen (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

4.00 7-Digit Toll Restriction Table

Summary
Assigns 3 through 7-digit numbers to
prevent extension users from making
outgoing CO calls.
(Password level : Two or higher)
[Software Version 15.XX or higher]
3 through 7-digit number can be assigned.
[Others]
3-digit number can be assigned.

Assigning Item Default Selection of Value Reference

ENT. (Entry) 3-C-1.10

Number (01 to 64) blank 3 through 7-digit number
blank : not assigned

Description of Assigning Items

ENT. (Entry)
Number (01 to 64) Assigns the first 3 through 7 digits of the dialed number to be checked by
toll restriction. Three characters “N (2 to 9),” “P (0,1)” and X (0 to 9)” can be
specified as a wild card character.

9-I-8 (X)
(70695)
In the table on the previous page, each unit of four entry numbers corresponds with toll
restriction levels 01 to 16 respectively as follows.

Entry Number Registered Toll Restriction

Digits Level
01 653
02 555X 1
03
04
05
06 2
07
08

13
14 4
15
16 219XX

61 587XXXX
62 16
63
64

Conditions
None

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-I-9 (X)
(70695)(E)
J. Automatic Route Selection Screen (for U.S.A. and Canada)

1.00 Leading Digit Table (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Summary
Assigns the route plan table number for the call (Password level : Two or higher)
according to the Area Code (AC) or Office Code
(OC) dialed respectively.
16 screens are provided for Leading Digit Table.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

AC blank blank : not using area code 3-C-2.01

01 to 32 : route plan table number

OC blank blank : not using office code

01 to 32 : route plan table number

9-J-1
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
AC ( Area code ) When the leading digits represent an Area code, this field assigns the
Route Plan table number.
When not dialing an Area code, leave “blank.”
Also if the numbering plan is Type C, assign the Area code even
if the leading digits represent a Local Toll dial.

OC ( Office code ) When the leading digits represent an Office code, this field assigns the
Route Plan table number.
When not using the Office code, leave “blank .”

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT button changes this screen as follows:

Entry Entry Entry Entry

200 250 300 ------ 950

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Leading Digit Table Entry (200-999)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Entry No. (200-999) Entry No. —

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-2
(60395)
2.00 Office Code Tables (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Summary
Assigns all office codes used in each area code numbers from 01 to 32, each of which consists of
in every hundred unit. four screens.
32 screens are provided for Office Code Table (Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Hundred Office Code blank blank : not using office code table 3-C-2.01
00 to 99 : office code

Area Code blank blank : not assigning area code

200 to 999: area code

Route Plan Table No. 01 01 to 32 : route plan table number

9-J-3
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Hundred Office Code Assigns all office codes corresponding to the area code.

Area Code Assigns the area code.

Route Plan Table No. Assigns route plan table number.

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Office Code Office Code Office Code Office Code

Table Table Table ------ Table
No. 01 (1/4) No. 01 (2/4) No. 01 (3/4) No. 64 (4/4)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:

cursor
To move the cursor to “Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32),” use the
key when the cursor is located in “Area Code.”

cursor
9-J-4
(60395)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8 SET

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Office Code Table No.(01-32)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Table No. (01-32) Table No. —

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

SET> Table No. (01-32)

F8 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-5
(60395)
3.00 Route Plan Tables (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Summary
Sets route plan tables by assigning time zones 32 screens are provided for Route Plan Table
and route list numbers applied to each time zone numbers from 01 to 32.
of each day of the week. (Password level: Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Start Hour 3-C-2.01

Hour blank 01 to 12: hour

AM/PM blank AM/PM : a.m./p.m.

Route List Number (01 to 64)

MON.
TUE.
WED. blank 01 to 64: route list number
THU.
FRI.
SAT.
SUN.

9-J-6
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Start Hour
Hour Assigns starting time of applied Route List.
When assigning “Hour,” enter each item without leaving any “blank.”

AM/PM Assigns a.m. or p.m. of the starting time.

Route list number(MON)

Route list number(TUE)

Route list number(WED)

Assigns Route List number.
Route list number(THU) Be sure to assign Route List number for each specified “Hour,” without
leaving any “blank.”
Route list number(FRI)

Route list number(SAT)

Route list number(SUN)

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Route Plan Route Plan Route Plan Route Plan

Table Table Table ------ Table
No. 01 No. 02 No. 03 No. 32

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-J-7
(60395)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX, COPY and READ keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I
“Operation of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Route Plan Table No. (01-32)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Table No. (01-32) Table No. —

F3 :
1 TABLE 2 ENTRY 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ> Table No. (01-32)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-8
(60395)
4.00 Route Lists Table (for U.S.A. and Canada)

01 01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01

Summary
Assigns trunk groups in order of economical (Password level: Two or higher).
priority (1 to 4) and parameters on each priority.
The screen consists of six screens.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Priority 1 3-C-2.01
TG blank blank : ARS not in use
01 to 16: real trunk

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

Priority 2
WT blank blank : priority 2 not being used
Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone

ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level

Continued
9-J-9
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Priority 2 3-C-2.00
TG blank blank : priority 2 not being used
01 to 16: trunk group number

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

Priority 3
WT blank blank : priority 3 not being used
Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone

ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level

TG blank blank : priority 3 not being used

01 to 16: trunk group number

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

Priority 4
WT blank blank : priority 4 not being used
Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone

ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level

TG blank blank : priority 4 not being used

01 to 16: trunk group number

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

9-J-10
(50195)
Description of Assigning Items

Priority 1
TG Assigns the most economical trunk group number.
MOD Assigns modified digit table number to modify the digits to suitable ones for the
preset trunk group.

Priority 2
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the secondary
economical trunk group.
ALV Assigns restriction level of the secondary economical trunk group number.
TG Assigns the secondary economical trunk group number.
MOD Assigns modified digit table number for modifying the digits suitable ones for
secondary economical trunk.

Priority 3
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the third economical
trunk group.
ALV Assigns the thirdly economical trunk group.
TG Assigns the thirdly economical trunk group.
MOD Assigns the modified digit table number for making the most suitable digits for the
thirdly economical trunk group.

Priority 4
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the fourth economical
trunk group.
ALV Assigns the restriction level of the fourth economical trunk group.
TG Assigns the fourth economical trunk group.
MOD Assigns the modified digit table number for making the most suitable digits for the
fourth economical trunk group.

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Route Lists Route Lists Route Lists Route Lists

------
Table (1/6) Table (2/6) Table (3/6) Table (6/6)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-J-11
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Route List Table No. (01-64)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Route List No. (01-64) Route List No. = —

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-12
5.00 Modified Digit Table (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Summary
Assigns digits to be deleted and digits to be (Password level: Two or higher)
inserted.
The screen consists of two screens.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DEL 0 0 to 9 : digit to be deleted 3-C-2.01

Digits to be Inserted blank Digits to be inserted

Maximum 26 digits consisting of numbers, ,#
and marks below :
H: Home Position
P: Pause
D: Switch to DTMF
[ : Start of secret number
] : end of secret number
(Enter [ ] in a pair)

9-J-13
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items

Del Assigns the number of the digits to be deleted from the dialed digits.

Digits to be inserted Assigns numbers and marks to be added.

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Modified Modified
Digit Table Digit Table
(1/2) (2/2)

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-J-14
(60395)
J. Automatic Route Selection Screen (for New Zealand)

6.00 Leading Digit Table (for New Zealand)

Summary
Assigns the route plan table number for the call (Password level : Two or higher)
according to the Area Code (AC) or Office Code
(OC) dialed respectively.
20 screens are provided for Leading Digit Table.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

AC blank blank : not using area code 3-C-2.02

01 to 32 : route plan table number

OC blank blank : not using office code

01 to 32 : route plan table number

9-J-15(XNZ)
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
AC ( Area code ) When the leading digits represent an Area code, this field assigns the
Route Plan table number.
When not using an Area code, leave “blank.”

OC ( Office code ) When the leading digits represent an Office code, this field assigns the
Route Plan table number.
When not using the Office code, leave “blank .”

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT button changes this screen as follows:

Entry Entry Entry Entry

000 050 100 ------ 950

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Leading Digit Table Entry (000-999)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Entry No. (000-999) Entry No. —

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-16(XNZ)
(70695)
7.00 Route Plan Tables (for New Zealand)

Summary
Sets route plan tables by assigning time zones 32 screens are provided for Route Plan Table
and route list numbers applied to each time zone numbers from 01 to 32.
of each day of the week. (Password level: Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Start Hour 3-C-2.02

Hour blank 01 to 12: hour

AM/PM blank AM/PM : a.m./p.m.

Route List Number (01 to 64)

MON.
TUE.
WED. blank 01 to 64: route list number
THU.
FRI.
SAT.
SUN.

9-J-17(XNZ)
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Start Hour
Hour Assigns starting time of applied Route List.
When assigning “Hour,” enter each item without leaving any “blank.”

AM/PM Assigns a.m. or p.m. of the starting time.

Route list number(MON)

Route list number(TUE)

Route list number(WED)

Assigns Route List number.
Route list number(THU) Be sure to assign Route List number for each specified “Hour,” without
leaving any “blank.”
Route list number(FRI)

Route list number(SAT)

Route list number(SUN)

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Route Plan Route Plan Route Plan Route Plan

Table Table Table ------ Table
No. 01 No. 02 No. 03 No. 32

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-J-18(XNZ)
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 READ 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX, COPY and READ keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I
“Operation of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Route Plan Table No. (01-32)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Table No. (01-32) Table No. —

F3 :
1 TABLE 2 ENTRY 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

READ> Table No. (01-32)=

F4 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-19(XNZ)
(70695)
8.00 Route Lists Table (for New Zealand)

01 01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01

Summary
Assigns trunk groups in order of economical (Password level: Two or higher).
priority (1 to 4) and parameters on each priority.
The screen consists of six screens.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Priority 1 3-C-2.02
TG blank blank : ARS not in use
01 to 16: real trunk

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

Priority 2
WT blank blank : priority 2 not being used
Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone

ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level

Continued
9-J-20(XNZ)
(70695)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Priority 2 3-C-2.02
TG blank blank : priority 2 not being used
01 to 16: trunk group number

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

Priority 3
WT blank blank : priority 3 not being used
Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone

ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level

TG blank blank : priority 3 not being used

01 to 16: trunk group number

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

Priority 4
WT blank blank : priority 4 not being used
Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone

ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level

TG blank blank : priority 4 not being used

01 to 16: trunk group number

MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number

9-J-21(XNZ)
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items

Priority 1
TG Assigns the most economical trunk group number.
MOD Assigns modified digit table number to modify the digits to suitable ones for the
preset trunk group.

Priority 2
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the secondary
economical trunk group.
ALV Assigns restriction level of the secondary economical trunk group number.
TG Assigns the secondary economical trunk group number.
MOD Assigns modified digit table number for modifying the digits suitable ones for
secondary economical trunk.

Priority 3
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the third economical
trunk group.
ALV Assigns the thirdly economical trunk group.
TG Assigns the thirdly economical trunk group.
MOD Assigns the modified digit table number for making the most suitable digits for the
thirdly economical trunk group.

Priority 4
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the fourth economical
trunk group.
ALV Assigns the restriction level of the fourth economical trunk group.
TG Assigns the fourth economical trunk group.
MOD Assigns the modified digit table number for making the most suitable digits for the

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Route Lists Route Lists Route Lists Route Lists

------
Table (1/6) Table (2/6) Table (3/6) Table (6/6)

Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.

9-J-22(XNZ)
(70695)
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this screen.

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 COPY 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-I “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.

INDEX> Route List Table No. (01-64)=

F2 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

COPY>Route List No. (01-64) Route List No. = —

F3 :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EXIT 8

9-J-23(XNZ)
(70695)
9.00 Modified Digit Table (for New Zealand)

Summary
Assigns digits to be deleted and digits to be (Password level: Two or higher)
inserted.
The screen consists of two screens.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DEL 0 0 to 9 : digit to be deleted 3-C-2.02

Digits to be Inserted blank Digits to be inserted

Maximum 26 digits consisting of 0-9, , #
and marks below :
P: Pause
D: Switch to DTMF
[ : Start of secret number
] : end of secret number
(Enter [ ] in a pair)

9-J-24(XNZ)
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items

Del Assigns the number of the digits to be deleted from the dialed digits.

Digits to be inserted Assigns numbers and marks to be added.

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

Modified Modified
Digit Table Digit Table
(1/2) (2/2)

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-J-25(XNZ)
(70695)
K. Special Attended Screen

1.00 DISA

Summary
Assigns parameters for effectuating DISA (Password level : Two or higher)
(Direct Inward System Access) function.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DISA No. (1 to 4) DISA : For DISA feature 3-D-2.02

For Use DISA OGM1 : For UCD-OGM 1 3-D-2.06
OGM2 : For UCD-OGM 2 3-F-4.00
W-UP : For Wake-up Call 3-F-13.00
4-I-13.00
6-J-8.00

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 3-D-2.02

2 : tenant 2

DISA Code (1 to 8)
User Code blank Four digit numbers : DISA user code 3-D-2.02
blank : not assigning

ARS Override No Yes : specifying a trunk group is available 3-D-2.02

(◆ for U.S.A. and No : specifying a trunk group is unavailable
Canada only)
Continued
9-K-1
(60395)
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

DISA Code (1 to 8) (cont.) 3-D-2.02

Toll LVL 01 01 to 16 : toll restriction level

Forced No Yes : forced 3-D-2.02

No : option

Prolong Yes Yes : prolonging duration is available 3-D-2.02

No : prolonging duration is unavailable

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 3-D-2.02

2 : tenant 2

Delayed Answer After 2 rings Immediately : immediately 3-B-10.00

After 1 ring : 1 ringing 3-D-2.02
After 2 rings : 2 ringings
After 3 rings : 3 ringings

Prolong Time 5 0 to 7 : minute 3-B-10.00

3-D-2.02

Control Code “ * ” Yes Yes : Control Code is available 3-D-2.02

No : Control Code is unavailable

Tone Detect Yes Yes : executing tone detection 3-D-2.02

No : not detecting tone

9-K-2
(60395)
Description of Assigning Items
DISA No. (1 to 4)
For use Assigns the usage of DISA cards.

Tenant Assigns Tenant number which each of the DISA cards one through four
belongs to.

DISA Code
User Code Assigns User Code required for making outgoing CO call vial DISA feature.

ARS Override Assigns whether admitting both calling by specifying a trunk group and local
trunk calling or admitting only local trunk calling.

Toll LVL Assigns toll restriction level in making outgoing calls.

Forced Assigns account code input mode in making outgoing calls.

Prolong Assigns admitting the prolonged duration of conversation between two

outside parties.

Tenant Assigns the tenant number which is able to use the User Codes.

Delayed Answer Assigns the delayed answer time (from detection of DISA arriving to
answer).

Prolong Time Assigns allowable prolonged time limit for conversation between two
outside parties.

Control Code “ * ” Assigns recalling and disconnecting operation is possible or not by using
“ * ” key.

Tone Detect Assigns whether executing tone detection during CO-CO conversation or
not.

9-K-3
(60395)
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected from “Special Attended-Submenu,” if
“Configuration-Slot Assignment” has no DISA card programmed.

Tenant Displays “—” if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to “No.”

ARS Override Displays “—” if “System-Operation”, Automatic Route Selection is set to

“No.”

Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:

cursor

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-K-4
(60395)
2.00 DID

Summary
Makes up the DID modification table for
effectuating DID (Direct Inward Dialing) function.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Table (1 to 4) 1 : for Table 1 3-D-2.03

Receive Digit 3 : for Tables 2 to 4 1 to 7 : number of receiving digit(s)

Delete Digit 0 1 to 6 : number of deleting digit(s)

0 : deleting no digit

Insert Dial No. blank Maximum three digit numbers: dialing number
to be added
blank : inserting no digit

9-K-5
Description of Assigning Items
Table 1 to 4
Receive Digits Assigns receiving dialing digits.
Digits exceeding assigned digits are omitted.

Delete Digits Assigns the leading digits to be deleted from received dialing number.

Insert Dial No. Assigns dialing number to be inserted.

Conditions
This screen cannot be selected from “Special Attended-Submenu,” if “Configuration-
Slot Assignment” has no DID card programmed.

Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:

cursor

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-K-6
3.00 UCD
3.01 UCD (1/2)

Summary
Assigns the parameters on each UCD (Uniform (Password level : Two or higher)
Call Distribution) group.
This is the first screen of two screens.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

UCD (01 to 32) 3-B-3.00

FDN blank Three or four digits : Floating Directory Number 3-D-2.05
blank : without FDN to 2.06

OFDN blank Three or four digits : Overflow DN 3-D-2.05

blank : without OFDN to 2.06

UCD (05 to 32) 3-D-2.05

OT blank 1 to 10: minute(s) ; Overflow timer to 2.06
blank : without Overflow timer

9-K-7
Description of Assigning Items
UCD (01 to 32)
FDN Assigns the pilot number of UCD groups.

OFDN Assigns the call placing destination in case of overflowing.

UCD (05 to 32)

OT Assigns the Overflow timer.
Timer starts at the beginning of calls entering into the UCD queue.

Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:

UCD (1/2) UCD (2/2)

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen. For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation
of Function Keys.”

9-K-8
(E)
3.02 UCD (2/2)

RET

Summary
Assigns the parameters on the individual UCD second screen.
(Uniform Call Distribution) group through the (Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

UCD No. (1 to 4) 3-D-2.06

UCD Time Table blank blank: stopper
1T : timer-15 seconds
2T : timer-30 seconds
3T : timer-45 seconds
4T : timer-60 seconds
01W : sending OGM (Outgoing Message) 1
(If busy, waiting until idle status)
02W : sending OGM 2
(If busy, waiting until idle status)
01S : sending OGM 1, (if busy, skipping)
02S : sending OGM 2, (if busy, skipping)
H : sending Music on Hold
TR : transferring to overflow destination
OFF : disconnecting the line
RET : returning to the first column
9-K-9
(70695)
(50193)
Description of Assigning Items
UCD No. ( 1 to 4)
UCD Time Table Assigns type of treatment for the calls arrived through UCD and placed in the
Busy queue.

Conditions
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System Attended-UCD (1/2)” screen.

Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:

cursor

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen. For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation
of Function Keys.”

9-K-10
(70695)
4.00 TIE Line Routing Table

Summary
Assigns available trunk groups and parameters necessary (Password level : Two or higher)
for making TIE calls. Three screens are provided.

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Code blank Up to three digits : 0 - 9, X (wild card) 3-F-14.00

Delete Digit 0 0 to 4 : number of deleting digit(s)

Insert Dial blank Up to four digits : dialing number to be added

Trunk Group Hunt Sequence blank 01 to 16 : trunk group number

9-K-11
(70695)
Description of Assigning Items
Up to 36 routing patterns can be programmed in this table.
This table is referenced by the system to identify the trunk route, when an extension user made a TIE call
by dialing the feature number for “TIE Trunk Access” or “Other PBX Extension number”.
A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the first three digits (except TIE trunk access
code) of the dialed number.
The sequence is used by both tenants but the trunk group will be skipped if it does not belong to the same
tenant as the caller.

Code Assigns the leading one, two or three digits of the numbers for TIE calls.
Used to determine which trunk group is used for a TIE call.

Delete Digit Assigns the number of digits to be deleted from the beginning of the
dialed digits.

Insert Dial Assigns dialing number to be added to the beginning of the dialed digits.

Trunk Group Hunt Sequence Determines the trunk group hunt sequence to be used when placing a TIE
(01 to 05) call. The sequence is used by both tenants but trunk group will be skipped
if it does not belong to the same tenant as the caller.

Conditions
By pressing the NEXT Key, TIE Line Routing Table screens change as follows.

TIE Line TIE Line TIE Line

Routing Table Routing Table Routing Table
No. 01 (1/3) No. 01 (2/3) No. 01 (3/3)

9-K-12
(70695)
L. Miscellaneous Screen

1.00 Installation Information

Summary
Assigns the customer’s name, address, telephone
number etc., of the installation point.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Customer Name blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digits None

Location blank Letters, numbers, marks within 64 digits

Phone No. blank Letters, numbers, marks within 16 digits

Modem No. blank Letters, numbers, marks within 16 digits

Customer Contact blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digits

Date of Installation blank Letters, numbers, marks within 16 digits

Unit ID blank Letters, numbers, marks within eight digits

Continued
9-L-1
 Continued

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Installers Name blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digits None

Programmers Name blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digits

Comments blank Letters, numbers, marks within 70 digits

Description of Assigning Items

None

Conditions
None

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-L-2
2.00 Power Failure Transfer Assignment

Summary
For effectuating Power Failure Transfer, assigns onto HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) Card or SLC
LCOT (Loop Start Central Office Trunk) Card or (Single Line Telephone Line Circuit) Card.
GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) Card ( Password level : Two or higher).

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference

Trunk No. ( 1 to 18 ) blank 1 : for Basic shelf 14-H-1.00

Shelf 2 : for Expansion shelf 1
3 : for Expansion shelf 2
blank : not assigning
Slot blank 01 to 12: for Basic shelf
01 to 15: for Expansion shelves 1 and 2
blank : not assigning

Extension No. ( 1 to 18 ) blank 1 : for Basic shelf

Shelf 2 : for Expansion shelf 1
3 : for Expansion shelf 2
blank : not assigning
Slot blank 01 to 12: for Basic shelf
01 to 15: for Expansion shelves 1 and 2
blank : not assigning

9-L-3
Description of Assigning Items
Trunk No. ( 1 to 18 )
Shelf Assigns shelf number of COT (LCOT, GCOT ).

Slot Assigns slot number of COT (LCOT, GCOT).

Extension No. ( 1 to 18 )
Shelf Assigns shelf number of extensions (SLC, HLC ).

Slot Assigns slot number of extensions (SLC, HLC ).

Conditions
None

Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7–I “Operation of Function Keys.”

9-L-4
M. Error Message Tables

1.00 Error Messages Related to

the Assigning Items in the
Same Screen

If there is a wrong entry in the displayed screen, The (XXX) indicates one of the error message
the following appears on the message line when numbers shown below and possible causes of the
storing the entry: “Contradict the relative item errors and countermeasures for them are as
internal (XXX).” follows.

Error Message No.

Probable Cause Countermeasure
(XXX)
010 (page length)-(skip length) < 6 Make (page length)-(skip length) ≥ 6.

011 (receive digit) ≥ (delete digit) is not established Make (receive digit) ≥(delete digit).
in - Special Attended DID screen.

012 Restriction Level-Operator ≤ Restriction Level Make Restriction Level-Operator≤ Restriction

-International is not established in - Operation Level-International
(1/3) screen

020 Day-night combination in the incoming mode is Check the day-night combination in incoming
not correct. mode.

040 Combination of the terminals of operators 1, 2 Check the combination of terminals for
is incorrect. operators 1, 2.

050 DN is not installed. Designate the installed DN.

051 Attempting to assign FDN's of UCD # 1 to # 4 Set FDN of other UCD, or extension directory
for the overflow destination of UCD # 5 to # 32 number.

060 Attempting to assign its own extension number Specify the number except its own extension
on the key which cannot be assigned to its own number.
extension number.
<example> DSS(ICM)
DSS(DN)
SDN

070 Specifying UCD number incorrectly. Assign UCD to only one ICM.

100 Date value is incorrect on the check of month, Check the date setting.
and leap year in the time and date setting
screen.

9-M-1
2.00 Error Messages Related to
the Assigning Items in the
Other Screens
If there is a wrong entry related to the assigning The (XXX) indicates an error message number
items in the other screens, the following appears shown below and possible causes of the errors
on the message line when storing the entry: and countermeasures for them are as follows.
“Contradict the relative item external (xxx).”

Error Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

010 Setting DN which is not stored in the hundred Enter data in hundred block. Or, set DN
block. which is stored in hundred block.

011 Specified extension DN is not stored. Store the extension DN.

012 Telephone type of the extension paired with Paired extension should be changed to a
DSS console is not PITS. PITS.

020 Setting DN to the DSS button. Set DN to assignable port.

030 Setting trunk group except DID on CO-line on Assign trunk group to the correct kind of
DID card. Or, assigning trunk group of DID to card.
CO-line on the card except DID.

040 Tenant is different. Assign the same tenant.

041 As assigned to the destination of 1 : N of trunk Cancel the 1 : N destination.

group, impossible to change tenant.

042 As assigned to the destination of doorphone Cancel the doorphone call destination.
call, impossible to change tenant.

043 Setting one pickup group to ICM & PAG group Set it to the same tenant. Or, change tenant
belonging to different tenant. after deleting pickup group.

044 Changing tenant of ICM/PAG group without Change after canceling extensions.
canceling extensions. Impossible to move extensions to the other
tenant.

045 As assigned to the destination of paging from Change the destination of attendant paging.
attendant console, impossible to change Tenant.

046 As assigned to call placing mode of Trunk Change assigning of incoming mode.
group, impossible to change Tenant.

047 As assigned to night answer point for CO-line, Change assignment of night answer point.
impossible to change Tenant.

048 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after removing the CO lines.
without removing the CO lines which belong to Impossible to move CO lines to the other
the trunk group. tenant.

049 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after canceling 1: N destination.
without canceling the setting of 1:N destination
for the trunk group.

050 Deleting is impossible because it is assigned in Change the item beforehand.

another item.

9-M-2
(70695)
Error Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

052 Extension assigned to NEXT HUNT STATION is Assign another extension or clear the
already assigned to NEXT HUNT STATION for previous assignment.
another extension.

053 Relation between ICM group and Pickup group Make them in proper relation.
assigned for an extension is incorrect.

054 As PRV-CO is assigned by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the type of
the trunk group to any other than PRV.

055 As assigned to Single CO by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the 1:1
destination of the line to a different PITS.

056 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change the tenant after clearing all 1:1
without canceling the setting of 1:1 destination. destinations of CO lines belonging to the
group.

057 UCD group is not assigned. Assign Pickup group to a UCD group.

058 Attempting to assign DID to Trunk group which Assign DID after clearing all CO lines
has CO lines belonging to the group. belonging to the group.

060 Attempting to assign the unstored ICM number Assign stored ICM number.
to the DSS (ICM) button.

070 Attempting to assign the ATT which is not Register the ATT as an operator, or specify
registered as the operator to the maintenance another device.
device.

080 Specified CO line does not exist. Specify proper CO line.

081 Specified CO line is not the PVL. Specify proper CO line.

082 Specified CO line is already assigned as a DIL Specify another CO line or cancel the
1:1 or PRV-CO by another extension. assignment of the desired line.

083 Impossible to assign because the programmings Change call placing type to 1:1, or change
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. group type to unique type.

084 Impossible to assign because the programmings Change call placing type to 1:N, and group
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. type to group.

090 Specified External Pager is not existing. Specify an existing pager.

101 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an operator.
registered as an operator of the tenant.

102 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as the destination.
registered as the destination of intercept routing
for the Trunk group.

103 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an ATT busy out
registered as an ATT busy out extension of extension.
Trunk group.

9-M-3
(70695)
Error Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

104 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an ATT overflow
registered as an ATT overflow extension for extension.
Trunk group.

105 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an overflow
registered as an overflow extension for UCD destination.
group.

106 Attempting to delete the extension/RMT which Cancel the storage as a DIL 1:1 call
is registered as a DIL 1:1 call destination of CO destination.
line.

107 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a night answer point.
registered as a night answer point of CO line.

108 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a walking station.
registered as a walking station.

109 Attempting to delete the PITS paired with DSS- Change the PITS paired with DSS Console.
console.

110 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as night answer point.
registered as a night answer point for tenant.

111 Attempting to delete the extension which is set Cancel the assignment of SDN.
to SDN.

113 Attempting to delete the ATT when the ATT is Change the incoming mode destination other
assigned for day incoming mode in Trunk than ATT.
group.

114 Attempting to delete RMT when the RMT alarm Cancel the assignment of RMT alarm.
is assigned.

115 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the night answer point.
registered as UNA point for CO line.

116 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the incoming mode.
registered as a TAFAS for day/night incoming
mode for Trunk group.

117 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the paging destination.
registered as a paging destination for the ATT.

118 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified After changing maintenance device, delete
for maintenance device. the ATT.

119 When deleting ATT, combination of operators 1 Check the combination of operators.
and 2 is incorrect.

121 Impossible to delete the card, for all of the ports Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
belonging to the card is not made pre-installed.

122 Impossible to delete the card, for DN is Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
assigned to an extension port.

9-M-4
(70695)
Error Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

123 Deleting the card is impossible, for it is Change the maintenance device.
assigned as a maintenance device.

124 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Change the intercept routing destination.
assigned for the intercept routing destination for
the Trunk group.

125 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Cancel the doorphone call destination.
assigned for doorphone call destination.

126 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified Change the incoming mode destination.
for incoming mode destination.

127 Attempting to delete the DISA which is specified Change the incoming mode.
for incoming mode.

128 Attempting to assign NAG as Night Answer Assign Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED.
Point of a CO line belonging to a Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is not FIXED.

130 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign ATT's to tenant 1.
impossible as all ATT's are not assigned to
tenant 1.

131 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign music sources to tenant 1.
impossible as all music sources are not
assigned to tenant 1.

132 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign external pagers to tenant 1.
impossible as all external pagers are not
assigned to tenant 1.

133 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign doorphones to tenant 1.
impossible as all doorphones are not assigned
to tenant 1.

134 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign DISA's to tenant 1.
impossible as all DISA's are not assigned to
tenant 1.

135 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign AGC's to tenant 1.
impossible as all AGC's are not assigned to
tenant 1.

136 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign all paging groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all paging groups are not
assigned to tenant 1.

137 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign all ICM groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all ICM groups are not assigned
to tenant 1.

138 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign all trunk groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all trunk groups are not assigned
to tenant 1

140 Deleting expansion shelf is impossible, as one Delete all the cards in the expansion shelf.
or more cards are assigned to the expansion
shelf.

9-M-5
(30393)
Error Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

141 Attempting to remove an extension or trunk port Cancel the PFT assignment of the
which is registered in Power Failure Transfer corresponding card, and then delete the port.
(PFT) assignment.

150 Impossible to change the Numbering Plan to Clear DN's which should be blank.
“Fixed,” because there exist DN's which should
be blank in the “Fixed” mode in the Hundred
Block.

160 Impossible to change ICM/Paging group, for the Change after deleting all the extensions in the
pickup group belonging to the ICM/Paging pickup group.
group contains extensions.

9-M-6
(70695)
3.00 Other Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause Countermeasure

Illegal parameter Unacceptable value is assigned. Assign an allowable value.

Parameter is not Space exists between items. Remove the space.

consecutive

This parameter Assigned selection value is not for the item. Set the assignable value.
cannot assign

Duplicate parameter The number which is set previously in this Set the number different from the previous
definition internal screen is assigned again. number.

Duplicate parameter The number which is set previously in a different Set the number different from the previous
definition external screen is assigned. number.

Not installed Device is not installed. Assign the installed device.

Invalid status Status of the specified device does not accept Change the status of the device to be
this command. acceptable for the command.

Diagnostic failure Diagnostic error is checked when In-Service Execute test.

command is executed.

Insufficient privilege Privilege level is lower than specified level. Increase the privilege level through the
Change level function.

Failure Port test is made during a card malfunction. Repair the malfunctioning card.

Service violation Specified service is not executed. Check specified service.

Already accessed Another maintenance device (remote, PITS, Wait until another device is finished or let him
by another device system) is in use. finish.

Printer is not ready Printer is not connected to the system or the Connect the printer, and make the power on.
power is off.

Cannot print out in Print out is unavailable from Remote. Execute print out on-site.
remote

Waiting Changing of program data is suspended Wait for a while or cancel the setting by
because call placement is going on. “CTRL+C”

Calender IC trouble Calendar IC malfunction. Repair calender IC.

Device error Backup device is not connected (only when Connect the backup device to SIO # 1 Port.
maintenance device is ATT).

Version error Different version at the time of backup. Match the backup version.

Checksum error A checksum error has been detected. Communication line is defective, or backup
data is destroyed.

9-M-7
(70695)
 Error Message Probable Cause Countermeasure

Illegal code detected Improper data is received. Communication link is defective, or backup
data is destroyed.

Off line Execution is impossible during off-line. Execute during on-line.

Status is already set Impossible change such as Impossible.

[INS] [INS], [OUS] [OUS]
is attempted.

Too many The number of equipment you attempt to Assign the equipment within the limit of
equipment assigned. assign is over the limit. number.

Some extension are Attempting to change or delete the message Change or delete the message after the
using that message which is in use by an extension user. extension cancels the setting.

9-M-8
(70695)
 Section 10

System Programming

Dumb Type Terminal

 (Section 10)

System Programming
Dumb Type Terminal
Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 10-A-1
B Construction of Programming Mode................................................................ 10-B-1
C Programming Commands................................................................................ 10-C-1

1.00 System Assignment (SYA)..................................................................... 10-C-1

2.00 Slot Assignment (SLA)........................................................................... 10-C-2
3.00 DN Assignment (DNA)........................................................................... 10-C-5
4.00 Operation (OPR).................................................................................... 10-C-6
5.00 Tenant (TNN)......................................................................................... 10-C-11
6.00 System Timer (TIM)............................................................................... 10-C-14
7.00 Class of Service 1 (CS1) ....................................................................... 10-C-15
8.00 Class of Service 2 (CS2) ....................................................................... 10-C-17
9.00 Local Access Group (LAG).................................................................... 10-C-19
10.00 Numbering Plan (NBP).......................................................................... 10-C-20
11.00 Communication Interface (COM)........................................................... 10-C-25
12.00 Speed Dialing-System (SPD) ................................................................ 10-C-26
13.00 Absent Message (ABS) ......................................................................... 10-C-27
14.00 Trunk Group 1 (TG1)............................................................................. 10-C-28
15.00 Trunk Group 2 (TG2)............................................................................. 10-C-31
16.00 ICM/Paging Group (IPG) ....................................................................... 10-C-32
17.00 Call Pickup Group (CPG)....................................................................... 10-C-33
18.00 CO Line (COL)....................................................................................... 10-C-34
19.00 Pager (PAG) ......................................................................................... 10-C-36
20.00 Music Source (MUS).............................................................................. 10-C-37
21.00 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) .............................................................. 10-C-38
22.00 Extension (EXT)..................................................................................... 10-C-39
23.00 DSS Console (DSS) .............................................................................. 10-C-42
24.00 DN Button Assignment (DNK) ............................................................... 10-C-43
25.00 PF Button Assignment (PFK)................................................................. 10-C-46
26.00 DSS Button Assignment (DSK) ............................................................. 10-C-48
27.00 Doorphone (DPH).................................................................................. 10-C-50
28.00 Attendant Console (ATT)....................................................................... 10-C-51
29.00 Attendant Queue Priority (AQP) ............................................................ 10-C-53
30.00 Equal Access (EQU) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)........................... 10-C-54
31.00 OCC Access (OCC) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)............................ 10-C-56
32.00 Toll Restriction 1 (TR1) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)....................... 10-C-58
33.00 Toll Restriction 2 (TR2) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)....................... 10-C-59
34.00 Toll Restriction 3 (TR3) (for U.S.A. and Canada)................................... 10-C-60
34.00 Toll Restriction 3 (TR3) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) ....... 10-C-60
35.00 Automatic Route Selection 1 (AR1)
(for U.S.A., Canada and New Zealand) ................................................ 10-C-61
36.00 Automatic Route Selection 2 (AR2) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) ..... 10-C-62
37.00 Automatic Route Selection 3 (AR3)
(for U.S.A., Canada and New Zealand)................................................. 10-C-63

10-1
(70695)
 Page
38.00 Automatic Route Selection 4 (AR4)
(for U.S.A., Canada and New Zealand)................................................. 10-C-64
39.00 Automatic Route Selection 5 (AR5)
(for U.S.A., Canada and New Zealand) ................................................ 10-C-65
40.00 DISA (DIS)............................................................................................. 10-C-66
41.00 DISA Code (DIC)................................................................................... 10-C-67
42.00 DISA Password (DIP)............................................................................ 10-C-68
43.00 DID (DID)............................................................................................... 10-C-69
44.00 UCD 1 (UC1) ......................................................................................... 10-C-70
45.00 UCD 2 (UC2) ......................................................................................... 10-C-71
46.00 Information (INF).................................................................................... 10-C-72
47.00 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)................................................................ 10-C-73
48.00 Change Password (CHG)...................................................................... 10-C-74
49.00 CPC Signal Detect Timing-Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)........................... 10-C-75
50.00 Automatic Busy-Out Count (ABC) ......................................................... 10-C-76
51.00 World Select 1 (WS1)............................................................................ 10-C-77
(1) Interdigit Pause................................................................................ 10-C-77
(2) Pulse Type....................................................................................... 10-C-77
(3) Automatic Redial Retry Count......................................................... 10-C-77
(4) Automatic Redial Retry Interval....................................................... 10-C-77
(5) % Break Detect (SLT)...................................................................... 10-C-77
(6) Flash Detect (SLT)........................................................................... 10-C-77
(7) Flash Detect (TIE) ........................................................................... 10-C-77
(8) Answer Decision Timer.................................................................... 10-C-77
52.00 World Select 2 (WS2)............................................................................ 10-C-79
(1) First Dial Timer ............................................................................... 10-C-79
(2) First Dial Timer (DID)....................................................................... 10-C-79
(3) EQU Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)................................. 10-C-79
(4) OCC Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)................................. 10-C-79
(5) Outgoing CO Back Tone.................................................................. 10-C-79
(6) L-COT Busy Out Looprelay............................................................. 10-C-79
(7) G-COT Busy Out Looprelay (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) ......... 10-C-79
(8) Pay Tone Frequency........................................................................ 10-C-79
(9) Pay Tone Gain................................................................................. 10-C-79
53.00 World Select 3 (WS3) ............................................................................ 10-C-81
(1) DIL 1:N CO Key Only (PITS only) ................................................... 10-C-81
(2) EXT Off-hook BLF (PITS only)........................................................ 10-C-81
(3) DTMF–Tone Integration................................................................... 10-C-81
(4) SLT On-hook Operation Mode......................................................... 10-C-82
(5) Mode Selection of Calls Arriving at ATT.......................................... 10-C-82-1
(6) Centrex ARS.................................................................................... 10-C-82-1
(7) Waiting for Second Dial Tone Mode ................................................ 10-C-82-1
(8) Polarity Reversal Mode ................................................................... 10-C-82-1
(9) /# Allow Mode.............................................................................. 10-C-82-2
(10) Message Waiting Lamp Off Control — Voice Mail.......................... 10-C-82-2
(11) µlaw - A law (E-1 only).................................................................... 10-C-82-2
10-2
(70695)
 Page
(12) SLT Transfer Operation.................................................................. 10-C-82-2
(13) Ringback Tone While Transfer....................................................... 10-C-82-3
(14) Charge Display............................................................................... 10-C-82-3
(15) Tone Except Idle Status (MFC-R2)................................................. 10-C-82-3
54.00 Voice Mail Directory number (VMD) ...................................................... 10-C-83
55.00 Mailbox Number (MBN)......................................................................... 10-C-86
56.00 Account Code Verified........................................................................... 10-C-90
(1) Programming the System Account Code
–Speed Dialing Boundary (SPB)..................................................... 10-C-90
(2) Assigning Account Code Verified (ACV) Feature to the
Extension ........................................................................................ 10-C-91
57.00 Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL) .............................. 10-C-93
58.00 CO Access Instantly (CAI)..................................................................... 10-C-95
59.00 Night Answer Group (NAG)................................................................... 10-C-97
60.00 Polarity Reversal Detection (PRD) ........................................................ 10-C-100
61.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone (WSD) ..................................................... 10-C-103
62.00 World Select 4(WS4)............................................................................. 10-C-105
(1) Dial Tone Frequency Selection........................................................ 10-C-105
(2) Paging Beep Tone Control............................................................... 10-C-105
(3) TAFAS Confirmation Tone Control................................................... 10-C-105
(4) Paging Confirmation Tone Control................................................... 10-C-105
(5) Call Park Confirmation Tone Control............................................... 10-C-105
(6) Call Pickup Confirmation Tone Control............................................ 10-C-105
63.00 Equal Access Code (EQC) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)................. 10-C-107
64.00 T-1/E-1 Related Commands.................................................................. 10-C-109
64.01 Channel Assignment (CHA) — T-1/E-1..................................... 10-C-109
64.02 System Clock Mode (CLK) — T-1/E-1........................................ 10-C-111
64.03 Master Clock Priority (CLP) — T-1/E-1....................................... 10-C-112
64.04 ESF Frame Option(EFO) — T-1 only.......................................... 10-C-113
64.05 MFC Sequence Parameter (MFC) — E-1 only........................... 10-C-114
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
64.06 Answer Signal Wait Time (AWT) — E-1 only.............................. 10-C-116
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
64.07 E-1 Signaling Option (ESO) — E-1 only..................................... 10-C-117
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
64.08 MFC-R2 Option (MRO) — E-1 only............................................ 10-C-118
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
64.09 Pulsed E&M (PEM) — E-1 only.................................................. 10-C-119
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
65.00 TIE Line Related Commands................................................................. 10-C-120
65.01 TIE Line Routing Table (TIE)...................................................... 10-C-120
65.02 TIE Account Code (TAC)............................................................ 10-C-121
65.03 TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)............................................. 10-C-122
65.04 Line Hunting Sequence (LHS).................................................... 10-C-123
65.05 E&M Selection (EMS)................................................................. 10-C-124
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
10-3
(70695)
 Page
65.06 TIE Caller ID Integration (TCI).................................................... 10-C-126
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
66.00 Charge Management Related Commands............................................ 10-C-127
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
66.01 Charge Management ID Code (CPD)......................................... 10-C-127
66.02 Charge Rate (RAT)..................................................................... 10-C-128
66.03 Charge Limitation (CLT).............................................................. 10-C-129
67.00 DISA/AGC Tone Detection Mode (TDM) ............................................... 10-C-130
68.00 Call Forwarding-Follow Me (CFM)......................................................... 10-C-131
69.00 Limited Call Duration (LCD)................................................................... 10-C-132
70.00 UCD Auto Log-out Operation (ULO)...................................................... 10-C-133
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

D Error Message Tables...................................................................................... 10-D-1

1.00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items
in the Same Command..................................................................... 10-D-1
2.00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items
in the Other Commands.................................................................... 10-D-2
3.00 Fixed Error Messages............................................................................ 10-D-6
4.00 Other Error Messages ........................................................................... 10-D-8

10-4
(70695)
A. Introduction
This section provides system programming using
Dumb type terminal. Before starting system
programming, Section 8 “Preparation for
Programming and Maintenance (Dumb Type
Terminal)” must be read. This section describes
the basic operations for programming.
Programming mode consists of a variety of
commands, which enable users to assign or
change various parameters concerning the
system administration such as Tenant, Class of
Service, Numbering Plan and so on. A list of all
programming commands is provided on the
following page.

10-A-1
(70695)
B. Construction of Programming Mode
Password Level
↓
PRG (Programming) SYA (System Assignment) 1
SLA (Slot Assignment) 1 First Set
DNA (DN Assignment) 1
CHA (Channel Assignment) 1
OPR (Operation) 2
TNN (Tenant) 2
TIM (System Timer) 2
CS1 (Class of Service 1) 2
CS2 (Class of Service 2) 2
LAG (Local Access Group) 2 Second Set
NBP (Numbering Plan) 2
COM (Communication Interface) 2
SPD (Speed Dialing - System) 3
ABS (Absent Message) 3
TG1 (Trunk Group 1) 2
TG2 (Trunk Group 2) 2
IPG (ICM/Paging Group) 2
CPG (Call Pickup Group) 2
COL (CO Line) 3
PAG (External Paging) 3
MUS (Music Source) 3
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) 3
EXT (Extension) 3
DSS (DSS Console) 3
DNK (DN Button Assignment) 3
PFK (PF Button Assignment) 3
DSK (DSS Button Assignment) 3
DPH (Doorphone) 3
ATT (Attendant Console) 2
AQP (Attendant Queue Priority) 2
EQU* (Equal Access) 2
OCC* (OCC Access) 2
TR1* (TRS Area/Office Code Tables) 2
TR2* (TRS Office Code Tables) 2
TR3 (TRS 7/10 or 7-Digit Table) 2
AR1 (ARS Leading Digit Table) 2 Third Set
AR2* (ARS Office Code Tables) 2
AR3 (ARS Route Plan Tables) 2
AR4 (ARS Route Lists Tables) 2
AR5 (ARS Modified Digit Tables) 2
DIS (Direct Inward System Access) 2
DIC (DISA Code) 2
DIP (DISA Password) 2
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 2
UC1 (UCD 1/2) 2
UC2 (UCD 2/2) 2
TIE (TIE Line Routing Table) 2
INF (Installation Information) 2
PFT (Power Failure Transfer) 2
CHG (Change Password) 1
CPC (CPC Detect Timing-Outgoing) 3
WS1 (World Select 1) 3
WS2 (World Select 2) 2
ABC (Automatic Busy-out Count) 2

* (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) Continued

10-B-1
(70695)
 Continued
WS3 (World Select 3) 2 These programs must be done
CAI (CO Access Instantly) 2 in order from “First Set” “Second
ACV (Account Code Verified) 2 Set” to “Third Set” shown in the
ACL (Account Code Entry on Long 2 table. For example, if you
Distance Calls) program Operation (OPE)
SPB (Speed Dialing Boundary) 2 before doing System
NAG (Night Answer Group) 2 Assignment (SYA) program, an
PRD (Polarity Reversal Detection) 2 error message appears.
VMD (Voice Mail DN) 2
MBN (Mail Box Number) 2
WSD (Waiting for Second Dial Tone) 2
EQC* (Equal Access Code) 2
WS4 (World Select 4) 2
TAC (TIE Account Code) 2
CLK (Clock Mode) 2
CLP (Clock Priority) 2
TRR (TIE Trunk Relay Restriction) 2
MFC (MFC Sequence Parameter) 2
CPD (Charge Password) 2
RAT (Charge Rate) 2
CLT (Charge Limitation) 2
EMS (E&M Selection) 2
TDM (Tone Detection Mode 2
(DISA/AGC))
LHS (Line Hunting Sequence) 2
EFO (ESF Frame Option) 2
ULO (UCD Auto Log-out Operation) 2
MRO (MFC-R2 Option (E-1)) 2
ESO (E-1 Signaling Option) 2
LCD (Limited Call Duration) 2
CFM (Call Forwarding-Follow Me) 2
PEM (Pulsed E&M) 2
TCI (TIE Caller ID Integration) 2
AWT (Answer Signal Wait Time) 2

10-B-2
(70695)
C. Programming Commands

1.00 System Assignment (SYA)

Description
This command is used to configure the system
for:
• Expansion Shelf (1, or both 1 and 2)
• T-SW Conference Expansion Card

To expand the conference trunks, T-SW

Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104) must
be installed.
(Password level : One)

Input Format

S Y A Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 Expansion Shelf N: expansion shelf not installed
1: expansion shelf 1 available
2: both expansion shelves 1 and 2 available

2 TSW Additional CONF Y: conference expansion card installed

N: conference expansion card not installed

Conditions
None

10-C-1
2.00 Slot Assignment (SLA)

Description
To assign the type of card equipped in each free
slot on the basic and expansion shelves.
(Password level : One)

Input Format
☛
S L A Mode ( Index Number ) CR

☛ In the AT mode, to display or edit in the <Example>

conversation style, do not enter the When you enter; PRG>SLA AT ( ), the
index number : display starts from the slot number 101 and
moves one by one.

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

X XX Physical number (101 to 315)
slot (01 to 15)
shelf (1 to 3)

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 Card Type XX (00 to 19)
00 : none
01 : PLC (Proprietary Integrated Telephone System Line Circuit)
card
02 : HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) card
03 : SLC (Single Line Telephone Circuit) card
04 : MSLC(SLC with Message Waiting) card
05 : RCOT (LCOT with Polarity Reversal Detection) card
06 : PCOT (LCOT with Pay Tone Detection) card
07 : LCOT (Loop Start Central Office Trunk) card
08 : GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) card
09 : DID (Direct Inward Dialing) card
10 : E&M (E&M Trunk) card
11 : T-1 (T1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD)

Continued
10-C-2
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

12 : E-1 (E1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD)

13 : AGC (Automatic Gain Control) card
14 : DISA (Direct Inward System Access) card
15 : OPX (Off Premise Extension) card
16 : ATLC (Attendant Console Line Circuit) card
17 : DPH (Doorphone Circuit) card
18 : RMT (Remote Circuit) card
19 : OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement) card
(◆ 06: GCOT is available for U.S.A. and Canada only.)

Conditions
If “SLA” command is entered without index number, all physical slot numbers (except 113 and 115) will be
displayed in ascending order (from 101 to 315).

It is impossible to select Index No.113 and 115, because Index No.113 is fixed to CPU card and 115 is
fixed to T-SW card.

If Index No.114 is selected, assignable input value is limited to “00: none” or “19: OHCA.”

T-1/E-1 card should be assigned to FS01, 05 or 09 of any shelf.

• One T-1 card occupies three slots. If you assign a T-1 card to FS01, FS02 and FS03 are not available
for other cards. “ ” is displayed in these two slots and the cursor skips them.
• One E-1 card occupies four slots. If you assign an E-1 card to FS01, FS02 through FS04 are not
available for other cards. “ ” is displayed in these three slots and cursor skips them.

If no CO trunk card is assigned, it is not possible to program “CO Line (COL).”

If AGC card is not assigned, “Automatic Gain Control (AGC)” cannot be programmed.

If DPH card is not assigned, “Doorphone (DPH)” cannot be programmed.

If ATLC card is not assigned, it is not possible to program “Attendant Console (ATT)” and
“Attendant Queue Priority (AQP).”

If DISA card is not assigned, it is not possible to program “DISA (DIS)”, “DISA Code (DIC)”
and “DISA Password (DIP).”

If DID card is not assigned, it is not possible to program “DID (DID).”

When assigning a card, the card status is Out of Service (OUS). When using the card, the
card status should be set to In Service (INS).
For “In Service (INS)” and “Out of Service (OUS)”, refer to Section 8-F-3.00 “In Service
(INS)” and Section 8-F-4.00 “Out of Service (OUS).”
For confirming whether card status is INS or OUS, refer to Section 15-F-1.02 “Card Status
Screen.”

10-C-3
(70695)
When deleting or changing the pre-assigned card type, the conditions should be the
followings:
• The card status is OUS or Fault.
• All of the port data has been deleted.

However, if there exist port data, it is possible to change the cards as follows:
• PLC card HLC card
• SLC card HLC card

Deleting the ATLC card will be an error if there exist the following assignments:
• “Trunk Group (TG1)”,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “1 (ATT).”
Intercept Routing (Day) is set to “A (ATT).”
• “Doorphone (DPH)”,
Doorphone Assignment is set to “A(ATT).”

Deleting the DISA card will be an error if there exist the following assignments:
• “Trunk Group (TG1)”,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “4 (DISA).”
Incoming Mode (Night) is set to “4 (DISA).”

Deleting the HLC, SLC, LCOT or GCOT card will be an error if there is the following assignment to the slot
to be deleted:
• “Power Failure Transfer (PFT)”

See Section 1-A-5.00 “Service Cards Description” for installing the cards in combination.

10-C-4
(70695)
3.00 DN Assignment (DNA)

Description
To assign a DN (directory number) to each port.
(Password level : One)

Input Format

D N A Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

X XX Physical number (101 to 315)
slot (01 to 15)
shelf (1 to 3)

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Port 1

2 Port 2

3 Port 3

4 Port 4 Three or four numeric digits: directory number

5 Port 5

6 Port 6

7 Port 7

8 Port 8

Conditions
None

10-C-5
4.00 Operation (OPR)

Description
To assign data common to the whole system, by
using indexes 1 and 2.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

O P R Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 The first Operation block

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 Tenant Service Y: Tenant Service is available
N: Tenant Service is unavailable

02 Automatic Route Selection Y: Automatic Route Selection is available

N: Automatic Route Selection is unavailable

03 Numbering Plan 1 : Flex

2 : Fixed 1
3 : Fixed 2

04 Privacy on DN Key 1 : privacy enabled

2 : privacy disabled

05 Restriction Level - Operator 01 to 16 : the restriction level for telephone company operator
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) call

06 Restriction Level - International 01 to 16 : the restriction level for international call

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Continued

10-C-6
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
07 Home Dialing Plan A : Type-A : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada NXX+XXXX
only) B : Type-B : NPX+NXX+XXXX
NNX+XXXX
C : Type-C : 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX
1+NNX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
D : Type-D : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
(N: 2 to 9, P: 0,1, X: 0 to 9)

08 DSS Operation Mode 1 : disconnect and call

2 : hold and transfer

09 Busy Tone 1 : busy tone 1

2 : busy tone 2

10 Held Call Reminder Y: Held Call Reminder is enabled

N: Held Call Reminder is disabled

11 Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr / Y: overriding with beep tone

Brg-in N: overriding without beep tone

12 External Paging 1 Y: using external pager 1

N: not using external pager 1

13 External Paging 2 Y: using external pager 2

N: not using external pager 2

14 External Music Source 1 Y: using external music source 1

N: not using external music source 1

15 External Music Source 2 Y: using external music source 2

N: not using external music source 2

16 Idle Line Preference 1 : off-hook selects an idle DN button

2 : off-hook selects an idle CO button

17 FDN for General Operator 0 : no FDN

Call 1 DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits): FDN for general
operator call 1

18 FDN for General Operator 0 : no FDN

Call 2 DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits): FDN for general
operator call 2

19 PBX Code 0 : no PBX code

Up to three numeric digits can be entered.

10-C-7
(70695)
Conditions
Conaaaaaaaalkjhggfditions
Item
Item Number
Number
1
201 Tenant Service If “N” is selected, the assigning items listed below cannot be programmed:
3 “Trunk Group 1 (TG 1)”, Tenant
7 “Pager (PAG)”, Tenant
“Music Source (MUS)”, Tenant
“AGC (AGC)”, Tenant
“Doorphone (DPH)”, Tenant
“DISA(DIS)”, Tenant

02 Automatic Route If set to “N,” it is impossible to program “DISA Code (DIC)”, ARS Override.
Selection

03 Numbering Plan If set to “1,” “Numbering Plan (NBP)” is changeable.

07 Home Dialing Plan Dial type must be selected depending on the type of the area where this
system is installed.

10 Held Call Reminder If set to “N,” Held Call Reminder does not function. However, it is possible
to program the items below:
“System Timer (TIM)”, Held Call Reminder/Held Call Reminder (ATT)
“Attendant Queue Priority (AQP)”, Held Call Reminder

12, 13 External Paging 1,2 If both are set to “N,” Paging through External Pagers does not function
and “Pager (PAG)” does not appear.
However, it is possible to program the items below:
“Class of Service 2 (CS2)”, External Paging 1/2
“Numbering Plan (NBP)”, External Paging/External Paging Answer

If either is set to “N,” it is not possible to program its “Pager (PAG)”, Tone/
BGM.

14, 15 External Music If both are set to “N,” “Music Source (MUS)” does not appear.
Source 1,2 If either is set to “N,” it is not possible to program its “Music Source
(MUS)”, For Use.

[Note] (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Either Internal or External Music Source can be used depending on the
selection of the Music Source Selector Switch.
If set to “INT MUS,” assign “External Music Source 1” to “N” and “External
Music Source 2” to “Y”.

10-C-8
(60395)
Index Number

Index Number Explanation

2 The second Operation block

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 System Administration Device 1: VT220/VT100

2: Dumb terminal
3: Attendant Console 1
4: Attendant Console 2

02 SMDR Y: SMDR enabled

N: SMDR disabled

03 Page Length 04 to 99: page length (number of lines)

04 Skip Perf. 00 to 95: skip perforation

• Note: if printing out system data:
(page length)- (skip perforation)≥23
if printing out call processing information :
(page length)- (skip perforation)≥6
if printing out error log data :
(page length)- (skip perforation)≥4

05 Outgoing Duration Log 0 : do not print outgoing calls

1 : print outgoing toll calls only
2: print all outgoing calls
(◆ Input Value “1” is available for U.S.A. and Canada only)

06 Incoming Duration Log Y: print incoming calls

N: do not print incoming calls

07 Attendant Duration 1 : Attendant Console duration recorded

2 : Attendant Console duration included with destination

08 Special Carrier Name 1 : print out default value

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada 2 : print out users name
only) 3 : print out dialing number

09 Print Secret Dial Y: print secret dial numbers

N: do not print secret dial numbers

10 Print Error Log Y: print the error log

N: do not print the error log

11 Print Programming Y: print programming

N: do not print programming
Continued
10-C-9
(60395)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

12 Print Traffic Y: print traffic

N: do not print traffic

13 Start Time of Traffic XX: XXX

Measurement 01 to 12: hour
00 to 59: minute
A or P : a.m. or p.m.

14 Start Time of Test XX: XXX

01 to 12: hour
00 to 59: minute
A or P : a.m./p.m.

15 Remote Directory Number 0 : none

DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits) : Floating
Directory Number

16 Remote Alarm Y: Remote Alarm enabled

N: Remote Alarm disabled

17 Destination Address Maximum 26 numeric digits : telephone (modem) number of the

destination for Remote Alarm

Conditions
Item
Number
02 SMDR If set to “N,” the following items cannot be programmed:
“Operation (OPR)”, (Index Number 2)
Page Length
Skip Perf.
Outgoing Duration Log
Incoming Duration Log
Attendant Duration
Special Carrier Name
Print Secret Dial
Print Error Log
Print Programming
Print Traffic

15 Remote Directory To assign this item, RMT card is necessary,

Number

16, 17 Remote Alarm/ Impossible to program if “12”(RMT card) is not assigned in the “Slot
Destination Address Assignment (SLA).” If Remote Alarm is set to “N,” Destination Address
cannot be programmed.

10-C-10
5.00 Tenant (TNN)

Description
To assign tenant data (specifying terminal type
for the operators, the method to change over
Night Service mode, the password for PITS
programming etc.).
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T N N Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 or 2 tenant number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 Operator 1 Type of Terminal:
0 : no operator
A1: Attendant Console 1
A2: Attendant Console 2
DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits):
extension directory number

02 Operator 2 Same as operator 1

03 Night Service 1 : manual change

2 : automatic change
04 Auto Start Time: MON. (Day)
05 Auto Start Time: MON. (Night)
06 Auto Start Time: TUE. (Day)
07 Auto Start Time: TUE. (Night)
08 Auto Start Time: WED. (Day)
09 Auto Start Time: WED. (Night)
10 Auto Start Time: THU. (Day) XX : XX X
11 Auto Start Time: THU. (Night) A or P : a.m./p.m.
12 Auto Start Time: FRI. (Day) 00 to 59 : minute
13 Auto Start Time: FRI. (Night) 01 to 12 : hour
14 PITS Programming Password
15
16 Walking COS Password
17
Continued
10-C-11
 Continued
Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
18 PITS Programming Password four numeric digits

19 Walking COS Password four numeric digits

20 Inter-Tenant Calling Y: Inter-Tenant calling is available

N: Inter-Tenant calling is unavailable

21 Speed Dialing-System 000 to 200 : boundary number

Boundary 000 : all for tenant 2
200 : all for tenant 1

22 Call Park Boundary 00 to 20 : boundary number

00 : all for tenant 2
20 : all for tenant 1

23 Message Waiting Boundary 000 to 500 : boundary number

000 : all for tenant 2
500 : all for tenant 1

24 Absent Message Boundary 06 to 16 : boundary number

06 : all for tenant 2
16 : all for tenant 1

☛ The item numbers 20 through 24 are for tenant 2 : clearing function is effective
only when tenant service is employed. for the item

Conditions
Index Number 2 does not appear if “Operation (OPR)” Tenant Service is set to “N.”

Item
Number
01, 02 Operator 1/2 This system can accommodate up to two Attendant Consoles. When
Tenant Service is available and if two Attendant Consoles are assigned to
tenant 1, no Attendant Console can be assigned to tenant 2.
If only one Attendant Console is accommodated, it must be assigned only
to Operator 1.

10-C-12
21 to 24 Speed Dialing- If Tenant Service is available, the following items can be split between
System Boundary/ tenant 1 and tenant 2. The boundaries are to set tenant-boundary num-
Call Park Boundary/ bers. The last number that tenant 1 can use must be assigned in each
Message Waiting boundary for the functions below:
Boundary/Absent
Message Boundary Speed Dialing-System
Call Park-System
Message Waiting
Absent Message

<Example>
Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be programmed for the system. If you
wish to assign 150 codes to tenant 1 and 50 codes to tenant 2, enter
“150” in Speed Dialing-System Boundary.

Speed dialing codes 001

002
•
•
Only tenant 1 can use
•
• the codes.
•
150
151 Only tenant 2 can use
the codes.
200

If tenant 1 uses no code and tenant 2 uses 200 codes, enter “000.”

10-C-13
6.00 System Timer (TIM)
Description
To assign a value to the various system timers.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T I M Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 Held Call Reminder 15 to 240 : s

02 Held Call Reminder (ATT) 15 to 240 : s

03 Transfer Recall 15 to 240 : s

04 Pickup Dial Waiting 1 to 5 : s

05 External First Digit Time-Out 5 to 120 : s

06 External Inter digit Time-Out 3 to 15 : s

07 External Inter digit Time-Out 3 to 10 : s

(PBX)

08 Toll Restriction Guard Time- 0 to 25 : s

Out

09 Call Forwarding-No Answer 5 to 60 : s

Time-Out

10 Intercept Routing Time-Out 5 to 240 : s

(System)

11 Intercept Routing Time-Out 5 to 240 : s

(DISA)

12 Attendant Overflow Time 5 to 240 : s

13 SMDR Duration Time 0 to 15 : s

14 TIE Interdigit Time-Out 3 to 30 : s

15 DISA Interdigit Time-Out 1 to 10 : s

Conditions
Item
Number
01 to 02 Held Call Reminder/ If these items are programmed but if “Operation (OPR)” Index Number 1,
Held Call Reminder Held Call Reminder is set to “N,” Held Call Reminder does not function.
(ATT) 10-C-14
(70695)
7.00 Class of Service 1 (CS1)

Description
This is the first Class of Service block which is
used to assign toll restriction level, maximum
dialing digits, Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb, Do
Not Disturb Override and so on.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

C S 1 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Class of Service number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 Toll Restriction Level (Day) 01 to 16

02 Toll Restriction Level (Night) 01 to 16

03 Max. Dialing Digits 002 to 255 : maximum number of dialed digits [input value -1]
000 : no limit to digits dialed
001 : cannot dial

04 Call Forwarding/Do Not Y: Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is available

Disturb N: Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is unavailable

05 Do Not Disturb Override Y: Do Not Disturb Override is available

N: Do Not Disturb Override is unavailable

06 CO Forward Mode Y: Call Forwarding to CO is available

N: Call Forwarding to CO is unavailable

07 CO Transfer Mode Y: Call Transfer to CO is available

N: Call Transfer to CO is unavailable

08 Forced Account Code Mode Y: account codes are required for outgoing CO calls
N: account codes are optional for outgoing CO calls

09 BSS/OHCA Y: Override is available

N: Override is unavailable
Continued

10-C-15
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

10 BSS/OHCA Deny Y: Override Deny is possible

N: Override Deny is impossible

11 Executive Busy Override Y: Executive Busy Override is available

N: Executive Busy Override is unavailable

12 Executive Busy Override Deny Y: Executive Busy Override Deny is available

N: Executive Busy Override Deny is unavailable

13 Station Lock Y: Station Lock is available

N: Station Lock is unavailable

14 Walking Station Y: Walking Station is possible

N: Walking Station is impossible

15 Maintenance Capability Y: PITS system programming is possible

N: PITS system programming is impossible

16 ARS/Local Access 1: With restriction

2: No restriction
3: No access

Conditions
None

10-C-16
8.00 Class of Service 2 (CS2)

Description
This is the second Class of Service block which is
used to assign the trunk groups available for
access and so on.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

C S 2 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Class of Service number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 Trunk Group 01
02 Trunk Group 02
03 Trunk Group 03
04 Trunk Group 04
05 Trunk Group 05
06 Trunk Group 06
07 Trunk Group 07 Y: trunk group available for access
08 Trunk Group 08 N: trunk group unavailable for access
09 Trunk Group 09
10 Trunk Group 10
11 Trunk Group 11
12 Trunk Group 12
13 Trunk Group 13
14 Trunk Group 14
15 Trunk Group 15
16 Trunk Group 16

Continued

10-C-17
(60395)
 Continued
17 * EQA 1
18 * EQA 2
19 * EQA 3 Y: special carrier available for access
20 * EQA 4 N: special carrier unavailable for access
21 * OCC 1
22 * OCC 2
23 * OCC 3
24 * OCC 4
25 PAG 1
26 PAG 2
27 PAG 3 Y: paging group available for access
28 PAG 4 N: paging group unavailable for access
29 PAG 5
30 PAG 6
31 PAG 7
32 PAG 8
33 External Paging 1 Y: external paging group available for access
34 External Paging 2 N: external paging group unavailable for access
* (Item Numbers 17 through 24 are available for U.S.A. and Canada only.)

Conditions
Item
Number
17 to 24 EQA 1 to 4 If “Y” is selected but if “Equal Access (EQU)”, Service and “OCC Access
OCC 1 to 4 (OCC)”, Service are set to “N,” Special Carrier Access via virtual trunk
group access does not work.
It is administable to activate or deactivate the EQU Access and/or OCC
Access features on a system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further
information.

25 to 32 PAG 1 to 8 If an extension does not belong to the same tenant as the paging groups
assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the paging groups.

33, 34 External Paging 1/2 If “Y” is selected but if “Operation (OPR)” Index 1, External Paging 1/2 is
not set to “Y,” Paging through external pagers is impossible.
If an extension belongs to the other tenant than that of the External
Paging 1 or 2 assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the external
paging group.

10-C-18
(60395)
9.00 Local Access Group (LAG)

Description:
Assigns the toll restriction level and hunt
sequence for idle trunk groups when using local
access.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

L A G Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16 : restriction level

02 Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8 : restriction table number

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada
only)
03 Hunt Sequence 01
04 Hunt Sequence 02
05 Hunt Sequence 03
06 Hunt Sequence 04
07 Hunt Sequence 05
08 Hunt Sequence 06
09 Hunt Sequence 07
10 Hunt Sequence 08 01 to 16 : trunk group number

11 Hunt Sequence 09
12 Hunt Sequence 10
13 Hunt Sequence 11
14 Hunt Sequence 12
15 Hunt Sequence 13
16 Hunt Sequence 14
17 Hunt Sequence 15
18 Hunt Sequence 16
: clearing function is effective
Conditions for the item

None
10-C-19
(60395)
10.00 Numbering Plan (NBP)
Description
This is used for assigning the first one or two
digits of extension numbers, and feature
numbers. Entry is possible only when the
“Numbering Plan” is assigned to “1 (manual)” in
the Operation (OPR) program.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

N B P Mode Item Number CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

001 1st Hundred Block Extension

002 2nd Hundred Block Extension

003 3rd Hundred Block Extension

004 4th Hundred Block Extension

005 5th Hundred Block Extension

006 6th Hundred Block Extension

007 7th Hundred Block Extension

008 8th Hundred Block Extension One or two numeric digits

009 9th Hundred Block Extension

010 10th Hundred Block Extension

011 11th Hundred Block Extension

012 12th Hundred Block Extension

013 13th Hundred Block Extension

014 14th Hundred Block Extension

015 15th Hundred Block Extension

016 16th Hundred Block Extension

017 Operator Call (General)

018 Operator Call (Specific) Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, * , #

019 ARS/Local CO Line Access
Continued

10-C-20
(30393)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

020 Trunk Group 01-08 access

021 Trunk Group 09-16 access Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, ,#

022 Trunk Group 17-24 access

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

023 Speed Dialing-System

024 Speed Dialing-Station Maximum four digits consisting of numbers,

025 Doorphone Call (1-4)

026 External Paging

027 Station Paging

028 External Paging Answer

029 Station Paging Answer

030 Night Answer 1

031 Night Answer 2

032 Dial Call Pickup

033 Directed Call Pickup

034 Hold Extension Retrieve

035 Redial Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, ,#

036 External Feature Access

037 Account Code

038 Hold

039 Hold Retrieve

040 Call Park-System

041 Call Park Retrieve-System

042 Call Park Station

043 Call Park Retrieve-Station

044 Call Forwarding-All Call Set

045 Call Forwarding-Busy Set

046 Call Forwarding-No Answer Set

047 Call Forwarding-to Trunk Maximum four digits consisting of numbers,

Continued

10-C-21
(70695)(F)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

048 Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer

049 Do Not Disturb Set

050 Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb

Cancel

051 Dial Call Pickup Deny Set

052 Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel

053 Call Waiting Set Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, * , #

054 Call Waiting Cancel

055 BSS/OHCA Deny Set

056 BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel

057 Busy Override Deny Set

058 Busy Override Deny Cancel

059 Data Line Security Set

060 Data Line Security Cancel

061 Pickup Dialing Programming Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *

062 Pickup Dialing Set

063 Pickup Dialing Cancel

064 Absent Message Set

065 Absent Message Cancel

066 Timed Reminder Confirm

067 Timed Reminder Set

068 Timed Reminder Cancel Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, * , #

069 Voice Calling Mode Set

070 Voice Calling Mode Cancel

071 Voice Calling Deny Set

072 Voice Calling Deny Cancel

073 Speed Dialing-Station

Programming

074 Station Lock Set

075 Station Lock Cancel

Continued

10-C-22
(30393)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

076 Walking COS Set

077 Walking COS Cancel

078 Walking Station Set

079 Walking Station Cancel

080 Message Set

081 Message Cancel

082 Station Program Clear

083 Message Waiting Reply

084 TIE Trunk Access

085 Night Mode Set

086 Night Mode Cancel

087 Night Service Manual Mode Set

088 Night Service Manual Mode

Cancel Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, * , #

089 Flexible Night Service

090 Remote Station Lock Set

091 Remote Station Lock Cancel

092 Remote DND Set

093 Remote DND Cancel

094 Remote FWD Cancel

095 Remote FWD Cancel-One Time

096 BGM Through External Paging

097 Busy Out Trunk

098 Unbusy Trunk

099 OGM Record

100 OGM Playback

101 UCD Log In

102 UCD Log Out

103 Remote Timed Reminder Confirm

104 Remote Timed Reminder Set

105 Remote Timed Reminder Cancel

: clearing function is effective
10-C-23 for the item
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

106 Call Forwarding-Follow Me Set Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, ,#

107 Call Forwarding-Follow Me Cancel

108 Other PBX Extension 01

109 Other PBX Extension 02

110 Other PBX Extension 03

111 Other PBX Extension 04

112 Other PBX Extension 05

113 Other PBX Extension 06

One or two numeric digits
114 Other PBX Extension 07

115 Other PBX Extension 08

116 Other PBX Extension 09

117 Other PBX Extension 10

118 Other PBX Extension 11

119 Other PBX Extension 12

120 Other PBX Extension 13

121 Other PBX Extension 14

122 Other PBX Extension 15

123 Other PBX Extension 16

124 Transfer Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, ,#

125 Conference

: clearing function is effective

for the item

10-C-23-1
(70695)
Conditions
“Numbering Plan (NBP)” setting cannot be changed if “Operation (OPR)” Index 1,
Numbering Plan is set to “2 (Fixed 1)” or “3 (Fixed 2).” If “1” is selected, this setting is
changeable.

Logical check is performed by every storage according to the following logic:

Extension numbers are three or four digits and the leading one or two digits
are assigned in this screen.
Feature numbers may be one, two, three or four digits.
Those numbers assigned in this screen cannot include the same number
assigned to other feature number as the part or whole of it. For example, the
digit “2” is assigned to the feature number for “Trunk Group 01-08 Access” and
another digits “21” is assigned for “Trunk Group 09-19 Access,” it is checked at
the time of data storage. Similarly, “35” and “351” cannot be present at the
same time.

It is possible to store “0” through “9,” “ ,” “#,” as the feature numbers. However, if
“ ” or “#” is included in the feature numbers, those features are not accessed by the
rotary telephone extensions.

Item
Number
01 to 16 1st to 16th Extension numbers cannot include “ ” and “#.”
Hundred Block
Extension

108 to 123 Other PBX

Extension 01 to 16

10-C-24
(70695)
11.00 Communication Interface
(COM)
Description
To set parameters for the RS-232C and Modem
(Modulator and Demodulator) ports.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

C O M Mode ( Index Number ) ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 SIO # 1 (terminal)

2 SIO # 2 (SMDR)

3 Remote

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 NL-code 1 : CR + LF
2 : CR

2 Baud Rate 110/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600 : for SIO

300/1200 : for Remote

3 Word Length 6 : 6 bits (for Remote only)

7 : 7 bits
8 : 8 bits

4 Parity 1: none
2: mark (for SIO only)
3: space (for SIO only)
4: even
5: odd

5 Stop Bit 1 : 1 bit

2 : 1.5 bits (for Remote only)
3 : 2 bits

Conditions
It is possible to change assigning items in “Communication Interface (COM)” while
on-site administration or remote administration is performed or SMDR is being
printed out. New setting becomes effective when those operation modes are
finished.

10-C-25
12.00 Speed Dialing-System (SPD)

Description
To assign toll restriction levels and telephone
numbers for speed dialing codes.
(Password level: Three or higher)

Input Format

S P D Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

001 to 200 Speed dialing code

Input Value for Item Number

Item CLR
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Restriction Level 00 : a call is checked against the system toll

restriction feature
01 to 16 : a call is first checked against the toll
restriction level of Extension Users

2 Dial Maximum 32 digits consisting of numbers, *, # and

marks below :
P: pause
F : flash
[ : start of secret number
] : end of secret number
- : hyphen
(Enter [ ] in a pair.)
: clearing function is effective
for the item
Conditions
If “Operation (OPR)”, Tenant Service is set to “Y (Yes),” 200 speed dialing codes
can be split between tenant 1 and tenant 2. To split them, “Tenant (TNN)”, Speed
Dialing-System Boundary must be executed.

10-C-26
13.00 Absent Message (ABS)
Description
To assign absent messages.
(Password level: Three or higher)

Input Format

A B S Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
01 Will Return Soon

02 Gone Home

03 In a Meeting Fixed messages

% : must be input by the extension user
04 Back at % % : % % % %

05 Out until % % / % %

06 At Ext % % % %

07 Flexible messages
Maximum 16 digits
to Valid characters are letters, numbers and up to five %
16 % : input by the extension user
(Be sure to enter " before and after the message.)
: clearing function is effective
for the item
Conditions
If “Operation (OPR)”, Tenant Service is assigned to “Y (Yes),” 10 flexible messages
can be split between tenants 1 and 2. To split them, “Tenant (TNN)”, Absent
Message Boundary is used. Six fixed messages cannot be split between tenants.
They are used in common.

A flexible message in use by an extension user cannot be changed or deleted.

If you attempt, the changed data cannot be saved and the following error message
appears on the screen.
***** ERROR: Some extensions are using that message.

10-C-27
(30393)
14.00 Trunk Group 1 (TG1)
Description
To assign information for the 16 trunk groups.
This is the first of two blocks.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T G 1 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk group number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number

01 Type 1: DDD(Direct Distance Dialing)

2: FEX(Foreign Exchange)
3: WATS (Wide Area Telecommunication Service)
4: PVL (Private Line)
5: PBX (Behind PBX)
6: DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
7: TIE (TIE Line)

02 Name Trunk group name

Maximum three digits composed of characters, numbers,
and marks
(Enclose the name with double quotes ".)

03 Tenant 1/2: tenant number (not assignable when “Tenant

Service” is set to “N”)

04 Incoming/Outgoing 1 : incoming only

2 : outgoing only
3 : both way
Continued

10-C-28
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

Incoming Mode (Day) 1 : ATT (Attendant Console)

05 2 : DIL 1:1 (Direct In Line 1:1)
3 : DIL 1:N (Direct In Line 1:N)
4 : DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
5 : TAFAS 1 (Trunk Answer From Any Station 1)
6 : TAFAS 2 (Trunk Answer From Any Station 2)
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID or
PVL, or CO line access is outgoing only)

Incoming Mode (Night) 1 : same as Incoming Mode (Day)

06 2 : fixed
3 : flexible
4 : DISA
(Not assignable when Trunk Group type is DID or PVL, or
CO line access is outgoing only)

Intercept Routing (Day) 0 : none

07 A: transfer to the Attendant Console
DN XXXX (XXXX: directory number) : transfer to
an extension

Intercept Routing (Night) 0 : none

08 DN XXXX (XXXX: directory number) : transfer to
an extension

Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16

09 (Not assignable when CO line access is incoming only)

Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8

10 (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada (Not assignable when CO line access is incoming only)
only)

Dialing Plan 0 : none

11 (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada A: Type-A: 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
only) NXX+XXXX
B: Type-B: NPX+NXX+XXXX
NNX+XXXX
C: Type-C: 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX
1+NNX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
D: Type-D: 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+NXX+XXXX
NXX+XXXX
(N: 2 to 9, P: 0,1, X: 0 to 9)
(Not assignable when CO line access is incoming only)

12 CO-CO Duration Limit 01 to 64 : minute

13 Disconnect Time 1 : 1.5 seconds

2 : 4.0 seconds
Continued
10-C-29
(60395)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
14 Pause Time 1: 1.5 s
2: 2.5 s
3: 3.5 s
4: 4.5 s

15 Hook Switch Flash Time 0: none

1: 80 ms
2: 300 ms
3: 600 ms
4: 900 ms
5: 1200 ms

: clearing function is effective

for the item

Conditions
The assigning items:Type, Incoming Mode (Day/Night), Destination (DIL 1:N Only)
and Type and Number can be changed only when all the trunks belonging to the
trunk group are not in use. If any trunk is used, it is impossible to change.

Item
Number
03 Tenant If “ *** ” is displayed here, “Operation (OPR)”, Tenant Service is set to “N
(No).”

04 Incoming/Outgoing When ”Incoming Only” is selected in the trunk group with DID, the following
items are assignable but they do not work at all in Incoming Only mode.
• Disconnect Time
• Pause Time
• Hook Switch Flash Time
• Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal

For further information, refer to “3. Other Conditions” on page 9-E-7.

05 Incoming Mode Refer to Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group (1/2).”

(Day)

06 Incoming Mode If “2 (Fixed)” or “3 (Flexible)” is changed to another option, it cancels all the
(Night) settings of CO lines in “CO Line (COL)”, Night Answer Point (Type: No.)
which belong to the trunk group.
If “2 (Fixed)” is changed to “3 (Flexible)” and vice versa, the Night Answer
Points are not canceled.

11 Dialing Plan Refer to Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group (1/2).”

For the relation between trunk group/CO line setting and PITS DN button setting,
refer to Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group (1/2).”

10-C-30
(70695)(F)
15.00 Trunk Group 2 (TG2)
Description
This is the second block to assign various data
for trunk groups.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T G 2 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk group number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 Destination (DIL 1: N Only) I X (X : 1 to 8): ICM group number
P XX (XX : 01 to 32) : pickup group number
to DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits): extension number
0 : none
08 (Assignable only when “Incoming Mode (Day)” is set to
DIL 1: N)

09 DID Digit Modification Table 1 to 4 : table number

(Assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID)

10 PBX Access Code Maximum three digit numbers

to (No Restriction) (Assignable when the Trunk Group type is PBX, and CO
17 line access is both way)

18 PBX Access Code Maximum three digits of numbers

to (Restriction) (Assignable when the Trunk Group type is PBX, and CO
25 line access is both way)

26 Max. Dial No. 01 to 32: maximum dialing digits

after EFA Signal 00: cannot dial after external feature access

27 CO-TIE Restriction Y : CO-TIE connection is restricted

N : CO-TIE connection is allowed

28 TIE-CO Restriction Y : TIE-CO connection is restricted

N : TIE-CO connection is allowed

10-C-31
(70695)
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
29 TIE Forced Account mode Y : TIE callers are required to enter account code
when making CO calls.
N : Entering account code is not required.

30 TIE Incoming Delete Digit 0 : deleting no digits

1 to 4 : number of deleting digit(s)

31 TIE Incoming Insert Dial blank : Inserting no digit

A maximum of four digits number composed of 0
through 9 can be entered.

: clearing function is effective

Conditions for the item
Refer to Section 10-C-14.00 “Trunk Group 1 (TG1).”

10-C-31-1
(70695)
16.00 ICM/Paging Group (IPG)

Description
To assign intercom groups and paging groups to
tenant 1 or 2.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

I P G Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 For ICM groups

2 For PAG groups

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 ICM or PAG Group 1

2 ICM or PAG Group 2

3 ICM or PAG Group 3

4 ICM or PAG Group 4 1 : tenant 1

2 : tenant 2
5 ICM or PAG Group 5

6 ICM or PAG Group 6

7 ICM or PAG Group 7

8 ICM or PAG Group 8

Conditions
This screen does not appear if “Operation (OPR)”, Tenant Service is set to
“N (No).”
This must be programmed before programming “Call Pickup Group (CPG)”.

10-C-32
17.00 Call Pickup Group (CPG)

Description
To assign the ICM (intercom) groups, UCD
(Uniform Call Distribution) groups, and paging
groups which call pickup groups belong to.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

C P G Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Pickup group number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 ICM Group Number 1 to 8 : ICM Group 1 to 8

2 UCD Group Number 01 to 32 : UCD Group 1 to 32

00 : none

3 Paging Group Number 1 to 8 : Paging Group 1 to 8

00 : none

Conditions
If “Operation (OPR)” Tenant Service is set to “Y (Yes)”, “ICM/Paging Group (IPG)”
setting must be done before setting this screen.

Refer to Section 9-E-3.00 “Call Pickup Group” for the other conditions.

10-C-33
18.00 CO Line (COL)

Description
To assign parameters on a CO line basis. DATA ERROR
appears on the entry of parameters if no trunk card is
assigned in the Slot Assignment (SLA) programming.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

C O L Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

Four digit numbers (1011 to 3158) Physical number of the CO line

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 Trunk Group 01 to 16 : trunk group number
02 Trunk Name Maximum ten digits consisting of letters, numbers and marks
(Enclose the name with double quotes ".)
03 Direct Termination DN XXXX(XXXX : three or four digits) : extension number
0 : none
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID, PVL or TIE,
or Incoming Mode (Day) is set to any mode except DIL 1:1)
04 Night Answer Point DN XXXX(XXXX : three or four digits) : extension number
(Type : No.) U1: universal night answer 1
U2: universal night answer 2
0 : none
R : Remote Administration
N : Night Answer Group Extensions
(Not assignable in case of DID, TIE, or PVL, or outgoing only)
05 Dial Mode 1 : DTMF mode
2 : Pulse mode
3 : MFC-R2 mode
06 DTMF Duration Time 1 : 80 ms
2 : 160 ms
(Not assignable when the dial type is pulse)
1 : low (10 pps)
07 Pulse Speed 2 : high (20 pps)
(Not assignable when the dial type is DTMF)

Continued

10-C-34
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
08 % Break 1 : 60% break
2 : 67% break
(Not assignable when the dial type is DTMF)
00 : none
09 CPC Detection 01 : 6.5 ms detection
02 to 75 : 8N ms detection
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID or TIE)
1 : immediate start
10 Start Arrangement 2 : delayed wink start
(Assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID or TIE)
1 : 64 ms
11 Wink Signal Time-Out 2 : 128 ms
•
•
•
127 : 8.128 s

Conditions
Before setting this screen, “Trunk Group (TG1) (TG2)” must be programmed.
This cannot be programmed if no CO trunk card is assigned in
“Slot Assignment (SLA).” If any one of the cards is programmed, this screen can
be programmed.
If the “Trunk Group (TG1)” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to “6 (DID),”
or “7 (TIE)” the following items cannot be entered : “ *** ” is displayed :
• Direct Termination
• Night Answer Point (Type : No)
• CPC Detection
If the “Trunk Group (TG1)” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to anything other than “6 (DID),” or
“7 (TIE)”, the following items cannot be entered : “ *** ” is displayed :
• Start Arrangement • Wink Signal Time-Out
Item
Number
03 Direct Termination This is assignable only when the “Trunk Group (TG1)” containing the CO
line has “Incoming Mode (Day)” assigned to “2 (DIL 1:1).” Otherwise, “ *** ”
is displayed and setting is impossible.
04 Night Answer This is assignable only when the “Trunk Group (TG1)” containing the CO
Point (Type : No.) line has “Incoming Mode (Night)” assigned to “2 (Fixed)” or “3 (Flexible).”
Otherwise, “ *** ” is displayed and setting is impossible.
“N (NAG)” can be selected only when Trunk Group “Incoming Mode (Night)”
is assigned to “2 (Fixed).”
05 Dial Type If “Pulse mode” is selected, refer to Section 10-C-51.00 “World Select 1
(WS1)” about the following items:
• Interdigit Pause
• Pulse Type
• % Break Detect

10-C-35
(70695)
19.00 Pager (PAG)

Description
To assign items concerning external pagers.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

P A G Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 or 2 External pager number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Tenant 1 : tenant 1
2 : tenant 2

2 Tone Y: sending confirmation tone when accessing the external

pager
N: no confirmation tone

3 BGM Y: BGM heard over external paging

N: BGM not heard

Conditions
This cannot be programmed if “Operation (OPR)”, External Paging 1/2 are set to
“N (No).”

Item number 1 “Tenant” cannot be assigned if “Operation (OPR)”, Tenant Service

is set to “N (No).”

10-C-36
20.00 Music Source (MUS)

Description
To assign items concerning the music source.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

M U S Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 or 2 Music source number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 Tenant 1 : tenant 1
2 : tenant 2

2 For Use 1 : used when a call is put on hold

2 : used for BGM
3 : used for hold + BGM

Conditions
This cannot be programmed if “Operation (OPR)”, External Music Source 1/2 are
set to “N (No).”

Item number 1 “Tenant” cannot be assigned if “Operation (OPR)”, Tenant Service

is set to “N (No).”

10-C-37
21.00 Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

Description
To assign the tenant number for the AGC
(Automatic Gain Control) card, and to determine
if the tone detection is executed.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

A G C Mode Index Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

X XX
slot (01 to 15) Physical card location (101 to 315)
shelf (1 to 3)

000 Tone detect

Input Value for Item Number

Assigning Items Input Value

Slot No. XXX 1 : tenant 1

2 : tenant 2

Tone Detect Y: with tone detection

N: without tone detection

Conditions
This cannot be programmed if “Slot Assignment (SLA)” has no AGC card
programmed.

Slot No. XXX “*** ” will be displayed here if “Operation (OPR)”,

Physical Tenant Service is set “N (No).”
number

To assign Tone Detect only, enter “000” as the index number.

10-C-38
22.00 Extension (EXT)

Description
To assign extension parameters.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

E X T Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or four

or digits)
Four digit number (1011 to 3158) Physical location of extension

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 Telephone Type 1 : SLT (Single Line Telephone)
2 : PITS (Proprietary Integrated Telephone System)
3 : OPX (Off Premise Extension)
02 PITS Model 01 : KX-T123250
02 : KX-T123220
03 : KX-T123230
04 : KX-T123235 / KX-T7130
05 : KX-T61650
06 : KX-T61620
07 : KX-T61630
08 : KX-T30850
09 : KX-T30820
10 : KX-T30830
11 : KX-T7050 / KX-T7350
12 : KX-T7020 / KX-T7320
13 : KX-T7030 / KX-T7330
(for “PITS” only)
03 OHCA Circuit Y : with OHCA circuit
N : without OHCA circuit
(for “PITS” only)
04 Primary Directory Number Three or four digit extension directory number
05 Intercom Number One or two digit number
(Assignable only for “PITS”)
Continued

10-C-39
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

06 Station Name Maximum ten digits consisting of letters and/or numbers

(Surround each entry with double quotes ".)
07 ICM Group 1 to 8 : ICM group number
08 Pickup Group 00 : none
01 to 32 : pickup group number
09 Next Hunt Station 0 : none
DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four digits) : extension
directory number
10 Class of Service 01 to 32 : COS number
11 Data Line Security Y : Data Line Security is available
N : Data Line Security is disabled
12 Automatic Callback-Trunk Y : Automatic Callback-Trunk is available
N : Automatic Callback-Trunk is unavailable
13 Parallel Connect Y : Parallel Connection is available
N : Parallel Connection is not available
14 Message Waiting Indication 1(None) : The KX-T7051 cannot receive the message
waiting indication.
2(Lamp) : The KX-T7051 can receive the message
waiting indication.

: clearing function is effective

for the item

Conditions
This screen does not appear if “Slot Assignment (SLA)” does not have any of PLC,
SLC, HLC, OPX cards programmed or if “DN Assignment (DNA)” does not have
the extension number programmed.
Index
Number
01 Telephone Type Assignable telephone types differ depending on the card
types connected to the extensions, as follows:

Card Type Telephone Type Assignable

PLC PITS
SLC SLT
HLC PITS or SLT
OPX OPX

If “SLC” or “OPX” is selected, “ *** ” will appear in the

following items and cannot be assigned:
• Model
• OHCA Circuit
• Intercom Number
• Parallel Connect

10-C-40
(30393)
02 PITS Model If PITS telephone KX-T123230D is connected, select 04: KX-
T123235 (7130), for PITS Model. PITS KX-T123230D is
functionally equivalent to KX-T123235 and KX-T7130

If PITS telephone KX-T7130 is connected, select 04:KX-

T123235 (7130) for PITS Model.

If PITS telephone KX-T7320 is connected, select 12:KX-T7020

for PITS Model.

If PITS telephone KX-T7330 is connected, select 13:KX-T7030

for PITS Model.

If PITS telephone KX-T7350 is connected, select 11:KX-T7050

for PITS Model.

For OHCA Circuit, Intercom Number, Next Hunt Station, refer to Section 9-G-1.01
“Station (1/3).”

13 Parallel Connect Parallel connection assignment is available only when PITS

telephone interfaced with HLC card is selected.
If PITS telephone interfaced with PLC card is selected, “***” will
appear in Parallel Connect field and parallel connection
assignment is not available.

14 Message Waiting The setting of "2 (Lamp)" is valid only when the extension is an
Indication SLT with MESSAGE lamp which is interfaced with the KX-
T96175 (SLC card with Message Waiting).
If an extension card other than KX-T96175 is installed, “***”
appears and this item cannot be assigned.

Note:
Be sure to select “1 (None)” for this setting if an SLT without
MESSAGE lamp is interfaced with the KX-T96175.

10-C-41
(70695)
23.00 DSS Console (DSS)

Description
To assign parameters for DSS consoles.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

D S S Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

Four digit number Physical number of the extension port

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 DSS Console Model 1 : KX-T123240 (7040)

2 : KX-T61640

2 Pair Extension DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits) : extension directory

number
0 : none

Conditions
If HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) or PLC (Proprietary Line Circuit) is not assigned in the
“Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA ERROR appears on the screen.

10-C-42
(X)
24.00 DN Button Assignment (DNK)

Description
This is used to assign the function of the DN buttons
when the telephone type is set to “2 (PITS)” in the
Extension (EXT) program.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

D N K Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or

or four digits)
Four digit number Physical location of extension

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
01 DN-01 Day Ring 1: lamp indication only (no ringing)
2: ring immediately
02 DN-01 Night Ring 3: delayed 1 ring
4: delayed 3 rings
5: delayed 6 rings
03 DN-02 Type 01 : DSS (DN) button
02 : DSS (ICM) button
03 : One Touch button
04 : Privacy Change button
05 : External Feature Access button
06 : Call Park System button
07 : Call Park Station button
08 : Ringing Transfer button
09 : Call Split button
10 : FWD/DND button
11 : Tone Through Break button
12 : SNR button
13 : PDN button
14 : SDN button
15 : Private CO button
16 : OHCA button
17 : Message Waiting button
18 : UCD Log In button
19 : Local Alarm button
20 : Single CO button
21 : Group CO button
22 : CONF button
10-C-43 Continued
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
04 DN-02 Number Three or four digits: directory number for “PDN,” “SDN,”
“DSS (DN)”
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS (ICM)”
Maximum 16 digits: destination number for “One Touch”
Four digit number : physical location for “Private CO”
and “Single CO”
01 to 16 : trunk group number for “Group CO”

05 DN-02 SDN COS 1 : use the COS of the station

2 : use the COS of the PDN

06 DN-02 Day Ring

Same as the items 01 and 02
07 DN-02 Night Ring

08-12 DN-03

13-17 DN-04

18-22 DN-05

23-27 DN-06

28-32 DN-07 Same as the items from 03 to 07

33-37 DN-08

38-42 DN-09

43-47 DN-10

48-52 DN-11

53-57 DN-12

: clearing function is effective

for the item

10-C-44
Conditions
When “ *** ”s appear, they cannot be assigned.

The DN-01 through 03 buttons are assigned as the PDN buttons automatically.
The DN-01 button is fixed to a PDN button and cannot be changed to another
assignable feature button.
The PDN buttons assigned to the DN-02 and 03 buttons can be changed to
another assignable feature button and vice versa.
When two or three PDN buttons are used, they must be arranged consecutively.
For example, it is not possible to program as follows:

DN-03
PDN PDN SDN PDN
DN-02
SDN DN-3 DN-2 DN-1
DN-01
PDN
ICM
(DN buttons on PITS 7000 series)
(DN buttons on PITS type 20, 30 and 50)

DN-XX Type If “PRV-CO” (Private CO) is selected, a physical number of the selected
CO line must be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “CO Line (COL)”, Trunk
Group.
The trunk group where the CO line belongs must have “Trunk Group 1
(TG1)”, Type assigned to “4 PVL (Private Line).”

If “Single CO” is selected, a physical number of the selected CO line must

be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “CO Line (COL)”, Trunk
Group. The trunk group of the CO line must have “Trunk Group 1 (TG1)”,
Type assigned to “1 (DDD)” or “2 (FEX)” or “3 (WATS)”, or “5 (PBX).”

If “Group CO” is selected, a trunk group number must be programmed in

“Number.”
The programmed trunk group must have “Trunk Group 1 (TG1)”, Type
assigned to “1 (DDD)” or “2 (FEX)” or “3 (WATS)” or “5 (PBX).

10-C-45
(30393)
25.00 PF Button Assignment (PFK)

Description
This is used to assign the function of the PF
(programmable feature) buttons of PITS telephones
and DSS consoles.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

P F K Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or
or four digits)
Four digit number Physical location of extension

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
01 PF-01 Type 00 : not assigned
02 : DSS (ICM) button
03 : One Touch button
05 : External Feature Access button
06 : Call Park System button
07 : Call Park Station button
08 : Ringing Transfer button
09 : Call Split button
10 : FWD/DND button
11 : Tone Through Break button
12 : SNR (Saved Number Redial) button

02 PF-01 Number One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS (ICM)”
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for “One Touch”

03,04 PF-02

05,06 PF-03

07,08 PF-04 Same as the items 01 and 02

09,10 PF-05

11,12 PF-06
Continued
10-C-46
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
13,14 PF-07

15,16 PF-08

17,18 PF-09

19,20 PF-10
Same as the items 01 and 02
21,22 PF-11

23,24 PF-12

25,26 PF-13 (DSS console only)

27,28 PF-14 (DSS console only)

29,30 PF-15 (DSS console only)

31,32 PF-16 (DSS console only)

: clearing function is effective

for the item

Conditions
If “Extension (EXT)”, Telephone Type is not assigned to “2 (PITS)”, DATA ERROR
appears on the screen.

Only the PF3 button on PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 can be programmed to the
FWD/DND button.

Only the PF1 button on PITS type 50, KX-T7020 and KX-T7030 can be
programmed to the SNR button.

In case of a PITS telephone, Item Nos. 25 through 32 cannot be selected.

10-C-47
26.00 DSS Button Assignment
(DSK)

Description
This is used to assign the function of the DSS
(Direct Station Selection) buttons on a DSS
console and PITS KX-T30830.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

D S K Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or

or four digits)
Four digit number Physical location of extension

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 DSS-01 Type 00 : not assigned
01 : DSS (DN) button
02 : DSS (ICM) button
03 : One Touch button
04 : Privacy Change button
05 : External Feature Access button
06 : Call Park System button
07 : Call Park Station button
08 : Ringing Transfer button
09 : Call Split button
11 : Tone Through Break button
17 : Message Waiting button
18 : UCD Login button
19 : Local Alarm button

02 DSS-01 Number Three or four digits: directory number for “PDN,” “SDN,”
“DSS (DN)”
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS (ICM)”
Maximum 16 digits: destination number for “One Touch”

03,04 DSS-02
Same as the items 01 and 02
05,06 DSS-03

07,08 DSS-04
Continued
10-C-48
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
09,10 DSS-05

11,12 DSS-06

13,14 DSS-07

15,16 DSS-08

17,18 DSS-09 (DSS console only)

19,20 DSS-10 (DSS console only)

21,22 DSS-11 (DSS console only) Same as the items 01 and 02

23,24 DSS-12 (DSS console only)

25,26 DSS-13 (DSS console only)

27,28 DSS-14 (DSS console only)

29,30 DSS-15 (DSS console only)

• •
• • (DSS console only)
• •
63,64 DSS-32 (DSS console only)

Conditions
In case of PITS KX-T30830, Item Nos.17 through 64 cannot be selected.

10-C-49
27.00 Doorphone (DPH)

Description
To assign parameters for doorphones.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

D P H Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 4 Doorphone number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 Tenant 1 : tenant number 1
2 : tenant number 2
(not assignable when “Tenant Service” is assigned to “N”)

2 Open Duration 01 to 10 : door opening duration (seconds)

00 : door opening disabled

3 Doorphone Assignment Doorphone call destination

4 Doorphone Assignment
5 Doorphone Assignment
6 Doorphone Assignment
0 : none
P XX : pickup group number (XX : 01 to 32)
I X: ICM group number (X :1 to 8)
A : Attendant Consoles
DN XXXX : extension directory number (XXXX: three or four
digits)

Conditions
If DPH (Doorphone) card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program,
DATA ERROR appears on the screen.

10-C-50
28.00 Attendant Console (ATT)
Description
To assign parameters for Attendant Consoles.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A T T Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 ATT 1 Tenant Number Not assignable (fixed to tenant 1)

02 ATT 1 FDN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : FDN

0 : none

03 ATT 1 TRS LV 01 to 16: toll restriction level

04 ATT 1 PAG 1: Paging All Extensions

2: External Pager 1
3: External Pager 2
4: External Pager 1 & 2
5: Paging All Extensions and External Pagers

05 ATT 2 Tenant Number Not assignable (fixed to tenant 2)

06 ATT 2 FDN DN XXXX(XXXX : three or four digit number) : FDN

0 : none

07 ATT 2 TRS LV 01 to 16: toll restriction level

08 ATT 2 PAG Same as the item 04

09 Tenant 1 Overflow DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number): extension

directory number
0 : none

10 Tenant 1 Night DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number): extension

directory number
0 : none

11 Tenant 2 Overflow DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number): extension

directory number
0 : none
(Not assignable when “Tenant Service” is assigned to “N” )

Continued

10-C-51
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
12 Tenant 2 Night DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : extension
directory number
0 : none
(Not assignable when “Tenant Service” is assigned to “N” )

13 Busy-Out TG 01

14 Busy-Out TG 02

15 Busy-Out TG 03

16 Busy-Out TG 04

17 Busy-Out TG 05

18 Busy-Out TG 06

19 Busy-Out TG 07

20 Busy-Out TG 08 DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : extension

directory number
21 Busy-Out TG 09 0 : none

22 Busy-Out TG 10

23 Busy-Out TG 11

24 Busy-Out TG 12

25 Busy-Out TG 13

26 Busy-Out TG 14

27 Busy-Out TG 15

28 Busy-Out TG 16

Conditions
If ATLC (Attendant Console Line Circuit) card is not assigned in the “Slot
Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA ERROR appears on the screen.

10-C-52
29.00 Attendant Queue Priority (AQP)

Description
To assign incoming call priority when several calls
arrive at the Attendant Console at the same time.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A Q P Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 Internal Calling Station

02 Internal Calling Doorphone
03 Console Calling
04 Transfer Recall
05 Serial Calling Recall
06 Call Park Recall
07 Intercept Routing
08 Held Call Reminder
09 External Calling TG 01
10 External Calling TG 02
11 External Calling TG 03
12 External Calling TG 04 01 to 24 : call priority
13 External Calling TG 05
14 External Calling TG 06
15 External Calling TG 07
16 External Calling TG 08
17 External Calling TG 09
18 External Calling TG 10
19 External Calling TG 11
20 External Calling TG 12
21 External Calling TG 13
22 External Calling TG 14
23 External Calling TG 15
24 External Calling TG 16

Conditions
If ATLC card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
ERROR appears on the screen.
Regardless of the assignment of Held Call Reminder, Held Call Reminder does not
function if “Operation (OPR)”, Held Call Reminder is assigned to “N.”

10-C-53
30.00 Equal Access (EQU) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description
To assign parameters and trunk groups necessary
for making Equal Access calls.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

E Q U Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 4 Equal Access number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 Service Y : Equal Access service is available
N : Equal Access service is not available
(If “Service” is assigned to “N,” all items below are not
assignable.)

02 Name Up to three digits consisting of letters, numbers and

marks
(Enclose the name with double quotes ".)

03 Equal Access Carrier Code Three or four digits number

04 Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16

05 Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8: Area/Office Code table number

06 Long Distance (Delete) 1 to 4: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of

four
0 : no digits deleted

07 Long Distance (Insert) Up to four digits to be inserted

08 Local Toll (Delete) 1 to 4: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of

four
0 : no digits deleted

09 Local Toll (Insert) Up to four digits to be inserted

Continued

10-C-54
(60395)
(50195)
 Continued
Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
10 Local (Delete) 1 to 4: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of
four
0 : no digits deleted

11 Local (Insert) Up to four digits to be inserted

12 Trunk Group 01
13 Trunk Group 02
14 Trunk Group 03
15 Trunk Group 04
16 Trunk Group 05
17 Trunk Group 06
18 Trunk Group 07 Y : trunk group is available
19 Trunk Group 08 N : trunk group is unavailable
20 Trunk Group 09
21 Trunk Group 10
22 Trunk Group 11
23 Trunk Group 12
24 Trunk Group 13
25 Trunk Group 14
26 Trunk Group 15
27 Trunk Group 16
: clearing function is effective
for the item
Conditions
If “N (No)” is assigned to “Service”, “Class of Service 2 (CS2)”, EQA 1 to 4 can be
programmed. However, Equal Access which has “N” assigned here does not
function.

For conditions on Item Numbers 06 to 11, refer to Section 9-H-1.00 “Equal

Access.”

It is administrable to activate or deactivate the Equal access feature on a system-

wide basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further information.

Under a New Dialing Plan, equal access code has changed from “10XXX” to
"101XXXX". Refer to Section 10-C-63.00 “Equal Access Code (EQC)” for further
information.

10-C-55
(50195)
31.00 OCC Access (OCC) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description
To assign parameters and trunk groups
necessary for OCC (Other Common Carrier)
Access calls.
(Password level : Three or higher)

Input Format

O C C Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 4 OCC Access number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
01 Service Y : OCC Access service is available
N : OCC Access service is not available
(If “Service” is assigned to “N,” all items below are not
assignable.)

02 Name Up to three digits consisting of letters, numbers and

marks
(Enclose the name with double quotes ".)

03 Local Access Code Maximum eight digit number

04 Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16

05 Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8 : Area/Office Code table number

06 Long Distance (Delete) 00 to 15 : number of digits to be deleted to a maximum

of four
00 : no digits deleted

07 Long Distance (Insert) Digits to be inserted up to a maximum of 20 digits

consisting of numbers, *, # and marks below:
H: home position
[ : start of secret number
] : end of secret number
P: pause
D: switch to DTMF
- : hyphen
(Enter [ ] in a pair.)

Continued

10-C-56
(60395)
 Continued
Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
08 Local Toll (Delete) Same as the Item 06

09 Local Toll (Insert) Same as the Item 07

10 Local (Delete) Same as the Item 06

11 Local (Insert) Same as the Item 07

12 Trunk Group 01
13 Trunk Group 02
14 Trunk Group 03
15 Trunk Group 04
16 Trunk Group 05
17 Trunk Group 06
18 Trunk Group 07
Y : trunk group is available
19 Trunk Group 08 N : trunk group is not available
20 Trunk Group 09
21 Trunk Group 10
22 Trunk Group 11
23 Trunk Group 12
24 Trunk Group 13
25 Trunk Group 14
26 Trunk Group 15
27 Trunk Group 16

: clearing function is effective

for the item
Conditions
If “N (No)” is assigned to “Service,” “Class of Service 2 (CS2)”, OCC 1 to 4 can be
programmed. However, OCC Access which has “N” assigned here does not
function.

For conditions on Items Numbers 06 to 11, refer to Section 9-H-2.00 “OCC Access.”

It is available to activate or deactivate the OCC access feature on a system-wide

basis by system programming.
Refer to Section 10-C-52.00 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further information.

10-C-57
(60395)
32.00 Toll Restriction 1 (TR1) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description
To assign local call control, toll restriction level, and
office code table number for area or office codes.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

T R 1 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 8 Area/office code table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
0001 Entry=200 Restriction Level 01 to 16 : toll restriction level for area code
for AC 00 : none

0002 Entry=200 Restriction Level 01 to 16 : toll restriction level for office code
for OC 00 : none

0003 Entry=200 Office Code Table 01 to 64

Number 00 : not used

0004 Entry=200 10 Digits Local Call Y : The leading 3 digits of the dialed number is checked
against the restriction level for AC.
N : The leading 3 digits of the dialed number is checked
against the restriction level for OC.
(This setting is effective for Type-D only)

0005 Entry=201 Restriction Level

• for AC •
• • Same as the items from 0001 to 0004
• •
3200 Entry=999 10 Digits Local Call

Conditions
None

10-C-58
(60395)
33.00 Toll Restriction 2 (TR2) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description
Used to assign yes or no to entry numbers in an
office code table.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

T R 2 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 64 Office code table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
001 Entry=200 Y: applicable
N: not applicable

002 Entry=201
• •
• • Same as the item 001
• •
800 Entry=999

Conditions
None

10-C-59
(60395)
34.00 Toll Restriction 3 (TR3) (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description
To assign 10-digit toll restriction for a long
distance call and to assign 7-digit toll restriction
for a local call.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

T R 3 Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number

01 to 64 Number 7-digit number

Conditions
None

34.00 Toll Restriction 3 (TR3) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Description
Assigns 7-digit number to prevent extension
users from making unauthorized outgoing CO
calls.
(Password level : Two or higher)
[Software version 15.XX or higher]
3 through 7-digit number can be assigned.
[Others]
3-digit number can be assigned

Input Format

T R 3 Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number

01 to 64 Number 3 through 7-digit number

Conditions
None

10-C-60
(60395)
(70695)
35.00 Automatic Route Selection 1 (AR1)

Description
To assign the route plan table number for dialed
area or office codes.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A R 1 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

200 to 999 (for U.S.A.and Canada) Entry number

000 to 999 (for New Zealand)

Input Value for Item Number

Item Assigning Items Input Value

Number
1 Route Plan Table No. When 00 : not using area codes
Area Code 01 to 32 : route plan table number

2 Route Plan Table No. When 00 : not using office codes

Office Code 01 to 32 : route plan table number

Conditions
None

10-C-61
(70695)
36.00 Automatic Route Selection 2 (AR2) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description
To assign all the office codes used in each area
code. (Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A R 2 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Office code table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR

001 Area Code 200 to 999 : area code

002 Route Plan Table No. 01 to 32 : route plan table number

003 Entry=200 Y: usable as an office code

N: not usable

004 Entry=201
• •
• • Same as the item 003
• •
802 Entry=999

: clearing function is effective

for the item
Conditions
None

10-C-62
(60395)
37.00 Automatic Route Selection 3 (AR3)

Description
To make up route plan tables by assigning time
zones and route list numbers to each time zone
for each day of the week.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A R 3 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Route plan table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
Number
01 Start Hour 1 X X X : starting time for the time zone
A or P : a.m./p.m.
01 to 12: hour

02 Route List Number MON.

03 Route List Number TUE.
04 Route List Number WED.
05 Route List Number THU. 01 to 64 : route list table number
06 Route List Number FRI.
07 Route List Number SAT.
08 Route List Number SUN.

09 Start Hour 2 Same as the item 01

10 to 16 Route List Number (MON. Same as the items from 02 to 08

to SUN.)

17 Start Hour 3 Same as the item 01

18 to 24 Route List Number (MON. Same as the items from 02 to 08

to SUN.)

25 Start Hour 4 Same as the item 01

26 to 32 Route List Number (MON. Same as the items from 02 to 08

to SUN.)
: clearing function is effective
Conditions for the item
None
10-C-63
(70695)
38.00 Automatic Route Selection 4 (AR4)

Description
To assign trunk groups in order of economical
priority (1 to 4) and assign parameters on each
priority.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A R 4 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 64 Route lists table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 Priority 1 Trunk Group No. 01 to 16

02 Priority 1 Modified List No. 01 to 32 : modified digit table number

03 Priority 2 Warning Tone Y : send warning tone

N : do not send warning tone

04 Priority 2 ARS Restriction Level 01 to 16

05 Priority 2 Trunk Group No. Same as the item 01

06 Priority 2 Modified List No. Same as the item 02

07 Priority 3 Warning Tone Same as the item 03

08 Priority 3 ARS Restriction Level Same as the item 04

09 Priority 3 Trunk Group No. Same as the item 01

10 Priority 3 Modified List No. Same as the item 02

11 Priority 4 Warning Tone Same as the item 03

12 Priority 4 ARS Restriction Level Same as the item 04

13 Priority 4 Trunk Group No. Same as the item 01

14 Priority 4 Modified List No. Same as the item 02

: clearing function is effective
Conditions for the item

None

10-C-64
(70695)
39.00 Automatic Route Selection 5 (AR5)

Description
To make up modified digit tables.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A R 5 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Modified digit table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value CLR
1 Delete Digits 1 to 9 : number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of
nine
0 : no deletion

2 Insert Digit Digits to be inserted up to a maximum of 26 digits

consisting of numbers, , # and marks listed below :
H: home position (◆for U.S.A. and Canada only)
P: pause
D: switch to DTMF
[ : start of secret number
] : end of secret number
- : hyphen
(Enter [ ] in a pair.)

: clearing function is effective

for the item
Conditions
None

10-C-65
(70695)
 40.00 DISA (DIS)

Description
To assign parameters for the DISA (Direct Inward
System Access) feature.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

D I S Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

000 Block 1

Physical Number (101 to 112, 201 to 215, Physical slot number for Block 2
301 to 315)

Input Value for Item Number

Item Assigning Items Input Value

Number
1 Delayed Answer 1: 1 ring
2: 2 rings
3: 3 rings
4: immediately

2 Prolong Time 1 to 7 : minute(s)

Block 1
3 Control Code “*” Y: control code entry is possible
N: control code entry is not allowed

4 Tone Detect Y: executing tone detection

N: no tone detection

1 For Use 1: DISA

2: OGM1
3: OGM2
Block 2 4: W-UP

2 Tenant 1 : Tenant 1
2 : Tenant 2

Conditions
If a DISA card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
ERROR appears on the screen.
Tenant Not assignable, if “Operation (OPR) ” Index 1, Tenant Service is
set to “N (No).”
10-C-66
(40993)
41.00 DISA Code (DIC)
Description
To assign parameters on each DISA code.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

D I C Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 8 DISA code number

Input Value for Item Number

Item Assigning Items Input Value

Number
1 ARS Override Y: specifying a trunk group is available
(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) N: specifying a trunk group is unavailable

2 Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16

3 Account Code Y: forced

N: optional

4 Prolong Y: prolonging is available

N: prolonging is not available

5 Tenant 1 : tenant 1
2 : tenant 2
(not assignable if “Tenant Service” is preset to “N”)

Conditions
If a DISA card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
ERROR appears on the screen.

Item
Number
1 ARS Override Not assignable if “Operation (OPR)” Index 1,
Automatic Route Selection is set to “N (No).”

10-C-67
(60395)
42.00 DISA Password (DIP)
Description
To assign the users' passwords for DISA required
for making outgoing CO call via DISA feature.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format
☛
D I P Mode ( Item Number ) CR

☛ Show Mode is denied.

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 to 8 DISA Password Four digit number
(Not displayed on the screen)

: clearing function is effective

for the item
Conditions
If the DISA card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
ERROR appears on the screen.

10-C-68
43.00 DID (DID)
Description
To define the characteristics of the DID (Direct
Inward Dialing) modification table.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

D I D Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 4 DID modification table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 Receive Digit 1 to 7: number of received digit(s)

2 Delete Digit 1 to 6: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of

six
0 : no digits to be deleted

3 Insert Dial No. The digits to be inserted to a maximum of three

: clearing function is effective

for the item
Conditions
This is impossible to program if “Slot Assignment (SLA)” has no DID card
programmed.

10-C-69
44.00 UCD 1 (UC1)
Description
To assign UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) group
parameters.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

U C 1 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 UCD group number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 Floating DN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : Floating DN
0 : no Floating DN

2 Overflow DN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : Overflow DN

0 : no Overflow DN

3 Overflow Time 01 to 10 : minute(s) ; Overflow timer

00 : no Overflow timer
(Not assignable for UCD groups 01 to 04)

Conditions
None

10-C-70
45.00 UCD 2 (UC2)
Description
To specify the treatment of calls that are placed on
the UCD groups and queued into the busy queue.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

U C 2 Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 to 4 UCD group number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
01 Time Table # 01

02 Time Table # 02

03 Time Table # 03 00 : stopper

04 Time Table # 04 01 : timer (15 secs)

05 Time Table # 05 02 : timer (30 secs)

06 Time Table # 06 03 : timer (45 secs)

07 Time Table # 07 04 : timer (60 secs)

08 Time Table # 08 05 : sending OGM 1 (if busy, waiting until idle status)

09 Time Table # 09 06 : sending OGM 2 (if busy, waiting until idle status)

10 Time Table # 10 07 : sending OGM 1 (if busy, skipping)

11 Time Table # 11 08 : sending OGM 2 (if busy , skipping)

12 Time Table # 12 09 : sending Music on Hold

13 Time Table # 13 10 : transferring to the overflow destination

14 Time Table # 14 11 : disconnecting the line

15 Time Table # 15 12 : returning to the first column

16 Time Table # 16

Conditions
None

10-C-71
(50195)
46.00 Information (INF)
Description
To assign the customer’s name, address,
telephone number etc..
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

I N F Mode ( Item Number ) CR

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value ☛ CLR
Number
01 Customer Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks

02 Location Up to 64 letters, numbers or marks

03 Phone No. Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks

04 Modem No. Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks

05 Customer Contact Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks

06 Data of Installation Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks

07 Unit ID Up to 8 letters, numbers or marks

08 Installers Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks

09 Programmers Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks

10 Comments Up to 70 letters, numbers or marks

☛ Be sure to enclose all entries with quotation marks.

Conditions
None

10-C-72
47.00 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)
Description
To assign the relationship between CO lines
(LCOT, GCOT) and extensions (HLC, SLC)
during a power failure.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

P F T Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 18 Power Failure Transfer number

Input Value for Item Number

Item Assigning Items Input Value CLR

Number
1 Trunk Slot No. Physical slot number (three digit number) : 101 to 315

2 Extension Slot No. Physical slot number (three digit number) : 101 to 315

: clearing function is effective

for the item
Conditions
None

10-C-73
48.00 Change Password (CHG)

Description
To assign passwords for each level.
(Password level : One)

Input Format

C H G Mode Index Number ( Item Number ) CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1 On-Site

2 Remote

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value ☛
Number
1 Protection Level 1 Password Four digits consisting of letters or numbers

2 Protection Level 2 Password Four digits consisting of letters or numbers

3 Protection Level 3 Password Four digits consisting of letters or numbers

4 Protection Level 4 Password Four digits consisting of letters or numbers

☛ Enclose all entries in quotation marks.

Conditions
None

10-C-74
49.00 CPC Signal Detect Timing-
Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)
Description
CPC command is used to make CPC (Calling Party Control) signal detection
effect on outgoing CO calls as well as on incoming CO calls.
Refer to Section 3-F-7.00 “Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection” for
further information.
(Password level: Three or higher)

Input Format

C P C Mode Index Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1011 to 3158 Physical Number of the Trunk Port

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None CPC signal detect timing 00 : CPC signal is not detected

(for outgoing CO calls) 01 : 6.5 ms
02 : 16 ms (8 N ms N=2 to 75)
•
•
•
75 : 600 ms
(Default = 00)

Conditions
Some switching system of central office may send CPC-like signal in dialing
sequence and the attempt of making a call may be terminated.
If your switching system does not send CPC-like signal in dialing sequence,
we recommend to make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO calls.

CPC signal detection can be assigned to incoming CO calls only or both on

incoming and outgoing CO calls. If CPC signal detection is assigned to
outgoing CO calls only, it does not function.

10-C-75
50.00 Automatic Busy-out Count (ABC)
Description
It is administrable to busy out the invalid CO line automatically to prevent
extension users from accessing it by monitoring the loop current sent through
CO line.
(Password level: Three or higher)
One of the following three options is assignable on a CO line basis.
(1) N=0
On CO calls, the system monitors a loop current sent through the CO line,
and if a loop current is not detected, busy tone is sent to the caller.
(2) N=1 to 240
On CO calls, the system monitors a loop current sent through the CO line,
and if a loop current is not detected pre-assigned times (1 to 240)
consecutively, busy tone is sent to the caller.
Then the system busies out the corresponding CO line automatically.
(3) N=241
On CO calls, the system does not monitor the loop current sent through the
CO line, therefore, CO line is always seized by extension users whether
loop current is running or not.
Refer to Section 52.00 “WS 2” L-COT/G-COT Busy Out Looprelay.

Input Format

A B C Mode Index Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1011 to 3158 Physical Number of the Trunk Port

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None Automatic Busy-out Count xxx (0 to 241)

(Loop Current Detection) (Automatic Busy-out)
0: Yes No
1 to 240 : Yes Yes
if loop current is not
detected by the pre-
assigned times (1 to 240)
241 : No No
(Default = 241)

10-C-76
51.00 World Select 1 (WS1)
Description
“WS1” command provides the following assignments.
(Password level: Two or higher)

(1) Interdigit Pause (For Dial Pulse Trunk)

Interdigit Pause is used to distinguish between pulse signals. To meet the requirements of your
central office, select the appropriate value that represents the delay between dial pulses.This setting
is only required when using dial pulse trunks.

(2) Pulse Type (For Dial Pulse Trunk)

The system supports the following three types of dial pulse signaling. Select the appropriate option to
your area.This setting is only required when using dial pulse trunks.

(3) Automatic Redial Retry Count

Used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried. Automatic redialing of the last dialed
number is done up to the specified number of times.

(4) Automatic Redial Retry Interval

Used to set the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.Refer to Section 4-C-4.04 “Automatic
Redial” for further information.

(5) % Break Detect (SLT)

Dialed digits from dial pulse type Single Line Telephone (SLT) is transmitted to the system by making
and breaking a loop current (dc path), thereby interrupting loop current.Duration time required to
detect the number of breaks depends on the SLT connected and can be administered to “16 to 96 ms”
or “16 to 136 ms” by this command.

(6) Flash Detect (SLT)

It is assignable that the Flash signal transmitted from SLT is detected or not by the system.If “0=No” is
selected, the system does not detect the Flash signal transmitted from SLT.

(7) Flash Detect (TIE)

Assigns the length of the flash time which applies to calls on TIE trunks.
This is the time the system needs to detect the flash signal sent from the other PBX of a TIE Line
Network. Duration time required is determined by the other PBXs.

(8) Answer Decision Timer

This entry applies to calls on TIE trunks.
This is the time the system needs to recognize the off-hook signal sent from the other PBX before
connecting the voice path.
The entry is entered in 32 ms increments.

Input Format

W S 1 Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (1-8) CR

Index Number
None

10-C-77
(70695)
Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Interdigit Pause 1 : 630 ms

2 : 830 ms
3 : 1030 ms
(Default=2)

2 Pulse Type 1 : Normal

2 : New Zealand
3 : Sweden

( Default = 1 — Areas other than New Zealand

2 — New Zealand )
3 Automatic Redial Retry Count 01 : 1 time
•
•
•
32 : 32 times
Default = 15 — U.S.A.
( 10 — Areas other than U.S.A. )
4 Automatic Redial Retry Interval 01 : 10 s
•
•
•
32 : 320 s
Default = 04 — U.S.A. and Canada
( 06 — Areas other than U.S.A. and Canada )
5 % Break Detect 1 : 16 to 96 ms
2 : 16 to 136 ms
(Default = 1)

6 Flash Detect (SLT) 0 : No

1 : Yes
(Default = 1)

10-C-78
(70695)
 Continued
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

7 Flash Detect (Tie) 0 : Disabled (no detection) (200ms~ : On-hook)

1 : 200 ms to 1 s (1 s ~ : On-hook)
2 : 80 ms to 1 s (1 s ~ : On-hook)
3 : 200 ms to 1.5 s (1.5 s ~ : On-hook)
4 : 80 ms to 1.5 s (1.5 s ~ : On-hook)
(Default = 1)

8 Answer Decision Timer 001: 32 ms

002: 64 ms
•
•
•
255 : 8.16 s
(Default = 001)

10-C-78-1
(70695)
52.00 World Select 2 (WS2)
Description
“WS2” command provides the following assignments.
(Password level: Two or higher)

(1) First Dial Timer

On outgoing CO calls, the system waits at least 0.5 seconds after seizing
the CO line, before sending the dialing digits required by the central office.
This allows the central office enough time to accept the dialing digits
correctly. Default setting is 1.0 second and can be ranged from 0.5 to 8.0
seconds.

(2) First Dial Timer (DID) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
Available when “Type” of a Trunk Group is set to “DID” or “TIE”.
(3) EQU Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Used to activate or deactivate the EQU Access feature on a system-wide
basis. If “N” is selected by this command, programming screen of “Special
Carrier Access” Equal Access is not accessible.
(4) OCC Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Used to activate or deactivate the OCC Access feature on a system-wide
basis. If “N” is selected by this command, programming screen of “Special
Carrier Access” OCC Access is not accessible.
(5) Outgoing CO Back Tone
On outgoing CO calls, dialed number is toned out, which informs the
extension users that dialed number has been dialed.
CO Dialing Tone is usually toned out by default setting, select “N” to turn off
the CO dialing tone.
(6) L-COT Busy Out Looprelay
When CO line is busied out either manually by the operator or automatically
by the system, the state of Loop Relay is controlled by this setting.
(7) G-COT Busy Out Looprelay (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
When CO line is busied out either manually by the Operator 1, or
automatically by the system, the state of Loop Relay and Ring-FG are
controlled by this setting.
(8) Pay Tone Frequency
Used to select the appropriate pay tone frequency depending on the local
CO. Available when PCOT card (KX-T96189) is installed in the system.
(9) Pay Tone Gain
Used to select the appropriate pay tone gain depending on the local CO.
Available when PCOT card (KX-T96189) is installed in the system.

Input Format

W S 2 Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (1-9) CR

Index Number
None

10-C-79
(70695)
Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number
Assigning Items Input Value

1 First Dial Timer 01 : 0.5 s

02 : 1.0 s
•
•
16 : 8.0 s
(Default=02)

2 First Dial Timer (DID) 001 : 32 ms

002 : 64 (32✕2) ms
•
•
255 : 8.16 (32✕255) s
(Default=002)

3 EQU Access Y: EQU Access is allowed

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) N: EQU Access is not allowed
(Default = Y — U.S.A., N — Canada)

4 OCC Access Y: OCC Access is allowed

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) N: OCC Access is not allowed
(Default = Y — U.S.A., N — Canada)

5 Outgoing CO Back Tone Y: Dialed digits is toned out

N: Dialed digits is not toned out
(Default = Y)

6 L-COT Busy Out Looprelay Y: Loop Relay ON

N: Loop Relay OFF
(Default = N)

7 G-COT Busy Out Looprelay 1 : Loop Relay ON + Ring-FG Open

(◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) 2 : Loop Relay OFF + Ring-FG Close
3 : Loop Relay OFF + Ring-FG Open
(Default = 3)

8 Pay Tone Frequency 1 : 16 KHz

2 : 12 KHz
(Default = 1)

9 Pay Tone Gain 01 : 0 dB

02 : 1 dB
•
•
10 : 9 dB
•
•
32 : 31 dB
(Default = 10)

10-C-80
(70695)
53.00 World Select 3 (WS3)
Description
“WS3” command provides the following assignments.
(Password level: Two or higher)

(1) DIL 1: N CO Key Only (PITS only)

It is programmable that an incoming CO call routed via “DIL 1: N” feature
arrives at “CO button only” or “CO button or PDN button” as follows.
(Parameters)
Y : An incoming CO call routed via DIL 1: N feature only arrives at a PITS
telephone which has associated CO button (SCO, GCO).
If no CO button is assigned on a PITS, an incoming CO call will not
arrive at that extension.
N : An incoming CO call routed via DIL 1: N feature arrives at CO button
(SCO, GCO) or PDN button.
If no CO button is available on a PITS, an incoming CO call will arrive at
PDN button available. (default)

(2) EXT Off-hook BLF (PITS only)

The status indicator on DSS (DN) button reflects the idle/busy status of the
associated extension user under one of the following settings. This selection
also applies to “Busy Lamp Field” screen of an Attendant Console.
(Parameters)
Y : DSS indicator lights when all PDN buttons of the associated extension
are busy or Off-Hook. (default)
N : DSS indicator lights only when all PDN buttons of the associated
extension are busy.

(3) DTMF-Tone Integration

On extensions with the Voice Mail Port parameter enabled, the KX-T336
system can send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the state of the call (busy,
answered, ringing, disconnect, etc.) in addition to the normal call progress
tones. These codes enable the Voice Processing system to immediately
recognize the current state of the call and improve its call handling
performance.
(Parameters)
Y : The KX-T336 system sends codes (DTMF tones) to the VPS.
N : The KX-T336 system does not send codes (DTMF tones) to the VPS.
(default)

10-C-81
(70695)
(4) SLT On-hook Operation Mode
In single line telephone procedures, active call is put on consultation hold
when the switchhook is pressed down for approximately 1/2 second and
released.

In this case, consultation hold recall tone will ring immediately if you replace
the handset on the switchhook without dialing any digits.
Then you may hear recorder tone when you lift the handset to reply this
ringing

This may happen sometimes if the handset is replaced on the switchhook

after hopping on it.

To prevent such unexpected consultation hold tone from ringing, select “2”
for this setting.

When setting “2” is selected,

a call put consultation hold will be disconnected if you replace the handset
on the switchhook without dialing any digits.

When “1” is selected. — default

(1) Talking (2) Hooking (3) On-hook (4) Recall

Talking with a A call is put on Without dialing Consultation hold
caller. consultation any digits. tone rings.
hold.
When “2” is selected

(1) Talking (2) Hooking (3) On-hook (4) Disconnection

Talking with a A call is put on Without dialing A call on
caller. consultation any digits. consultation hold
hold. is disconnected.
(Note)
To hang up and make another call right away, an SLT user should be sure to
hold down the switchhook for more than two seconds.

(Parameters)
1 : Hang-up causes ringing of consultation hold recall tone. (default)
2 : Hang-up disconnects a call on consultation hold.

10-C-82
(30393)
(5) Mode Selection of Calls Arriving at ATT
When two attendant consoles are connected to the system, one of the
following three types of Incoming Mode can be selected.
Options 2 and 3 work only for the incoming outside call routed via a CO line
which belongs to the Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned
as “ATT.”
(Parameters)
1. Load Sharing
Incoming outside calls are distributed evenly to two attendant consoles
so that they can share the same load. (default)
2. Simultaneous Ringing
An incoming outside call rings at two attendant consoles simultaneously.
3. Interconsole IRNA
If an incoming outside call ringing at one attendant console is not
answered within a specified time period (Attendant Overflow Time), it will
be automatically transferred to another attendant console automatically.

(6) Centrex ARS Mode

In ARS mode, not only a 7-digit or 10-digit number but a number equal to or
less than 6-digit (such as CENTREX feature access code) that follow the
ARS access code (default: 9) can be routed via an outside line.
A number equal to or less than 6-digit is routed via Local Trunk Dial Access
procedure after passing toll restriction process.
A 7-digit or 10-digit number is routed via ARS procedure after passing toll
restriction process.
(Parameters)
Y : A number equal to or less than 6-digit can be routed via an outside line
in ARS mode.
N : A number equal to or less than 6-digit can not be routed via an outside
line in ARS mode. (default)

(7) Waiting for Second Dial Tone Mode

In some area, upon completion of facility access code entry, the extension
user must ensure the reception of the second dial tone from the Central
Office before continuing to dial the telephone number.
(Parameters)
Y : The system waits for the second CO dial tone.
N : The system does not wait for the second CO dial tone. (default)

(8) Polarity Reversal Mode

With an R-LCOT card (KX-T96183), the system determines the start and
completion of calls by detecting a reversal of CO line polarity.
In some areas, however, CO doesn’t send a reverse signal when a certain
type of special telephone number is dialed.
In this case, select “1. Special Mode.”
When “1. Special Mode” (default) is selected, the system connects a speech
path when “External Interdigit Timer” (5 s - default) expires, or when it
detects a reversal of CO line polarity.

10-C-82-1
(70695)(E)
 (Parameters)
1. Special Mode (default)
The system connects a speech path when “External Interdigit Timer”
expires, or it detects a reversal of CO line polarity. Call duration time
counting starts when the system detects a reversal of CO line polarity.
2. Normal Mode
The system connects a speech path and starts counting the call duration
time when it detects a reversal of CO line polarity.

(9) /# Allow Mode

Used to determine if the dialed “ ” and/or “#” in the leading 3 digits will be
checked by Toll Restriction. This assignment is required for certain central
offices (CO) to prevent toll fraud. Some CO ignore the user-dialed “ ”
and/or “#.” If your CO is such a type, select “N” (Restricted).
(Parameters)
Y : Not restricted
N : Restricted (default)

(10) Message Waiting Lamp Off-Control — Voice Mail

Used to determine whether the system turns off the Message Waiting lamp
or the VPS does when the VPS answers the callback from the message
receiver.
(Parameters)
1. Normal Mode
The system turns off the Message Waiting lamp. (default)
2. Voice Mail Mode 1
Only the VPS port that turned on the Message Waiting lamp can turn it
off.
3. Voice Mail Mode 2
Any VPS port can turn off the Message Waiting lamp.

(11) µ-law—A-law (E-1 only)

Used to select the appropriate PCM(Pulse Code Modulation) conversion
mode. This setting is valid only when E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK card (KX-
T96188) is installed to the system.
(Parameters)
1: µ-law
2: A-law (default)

(12) SLT Transfer Operation

If set to “Mode 2”, the following operations become available with the SLT
users.
• Screened Call Transfer to Trunk (Section 5-D-1.06)
• Call Transfer by using the feature number for “Transfer.” (Section 5-D-1.01
through 1.05)
• Establishing a conference call by dialing the feature number for
“Conference.” (Section 5-E-1.00)

(Parameters)
1: Mode 1 (default)
2: Mode 2
10-C-82-2
(70695)(E)
(13) Ringback Tone While Transfer
Used to select the type of sound source during an unscreened call transfer
to an extension.
By default, the caller hears Music on Hold (if provided) while the caller is
being transferred to another location. However, if no music source is
provided with the system, the caller hears no sound. In this case, we
recommend changing the setting to “Y(Ringback Tone).”
(Parameters)
Y : Ringback Tone
N : Music on Hold (default)

(14) Charge Display

Used to select the initial display format of Charge Fee Reference, Charge
Meter or Charge Fee. By default, duration time of an outside call is shown
on the display of PITS.
This assignment is valid when “Charge Management” feature (Section 3-F-
19.00) is utilized.
(Parameters)
1: Duration Display (default)
2: Charge Meter Display
3: Charge Fee Display

(15) Tone Except Idle Status (MFC-R2)

Used to select the type of tone by which the caller knows the status of the
destination party.
(Parameters)
1: Idle : Ringback tone
Busy : Busy tone
Other status : Reorder tone (default)

2: Idle : Ringback tone

Other status : Busy tone

3: Idle : Ringback tone

Other status : Reorder tone

Input Format

W S 3 Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (01-15) CR

Index Number
None

10-C-82-3
(70695)
Input Value for Item Number
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 DIL 1: N CO Key Only Y: Arrives at CO button only

N: Arrives at CO button or PDN button
(Default = N)

02 EXT Off-hook BLF Y: DSS indicator lights when all PDN buttons of
the associated extension are busy or Off-Hook
N: DSS indicator lights only when all PDN buttons
of the associated extension are busy
(Default = Y)

03 DTMF-Tone Integration Y: The KX-T336 system sends codes (DTMF

tones) to the VPS.
N: The KX-T336 system does not send codes
(DTMF tones) to the VPS.
(Default = N)

04 SLT On-hook Operation mode 1 : Hang-up causes ringing of consultation hold

recall tone.
2 : Hang-up disconnects a call on consultation
hold.
(Default = 1)

05 Mode Selection of Calls Arriving at ATT 1 : Load Sharing

2 : Simultaneous Ringing
3 : Interconsole IRNA
(Default = 1)

06 Centrex ARS Mode Y: A number equal to or less than 6-digit can be

routed via an outside line in ARS mode.
N: A number equal to or less than 6-digit can not
be routed via an outside line in ARS mode.
(Default = N)

07 Waiting for Second Dial Tone Y: The system waits for the second CO dial tone.
N: The system does not wait for the second CO
dial tone.
(Default = N)

10-C-82-4
(70695)
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

08 Polarity Reversal Mode 1 : Special Mode

2 : Normal Mode
(Default = 1)

09 /# Allow Mode Y: Not restricted

N: Restricted
(Default = N)

10 Message Waiting Lamp Off Control — 1 : Normal Mode

Voice Mail 2 : Voice Mail Mode 1
3 : Voice Mail Mode 2
(Default = 1)

11 µ-law—A-law (E-1 only) 1 : µ-law

2 : A-law
(Default = 2)

12 SLT Transfer Operation 1 : Mode 1

2 : Mode 2
(Default = 1)

13 Ringback Tone While Transfer Y : Ringback Tone

N: Music on Hold
(Default = N)

14 Charge Display 1 : Duration Display

2 : Charge Meter Display
3 : Charge Fee Display
(Default = 1)

15 Tone Except Idle Status (MFC-R2) 1 : Idle : Ringback tone

Busy : Busy tone
Other status : Reorder tone
2: Idle : Ringback tone
Other status : Busy tone
3: Idle : Ringback tone
Other status : Reorder tone
(Default=1)

10-C-82-5
(70695)(E)
54.00 Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD)
Description
Used to assign DN of a Voice Mail port (the extension port to which the Voice
Mail system is connected.)
This means the KX-T336 system will send the mailbox number of the
extension (on which a call forwarding feature is assigned) with DTMF tones
to a Voice Mail port, when a call forwarded to a Voice Mail port is answered.
Calls from any Voice Mail port will not be forwarded, if forwarding destination
is another Voice Mail port.

Input Format

V M D Mode Item Number CR

Index Number
None

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 Voice Mail DN DNxxxx: Directory Number

• 0: None
•
16 (Default = 0)

Programming
(Example)
When DN 109 to 112 are connected to the Voice Mail ports.

To assign the Voice Mail DN

1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
➔ ; PRG>VMD AT 01 ( ↵ )
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................0
➔ ; INPUT >>

2. At Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:

; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................0
➔ ; INPUT >> DN109 ( ↵ )
The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................0
; INPUT >> DN109
; 02: Voice Mail DN................0
➔ ; INPUT >>
10-C-83
(21292)
3. Follow the step 2 for each Voice Mail DN you want to store.

4. To store the assigned voice mail DN to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................0
; INPUT >> DN109
; 02: Voice Mail DN................0
; INPUT >> DN110
; 03: Voice Mail DN................0
; INPUT >> DN111
; 04: Voice Mail DN................0
; INPUT >> DN112
; 05: Voice Mail DN................0
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD ( ↵ )
This assigns the Voice Mail DN to the system, and the programming
prompt (PRG >) appears again.

To confirm the assignments

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
➔ ; PRG> VMD SH ( ↵ )

The screen displays the Voice Mail DN assignments as follows.

; PRG> VMD SH ( ↵ )
; 01: Voice Mail DN................DN109
; 02: Voice Mail DN................DN110
; 03: Voice Mail DN................DN111
; 04: Voice Mail DN................DN112
; 05: Voice Mail DN................0
; 06: Voice Mail DN................0
•
•
•

; 16: Voice Mail DN................0

; PRG >

To remove the existing Voice Mail DN

1. At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:

➔ ; PRG> VMD AT 01 ( ↵ )

The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:

; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................DN109
➔ ; INPUT >>

2. At input prompt ( INPUT >>), type:

; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................DN109
➔ ; INPUT >> $CLR (↵)

10-C-84
(21292)
 The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................DN109
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 02: Voice Mail DN................DN110
➔ ; INPUT >>

3. Follow the step 2 for each Voice Mail DN you want to remove.

4. To store the changed data to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN................DN109
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 02: Voice Mail DN................DN110
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 03: Voice Mail DN................DN111
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 04: Voice Mail DN................DN112
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 05: Voice Mail DN................0
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD (↵)

This assigns the changed data to the system, and the programming
prompt (PRG >) appears again.

To finish the programming

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:

➔ ; PRG> EXIT (↵)

The screen displays the initial prompt (>) of the Dumb programming
mode as follows.
; PRG> EXIT
➔ ; >

To return to the VT programming mode

At initial prompt ( > ), press:

➔ CTRL and V keys simultaneously.

The screen displays the Main Menu of the VT programming mode.

10-C-85
(21292)
55.00 Mailbox Number (MBN)
Description
This program tells the KX-T336 system what mailbox number is assigned for
each extension.
By default, mailbox number identical with each extension number is
assigned to all extensions.
That is, mailbox number for DN100 extension is 100.
This means when a call is forwarded (via DN100) to a port that is assigned
as a voice mail port, the system will sent 100 with DTMF tones automatically
when the voice mail port answers the call.

Input Format

M B N Mode Index Number CR

Index Number Explanation

DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or

or four digits)
Four-digit number (1011 to 3158) Physical location of extension

Index Number
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None Mailbox Number Up to 10 digits of numeric characters (0-9), “ ” and “#”

(Default = Same as the extension number)

Input Value for Item Number

Mailbox number specific to each extension (Same as the extension number)
is assigned to all extensions by default.

Programming

To change the default setting

1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
➔ ; PRG> MBN AT DN100 (↵)
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
➔ ; INPUT >>

10-C-86
(21292)
2. At Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
➔ ; INPUT >> 200 ( ↵ )
The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
➔ ; INPUT >>

3. To store the new Mailbox Number to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD ( ↵ )
This assigns the new Mailbox Number to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG >) appears again.

To change the default setting for another extension

4. At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
; INPUT >> $EOD
➔ ; PRG> MBN AT DN101 (↵)
The screen displays the next Input prompt as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
; INPUT >> $EOD
; PRG> MBN AT DN101
; 1: Mail Box Number...........101
➔ ; INPUT >>

10-C-87
(21292)
5. At Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
; INPUT >> $EOD
; PRG> MBN AT DN101
; 1: Mail Box Number...........101
➔ ; INPUT >> 201 ( ↵ )

The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
; INPUT >> $EOD
; PRG> MBN AT DN101
; 1: Mail Box Number...........101
; INPUT >> 201
; 1: Mail Box Number...........201
➔ ; INPUT >>

6. To store the new Mailbox Number to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> 200
; 1: Mail Box Number...........200
; INPUT >> $EOD
; PRG> MBN AT DN101
; 1: Mail Box Number...........101
; INPUT >> 201
; 1: Mail Box Number...........201
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD

This assigns the new Mailbox Number to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG >) appears again.

To remove the existing Mailbox Number

1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100 (↵)
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
➔ ; INPUT >>

10-C-88
(21292)
2. At Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
➔ ; INPUT >> $CLR ( ↵ )
The screen displays the next Input prompt as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 1: Mail Box Number...........
➔ ; INPUT >>

3. To store the changed data to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> MBN AT DN100
; 1: Mail Box Number...........100
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 1: Mail Box Number...........
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD ( ↵ )

This assigns the changed data to the system, and the programming
prompt (PRG >) appears again.

To finish the programming

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
➔ ; PRG> EXIT (↵)

The screen displays the initial prompt ( > ) of the Dumb programming
mode as follows:
; PRG> EXIT
➔ ;>

To return to the VT programming mode

At initial prompt (>), press:
CTRL and V keys simultaneously.
The screen displays the Main Menu of the VT programming mode.

10-C-89
(21292)
56.00 Account Code Verified
Description
Account Code Verified is used to prevent the extension users from making
unauthorized outside calls by checking the validity of the entered account code.
In default mode, the validity of the entered account code is not checked by the
system.
When Account Code Verified is utilized, account code entered before making an
outside call is checked against the list of system account codes.
If the entered account code matches one of the codes on the list, the outside call is
completed after passing through the toll restriction procedure.
If not found on this list, reorder tone is returned to the extension user and the
outside call is restricted.
◆ From Software version 15.XX or higher, toll restriction procedure for Account
Code verified calls has changed.
See “Additional Information” on page 10-C-92 for further information.
System Account Codes for this feature can be registered in the Speed Dialing
Screen by dividing it into two areas using SPB command.
This feature is applied to the extension user whose Class of Service No. is
assigned to “Y” by entering ACV command at dumb programming mode.
System Account Codes are not assignable, if Tenant Service is employed.
To utilize this feature, the following programming should be done beforehand.
(1) Programming the System Account Codes-Speed Dialing Boundary (SPB)
To register the System Account Codes, first divide the System Dialing Screen
into two areas by entering SPB command.
When divided, the first area is used to register Speed Dialing Codes and the
second area is used to register System Account Codes.
SPB command is available only when tenant service is not employed.
<Example>
To assign 80 Speed Dialing Codes and 120 System Account Codes in the
Speed Dialing Screen, enter as follows.
; PRG>SPB AT<CR>
; Speed Dial Boundary ------------- 200
; INPUT>> 080 <CR>
; Speed Dial Boundary ------------- 080
; INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>
As a result, System Speed Dialing area will be divided into two areas as follows.
Entry 001
System Speed Dialing
Code Area

Entry 080
Divided by SPB command
Entry 081
System Account Code
Area

Entry 200
10-C-90
(70695)
 Boundary number is ranging from “000” to “200.”

If “000” is entered in Speed Dial Boundary, whole system speed dialing

screen is used to register the System Account Codes.
If “200” is entered in Speed Dial Boundary, whole system speed dialing
screen is used to register a number for Speed Dialing.

After Speed Dial Boundary is determined, register System Account Codes

at “System-Speed Dialing-System” screen.

(2) Assigning Account Code Verified (ACV) Feature to the Extension

ACV command is used to assign Account Code Verified feature to each
extension user on a basis of COS No. for that extension.

When Account Code Verified feature is assigned “Yes” to COS No.2, the
account code entered is checked against the System Account Code List.
If match is found on the table, a call is completed, if not found, a call is
stopped and reorder tone is sent.

To program Account Code Verified feature, enter ACV command as follows.

Then enter “Y” to activate this feature, or enter “N” to deactivate this feature.
<Example>
; PRG>ACV AT<CR>
; Class of Service No. 01 ----------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 02 ----------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 03 ----------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No. 04 ----------------- N
; INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>

Input Format
(1)

S P B Mode CR

(2)

A C V Mode Index Number CR

Index Number
(1) None
(2)

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 COS (Class of Service) Number

10-C-91
(21292)
Input Value for Index Number
(1)
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None Speed Dial Boundary 000 to 200 : Boundary Number

000 : Up to 200 System Account Codes can be
registered
200 : Up to 200 Speed Dialing Codes can be
registered
(Default = 200)

(2)
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None Account Code Verified Mode Y : Enabled

N : Disabled
(Default = N)

Reference
It is helpful to use this feature together with ACL feature.
Refer to Section 3-F-11.00 “Call Accounting Summary” for further information.

Additional Information
Toll Restriction procedure for Account Code Verified calls.
An Account Code Verified call is completed under the following conditions:

<Software old version>

TRLE TRLL / TRLT

<Software version 15.XX or higher>

TRLA TRLL / TRLT

(Legend)
TRLE = Toll Restriction Level of Extension
TRLL = Toll Restriction Level of Local access
TRLT = Toll Restriction Level of Trunk group
TRLA = Toll Restriction Level of Account code

Note:
TRLA can be assigned per System Account Code in System Speed Dialing screen when Account Code
Verified feature is utilized.

10-C-92
(70695)
Example:
<Software old version>

Account code (111)

Toll Restriction is executed according to the TRLE of each extension.

<Software version 15.XX or higher>

Account code (111 = TRLA 01)

Toll Restriction is executed according to the TRLA of account code entered

regardless of TRLE of each extension.

10-C-92-1
(70695)
57.00 Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)
Description
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
Used to allow the extension user to override the restrictions on numbers
programmed by the Toll Restriction Table.
When this feature is utilized, the call is completed even if the last 7-digit of the
dialed outside number is found on the table, by entering the appropriate account
code before making an outside call.
This feature works on a basis of COS (Class of Service) assigned to each
extension.
To utilize this feature, the extension user must enter an account code before
making an outside call.
The validity of the account code entered, however, is not checked by the system.
To check the validity, assign “Account Code Verified (ACV)” feature.

(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Used to allow the extension user to override the restrictions on numbers
programmed by “3-Digit Toll Restriction Table.”
When this feature is utilized, the call is completed even if the first 3-digit of the
dialed outside number is found on the table, by entering the appropriate account
code before making an outside call.
This feature works on a basis of COS (Class of Service) assigned to each
extension.
To utilize this feature, the extension user must enter an account code before
making an outside call.
The validity of the account code entered, however, is not checked by the system.
To check the validity, assign “Account Code Verified (ACV)” feature.

Input Format

A C L Mode Index Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 COS (Class of Service) Number

Input Value for Index Number

Assigning Items Input Value

Account Code on Long Distance Calls Y : Enabled

N : Disabled
(Default = N)

10-C-93
(60395)
Assigning Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)
To activate this feature, enter ACL command and then “Y (Yes)” as follows.
<Example>
; PRG>ACL AT<CR>
; Class of Service No 01 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No 02 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No 03 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Class of Service No 04 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>

Conditions
None

Reference
Section 3-C-1.00 “Toll Restriction”
Section 3-F-11.00 “Call Accounting Summary”
Section 4-I-2.00 “Account Code Entry”
Section 5-G-2.00 “Account Code Entry”
Section 10-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified”

It is helpful to use this feature together with ACV feature.

Refer to Section 3-F-11.00 “Call Accounting Summary” for further information.

10-C-94
(60395)
58.00 CO Access Instantly (CAI)
Description
When an extension user makes an outside call, the system seizes a CO line (if
available) and sends out dial signal after the toll restriction procedure in default
mode.
In some region, CO dial tone is returned to the system in a delayed timing.
If you want to send out dial signal after receiving the CO dial tone, program CO
Access Instantly feature.
When this feature is activated, a CO line is seized (if available) directly after
pressing a CO button or dialing a CO line access code.
Then the extension user can send dial signal to the central office after receiving
CO dial tone.
This feature is programmable on a trunk group basis.
In case of Local Trunk-Dial Access, system decides the mode by the top trunk
group of Local Trunk Hunt Sequence.

(1) Assigning “CO Access Instantly” on a Trunk Group

This feature can be assigned on a trunk group basis by entering CAI
command at dumb programming mode as follows.
Then enter “Y” to activate this feature, and enter “N” to deactivate this
feature.
<Example>
; PRG>CAI AT<CR>
; Trunk Group No. 01 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Trunk Group No. 02 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
;Trunk Group No. 03 ----------------------- N
; INPUT>> Y <CR>
; Trunk Group No. 04 ---------------------- N
; INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>

Input Format

C A I Mode Index Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk Group Number

Input Value for Index Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None CO Access Instantly Y : Enabled

N : Disabled
(Default = N — U.S.A. and Canada,
Y — Areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

10-C-95
(60395)
Conditions
(External First Digit Time-Out timer assignment)
When CO Access Instantly is utilized, we recommend to set System-System
Timer “External First Digit Time-Out” timer longer than length of CO dial tone
delay.
This setting can be ranged from 5 to 120 seconds.
Refer to Section 9-D-3.00 “System Timer” or
Section 10-C-6.00 “System Timer (TIM).”

10-C-96
(21292)
59.00 Night Answer Group (NAG)
Description
A single group of extensions (called the Night Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at night.
Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at this group.
The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.

CO1 CO2 CO3

Night Answer Group

Refer to Section 3-B-8.01 “Directed Night Answer” and Section 3-B-8.04

“Fixed Night Service” for further information.

Input Format

N A G Mode Item Number CR

Index Number
None

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 Destination DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits): extension number

to (Night Answer Group 0 : none
Extensions) (Available only when Trunk Group “Incoming Mode (Night)”
32
is set to “FIXED”)
(Default = 0)

Programming
(Example)
To assign the Night Answer Group Extensions
1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
➔ ; PRG> NAG AT ( ↵ )
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........0
➔ ; INPUT >>

2. At Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:

; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........0
➔ ; INPUT >> DN109 ( ↵ )

10-C-97
(30393)
The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........0
; INPUT >> DN109
; 02: Night Answer EXT.........0
➔ ; INPUT >>

3. Follow the step 2 for each Night Answer Group Extensions you want to assign.

4. To store the assignments to the system, at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........0
; INPUT >> DN109
; 02: Night Answer EXT.........0
; INPUT >> DN110
; 03: Night Answer EXT.........0
; INPUT >> DN111
; 04: Night Answer EXT.........0
; INPUT >> DN112
; 05: Night Answer EXT.........0
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD ( ↵ )
This assigns the Night Answer Group Extensions to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG >) appears again.

To confirm the assignments

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
➔ ; PRG> NAG SH ( ↵ )

The screen displays the current assignments as follows.

; PRG> NAG SH ( ↵ )
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........DN109
; 02: Night Answer EXT.........DN110
; 03: Night Answer EXT.........DN111
; 04: Night Answer EXT.........DN112
; 05: Night Answer EXT.........0
; 06: Night Answer EXT.........0
•
•
•

; 32: Night Answer EXT.........0

; PRG >

To remove the existing Night Answer Group Extensions

1. At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:

➔ ; PRG> NAG AT ( ↵ )

The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:

; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........DN109
➔ ; INPUT >>
10-C-98
(30393)
2. At input prompt ( INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........DN109
➔ ; INPUT >> $CLR (↵)
The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........DN109
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 02: Night Answer EXT.........DN110
➔ ; INPUT >>

3. Follow the step 2 for each Night Answer Group Extension you want to remove.

4. To store the changed data to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT.........DN109
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 02: Night Answer EXT.........DN110
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 03: Night Answer EXT.........DN111
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 04: Night Answer EXT.........DN112
; INPUT >> $CLR
; 05: Night Answer EXT.........0
➔ ; INPUT >> $EOD (↵)

This assigns the changed data to the system, and the programming prompt
(PRG >) appears again.

To finish the programming

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:

➔ ; PRG> EXIT (↵)

The screen displays the initial prompt (>) of the Dumb programming mode as
follows.
; PRG> EXIT
➔ ; >

To return to the VT programming mode

At initial prompt ( > ), press:

➔ CTRL and V keys simultaneously.

The screen displays the Main Menu of the VT programming mode.

10-C-99
(30393)
60.00 Polarity Reversal Detection (PRD)
Description
When an R-LCOT card (KX-T96183) is installed, reversal of CO line polarity
is monitored at each port by default.

The PRD command is used to deactivate this monitoring function, or to

activate this monitoring function when it has been deactivated.

This command is not valid when an R-LCOT card (KX-T96183) is not

installed in the system.

Input Format

P R D Mode Index Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

Four-digit number (1011 to 3158) Physical number of the CO line port

Input Value for Item Number

Assigning Items Input Value

Polarity Reversal Detection (Y or N)

Y: Detects reversal of CO line polarity.
N: Does not detect reversal of CO line polarity.
(Default=Y)

Programming
To enter the Dumb Programming mode

1. Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu screen
is displayed at VT programming mode.
2. At the Dumb programming initial prompt (; > ), type:
; > PRG (↵)
The screen displays the programming prompt (PRG>) as follows:
; PRG>

10-C-100
(30393)
 To change the default setting
(Deactivating the polarity reversal detection)
1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
➔ ; PRG> PRD AT (↵)
The screen displays the input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011.................Y
➔ ; INPUT >>

2. At input prompt (INPUT >>), type:

; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011.................Y
➔ ; INPUT >> N ( ↵ )
The screen displays the next input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011.................Y
; INPUT >> N
; Equipment No.2012.................Y
➔ ; INPUT >>

3. Follow the step 2 for other CO line ports of an R-LCOT card.

4. To store the new assignments to the system,

at input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011.................Y
; INPUT >> N
; Equipment No.2012.................Y
; INPUT >> N

; Equipment No.2018.................Y
; INPUT >> N
; Equipment No.2011.................N
➔ INPUT >> $ EOD ( ↵ )

This assigns the new setting to the system, and the programming prompt
(PRG >) appears again.

To finish the programming

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
➔ ; PRG> EXIT (↵)

The screen displays the initial prompt ( > ) of the Dumb programming
mode as follows:
; PRG> EXIT
➔ ;>
10-C-101
(30393)
 To return to the VT programming mode
At initial prompt (>), press:
CTRL and V keys simultaneously.
The screen displays the Main Menu of the VT programming mode.

10-C-102
(30393)
61.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone (WSD)
Description
In some areas, upon completion of area code entry, the extension user must
ensure the reception of the second dial tone from the central office before
continuing to dial the rest of the telephone number.

The WSD command is used to assign the area code and pause time
required to support the above mentioned special dialing procedures.
Refer to Section 3-F-12.00 “Waiting for Second Dial tone” for further
information.

Programming Procedures

Register the facility access code required and pause time as follows.

; PRG > WSD AT ( ↵ )

; Dial Entry Table No. 01
; 1 : Dial........................................... 811
; 2 : Pause....................................... 1

<Note>
(1) Dial
One through four digits number consisting of numeric characters 1 – 9
can be entered.
One character “X” can be used as a wild card character that substitutes
any numeric character in its position.

(2) Pause
One digit (1–4) which indicates the number of pause characters.
A pause character may be used to help ensure the receipt of dial tone
from Central Office.
Each pause character causes a fixed dialing delay of four and one-half
(4.5) seconds.
Up to four pause characters may be used consecutively, if a longer
pause is required.

Input Format

W S D Mode Index Number Item Number CR

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 Dial Entry Table No.

10-C-103
(30393)
Input Value for Item Number
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Dial One through four digits number consisting of numeric

characters 1–9.
“X” can be used as a wild card character.
(Default= None)

2 Pause One digit (1–4) which indicates the number of pause

characters.
Each pause character causes a fixed dialing delay of
four and one-half (4.5) seconds.
(Default=0)

10-C-104
(30393)
62.00 World Select 4 (WS4)
Description
“WS4” command provides the following six assignments.
(Password level: Two or higher)

(1) Dial Tone Frequency Selection

Used to select an appropriate dial tone frequency depending on the
standard in your country.
(Parameters)
1 : 350/440 Hz (default)
2 : 660 Hz

(2) Paging Beep Tone Control

Used to remove paging beep tone.
By default, a beep tone sounds at the paged extensions.
(Parameters)
Y : Enable (default)
N : Disable

(3) TAFAS Confirmation Tone Control

Used to remove TAFAS confirmation tone.
By default, this tone sounds when a TAFAS call is answered by an
extension user.
(Parameters)
Y : Enable (default)
N : Disable

(4) Paging Confirmation Tone Control

Used to remove paging confirmation tone.
By default, this tone sounds when paging announcement is answered by an
extension.
(Parameters)
Y : Enable (default)
N : Disable

(5) Call Park Confirmation Tone Control

Used to remove Call Park Confirmation Tone.
By default, this tone sounds when a call is parked successfully and a parked
call is answered.
If you select “N,” confirmation tone does not sound when a parked call is
answered.
(Parameters)
Y : Enable (default)
N : Disable

10-C-105
(50195)
(6) Call Pickup Confirmation Tone Control
Used to remove Call Pickup Confirmation Tone.
By default, this tone sounds when the call ringing at an extension is
answered by another extension.
(Parameters)
Y : Enable (default)
N : Disable

Input Format

W S 4 Mode Item Number CR

Index Number
None

10-C-106
(50195)
Input Value for Item Number
Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Dial Tone Frequency Selection X (1 or 2)

1 : 350/440 Hz
2 : 660 Hz
(Default = 1)
2 Paging Beep Tone Control (Y or N)
Y: Enable
N: Disable
(Default = Y)

3 TAFAS Confirmation Tone Control (Y or N)

Y: Enable
N: Disable
(Default = Y)
4 Paging Confirmation Tone Control (Y or N)
Y: Enable
N: Disable
(Default = Y)
5 Call Park Confirmation Tone (Y or N)
Y: Enable
N: Disable
(Default = Y)

6 Call Pickup Confirmation Tone (Y or N)

Y: Enable
N: Disable
(Default = Y)

10-C-107
(50195)
63.00 Equal Access Code (EQC) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Description
Either “10XXX” or “101XXXX” can be selected as Equal Access Code.
(Password Level : Two or higher)
Refer to Section 10-H-1.00 “Equal Access” for further information.

Input Format

E Q C Mode CR

Index Number
None

Input Value
1: 10XXX (default)
2: 101XXXX

10-C-108
(60395)
64.00 T-1/E-1 Related Commands
64.01 Channel Assignment (CHA) — T-1/E-1
Description
Assigns the type of T-1/ E-1 trunk interface to each channel.
(Password level: One)

Input Format

C H A Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number Item Number (01-35) CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

X XX Physical number
Slot No. (01,05 or 09) (101,105,109,201,205,209,301,305,309)
Shelf (1 to 3)

Input Value for Item Number

Item Input Value
Assigning Items
Number T-1 card (KX-T96187) E-1 card (KX-T96188)
01 Option Automatic Set

02 Frame Sequence 1: D4 3: PCM30

2: ESF 4: PCM30-CRC
(Default=2) (Default=4)

03 Line Coding 1: B8ZS 2: AMI

2: AMI 3: HDB3
(Default=1) (Default=3)

04 Channel No. 01 0: none 0: none

1:LCO 6: DR2
05 Channel No. 02 2:GCO 7: E&M-C (Continuous E&M)
3:DID 8: E&M-P (Pulsed E&M)
06 Channel No. 03 4:OPX
(Default=0)
07 Channel No. 04 5:TIE
(Default=0)
08 Channel No. 05

09 Channel No. 06

10 Channel No. 07 [Note] [Note]

“ ” will be displayed in “ ” will be displayed in
11 Channel No. 08 the item numbers 28 through the item numbers 19 and 35.
12 Channel No. 09 35. These items cannot be These items cannot be
assigned. assigned.
13 Channel No. 10

14 Channel No. 11

10-C-109
(70695)
 continued
Input Value
Item Assigning Items
Number T-1 card (KX-T96187) E-1 card (KX-T96188)

15 Channel No. 12 0:none 0:none

1:LCO 6:DR2
16 Channel No. 13 2:GCO 7:E&M-C (Continuous E&M)
3:DID 8:E&M-P (Pulsed E&M)
17 Channel No. 14
4:OPX
(Default=0)
18 Channel No. 15 5:TIE
(Default=0)
19 Channel No. 16

20 Channel No. 17

21 Channel No. 18 [Note] [Note]

“ ” will be displayed in “ ” will be displayed in
22 Channel No. 19 the item numbers 28 through the item numbers 19 and 35.
23 Channel No. 20 35. These items cannot be These items cannot be
assigned. assigned.
24 Channel No. 21

25 Channel No. 22

26 Channel No. 23

27 Channel No. 24

28 Channel No. 25

29 Channel No. 26

30 Channel No. 27

31 Channel No. 28

32 Channel No. 29

33 Channel No. 30

34 Channel No. 31

35 Channel No. 32

10-C-110
(70695)
64.02 System Clock Mode (CLK) — T-1/E-1

Description
Used to set the system clock mode to “External” or “Internal.”
• External clock mode …… The system synchronizes to a clock pulse provided
by the Central Office.
• Internal clock mode …… The system synchronizes to a clock pulse provided
by the internal TSW clock.
To utilize the T-1/E-1 lines, the system should synchronize to a clock pulse
provided by the Central Office. However, if synchronization with External clock
is lost, the system automatically switches to “Internal clock mode.”
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

C L K Mode (SH/AT/BT) CR ↵

Index Number
None

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
None TSW clock mode 1 : Internal clock
2 : External clock
(Default = 1)

Note :
• When utilizing the T-1/E-1 lines, the clock mode cannot be changed unless all
T1/E1 DIGITAL TRUNK Cards in the system turns to “OUS” or “FAULT”
status.

• When the external clock has problems and is not working properly, the
internal clock starts to work automatically.

10-C-111
(70695)
64.03 Master Clock Priority (CLP) — T-1/E-1

Description
Used to decide to which external clock pulse the system synchronizes,
when multiple T-1/E-1 cards are installed.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

C L P Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number CR ↵

Index Number
None

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 to 6 Priority 1 to 6 T-1/E-1 card physical slot number (three digits number)
(Default = None)

Note:
• You have to assign this item even if only one T-1/E-1 card is installed.

Conditions
When more than two T-1/E-1 cards are installed in the system, each of them should be registered by this
command.

10-C-112
(70695)
64.04 ESF Frame Option (EFO) — T-1 / E-1

Description
Used to define the values of C-bit and D-bit when Frame Sequence is ESF/PCM30/PCM30CRC in T-1/E-
1 interface.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

E F O Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

X XX Physical number
Slot No. (01,05 or 09) (101,105,109,201,205,209,301,305,309)
Shelf (1 to 3)

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
None T-1 card 1: Option-4 (C=A, D=B)
Values for C-bit and D-bit 2: Option-16 (C=0, D=0)
3: Option-16 (C=1, D=0)
4: Option-16 (C=0, D=1)
5: Option-16 (C=1, D=1)
(Default=1)

E-1 card 1: Option-16 (C=0, D=1)

Values for C-bit and D-bit
2: Option-16 (C=1, D=1)
3: Option-4
4: Option-16 (C=0, D=0)
5: Option-16 (C=1, D=0)
(Default=1)

10-C-113
(70695)
64.05 MFC Sequence Parameter (MFC) — E-1 only

Description
Used to assign the MFC-R2 signal. When utilizing an E-1 “DR2 channel trunk”
or KX-T96182CE (MFC-DID) whose Dial Mode is “MFC-R2”, signalling between
your KX-T336 and the Central Office takes place using MFC-R2 signals.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

M F C Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (01-22) CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 Group-II- [01] 0:Not defined
02 Group-II- [02] 1:Subscriber
03 Group-II- [03] 2:Operator
04 Group-II- [04]
05
06
Group-II- [05]
Group-II- [06]
( Default = 1 — Item No.2
0 — Others )
07 Group-II- [07]
08 Group-II- [08]
09 Group-II- [09]
10 Group-II- [10]
11 Group-II- [11]
12 Group-II- [12]
13 Group-II- [13]
14 Group-II- [14]
15 Group-II- [15]

16 Idle Code 01-15:Group-B Code

17 Busy Code

)
Default = 01 — Item No.16
18
19
Unallocated Code
Congestion Code
( 02 — Item No.17
03 — Item No.18
04 — Item No.19

20 Forward Timer 01-30:N*01 s

21
22
Backward Timer
Disappearance Timer ( Default = 15 — Item No.20, 21
24 — Item No.22 )

10-C-114
(70695)
The following table shows the default values for Group-II and Group-B signals.

Forward Signal Backward Signal

No. Group-I Group-II Group-A Group-B

01 Digit [1] Next digit Idle
02 Digit [2] Subscriber Busy
03 Digit [3] Digit completed Unallocated
04 Digit [4] Congestion Congestion
05 Digit [5]
06 Digit [6]
07 Digit [7]
08 Digit [8]
09 Digit [9]
10 Digit [0]
11
12
13
14
15

Note:
• When a Group-II signal for Subscriber is sent from CO:
KX-T336 decides the extension to be called by analyzing this code, and sends the status code of the
extension to CO. If the extension is idle, KX-T336 will ring it.
• When a Group-II signal for Operator is sent from CO:
KX-T336 always sends “status code = idle” to CO and it will ring the operator extension (or attendant
console).
• “Out of Service Code” and “Set up Speech Code” can be assigned using MRO command
(Section 64.08).

10-C-115
(70695)
64.06 Answer Signal Wait Time (AWT) — E-1 only

Description
Used to compulsorily disconnect the outside call made by an extension user,
if not answered by the destination party until a pre-selected time expires. This
setting can be programmed on a trunk group basis.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

A W T Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number (01-16) CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk Group Number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Value Selection
None No Answer Waiting Time 0: No limit
1: 1 min
2: 2 min
3: 3 min
4: 4 min
(Default = 0)

Conditions:
• AWT command is valid for DR2 channel trunks only.

10-C-116
(70695)
64.07 E-1 Signaling Option (ESO) — E-1 only

Description
Used to activate “Charge Management” feature. If activated, the KX-T336
displays the phone charge on the display of PITS by detecting the Meter
Pulse sent from the Central Office.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

E S O Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (1-5) CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 Meter Pulse Detect 0:No detection
1:Outgoing CO calls only
2:Both Incoming and Outgoing CO calls.
(Default =1)

2 Meter Pulse Detect Position A:Detect position is A-bit

B:Detect position is B-bit
(Default =B)

3 Meter Pulse Length 01- 60: 8 N ms

(Default =16)

4 Dial Pulse Control Position A:Dial Pulse is controlled by A-bit

B:Dial Pulse is controlled by B-bit
(Default =A)

5 Clear Back Signal Control Position A:Clear back is controlled by A-bit

B:Clear back is controlled by B-bit
(Default =A)

Note:
• Item Nos. 4 and 5 are used for choosing the control bit (A or B) for each signal.

Conditions
• ESO command is valid for E-1 DR2 channel trunks only.

10-C-117
(70695)
64.08 MFC-R2 Option (MRO) — E-1 only

Description
Used to turn ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service (Section 3-F-17.00) on or off.
When turned on, parameters on ANI service should also be programmed.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

M R O Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (1-8) CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 ANI service 0:ANI Service is off
1:Incoming CO calls only
2:Outgoing CO calls only
3:Both-way
(Default = 0)

2 ANI Request Code 01-15:Group-A Code

(Default = 05)

3 ANI Start Code 00:None

01-15:Group-I Code
(Default = 14)

4 ANI Complete Code 01-15:Group-I Code

(Default = 15)

5 ANI Reject Code 01-15:Group-I Code

(Default = 12)

6 Out of Service Code
7 Set up Speech Code
01-15:Group-B Code If the called extension is “out of ser-
vice”, the system sends this code to
(Default = 04)
CO.
01-15:Group-A Code If the system receives this code, then
the system sets up speech path.
(Default = 06)

8 Address Complete Code 01-15:Group-A Code

(Default = 03)

Note:
• Refer to “MFC command” (Section 10-C-64.05) for default values of Group-I, -II, -A, -B codes.
• Item Nos. 6 through 8 are provided for setting an optional status for MFC command.

10-C-118
(70695)
64.09 Pulsed E&M (PEM) — E-1 only

Description
Used to select the type of pulse signal for E-1 TIE Lines.
This setting is valid for E&M-P channel trunks.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

P E M Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (1-3) CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
1 Seizure Pulse 1. Short Pulse (150 ms)
2. Long Pulse (600 ms)
(Default = 1)

2 Answer Pulse 1. Short Pulse (150 ms)

2. Long Pulse (600 ms)
(Default = 2)

3 Clear Pulse 1. Short Pulse (150 ms)

2. Long Pulse (600 ms)
(Default = 2)

10-C-119
(70695)
65.00 TIE Line Related Commands
65.01 TIE Line Routing Table (TIE)
Description
Used to determine the routing of calls over the TIE Line Network.
Up to 36 routing patterns can be programmed by this command.
Routing table is referenced by the system to identify the trunk route,
when a TIE call is made by dialing the feature number for "TIE Trunk
Access."
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T I E Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number Item Number CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 36 TIE Line Routing Table number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number

1 Code Up to three digits : 0 - 9, X (wild card)

(Default = blank)

2 Delete digit 0 to 4 : number of deleting digit(s)

(Default = 0)

3 Insert Dial Up to four digits : dialing number to be added

(Default = blank)

4 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 01 to 16 : trunk group number whose type is set to TIE.
5 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 02 (Default = blank)
6 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 03
7 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 04
8 Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 05

10-C-120
(70695)
65.02 TIE Account Code (TAC)

Description
TIE account codes registered by TAC command is used to prevent the tie
callers from making unauthorized CO calls by checking the validity of the
account code entered.
TIE callers must enter a TIE Account Code to make a CO call via TIE lines,
if "TIE Forced Account Code Mode" is set to "Yes." Refer to Section 3-F-
14.02 “Calling from TIE to CO” for further information.
(Password level : Two or higher )

Input Format

T A C Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (01-32) CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
01 to 32 TIE Account Code Four digits numeric number (0 - 9)
(Default = blank)

10-C-121
(70695)
65.03 TIE Trunk Relay Restriction (TRR)

Description
Used to allow or restrict the TIE trunk relay function on the trunk group basis.
Refer to Section 3-F-14.04 “Alternate Routing” for further information.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T R R Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number Item Number CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk Group Number (Call receiver side)

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None Trunk Group Number Y: Restricted

(Call initiator side) N: Allowed

(Default = N)

Conditions
TRR command is valid for the trunk group whose type is set to TIE.

Programming example
TIE Trunk Relay Restriction setting

In this case, if you want to restrict “TIE call relay from TG10 to TG11” program as follows:

; PRG > TRR AT 10 11 (↵)

; Trunk Group No.10
; 11 : Trunk Group No.11.... N
; INPUT >> Y (↵)

10-C-122
(70695)
65.04 Line Hunting Sequence(LHS)

Description
Used to change the hunting sequence of idle lines on a TIE trunk
group basis.
By default, idle TIE lines are seized from the smallest to the largest
physical number in order at all locations when a TIE call is initiated by
a user. This may cause a frequently busy situation between a certain
two locations.
In this case, we recommend to change the hunting sequence at one
location from "1"(smallest largest) to "2" (largest smallest).
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

L H S Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number (01-16) CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk Group Number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
None Line Hunting Sequence 1: From the smallest to the largest physical number of TIE lines
2: From the largest to the smallest physical number of TIE lines

(Default = 1)

10-C-123
(70695)
65.05 E&M Selection(EMS)

Description
Several physical requirements of an E&M card may differ depending on the
regions.
EMS command is used to select the appropriate values for the following physical
requirements.
1. E&M Interface Type
2. Voice Path Type
3. Voice Level (Transmit)
4. Voice Level (Receive)
5. Balance Network
(Password level: Two or higher )

Input Format

E M S Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number Item Number CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

1011 to 3154 Physical number of E&M trunk ports

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 E&M Interface Type Should be fixed to "4".
(Default = 4)

2 Voice Path Type 1: 2-wire

2: 4-wire
(Default = 1)

10-C-124
(70695)
 Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
3 Voice Level(Transmit)* 1: -6dB
2: -3dB
3: 0
4 Voice Level (Receive)* 4: +3dB
(Default = 2)

5 Balance Network Should be fixed to "1."

(Default = 1)

* Valid when "Voice Path Type" is set to "2:4-wire."

Conditions
This command is valid only when E&M card(KX-T96184)is installed to the system.

10-C-125
(70695)
65.06 TIE Caller ID Integration (TCI)

Description
Used to turn on/off “TIE Caller ID Integration” service (Section 3-F-14.05)
on a TIE trunk group basis.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

T C I Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

01 TIE Caller ID Integration Y : Enabled

| Service for Trunk Group N: Disabled
16 01-16 (Default=N)

10-C-126
(70695)
66.00 Charge Management Related Commands
66.01 Charge Management ID Code (CPD)

Description
Used to assign Charge Management ID Code. When Tenant Service is
employed, Charge Management ID Code for Tenant 1 and 2 can be
assigned individually. Refer to Section 3-F-19.00 “Charge Management”
for further information.
(Password level: Two or higher)

Input Format

C P D Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Charge Management ID Four digits numeric characters

Code for Tenant 1 (Default = 1234)

2 Charge Management ID Four digits numeric characters

Code for Tenant 2
(Default = 1234)

Note:
The Charge Management ID Code assigned by CPD command can be changed by an extension user in
the PITS System Programming mode. Refer to Section 11-C-10.00 “Setting Charge Management ID
Code” for further information.

10-C-127
(70695)
66.02 Charge Rate (RAT)

Description
1. Range (New Rate Set)
Assigns an amount of charge fee per charge meter.
2. Denomination
Assigns the currency denomination for your country.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

R A T Mode (SH/AT/BT) Item Number (1-2) CR ↵

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 Range Up to eight digits numeric characters including". (decimal
point)"can be entered.

[Note]
Press “ ” key to enter “. (decimal point)”, in the PITS station
Programming mode.

2 Denomination Up to three digits of alphabetic characters or a sign can be

entered.

[Note]
Enclose the input value with double quotation marks.

Note:
• Charge Rate can also be assigned in the PITS Station Programming mode (Section 12).

10-C-128
(70695)
66.03 Charge Limitation (CLT)

Description
Used to determine the sum total of telephone charge allowable to extension
users on an extension user basis. If the telephone charge on the extension
exceeds the pre-assigned limitation, the extension user cannot make further
CO calls until his or her charge meter is reset.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

C L T Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

DNXXXX Extension directory number
or (XXXX : three or four digits)
Four-digit physical number Physical location of extension

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number
None Charge Limitation 0 : No limitation
1-99999 : The number of charge
meter allowable for the extension
(Default = 0)

Conditions
Charge limitation can also be set by an extension user (Charge Manager) in the PITS Station
Programming mode. Refer to Section 12-C-9.11 “Setting Account Codes” for further information.

10-C-129
(70695)
67.00 DISA/AGC Tone Detection Mode (TDM)

Description
When Tone Detection for DISA/AGC is set to"Yes", the system disconnects
the lines if it detects any tones, regardless of tone type, during a trunk-to-
trunk call (DISA or AGC).
This command is used to select a type of tones which applies to tone detec-
tion for DISA/AGC on a Trunk Group basis.
For example, if "2:cyclic tone only" is selected, the system disconnects the
lines only when it detects cyclic tone during a trunk-to-trunk call (DISA or
AGC).
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

T D M Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number(01-16) CR ↵

Index Number

Index Number Explanation

01 to 16 Trunk Group Number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None Tone Detection Mode 0: all tones (no tone, cyclic tone, continuous tone)
(DISA/AGC) 1: no tone or cyclic tone
2: cyclic tone only
(Default = 0)

Conditions

None

10-C-130
(70695)
68.00 Call Forwarding-Follow Me (CFM)
Description
Used to allow or disallow each extension from setting "Call Forwarding-Follow Me"
feature on a COS basis. Refer to Section 4-F-2.06 and Section 5-D-2.06 “Call
Forwarding-Follow Me” for further information.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

C F M Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number (01-32) CR ↵

Index Number
Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 COS (Class of Service) number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Assigning Items Input Value
Number

None Call Forwarding-Follow Me Y: Enabled

N: Disabled
(Default=N)

10-C-131
(70695)
69.00 Limited Call Duration (LCD)
Description
Used to set parameters on “Limited Call Duration” feature. This feature can
be enabled or disabled on a COS basis. For further information, refer to
Section 3-F-18.00 "Limited Call Duration".
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

L C D Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number (01-32) Item Number (1-2) CR ↵

Index Number
Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 COS (Class of Service) number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

1 Extension-CO call duration 00: No Limitation

time 01-60: Limitation Time (Minutes)
(Default=00)

2 Call type 0: Outgoing CO call only

1: Incoming CO call only
2: Both
(Default=0)

10-C-132
(70695)
70.00 UCD Auto Log-out Operation (ULO)

Description
Used to change “UCD Auto Log-out” setting.
See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) — with/without
OGM” for further information about UCD Auto Log-out.
(Password level : Two or higher)

Input Format

U L O Mode (SH/AT/BT) Index Number (01-32) CR ↵

Index Number
Index Number Explanation

01 to 32 UCD group number

Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value

None UCD Auto Log-out Y: Auto Log-out is enabled.

operation N: Auto Log-out is disabled.
(Default=Y)

10-C-133
(70695)
D. Error Message Tables

1.00 Error Messages Related to

the Assigning Items in the
Same Command

If there is a wrong entry in the displayed screen, The (XXX) indicates one of the error message
the following appears on the message line when numbers shown below and possible causes of the
storing the entry: “DATA ERROR (XXX).” errors and countermeasures for them are as
follows.

DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

(XXX)
100 (page length)-(skip length) < 6 Make (page length)-(skip length) ≥ 6.

101 (receive digit) ≥ (delete digit) is not established Make (receive digit) ≥ (delete digit).
in - Special Attended DID screen.

102 Restriction Level-Operator ≤ Restriction Level- Make Restriction Level-Operation ≤

International is not established in - Operation Restriction Level-International
(1/3) screen

110 Day-night combination in the incoming mode is Change the day-night combination in
not correct. incoming mode.

130 Combination of the terminals of operators 1, 2 Change the combination of terminals for
is incorrect. operators 1, 2.

140 DN is not installed. Designate the installed DN.

141 Attempting to assign FDN's of UCD # 1 to # 4 Set FDN of other UCD, or extension directory
for the overflow destination of UCD # 5 to # 32 number.

150 Attempting to assign its own extension number Specify the number except its own extension
on the key which cannot be assigned to its own number.
extension number.
<example> DSS(ICM)
DSS(DN)
SDN

160 Specifying UCD number incorrectly. Assign UCD to only one ICM.

190 Date value is incorrect on the check of month, Check the date setting.
and leap year in the time and date setting
screen.

10-D-1
(21292)
2.00 Error Messages Related to
the Assigning Items in the
Other Commands
If there is a wrong entry related to the assigned The (XXX) indicates an error message number
by the other commands, the following appears on shown below and possible causes of the errors
the message line when storing the entry: “DATA and countermeasures for them are as follows.
ERROR (xxx).”

DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

300 Setting DN which is not stored in the hundred Enter data in hundred block. Or, set DN
block. which is stored in hundred block.

301 Specified extension DN is not stored. Store the extension DN.

302 Telephone type of the extension paired with Paired extension should be changed to a
DSS console is not PITS. PITS.

310 Setting DN to the DSS console. Set DN to assignable port.

320 Setting trunk group except DID on CO-line on Assign trunk group to the correct kind of
DID card. Or, assigning trunk group of DID to card.
CO-line on the card except DID.

330 Tenant is different. Assign the same tenant.

331 As assigned to the destination of 1 : N of trunk Cancel the 1 : N destination.

group, impossible to change tenant.

332 As assigned to the destination of doorphone Cancel the doorphone call destination.
call, impossible to change tenant.

333 Setting one pickup group to ICM & PAG group Set it to the same tenant. Or, change tenant
belonging to different tenant. after deleting pickup group.

334 Changing tenant of ICM/PAG group without Change after canceling extensions.
canceling extensions. Impossible to move extensions to the other
tenant.

335 As assigned to the destination of paging from Change the destination of attendant paging.
attendant console, impossible to change Tenant.

336 As assigned to call placing mode of Trunk Change assigning of incoming mode.
group, impossible to change Tenant.

337 As assigned to night answer point for CO-line, Change assignment of night answer point.
impossible to change Tenant.

338 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after removing the CO lines.
without removing the CO lines which belong to Impossible to move CO lines to the other
the trunk group. tenant.

339 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after canceling 1: N destination.
without canceling the setting of 1:N destination
for the trunk group.

340 Deleting is impossible because it is assigned in Change the item beforehand.

another item.

10-D-2
(21292)
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

342 Extension assigned to NEXT HUNT STATION is Assign another extension or clear the
already assigned to NEXT HUNT STATION for previous assignment.
another extension.

343 Relation between ICM group and Pickup group Make them in proper relation.
assigned for an extension is incorrect.

344 As PRV-CO is assigned by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the type of
the trunk group to any other than PRV.

345 As assigned to Single CO by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the 1:1
destination of the line to a different PITS.

346 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change the tenant after clearing all 1:1
without canceling the setting of 1:1 destination. destinations of CO lines belonging to the
group.

347 UCD group is not assigned. Assign Pickup group to a UCD group.

348 Attempting to assign DID to Trunk group which Assign DID after clearing all CO lines
has CO lines belonging to the group. belonging to the group.

350 Attempting to assign the unstored ICM number Assign stored ICM number.
to the DSS (ICM) button.

360 Attempting to assign the ATT which is not Register the ATT as an operator, or specify
registered as the operator to the maintenance another device.
device.

370 Specified CO line does not exist. Specify proper CO line.

371 Specified CO line is not the PVL. Specify proper CO line.

372 Specified CO line is already assigned as a DIL Specify another CO line or cancel the
1:1 or PRV-CO by another extension. assignment of the desired line.

373 Impossible to assign because the programmings Change call placing type to 1:1, or change
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. group type to unique type.

374 Impossible to assign because the programmings Change call placing type to 1:N, and group
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. type to group.

391 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an operator.
registered as an operator of the tenant.

392 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as the destination.
registered as the destination of intercept routing
for the Trunk group.

393 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an ATT busy out
registered as an ATT busy out extension of extension.
Trunk group.

394 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an ATT overflow
registered as an ATT overflow extension for extension.
Trunk group.

10-D-3
(21292)
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

395 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an overflow
registered as an overflow extension for UCD destination.
group.

396 Attempting to delete the extension/RMT which Cancel the storage as a DIL 1:1 call
is registered as a DIL 1:1 call destination of CO destination.
line.

397 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a night answer point.
registered as a night answer point of CO line.

398 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a walking station.
registered as a walking station.

399 Attempting to delete the PITS paired with DSS- Change the PITS paired with DSS Console.
console.

400 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as night answer point.
registered as a night answer point for tenant.

401 Attempting to delete the extension which is set Cancel the assignment of SDN.
to SDN.

403 Attempting to delete the ATT when the ATT is Change the incoming mode destination other
assigned for day incoming mode in Trunk than ATT.
group.

404 Attempting to delete RMT when the RMT alarm Cancel the assignment of RMT alarm.
is assigned.

405 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the night answer point.
registered as UNA point for CO line.

406 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the incoming mode.
registered as a TAFAS for day/night incoming
mode for Trunk group.

407 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the paging destination.
registered as a paging destination for the ATT.

408 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified After changing maintenance device, delete
for maintenance device. the ATT.

409 When deleting ATT, combination of operators 1 Check the combination of operators.
and 2 is incorrect.

411 Impossible to delete the card, for all of the ports Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
belonging to the card is not made pre-installed.

412 Impossible to delete the card, for DN is Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
assigned to an extension port.

413 Deleting the card is impossible, for it is Change the maintenance device.
assigned as a maintenance device.

10-D-4
(21292)
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

414 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Change the intercept routing destination.
assigned for the intercept routing destination for
the Trunk group.

415 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Cancel the doorphone call destination.
assigned for doorphone call destination.

416 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified Change the incoming mode destination.
for incoming mode destination of a trunk group.

417 Attempting to delete a DISA card which is Change the incoming mode destination.
specified for incoming mode destination of a
trunk group.

418 Attempting to assign NAG as Night Answer Assign Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED.
Point of a CO line belonging to a Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is not FIXED.

420 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign ATT's to tenant 1.
impossible as all ATT's are not assigned to
tenant 1.

421 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign music sources to tenant 1.
impossible as all music sources are not
assigned to tenant 1.

422 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign external pagers to tenant 1.
impossible as all external pagers are not
assigned to tenant 1.

423 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign doorphones to tenant 1.
impossible as all doorphones are not assigned
to tenant 1.

424 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign DISA's to tenant 1.
impossible as all DISA's are not assigned to
tenant 1.

425 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign AGC's to tenant 1.
impossible as all AGC's are not assigned to
tenant 1.

426 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign all paging groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all paging groups are not
assigned to tenant 1.

427 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign all ICM groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all ICM groups are not assigned
to tenant 1.

428 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is Assign all trunk groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all trunk groups are not assigned
to tenant 1

430 Deleting expansion shelf is impossible, as one Delete all the cards in the expansion shelf.
or more cards are assigned to the expansion
shelf.

10-D-5
(70695)
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

431 Attempting to remove a card which is registered Cancel the PFT assignment of the card.
in Power Failure Transfer (PFT) assignment.

Impossible to change the Numbering Plan to Clear DN's which should be blank.
440 “Fixed,” because there exist DN's which should
be blank in the “Fixed” mode in the Hundred
Block.

450 Impossible to change ICM/Paging group, for the Change after deleting all the extensions in the
pickup group belonging to the ICM/Paging group pickup group.
contains extensions.

10-D-5-1
10-D-6
(70695)
(21292)
3.00 Fixed Error Messages
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

003 Unacceptable value is assigned. Assign an allowable value.

004 Space exists between items. Remove the space.

005 Some items are left blank. Assign all required items, or leave all items
blank.

006 At least one blank should be left among multiple Leave at least one blank.
items.

007 Assigned selection value is not for the item. Set the assignable value.

008 The number which is set previously in this Set the number different from the previous
screen is assigned again. number.

009 The number which is set previously in a different Set the number different from the previous
screen is assigned. number.

012 Device is not installed. Assign the installed device.

013 Status of the specified device does not accept Change the status of the device to be
this command. acceptable for the command.

016 Privilege level is lower than specified level. Increase the privilege level through the
Change level function.

017 Diagnostic error has been detected when INS Verify the related device.
command is executed.

018 Specified service is not executed. Check specified service.

019 Another maintenance device (remote, PITS, Wait until another device is finished or let him
system) is in use. finish.

020 Printer is not connected to the system or the Connect the printer, and make the power on.
power is off.

021 Print out is unavailable from Remote. Execute print out on-site.

022 Entered parameters for Item or Index is out of Enter the parameters within the specified
the specified range. range.

023 “ , / ” or “ , <CR> ” is entered in BT (Batch) Correct the wrong entry.

programming.

024 Calendar IC malfunction. Repair calender IC.

027 Backup device is not connected (only when Connect the backup device to SIO # 1 Port.
maintenance device is ATT).

029 Different version at the time of backup. Match the backup version.

10-D-6
(21292)
(70695)
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

030 A checksum error has been detected. Communication line is defective, or backup
data is destroyed.

031 Improper data is received. Communication link is defective, or backup

data is destroyed.

040 Execution is impossible during off-line. Execute during on-line.

041 Impossible change such as Impossible.

[INS] → [INS], [OUS] → [OUS]
is attempted.

042 Some required items are omitted. Enter the required items.

043 The number of equipment you attempt to Assign the equipment within the limit of
assign is over the limit. number.

045 Slot number you specified is not valid. (DTM, Specify the slot in which T-1/E-1 card is
LBT, DSP commands) installed.

046 Card type you specified is not valid. (DTM, Specify the T-1/E-1 card.
LBT, DSP commands)

047 The status of the card you specified is not Change the status to valid one.
valid. (DTM, LBT, DSP commands)

048 No DTMF Generator/Receiver is installed on Install the optional DTMF Generator/Receiver

the card you specified. (DTM, LBT card.
commands)

049 You specified the DTMF Generator/Receiver Specify the DTMF Generator/Receiver of the
of different cards.(DTM, LBT commands) same card.

10-D-7
(70695)
4.00 Other Error Messages
Error Message Probable Cause Countermeasure

PASSWORD ERROR Assigned password is not correct. Enter the correct password.

MODE ERROR Selected mode is not correct. Change the mode.

COMMAND ERROR Entered command is not correct. Enter the correct command.

TYPE ERROR Selected type is not correct. Select the correct type. (SH, AT, BT)

INDEX ERROR Entered index number is not correct. Enter the correct index number.

ITEM ERROR Entered item number is not correct. Enter the correct item number.

LOGICAL ERROR Programming data assigned in off-line mode Assign the correct data.
has some logical error.

DATA ERROR Assigned data is invalid. Refer to the DATA ERROR No. list.

10-D-8
(21292)
 Section 11

System Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

 (Section 11)

System Programming
Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)
Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 11-A-1

B Function of PITS Buttons in PITS Programming.............................................. 11-B-1

C Operation......................................................................................................... 11-C-1

1.00Entering PITS System Programming Mode........................................... 11-C-2

2.00Setting Date and Time........................................................................... 11-C-4
3.00Storing Speed Dialing-System............................................................... 11-C-6
4.00Changing Extension Number................................................................. 11-C-9
5.00Changing Extension Name.................................................................... 11-C-11
6.00Changing PITS Programming Password............................................... 11-C-14
7.00Changing DISA User Code.................................................................... 11-C-16
8.00Changing Walking COS Password........................................................ 11-C-18
9.00Setting Charge Limitation ...................................................................... 11-C-20
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
10.00 Setting Charge Management ID Code................................................... 11-C-21
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

11-1
(70695)
A. Introduction
Description Conditions
There are two programming types using PITS The following are the conditions required to
(Proprietary Integrated Telephone System): execute PITS system programming:

1. PITS system programming 1) The extension must be assigned to “Yes” in

2. PITS station programming
PITS system programming is performed in PITS
system programming mode. (Described in this
section)
“System-Class of Service”, Maintenance
Capability.
Refer to Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service
(1/2)” for information on system
programming.

PITS station programming is performed in PITS 2) It is recommended to use PITS telephones

station programming mode. (Described in Section provided with the display, which are:
12)
KX-T7030, KX-T7130, KX-T123235, KX-
T123230D, KX-T123230, KX-T61630, and
PITS system programming is used to program the
KX-T30830.
following system data:
3) The system is on-line communication mode.
1) Setting Date and Time
2) Storing Speed Dialing-System
4) Password for PITS system programming is
3) Changing Extension Number
required to enter into PITS system
4) Changing Extension Name
programming mode. The password is
5) Changing PITS System Program Mode
assigned in “System-Operation”, PITS
Entry Password
Programming Password. (Refer to Section
6) Changing DISA User Code
9-D-1.03 “Operation (3/3).”) If Tenant
7) Changing Walking COS Password
Service is employed, the password for
8) Setting Charge Limitation
Tenant 2 is assigned in “System-Tenant”,
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
PITS Programming Password (Tenant 2).
9) Setting Charge Management ID Code
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
5) It is impossible to enter into PITS system
programming mode if the system has
already been accessed by other System
Administration Devices, such as VT220,
compatibles, Attendant Console, Dumb
terminal, or if an extension in the same
tenant is in PITS system programming.

6) To enter into PITS programming mode, the

telephone set must be on-hook. If it is off-
hook or in the state of speaker phone
activated, programming mode is not
established even if the MEMORY switch is
set to the “PROGRAM” side.

11-A-1
(70695)
B. Function of PITS Buttons
in PITS Programming
In PITS system and PITS station programming
modes, the functions of the fixed feature buttons
on a PITS are changed as illustrated below:

• For users with PITS type 30 (KX-T30830,

KX- T61630, KX-T123230D, KX-T123230,
KX-T123235);

PAUSE button CLEAR button

button Programmable Feature

(PF) buttons
button
Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD)

Overlay sheet ☛

Directory Number (DN)

buttons

, / - button AUTO/MEMORY button

SELECT button
PREV button
SECRET button
FLASH button
END button NEXT button

☛ For the convenience of PITS system/station

programming, function names for programming are
printed on the overlay sheet. This sheet is
provided for PITS telephones equipped with the
display.

11-B-1
• For users with PITS Model. KX-T7030.

Overlay sheet

• For users with PITS Model. KX-T7130.

Overlay sheet

11-B-2
C. Operation

Introduction
Procedures for setting PITS system programming
mode and performing PITS system programming
are described in tables and operation charts.

The tables show the procedures in the following

form:
Operation Result Comment/Note

1) 2) 3)

1) Describes actual operation.

2) Shows the result from the operation.
3) Comment or note on the operation.

Operation charts are attached to the tables to

help you to understand the flow.

The procedures for setting PITS system program-

ming mode are explained first in “Setting PITS
System Programming Mode.”

The procedures for PITS system programming

are explained in each programming item.

Note: The procedures in this section are

described from the viewpoint of type 30
PITS telephone users. If KX-T7030 or
KX-T7130 is used in PITS system
programming mode, press the STORE
button instead of MEMORY button.

11-C-1
1.00 Entering PITS System Programming Mode

Procedures for setting PITS system programming mode :

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • The message below appears • This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to “PRO- on the display: display for PITS station
GRAM.” programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No? • If the programming data of your
PITS is already accessed by
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY • The MEMORY button another system administration
indicator lights in red. device, the following message
appears on the display.

Already Accessed

2. Dial “* #.” (program number) • The PITS programming

password entry screen ap-
pears on the display:

ENTER PASSWORD

• The MEMORY button

indicator light goes out.

3. Dial the PITS Programming
Password: four digits.
• The message below appears • This display is called “Initial
on the display: display for PITS system pro-
gramming mode.”
SYS-PGM No? • The password characters are
not displayed when they are
• The MEMORY button entered for security reason.
indicator lights in red. • Entry of an incorrect password
causes an alarm tone.
• If the following message
appears, the system is already
accessed by another admini-
stration device:

Already Accessed

When nothing is entered within one minute after “Initial

display for PITS system programming mode” is dis-
played, “Initial display for PITS station programming
mode” is displayed again.

You can return to the operation mode whenever you

slide the MEMORY switch to SET.

11-C-2
Operation chart for setting PITS system programming mode

Operation mode

May 18 12:00 AM
Present time is displayed.

Slide the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM

to enter PITS station programming mode.

PITS station programming mode

PITS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS station programming
mode

Dial “* #” to set PITS system

programming mode.

ENTER PASSWORD
The PITS programming password entry
screen appears on the display.

Dial the four digit password.

PITS system programming

mode

SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

Dial a program number and

perform PITS system
programming.
To return to “Initial display for PITS
system programming mode,” press the
END button.

Note:
To finish PITS system programming mode and return to PITS
station programming mode, press the END button while “Initial
Operation
display for PITS system programming mode” is displayed.
In PITS system programming mode, you can return to “Initial Result from the
display for PITS system programming mode” (status 1) by pressing operation
the END button.

11-C-3
2.00 Setting Date and Time
Used to change date and time.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program- • The message below appears • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
ming mode. on the display: “Entering PITS System Program-
ming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No?

• The MEMORY button indicator

lights in red.

2. Dial “0 0.” (program number) • The current date and time

appears on the display:
<Example>
• Displayed details and conditions
88 01 01 4 12 : 00 0 for entry are as follows:

a.m./p.m.: 0: a.m. 1: p.m.

Minute : 00 to 59
Hour : 01 to 12
Day of the week :
0: SUN. 1: MON.
2: TUE. 3: WED.
4: THU. 5: FRI.
6: SAT.

Day : 01 to 31
Month : 01 to 12
Year : 00 to 99
• The MEMORY button indicator
light goes out.

3. Enter the current date and • Dialed digits appear in dialed • If you want to clear a wrong
time. order. entry, press the END button and
enter the data again from step
<Example>
2.
When you set 9:00 a.m., July 6,
Friday, 1990: • Setting is completed when all
the above items from “Year” to
90 07 06 5 “a.m./ p.m.” are entered.

90 07 06 5 9 : 00 0

4. Press the MEMORY • The MEMORY button indicator • An incomplete entry returns
button to store the entry. lights in red. alarm tone, and the MEMORY
• Confirmation tone sounds. button indicator does not light.

11-C-4
Operation chart for setting date and time

PITS system programming

mode

<Status 1>
SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system programming
mode.

Dial “0 0.”

The current date and time appears on

the display.
The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.

• Dial the date and time.

• To clear a wrong entry, press the END
button, then dial “0 0” and enter again.

Dialed number appears on the display.

Press the MEMORY button to store the

entry.

Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

Operation
Note:
Result from the
In PITS system programming mode, you can return to
operation
“Initial display for PITS system programming mode”
(Status 1) by pressing the END button.

11-C-5
3.00 Storing Speed Dialing-System

This is used to store telephone numbers for For further information about Speed Dialing
speed dialing which all the extension users in the feature, refer to Section 4-C-4.02 “Speed Dialing-
system can use to call outside parties. Up to 200 System.”
speed dialing codes can be stored.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program- • The message below appears • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
ming mode. on the display: “Entering PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No?

• The MEMORY button indicator

lights in red.

2. Dial “01.” (program number) • Speed dialing code entry

screen appears on the display:

Speed No?

• The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

3. Dial the appropriate speed
dialing code: three digits
(001 to 200).
<Example>
• Current entry for the selected
code appears on the display:
100: 01, 9555-1212
100: Speed dialing code
01 : Toll restriction level
9 : Feature number for
selecting the CO line
555-1212 : Telephone number
• If nothing is stored:
100: Not Stored
• If the NEXT button is pressed,
the number for the speed
dialing code “001” appears.
• After the current entry is
displayed, pressing the PREV
button displays the number of
the previous speed dialing
code.
• When Tenant Service is
employed,, you can store the
speed dialing codes of your
tenant.
• When more than 10 digits are
stored, it can be confirmed by
scrolling the display with the
or button.

4. Dial the toll restriction level: • Dialed digits appear on the

two digits (00 to 16). display: • After dialed number is
<Example> displayed, “ , ” appears
automatically.
100: 16,

Continued

11-C-6
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note
5. Dial the feature number for • Dialed number appears on the • The feature numbers for select-
selecting a CO line and, if display: ing a CO line are:
necessary, trunk group “ARS/Local CO Line Access”
<Example>
specifying number (1 to 8). “Trunk Group 01-08 Access”
100: 16, 9 “Trunk Group 09-16 Access”
“Trunk Group 17-24 Access”
(Virtual Trunk Group
– ◆ for U.S.A. and Canada
only)
6. Dial the telephone number. • Dialed number appears on the • Up to 32 digits consisting of the
display: feature number and telephone
number can be stored.
<Example>
• You can enter : 0 to 9, * , #,
100: 16, 9 5551212 Pause, Flash, — (hyphen),
SECRET button.
• If you want to clear a wrong
entry, press the CLEAR button
and dial again.

7. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the entry. lights in red.
• Confirmation tone sounds.

11-C-7
(60395)
Operation chart for storing speed dialing

PITS system programming

mode

<Status 1>
SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

• Dial “0 1.”

<Status 2>
Speed No. ?
The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.

• Dial three digits (001 to 200) to designate

the speed dialing code.
• Press the NEXT button to designate the
speed dialing code “001.”
• After dialing 001 or pressing the NEXT
button, press the PREV button to
designate the speed dialing code “200.”

• Current number appears on the display.

To store or change, dial:

(1) the toll restriction level (00 to 16).
(2) the feature number for selecting a CO
line.
(3) the telephone number.
• To clear a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button and dial again.
•☛

•Dialed number appears on the display.

• Press the MEMORY button to store the

entry.
•☛

• Confirmation tone sounds.

• The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

• To advance to the next speed dialing

code, press the NEXT button.
Note: • To return to the previous speed dialing
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status 1> code, press the PREV button.
restores <Status 1>. • The MEMORY button indicator light goes
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after <Status 2> out.
restores <Status 2>.
☛ You can also advance to the next speed dialing code Operation
by pressing the NEXT button and return to the
previous code by pressing the PREV button. Result from the
operation
11-C-8
4.00 Changing Extension Number
This is used to change extension directory the following sub-sections.
numbers. Section 3-B-1.00 “Flexible Numbering”
Before changing Extension Number, please read Section 3-B-2.00 “Directory Number (DN)”

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program-
ming mode.
• The message below appears • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
on the display: “Entering PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No?
• The MEMORY button indicator
lights in red.

2. Dial “0 2.” (program number) • A message appears on the

display, to require you to enter
the directory number of the
extension that you want to
change:

CHG DN? DN
• The MEMORY button indicator
light goes out.

3. Dial the directory number of • The following message

the extension that you want appears on the display and
to change : three or four requires you to enter the new
digits. directory number.
<Example>
DN 100 => DN

4. Dial the directory number • Newly entered number appears • If you want to correct a wrong
that you want to set : three or on the display as follows: entry, press the CLEAR button
four digits. and dial again.
DN 100 =>DN 2000

5. Press the MEMORY button to • The MEMORY button indicator • If the directory number you are
store the entry. lights in red. trying to assign is already
• Confirmation tone sounds. assigned, you hear alarm tone.

11-C-9
Operation chart for changing extension number

PITS system programming

mode

<Status 1>
SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

• Dial “0 2.”

<Status 2>
CHG DN? DN
The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.

• To designate the extension that you want

to change, dial the directory number of the
extension : three or four digits.
• To designate the extension which has the
lowest directory number, press the NEXT
button.
• To designate the extension which has the
highest directory number, press the NEXT
button and then the PREV button.

The message appears on the display to

require you to enter the new directory
number.

• Dial the new directory number : three or

four digits.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the
CLEAR button and dial again.
•☛

Dialed number appears on the display.

• Press the MEMORY button to store the

entry.
•☛

Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

• To advance to the next directory number,

press the NEXT button.
Note: • To return to the previous directory number,
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status 1> press the PREV button.
restores <Status 1>. • The MEMORY button indicator light goes
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after <Status 2> out.
restores <Status 2>.
☛ You can also advance to the next directory number by Operation
pressing the NEXT button and return to the previous
Result from the
directory number by pressing the PREV button.
operation
11-C-10
5.00 Changing Extension Name

This is used to change extension names.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program- • The following message ap- • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
ming mode. pears on the display: “Entering PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No?

• The MEMORY button indicator

lights in red.

2. Dial “03.” (program number) • A message appears on the

display and requires you to
enter the directory number of
the extension whose name
you want to change.

CHG Name? DN

• The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

3. Dial the directory number of • Current entry appears:

the extension whose name <Example>
you want to change: three or
four digits. # 100: Smith

4. Dial new name of the exten- • Dialed name appears on the • To enter the name, use 0
sion. display: through 9, *, #, and SELECT
button. For further detail, refer to
# 100: Jack “Registration of extension name”
on the next page:
• When you dial, dialed number
SELECT button
winks one by one on the display.

5. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the entry. lights in red.

• Confirmation tone sounds.

11-C-11
Registration of extension name <Example>
Here is an example of changing a name to “Jack”
To enter extension names, use the buttons from at step 4 on the previous page.
“0” to “9,” “*” and “#” and the SELECT button. Refer to Combination Table at left.
Multiple pressing of the SELECT button select a Operation Display Resulted
different column of letters, numbers or special
characters. 1. Dial “5.”
For instance, dialing “1” and pressing the
SELECT button once give the letter “Q.” Dialing # 100: 5
“1” and pressing the SELECT button twice give
the letter “q,” and so on.
2. Press the SELECT Gives the letter “J.”
Combination Table (AUTO ANS/MUTE)
button once. # 100: J
Pressing “SELECT”
(Times)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Dial 0
Dial 1 1 Q q Z z ! ?
3. Dial “2.” # 100: J2
Dial 2 2 A a B b C c

Dial 3 3 D d E e F f

Dial 4 4 G g H h I i 4. Press the SELECT Gives the letter “a.”

(AUTO ANS/MUTE)
Dial 5 5 J j K k L l button twice. # 100: Ja

Dial 6 6 M m N n O o

Dial 7 7 P p R r S s
5. dial “2.” # 100: Ja 2
Dial 8 8 T t U u V v

Dial 9 9 W w X x Y y

Dial 0 0 . , ' : ; 6. Press the SELECT Gives the letter “c.”

(AUTO ANS/MUTE) # 100: Jac
Dial * * " + - = < > button six times.

Dial # # $ % & @ ( )

7. Dial “5.” # 100: Jac 5

8. Press the SELECT Gives the letter “k.”

(AUTO ANS/MUTE)
button four times. # 100: Jack

Now “Jack” is entered.

11-C-12
Operation chart for changing extension name
PITS system programming
mode

<Status 1>
SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

Dial “0 3.”

<Status 2>
CHG Name No? DN
The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.

• To designate the extension directory

number, dial three or four digits.
• To designate the lowest extension number,
press the NEXT button.
• To designate the highest extension number,
press the NEXT and then the PREV button.

Current contents appear on the display.

• To set or change the extension name, dial

the new extension name.
• To correct an error entry, press the CLEAR
button and dial again.
•☛

Dialed name appears on the display.

• Press the MEMORY button to store the

name.
•☛

Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

• To advance to the next extension number,

press the NEXT button.
• To return to the previous extension
number, press the PREV button.
• The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.
Note:
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status 1>
restores <Status 1>. Operation
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after Result from the
<Status 2> restores <Status 2>. operation
☛ You can also advance to the next extension
number by pressing the NEXT button and return
to the previous extension number by pressing the
PREV button.

11-C-13
6.00 Changing PITS
Programming Password

The following operation is used to change the PITS

programming password which is required to enter
into PITS system programming mode.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program- • The message appears on the • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
ming mode. display: “Setting PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No?

• The MEMORY button indicator

lights in red.

2. Dial “0 4.” (program number) • Current password appears on

the display.
<Example>
System PW: 1111

• The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

3. Dial new password: four • Dialed password appears on • Values from 0 to 9, *, # can be
digits. the display. entered.
<Example>
System PW: 5555

4. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the entry. lights in red.
• Confirmation tone sounds.

11-C-14
Operation chart for changing PITS programming password

PITS system programming

mode

SYS PGM No?

Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

Dial “0 4.”

Current password appears on the display.

The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.

• Dial four digit password.

• To correct an error entry, press the CLEAR
button and dial again.

Dialed password appears on the display.

Press the MEMORY button to store the

password.

Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

Operation
Result from the
operation
Note:
Pressing the END button in PITS system programming mode
restores the Initial display for PITS system programming mode.

11-C-15
7.00 Changing DISA User Code
This is used to change the DISA user code. to Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System
For further information about DISA feature, refer Access (DISA).”

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program- •The following message appears • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
ming mode. on the display: “Entering PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No?

•The MEMORY button indicator

lights in red.

2. Dial “0 5.” (program number) •A message appears on the

display and requires you to enter
the DISA code number:

DISA CD No?

•The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

3. Dial DISA code number (1 •Current user code of the selected

to 8). DISA code number appears on
the display:
<Example>
USR CD 8 : 1234
8 : DISA code number
1234 : DISA user code

•If nothing is stored:

USR CD 8 :

4. Dial DISA user code: four • Dialed digits appear on the • Digits 0 through 9 can be
digits. display: entered as the DISA user code.

USR CD 8 : 5555

5. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the code. lights in red.

• Confirmation tone sounds.

11-C-16
Operation chart for changing DISA user code
PITS system programming
mode

<Status 1>
SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

Dial “0 5.”

<Status 2>
DISA CD No?
The MEMORY button indicator light
goes out.
• To designate the DISA code number, dial
one digit: 1 to 8.
• To designate the DISA code number 1,
press the NEXT button.
• To designate the DISA code number 8,
press the NEXT button and then the PREV
button.

Current user code appears on the

display.

• To enter or change the DISA user code,

dial the new DISA user code: four digits.
• To correct an error entry, press the CLEAR
button and dial again.
•☛

Dialed code appears on the display.

• Press the MEMORY button to store the

code.
•☛

Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

• Press the NEXT button to advance to the

next DISA code number.
• Press the PREV button to return to the
previous DISA code number.
Note: • The MEMORY button indicator light goes
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status 1> out.
restores <Status 1>.
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after <Status 2> Operation
restores <Status 2>. Result due to
☛ You can also advance to the next DISA code number the operation
by pressing the NEXT button and return to the previous
DISA code number by pressing the PREV button.

11-C-17
8.00 Changing Walking COS
Password

This is used to change the walking COS password Section 4-C-9.00 “Walking COS (Class of
for performing Walking COS. Service).”
For further information about Walking COS, refer to

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system program- • The message appears on the • Refer to Section 11-C-1.00
ming mode. display: “Entering PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No ?

• The MEMORY button

indicator lights in red.

2. Dial “0 6.” (program number) • Current password appears on

the display:

<Example>

Walk PW: 1111

• The MEMORY button

indicator light goes out.

3. Dial new password: four • Dialed password appears on • Values from 0 to 9, * , # can be
digits. the display: entered for the password.
<Example>

Walk PW: 5555

4. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button

to store the newly dialed indicator lights in red.
password.
• Confirmation tone sounds.

11-C-18
Operation chart for changing Walking COS password

PITS system programming

mode

SYS-PGM No?
Initial display for PITS system
programming mode

Dial “0 6.”

Current password appears on the display.

The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.

• Dial four digit password.

• To clear an error entry, press the CLEAR
button and dial again.
• To remove the password for Walking COS,
press the CLEAR button.

Dialed password appears on the display.

Press the MEMORY button to store the

password.

Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.

Operation
Result from the
operation
Note:
Pressing the END button in PITS system programming mode restores
the Initial display for PITS system programming mode.

11-C-19
9.00 Setting Charge Limitation

Used to set the charge limitation on the extension basis (See Section 3-F-19.00 “Charge Management”).

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system programming • SYS-PGM No? → • Refer to Section 11-C-

mode. 1.00 “Entering PITS
• The MEMORY indicator lights in System Programming
red. Mode.”

2. Enter “07” (program number) • Charge Limit

• The MEMORY indicator goes out.

3. Press NEXT. • EXT No? →

4. Enter an extension directory <Example> • You can press NEXT to

number (DN): three or four digits. 100: 99999 go to the lowest directory
number.
DN 100

5. Enter a charge limitation: <Example> • To change the current

0 through 99999. 100: 30000 entry, press CLEAR and
enter the new value
again.

• The MEMORY indicator lights in

6. Press MEMORY to store the red.
entry. • Confirmation tone sounds.

To set another extension:

7. Press NEXT or PREV. • EXT No? →
or

Press SELECT. • The next extension directory • Repeat steps 3 through

number is displayed. 7.
• Repeat steps 4 through
<Example> 7.
101: 99999

To finish the programming:

8. Press END. • SYS-PGM No? →

Initial Display of PITS System

Programming Mode.

11-C-20
(70695)
10.00 Setting Charge Management ID Code

Used to set/change Charge Management ID code (See Section 3-F-19.00 “Charge Management”).

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set PITS system programming • SYS-PGM No? → • Refer to Section 11-C-

mode. 1.00 “Entering PITS
• The MEMORY indicator lights in System Programming
red. Mode.”

2. Enter “08” (program number) • Charge ID Code

• The MEMORY indicator goes out.

3. Press NEXT. • Code: 1234 • Default: 1234

4. Enter four digits ID code: 0000 <Example> • To correct the current

through 9999. Code: 3939 entry, press CLEAR and
enter the new value
again.

5. Press MEMORY to store the • The MEMORY indicator lights in

entry. red.
• Confirmation tone sounds.

6. To finish the programming, press • SYS-PGM No? →

END.
• Initial Display of PITS System
Programming Mode.

11-C-21
(70695)
 Section 12

Station Programming

Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

 (Section 12)

Station Programming
Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)
Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 12-A-1

B Function of PITS Buttons in PITS Programming.............................................. 12-B-1

C Operation......................................................................................................... 12-C-1

1.00 DN (Directory Number) Button Assignment........................................... 12-C-2

2.00 PF (Programmable Feature) Button Assignment................................... 12-C-7
3.00 DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button Assignment ............................... 12-C-11
4.00 Automatic Line Hunting (Calling) Selection ........................................... 12-C-15
5.00 Automatic Answering Selection............................................................. 12-C-18
6.00 Call Waiting Tone Selection................................................................... 12-C-21
7.00 Confirmation of Directory Number/Port Number.................................... 12-C-24
8.00 PITS Automatic Test.............................................................................. 12-C-26
9.00 Charge Management............................................................................. 12-C-33
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
9.01 Charge Management Outline...................................................... 12-C-33
9.02 Entering Charge Management Mode.......................................... 12-C-34
9.03 Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter–Extensions....................... 12-C-35
9.04 Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter–ATT.................................. 12-C-36
9.05 Checking the Charge Meter–CO Line ......................................... 12-C-37
9.06 Checking the Charge Meter–All CO Lines................................... 12-C-38
9.07 Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter–Account Code.................. 12-C-39
9.08 Clearing all Charge Meters.......................................................... 12-C-40
9.09 Printing Charge Information on SMDR........................................ 12-C-41
9.10 Setting Charge Rate.................................................................... 12-C-45
9.11 Setting Account Codes................................................................ 12-C-46

12-1
(70695)
A. Introduction
Description Conditions
This section provides information for the If the programming data of your PITS is already
programming of various features unique to each accessed by another administration device, the
PITS telephone and DSS console in PITS station following message appears on the display:
programming mode.
Already Accessed
The assignable features are:
PITS station programming can be done at any
extension simultaneously.
1) Assigning DN (Directory Number) Buttons
2) Assigning PF (Programmable Feature)
Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP-
Buttons on PITS and DSS console
PHONE button is off. If it is off-hook or the
3) Assigning DSS (Direct Station Selection)
speaker-phone is on, PITS programming mode is
Buttons on PITS and DSS console
not established even if the MEMORY switch is
4) Automatic Line Hunting (Calling) Selection
set to the “PROGRAM” side.
5) Automatic Answering Selection
6) Call Waiting Tone Selection
7) Confirmation of Directory Number/Port
Number
8) PITS Automatic Test (for areas other than
U.S.A. and Canada)
9) Charge Management
(See Section 3-F-19.00 “Charge
Management”)

Note:
The assignment of PF and DSS buttons on the
DSS console can be done using the
associated PITS telephone.
In the programming procedures described in
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignment”
and 12-C-3.00 “DSS Button Assignment,”
press a PF or DSS button on the DSS console
instead of pressing a PF or DSS button on the
PITS telephone.
Refer to Section 4-B-2.00 “Assignable Feature
Buttons” for further information about features
assignable to DN buttons, PF buttons and
DSS buttons.

12-A-1
(70695)
B. Function of PITS Buttons
in PITS Programming
In PITS system and PITS station programming
modes, the functions of the buttons are
changed as illustrated below:

• For users with PITS type 30 (KX-T30830,

KX-T61630, KX-T123230D, KX-
T123230,KX-T123235);

PAUSE button CLEAR button

button Programmable Feature

(PF) buttons
button
Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD)

Overlay sheet ☛

Directory Number (DN)

buttons

, / - button AUTO/MEMORY button

SELECT button
PREV button
SECRET button
FLASH button
END button NEXT button

☛ For the convenience of PITS system/station

programming, function names for programming are
printed on the overlay sheet. This sheet is
provided for PITS telephone equipped with display.

12-B-1
• For users with PITS Model. KX-T7030.

Overlay sheet

• For users with PITS Model. KX-T7130.

Overlay sheet

12-B-2
C. Operation

Introduction
Procedures for performing PITS station
programming are described in tables and
operation charts.

The tables show the procedures in the following

form:

Operation Result Comment/Note

1) 2) 3)

1) Describes actual operation.

2) Shows the result from the operation.
3) Comment or note on the operation.

Operation charts are attached to the tables to help

you to understand the flow.

Note:
The procedures in this section are described
from the viewpoint of type 30 PITS
telephone users. If KX-T7030 or KX-T7130
is used in PITS station programming mode,
press the STORE button instead of
MEMORY button.

12-C-1
1.00 DN (Directory Number)
Button Assignment
Assigning various features to the DN buttons of
individual PITS telephone is explained here.
Operation
1. Set the MEMORY switch at
the rear of PITS to
“PROGRAM.”
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY
2. Press the appropriate DN
button.
The explanation of the message display applies
only to a PITS with the display.
Result Comment/Note
• The following message • This status is called “initial
appears on the display: display for PITS station
programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.? • If the programming data of your
PITS has already been
• The MEMORY button indicator accessed by another
lights in red. administration device, the
following message appears on
the display.
Already Accessed
• From now on in any status,
pressing the END button
restores this status.
• Previously stored data appears • When the following messages
on the display: appears on the display,
changing the assigned feature
<Example> is impossible in this mode, and
DSS(DN):1011 can be changed only by the
system programming.
• The MEMORY button indicator
light goes out and the <Example>
associated DN button indicator PDN:DN 1011
lights in red. (Primary Directory Number)
• If nothing is entered within one
minute after pressing the DN <Example>
button, “Initial display for SDN:DN 1012
PITS station programming (Secondary Directory Number)
mode” is displayed again.
<Example>
PRV-CO:P 2021
(Private CO)
<Example>
OHCA on DN
(Off-Hook Call Announcement)
<Example>
UCD Log
(UCD Log in)
<Example>
Local Alarm
(Local Alarm)
Continued
12-C-2
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note

<Example>
Message Waiting
(Message Waiting)

<Example>
CO:P 1011
(Single CO)

<Example>
Trunk Group:11
(Group CO)

• If no feature is assigned to the

DN button, the following
message appears on the
display :

Not Stored
3. To change the preset
feature, dial the program
number corresponding to the
desired feature.

• To assign DSS (DN) feature,

1) Dial “1.” 1) The following message

appears on the display.

DSS(DN):

2) Dial a directory number
(three or four digits).
• To assign DSS (ICM)
feature,
1) Dial “2.”
2) The dialed number appears
on the display.
<Example>
DSS(DN):100
1) The following message
appears on the display.
• If the dialed number does not
exist as a directory number,
alarm tone sounds.
• If you want to clear a wrong
entry, press the CLEAR button
and dial the correct number.

DSS(ICM):

2) Dial an ICM number (one
or two digit(s)).
2) The dialed number appears • If the dialed number does not
on the display. exist as an ICM number, alarm
tone sounds.
<Example> • If you want to clear a wrong
DSS(ICM):11 entry, press the CLEAR button
and dial the correct number.

Continued

12-C-3

Operation
•To assign One Touch Dialing
feature,
1) Dial “3,”
2) Dial a telephone number
or a feature number.
• To assign Privacy Change
feature, dial “4.”
• To assign External Feature
Access feature, dial “5.”
• To assign Call Park-System
feature, dial “6.”
• To assign Call Park-Station
feature, dial “7.”
• To assign Ringing Transfer
feature, dial “8.”
Continued
Result Comment/Note
• Refer to Section 4-C-4.01
“One Touch Dialing” for further
1) No message appears on the information .
display:
2) The following message • Up to 16 digits can be entered.
appears on the display:
<Example 1> when dialing a • If you want to clear a wrong
telephone number: entry, press the CLEAR button
123456 and dial the correct number.
<Example 2> when dialing a
feature number:
01
The following message appears • Privacy Change feature is
on the display: assignable to only one button
among DN buttons and DSS
Privacy Change buttons.
• Refer to Section 4-G-2.00
“Privacy Release” and Section
4-G-3.00 “Privacy Attach” for
further information about
Privacy Change feature.
The following message appears • Refer to Section 4-G-9.00
on the display: “External Feature Access” for
further information .
External Feature
The following message appears • Refer to Section 4-E-5.01
on the display: “Call Park-System” for further
information .
Park System
The following message appears • Refer to Section 4-E-5.02
on the display: “Call Park-Station ” for further
information .
Park Station
The following message appears • Refer to Section 4-F-1.04
on the display: “Ringing Transfer” for further
information.
Ringing Transfer
Continued
12-C-4
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note
• To assign Call Splitting The following message appears • Refer to Section 4-E-6.00
feature, dial “9.” on the display: “Call Splitting” for further
information.
Split

• To assign Tone Through The following message appears • Refer to Section 4-G-12.00
Break feature, dial “ * .” on the display: “Tone Through (End to End
DTMF Signaling)” for further
Tone Break information.

4. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the assignment. lights in red.
• The associated DN button
indicator light goes out.
• Confirmation tone sounds.
• “Initial display for PITS station
programming mode” is
displayed again.

5. To conclude the “PITS • PITS station programming

station programming mode,” mode is concluded and
slide the MEMORY switch to returns to the operation mode.
“SET.”

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-5
--Operation Chart--

PITS station program- To assign DSS(DN) feature:

ming mode
Dial “1” DSS (DN) :

Dial DN number
PITS PGM No.? (example: 1101)

<Operation 1> DSS (DN) : 1101

Press the DN
button To assign DSS(ICM) feature:
• Displays current data on the
Dial “2” DSS (ICM) :
display.
• The MEMORY button
indicator light goes out. Dial ICM number
• The associated DN button (example: 11)
indicator lights in red.
DSS (DN) : 11

To assign One Touch Dialing:

Dial “3”

Dial One touch dial

(example: 123)

123

To assign Privacy Change feature:

Dial “4” Privacy Change

Press the MEMORY To assign External Feature Access:

button to conclude
mode
Dial “5” External Feature
• Registration (Storage) is
To assign Call Park-System feature:
executed.
• The MEMORY button indicator
lights in red. Dial “6” Park System
• The associated DN button
indicator light goes out. To assign Call Park-Station feature:

Dial “7” Park Station

To assign Ringing Transfer feature:

PITS PGM No?
Dial “8” Ringing Transfer

To assign Call Splitting feature:

Dial “9” Split

To assign Tone Through Break feature:

Dial “ * ” Tone Break

Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1>.
12-C-6
2.00 PF (Programmable Feature)
Button Assignment
Assigning various functions to the PF buttons of
the individual PITS telephone and DSS Console
is explained here.
Operation
1. Set the MEMORY switch at
the rear of PITS to
“PROGRAM.”
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY
2. Press a PF button.
The explanation of the message display applies
only to a PITS provided with the display.
Result Comment/Note
• The following message • This display is called “Initial
appears on the display: display for PITS station
programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.? • From now on in any status,
pressing the END button
• The MEMORY button indicator restores this status.
lights in red. • If the programming data of your
PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device, the
following message appears on
the display.
Already Accessed
• Previously stored data appears
on the display.
<Example>
If preset to one touch dialing
button
• Stored data as one touch
M01/P: 9-1-201-123- dialing.
• If nothing is stored, “Not
Stored” appears.
• To scroll,
use the or button.
(Note)
• “P” means PF button of the
PITS. If PF button on DSS
console associated with PITS
is pressed, “C” appears
instead of “P.”
• PF button number.
• The MEMORY button indicator • If nothing is entered within one
light goes out. minute after pressing a PF
button, “Initial display for PITS
station programming mode” is
displayed again.
Continued
12-C-7

Operation
3. To change the previously
stored data, dial the program
number corresponding to the
desired feature.
• To assign DSS(ICM) feature,
1) Dial “2.”
2) Dial ICM number (one or
two digit(s)).
• To assign One Touch Dialing
feature,
1) Dial “3.”
2) Dial a telephone number
or a feature number.
• To assign External Feature
Access, dial “5.”
• To assign Call Park-System
feature, dial “6.”
• To assign Call Park-Station
feature, dial “7.”
Continued
Result Comment/Note
1) The following message
appears on the display:
M01/P : DSS(ICM)
2) The following message • If the dialed number does not
appears on the display: exist as an ICM number, alarm
tone sounds.
<Example> • If you want to clear a wrong
M01/P : DSS(ICM)11 entry, press the CLEAR button
and dial the correct number.
1) The following message
appears on the display:
M01/P :
2) The following message • Up to 16 digits can be stored.
appears on the display:
<Example> when entering a • You can enter: 0 to 9, * , #,
telephone number: Pause, Flash, - (hyphen),
M01/P : 9123456 SECRET.
<Example> when entering a
feature number: • If you want to clear a wrong
M01/P : 01 entry, press the CLEAR button
and dial the correct number.
• The following message
appears on the display:
M01/P : EXT FEAT
• The following message
appears on the display:
M01/P : PARK SYS
• The following message
appears on the display:
M01/P : PARK ST
Continued
12-C-8
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note
• To assign Ringing Transfer • The following message
feature, dial “8.” appears on the display:

M01/P : RING TRNS

• To assign Call Splitting • The following message

feature, dial “9.” appears on the display:

M01/P : Split

• To assign Call Forwarding /Do • This feature is assignable only

Not Disturb (FWD/DND) to the PF3 button of PITS type
feature, dial “0.” 50.
Refer to Section 4-A-2.01
“Location of Feature Buttons”
for further information.

• To assign Tone Through • The following message

Break feature, dial “ * .” appears on the display:

M01/P : Tone Break

• To assign Saved Number • The following message • This feature is assignable only
Redial (SNR) feature, dial “#.” appears on the display: to the PF1 button of PITS type
50, KX-T7020 and KX-T7030.
M01/P : SNR

4. Press the MEMORY button to • The MEMORY button indicator

store the assignment. lights in red.

• Confirmation tone sounds.

• “Initial display for PITS

station programming mode” is
displayed again.

5. To conclude PITS station • PITS station programming

programming mode, slide the mode is concluded and returns
MEMORY switch on the PITS to operation mode.
to “SET.”

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-9
 --Operation Chart--

PITS station program- To assign DSS(ICM) feature:

ming mode
Dial “2” M01/P: DSS(ICM)
<STATUS 1>
Dial ICM number
(example: 11)
PITS PGM No.?

M01/P: DSS(ICM)11
Press a PF button
(example: PF1)
To assign One Touch Dialing feature:
• Stored details appear on
the display. Dial “3” M01/P:
• The MEMORY button
indicator light goes out.
Dial the telephone
number
or
Dial the feature
number

M01/P: 924312111

or

M01/P: 01

To assign External Feature Access:

Dial “5” M01/P: EXT FEAT

Press the MEMORY To assign Call Park-System feature:

button to conclude
mode
Dial “6” M01/P: PARK SYS

PITS PGM No? To assign Call Park-Station feature:

• The MEMORY button Dial “7” M01/P: PARK ST

indicator lights in red.
To assign Ringing Transfer feature:

Dial “8” M01/P: RING TRNS

To assign Split feature:

Dial “9” M01/P: Split

To assign Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature:

Assigning Call Forwarding/Do Not
Dial “0” Disturb is limited to the PITS type
50 and KX-T7050 only.
To assign Tone Through Break feature:

Dial “ * ” M01/P: Tone Break

To assign Saved Number Redial feature:

Dial “ # ” M01/P: SNR

Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1>.
12-C-10
3.00 DSS (Direct Station Selection)
Button Assignment
Assigning various functions to the DSS buttons
on the KX-T30830 type PITS telephone and DSS
console is explained here.
Operation
1. Set the MEMORY switch at
the rear of PITS to
“PROGRAM.”
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY
2. Press a DSS button.
3. To change the stored data,
dial the program number
corresponding to the desired
feature.
• To assign DSS (DN) feature,
1) Dial “1.”
2) Dial a directory number
(three or four digits).
The explanation of the message display applies only
to a PITS provided with the display.
Result Comment/Note
• The following message • This status is called “initial
appears on the display: display for PITS station
programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.? • If the programming data of your
PITS has already been
• The MEMORY button indicator accessed by another
lights in red. administration device, the
following message appears on
the display.
Already Accessed
• From now on in any status,
pressing the END button
restores this status.
• Previously stored data appears • If the following message
on the display. appears, Message Waiting
<Example> If DSS(DN) feature feature is already assigned
is assigned: and changing the feature in this
mode is impossible.
DSS(DN):1011
Message Waiting
• The MEMORY button indicator
light goes out. • If nothing is entered within one
The associated DSS button minute after pressing a DSS
indicator lights. button, “Initial display for
PITS station programming
mode” is shown on the display
again.
1) The following message
appears on the display:
DSS(DN):
2) The dialed directory number • If the dialed number does not
appears on the display: exist as a directory number,
alarm tone sounds when
<Example> MEMORY button is pressed.
DSS(DN):100 • To clear an error entry, press
the CLEAR button and dial the
correct number.
Continued
12-C-11
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note
• To assign DSS (ICM)
feature,
1) Dial “2.” 1) The following message
appears on the display:

DSS(ICM):

2) Dial ICM number (one or 2) The dialed ICM number • If the dialed number does not
two digit(s)). appears on the display: exist as an ICM number,
alarm tone sounds when
DSS(ICM):11 MEMORY button is pressed.
• If you want to clear a wrong
entry, press the CLEAR button
• To assign One Touch Dialing and dial the correct number.
feature,
1) Dial “3.” 1) No message appears on the
display:

2) Dial a telephone number 2) The following message • Up to 16 digits can be stored.

or a feature number. appears on the display: • If you want to clear a wrong
<Example 1> when entering a entry, press the CLEAR button
telephone number: and dial the correct number.
123456
<Example 2> when entering a
feature number:
01

• To assign Privacy Change • The following message • Privacy Change feature is

feature, dial “4.” appears on the display: assignable to only one button
among DSS buttons and DN
Privacy Change buttons.

• To assign External Feature • The following message

Access, dial “5.” appears on the display:

External Feature

• To assign Call Park-System • The following message

feature, dial “6.” appears on the display:

Park System

Continued

12-C-12
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note

• To assign Call Park-Station • The following message

feature, dial “7.” appears on the display:

Park Station

• To assign Ringing Transfer • The following message

feature, dial “8.” appears on the display:

Ringing Transfer

• To assign Call Splitting • The following message

feature, dial “9.” appears on the display:

Split

• To assign Tone Through • The following message

Break feature, dial “* .” appears on the display:

Tone Break

4. Press the MEMORY button to • The MEMORY button indicator

store the assignment. lights in red.
• The associated DSS button
indicator light goes out.
• Confirmation tone sounds.
• “Initial display for PITS station
programming mode” is shown
on the display.

5. To conclude PITS station • PITS station programming

programming mode, slide the mode is concluded and returns
MEMORY switch to “SET.” to the operation mode.

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-13
 --Operation Chart--
To assign DSS(DN) feature:
PITS station program-
ming mode
Dial “1” DSS (DN) :
<STATUS 1>
Dial directory number
PITS PGM No.? (example: 1234)

DSS (DN) : 1234

Press the DSS
button
To assign DSS (ICM) feature:
• Current contents appear on
the display. Dial “2” DSS (ICM) :
• The MEMORY button
indicator light goes out.
Dial ICM number
• The associated DSS button
(example: 11)
indicator lights in red.

M01/P:
DSS (ICM) : 11

To assign One Touch Dialing feature:

Dial “3”

Dial feature
number
(example: 123)

M01/P: 123

To assign Privacy Change feature:

Dial “4” Privacy Change

Press the MEMORY To assign External Feature Access:

button
Dial “5” External Feature

PITS PGM No? To assign Call Park-System feature:

• The MEMORY button Dial “6” Park System

indicator lights in red.
• The DSS button indicator
To assign Call Park-Station feature:
light goes out.
Dial “7” Park Station

To assign Ringing Transfer feature:

Dial “8” Ringing Transfer

To assign Call Splitting feature:

Dial “9” Split

To assign Tone Through Break feature:

Dial “ * ” Tone Break

Note : In any status, pressing END key restores <STATUS 1>.

12-C-14
4.00 Automatic Line Hunting
(Calling) Selection

This feature automatically connects a PITS
telephone to a pre-assigned line when an
extension user lifts the handset or press the SP-
PHONE to make calls.
There are two options by which an extension user
may select a desired line:
• Prime Line Preference-Calling (Default)
• Idle Line Preference-Calling
If “No Line Preference-Calling” is selected, no line is
connected to a PITS telephone by lifting the handset
or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
For further information about this feature, refer to
Section 4-C-1.00 “Line Selection-Calling.”
The table shows the operation for each programming.
(The explanation of the message display applies only
to a PITS provided with the display.)

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • The following message • This status is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display: display for PITS-station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.? • If the following message
appears on the display, the
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY • The MEMORY button indicator programming data of your
lights in red. PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device:

Already Accessed

• From now on in any status,

pressing the END button
restores this status.

2. Dial “00.” • Preset data appears on the • If nothing is entered within one
display: minute after dialing “00,”
<Example> “Initial display for PITS-
If No Line Preference is station programming mode” is
preset: shown again on the display.

Pref. Out : No.

• The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

3. To change the preset • To change the assignment,

feature, dial the appropriate simply dial the appropriate
program number number again.
corresponding to the desired
feature.

• To set “No Line Preference,” • The following message

dial “1.” appears on the display:

Pref. Out : No.

Continued
12-C-15
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note

• To set “Idle Line Preference,” • The following message If “Idle Line Preference” is set,
dial “2.” appears on the display: the system selects an idle button
from the buttons assigned in
Pref. Out : Idle “System Operation”, Idle Line
Preference:
DN (PDN,SDN) buttons or CO
(Private CO, Single CO, Group
CO) buttons.

• To set “Prime Line <Example 1> • Pressing a wrong button is

Preference,” press one of the When pressing one of the DN cleared by pressing a correct
following buttons: buttons, the DN number of the button.
pressed button appears on the • If an inaccessible button is
PDN display: pressed, alarm tone sounds.
SDN
Private CO Pref. Out : DN-xx
Single CO
Group CO <Example 2>
ICM When pressing the ICM button,
the following message appears
on the display:

Pref. Out : ICM

4. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the assignment. lights in red.

• Confirmation tone sounds.

• “Initial display for PITS

station programming mode” is
shown on the display.

5. To conclude PITS station • PITS station programming

programming mode, slide the mode is concluded and returns
MEMORY switch to “SET.” to the operation mode.

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-16
 --Operation Chart--

PITS station program-

ming mode

<STATUS 1>

PITS PGM No?

Dial “0 0”

To set “No Line Preference”:

• Current data appears on
the display.
• The MEMORY button Dial “1” Pref. Out : No
indicator light goes out.
To set “Idle Line Preference”:

Dial “2” Pref. Out : Idle

To set “Prime Line Preference”:

<Example> Press the ICM
Press button
PDN SDN
PrivateCO ICM Pref. Out : ICM
SingleCO GRP.CO

The assignment can be changed before pressing

the MEMORY button.

Press the MEMORY

button

PITS PGM No?

• The MEMORY button

indicator lights in red.

Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1>.

12-C-17
5.00 Automatic Answering
Selection
This feature automatically connects a PITS
telephone to a pre-assigned line when an
extension user lifts the handset or press the SP-
PHONE to answer incoming calls.
There are two options by which an extension user
may select a desired line.
• Ringing Line Preference-Answering (Default)
• Prime Line Preference-Answering
If “No Line Preference-Answering” is selected, no
line is connected to a PITS telephone by lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
For further information about this feature, refer to
Section 4-D-1.00 “Line Selection-Answering.”
The table shows the operation for each
programming. (The explanation of the message
display applies only to a PITS provided with the
display.)

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • The following message • This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display. display for PITS-station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.?
• If the following message
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY • The MEMORY button indicator appears on the display, the
lights in red. programming data of your PITS
has already been accessed by
another administration device.

Already Accessed

• From now on, in any status,

pressing the END button
restores this status.

2. Dial “01.” • Preset data appears on the • If nothing is entered within one
display. minute after dialing “01,” the
<example> “Initial display for PITS station
When “No Line Preference” is programming mode” is shown
preset: on the display again.

Pref. In : No

3. To change the preset • To change the assignment,

feature, dial the program simply dial the appropriate
number corresponding to the number again.
desired feature.
• To set No Line Preference, • The following message
dial “1.” appears on the display:

Pref. In : No.

• To set Ringing Line • The following message

Preference, dial “2.” appears on the display:

Pref. In : Ring

Continued
12-C-18
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note
• To set “Prime Line Preference,” <Example 1> • Pressing a wrong button is
press one of the following When you press a DN button, cleared by pressing a correct
buttons. the number of the pressed button.
button appears on the display: • If an inaccessible button is
PDN pressed, alarm tone sounds.
SDN Pref. In : DN-xx
Private CO
Single CO <Example 2>
Group CO If you press the ICM button, the
ICM following message appears on
the display:

Pref. In : ICM

4. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button indicator

to store the programming. lights in red.
• Confirmation tone sounds.
• “Initial display for PITS
station programming mode” is
displayed again on the display.

5. To conclude PITS station • PITS station programming

programming mode, slide the mode is concluded and returns
MEMORY switch to “SET.” to the operation mode.

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-19
 --Operation Chart--

PITS station program-

ming mode

<STATUS 1>

PITS PGM No?

Dial “0 1”

To set “No Line Preference”:

• Current data appears on
the display.
• The MEMORY button Dial “1” Pref. In : No
indicator light goes out.
To set “Ringing Line Preference”:

Dial “2” Pref. In : Ring

To set “Prime Line Preference”:

<Example> Press the ICM
Press button
PDN SDN
PrivateCO ICM Pref. In : ICM
SingleCO GRP.CO

The assignment can be changed before pressing

the MEMORY button.

Press the MEMORY

button

PITS PGM No?

• The MEMORY button

indicator lights in red.

Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1>.

12-C-20
6.00 Call Waiting Tone Selection
Used to choose desired call waiting tone type refer to Section 4-D-7.00 “Call Waiting.”
from Tone 1 and Tone 2. The explanation of the message display applies
For further information about call waiting tone, only to a PITS provided with the display.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • The following message • This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display: display for PITS station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
PIT-PGM No.? • If the following message
appears on the display, the
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY • The MEMORY button indicator programming data of your
lights in red. PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device.

Already accessed

• From now on, in any status,

pressing the END button
restores this status.

2. Dial “02.” • The preset tone type appears • If nothing is entered within one
on the display: minute after dialing “02,” “Initial
display for PITS station
<Example> programming mode” is shown
C.W. Tone-1 again on the display.

• The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

3. To change the preset tone • To change the assignment,

type, dial the number simply dial the appropriate
corresponding to the desired number again.
call waiting tone.
• To set the call waiting tone 1, • The following message
dial “1.” appears on the display:

C.W. Tone-1

• The following message

appears on the display:
• To set the call waiting tone 2,
dial “2.” C.W. Tone-2

Continued
12-C-21
 Continued
Operation Result Comment/Note

4. Press the MEMORY button • The MEMORY button

to store the entry. indicator lights in red.
• The confirmation tone sounds.
• “Initial display for PITS station
programming mode” is shown
on the display.

5. To conclude “PITS station • PITS station programming

programming mode,” slide mode is concluded and
the MEMORY switch to returns to the operation mode.
“SET.”

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-22
 --Operation Chart--

PITS station program-

ming mode

<STATUS 1>

PITS PGM No?

Dial “0 2”

To assign Call Waiting Tone 1:

• Current data appears on
the display.
• The MEMORY button Dial “1” C.W. Tone-1
indicator light goes out.

To assign Call Waiting Tone 2:

Dial “2” C.W. Tone-2

Press the MEMORY

button

PITS PGM No?

• The MEMORY button

indicator lights in red.

Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1>.

12-C-23
7.00 Confirmation of Directory
Number/Port Number
Enables an extension of a PITS with display to (physical number) displayed on the display by the
confirm its own directory number and port number following operation:

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • The following message • This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display: display for PITS station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.?
• If the following message
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY • The MEMORY button indicator appears on the display, the
lights in red. programming data of your
PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device.

Already Accessed

• From now on, in any status,

pressing the END button
restores this status.

2. Dial “03.” • The physical number and the • If nothing is entered within one
directory number appear on minute after dialing “03,” “Initial
the display: display for PITS station
programming mode” is shown
<Example> again on the display.
P1011 DN1111

• The MEMORY button indicator

light goes out.

• To conclude PITS station • PITS station program mode

programming mode, slide is concluded and returns to
the MEMORY switch to the operation mode.
“SET.”

SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY

12-C-24
--Operation Chart--

PITS station program-

ming mode

<STATUS 1>

PITS PGM No?

Dial “0 3”

• Port number (physical

number) & DN appears on
the display.
• The MEMORY button
indicator light goes out.

Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1>.

12-C-25
8.00 PITS Automatic Test

Provides automatic test for normal operation of Explanation of the message display applies only
LCD (liquid crystal display), LED (light-emitting to a PITS with the display.
diode), and ringer tone on the PITS telephone.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • The following message • This status is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display: display for PITS station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.?
• If the following message
SET• • PROGRAM
MEMORY • The MEMORY button indicator appears on the display, the
lights in red. programming data of your
PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device.

Already Accessed

• Before starting the test, set the

RINGER switch on the right
side of the PITS to LOW or
HIGH.

2. Dial “90.” • Test sequence is as follows: • To stop the test, press the
END button, and then “Initial
1) LED Test display for PITS station
2) Ringer Test programming mode” is shown
3) LCD Test again on the display.

12-C-26
(70695)
Testing sequence after dialing “90” is given below by using an example of PITS model
KX-T123230.
In LED test, “ ” means the light off, “ ” means the light on, “ ”
means flashing.

1) Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button

indicator for lighting in green.

Panasonic

LED TEST

EASA - PHONE

DN buttons

LED test

ICM button

2) Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button

indicator for flashing in green.
Panasonic

LED TEST

EASA - PHONE

DN buttons

ICM button

12-C-27
(70695)
3) Testing the DN button indicators and the DSS button indicators
for lighting in red.
Panasonic
LED TEST

EASA - PHONE

DN buttons

With the PITS model KX-T30830, the DSS

button indicators also light in red.

4) Testing the DN button indicators and the DSS button indicators

for flashing in red.
Panasonic
LED TEST

EASA - PHONE

DN buttons

With the PITS model KX-T30830, the indicators

on the DSS buttons also flash in red.

5) Testing the indicators of the Message Waiting, CONF, FWD/

DND, AUTO/MEMORY, AUTO ANS/MUTE, SP-PHONE
buttons for lighting in red.
Panasonic
LED TEST
Message Waiting
button

EASA - PHONE
CONF button

FWD/DND
button AUTO/MEMORY button
AUTO ANS/MUTE button
SP-PHONE button

12-C-28
(70695)
 Ringer tone sounds from the
monitor speaker.
Ringer test The following message appears
on the display:

RING TEST

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

################

LCD test
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

==========

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

Conclusion of the test

“Initial display for PITS station program mode” is

displayed again on the display.

12-C-29
(70695)
Testing sequence after dialing “90” is given below by using an example of PITS model
KX-T7130.
In LED test, “ ” means the light off, “ ” means the light on, “ ”
means flashing.

1) Testing the DN button indicators and the INTERCOM

button indicator for lighting in green.

LED TEST

DN buttons

INTERCOM
buttons

LED test

2) Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button

indicator for flashing in green.

LED TEST

DN buttons

INTERCOM
buttons

12-C-30
(70695)
3) Testing the DN button indicators for lighting in red.

LED TEST

DN buttons

4) Testing the DN button indicators for flashing in red.

LED TEST

DN buttons

5) Testing the indicators of the MESSAGE, CONF, FWD/DND,

AUTO DIAL/STORE, AUTO ANSWER/MUTE, SP-PHONE
buttons for lighting in red.

LED TEST

CONF button
MESSAGE button
FWD/DND
button
AUTO DIAL/
STORE button
AUTO ANSWER/
MUTE button
SP-PHONE button

12-C-31
(70695)
 Ringer tone sounds from the
monitor speaker.
Ringer test The following message appears
on the display:

RING TEST

<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<

>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>

################

LCD test
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

==========

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

Conclusion of the test

“Initial display for PITS station programming mode”

is shown again on the display.

12-C-32
(70695)
9.00 Charge Management

9.01 Charge Management Outline

12-C-33
(70695)
9.02 Entering Charge Management Mode

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set the MEMORY switch at • This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to • PITS-PGM No.? display for PITS station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
• The MEMORY indicator lights
in red. • If the following message
appears on the display, the
programming data of your
PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device.

Already Accessed

• From now on, in any status,

pressing the END button
restores this status.

2. Enter “04.” • ID Code?

3. Enter the Charge Management • ID Code? 1234 • Default – 1234

ID Code: four digits. Refer to Section 11-C-10.00
“Setting Charge Management
ID Code” for further
• Charge Management information.
Initial Display
• If the ID code entered is not
Charge Meter correct, you hear alarm tone.

• This display is called “Initial

display for Charge
Management mode.”

12-C-34
(70695)
9.03 Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter–Extensions
Used to check and/or clear the charge meter of each extension.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge Management
Mode.”

2. Enter “0.” • EXT No.?

3. Enter extension directory <Example>

number. 100: 0000 • You can press NEXT to go to
the lowest directory number.
DN 100

4. Press SELECT to check the <Example>

rate. 100: 00005.

• To alternate between the rate

and the meter press SELECT. 100: 00001.15DM

To reset the meter:

5. Press CLEAR <Example>
100: 00000

6. Press MEMORY to store the • The MEMORY indicator lights

data change. in red.

To check/clear another
extension:
7. Press PREV. • EXT No.? • Repeat steps 3 through 7.
or

Press NEXT. • Charge meter of the next • Repeat steps 4 through 7.

extension directory number is
displayed.
<Example>
101: 00008
To finish the programming:
8. Press END • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode.

12-C-35
(70695)
9.04 Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter–ATT

Used to check and/or clear the charge meter of an ATT (Attendant Console).

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge Management
Mode.”

2. Enter “1.” • ATT No.?

3. Enter “1” (ATT 1)or “2” <Example> • You can press NEXT to go to
(ATT 2). ATT1: 00005 the lowest directory number.

4. Press SELECT to check the <Example>

rate. ATT1: 00005.
• To alternate between the rate
and the meter, press SELECT. ATT1: 00001.15DM

To reset the meter: <Example>

5. Press CLEAR. ATT1: 00000
6.Press MEMORY to store the • The MEMORY indicator lights
data change. in red.

To check/clear another ATT:

7. Press NEXT. <Example> • Repeat steps 4 through 5.
ATT2: 00020

To finish the operation: • PITS–PGM No?

8. Press END
Initial Display of PITS Station
Programming Mode.

12-C-36
(70695)
9.05 Checking the Charge Meter–CO Line

Used to check the charge meter of CO line on a single CO line basis.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge
Management Mode.”

2. Enter “2.” • CO No.?

3. Enter CO line physical <Example> • You can press NEXT to go to

number: 1011 through 3158 the lowest CO line physical
1011: 00005. number.
• To alternate between the rate
and the meter, press SELECT.
1011: 00001.15DM

To check other CO lines:

4. Press PREV. CO No.? • Repeat steps 3 and 4.
or
Press NEXT. • The meter of the next CO line
physical number is displayed.

<Example>

1012: 00020

To finish the operation:

5. Press END. • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode

12-C-37
(70695)
9.06 Checking the Charge Meter–All CO Lines
Used to check the total charge of all CO lines.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge
Management Mode.”
2. Enter “3.” <Example>

Sum: 00450.

Sum: 00099.99DM
• To alternate between the rate
and the meter, press SELECT.

To finish the operation: • PITS–PGM No?

3. Press END.
Initial Display of PITS Station
Programming Mode

12-C-38
(70695)
9.07 Checking/Clearing the Charge Meter–Account Code
Used to check and/or clear the charge meter of each account code.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge
Management Mode.”

2. Enter “4.” • Account Code.?

3. Enter account code location <Example> • You can press NEXT to enter
number:001 through 200. 001: 00005 001.

• To alternate between the rate

and the meter press SELECT. 001: 00001.15DM

To reset the meter:

4. Press CLEAR. <Example>
001: 00000

5. Press MEMORY to store the • The MEMORY indicator lights • Repeat steps 3 through 6.
data change. in red
• Repeat steps 4 and 6.

To check other account codes:

6. Press PREV. • Account Code.?
or

Press NEXT. <Example>

002: 00000
To finish the programming:
7. Press END. • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode

12-C-39
(70695)
9.08 Clearing All Charge Meters

Used to clear the charge meter of “Sum” and/or “Ext.”

• Sum: All CO lines and account codes

• Ext: All extensions

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge Management
Mode.”

2. Enter “5.” • Meter Sum Clear?

To reset “Sum” meter:

3. Press CLEAR. <Example>

21 Jan 95 14:30

This is the date when you last

reset the meter.

To go to “Ext”:
4. Press NEXT. Meter Ext Clear?

To reset the meter:

5. Press CLEAR. <Example>

21 Jan 95 14:30

This is the date when you last

reset the meter.

6. Press MEMORY. • 30 Jan 95 13:30 • The meter is reset and the

current date is displayed.

7. Press END. • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode.

12-C-40
(70695)
9.09 Printing Charge Information on SMDR

Used to print charge information on SMDR .

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge Management
Mode.”

2. Enter “6.” • Print Mode?

<All CO lines and account Error Messages

codes> • When the printer is not
3-1. Enter “0.” ready.
Total CHG Print
SMDR Not Ready

• When the printer is in use.

<All extensions>
SMDR Busy
3-2 Enter “1.”
Ext CHG Print

<Each extension>
3-3. Enter “2.”

• Enter extension directory <Example>

number: three or four digits 100: CHG Print

<ATT Consoles>
3-4. Enter “3.” • ATT CHG Print
• Repeat steps 3 through 6.

• Repeat steps 4 through 6.

4. Press END. • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode.

12-C-41
(70695)
Examples of SMDR Printout

(1) All CO Lines and Account Codes

[Meter]

[Charge]

12-C-42
(70695)
(2) All Extensions
[Meter]

[Charge]

12-C-43
(70695)
(3) Each Extension
[Meter]

[Charge]

(4) Attendant Consoles

[Meter]

[Charge]

12-C-44
(70695)
9.10 Setting Charge Rate

Used to set the charge rate of a telephone call per meter.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge Management
Mode.”

2. Enter “7.” <Example>

Rate: 0.23

3. Enter a charging rate: up to <Example> • Press “ ” key to enter a

eight digits including “.” Rate: 1.10 decimal point.
(decimal point). • Press CLEAR to delete the
current entry and enter the
new one.

4. Press MEMORY to store the • The MEMORY indicator lights

entry. in red.
• Confirmation tone sounds.

5. Press END • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode.

12-C-45
(70695)
9.11 Setting Account Codes

Used to set a new account code for charge management feature.

Operation Result Comment/Note

1. Set Charge Management • Refer to Section 12-C-9.02
Mode. • Charge Meter “Entering Charge Management
Mode.”

2. Enter “8.” • Account Code?

3. Enter an account code location <Example> • You can press NEXT to enter
number: 001 through 200. 001: 23456 001.

If not stored:
001: Not Stored

4. Enter a new account code: up <Example> • Press CLEAR to delete the

to five digits 001: 10001 current entry and enter the
new one.

5. Press MEMORY to store the • The MEMORY indicator lights

entry. in red.
• Confirmation tone sounds.

6. Press END • PITS–PGM No?

Initial Display of PITS Station

Programming Mode.

12-C-46
(70695)
 Section 13

Station Programming

Attendant Console
 (Section 13)

Station Programming
Attendant Console (ATT)
Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 13-A-1

1.00 Outline of Local Mode............................................................................ 13-A-1

2.00 Command System................................................................................. 13-A-2
3.00 Basic Operation..................................................................................... 13-A-3
3.01 Starting Local Mode..................................................................... 13-A-3
3.02 Ending Local Mode...................................................................... 13-A-3
3.03 Command Entry........................................................................... 13-A-3
3.04 Control Key Combinations........................................................... 13-A-4
3.05 Special Keys................................................................................ 13-A-4
4.00 Entering a Mode .................................................................................... 13-A-5

B Extension Directory Mode................................................................................ 13-B-1

1.00 Summary ............................................................................................... 13-B-1

2.00 APPEND Command .............................................................................. 13-B-2
3.00 DELETE Command............................................................................... 13-B-4
4.00 LIST Command...................................................................................... 13-B-6
5.00 SET Command...................................................................................... 13-B-9
6.00 HELP Command.................................................................................... 13-B-12
7.00 INIT Command ...................................................................................... 13-B-13
8.00 END Command...................................................................................... 13-B-14

C Speed Dial Dictionary Mode ............................................................................ 13-C-1

1.00 Summary ............................................................................................... 13-C-1

2.00 DELETE Command............................................................................... 13-C-2
3.00 LIST Command...................................................................................... 13-C-3
4.00 SET Command...................................................................................... 13-C-5
5.00 HELP Command.................................................................................... 13-C-7
6.00 END Command...................................................................................... 13-C-8

13-1
 Page
D Local Diagnosis Mode...................................................................................... 13-D-1

1.00 Summary ............................................................................................... 13-D-1

2.00 Diagnosis of CRT................................................................................... 13-D-2
3.00 Diagnosis of LEDs................................................................................. 13-D-5
4.00 Diagnosis of Operation Keyboard.......................................................... 13-D-6
5.00 Diagnosis of Full Keyboard.................................................................... 13-D-8
6.00 REP Command ..................................................................................... 13-D-10
7.00 All Diagnosis ......................................................................................... 13-D-11
8.00 HELP Command.................................................................................... 13-D-12
9.00 END Command...................................................................................... 13-D-13

E Backup Mode................................................................................................... 13-E-1

1.00 Summary ............................................................................................... 13-E-1

2.00 SAVE Command.................................................................................... 13-E-2
3.00 LOAD Command ................................................................................... 13-E-3
4.00 HELP Command.................................................................................... 13-E-4
5.00 END Command...................................................................................... 13-E-5

F HELP Mode...................................................................................................... 13-F-1

G Clear Mode ...................................................................................................... 13-G-1

13-2
A. Preparation

1.00 Outline of Local Mode

Attendant Console Local Mode is used to edit the
local data dedicated to the attendant console.
Attendant Console Local Mode is operated
independently from the main unit.
The operator at Attendant Console can utilize the
following modes on local mode for programming,
diagnosis, and backup.
Extension Directory mode
Speed Dial Dictionary mode
Local Diagnosis mode
Backup mode

In addition, CLEAR mode is provided for clearing

the programmed local data.
Before entering the above modes, HELP
command will help you to see which commands
are available in local mode.

13-A-1
2.00 Command System

Command System in the local mode is shown

below:

Local mode

DIC SPD DIG BUP HELP CLEAR

Mode Entry Extension Speed Dial Local Backup mode Help mode Clearing
Command Directory Dictionary Diagnosis Local Data
mode mode mode

APPEND DELETE CRT SAVE

Entry of Deletion from Diagnosis of Save the
Extension Speed Dial CRT display Local Data
Directory Dictionary
LED

DELETE Diagnosis of
LED
Deletion from indicators
Editing Extension LIST LOAD
Command Directory OPR
Display of Load the Local
Speed Diagnosis of Data
LIST keys on function
Dial Dictionary
Display of keyboard
Extension KEY
Directory
SET Diagnosis of
SET keys on full
Storage and keyboard
Change of change of
Extension Speed Dial REP
Directory Dictionary IC diagnosis
report
INIT
ALL
Initialization of
Extension Diagnosis of
Directory all the above
items

HELP HELP HELP HELP HELP

command Display of Display of Display of Display of
HELP screen HELP screen HELP screen HELP screen
for DIC for SPD for DIG for BUP

END END END END

END Ending Ending Speed Ending Local Ending Backup
Command Extension Dial Dictionary Diagnosis mode
Directory mode mode mode

13-A-2
3.00 Basic Operation
3.01 Starting Local Mode
To enter the Local Mode, set the LOCAL switch
(on the right side of the Attendant Console) to
“ON” when call processing mode of the attendant
console is displayed, then the Local Mode Main
Menu is displayed on the screen. (See the
illustration below)
The prompt “$” is displayed on this screen and
you can enter the desired mode by entering the
appropriate command.
3.02 Ending Local Mode
To end the Local Mode, set the LOCAL switch
(on the right side of the Attendant Console) to
“OFF” when prompt “$” is displayed on the
screen, then call processing mode of attendant
console is obtained automatically.
3.03 Command Entry
Each Main Command can be entered either by
simply pressing the associated function key or by
entering each command character at Full
keyboard.
If Sub Command is required, type it directly at
Full keyboard.
The function keys at the top of the Function
keyboard are command-entry specific.
Their functions depend on the mode you are in.
The entered command is displayed on the
command line.
To execute a command line, press the RETURN
key after entering the Main Command and Sub
Command (if required).
<Example>
In Extension Directory mode:

Enter: DIC> APPEND 1000/Jack/Sales

main command sub command

******************************************
* *
* Local mode for attendant console *
* *
******************************************

DIC : enter to edit mode of extension directory

SPD : enter to edit mode of speed dial dictionary
DIG : enter the diagnostic mode of attendant console
BUP : enter the local data backup mode
HELP : display the command information
Command line CLEAR : clear the attendant local data
$
Function field: display the commands to be selected by keys.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC (Cr) SPD (Cr) DIG (Cr) BUP (Cr) HELP (Cr) CLEAR (Cr)

Local Mode Main Menu Screen

13-A-3
3.04 Control Key Combinations 3.05 Special Keys

You can perform specific operations by using the
CTRL key in combination with certain other keys
as follows.
To use a CTRL key combination, hold down the
CTRL key, and press the other key.
CTRL + S : suspends the display scrolling to
let you view it.
CTRL + Q : restarts the display scrolling
suspended by CTRL + S
CTRL + C : terminates the execution of
entered command. Then allows
you to enter a command again.
CTRL + A : establishes the insert mode.
Pressing CTRL + A again
cancels the insert mode.
CTRL + : moves the cursor to the
beginning of the next word.
CTRL + : moves the cursor to the
beginning of the previous word.
CTRL + DEL : deletes the line.
The following special keys are used to edit the
command line:
DEL : deletes the character at the current cursor
position. The cursor does not move.
BS : moves the cursor one character left and
deletes the character in that position.
TAB : moves the cursor one space to the right
and adds a space to a line.
: moves the cursor one character right.
: moves the cursor one character left.
: recalls a command which was already
executed by pressing the RETURN key in
reverse order. When the oldest command
is recalled, recalls again from the newest
command.
: recalls a command which was already
executed by pressing the RETURN key in
entered order. When the newest
command is recalled, recalls again from
the oldest command.

<Example>
While displaying the list in the Extension
Directory mode, pressing CTRL + C
terminates the display as follow:

DIC>LIST * / * / *

No. Ext name Dep

001 aaad Sales
002 aadd Sales
003 abdef Finance

Interrupting

Pressing CTRL + C

<Example>
DIC>APPEND 100/Whit /Sales

After pressing CTRL + A , enter “e”

results in

DIC > APPEND 100/White/Sales

13-A-4
4.00 Entering a Mode

To enter the desired mode, either press the The flow chart below shows how to enter each
appropriate function key, or enter the appropriate mode and ( ) in the chart shows the prompt
command and press the RETURN key at Local displayed in each mode.
Mode Main Menu screen.
Then the prompt associated with the entered
mode is displayed on the screen.

Local Mode Main Menu

Screen ($)

F1 or
Extension Directory mode
(DIC>)
D I C Return

F2 or
Speed Dial Dictionary mode
S Return (SPD>) See page ( )
P D

F3 or
Local Diagnosis mode
(DIG>) See page ( )
D I G Return

F4 or
Backup mode
B U P Return (BUP>)

F5 or
Displays HELP screen to enter
individual mode
H E L P Return

F8 or
Clears data stored in Extension
Directory, Speed Dial Dictionary
C L E A R Return
and BLF screen

13-A-5
B Extension Directory Mode

1.00 Summary
Extension Directory mode allows you to edit the extension directory for the Attendant
Console. It is possible to store, add, delete, and change extension names and
departments in this mode.
Pressing the F1 key or entering DIC (CR) command in the local mode main menu screen
introduces the function field below, which indicates a command entry needed.

DIC>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) END(CR)

To start editing, press the function key associated with the desired operation, or enter the
desired command directly at the full keyboard.

DIC>

F1 Lets you register the new

entries to the Extension
APPEND
Directory.

F2 Lets you deletes the entries

DELETE registered in the Extension
Directory. Use both main and sub
commands.
F3 Lets you display entries
LIST registered in the Extension
Directory.

F4 Lets you correct or change

SET the entries registered in the
Extension Directory.

F5 Lets you display the HELP

HELP screen.
Use the main commands
F6 Lets you initialize the only.
INIT Extension Directory.

F8 Lets you end the Extension

END
Directory mode.

13-B-1
2.00 APPEND Command

Description Used to register the new entries to Extension Directory.

Up to 500 entries can be registered.

Input Format There are three types of input formats in APPEND Command, as
follows:
Contents Format
1 Stores extension number, name, department. DIC>APPEND Number/Name/
Department
2 Stores extension number, name (without DIC>APPEND Number/Name/
designating department)
3 Stores extension number, department DIC>APPEND Number//Department
(without designating extension name)

Input Examples To store the extension number “1000,” name “Bob,” department “Sales,” enter:
DIC>APPEND 1000/Bob/Sales
To store the extension number “1001,” name “Steven,” no department, enter:
DIC>APPEND 1001/Steven/
To store the extension number “1002,” no name, department “Sales”; enter:
DIC>APPEND 1002//Sales

Display Example To store the extension number “1000,” name “White,” department “Sales”:

DIC> APPEND 1000/White/Sales

No. Ext name Dep

900 Bob Product

entry 1000 White Sales
1000 Whitnnie Sales

***** Append complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) END(CR)

Conditions An extension number consists of three or four digits.

An extension name consists of up to 16 characters including letters,

numbers and special characters (except ", *, /, ~), and the first digit
should be a letter.

A department name consists of up to eight characters including

letters, numbers and special characters (except ", *, /, ~), and the
first digit should be a letter.

13-B-2
 Each entry should always include the extension number.
For example, entering: DIC>APPEND /Jack/Sales displays an error
message.

Be sure not to leave a space within a sub command.

For example, entering: DIC>APPEND 1001/Jack Smith/Sales
displays an error message. Instead of a space, special characters
such as “-” can be used to separate words as “Jack-Smith.”

The same extension number can be registered in the multiple

number of entries if extension name and/or department name
are/is different.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error: Input data already exist Entered data has already been stored.
***** Append complete Storing is completed.
***** Error: Append deny (already 500 data 500 data entries have already been stored.
entry)

13-B-3
3.00 DELETE Command

Description Used to delete the entries registered in the Extension Directory.

Input Format There are 10 types of input formats, as follows:

Contents Format
1 Specifies extension number, name, department DIC> DELETE Number/Name/
Department
2 Specifies extension number, name (for a data DIC> DELETE Number/Name/
which has no department stored)
3 Specifies extension number, name (regardless DIC> DELETE Number/Name/*
of which department)
4 Specifies extension number, department (for DIC> DELETE Number//Department
which there is no name stored)
5 Specifies extension number, department DIC> DELETE Number/*/Department
(regardless of which extension name)
6 Specifies name, department (regardless of DIC> DELETE */Name/Department
extension number)
7 Specifies extension number only DIC> DELETE Number/*/*
8 Specifies extension name only DIC> DELETE */Name/*
9 Specifies department only DIC> DELETE */*/Department
10 Deletes all DIC> DELETE */*/*

Input Examples To delete the extension number “1000,” name “Jack,” department
“Project,” enter:
DIC > DELETE 1000/Jack/Project
To delete the extension number “1001,” name “Betty,” no department
stored, enter:
DIC > DELETE 1001/Betty/
To delete all entries which include the department “Project,” enter:
DIC > DELETE */*/Project

Display Example To delete the extension number “1000,” name “White,” department
“Sales”:

DIC> DELETE 1000/White/Sales

delete data

No. Ext name Dep

1000 White Sales

***** Total 1 entry

***** Delete OK ? (Y/N) => Y
***** Delete complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) APPEND END(CR)

When “Delete OK ? (Y/N)” appears on the screen, press “Y” key,

then the RETURN key to delete the displayed data.
Press “N” key, then the RETURN key, if you do not wish to delete the
data.
13-B-4
Conditions Usage of Wild Card Character
One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position.
<Example 1>
If the followings are registered:
No. Ext name Dep
100 Sales
100 Jack Sales

Entering: DIC/DELETE 100/*/Sales deletes both of the above entries.

<Example 2>
To delete any entry which includes the extension numbers from 1000
to 1999, enter:
DIC > DELETE 1*/*/*

If the extension number is three digits, enter “0” at the beginning of the
number.
<Example 3>
To delete any entry which includes the extension numbers from 310 to
319, enter:
DIC > DELETE 031*/*/*/

Take care not to delete the data that you do not intend to delete when
you use the wild card * for the input formats 3 and 5 through 10.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error: Input data do not exist. Entered data has not been stored.
***** Delete complete Deleting is completed.
***** Delete abort Deleting is not executed yet.
***** Delete OK? (Y/N) Confirmation message.
***** Total 3 entries There are three entries to be deleted.

13-B-5
4.00 LIST Command

Description Used to display all entries registered in the Extension Directory.

Input format There are 10 types of Input formats as follows:

Contents Format
1 Specifies extension number, name, department DIC > LIST Number/Name/
2 Specifies extension number, name (for an entry Department
which has no department stored) DIC > LIST Number/Name/
3 Specifies extension number, name (regardless DIC > LIST Number/Name/*
of department)
4 Specifies extension number, department (for DIC > LIST Number//Department
an entry which has no name stored)
5 Specifies extension number, department DIC > LIST Number/*/Department
(regardless of name)
6 Specifies name, department (regardless of DIC > LIST */Name/Department
extension number)
7 Specifies extension number only DIC > LIST Number/*/*
8 Specifies name only DIC > LIST */Name/*
9 Specifies department only DIC > LIST */*/Department
10 Lists all entries DIC > LIST */*/*

Input Examples To display the extension number “1000,” name “Jack,” department
“Project,” enter:
DIC > LIST 1000/Jack/Project
To display the extension number “1001,” name “Betty,” no
department stored, enter:
DIC > LIST 1001/Betty/
To display all the entries which include the extension number “1002,”
enter:
DIC > LIST 1002/*/*
To display all the entries which include the department “Project,”
enter:
DIC > LIST */*/Project

Display Example To display all the entries which include the extension number “1000”
and the extension name whose initial is “J”:

DIC> LIST 1000/J*/*

No. Ext name Dep

1000 James Sales

1000 Jennifer Product
1000 Joanna Product
1000 Jone Sales
***** Total 4 entries

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) APPEND END(CR)

13-B-6
Conditions Usage of Wild Card Character
One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position

If the following entries are stored:

<Example 1>
No. Ext name Dep
100 Sales
100 Jack Sales

Entering: DIC > LIST 100/*/Sales displays both the above entries.
<Example 2>
To list up 1000 through 1999, enter:
DIC > LIST 1*/*/*

If the extension number is three digits, “0” should be entered as the

leading digit.
<Example 3>
To list up extension numbers from 310 through 319, enter:
DIC > LIST 031*/*/*

Listing Order
LIST command is used to list all entries in alphabetical order of
extension names first, then alphabetical order of departments, and
then ascending order of extension numbers.
<Example 1>

DIC>LIST */*/*

No. Ext name Dep

1002 Betty Sales
1003 Jack Product
1001 Smith Account

Listing order may be altered depending on input format types. For

instance, the above list can be changed in ascending order of
extension numbers by entering: DIC > LIST 100*/*/*, as follows:
<Example 2>

DIC>LIST 100*/*/*

No. Ext name Dep

1001 Smith Account
1002 Betty Sales
1003 Jack Product

13-B-7
 That is, preferential order is determined by the sub parameters
which are not substituted by wild card character “*.”

Listing all entries

All stored entries may be listed by entering LIST command only.
Up to 14 entries can be displayed on the screen at a time.

For example, if 30 entries are stored, the first execution of LIST will
display the first 14 entries and the second execution of LIST will
display the second 14 entries and the third execution of LIST will
display the remaining two entries.

Entering: LIST */*/* lists all the stored entries.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error: Input data do not exist. Entered data has not been stored.
***** Total 3 entries There are three entries to be listed.
***** No data is entered. No data stored.

13-B-8
5.00 SET Command

Description Used to correct or change the entries registered in the Extension

Directory.

Input Format Basic format for SET command is to enter:

DIC>SET [original data] [new data].

There are 10 types of input formats for it as shown below.

The < > mark in the table indicates that the data in the < > may be
skipped.
The mark in the table indicates a space.
Contents Format
1 Specifies extension number, name, department DIC>SET Number /Name/
Department <Number>/<Name>/
<Department>
2 Specifies extension number, name (for data DIC>SET Number /Name/
which has no department stored) <Number>/<Name>/<Department>
3 Specifies extension number, name (regardless DIC>SET Number /Name/*
of department) <Number>/<Name>/<Department>
4 Specifies extension number, department (for DIC>SET Number //Department
data which has no name stored) <Number>/<Name>/<Department>
5 Specifies extension number, department DIC>SET Number /*/Department
(regardless of name) <Number>/<Name>/<Department>
6 Specifies name, department (regardless of DIC>SET */Name/Department
extension number) <Number>/<Name>/<Department>
7 Specifies extension number only DIC>SET Number /*/* <Number>/
<Name>/<Department>
8 Specifies name only DIC>SET */Name/* <Number>/
<Name>/<Department>
9 Specifies department only DIC>SET */*/Department
<Number>/<Name>/<Department>
10 Changes all entries DIC>SET */*/* <Number>/<Name>/
<Department>

Input Example To change the department from “Sales” to “Account” for the
extension number “1000,” name “Jack,” department “Sales,” enter :
DIC > SET 1000/Jack/Sales 1000/Jack/Account

To change the entry which has the extension number “1001,” name
“Betty,” no department to the extension number “2000,” name
“Smith,” department “Account,” enter :
DIC > SET 1001/Betty/ 2000/Smith/Account

13-B-9
Display Example To change the extension number “1000,” name “James,”
department “Sales” to “1000, White, Product” :

DIC > SET 1000/James/Sales 1000/White/Product

source data exchanged data

No. Ext name Dep No. Ext name Dep

1000 James Sales 1000 White Product

***** Total 1 entry

***** Set complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) END(CR)

Conditions An extension number can be three or four digits.

An extension name can be up to 16 characters including letters,

numbers and special characters (except ", *, /, ~), and the first digit
should be a letter.

A department can be up to eight characters including letters,

numbers and special characters (except ", *, /, ~), and the first digit
should be a letter.

Make sure not to leave a space within a sub command.

For example, if you enter: SET 1000/James/Sales 1001/James/
Div 4, an error message appears on the screen and you cannot
change the data.
In this case use special characters such as “-” to separate words as
“Div-4.”.

Usage of Wild Card Character

One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitute any character in that position.
The wild card character cannot be used for sub parameters of new
data.
<Example 1>
If the following entries are stored:

No. Ext name Dep

100 Betty Project
101 Jack Project

13-B-10
 To change the extension numbers of the entries which include
department “Project” to 200, enter :
DIC > SET */*/Project 200//

The specified entries will be changed as follows:

No. Ext name Dep
200 Betty Project
200 Jack Project

<Example 2>
To change all the extension numbers from 1000 through1999 to
1000, enter:
DIC > SET 1*/*/* 1000//

If the extension number is three digits, “0” must be entered as the

leading digit.
<Example 3>
To change all the extension numbers from 310 through 319 to 400,
enter :
DIC > SET 031*/*/* 400//

As shown in formats 3 and 5 through 10, the wild card character “*” is
used to change data without specifying sub parameters.

Insert one space between original data and new data.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error: Input data do not exist. Entered data has not been stored.
***** Set complete Changing the data is completed.
***** Total 3 entries There are three entries to be changed.

13-B-11
6.00 HELP Command

Description Used to display brief instructions and a list of command related to

the Extension Directory mode.

Input Format DIC>HELP

Display Example
DIC> HELP

******* Help for editing extension directory*****

append an entry =>APPEND number/name/dep

delete an entry =>DELETE number/name/dep
list an entry =>LIST number/name/dep
change an entry =>SET number/name/dep number/name/dep
initialize the directory =>INIT
return to the local menu =>END
help for using command =>HELP

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) APPEND END(CR)

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error : Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error : Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-B-12
7.00 INIT Command

Description Used to initialize the entries in the Extension Directory, and the
extension names and numbers assigned in the system
programming are copied to the Extension Directory screen at the
same time.

Input Format DIC> INIT

Display Example
DIC > INIT
***** Initialize OK ? (Y/N) => Y
***** Initialize complete
*****Total 3 entries

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

APPEND DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) INIT(CR) END(CR)

When “Initialize OK? (Y/N)” appears on the screen, press “Y” key
then the RETURN key to execute.
Not to execute, press “N” key, then the RETURN key.

Conditions Extension names to be copied can include letters, numbers and

special characters (except ", *, /, ~), and the first digit should be a
letter.
Both number and name of the extension will not be copied, if the
first digit of the extension name is a numeric character other than a
letter.

Displayed Message Meaning

Displayed Message
***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Initialize OK ? (Y/N) => Confirmation message.
***** Initialize complete Initialization is completed.
***** Initialize abort Did not initialize.
***** Total 3 entries There are three entries to be copied.

13-B-13
8.00 END Command

Description Used to conclude the Extension Directory mode.

Input Format DIC>END

Display Example
DIC> END

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC(Cr) SPD(Cr) DIG(Cr) BUP(Cr) HELP(Cr) APPEND APPEND CLEAR(Cr)

Conditions Entry of END command concludes Extension Directory mode, and

displays the prompt “$” which indicates that you can enter another
command.

Displayed Message
Displayed Message Meaning
*****Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
*****Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-B-14
C Speed Dial Dictionary Mode

1.00 Summary

This mode is used to edit the Speed Dial Dictionary for the Attendant Console.
It is used for storing, deleting and changing a speed dial name.

Pressing the F2 key “SPD (CR)” in the local mode main menu screen displays the function
field below. The “SPD> ” shows that you may enter further commands.

SPD>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) END(CR)

To start editing, press the function key associated with the desired operation, or enter the
desired command directly at the full keyboard.

SPD>

F1 Lets you delete the entries

registered in the Speed Dial
DELETE
Dictionary.

Lets you display all entries

F2
registered in the Speed Dial Use both main and sub
LIST Dictionary. commands.

Lets you register new entries

F3 or change the entries
SET registered in the Speed Dial
Dictionary.

F4 Lets you display the HELP

screen.
HELP Use the main command
Lets you end the Speed Dial only.
F8
Dictionary mode.
END

13-C-1
2.00 DELETE Command

Description Used to delete the entries registered in the Speed Dial Dictionary.

Input Format SPD > DELETE 001 to 200 (speed dial code)

Input Example To delete speed dial code 100, enter :

SPD > DELETE 100

Display Example When deleting speed dial code 100 :

SPD> DELETE 100

delete data

No. name

1000 White

***** Total1 entry

***** Delete OK ? (Y/N) => Y
***** Delete complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) HELP(CR) APPEND APPEND END(CR)

When the message “Delete OK? (Y/N) =>” appears, press “Y” then the
RETURN key to delete the data.
Not to delete the data, press “N” then the RETURN key.

Conditions Usage of Wild Card Character

One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position.
<Example>
To delete the speed dial code from 100 through 199, enter :
SPD > DELETE 1*

This function deletes the speed dial codes and the names from the
Speed Dial Dictionary screen, but does not affect the data in the
system programming.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command
***** Error: Illegal sub command
***** Delete OK ? (Y/N) =>
***** Delete complete
***** Error: Input data do not exist
***** Delete abort
***** Total 3 entries
There is an error in the main command.
There is an error in the sub command.
Confirmation message
Deleting is completed.
Entered data does not exist.
Did not delete the specified data.
There are three entries to be deleted.

13-C-2
3.00 LIST Command

Description Used to display all entries registered in the Speed Dial Dictionary.

Input Format There are four types of input formats as follows :

Contents Format
1 Specifies speed code and name SPD > LIST Number / Name
2 Specifies speed code (regardless of name) SPD > LIST Number/*
3 Specifies name (regardless of number) SPD > LIST */ Name
4 Lists all entries SPD > LIST */*

Input Example To list the speed dial code100 and name Jones, enter :
SPD > LIST 100 / Jones

Display Example To list speed dial name which starts with J :

SPD> LIST */J*

No. name

100 James
001 Jennifer
200 Joanna
150 Jone

***** Total 4 entries

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) HELP(CR) APPEND APPEND END(CR)

Conditions Usage of Wild Card Character

One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position..
<Example>
To list the speed dial code from 100 through 199, enter :
SPD > LIST 1*/*

13-C-3
 Listing Order
LIST command is used to list all entries in alphabetical order of the
extension names and in ascending order of the speed dial codes.
<Example>

SPD>LIST */*
No. name
102 Betty
103 Jack
101 Smith

The listing order can be altered by changing the input format.

For instance, in the example above, to list the entries in ascending
order of the speed dial codes, enter :
SPD>LIST 10*/*

The specified entries will be displayed as follow :

SPD>LIST 10*/*
No. name
101 Smith
102 Betty
103 Jack

That is, data is listed in the order of the code or the name which is
not specified by one wild card *.

Listing All Entries

All stored entries may be listed by entering LIST command only.
Up to 14 entries can be displayed on the screen at a time.

For instance, if 30 entries are stored, the first execution of LIST will
display the first 14 entries and the second execution of LIST will
display the second 14 entries and the third execution of LIST will
display the remaining two entries.

When you want to list all the stored entries, enter :

LIST */*

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error : Illegal main command
***** Error : Illegal sub command
***** Error : Input data do not exist
***** Error : No data is entered
***** Total 3 entries
There is an error in the main command.
There is an error in the sub command.
Entered data does not exist.
No data is stored.
Three entries are listed.

13-C-4
4.00 SET Command
Description Used to register or change the entries in the Speed Dial Dictionary.
If newly registered speed dial code has been already registered,
previous entry will be overwritten by the new one.
Up to 200 entries (001 to 200) can be registered.

Input Format SPD > SET speed dial code/name

Input Example To store the speed dial code “120” and the name “James,” enter :
SPD>SET 120/James
If the speed dial code 120 has already been stored, the preset
name is changed to James.

Display Example To store the speed dial code 100 and the name “Bob” (when the
speed dial code 100 has not been stored before) :

SPD> SET 100/Bob

set data

No. name

100 Bob

***** Total 1 entry

***** SET complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) HELP(CR) APPEND APPEND END(CR)

Conditions A speed dial code should be three digits (001 to 200).

A speed dial name consists of up to 20 characters including letters,
numbers and special characters (except ", *, /, ~).
The beginning of the name should be a letter.
Make sure not to insert a space into each sub command of speed
dial code and name.
For example entering : SET 100/ABC Food displays an error
message after pressing the RETURN key.
However, it is possible to use special characters such as “-” to
separate words as “ABC-Food.”

Only one speed dial name can be stored for one speed dial code.

Usage of Wild Card Character

One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position.

13-C-5
 <Example>
To change the name of speed code from 001 through 099 to Panasonic, enter :
SPD > SET 0*/Panasonic

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command
***** Error: Illegal sub command
***** Set complete
***** Error: Input data do not exist
***** Error: Set deny (speed dial
number=001-200)
***** Total 3 entries
There is an error in the main command.
There is an error in the sub command.
Data has been stored or changed.
Entered data does not exist.
Entered speed dial code is out of the range
of 001 to 200
There are three entries to be stored or
changed.

13-C-6
5.00 HELP Command

Description Used to display brief instructions and a list of command related to

the Speed Dial Dictionary mode.

Input Format SPD > HELP

Display Example
SPD> HELP

***** Help for editing speed dial dictionary *****

delete an entry => DELETE number

list an entry => LIST number/name
append/change an entry => SET number/name
return to the local menu => END
help for using command => HELP

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) END(CR)

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-C-7
6.00 END Command

Description Used to conclude the Speed Dial Dictionary mode.

Input Format SPD > END

Display Example
SPD> END

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC(CR) SPD(CR) DIG(CR) BUP(CR) HELP(CR) APPEND APPEND CLEAR(CR)

Conditions Entering END command concludes Speed Dial Dictionary mode

and displays the prompt “$” which indicates that you can enter
another command.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-C-8
D. Local Diagnosis Mode

1.00 Summary

Local Diagnosis mode is used to diagnose the CRT, LEDs on the operation keyboard, the
operation keyboard and the full keyboard of the Attendant Console.
Pressing the F3 key “DIG (CR)” introduces the following function field, and waits for
command entry.

DIG>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) REP(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) END(CR)

Press the function key for the desired command or directly enter the command from the
full keyboard.

DIG>

F1 Lets you diagnose the CRT display.

CRT

F2 Lets you diagnose LEDs on the operation

LED keyboard.

F3 Lets you diagnose the operation keyboard.

OPR

F4 Lets you diagnose the full keyboard.

KEY

F5 Lets you display the IC diagnosis report.

REP

F6 Lets you diagnose all the items above

ALL
sequentially

F7 Lets you display the HELP screen.

HELP

F8 Lets you conclude the Local Diagnosis mode.

END
The diagnoses above are executed by the main
commands only.

13-D-1
2.00 Diagnosis of CRT

Description Used to diagnose the CRT display.

Input Format DIG>CRT

Diagnostic Method Follow the subsequent procedures for diagnosis of CRT.

1) When the following outer frame appears, confirm the distortion

of vertical and horizontal lines.

after two seconds

2) The outer frame disappears and nothing appears for

approximately two seconds.

after two seconds

3) The outer frame appears in reverse video.

after two seconds

(Continued)

13-D-2
 (Continued)
4) The letters “H”s appear.

HH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -H
HH

25 lines

HH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -H

80 characters
after two seconds

5) Letters and numbers appear.

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB • • •
ABCD • • •
ABCD • • •
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzabc • • •
abcd • • •
abcd • • •
01234567890123456789012345 • • •
01234 • • •
01234 • • •

80 characters
after two seconds

6) The character generator codes and the attributes appear.

Low Low
0123 - - - - - - F 0123 - - - - - - F
0 - -- - - - - - - -
H 0 NU - - - - - - - - H 1 -----------
I 1 ----------- I 2 -----------
G 2 ----------- G 3 -----------
H 3 ----------- H 4 -----------
4 -----------
5 ----------- 5 -----------
6 ----------- 6 -----------
7 p --------- 7 -----------
NORMAL BLINK REVERSE UNDERLINE

13-D-3
 7) After the diagnosis of the CRT display ends, the following
display appears and waits for command entry.

DIG> CRT
***** CRT Test start

***** Complete

DIG>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) REP(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) END(CR)

Note : Pressing the F8 key or CRTL + C key during the diagnosis stops
the diagnosis and displays “Abort.”

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-4
3.00 Diagnosis of LEDs

Description Used to diagnose the LEDs on the operation keyboard.

Input Format DIG>LED

Diagnosis Method 1) ALL LEDs on the operation keyboard light in the following order:
SRC-LOOP 1, LOOP 2, LOOP 3, LOOP 4, LOOP 5, LOOP 6,
NIGHT, ALARM, DES-LOOP 1, LOOP 2, LOOP 3, LOOP 4,
LOOP 5, LOOP 6
Confirm LEDs corresponding to the display on the screen.

DIG>LED
***** LED Test start

LOOP1 SRC LED is lighting Displays the LED which is lit.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DELETE LIST SET HELP(CR) CTRL-C

Note : Pressing the F8 key or CTRL + C key during the diagnosis stops
the diagnosis and displays “ABORT.”

2) After the diagnosis of LED ends, “Complete” appears and waits

for command entry.

DIG>LED
***** LED Test start

LOOP6 DES LED is lighting Displays the LED which is lit.

***** Complete

DIG>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) REP(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) END(CR)

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-5
4.00 Diagnosis of Operation Keyboard

Description Used to diagnose the operation keyboard.

Input Format DIG>OPR

Diagnosis Method 1) When the arrangement of the operation keyboard appears on

the CRT screen, confirm that the key pressed on the operation
keyboard is displayed in reverse video on the CRT screen.

***** OPR. TEST START *****

ATT-FWD PROGRAM
OFF ON OFF ON
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
01 02 03 1 2 3 ALM NIG

04 05 06 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 4 5 6
CANCEL
07 08 09 7 8 9
HLD MSG SPL PAG ANSWER RELEASE
10 11 12 * 0 #

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) END(CR)

Note : Pressing the F8 key or the CTRL + C key during the diagnosis
stops diagnosis, and displays “ABORT.”

Displaying all keys in reverse video means the conclusion of

diagnosis of operation keyboard.

13-D-6
 2) After the diagnosis ends, “Complete” appears and waits for the
entry of the next command.

***** OPR. Test start *****

ATT-FWD PROGRAM
OFF ON OFF ON
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
01 02 03 1 2 3 ALM NIG

04 05 06 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 4 5 6
CANCEL
07 08 09 7 8 9
HLD MSG SPL PAG ANSWER RELEASE
10 11 12 * 0 #

******* Complete *******

DIG >

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) REP(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) END(CR)

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-7
5.00 Diagnosis of Full Keyboard

Description Used to diagnose the full keyboard.

Input Format DIG>KEY

Diagnosis Method 1) When the arrangement of the full keyboard appears on the CRT
screen, confirm that the key pressed on the full keyboard is
displayed in reverse video on the CRT screen.

***** KEY TEST START

EC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = ` BS BR

TAB Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ] \ LF

A S D F G H J K L ; , RET

SHIFT Z X C V B N M , . / SHIFT DL

CT SPACE FN EM

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) CTRL-C

Note : Pressing the F8 key or CTRL + C key during the diagnosis, stops
the diagnosis, and displays “ABORT.”

Displaying all keys in reverse video means the conclusion of

diagnosis of full keyboard.

13-D-8
 2) After the diagnosis ends, “COMPLETE” appears and waits for
the entry of the next command.

***** KEY test start

EC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = ` BS BR

TAB Q W E R T Y U I O P [ ] \ LF

A S D F G H J K L ; , RET

SHIFT Z X C V B N M , . / SHIFT DL

CT SPACE FN EM

***** Complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT(CR) LED(CR) OPR(CR) KEY(CR) REP(CR) ALL(CR) HELP(CR) END(CR)

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-9
6.00 REP Command
Description Displays IC diagnosis report performed when the Attendant
Console is switched on.

Input Format DIG > REP

Display Example
DIG> REP

***** Report the result of IC diagnostic *****

1. ROM (IC- 3) --------------- OK

2. RAM RAM #1(IC- 4) --------------- OK
RAM #2(IC- 5) --------------- OK
VRAM (IC-56) -------------- OK
3. I/O 8259A (IC-9) ---------------- OK
8253A (IC-9) ---------------- OK
8255A (IC-9) ---------------- OK
89322 (IC-10) -------------- OK
8255 (IC-43) -------------- OK
8952 (IC-11) -------------- NG

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-10
7.00 All Diagnosis

Description Used to diagnose CRT, LED, OPR, KEY and REP sequentially.

Input Format DIG>ALL

Diagnosis Performs diagnosis in order from CRT, LED, OPR, KEY and REP.
After conclusion of all diagnosis, “Complete” appears and waits for the entry of the
next command.

Note : Pressing the F8 key or the CTRL + C key stops the current diagnosis with
displaying “Abort” and advances to the next diagnosis.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-11
8.00 HELP Command

Description Used to display the brief instructions and a list of command related
to the Local Diagnosis Mode.
After displaying the HELP screen, prompt “DIG>” is displayed on
the screen, and you can perform desired diagnosis by entering the
command associated with it.

Input Format DIG>HELP

Display Example
DIG>HELP

* * * * * Help for Diagnostic mode command * * * * *

CRT(CR) : To diagnose CRT.

LED(CR) : To diagnose LED.
OPR(CR) : To diagnose operation keyboard.
KEY(CR) : To diagnose full keyboard.
REP(CR) : To diagnose the diagnostic result of memory and I/O.
ALL(CR) : To diagnose all items.
HELP(CR) : To diagnose the command information.
END(CR) : To quite the diagnostic mode.

DIG>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

CRT (CR) LED (CR) OPR (CR) KEY (CR) REP (CR) ALL (CR) HELP (CR) END (CR)

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

* * * * * Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
* * * * * Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-12
9.00 END Command

Description Used to conclude the Local Diagnosis mode.

Input Format DIG>END

Display Example
DIG> END

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC(CR) SPD(CR) DIG(CR) BUP(CR) HELP(CR) APPEND APPEND CLEAR(CR)

Condition Entering END command concludes Local Diagnosis mode and

displays the prompt “$” which indicates that you can enter another
command.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-D-13
E. Backup Mode

1.00 Summary
(Saving Procedure)
Backup mode is used to make a backup copy of the user-programmable attendant
console database on a memory location of the PBX for security reason.
The SAVE command is used to initiate the saving procedure.

(Loading Procedure)
If it becomes necessary to re-program the attendant console database, it will be faster to
load the saved data form the system memory than manual re-input.
The LOAD command is used to initiate the loading procedure.

Attendant console database consists of Extension Directory data and Speed Dial
Dictionary data programmed in the attendant console local mode.

A backup copy of the attendant console database in the system memory location can be
saved on an external device, and loaded in to system memory when required.
Refer to Section 16 “Backup Utility-On-site” and Section 17 “Backup Utility-Remote
Location” for further information.

Pressing the F4 key “BUP(CR)” in the local mode main menu screen displays the function
field below, that shows you four commands available in Backup mode. The “BUP> ”
indicates that you may enter any one of those commands.Press the function key for the
desired command, or directly enter the command from the full keyboard.

BUP>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

SAVE (CR) LOAD (CR) HELP (CR) END (CR)

Press the function key for the desired command, or directly enter the command from the
full keyboard.

BUP>

F1 Lets you save the attendant console database from attendant

console to a memory location of the system main unit.
SAVE

F2 Lets you load the attendant console database from a memory

location of the system main unit to attendant console.
LOAD

F3 Lets you display the HELP screen.

HELP

F8 Lets you end the Backup mode.

END

13-E-1
2.00 SAVE Command

Description The SAVE command is used to make a backup copy of the

attendant console database on the memory location of the system
main unit.

Input Format BUP>SAVE

Display Example
BUP>SAVE

* * * * * Save OK? (Y/N) => Y

* * * * * Complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

SAVE (CR) LOAD (CR) HELP (CR) END (CR)

When “SAVE OK? (Y/N)” is displayed on the screen, press “Y” key
to put the data into storage on PBX.

Not to save, press “N” key and then the RETURN key.

Conditions A backup copy of the attendant console database can be saved on

an external device for further security.
Refer to Section 16 “Backup Utility-On-Site” and Section 17
“Backup Utility-Remote Location” for further information.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Save OK? (Y/N) => Confirmation Message.
***** Complete Saving is executed successfully.
***** Save abort Saving is interrupted.
***** Error :Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error :Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error :Can't save Saving is executed unsuccessfully.

13-E-2
3.00 LOAD Command

Description The LOAD command is used to load a backup copy of the

attendant console database that has been stored in the system
memory location to the memory location of the attendant console.

Input Format BUP>LOAD

Display Example BUP>LOAD

* * * * * Load OK? (Y/N) => Y

* * * * * Complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

SAVE (CR) LOAD (CR) HELP (CR) END (CR)

When “LOAD OK? (Y/N)” is displayed on the screen, press “Y” key
to read the data from the main unit to Attendant Console.

Not to read, press “N” key and then RETURN key.

Conditions If the loading operation is performed successfully, a copy of the

entire attendant console database is made in attendant console,
erasing whatever was previously in it.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Load OK? (Y/N) => Confirmation Message.
***** Complete Loading is executed successfully.
***** Load abort Loading is interrupted.
***** Error :Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error :Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error :Can't Load Loading is executed unsuccessfully.

13-E-3
4.00 HELP Command

Description Used to display brief instructions and a list of command related to

the Backup Mode.

Input Format BUP>HELP

Display Example BUP>HELP

* * * * * Help for local data backup mode command * * * * *

SAVE(CR) : To save local data to PBX.

LOAD(CR) : To load local data from PBX.
HELP(CR) : To display the command information.
END(CR) : To quit backup mode.

BUP>

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

SAVE (CR) LOAD (CR) HELP (CR) END (CR)

13-E-4
5.00 END Command

Description Used to conclude the Backup mode.

Input Format BUP>END

Display Example BUP>END

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC (CR) SPD (CR) DIG (CR) BUP (CR) HELP (CR) CLEAR (CR)

Conditions Entry of END command concludes Backup mode, and display the
prompt “$” which indicates that you can enter another command.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

* * * * * Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
* * * * * Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-E-5
F. HELP Mode
Description Used to display brief instructions and a list of command related to
the entry of various modes.

Input Format $ HELP

Display Example $ HELP

* * * * * Help for entering each mode * * * * *

enter the EXT directory => DIC
enter the SPD dictionary => SPD
enter the diagnostic mode => DIG
enter the backup mode => BUP
help for using command=> HELP
clear the ATT local data=> CLEAR

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC (CR) SPD (CR) DIG (CR) BUP (CR) CLEAR (CR)

Conditions After displaying the HELP screen, prompt “$” is displayed on the
screen and you can enter the desired mode by entering the
command associated with it.

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

* * * * * Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
* * * * * Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.

13-F-1
G. Clear Mode
Description Used to clear the entire database programmed in the attendant
console local mode.

Input Format $ CLEAR

Display Example
$ CLEAR

* * * * * Data Clear OK ? (Y/N) => Y

* * * * * Data Clear complete

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

DIC (CR) SPD (CR) DIG (CR) BUP (CR) HELP (CR) CLEAR (CR)

When “Data Clear OK ? (Y/N)” appears, press “Y” then the

RETURN key to clear the data.
If you do not clear, press “N” then the RETURN key.

After the above operation, prompt “$” is displayed on the screen

and you can enter the desired mode by entering the appropriate
command.

Conditions The followings are cleared by executing this command:

• All entries in the Extension Directory

(same as if DIC > DELETE * /* /* )
• All entries in the Speed Dial Dictionary
(same as if SPD > DELETE * /* )
• All extension numbers in the BLF screen

Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Data Clear OK ? (Y?N) => Confirmation message.
***** Data Clear complete Clear is completed.
***** Data Clear abort Data is not cleared.

13-G-1
 Section 14

Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

 (Section 14)

Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles

Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 14-A-1

B System Administration..................................................................................... 14-B-1

1.00 On-Site Administration........................................................................... 14-B-1
1.01 Logging in to the System............................................................. 14-B-1
1.02 Administration Main Menu screen............................................... 14-B-2
2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location.................................... 14-B-3

C Device Status................................................................................................... 14-C-1

1.00 Service Commands and Their Functions............................................... 14-C-1
1.01 INS (In Service) Command.......................................................... 14-C-2
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) Command................................................. 14-C-3
2.00 Definition of Operating Status ............................................................... 14-C-4
2.01 Shelf, Slot, Resource................................................................... 14-C-4
2.02 Port.............................................................................................. 14-C-4
2.03 Interactions among Devices........................................................ 14-C-4
2.04 Changes of the Shelf Status........................................................ 14-C-5
2.05 Changes of the Slot Status.......................................................... 14-C-6

D Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)............................................................. 14-D-1

1.00 Error Record Display ............................................................................. 14-D-1
1.01 Start Time of Self-Test................................................................. 14-D-1
1.02 Error Log...................................................................................... 14-D-1
1.03 Printing Out the Automatic Failure Reporting.............................. 14-D-1
1.04 Local Alarm.................................................................................. 14-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm.............................................................................. 14-D-3
2.00 Clearing System-Detected Troubles...................................................... 14-D-4
2.01 Introduction.................................................................................. 14-D-4
2.02 Consulting the Error Log.............................................................. 14-D-4
2.03 Background Diagnostic Error List................................................ 14-D-5

E Troubleshooting Guide..................................................................................... 14-E-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 14-E-1
2.00 Troubleshooting via the LED Indicators................................................. 14-E-2
3.00 Troubleshooting via Error Log Records................................................. 14-E-4
3.01 Error Log Record List .................................................................. 14-E-4
3.02 System Reset caused by CPU Runaway (Restart Procedure).... 14-E-5
3.03 TSW clock down (Internal/External)............................................ 14-E-6
3.04 Basic shelf power down (DC)...................................................... 14-E-7
3.05 Basic shelf power down (AC) ...................................................... 14-E-8

14-1
(70695)
 Page
3.06
Expansion shelf power down (DC).............................................. 14-E-9
3.07
Expansion shelf power down (AC) .............................................. 14-E-10
3.08
Progress tone failure (TSW card)................................................ 14-E-11
3.09
Check date/time (Real Time Clock IC) ........................................ 14-E-12
3.10
Conference trunk failure (Basic).................................................. 14-E-13
3.11
Conference trunk failure (Option)................................................ 14-E-14
3.12
System memory error (Major)...................................................... 14-E-15
3.13
System memory error (Minor)...................................................... 14-E-16
3.14
Device not connect for SMDR..................................................... 14-E-17
3.15
CPU RAM backup battery down.................................................. 14-E-18
3.16
Card link failure (LPR)................................................................. 14-E-19
3.17
LPR ROM checksum error .......................................................... 14-E-20
3.18
LPR RAM failure.......................................................................... 14-E-21
3.19
Card disconnect........................................................................... 14-E-22
3.20
Modem failure (RMT card)........................................................... 14-E-23
3.21
LPR memory checksum error...................................................... 14-E-24
3.22
Card type error (LPR).................................................................. 14-E-25
3.23
LPR runaway............................................................................... 14-E-26
3.24
OGM CPU runaway (DISA)......................................................... 14-E-27
3.25
OGM lost (DISA).......................................................................... 14-E-28
3.26
OPX power down......................................................................... 14-E-29
3.27
DTMF generator failure (COT card)............................................ 14-E-30
3.28
DTMF receiver failure (SLC/HLC/OPX card)............................... 14-E-31
3.29
Tone detector failure (DISA/AGC card) ....................................... 14-E-32
3.30
HDLC failure (ATLC card)............................................................ 14-E-33
3.31
Port link failure (ATT/DPH).......................................................... 14-E-34
3.32
OHCA SW failure(TSW card)...................................................... 14-E-35
3.33
OHCA not installed (PLC/HLC) ................................................... 14-E-36
3.34
TSW DTMF G./R. failure............................................................. 14-E-37
3.35
Digital trunk failure (out of synchronization)................................. 14-E-37-1
3.36
Digital trunk failure (RAI signal reception) ................................... 14-E-37-2
3.37
Digital trunk failure (AIS signal reception).................................... 14-E-37-3
3.38
Digital trunk failure (frame trouble) .............................................. 14-E-37-4
3.39
DSP Failure/DSP Link Failure ..................................................... 14-E-37-5
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
4.00 Troubleshooting via User-Reported Troubles........................................ 14-E-38

F Functional Test by Entering Commands.......................................................... 14-F-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 14-F-1
2.00 Test Main Menu ..................................................................................... 14-F-2
3.00 Testing the Cards................................................................................... 14-F-3

14-2
(70695)
 Page
3.01 Functions to be Verified............................................................... 14-F-3
3.02 Card Test Initial screen................................................................ 14-F-4
3.03 Card Test procedure.................................................................... 14-F-5
3.04 Card Test Results screen ............................................................ 14-F-6
4.00 Testing the Ports................................................................................... 14-F-7
4.01 Functions to be Verified............................................................... 14-F-7
4.02 Port Test Initial screen................................................................. 14-F-8
4.03 Port Test procedure..................................................................... 14-F-9
4.04 Port Test Results screen.............................................................. 14-F-10
5.00 Testing PITS and ATT............................................................................ 14-F-11
5.01 Functions to be Verified............................................................... 14-F-11
5.02 PITS and ATT Test Initial screen................................................. 14-F-12
5.03 PITS and ATT Test procedure..................................................... 14-F-13
5.04 PITS and ATT Test Results screen.............................................. 14-F-14
6.00 Return Messages................................................................................... 14-F-15

G Monitor............................................................................................................. 14-G-1
1.00 Monitor Main Menu screen.................................................................... 14-G-1
2.00 Error Log screen ................................................................................... 14-G-2
3.00 Device Status screen............................................................................. 14-G-3
3.01 System Status Initial screen........................................................ 14-G-3
3.02 Card Status screen...................................................................... 14-G-4
3.03 Port Status screen....................................................................... 14-G-5
3.04 Conference Trunk Status screen................................................. 14-G-6
4.00 Traffic Submenu screen......................................................................... 14-G-7
4.01 Station Initial screen.................................................................... 14-G-8
4.02 Trunk Group Initial screen........................................................... 14-G-9
4.03 Attendant Console Initial screen.................................................. 14-G-10
4.04 DISA screen................................................................................ 14-G-11
4.05 OGM 1 screen............................................................................. 14-G-12
4.06 OGM 2 screen............................................................................. 14-G-13
4.07 AGC screen................................................................................. 14-G-14

H Other Features................................................................................................. 14-H-1

1.00 Power Failure Transfer Assignment ...................................................... 14-H-1

14-3
(70695)
A. Introduction
This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the
system using VT220 (VT100) or Compatibles in
interactive format.
The modular self-testing capabilities of the
system allow most maintenance to be reduced to
simple procedures.
You can administer the system programming and
maintenance of the system using a VT220
(VT100), Compatibles, Dumb terminals or an
Attendant Console.
Only one terminal can be performing system
administration at any one time.
Changing the System Administration Device is
done by programming.
To execute the change, you must exit system
administration mode and then reenter system
administration mode.

14-A-1
B. System Administration

1.00 On-Site Administration

1.01 Logging in to the System

Description Successful Login

You can administer the system programming and When you enter the correct password, the
maintenance of the system using a VT220 (100), terminal displays the Main Menu screen from
Compatibles. For details about communication which you can select administration functions.
parameters, refer to Section 9-D-7.00 By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
“Communication Interface.” enter a system programming area and can
access specific system parameters and features.
System Security
For security reasons, access to the administration
capabilities of the system is controlled by a
password. To prevent an unauthorized person
from learning the password, the password
characters are not displayed when they are
entered.

Password
To gain access to the system administration
feature, a valid password (four-digit, alphanumeric
characters*) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, the password
must be entered exactly as stored in memory.
You must assign eight passwords from the first to
fourth levels for on-site operation and the first to
fourth levels for operation from a remote location.
The followings are the functions available to each
password level.
The 1st Level : To access to all levels
The 2nd Level : To set system level parameters.
The 3rd Level : To set Port level parameters.
The 4th Level : To read parameters only.
When you log in to the system using the first level
password, you can execute all functions, but are
increasingly restricted when entering levels 2, 3
and 4.
Those passwords are originally factory
programmed, but may be changed when logging
in to the system by entering the first level
password.
(Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.”)
* Alphanumeric characters
ASCII codes except special codes (DEL, ESC
etc.). However, entering “/”, “~” are not
available, because these characters cannot be
displayed on the display of PITS.
Both uppercase and lowercase characters can
be recognized by the system.

14-B-1
1.02 Administration Main Menu screen
Main Menu Screen

Main Menu OFL LIN DIR

1. Programming
2. Test
3. Monitor
4. Print Out
5. Change Password
6. Change Date & Time
7. Backup Utility
8. Restart
9. Exit

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Main Menu Items

The following list describes the features you can
administer through each of the Main Menu Items:
To select an item from the Main Menu, just type
the number of the item you want followed by the
return key.

1. Programming 6. Change Date & Time

Allows you to administer system-wide Allows you to change the date and time.
programming parameters.
7. Backup Utility
2. Test Allows you to save and load the system
Allows you to test the status of cards, ports, programming data and the Attendant Console
resources and so on. database.

3. Monitor 8. Restart
Allows you to display the error log, Allows you to reset the system.
card/port/resource status and traffic
measurements. 9. Exit
Allows you to exit the administration mode.
4. Print Out
Allows you to print out the system
programming parameters and traffic
information.

5. Change Password
Allows you to change the current password.

14-B-2
2.00 System Administration from
a Remote Location
Description
From a remote location, you can execute system
programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements
using a VT220 (100), Compatibles or Dumb
terminals.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface.”
Conditions
• RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
system and register the telephone number of
modem in the System-Operation “Remote
Directory Number” (FDN: 3-4 digits) for
accessing the remote administration feature.
For assignment of Remote Directory Number,
refer to Section 9-D-1.02 “Operation (2/3).”
• For remote access, a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
• Factory programmed 4 types of password from
1st to 4th level for remote operation are
provided. Passwords are originally factory
programmed, but may be changed at any time.
(Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.”)
• You can execute remote system administration
during on-line communication mode only. But
when you load the system programming data
from a remote location, the system shifts to off-
line communication mode automatically.
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure”
for details.
• Starting up system administration from a remote
location can be done only in Dumb mode, so to
enter VT mode, press CTR key + V key
simultaneously at the dumb mode initial screen.
14-B-3
Operation
Starting up system administration from a remote
location can be done in the following ways:
• Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
For further information about “Remote Directory
Number,” refer to Section 9-D-1.02 “Operation
(2/3).” And for further information about DISA
feature, refer to Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct
Inward System Access (DISA).”
• Program DID feature so that the incoming
telephone number is converted to the “Remote
Directory Number.”
For further information about DID feature, refer
to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing
(DID).”
• Assign that a call from a remote-location can
access the Remote Administration feature
automatically using DIL (1:1) feature.
For further information about DIL (1:1) feature,
refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In Line (DIL).”
• Remote access with assistance of the operator
The call from a remote location can be made
on any trunk into the system, and be answered
by the operator.
The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
Directory Number of the system dialed is
received. The operator transfers the call after
receiving the modem answer tone. The caller
at a remote location will then hear the modem
answer tone and can proceed with sign-on.
For further information, refer to Section 4-F-
1.05 “Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote.”
When the system administrator at a remote
location accesses the system remote
administration feature, the following message
appears on the display of operator's telephone if
display is provided.
1234:RMT Access
After you log in to the system from a remote
location, you can operate the system in the same
way as if you were on-site.
Only one system administration terminal can
access the system at a time.
C. Device Status

1.00 Service Commands and

Their Functions
COMMON AUTOCNF
Displays the command function mode. Lets you assign the telephone type to the system.

SHOW LV Refer to Section 7-J “Execution of Function

Modes” for details about command functions.
Lets you display the current password level.

CHG LV
Lets you change the password level.

INS
Changes the status of the target shelf, card, or
station to “In Service.”

OUS
Changes the status of the target shelf, card, or
station to “Out of Service.”

REMOVE
Removes the programmed parameters of target
device (when removing a device).

EXIT
Exits the general command mode and displays
the current command function screen.

INDEX
Lets you enter a specific programming screen.

COPY
Lets you copy programming parameters.

READ
Lets you read parameters from any programming
screen.

HRD CPY
Lets you print out the displayed programming
parameters.

14-C-1
1.01 INS (In Service) Command

Description
Changes the status of the target device (shelf, Refer to Section 14-F “Functional Test by
card, port, station etc.) to “In Service” in on-line Entering Commands” for details about test
communication mode. command.

Conditions When you change the status of an upper device,

the status of lower devices changes as follows.
The status of the specified devices (shelf, card,
port, station) should be “OUS” or “FAULT.”
Upper device OUS INS
When you change the status of a lower device
Lower device OUS INS
(port, station) to “INS,” the upper device (shelf,
Fault Fault
card) should be changed to “INS” status
beforehand.
Upper device Fault INS
If you try to change the lower device (port,
Lower device Fault INS
station) status to “INS” while upper device (shelf,
OUS OUS
card) is in “OUS” status, the error message
Normal operation
“Invalid Status” appears on the screen.
The following message appears on the screen.
Operation ***** OK
Press the function key INS. Operation failed
An error message appears on the screen in the
following cases.
CMD> In Service No. = xxxxxx
• Parameter error
1 2 3 • Not installed
• Status error
• INS failure (Diagnostic error)
Enter the number of the desired device.
For input values, see below:

Device Input Value

Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number)

Card 101 to 315 (physical number)

Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number)

Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number;

three or four digits) or Physical
number: four digits

ATT A1 or A2 or
Physical number: four digits

DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: 1 or 2)

CNF CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08,

yy: 01 to 64)

14-C-2
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) Command

Description Operation
Changes the status of the target device (shelf, Press the function key OUS.
card, station etc.) to “Out of Service” in on-line
communication mode.
CMD>Out of Service No. = xxxx
Conditions
1 2 3
The status of target devices (shelf, card, port,
station) should be “INS.” Enter the number of the desired device. Four
input values, see below:
If the system administration terminal is an
Attendant Console (ATT), do not change the Device Input Value
status of the following devices from “INS” to
“OUS.” Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number)

Card 101 to 315 (physical number)

• Shelf in which ATLC card is installed
• ATLC card Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number)
• Attendant console assigned as the System
Administration Terminal Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number;
three or four digits) or Physical
During a remote operation, do not change the number: four digits
status of the following devices from “INS” to
ATT A1 or A2 or
“OUS.”
Physical number: four digits
• Shelf in which RMT card is installed DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: 1 or 2)
• RMT card (Modem)
CNF CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08,
yy: 01 to 64)

Refer to Section 14-F “Functional Test by

Entering Commands” for details about the test
command.

When you change the status of an upper device

(shelf, card), the status of lower devices (port,
station) changes as follows.
Upper device INS OUS
Lower device INS OUS
Fault Fault
Normal operation
The following message appears on the screen.
***** OK
Operation failed
An error message appears on the screen in the
following cases.
• Parameter error
• Not installed
• Status error

14-C-3
2.00 Definition of Operating
Status
2.01 Shelf, Slot, Resource 2.03 Interactions among Devices

Not-Installed: Interactions among Shelf, Slot, Port and

Resource are as follows.
Programming data for the target device are not
entered at all. In other words, even if the device
Shelf>Slot>Port, or Shelf>Slot>Resource
is physically installed in the system, no
(See the illustration below)
programming has been performed.

Out of Service (OUS):

Shelf
Programming data for the target device is
entered, but the target device is not assigned to Slot
the system.
Port Resource
In Service (INS):
The target device is operating normally.

Fault (FLT): * The resource is a lower device of a slot. There

The device is defective (hardware). are no interactions between resources and
In this case the LED indicator on the card is lit. ports.

(Example)
2.02 Port
PB receiver on the SLC (Single Line Telephone
Circuit) card.
Not-Installed:
The slot (upper device of port) is not
programmed even though the card may be
physically installed.

Pre-Installed
Programming data for the slot (upper device of
port) is entered, but programming data for the
port is not entered.

Out of Service (OUS):

Programming data for the target device is
entered, but the target device is not assigned to
the system.

In Service (INS):
The target device is operating normally.

Fault (FLT):
Defective device (hardware).

14-C-4
2.04 Changes of the Shelf Status

Removing the Expansion Shelf 4. Automatic recovery (Fault INS)

When attempting to remove the expansion shelf,
the status of devices (slot, port, resource) in the Device in “Fault” status becomes in good
target shelf should be changed to “Not-installed” status without any special care.
beforehand.
When you change the status of target shelf, the Expansion Shelf Fault INS
status of devices in the shelf changes as follows. Slot Fault INS
Port Fault INS
1. INS OUS Resource Fault INS

Expansion Shelf INS OUS No changes in other status.

Slot INS OUS
Port INS OUS In case of “2. OUS INS” and “3. INS
Resource INS OUS Fault”, don't care about “Fault” status of lower
device.
No changes in other status
(Note)
2. OUS INS Up to two optional Expansion Selves (1 and 2)
can be connected to the system for enlargement
Expansion Shelf OUS INS of system's ability.
Slot OUS INS
Fault (defective
device)
Port OUS INS
Fault (defective
device)
Resource OUS INS
Fault (defective
device)

No changes in other status

3. INS Fault

Expansion Shelf INS Fault

Slot INS Fault
Port INS Fault
Resource INS Fault

No changes in other status.

14-C-5
2.05 Changes of the Slot Status

Canceling the Slot Assignment 3. INS Fault

Before canceling the slot assignment, the status
of ports or resources assigned to the target slot Slot INS Fault
should be changed to “Not-installed” or “Pre- Port INS Fault
installed” beforehand. Resource INS Fault

Slot Assignment No changes in other status.

The status of ports and resources installed in the FIFO communication is terminated.
target slot.
4. Fault INS
HLC Pre-installed
PLC Pre-installed Slot Fault INS
SLC Pre-installed Port Fault INS
LCOT Pre-installed Resource Fault INS
GCOT Pre-installed
DID Pre-installed No changes in other status.
ATLC Pre-installed
OPX Pre-installed FIFO communication begins.
DPH Pre-installed
DISA OUS In case of “3. INS Fault,” “4. Fault INS”
AGC OUS the “OUS” status of lower devices doesn’t
RMT OUS change.
Resource (DTMF receiver) OUS

When you change the status of target slot, the

status of devices (port, resource) in the slot
changes as follows.

1. INS OUS

Slot INS OUS

Port INS OUS
Resource INS OUS

No changes in other status.

FIFO communication is terminated.

2. OUS INS

Slot OUS INS

Port OUS INS
Fault (defective device)
Resource OUS INS
Fault (defective device)

No changes in other status.

14-C-6
D. Self-Test (System-
Detected Troubles)
1.00 Error Record Display
1.01 Start Time of Self-Test 1.03 Printing Out the Automatic
Failure Reporting
Built-in diagnostic self-test program monitors the
troubles generated by hardware or software. The error log records can be printed out.
To perform the self-test, assign the desired start First connect the printer to the SIO #2 port on the
time of self-test in “System-Operation” Start Time basic shelf using RS-232C cable, then set
of Test. “System-operation” SMDR-Error Log to “Yes” by
Be careful not to access the system during this the system programming.
test. Refer to Section 9-D-1.02 “Operation (2/3)” for
Refer to Section 9-D-1.02 “Operation (2/3)” for programming.
programming.

1.02 Error Log

When a system maintenance object begins to fail

periodic testing, the system automatically
generates an error record. (Refer to Section 14-
G-2.00 “Error Log screen.”)
Depending on the severity, the record is stored in
one of two tables in the Error Log.
The two tables are:
Error Log (1/2) (Major and Minor Alarm)
Up to 15 major or minor error records are stored
in this error log.The error tables are organized by
time of occurrence.The newest error record
appears on the top of the screen.
If more than 15 errors have occurred in that time,
error records already stored in the error log will be
overwritten, starting with the first.

Error Log (2/2) (Light Alarm)

Up to 15 light error records can be stored in this
error log.
Other conditions are the same as error log (1/2).

Each error log screen (1/2)(2/2) exists

independently.

Deleting Error Log records (available only when

logged in to the system by entering the 1st Level
Password only)
When you exit the error log screen, the following
message appears on the screen.
=> Error Log clear ? (Y/N)
Error log records can be deleted by entering “Y.”

14-D-1
1.04 Local Alarm

Description
When the system detects a problem during on-
line communication, an alarm message will be
displayed on the screen of the Attendant Console
or on the display of PITS (if provided) whose
owner is assigned as operator 1 by pressing the
ALARM key.
7. The alarm message on the display of PITS (if
provided) disappears if making a call from that
telephone; an incoming call arrives at that
telephone; held call reminder occurs.
The alarm message reappears on the display
when the PITS goes to on-hook.

Programming Operation
ALARM key (button) assignment To display the alarm message, press the ALARM
key (button) while ALARM LED is flashing or lit
(Attendant Console) steady.
ALARM key (Fixed feature key) If local alarm occurred during a conversation,
press the ALARM key (button) after replacing the
(PITS) handset then the alarm message will be
Reference displayed.
System Programming
VT Dumb
• An example of the alarm display
“Extension-Station (2/3),” 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
DN key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3),” 9-G-1.03 10-C-26.00 (Attendant Console)
DSS key Type JAN-25-91 6:31 AM MAJOR•ALARM #0410
Basic Shelf power down
Condition
(PITS)
1. When the system has detected the error, the
ERR 0410 POW DWN
ALARM LED on the Attendant Console or
PITS (Operator 1) automatically flashes in red To clear the displayed alarm message, press the
(Major Alarm) or is lit steady in red (Minor ALARM key (button) when the alarm message is
Alarm). displayed. The ALARM LED will be turned off
and the alarm message on the display of PITS (if
2. Local alarm is not shown if the Operator 1 is provided) or CRT screen of the Attendant
an SLT user. Console disappears.

3. If the ALARM button is not assigned to a

PITS, the local alarm doesn’t show.

4. The local alarm occurs only with operator 1 of

each tenant.

5. In case of a PITS without the display, the

ALARM LED is lit when the system detects an
error. To clear the error message press the
ALARM button twice.

6. When multiple troubles occur at a time, only

the most serious trouble appears on the
screen of attendant console or display of PITS
(if provided).

14-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm

Description
When the system detects a problem during on-
line communication, an error message appears
on the screen of the remote maintenance device.
For remote access, a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
Remote Configuration
Main Unit Data Terminal
Conditions
Setting “System-Operation (2/3)” Remote Alarm
to “Yes” is not available if the RMT card is not
installed.
All system-detected error messages are
displayed in the error log, but concerning “Local
Alarm,” or “Remote Alarm”, some error
messages are displayed and some are not.
Refer to Section 14-D-2.03 “Background
Diagnostic Error List” for details.

Modem
Central
Office

Programming
To execute this feature, set “System-Operation,”
Remote Alarm to “Yes” and register the
telephone (Modem) number of the remote
administration device in “Destination Address.”
Installing the RMT card is required for this
feature.
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (2/3)” 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00

Remote Alarm,
Destination Address

14-D-3
2.00 Clearing System-Detected
Troubles
2.01 Introduction

Most system-detected troubles are reported via This record is interpreted as follows:
the alarm LED (light-emitting diode) indicators
located on the top shelf, each circuit card, 1. The year, month, date and time of the
Attendant Console and PITS. The following occurence.
covers general trouble-clearing techniques and
recommended procedures for identifying and 2. The severity of the error
clearing a variety of specific system troubles.
MAJOR ALARM-Error Log (1/2)
You can detect, report, and clear troubles in the MINOR ALARM-Error Log (1/2)
following three ways. Blank-Light Error-Error Log (2/2)

(1) Error Log 3. Error Code

(2) LED indicators on the Main Units Each error record has a specific error code.
(ALARM LED on the Top shelf, LEDs on the You can clear the troubles via the
cards) troubleshooting guide corresponding to the
(3) User-Reported Error error code.
(Including Automatic Failure Reporting, Local (Refer to Section 14-E-3.00 “Troubleshooting
Alarm, Remote Alarm) via Error Log Records.”)

2.02 Consulting the Error Log 4. Description

A description of the nature of the error.
Consulting the error log should be the first step in
diagnosing system-related troubles.
The error log is read by logging in to the system
administration terminal, selecting the Main Menu
item “3. Monitor,” and then selecting “1. Error
Log.”
Refer to Section 14-G-2.00 “Error Log Screen.”
The error log is comprised of the following two
error tables.

Error Log (1/2) (Major and Minor Alarms)

Error Log (2/2) (Light Alarms)

Each error record is reported as one line on the

screen.
Error Log (1/2) and Error Log (2/2) use the same
format and exist independently.
These error records provide the location of the
error, the date and time of the occurrence, and a
description of the error.

A typical error record from the error log is as

follows:
Error Log (1/2)
MAR-20-90 8:39 AM MAJOR ALARM #0400 Basic shelf power down
1 2 3 4

14-D-4
2.03 Background Diagnostic Error List
ERROR AUTO LOCAL REMOTE
ERRORS OTHERS
LOG REPORT ALARM ALARM
CPR RAM failure X X X(MJ) X LED (ALARM)
CPR runaway (watchdog timer overflow) X
CPR runaway (software timer overflow) X
TSW clock down X X X(MJ) PFT, LED
Basic shelf DC power down X PFT
Basic shelf AC power down X X X(MJ) X LED
Expansion shelf DC power down X X X(MJ) X PFT, LED
Expansion shelf AC power down X X X(MJ) X LED
Progress tone failure (CPU card) X X X(MJ) X LED
Check date/time X X X(MJ) X LED
Conference trunk failure (1 trunk) X X
(all trunk) X X X(MJ) X LED
CPU shared memory error X X X(MJ) X LED
CPU RAM backup battery down X X X(MJ) X LED
Device not connect for SMDR X X(MJ) X LED
Communication failure (LPR) X X X(MJ) X LED
LPR ROM checksum error X X X(MJ) X LED
LPR RAM failure X X X(MJ) X LED
TSW disconnect X X X(MJ) LED
Card disconnect X X X(MJ) X LED
Modem failure X X X(MJ) LED
LPR memory checksum error X X
Card type error X X
LPR runaway X X
OGM CPU runaway X X
OGM lost X X X(MJ)
OPX power down X X X(MJ) X
OPX power down (bell) X X X(MJ) X
DTMF generator failure X X X(MJ) X
DTMF receiver failure X X X(MJ) X
Tone detector failure X X X(MJ) X
HDLC failure X X X(MJ) X
Communication failure (ATT/PITS/DPH) X X
OHCA SW failure X X X(MJ) X LED
OHCA not installed X X
TSW DTMF generator/receiver failure X X X(MJ) X LED

Legend:
MJ-Major Alarm X : applied
MN-Minor Alarm Blank : not applied
PFT-Power Failure Transfer
LED-Refer to Section 14-E-2.00 “Troubleshooting via the LED indicators.”

14-D-5
E. Troubleshooting Guide
1.00 Introduction
This subsection uses system troubleshooting flow
charts to guide the service personnel in efficient
and systematic testing and fault location.
The system troubleshooting flow charts provides
service personnel with a step-by-step sequence
to use for system evaluation. Isolated steps in a
flow chart should never be used out of context,
since any step assumes that proper results were
obtained on all previous tests.

14-E-1
2.00 Troubleshooting via the LED Indicators

When the system detects a problem, the alarm LED indicator located on the top shelf will turn red.
(Refer to the figure below)
If the detected trouble is generated by a card, the alarm LED indicator on the card will light up simultane-
ously.
(Refer to the table below)

When the trouble is cleared, the alarm LED indicator located on the top shelf goes off automatically.

LED Indicators on the Top Shelf LED indicators on the CPU card

<1>
Panasonic <2>
RUN OFF LINE ALARM

Location of LED Indicators on the Card

Alarm LED on the Top Shelf LED on the Card Possible contents Error Code

ON System Down None

(CPU<1>)

RAM 0Axx
ON
(CPU<2>) Calendar 0700
Backup Battery 0C00
Clock 0300
Progress Tone 0600
ON Optional Conference TSW 0900
(TSW)
OHCA TSW D000
ON DTMF G/R for test FFFF
Link 10xx
Card Type Error 21xx
ON ROM 11xx
(LPR)
RAM 12xx
MODEM 14xx
Card is not installed 13xx
AC/DC Power Supply 0410
None 0500
0510
SMDR Communication 0B00

14-E-2
 Troubleshooting via the LED indicators

Alarm LED on

Is it possible to read out the

Error Log records?
Yes
No
Check the status of the
followings
• CPU RAM
• TSW
• OHCA SW
• CONF SW
• LPR
• SMDR
Fault
Not Fault

Is Error Log record printed

out?
Yes
No

Is the Local Alarm reported?

Yes
No
Is the Remote Alarm
reported?
Yes
No

Infer the defective device Troubleshoot by consulting

through the User’s report or the Error Log Record List
the indication of the LED on
the card
NG
OK

Repair or replace the

probable defective device
OK
NG

Consult the nearest Service

Center

End

14-E-3
3.00 Troubleshooting via Error Log Records

3.01 Error Log Record List

Background Diagnostic Errors

ERR Sever- AUTOMATIC FAILURE REPORT LOCAL ALARM MESSAGE

COMMENTS
CODE ity (SMDR) MESSAGE ATT PITS
0100 MJ WDT overflow
0200 MJ soft timer overflow
0300 MJ TSW clock down TSW Clock Down TSW DWN internal clock down
0301 MJ TSW clock down TSW Clock Down TSW DWN external clock down
0400 MJ Basic shelf power down DC power down
0410 MN Basic shelf power down B-Shelf POW Down POW DWN AC power down
050n MJ Expansion shelf n (1/2) power down E-Shelf POW Down POW DWN DC power down
051n MN Expansion shelf n (1/2) power down E-Shelf POW Down POW DWN AC power down
0600 MN Progress tone failure Tone Failure DIAL TN
0700 MN Check date/time Check Date/Time CLCK IC
0800 MN Conference trunk failure CONF TRK Failure CONF TK all basic trunk failure
08bb -- Conference trunk failure trunk failure
0900 MN Conference trunk failure CONF TRK Failure CONF TK all optional trunk failure
09tt -- Conference trunk failure trunk failure
0Azz MN System memory error SYS Memory Error SYS MEM read error
MJ System memory error SYS Memory Error SYS MEM write/read error
0B00 MN SMDR Not Connect SMDR
0C00 MN CPU RAM backup battery down Battery Down BATTERY
10xx MN Card link failure Card Link Failure CRD LNK
11xx MN LPR ROM checksum error LPR ROM Failure CRD ROM
12xx MN LPR RAM failure LPR RAM Failure CRD RAM
1300 MJ Card disconnect Card Disconnect DISCNCT TSW card
13xx MN Card disconnect Card Disconnect DISCNCT
14xx MN Modem failure MODEM Failure MODEM
20xx -- LPR memory checksum error loaded data failure
21xx -- Card type error card type error
22xx -- LPR runaway LPR runaway
31xx MN DSP-1 failure DSP1 Failure DSP1 E-1 card DSP failure
32xx MN DSP-2 failure DSP2 Failure DSP2 E-1 card DSP failure
33xx MN DSP-1 link failure DSP1 Link Failure DSP1 LNK E-1 card DSP failure
34xx MN DSP-2 link failure DSP2 Link Failure DSP2 LNK E-1 card DSP failure
50xx -- OGM CPU runaway OGM CPU runaway
51xx MN OGM lost OGM Lost OGM LOS
60xx MN OPX power down OPX Power Down OPX POW
61xx MN OPX power down (bell) OPX Power Down OPX POW
70xx MN Digital trunk failure D-Trunk Failure D-TRK line trouble
(out of synchronization)
71xx MN Digital trunk failure D-Trunk Failure D-TRK line trouble
(RAI signal reception)
Legend:
MJ-Major Alarm
MN-Minor Alarm
14-E-4
(70695)
(70695)
72xx MN Digital trunk failure D-Trunk Failure D-TRK line trouble
(AIS signal reception)
75xx MN Digital trunk failure D-Trunk Failure D-TRK line trouble
(frame trouble)
80xx MN DTMF generator failure DTMF G. Failure DTMF G.
9rxx MN DTMF receiver failure DTMF R. Failure DTMF R.
Ayxx MN Tone detector failure Tone Detector TN DTCT
Byxx MN HDLC failure HDLC Failure HDLC
Cyxx -- Port link failure
D000 MN OHCA SW failure OHCA sw Failure OHCA SW
Dyxx -- OHCA not installed
FFFF MN TSW DTMF G./R. failure TSW Failure TSW FLT

Legend:
MJ-Major Alarm
MN-Minor Alarm

14-E-4-1
(70695)
3.02 System Reset caused by CPU Runaway (Restart Procedure)

Error Code 0100 = Overflow of the watch dog timer.

0200 = Software Infinite Loop

Possible cause of 1) External circumstance, such as introduced noise

the malfunction 2) Hardware is defective

Countermeasures
Does the trouble occur frequently?
Yes No

Replace the CPU card*

No change in OK
condition
Replace the TSW card
No change in OK
condition
Remove the LPR cards one by one
No change in OK
condition
Replace the Shelf
No change in OK
condition
Consult the Service Center

End

Note 1) If a reset occurs 16 times/in one hour due to overflow of the watch dog timer,
the restart procedure is not activated and the system will be shut down.
Press the RESET button to restart the procedure.

*It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to

facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-5
(70695)
3.03 TSW clock down (Internal/External)
(1) Internal clock down

Error Code 0300

Possible cause of 1) TSW card connection error

the malfunction 2) TSW card clock link failure (Internal)

Countermeasures
After confirming the TSW card
connection, press the RESET
button

Is the trouble registered in the Error

Log ?
Yes
No

Is an Extension/CO call possible ?

Yes

Replace the TSW card

No change in OK
condition

Replace the Shelf

End

Note If the TSW clock malfunction occurs:

1) The attendant console does not function.
(Communication to the LPR becomes impossible)
2) Calling becomes impossible
3) Power Failure Transfer will be activated

14-E-6
(70695)
(2) External clock down

Error Code 0301

Possible cause of 1) TSW card connection error

the malfunction 2) TSW card clock link failure (External)
"TSW external clock down "has occurred, and the T-1 or E-1 master card
does not synchronize with the clock time sent from the Central office.

Countermeasures
After confirming the TSW card
connection, press the RESET
button

Is the trouble registered in the Error

Log ?
Yes
No

Does system work with external

clock mode ?
Yes
No

Replace the T-1 or E-1 card.

OK
NG
Replace the TSW card.

End

Note Another T-1 or E-1 card with next priority will work as a master card, if more
than two T-1 or E-1 cards were registered to the system by CLP command
(Refer to Section 64.03) beforehand. Otherwise, the system will synchronize
with the system internal clock.

14-E-6-1
(70695)
3.04 Basic shelf power down (DC)

Error Code 0400

Possible cause of 1) AC power cord is unplugged

the malfunction 2) Power Failure
3) Power Switch is turned off
4) Malfunction in the Power Supply Unit of the Basic Shelf, or the trouble with
the Power Supply System (Backboard, CPU card) of the Shelf

Countermeasures
Did the above item 1), 2) or 3)
occur at the recorded time of the
Error Log ?
Yes
No

Does the trouble occur frequently?

No
Yes

No Supply Unit
Replace the Power
No change in OK
condition
Replace the CPU card*
No change in OK
condition
Replace the Shelf

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-7
(70695)
3.05 Basic shelf power down (AC)

Error Code 0410

Possible cause of 1) AC power cord is unplugged

the malfunction 2) Power Failure
3) Malfunction of Power Unit of the Basic Shelf or Power Supply System
(Backboard, CPU card) failure of the Shelf.

Countermeasures
Did the above item 1) or 2) occur at
the recorded time of the Error Log?
Yes
No

Does the troubles occur frequently ?

No
Yes

No Supply unit
Replace the Power
No change in OK
condition
Replace the CPU card*
No change in OK
condition
Replace the Shelf

End

Note 1) It is desirable to store the system programming data on a floppy disc or tape
to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery, considering the limited running time
(about 3 years) of the backup battery in case the Power Failure continues for
a long time.

14-E-8
(70695)
3.06 Expansion shelf power down ( DC )

Error Code 050n

n = 1 : Expansion Shelf 1
2 : Expansion Shelf 2

Possible cause of 1) Power switch of the Expansion Shelf n (n=1 or 2) is turned off.
the malfunction 2) Malfunction of Power Supply Unit of the Expansion Shelf, or trouble with the
Power Supply System(Backboard, CPU card) of the shelf

Countermeasures Did the above item 1) occur at the

recorded time of the Error Log ?
No Yes

Is a new error recorded in the Error

Log, when the RESET button is
pressed ?
Yes
No

Does the trouble occur frequently ?

No
Yes

Replace the Power Supply Unit

No change in OK
condition

Replace the CPU card*

OK
No change in
condition
Replace the Expansion Shelf

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-9
3.07 Expansion shelf power down ( AC )

Error Code 051n

n = 1 : Expansion Shelf 1
2 : Expansion Shelf 2
Possible cause of
the malfunction 1) Power failure
2) Power Supply Unit malfunction of the Expansion Shelf n (n=1 or 2), or trouble
with the Power Supply System (Backboard, CPU card) of the Shelf

Countermeasures Did the above item 1) occur at the

recorded time of the Error Log ?
Yes
No
Is there a new error message in the
Error Log, when the RESET button
is pressed ?
Yes
No

Does the trouble occur frequently ?

No
Yes

Replace the Power Supply Unit

No change in OK
condition

Replace the CPU card*

OK
No change in
condition
Replace the Shelf

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-10
3.08 Progress tone failure (TSW card)

Error Code 0600

Possible cause of 1) Defective progress tone IC on the TSW card

the malfunction 2) Defective Tone Detector on the TSW card

*1
Countermeasures Can 4 types of tones be heard from
a telephone ?
No Yes

*2
Replace the Progress Tone IC on Replace the Tone Detector for
the TSW card the TSW card testing

Is there a new related error mes-

sage in the Error Log, after pressing
the RESET button ?
No
Yes

Replace the TSW card

No good
OK

End

Note 1) Unless the Call Progress Tone failure is cleared, the following item is not
executed
• Tone Detector for the DISA / AGC card

*1.Refer to Section 3-B “Basic Features” for details about the 4 types of
tones
*2.Consult the nearest service center

14-E-11
3.09 Check date / time (Real Time Clock IC)

Error Code 0700

Possible cause of 1) Count up of the Real Time Clock IC is stopped

the malfunction 2) Variances between the CPU clock and the calender clock became greater
than ±30 minutes per 12 hours

Countermeasures
Confirm the time displayed on the
PITS/ATT

Is the displayed time correct ?

None

No IC counting
Is the Real Time Clock
up ?
Yes

Set the time from the ATT, PITS,

maintenance terminal etc.

Is the Real Time Clock IC set cor-

rectly and counting up correctly ?
No Yes

Replace the CPU card* End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-12
3.10 Conference trunk failure (Basic)

Error Code 080x

x= 0 : for all basic conference trunks (1 to 8 )
1 to 8 : for individual basic conference trunk 1 to 8

Possible cause of 1) Basic conference trunk on TSW card failure.

the malfunction

Countermeasures
Enter port test command * to check
the faulty trunk from the mainte-
nance terminal.
Pass
No
Replace the TSW card Enter INS command for
the port from the
maintenance terminal

End

Note * Refer to Section 14-F-4.03 “Port Test procedure.”

14-E-13
3.11 Conference trunk failure (Option)

Error Code 09 xx
xx= 00 : for all optional conference trunks (01 to 64).
01 to 64 : for individual optional conference trunk 01 to 64.

Possible cause of 1) Optional TSW Conference Expansion card on the TSW card is defective.
the malfunction 2) Malfunction of the TSW card.

Countermeasures Enter test command to check the

faulty trunk from the maintenance
terminal
Pass
Faulty
Replace the optional TSW Enter INS command
Conference Expansion Card from the maintenance
terminal

After turning the power switch on,

check the optional conference trunk
status
INS
Faulty
Replace the TSW card

End

Note None

14-E-14
3.12 System memory error (Major)

Error Code 0Axx

xx= 01 : RAM IC 1

08 : RAM IC 8

Possible cause of 1) RAM IC of the CPU card failure.

the malfunction (Including Input/Output bus)

Countermeasures Replace the CPU card*

Enter the system data

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-15
3.13 System memory error (Minor)

Error Code 0Axx

xx= 01 : RAM IC 1

08 : RAM IC 8

Possible cause of 1) Intermittent defect of RAM IC on the CPU card.

the malfunction (Including Input/Output bus)
2) Introduced noise.

Countermeasures
Reset the CPU

Enter the system data

End

Note None

14-E-16
3.14 Device not connect for SMDR

Error Code 0B00

Possible cause of 1) RS-232C cable is not connected.

the malfunction 2) RS-232C cable is defective.
3) Printer is turned off. (including out of paper)

Countermeasures
Do you use SMDR?
No
Yes

Check above item 1), 2), 3) Assign SMDR to “No” in the

system programming
No Problem NG

Replace the CPU card*

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-17
3.15 CPU RAM backup battery down

Error Code 0C00

Possible cause of 1) Defective rechargeable lithium battery on the CPU card

the malfunction 2) Defective CPU card

Countermeasures
After replacing lithium battery, *1
turn on the POWER switch

Is there a new related error mes-

sage in the Error Log?
No
Yes

Replace the CPU card *2

Enter the system data

End

Note
*1.Consult the nearest service center
*2.It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape
to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-18
3.16 Card link failure (LPR)

Error Code 10xx 01 to 12 Basic Shelf

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number 13 to 27 Expansion Shelf 1
28 to 42 Expansion Shelf 2

Possible cause of 1) Defective FIFO (First In First Out) trouble in LPR.

the malfunction 2) Input/Output trouble (CPU card, Shelf).

Countermeasures
Check the status of the
associated card
OK
Faulty
Enter card test command from
the maintenance terminal
OK
Faulty
Replace the faulty LPR card

Enter card test command from

the maintenance terminal
OK
Faulty
Replace the CPU card*

Enter card test command from

the maintenance terminal
OK
Faulty
Enter INS command from the
Replace the Shelf
maintenance terminal

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-19
3.17 LPR ROM checksum error

Error Code 11xx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) LPR ROM checksum error

the malfunction

Countermeasures Replace the ROM of faulty

LPR card

End

Note None

14-E-20
3.18 LPR RAM failure

Error Code 12xx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) LPR RAM failure

the malfunction

Countermeasures
Replace the faulty LPR card

End

Note None

14-E-21
3.19 Card disconnect

Error Code 13xx

xx= 00 : TSW
01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Card connection error

the malfunction 2) Defective CPU card

Countermeasures
TSW After confirming the TSW card
connection, press the RESET button

Is there a new related message in

the Error Log
No
Yes
After replacing CPU card,*
turn on the POWER switch
INS
Faulty
Replace the Shelf

OK End

LPR After confirming the TSW card

OK
connection, enter the card INS
command from the maintenance
terminal
OK
NG
After replacing the LPR card, enter
the card INS command again
OK
NG
After replacing the CPU card, turn*
on the POWER switch
INS
Faulty
Replace the Shelf

End

Note *It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.

14-E-22
3.20 Modem failure (RMT card)

Error Code 14xx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Modem failure

the malfunction

Countermeasures
Replace the card

End

Note None

14-E-23
3.21 LPR memory checksum error

Error Code 20xx.

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Defective LPR RAM

the malfunction

Countermeasures
Check the status of the related card

INS
Faulty
Enter INS command from the
maintenance terminal

Check the status of the card

INS
Faulty
Replace the LPR card

End

Note None

14-E-24
3.22 Card type error (LPR)

Error Code 21xx.

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Assigned card type doesn't correspond to the installed card type.
the malfunction

Countermeasures
Change the card assignment or
replace the installed card with
correct one

Enter INS command from the

maintenance terminal

End

Note None

14-E-25
3.23 LPR runaway

Error Code 22xx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) LPR is reset

the malfunction

Countermeasures
Check the status of the related card
INS
Faulty
Enter INS command from the
maintenance terminal

Check the status of the card

INS
Faulty
Replace the LPR card End

Enter INS command from the

maintenance terminal

Note None

14-E-26
3.24 OGM CPU runaway (DISA)

Error Code 50 xx
xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Runaway of the OGM (CPU) of the DISA card

the malfunction

Countermeasures Is it possible to play the OGM through

the telephone of the operator 1 ?
Yes
No
After entering OUS command,
enter the card test command from
the maintenance terminal
Pass
Fault

Replace the DISA card

Enter the card INS command

from the maintenance terminal

End

Note None

14-E-27
3.25 OGM lost (DISA)

Error Code 51xx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Power failure or power-off for long duration (6~7 days).
the malfunction 2) Defective backup battery for DISA card.
3) OGM was not recorded after the installation.

Countermeasures

After confirming the OGM recording/

playback through the phone of
Operator 1, press the RESET button

Is there a new related error

message in the Error Log ?
No

Replace the DISA card

End

Note None

14-E-28
3.26 OPX power down

Error Code 60 xx
xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) Power-off of external OPX Power Unit.

the malfunction 2) Defective OPX card.

Countermeasures Check the port status of the related

OPX card
No “Fault” port
Faulty port
Check external OPX Power Unit
(Power, Power cable, Connector
etc.).

Check the port status of the related

OPX card

No change in INS status

condition
Replace the OPX card.
Power on the external OPX Power
Unit and then, enter INS command
from the maintenance terminal

End

Note None

14-E-29
3.27 DTMF generator failure (COT card)

Error Code 80 xx
xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of 1) DTMF generator on the LCOT/GCOT card is defective.

the malfunction 2) DTMF signal transmission path is defective.

Countermeasures Set the related port to OUS

Set the smallest physical extension

number (SLC/HLC) port to OUS,
enter port test command for 2 ports
(COT-SLC)

Pass Fault

Set the related port to INS

Confirm that a CO outgoing call Perform the same test for

through the faulty port is possible other SLC/HLC cards
from a PITS telephone
OK NG Fault Pass

Replace the COT card Replace the faulty card

End

Note None

14-E-30
3.28 DTMF receiver failure (SLC/HLC/OPX card)

Error Code 9 rxx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number
r= 1 to 2 : DTMF Receiver number

Possible cause of 1) Defective DTMF receiver.

the malfunction 2) Defective path for the DTMF receiver from the faulty port.

Countermeasures Set working receiver to OUS

Is the DTMF dialing (0~9, * , #)

from the extension SLT in the faulty
card acceptable ?

NG
OK
Set faulty receiver to OUS, another
receiver to INS, perform port test for
the “port” in the faulty card and the Replace the faulty card
“port 1” in the smallest physical
numbered COT card
OK
NG
Perform the same test on
other COT card
OK
NG
Replace the TSW card, and perform
the same test as above
OK
NG
Replace the faulty card, and perform
the same test as above
OK
NG
Replace the shelf

End

Note None

14-E-31
3.29 Tone detector failure (DISA/AGC card)

Error Code A yxx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number
y= 1 to 4 : Port number

Possible cause of 1) Tone detector failure

the malfunction 2) Defective tone receiving path from the faulty port.

Countermeasures Set the faulty port to OUS, enter the

port test command
Pass
Faulty
Replace the LPR card

End

Note None

14-E-32
3.30 HDLC failure (ATLC card)

Error Code B yxx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number
y= 1 to 2 : Port number

Possible cause of 1) Defective HDLC IC

the malfunction

Countermeasures Set the faulty port to OUS, then

enter the port test command
Pass
Faulty
Replace the faulty ATLC card

End

Note None

14-E-33
3.31 Port link failure (ATT/DPH)

Error Code C yxx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number
y= 1 to 8 : Port number

Possible cause of 1) Communication disconnection due to unplugged terminal etc.

the malfunction

Countermeasures
Check the status of the faulty port
INS
Faulty
Is AC power cord unplugged from AC power cord was
the terminal? unplugged

Not unplugged
Replace the terminal
OK
NG
Set the card with the faulty port to
OUS once, then set to INS and
check the status of the faulty port
INS
Faulty
Replace the LPR card

End

Note None

14-E-34
3.32 OHCA SW failure (TSW card)

Error Code D 000

Possible cause of 1) “OHCA” is assigned to BS02 in the slot assignment, but TSW-OHCA card
the malfunction (KX-T336105) is not installed

Countermeasures Do you use “OHCA” ?

No
Yes
Is the “TSW-OHCA” card
installed ?
No
Yes
Change the assignment Replace the TSW card Install the TSW-OHCA card

End

Note None

14-E-35
3.33 OHCA not installed (PLC/HLC)

Error Code D yxx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number
y= 1 to 8 : Port number

Possible cause of 1) In spite of assigning “OHCA” to “Yes” in the station programming, OHCA
the malfunction circuit card (KX-T96136) is not installed.

Countermeasures Do you use “OHCA”

No

Is the “OHCA” circuit

installed in the faulty port

No
Yes
Change the assignment Replace the LPR card Install the OHCA card

End

Note None

14-E-36
3.34 TSW DTMF G./R. failure

Error Code FFFF

Possible cause of 1) DTMF Generator or Receiver for test is defective

the malfunction

Countermeasures Replace the TSW card

End

Note None

14-E-37
3.35 Digital trunk failure (out of synchronization)

Error Code 70xx xx=01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of T-1/E-1 card (physical number xx) lost the synchronization with the clock
the malfunction time sent from the Central Office.

Countermeasures
Confirm that the setting of "Frame Sequence" and "Line
Coding" are matched with that of the leased lines.
If not, change the setting of your KX-T336 and CSU.
Then check the clock mode.
OK
NG
Check the cabling between "T-1/E-1 and CSU" and "CSU
and NIU." If not properly cabled, change the cabling.
OK
NG
Execute Loopback Test(Internal).
Test Results NG
Test Results
OK
Replace the T-1/E-1
card with a new one.

Execute Loopback Test(External: between KX-T336 and

CSU)
OK
NG
Check the CSU. If not good, replace it with a new one.
NG OK

Ask the T-1/E-1 carrier to check the line conditions.

Or, check the equipment in other switching system which
your T-1/E-1 lines are connected with.

End

Note Another T-1/E-1 card with next priority will work as a master card, if more
than two T-1/E-1 cards were registered to the system by CLP command
(Refer to Section 64.03) beforehand. Otherwise, the system will synchronize
with the system internal clock.

14-E-37-1
(70695)
3.36 Digital trunk failure (RAI signal reception)
Error Code 71xx xx=01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible Cause of T-1/E-1 card (physical number xx) received the RAI (Remote Alarm
the malfunction Indication) signal sent from the Central Office.

Countermeasures Ask the T-1/E-1 carrier to check the line conditions. Or, check the equipment
in other switching system which your T-1/E-1 lines are connected with.

Note
None

14-E-37-2
(70695)
3.37 Digital trunk failure (AIS signal reception)
Error Code 72xx xx=01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of T-1/E-1 card (physical number xx) received the AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)
the malfunction signal from the Central Office.

Countermeasures Confirm that the setting of "Frame Sequence" and "Line

Cording" are matched with that of the leased lines.
If not, change the setting of your KX-T336 and CSU.
Then check the clock mode.
OK
NG
Check the cabling between "T-1/E-1 and CSU" and "CSU
and NIU." If not properly cabled, change the cabling.
OK
NG
Execute Loopback Test(Internal).
Test Results NG
Test Results
OK
Replace the T-1/E-1
card with a new one.

Execute Loopback Test(External: between KX-T336 and

CSU)
OK
NG
Check the CSU. If not good, replace it with a new one.
NG OK

Ask the T-1/E-1 carrier to check the line conditions.

Or, check the equipment in other switching system which
your T-1/E-1 lines are connected with.

End

Note Another T-1/E-1 card with next priority will work as a master card, if more than
two T-1/E-1 cards were registered to the system by CLP command (Refer to
Section 64.03) beforehand. Otherwise, the system will synchronize with the
system internal clock.

14-E-37-3
(70695)
3.38 Digital trunk failure (frame trouble)
Error Code 75xx xx=01 to 42 : Slot number

Possible cause of On booting-up of T-1/E-1 card (physical number xx), it failed to synchronize with
the malfunction the clock time sent from the Central Office.

Countermeasures Confirm that the setting of "Frame Sequence" and "Line

Cording" are matched with that of the leased lines.
If not, change the setting of your KX-T336 and CSU.
Then check the clock mode.
OK
NG
Check the cabling between "T-1/E-1 and CSU" and "CSU
and NIU." If not properly cabled, change the cabling.
OK
NG
Execute Loopback Test(Internal).
Test Results NG
Test Results
OK
Replace the T-1/E-1
card with a new one.

Execute Loopback Test(External: between KX-T336 and

CSU)
OK
NG
Check the CSU. If not good, replace it with a new one.
NG OK

Ask the T-1/E-1 carrier to check the line conditions.

Or, check the equipment in other switching system which
your T-1/E-1 lines are connected with.

End

Note Another T-1/E-1 card with next priority will work as a master card, if more than
two T-1/E-1 cards were registered to the system by CLP command (Refer to
Section 64.03) beforehand. Otherwise, the system will synchronize with the
system internal clock.

14-E-37-4
(70695)
3.39 DSP Failure / DSP Link Failure
Error Code 3XYY X=1 : an option card-1 (DSP-1) error is detected in on-line mode.
X=2 : an option card-2 (DSP-2) error is detected in on-line mode.
X=3 : an option card-1 (DSP-1) error is detected during card boot-up.
X=4 : an option card-2 (DSP-2) error is detected during card boot-up.
YY=01 to 42 : Slot Number
Possible cause of
the malfunction
DSP Failure : Option card (DSP) does not work.
DSP Link Failure : Communication Error between Option card (DSP) and E-1
card.

Countermeasures
Replace the DSP card on E-1 card.

Execute DSP diagnosis.

Test Results OK
Test Results
NG
Replace the E-1 card

End

14-E-37-5
(70695)
4.00 Troubleshooting via User-Reported Troubles

If a problem is not detected by the system, a report from the user is very useful to
determine the trouble.
The basic procedure to determine the cause of the trouble according to a report
from the user is shown in the following flow chart.

User-Reported Troubles

Can related error message be read

out ?
No Yes

Check the status of the device from

the maintenance terminal

Fault
Not fault
Is the failure report printed out?
Yes
No
Is the Local Alarm reported?
Yes
No
Is the Remote Alarm reported?
Yes

No
Infer the probable defective device Detect failures according to the
through the User-Reports Error Code

NG NG
OK
Replace the probable defective
device
OK

Enter the system data

End

14-E-38
F. Functional Test by
Entering Commands

1.00 Introduction
1. You can execute diagnostic testing during on-
line communication by entering test
commands at the maintenance terminal
(VT220, VT100, Compatibles, Dumb terminal,
Attendant Console).
2. Execute this functional test in the following
cases.
• When new devices are installed
• When the device combination is changed
• When system detects an alarm or an error
message appears in the error log
• When device status becomes “Fault”
• When a number of telephone instruments
don't function properly
3. There are three kinds of tests as follows.
(a)Card Test
If multiple numbers of extensions do not
function well, you can detect whether
troubles are caused by the card or the
telephone instruments by this test.
(b)Port Test
(c) PITS and ATT (Attendant Console) Test
6. When you perform a device (shelf, card, port,
resource) test, the status of the device to be
tested must be changed to “Out of service”
by entering the OUS command in advance.
If an attempt is made to test a device in “INS”
status, the following message appears on the
screen.
“Invalid Status”
7. You can test a device in “Fault” status.
8. If the device test results in failure, first change
the status of the device to “Fault” and replace
it with a normal one if necessary.
9. It is impossible to execute functional test
during off-line communication mode.
10.The <CANCEL>, <NEXT> or <PREV> keys
do not function during the test.

* Test (b), (c) are executed to detect troubles

when telephone instruments don't function
well while card status is good.

4. This functional test must be done during

on-line communication mode both at on-site
and from a remote location. For remote
access, a data terminal and modem are
required at a remote location, and you must
install the RMT card in the system and assign
Remote Directory Number to the system in
system programming operation “Remote
Directory Number.”
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration from a Remote Location” for
details.

5. Functional test can be done only when you

log in to the system by entering the 1st level
password.

14-F-1
2.00 Test Main Menu
From the Main Menu screen, select “2. Test”;
then the following “Test Main Menu” appears on
the screen.

Test Main Menu ONL TST LIN DIR

1. Card Test
2. Post Test
3. PITS and ATT Test

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
1. Card Test -------Verifies the card status.
2. Port Test --------Verifies the port status.
3. PITS and ATT Test -----Verifies the PITS and ATT(Attendant Console) status.

14-F-2
3.00 Testing the Cards
3.01 Functions to be Verified

This test verifies the status of each card for the

items listed below:

Card to be
Item Remarks
verified

SLC Link Card to be verified

PLC Card type should be “OUS”
HLC ROM or “FAULT.”
LCOT RAM
GCOT
DID
ATLC
AGC

OPX Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Power Supply

DISA Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
OGM Rec/Play

RMT Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Modem

DPH Card Type

14-F-3
3.02 Card Test Initial screen

From the test main menu screen, select “1. Card

Test ” then the following “Card Test” initial screen
appears on the screen.

Card Test ONL TST LIN DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09/JUL/90
Basic 01 PLC Expansion 01 PLC Expansion 01 LCOT
Shelf 02 PLC Self 1 02 PLC Self 2 02 LCOT
03 PLC 03 PLC 03 LCOT
04 PLC 04 PLC 04 LCOT
05 PLC 05 PLC 05 LCOT
06 PLC 06 PLC 06 LCOT
07 PLC 07 PLC 07 LCOT
08 PLC 08 PLC 08 LCOT
09 PLC 09 PLC 09 LCOT
10 PLC 10 PLC 10 ATLC
11 PLC 11 PLC 11 DPH
12 PLC 12 LCOT 12 RMT
13 LCOT 13
14 14
15 15

P: Pass, 1-F: Fault

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

(Note) In the above screen, no indication means

no card is installed.

14-F-4
3.03 Card Test procedure

Enter the test command according to the card test

format below.

=> x y y

Card No. (01-15, or ** )

Shelf No. (1: Basic 2: Expansion 1
3: Expansion 2)

(Note) “* ” can be used as a wild card character

“* ” or “** ” means “All”
1** means all cards in the basic shelf

(Example)
Executing card No. 208 test

2 => 208
3 ***** Executing
4 1 COMMON 2 3 4

(Note) When you test the DISA card, the following

message appears on the screen

=> 105 <OGM Test ? Y/N/C>

When you select “Y”, the previously recorded OGM

message is erased.

When you finish the card test, go to the Test Main

Menu by pressing the <END> key.

14-F-5
3.04 Card Test Results screen

Card Test ONL TST DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09/JUL/90

Basic 01 PLC P Expansion 01 PLC P Expansion 01 LCOT P
Shelf 02 PLC 1 Self 1 02 PLC 2 Self 2 02 LCOT P
03 PLC 5 03 PLC P 03 LCOT P
04 PLC 04 PLC 04 LCOT
05 PLC 5 05 PLC 05 LCOT
06 PLC 2 06 PLC 06 LCOT
07 PLC 3 07 PLC 07 LCOT
08 PLC 08 PLC 08 LCOT
09 PLC 09 PLC 09 LCOT
10 PLC 10 PLC 10 ATLC
11 PLC 11 PLC 11 DPH
12 PLC 12 LCOT 12 RMT
13 LCOT 13
14 14
15 15

P: Pass, 1-F: Fault

=> 107
* * * * *F a i l e d

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Card Test Error Code List

Error Code Description

1 A card is not installed in the specified slot.
2 Card link error
3 Assigned card type doesn't correspond to the installed card type
4 Card ROM error
5 Card RAM error
6 RMT card failure (Modem failure)
7 —————————————————————
8 —————————————————————
9 OPX power down
A OPX power down (Bell)
B OGM Recording/Playing back failure
C —————————————————————
D —————————————————————
E —————————————————————
F TSW card PB generator/PB receiver failure

14-F-6
(E)
4.00 Testing the Ports

4.01 Functions to be Verified

This test verifies the status of the ports for the functions listed below.

1. By entering the physical port number (Except pairs of extension and CO ports)

Card Functions Remarks

PLC OHCA Detect Port to be tested should

HLC be “OUS” or “FAULT”

ATLC HDLC

DISA Speech Path

DTMF Receiver
Tone Detector

AGC Speech Path

Repeater
Tone Detector

2. By entering the physical port number of extension and CO ports in pairs.

Card Functions Remarks

LCOT Speech Path 2 ports to be tested should

Loop Current be “OUS” or “FAULT.”
Bell Detect SLC, HLC, OPX and DTMF
DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator) receiver to be tested should
Pulse Dial be “OUS” or “FAULT.”

GCOT Speech Path

DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator)
Pulse Dial

SLC Speech Path

HLC Bell
OPX DTMF Detector (DTMF Receiver)
Pulse Detect

14-F-7
4.02 Port Test Initial screen

Port Test ONL TST DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09/JUL/90

Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345

1 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
2 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
P 3 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
o 4 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
r 5 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
t 6 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
7 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -
8 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -

P: Pass, 1-F: Fault

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

(Note) “-” mark in the above screen indicates that

the port is not assigned or the card type is
not LCOT, GCOT, SLC, PLC, HLC, OPX,
DISA, AGC, or ATLC.

14-F-8
4.03 Port Test procedure

Enter the test command according to the following (2) => C F O t t

format.
(Refer to Section 14-F-4.01 “Functions to be Optional conference trunk
Tested.”) No. (01-64)
(Example)
(a) When testing the port status on the following => C F O 0 1
cards. (PLC, HLC, ATLC, DISA, AGC)

=> x y y z (Note) Conference trunk test can be done at the

Port No. (1-8, or * ) port test screen and the test result is
Card No. (01-15 or **) displayed just under the entered
Shelf No.( 1: Basic 2: Expansion 1 command as follows.
3: Expansion 2)
=> C F B 0 1
(Note) “ *” or “**” means “All” *****Pass

=> 2***......All ports in the Expansion Shelf 1

=> 105* ....All ports assigned to the card No.05
in the Basic Shelf

(Example)

Executing port 211* test

=> 211*
2
***** Executing
3
4 1 COMMON 2 3 4

(b) When testing extension (SLC, HLC, OPX) port

and CO trunk port (LCOT, GCOT) in pairs

=>Extension port No. & CO trunk port No.

(Example)
=> 1011&2011
=> DN4000&2012

(c) To verify the status of the speech path of the

specified conference trunk, enter the conference
trunk No. as follows.
Before testing, change the status of target
conference trunk to “Out of Service” by entering
OUS command.
Refer to Section 14-G-3.04 “Conference Trunk
Status screen.”

(1) => C F B t t

Basic conference trunk No.

(01-08)

14-F-9
4.04 Port Test Results screen

Port Test ONL TST DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09/JUL/90

Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345

1 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
2 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
P 3 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
o 4 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
r 5 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
t 6 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
7 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - P
8 - - P- - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - 2

P: Pass, 1-F: Fault

=> 314 *
***** Failed
1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Port Test Error Code List

Port Pair When you have completed the port test, go to the
Code Description
test test test main menu by pressing <END> key.
1 Loop current failure
(Note)
2 Bell detection failure If you want to verify the status of the DTMF
receiver (1 or 2), change it’s status to “Out of
3 PB Generator failure Service” by entering OUS command and verify
the status of a card which contains DTMF
4 Dial pulse failure receivers.
SLC, HLC and OPX card contains two DTMF
5 PB Receiver 1 failure receivers respectively.
For further information about OUS command,
6 PB Receiver 2 failure refer to Section 14-C-1.02 “OUS command.”
7 Tone detection circuit 1 failure
This port test is available only for ports on the
8 Tone detection circuit 2 failure following cards.
LCOT, GCOT, SLC, PLC, HLC, DISA, AGC,
9 HDLC failure OPX, and ATLC card.

A OHCA card is not installed When you test the SLC, HLC, OPX, LCOT and
GCOT cards, change the status of both exten-
B Pulse detection failure sion port and CO port to “OUS.”
C Speech path failure If a trouble is caused by a card, an error mes-
sage “Card Fault” appears on the screen.
D
Legend:
E
: applied
F : not applied

14-F-10
5.00 Testing PITS and ATT

5.01 Functions to be Verified

This test verifies the status of a PITS or an Attendant Console (ATT) for the
functions listed below.

Card to be verified Function Remarks

PLC Link (All types of PITS) Card to be tested should be

HLC DTMF generator (KX-T123230D, “OUS”or “FAULT.”
KX-T123235 and KX-T7130)

ATLC Link
DTMF generator
ROM
RAM

14-F-11
5.02 PITS and ATT Test Initial screen

PITS and ATT Test ONL TST DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09/JUL/90

Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345

1 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
2 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
P 3 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
o 4 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
r 5 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
t 6 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
7 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -
8 - - - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -

P: Pass, 1-F: Fault

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

(Note) “-” mark in above screen indicates that no

ports are assigned to a PITS or an ATT
(Attendant Console)

14-F-12
5.03 PITS and ATT Test procedure

A PITS and an ATT test can be done according to the

following three test formats.

(a) => D N d d d d
Directory number (three or four
digits)

(Example) => DN 4000

Executing DN4000 Port Test

=> DN4000
2 ***** Executing
3
4 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

(b) => A a
Attendant console number (1,2 or *)

PITS and ATT test can be done by entering physical port

number of PITS or ATT

(c) => x y y z
Port number (1 to 8, or *)
Card number (01 to 15 or **)
Shelf number ( 1: Basic 2: Expansion 1
3: Expansion 2)

14-F-13
5.04 PITS and ATT Test Results screen

When the test is finished, test result is displayed on the

screen automatically.

PITS and ATT Test ONL TST DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09/JUL/90

Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345

1 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
2 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
P 3 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
o 4 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
r 5 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
t 6 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
7 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- P
8 -- P- - - -- - - -- - - - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- 2

P: Pass, 1-F: Fault

=> 314 *
***** Failed
1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
PITS and ATT Test Error Code List

Code Description

1 PITS Link failure, ATT Link failure

2 PITS PB Generator failure, ATT PB Generator failure

C Speech Path failure

* If a trouble results from a card, an error message

“Card Fault” appears on the screen.

14-F-14
6.00 Return Messages
Display on message line when executing test

=> DN4000
2
***** Executing Message line
3
4 1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Message Description

Executing Executing device test

Illegal Parameter Entered parameter is out of format or related device is not installed.

Invalid status The status of the card or port being verified is not “OUS” or “Fault.”

Pass Device status is good.

Failed Device status is bad.

14-F-15
G. Monitor
1.00 Monitor Main Menu screen
From the Main Menu screen, select “3. Monitor”
then follow the Monitor Main Menu that appears on
the screen.
By selecting an item from this screen, you can
monitor the current operating information.

Monitor Main Menu ONL MON LIN DIR

1. Error Log
2. Device Status
3. Traffic

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Description
(1) Error Log
Displays error records.
(2) Device status
Displays current device status.
(3) Traffic
Displays traffic measurement for extensions, CO
trunks, attendant consoles and resources.

14-G-1
2.00 Error Log screen

Error Log (1/2) ONL MON

JAN-20-90 8 : 39 AM MAJOR ALARM #0100 CPR runaway

JAN-21-90 10: 00 AM MINOR ALARM #0300 TSW clock down
JAN-21-90 11: 12 PM MAJOR ALARM #0400 Basic shelf power down
JAN-25-90 6 : 32 AM MINOR ALARM #0600 Progress tone failure
JAN-29-90 1 : 57 PM MINOR ALARM #0700 Check date/time
JAN-30-90 9 : 01 AM MINOR ALARM #0800 Conference trunk failure
FEB-11-90 6 : 59 PM MINOR ALARM #0B00 Device not connect for SMDR
FEB-12-90 6 : 59 PM MINOR ALARM #1270 LPR RAM failure
FEB-13-90 5 : 45 PM MINOR ALARM #1300 Card disconnect

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Fur further informations about Error Log, refer to

Section 14-D-1.01 “Error Log.”

14-G-2
3.00 Device Status screen
3.01 System Status Initial screen

Description
ROM version Software’s version
Date The date software was originated
For Place Destination
CPU RAM Current status of RAM area
Basic Shelf Current status of Basic Shelf
Expansion Shelf 1 Current status of Expansion Shelf 1
Expansion Shelf 2 Current status of Expansion Shelf 2
TSW Current status of TSW card
Additional CONF Current status of optional Conference card
SMDR Current status of SMDR device
Clock Mode Displayed only when T-1 or E-1 trunk card is installed.
“External” is displayed when the system synchronizes with the
external clock.
“Internal” is displayed when the system synchronizes with the
internal clock.
Refer to Section 10-C-64.02 "System Clock Mode (CLK)" for
further information.
Master Clock Card Displayed only when T1/E1 DIGITAL TRUNK card is installed.
“XXX” (physical card No. of the master card) is displayed when
the external clock mode is utilized.
“—” is displayed when the internal clock mode is utilized.
Refer to Section 10-C-64.03 "Master Clock Priority (CLP)" for
further information.

❇ In above screen, “—” indicates that the device is not installed.

14-G-3
(70695)
3.02 Card Status screen

Device Status (2/4) ONL MON

Card Status

Basic 01 PLC I Expansion 01 PLC F Expansion 01 LCOT O

Shelf 02 PLC I Shelf 1 02 PLC F Shelf 2 02 LCOT O
03 PLC I 03 PLC F 03 LCOT O
04 PLC I 04 PLC F 04 LCOT O
05 PLC I 05 PLC F 05 LCOT O
06 PLC I 06 PLC F 06 LCOT O
07 PLC I 07 PLC F 07 LCOT O
08 PLC I 08 PLC F 08 LCOT O
09 PLC I 09 PLC F 09 LCOT O
10 PLC I 10 PLC F 10 LCOT O
11 PLC I 11 PLC F 11 LCOT O
12 PLC I 12 LCOT F 12 LCOT O
13 LCOT F 13 ATLC O
B2 OHCA F 14 LCOT F 14 DPH O
15 LCOT F 15 RMT O

I: In Service, O: Out of Service, F: Fault

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
In the above screen, a blank indicates that a card is
not installed in the slot.

14-G-4
(70695)
3.03 Port Status screen

Device Status (3/4) ONL MON

Port Status

Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345

1 I O I I I - -- - -- - - -- - P
2 I O I I I - -- - -- - - -- - P
P 3 O O I I I - -- - -- - - -- - P
o 4 O I I I - -- - -- - - -- - P
r 5 I O B I - -- - -- - - -- - P
t 6 F O B I - -- - -- - - -- - P
7 I F I - -- - -- - - -- - P
8 I F I - -- - -- - - -- - 2
DTMF1 I O F I
Rec 2 F O I I

I: In Service, O: Out of Service, F: Fault, B: Busy Out

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
DTMF Rec Status of DTMF receivers
Two DTMF receivers are provided
on each SLC, HLC, OPX card
respectively

The system administrator can change the status of a

CO trunk port from “Busy Out” to “INS” by entering INS
command.

In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not

assigned to the system.

14-G-5
3.04 Conference Trunk Status screen

Device Status (4/4) ONL MON

Conference Trunk Status

Basic 1 OUS 3 5 7
2 OUS 4 6 8

1 INS 13 INS 25 37 49 61
2 INS 14 INS 26 38 50 62
3 INS 15 INS 27 39 51 63
4 INS 16 INS 28 40 52 64
5 INS 17 INS 29 41 53
Option 6 OUS 18 INS 30 42 54
7 FLT 19 INS 31 43 55
8 INS 20 INS 32 44 56
9 INS 21 INS 33 45 57
10 OUS 22 INS 34 46 58
11 INS 23 INS 35 47 59
12 INS 24 INS 36 48 60
INS ; In Service OUS ; Out of Service FLT ; Fault

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
This screen shows the current operating status of
both basic and optional conference trunks.

14-G-6
4.00 Traffic Submenu screen
Traffic - Submenu ONL MON LIN DIR

1. Station
2. Trunk Group
3. Attendant Console
4. DISA
5. OGM1
6. OGM2
7. AGC

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Description Programming
1. Station System Programming Reference
Displays traffic measurements of all extensions. VT Dumb
“System-Operation (2/3)” 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00
2. Trunk Group Start Time of Traffic Measure-
Displays traffic measurements of each trunk ment
group.

3. Attendant Console
Displays traffic measurements of each attendant
console.

4. DISA, OGM1, OGM2, AGC

Displays traffic measurements of each resource.
If tenant service is employed, traffic measure-
ments of each resource will be displayed by each
tenant individually.

14-G-7
4.01 Station Initial screen

Traffic Information - Station (1/2) ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991

Start Time---------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM

Incoming Calls ---- 498 637 590 120 803 760
Answer Calls ------ 360 503 476 88 711 662
Outgoing Calls ---- 405 602 555 103 763 731
Completed Calls-- 241 430 411 48 509 500
CCS ----------------- 723 811 780 230 998 889

Start Time---------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Incoming Calls ---- 632 721 611 598 420 311
Answer Calls ------ 531 603 482 449 289 192
Outgoing Calls ---- 600 654 600 531 301 191
Completed Calls-- 442 488 503 461 188 119
CCS ----------------- 800 830 762 750 680 620

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Start Time The system can be programmed
to display traffic measurements of
all extensions from up to 24 hours
before the current time. In above
screen, “9:00 AM” indicates the
traffic measurement from 9:00 AM
to 10:00 AM one day ago.
Incoming Calls The number of incoming calls.
(both extension and CO)
Answer Calls The number of answered calls.
(both extension and CO)
Outgoing Calls The number of outgoing calls
(both extension and CO) during
the pre-set time period.
Completed Calls The number of completed calls.
(both extension and CO)
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation. One hour of
telephone traffic is equal to 36
CCS.

14-G-8
4.02 Trunk Group Initial screen

Traffic Information - Trunk Group (1/2) ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991 Trunk Group No. = 01

Start Time---------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM

Incoming Calls ---- 406 511 430 110 763 653
Answer Calls ------ 232 362 291 65 580 572
Outgoing Calls ---- 362 419 381 98 601 599
Completed Calls-- 241 311 263 60 449 472
Busy Calls --------- 109 120 95 39 195 201
CCS ------------------ 700 801 755 215 932 831

Start Time---------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Incoming Call ----- 613 555 529 511 412 311
Answer Calls ------ 482 412 427 400 303 200
Outgoing Calls ---- 499 400 395 382 291 183
Completed Calls-- 362 282 312 300 162 99
Busy Calls --------- 139 99 112 95 68 35
CCS ------------------ 777 703 683 663 582 411

1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Busy Calls The number of outgoing calls
encountering a busy.

For a description of other items, refer to Section

14-G-4.01 “Station Initial screen.”

14-G-9
4.03 Attendant Console Initial screen

Traffic Information - Attendant Console (1/2) ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991 Attendant No. = 01

Start Time---------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM

Incoming Calls ---- 511 632 590 140 809 751
Answer Calls ------ 412 488 476 99 680 612
Outgoing Calls ---- 403 471 555 121 762 592
Completed Calls-- 291 403 411 83 611 464
Handle Calls ------ 300 381 299 69 491 391
CCS ----------------- 712 853 768 240 998 900

Start Time---------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Incoming Calls ---- 721 700 683 592 483 301
Answer Calls ------ 549 550 521 482 362 188
Outgoing Calls ---- 611 603 549 468 411 165
Completed Calls-- 455 423 401 352 348 100
Handle Calls ------ 311 301 281 311 298 83
CCS ----------------- 881 862 800 762 700 583

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Handled Calls The number of calls transferred
by the attendant console.

For a description of other items, refer to Section

14-G-4.01 “Station Initial screen.”

14-G-10
4.04 DISA screen

Traffic Information - DISA ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991 Tenant = 1

Start Time ------ 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls ------ 5 18 12 2 20 8
CCS-------------- 3 10 2 1 10 3

Start Time ------ 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls ------ 30 4 12 3 2 4
CCS-------------- 20 2 8 1 1 2

Start Time ------ 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls ------ 6 20 12 4 2 4
CCS-------------- 3 9 3 2 1 2

Start Time ------ 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls ------ 30 0 12 3 2 4
CCS-------------- 10 0 6 1 1 2

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 14-G-4.01 “Station
Initial screen.”
Busy Calls The number of DISA calls which
failed to access any DISA re-
sources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation.
One hour of telephone traffic is
equal to 36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, this
screen can be displayed by each
tenant individually.
By pressing the <PREV> or
<NEXT> key, you can enter into the
previous or next screen.

14-G-11
4.05 OGM1 screen

Traffic Information - OGM1 ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 5 20 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 1 8 2 1 2 4

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 5 12 8 2 4
CCS ---------------- 20 1 8 3 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 6 18 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 2 7 3 1 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 0 12 7 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 0 6 3 1 2

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 14-G-4.01 “Station
Initial screen.”
Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to
access any OGM1 resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation.
One hour of telephone traffic is
equal to 36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, this
screen can be displayed for each
tenant individually.
By pressing the <PREV> or
<NEXT> key, you can enter into the
previous or next screen.

14-G-12
4.06 OGM2 screen

Traffic Information - OGM2 ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 3 20 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 1 11 2 1 2 4

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 8 5 12 5 2 4
CCS ---------------- 2 2 8 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 7 13 12 4 2 4
CCS ---------------- 3 6 3 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 4 12 7 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 1 6 4 1 2

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 14-G-4.01 “Station
Initial screen.”
Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to
access any OGM2 resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal
to 36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, this
screen can be displayed for each
tenant individually.
By pressing the <PREV> or <NEXT>
key, you can enter into the previous
or next screen.

14-G-13
4.07 AGC screen

Traffic Information - AGC ONL MON

Feb. 22 1991 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 3 10 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 1 3 2 1 2 4

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 8 12 4 2 4
CCS ---------------- 20 2 8 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 9 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 3 3 1 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 8 12 8 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 3 6 3 1 2

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 14-G-4.01 “Station
Initial screen.”
Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to
access any AGC resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal
to 36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, this
screen can be displayed for each
tenant individually.
By pressing the <PREV> or <NEXT>
key, you can enter into the previous
or next screen.

14-G-14
H. Other Features

1.00 Power Failure Transfer

Assignment
Description
Provides up to 18 extension/CO cards pairs to
maintain a conversation when power is restored
or TSW recovery.
If this is not programmed then power restoration
or TSW recovery drops any existing conversa-
tions.
From the main menu screen, first select
“1. Programming,” and select “10. Miscellaneous”
then you can enter into the screen below by
selecting “2. Power Failure Transfer.”
To program this assignment, you must log in to
the system by entering the 2nd level or higher
password.

Conditions
In case of the KX-T96174X (SLC card), three
ports (ports 1 through 3) are available for Power
Failure Transfer Assignment.

14-H-1
(70695)(E)
Programming

Assignable Default How to

Item Description Parameters Parameters input
Assign LCOT or GCOT card No. to the
Trunk Shelf 1,2,3 or blank Blank D
system which are available for power
No. 1 failure transfer.
-18 Slot 01-15 or blank BlankBlank D

Assign HLC or SLC card No. to the D

Extension Shelf 1,2,3 or blank Blank
system which are available for power
failure transfer.
Slot 01-15 or blank Blank D

D: Enter appropriate parameters directly.

S: Select appropriate parameters from the factory-set options.

• Cursor is scrolled from left to right by pressing the return key.

• Assign extension card and trunk card for power failure transfer in pairs.
To assign only a trunk or an extension is not possible.

Refer to Section 9-L-2.00 “Power Failure Transfer Assignment” for further

information about programming.

Conditions
SLT telephones and some PITS telephones can
be used during power failure if power failure
transfer assignment had been done in advance.

The following PITS telephones can be used

during power failure.

KX-T123230, KX-T123230D,
KX-T123235, KX-T61630, KX-T30830

When you are using above listed PITS tele-

phones, set the POWER FAILURE switch to ON,
when power failure occurs.
If dialing cannot be done, set the DIALING MODE
selector to another position (PULSE or TONE).
When the power is restored, set the POWER
FAILURE switch to OFF.
If the power is restored during a conversation, set
the POWER FAILURE switch to OFF after
conversation is completed.

14-H-2
 Section 15

Maintenance
Dumb Type Terminal
 (Section 15)

Maintenance
Dumb Type Terminal
Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 15-A-1

B System Administration..................................................................................... 15-B-1

1.00 On-site Administration ........................................................................... 15-B-1
1.01 Logging in to the System............................................................. 15-B-1
1.02 Dumb Operation Mode................................................................ 15-B-1
2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location.................................... 15-B-2

C Device Status................................................................................................... 15-C-1

1.00 Service Commands and Their Functions............................................... 15-C-1
1.01 INS (In Service) command .......................................................... 15-C-1
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) command.................................................. 15-C-2

D Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)............................................................. 15-D-1

1.00 Error Record Display............................................................................. 15-D-1
1.01 Start Time of Self-Test................................................................. 15-D-1
1.02 Error Log...................................................................................... 15-D-1
1.03 Printing Out the Automatic Failure Reporting.............................. 15-D-1
1.04 Local Alarm.................................................................................. 15-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm.............................................................................. 15-D-3

E Functional Test by Entering Commands.......................................................... 15-E-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 15-E-1
2.00 Functions to be Verified......................................................................... 15-E-2
2.01 Card Test..................................................................................... 15-E-2
2.02 Port Test ...................................................................................... 15-E-3
2.03 PITS and ATT Test ...................................................................... 15-E-4
3.00 TST command (Test)............................................................................. 15-E-5
3.01 Loopback Test (LBT) – for T-1/E-1............................................... 15-E-5-1
3.02 DTMF-G/R Diagnosis (DTM) – for T-1/E-1.................................. 15-E-5-2
3.03 DSP Diagnosis (DSP) – for E-1................................................... 15-E-5-3
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
4.00 Card Test Results Display...................................................................... 15-E-6
5.00 Port Test Results Display....................................................................... 15-E-7
6.00 PITS and ATT Test Results Display....................................................... 15-E-8

15-1
(70695)
 Page
F Monitor............................................................................................................. 15-F-1
1.00 SYM command (System Maintenance Monitor).................................... 15-F-1
1.01 System Status screen.................................................................. 15-F-2
1.02 Card Status screen...................................................................... 15-F-3
1.03 Port Status screen....................................................................... 15-F-4
1.04 Conference Trunk Status screen................................................. 15-F-5
2.00 TFD command (Traffic Display)............................................................. 15-F-6
2.01 Station screen.............................................................................. 15-F-7
2.02 Trunk Group screen..................................................................... 15-F-8
2.03 Attendant Console screen........................................................... 15-F-9
2.04 DISA screen ................................................................................ 15-F-10
2.05 OGM 1 screen............................................................................. 15-F-11
2.06 OGM 2 screen............................................................................. 15-F-12
2.07 AGC screen................................................................................. 15-F-13

G Other Features................................................................................................. 15-G-1

1.00 PFT command (Power Failure Transfer)............................................... 15-G-1
2.00 VUP command (Version-up).................................................................. 15-G-3

15-2
(70695)
A. Introduction
This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the
system using a Dumb terminal.
The modular self-testing capabilities of the
system allow most maintenance to be reduced to
simple procedures.
You can administer the system programming and
perform maintenance using VT220(100),
Compatibles, Dumb terminal and Attendant
Console.
Only one terminal can be performing system
administration at any one time.
Changing the System Administration Device is
done in programming.
To execute the change, the user must exit
system administration mode and then reenter
system administration mode.

(Note)
The following subsections are defined in Section
14.

C. Device Status
2.00 Definition of Operating Status
2.01 Shelf, Slot, Resource
2.02 Port
2.03 Interactions among Devices
2.04 Changes of the Shelf Status
2.05 Changes of the Slot Status

D. Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)

2.00 Clearing System-Detected Troubles
2.01 Consulting the Error Log

E. Troubleshooting Guide

15-A-1
B. System Administration

1.00 On-site Administration

1.01 Logging in to the System

Description * Alphanumeric characters

You can administer the system programming and
maintenance of the system using a dumb
terminal.
For details about communication parameters,
refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface.”
System Security
For security reasons, access to the
administration capabilities of the system is
controlled by a password.
To prevent an unauthorized person from learning
the password, the password characters are not
displayed when they are entered.
Password
To gain access to the system administration
feature, a valid password (4-digit, Alphanumeric
characters *) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, password must
be entered exactly as stored in memory.
Factory programmed 8 passwords are provided
from the 1st to 4th level for on-site operation and
1st to 4th level for operation from a remote
location individually.
When you enter the correct password, the
terminal displays the Dumb Initial Screen from
which you can enter into programming mode or
operation mode.
ASCII codes except special codes (DEL, ESC
etc.)
But entering “/” “~” are not available, because
these characters cannot be displayed on the
display of PITS.
Both uppercase and lowercase characters
can be recognized by the system.
1.02 Dumb Operation Mode
When you log in to the system administration
terminal, “Select the Mode” screen appears on
the display.
At initial prompt in this screen, you can enter into
programming mode by entering PRG, and
operation mode by entering OPE.
In programming mode, assigning and changing
the system programming parameters can be
done. In operation mode, monitoring, testing and
maintaining the system can be done.
Refer to Section 8 “Preparation for Programming
and Maintenance (Dumb Type Terminal)” for
further details about Dumb operation mode.

The followings are the functions available to each

password level.
1st Level Access to all levels
2nd Level Set System level parameters
3rd Level Set Port level parameters
4th Level Read parameters only.
When you log in to the system using the 1st level
password, you can execute all functions, but are
increasingly restricted when entering level 2, 3
and 4.
Passwords are originally factory programmed,
but may be changed when logging in to the
system by entering the 1st level password.
Refer to Section 8-F-1.00 “Change Level (CHL)”
for changing password level.

15-B-1
2.00 System Administration
from a Remote Location
Description
From a remote location, you can perform system
programming, diagnosis and traffic
measurements using a Dumb terminal.
For details about communication parameters,
refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface.”
Conditions
• RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
system and assign the telephone number of
modem to “Remote Directory Number” (FDN:
3-4 digits) in system programming for
accessing the remote administration feature.
Refer to Section 10-C-4.00 “Operation (OPR)”
for programming.
• For remote access, a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
• Factory programmed 4 types of passwords
from 1st to 4th level for remote administration
are provided.
Passwords are originally factory programmed,
but may be changed at any time. (Refer to
Section 8-F-1.00 “Change Level (CHL),” for
changing password level.)
• You can execute the remote system
administration during on-line communication
mode only.
But when you load the system programming
data from a remote location, the system enters
to off-line communication mode automatically.
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading
Procedure” for details.
• Starting up system administration from a
remote location can be done only in Dumb
mode operation.
15-B-2
Operation
Starting up the system administration from a
remote location can be done in the following ways.
• Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
For further information about “Remote Directory
Number,” refer to Section 10-C-4.00 “Operation
(OPR).”
And for further information about DISA feature,
refer to 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System Access
(DISA).”
• Program DID feature so that the incoming
telephone number is converted to the “Remote
Directory Number.”
For further information about DID feature, refer to
Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing (DID).”
• Assign that a call from a remote location can
access the Remote Administration feature
automatically using DIL (1:1) feature.
For further information about DIL (1:1) feature,
refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In Line (DIL).”
• Remote access with assistance of the operator
The call from a remote location can be made on
any trunk into the system, and be answered by
the operator.
The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
Directory Number of the system dialed is
received.
The operator transfers the call after receiving the
modem answer tone.
The caller at a remote location will then hear the
modem answer tone and can be proceed with
sign-on.
Refer to Section 4-F-1.05 “Unscreened Call
Transfer to Remote” for further information.
When the system administrator at a remote
location accesses the system remote
administration feature, the following message
appears on the display of operator's telephone if
display is provided.
1234:RMT Access
After you log in to the system from a remote
location, you can operate the system in the same
way as if you were on-site.
Only one system administration terminal can
access the system at a time.
C. Device Status

1.00 Service Commands and

Their Functions
1.01 INS (In Service) command

Description
At the operation prompt (OPE>), enter INS When you change the status of an upper device
command to change the status of the target (shelf, card), the status of lower devices (port,
device (shelf, card, station etc.) to “In Service” in station) change as follows.
on-line communication mode.
Upper device OUS INS
Command Format Lower device OUS INS
Fault Fault
OPE>INS + Item No.
Upper device Fault INS
(Item)
Lower device Fault INS
Device Input Value OUS OUS
Normal operation
Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number) When this operation is executed without failure,
initial “OPE>” prompt appears again on the
Card 101 to 315 (physical number)
screen.
Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number)
Operation failed
Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number; The error message appears on the screen in the
three or four digits) or Physical following cases.
number: four digits
• Parameter error
ATT A1 or A2 or
• Not installed
Physical number: four digits
• Status error
DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: 1 or 2) • INS failure (Diagnosis error)

CNF CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08,

yy: 01 to 64)

Refer to Section 15-E-3.00 “TST Command

(Test)” for details about test command.

Conditions
The status of specified devices (shelf, card,
station) should be in “OUS” or “FAULT,” and
system must be in on-line mode.
When you change the status of a lower device
(port, station) to “INS,” the upper device (shelf,
card) should be in “INS” status.
If you try to change the lower device status to
“INS” while upper device is in “OUS” status, the
error message “Invalid Status” appears on the
screen.

15-C-1
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) command

Description
At the operation prompt (OPE>), enter the OUS Operation failed
command to change the status of the target An error message appears on the screen in the
device (shelf, card, station etc.) to “Out of following cases.
Service” in on-line mode.
• Parameter error
Command Format • Not installed
OPE> OUS + Item No. • Status error

(Item) If the system administration terminal is an

Attendant Console (ATT), do not change the
Device Input Value status of the following devices from “INS” to
“OUS.”
Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number)
• Shelf in which ATLC card is installed
Card 101 to 315 (physical number)
• ATLC card
Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number) • Attendant console assigned as the
Maintenance Terminal
Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number;
three or four digits) or Physical During remote operation, do not change the
number: four digits status of the following devices from “INS” to
“OUS.”
ATT A1 or A2 or
Physical number: four digits • Shelf in which RMT card is installed
DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: 1 or 2) • RMT card (Modem)

CNF CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08,

yy: 01 to 64)

Refer to Section 15-E-3.00 “TST command

(Test)” for details about the test command.

Conditions
The status of target devices (shelf, card, station)
should be “INS,” and the system must be in on-
line communication mode.

When you change the status of an upper device

(shelf, card), the status of lower devices (port,
station) change as follows.

Upper device INS OUS

Lower device INS OUS
Fault Fault

Normal operation
When this operation is executed without failure,
“OPE>” initial prompt appears again on the
screen.

15-C-2
D. Self-Test (System-
Detected Troubles)

1.00 Error Record Display

1.01 Start Time of Self-Test

Built-in diagnostic test program of the system The error log is accessible by entering the
monitors the troubles generated by hardware or following command.
software. To perform the self-test, assign the
desired start time of self-test in “System- Command Format
Operation” Start Time of Test. OPE>ERR + Index + (Item)
Be careful not to access the system during this
test. (Index)
Refer to Section 10-C-4.00 “Operation (OPR)” for 0 : Clears all error messages in the Error Log
programming. (1/2) (2/2)
1 : Displays error messages in the Error Log
1.02 Error Log (1/2)
(Major and Minor Alarm)
When a system maintenance object begins to fail 2 : Displays error messages in the Error Log
periodic testing, the system automatically (2/2)
generates an error record. (Refer to Section 14- (Light Alarm)
G-2.00 “Error Log screen.”)
Depending on the severity, the record is stored in (Item)
one of two tables in the Error Log. 1 : Read only
2 : Displaying and clearing error log records
The two tables are:
The error log is comprised of the following two
Error Log (1/2) (Major and Minor Alarm) error tables.
Up to 15 major or minor error records are stored
in this error log.The error tables are organized by Error Log (1/2) (Major and Minor Alarm)
time of occurrence.The newest error record Error Log (2/2) (Light Alarm)
appears on the top of the screen.
If more than 15 errors have occurred in that time, Refer to Section 14-G-2.00 “Error Log Screen.”
error records already stored in the error log will
be overwritten, starting with the first. 1.03 Printing out the Automatic
Failure Reporting
Error Log (2/2) (Light Alarm)
Up to 15 light error records can be stored in this
The error log records can be printed out.
error log.
First connect the printer to the SIO #2 port on the
Other conditions are the same as error log (1/2)
Main Unit using RS-232C cable, then set
“System Operation” Print Error Log to “Y.”
Each error log screen (1/2)(2/2) exists
Refer to Section 10-4.00 “Operation (OPR) for
independently.
Programming.”

Command Format
PRG>OPR AT 2

15-D-1
1.04 Local Alarm

Description
When the system detects a problem during on-
line communication mode, an alarm message will
be displayed on the screen of the Attendant
Console or on the display of a PITS (if provided)
whose owner is assigned as operator 1 by
pressing the ALARM key.
7. The alarm message on the display of PITS (if
provided) disappears when placing a call from
that telephone; when an incoming call arrives
at that telephone; or if a held call reminder
occurs with it. And the alarm message
appears again when PITS goes to idle.

Programming
ALARM key (button) assignment
(Attendant Console)
ALARM key (Fixed feature key)
(PITS)
System Programming
“Extension-Station (2/3),”
DN key Type
“Extension-Station (3/3),”
DSS key Type
Operation
To display an alarm message, press the ALARM
key (button) while ALARM LED is flashing or lit
steadily.
If local alarm occured during a conversation,
press the ALARM key (button) after replacing the
handset then the alarm message will be
Reference displayed.
VT Dumb
• An example of the alarm display
9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
(Attendant Console)
9-G-1.03 10-C-26.00
JAN-25-91 6:31 AM MAJOR•ALARM #0410
Basic Shelf power down

Condition
1. If the system detects a trouble, the ALARM
LED on the Attendant Console or PITS
(Operator 1) flashes in red (Major Alarm) or is
lit steadily in red (Minor Alarm).
2. Local alarm is not shown on the SLT.
3. If the ALARM button is not assigned to a
PITS, the local alarm doesn’t show.
(PITS)
ERR 0410 POW DWN
To clear the displayed alarm message, press the
ALARM key (button) when the alarm message is
displayed. ALARM LED will be turned off and the
alarm display on the display of PITS (if provided)
or CRT screen of the Attendant Console
disappears.

4. The local alarm occurs only with operator 1 of

each tenant.

5. On a PITS without the display, only the

ALARM LED lights when the system detects
an error.
To clear it press the ALARM button twice.

6. When a number of troubles occur at the same

time, only the most serious trouble appears
on the screen of Attendant Console or display
of PITS (if provided).

15-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm

Description
When the system detects a problem during on-
line communication, an error message appears
on the screen of the remote maintenance device.
For remote access, RMT card must be installed
in the system, and a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
Remote Configuration
Conditions
Setting “Remote Alarm” to “Y” is not available if
the RMT card is not installed.
All system-detected error messages are
displayed in the error log, but for “Local Alarm,”
and “Remote Alarm”, some error messages are
displayed and some are not.
Refer to Section 14-D-2.03 “Background
Diagnostic Error List.”

Main Unit Data Terminal Command Format

PRG>OPR AT2

Modem
Central
Office

Programming
To execute this feature, set “Remote Alarm” to
“Y” and register the telephone (Modem) number
of the remote administration device in
“Destination Address.”

Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (2/3),” 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00

Remote Alarm,
Destination Address

15-D-3
E. Functional Test by
Entering Commands

1.00 Introduction
1. You can execute diagnostic test during on-line
communication mode by entering test
commands at the maintenance terminal.
2. Execute this functional test in the following
cases.
• When new devices are installed
• When the device combination is changed
• When the system detects an alarm or an
error message appears in the error log
• When device status becomes “Fault”
• When a number of telephone instruments
don't function properly
3. There are following three types of Tests as
follows.
6. When you perform a device (shelf card, port,
resource) test, the status of the device to be
tested must be changed to “Out of service” by
entering the OUS command in advance.
If an attempt is mate to test a device in “INS”
status, the following message appears on the
screen. “Invalid Status”
7. You can test a device in “Fault” status.
8. If the device test results in failure, first change
the status of the device to “Fault” and replace
it with a normal one if necessary.
9. It is impossible to execute functional test
during off-line communication mode.

(a)Card Test
If a number of telephone instruments do
not function well, you can detect whether
troubles are caused by the card or the
telephone instruments by this test.
(b)Port Test
(c) PITS and ATT (Attendant Console) Test

* Test (b), (c) are executed to detect troubles

when telephone instruments don't function
well when card status is good.

4. This functional test must be done during on-

line communication mode both at on-site and
from a remote location. For remote access, a
data terminal and modem are required at a
remote location, and you must install RMT
card in the system and assign Remote
Directory Number to the system in system
programming operation “Remote Directory
Number.”
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration from a Remote Location” for
details.

5. Functional test can be done only when you

log in to the system by entering the 1st level
password.

15-E-1
2.00 Functions to be Verified
2.01 Card Test

This test verifies the status of each card for the

items listed below.

Card to
Item Remarks
be tested

SLC Link Card to be tested

PLC Card type should be “OUS”
HLC ROM or “FAULT.”
LCOT RAM
GCOT
DID
ATLC
AGC

OPX Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Power Supply

DISA Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
OGM Rec/Play

RMT Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Modem

DPH Card Type

15-E-2
2.02 Port Test

This test verifies the status of the following functions for each port of the indicated
cards.

1. By entering physical port number (Except paired extension port and CO port)

Card Functions Remarks

PLC OHCA Detect Port to be tested should

HLC be “OUS” or “FAULT”

ATLC HDLC

DISA Speech Path

DTMF Receiver
Tone Detector

AGC Speech Path

Repeater
Tone Detector

2. By entering the physical port number of extension port and CO port in pairs.

LCOT Speech Path 2 ports to be tested should

Loop Current be “OUS” or “FAULT.”
Bell Detect SLC, HLC, OPX and DTMF
DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator) receiver to be tested should
Pulse Dial be “OUS” or “FAULT.”

GCOT Speech Path

DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator)
Pulse Dial

SLC Speech Path

HLC Bell
OPX DTMF Detector (DTMF Receiver)
Pulse Detect

(Note)
• If you want to verify the status of the DTMF
receiver (1 or 2), change it's status to “Out of
Service” by entering OUS command and verify
the status of a card which contains DTMF
receivers.
SLC, HLC and OPX card contains two DTMF
receivers respectively.
For further information about OUS command,
refer to Section 15-C-1.02 “OUS command.”
• When you test the SLC, HLC, OPX, LCOT and
GCOT cards, change the status of both exten-
sion port and CO trunk port to OUS.
• If trouble results from the card (not port), the
following message appears on the screen.
“Card Fault”

• This port test is available only for ports on the

following cards.
LCOT, GCOT, SLC, PLC, HLC, DISA, AGC,
OPX and ATLC cards.

15-E-3
(70695)
2.03 PITS and ATT Test

To verify the status of PITS or ATT the following functions are tested.

Card to be tested Function Remarks

PLC Link (All types of PITS) Card to be tested should be

HLC DTMF generator (KX-T123230D, “OUS”or “Fault.”
KX-T123235 and KX-T7130)

ATLC Link
DTMF generator
ROM
RAM

15-E-4
(70695)
3.00 TST command (Test)

Before executing the device test, change the (Refer to Section 15-C-1.00 “Service Commands
status of the target device to “Out of Service” by and Their Functions.” for details about OUS and
entering OUS command. INS commands)

Command Format
OPE>TST + Index + Item1 + (& Item 2)

Test Index Item 1 Item 2

Card Test 1 Physical No. (xyy)

PITS Physical No. (xyyz) or

DN (DN dddd)
P
O ATT Physical No. (xyyz) or
R ATT No. (Aa)
T
(Extension) Physical No. (xyyz) or (CO line) Physical No. (xyyz)
T Extension & CO line DN (DN dddd)
E SLC, HLC, OPX, 2
S LCOT, GCOT (CO line) Physical No. (xyyz) (Extension) Physical No. (xyyz) or
T DN (DN dddd)

Basic Conference Trunk CFB tt (01 ~ 08)

Optional Conference Trunk CFO tt (01 ~ 64)

DISA/AGC Physical No. (xyyz)

P PITS Physical No. (xyyz) or

I
T DN (DN dddd)
S 3
&
ATT Physical No. (xyyz) or
A
T ATT No, (Ax)
T

Description
x : Shelf No. (1: Basic 2: Expansion 1
3: Expansion 2)
yy : Slot No. (01~15, or **)
zz : Port No. (1~8, or *)
a : Attendant console No. (1~2, or *)
dddd : Directory No. (3~4 digits)
tt : Basic Conference Trunk No. (01~08)
tt : Optional Conference Trunk No. (01~64)
“*” can be used as a wild card character and
substitutes any number from 0 to 9.
(Example)
1** ------- All cards installed in the Basic shelf
105* ----- All ports assigned to the card No.5 in
the Basic shelf
2*** ------ All ports in the Expansion shelf 1

15-E-5
(70695)
3.01 Loopback Test (LBT) - for T-1/E-1
Description
Used to verify the validity of the T-1/E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK cards and line connections.
Before performing Loopback Test, set the card status to “OUS”.

Command Format
(1) OPE>LBT + Item1 + Item2
(2) OPE>LBT + Item1 + Item2 + Item3

Command Item1 Item2 Item3

Format

101,105,109,201,205,
(1) 1 or 2 209,301,305,309 None
(Card No.)*3
1: Internal
Loopback*1
G xxxyy R xxxyy
(2) 2: External (DTMF Generator No.) (DTMF Receiver No.)
Loopback*2 xxx : Card No. xxx: Card No.
yy : 01 to 06 (T-1) yy : 01 to 24 (T-1)
01 to 02 (E-1) 01 to 08 (E-1)

*1.Loopback test is done automatically inside the T-1/E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK card.
*2.Loopback test is done between the T-1/E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK card and the external equipment (CSU,
DSU). In this case, loopback mode should be set at the external terminal beforehand.
*3.When a card No. is specified, DTMF Generator No.1 and DTMF Receiver No.1 of that card are used for
the test.

Results Display

Error Indication Description

OK Normal

Voice error Speech path failure

Signal error Control signal path failure

15-E-5-1
(70695)
3.02 DTMF-G/R Diagnosis (DTM) - for T-1/E-1
Description
Used to check the validity of DTMF Generators and Receivers on the T1/E1 DIGITAL TRUNK cards.
Before executing the test, set the status of the card to “OUS”.

Command Format
(1) OPE>DTM + Item1 + Item2

Operation Item1 Item2

G/R Status STS 101,105,109,201,205,209,301,305,309

display (Card No.)

G/R OUS OUS G xxxyy (Generator No.)

or
G/R INS INS R xxxyy (Receiver No.)

xxx: Card No.

yy : Generator No.
(01 to 06 – T-1)
(01 to 02 – E-1)
or
Receiver No.
(01 to 24 – T-1)
(01 to 08 – E-1)

G-R Test TST 101,105,109,201,205,209,301,305,309

(Card No.)

Result Display

G/R status display G/R test results display

; OPE>DTM STS 101 ; OPE>DTM TST 101

; DTMF-G 01 02 03 04 05 06 ; DTMF-G 01 02 03 04 05 06
; | 0 - - - - ; OK NG - - - -
; DTMF-R 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 ; DTMF-R 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
; | 0 | | | 0 | 0 ; OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG
; DTMF-R 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ; DTMF-R 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
; - - - - - - - - ; - - - - - - - -
; DTMF-R 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ; DTMF-R 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
; - - - - - - - - ; - - - - - - - -

Indication Description Indication Description

I INS (In Service) OK Normal
O OUS (Out of Service) NG Failure
— Not installed — Not installed

15-E-5-2
(70695)
3.03 DSP Diagnosis (DSP) - for E-1
Description
Used to check the validity of DSP on the E1 DIGITAL TRUNK card.

Command Format
OPE>DSP + Item1 + Item2

Operation Item1 Item2

xxxy (xxx: Card No., y: DTMF-G No.= 1 or 2)

DSP Test TST When “xxx” is entered, diagnosis pattern 1 is executed. *1

When “xxxy” is entered, diagnosis pattern 2 is executed. *2

DSP INS INS xxxy (xxx: Card No., y: DSP No.= 1 or 2)

DSP OUS OUS

DSP Status STS xxx: Card No.

*1.DSP test is done using signals generated by DSP on the E1 DIGITAL TRUNK card.
*2.DSP test is done using signals generated by DTMF-G on the E1 DIGITAL TRUNK card.

Results Display
1.Test
Diagnosis Pattern 1 Diagnosis Pattern 2

;OPE>DSP TST 101 ;OPE>DSP TST 1011

; DSP-1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 ; DSP-1 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
; OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG ; OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG
; DSP-2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 ; DSP-2 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
; OK OK NG OK OK OK OK OK ; OK OK NG OK OK OK OK OK
;OPE> ;OPE>

Note:
01 through 08: Channel No. of DSP

2.INS/OUS

;OPE>DSP INS 1011

; OK
;OPE>

3.Status check

;OPE>DSP STS 101

; DSP-1 INS
; DSP-2 OUS
;OPE>

15-E-5-3
(70695)
4.00 Card Test Results Display
Card Test Results Display

;OPE>TST 1 101<CR>
; 101 ****** PASS
;OPE>TST 1 ***<CR>
; 101 ****** PASS
; 102 ****** PASS
; 103 ****** NO CARD
; 104 ****** LINK
; 105 ****** TYPE
; |
; |
; |
;
; 214 ****** POWER
; 215 ****** TEST ABORT (TSW FAIL)
;OPE>
;

Description

Card Test Message List

Error Indication Description

PASS Card status is good

NO CARD A card is not installed in the specified slot.

TYPE Assigned card type doesn't correspond to the installed

card type

LINK Card link error

ROM Card ROM error

RAM Card RAM error

MODEM RMT card failure (Modem failure)

OPX POW OPX power down

BEL POW OPX power down (Bell)

REC/PLY OGM Recording/Playing back failure

TSW TSW card PB generator/PB receiver failure

15-E-6
15-E-9
(70695)
5.00 Port Test Results Display

;OPE>TST 2 1011<CR>
; 1011 ****** PASS
;OPE>TST 2 2013<CR>
; 2013 ****** NO CARD
;OPE>TST 2 1011&1021<CR>
; 1011 ****** PASS
; 1021 ****** FAULT05
;OPE>
;

Port Test Error Code List

Code Port Pair

Description
test test
FAULT01 Loop current failure

FAULT02 Bell detection failure

FAULT03 PB Generator failure

FAULT04 Dial pulse failure

FAULT05 PB Receiver 1 failure

FAULT06 PB Receiver 2 failure

FAULT07 Tone detection circuit 1 failure

FAULT08 Tone detection circuit 2 failure

FAULT09 HDLC failure

FAULT0A OHCA card is not installed

FAULT0B Pulse detection failure

FAULT0C Speech path failure

FAULT0D
Legend:
FAULT0E
applied
FAULT0F not applied

15-E-10
15-E-7
(70695)
6.00 PITS and ATT Test Results
Display
Description

;OPE>TST 3 A1<CR>
; A1 ****** FAULT02
;OPE>TST 3 DN1012<CR>
; DN1012****** PASS
;OPE>TST 3 2121<CR>
; 2121 ****** FAULT01
;OPE>TST 2 1011&1021<CR>
; 1011 ****** PASS
; 1021 ****** FAULT01
;OPE>
;

PITS and ATT Test Error Code List

Code Description

FAULT01 PITS Link failure, ATT Link failure

FAULT02 PITS PB Generator failure, ATT PB Generator failure

FAULT03

FAULT09

FAULT0A

FAULT0B

FAULT0C Speech Path failure

FAULT0D

FAULT0E

FAULT0F

* If trouble results from card, an error message

“Card Fault” appears on the screen.

15-E-11
15-E-8
(70695)
F. Monitor
1.00 SYM command (System
Maintenance Monitor)
Current operating status of the following items
can be displayed on the screen by entering SYM
command.

Command Format
OPE>SYM + Index

(Index)
1 : System Status
2 : Card Status
3 : Port Status
4 : Conference Trunk Status

15-F-1
1.01 System Status screen

Command Format
OPE>SYM 1

Description
ROM version Software’s version
Date The date software was originated
For Place Destination
CPU RAM Current status of RAM area
Basic Shelf Current status of Basic Shelf
Expansion Shelf 1 Current status of Expansion Shelf 1
Expansion Shelf 2 Current status of Expansion Shelf 2
TSW Current status of TSW card
Additional CONF Current status of optional Conference card
SMDR Current status of SMDR device
Clock Mode Displayed only when T-1 or E-1 trunk card is installed.
“External” is displayed when the system synchronizes with the
external clock.
“Internal” is displayed when the system synchronizes with the
internal clock.
Refer to Section 10-C-64.02 "System Clock Mode (CLK)" for
further information.
Master Clock Card Displayed only when T1/E1 DIGITAL TRUNK card is installed.
“XXX” (physical card No. of the master card) is displayed when
the external clock mode is utilized.
“—” is displayed when the internal clock mode is utilized.
Refer to Section 10-C-64.03 "Master Clock Priority (CLP)" for
further information.

❇ In above screen, “—” indicates that the device is not installed.

15-F-2
(70695)
1.02 Card Status screen

Command Format
OPE>SYM 2

Device Status (2/4) ONL MON

Card Status

Basic 01 PLC I Expansion 01 PLC F Expansion 01 LCOT O

Shelf 02 PLC I Shelf 1 02 PLC F Shelf 2 02 LCOT O
03 PLC I 03 PLC F 03 LCOT O
04 PLC I 04 PLC F 04 LCOT O
05 PLC I 05 PLC F 05 LCOT O
06 PLC I 06 PLC F 06 LCOT O
07 PLC I 07 PLC F 07 LCOT O
08 PLC I 08 PLC F 08 LCOT O
09 PLC I 09 PLC F 09 LCOT O
10 PLC I 10 PLC F 10 LCOT O
11 PLC I 11 PLC F 11 LCOT O
12 PLC I 12 LCOT F 12 LCOT O
13 LCOT F 13 ATLC O
B2 OHCA F 14 LCOT F 14 DPH O
15 LCOT F 15 RMT O

I: In Service, O: Out of Service, F: Fault

Description
In the above screen, a blank indicates that a card
is not installed in the slot.

15-F-3
(70695)
1.03 Port Status screen

Command Format
OPE>SYM 3

Device Status (3/4) ONL MON

Port Status

Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345

1 I O I I I
2 I O I I I
P 3 O O I I I
o 4 O I I I
r 5 I O B I
t 6 F O B I
7 I F I
8 I F I

DTMF1 I O F I
Rec 2 F O I I
I: In Service, O: Out of Service, F: Fault, B: Busy Out

Description
DTMF Rec Status of DTMF receiver
Two DTMF receivers are provided on the
SLC, HLC and OPX cards.

The system administrator can change the status of a CO

port from “Busy Out” to “INS” by entering INS command.

In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not

assigned to the system.

15-F-4
1.04 Conference Trunk Status screen

Command Format
OPE>SYM 4

Device Status (1/4)

Conference Trunk Status

Basic 1 OUS 3 5 7
2 OUS 4 6 8

1 INS 13 INS 25 37 49 61
2 INS 14 INS 26 38 50 62
3 INS 15 INS 27 39 51 63
4 INS 16 INS 28 40 52 64
5 INS 17 INS 29 41 53
Option 6 OUS 18 INS 30 42 54
7 FLT 19 INS 31 43 55
8 INS 20 INS 32 44 56
9 INS 21 INS 33 45 57
10 OUS 22 INS 34 46 58
11 INS 23 INS 35 47 59
12 INS 24 INS 36 48 60
INS ; In Service OUS ; Out of Service FLT ; Fault

Description
This screen shows the current operating status of
both basic and optional conference trunks.

15-F-5
2.00 TFD command (Traffic Display)

Displays traffic measurement for extensions, trunk

groups, attendant consoles and resources.

Command Format

OPE>TFD + Index + Item1 + (Item2)

Index Item1 Item 2

Station 1 The first half = 1

The second half = 2

Trunk Group 2 Trunk Group No. The first half = 1

(01~16) The second half = 2

ATT 3 ATT No. The first half = 1

(1 or 2) The second half = 2

DISA 4
OGM1 5 The first half = 1 (Tenant 1)
OGM2 6 The second half = 2 (Tenant 2)
AGC 7

Description Programming
1. Station Set desired start time in “System-Operation” Start
Displays traffic measurements of all extensions. Time of Traffic Measurement.
Refer to Section 10-C-4.00 “Operation (OPR)” for
2. Trunk Group programming.
Displays traffic measurements of each trunk
group.

3. Attendant Console
Displays traffic measurements of each attendant
console.

4. DISA, OGM1, OGM2, AGC

Displays traffic measurements of each resource.
If tenant service is assigned to the system,
traffic measurements of each resource will be
displayed by each tenant individually.

15-F-6
2.01 Station screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 1 (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - Station

Feb. 22 1990

Start Time----------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM

Incoming Calls ---- 498 637 590 120 803 760
Answer Calls ------ 360 503 476 88 711 662
Outgoing Calls ---- 405 602 555 103 763 731
Completed Calls-- 241 430 411 48 509 500
CCS ------------------ 723 811 780 230 998 889

Start Time----------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Incoming Calls ---- 632 721 611 598 420 311
Answer Calls ------ 531 603 482 449 289 192
Outgoing Calls ---- 600 654 600 531 301 191
Completed Calls-- 442 488 503 461 188 119
CCS ------------------ 800 830 762 750 680 620

Description
Start Time The system can be programmed to display traffic
measurements of the extensions from up to 24
hours before the current time. In above example,
“9:00 AM” indicates the traffic measurement from
9:00 AM to 10:00 AM one day ago.
Incoming Calls The number of incoming calls (both extension
and CO).
Answer Calls The number of answered calls (both extension
and CO).
Outgoing Calls The number of outgoing calls (both extension and
CO).
Completed Calls The number of completed calls (both extension
and CO).
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one hundred
seconds of telephone conversation. One hour of
telephone traffic is equal to 36 CCS.

15-F-7
2.02 Trunk Group screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 2 (01 ~ 16) (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - Trunk Group (1/2)

Feb. 22 1990 Trunk Group No. = 01

Start Time----------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM

Incoming Calls ---- 406 511 430 110 763 653
Answer Calls ------ 232 362 291 65 580 572
Outgoing Calls ---- 362 419 381 98 601 599
Completed Calls-- 241 311 263 60 449 472
Busy Calls ---------- 109 120 95 39 195 201
CCS ------------------ 700 801 755 215 932 831

Start Time----------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Incoming Call ----- 613 555 529 511 412 311
Answer Calls ------ 482 412 427 400 303 200
Outgoing Calls ---- 499 400 395 382 291 183
Completed Calls-- 362 282 312 300 162 99
Busy Calls ---------- 139 99 112 95 68 35
CCS ------------------ 777 703 683 663 582 411

Description
Busy Calls The number of outgoing calls
which encountered a busy
line.

For a description of other items, refer to Section

15-F-2.01 “Station screen.”

15-F-8
2.03 Attendant Console screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 3 (1 ~ 2) (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - Attendant Console (1/2)

Feb. 22 1990 Attendant No. = 01

Start Time---------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00AM 2:00AM

Incoming Calls ---- 511 632 590 140 809 751
Answer Calls ------ 412 488 476 99 680 612
Outgoing Calls ---- 403 471 555 121 762 592
Completed Calls-- 291 403 411 83 611 464
Handle Calls------- 300 381 299 69 491 391
CCS ------------------ 712 853 768 240 998 900

Start Time---------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Incoming Calls ---- 721 700 683 592 483 301
Answer Calls ------ 549 550 521 482 362 188
Outgoing Calls ---- 611 603 549 468 411 165
Completed Calls-- 455 423 401 352 348 100
Handle Calls------- 311 301 281 311 298 83
CCS ------------------ 881 862 800 762 700 583

Description
Handled Call The number of calls transferred
by the attendant console.

For a description of other items, refer to Section

15-F-2.01 “Station screen.”

15-F-9
2.04 DISA screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 4 (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - DISA

Feb. 22 1990 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 5 18 12 2 20 8
CCS ---------------- 3 10 2 1 10 3

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 4 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 20 2 8 1 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 6 20 12 4 2 4
CCS ---------------- 3 9 3 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 0 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 0 6 1 1 2

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 15-F-2.01 “Station
screen.”
Busy Calls The number of DISA calls which failed
to access any DISA resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone conver-
sation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal to
36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, DISA
screen for each tenant is displayed
individually.

15-F-10
2.05 OGM1 screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 5 (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - OGM1

Feb. 22 1990 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 5 20 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 1 8 2 1 2 4

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 5 12 8 2 4
CCS ---------------- 20 1 8 3 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 6 18 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 2 7 3 1 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 0 12 7 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 0 6 3 1 2

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 15-F-2.01 “Station
screen.”
Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to
access any OGM1 resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone conver-
sation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal to
36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, OGM 1
screen for each tenant is displayed
individually.

15-F-11
2.06 OGM2 screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 6 (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - OGM2

Feb. 22 1990 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 3 20 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 1 11 2 1 2 4

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 8 5 12 5 2 4
CCS ---------------- 2 2 8 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 7 13 12 4 2 4
CCS ---------------- 3 6 3 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 4 12 7 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 1 6 4 1 2

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 15-F-2.01 “Station
screen.”
Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to
access any OGM2 resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone conver-
sation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal
to 36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, OGM 2
screen for each tenant is displayed
individually.

15-F-12
2.07 AGC screen

Command Format
OPE>TFD 7 (1 ~ 2)

Traffic Information - AGC

Feb. 22 1990 Tenant = 1

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 3 10 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 1 3 2 1 2 4

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 8 12 4 2 4
CCS ---------------- 20 2 8 2 1 2

Start Time--------- 9:00AM 10:00AM 11:00AM 12:00AM 1:00PM 2:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 9 12 3 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 3 3 1 1 2

Start Time--------- 3:00PM 4:00PM 5:00PM 6:00PM 7:00PM 8:00PM

Busy Calls -------- 30 8 12 8 2 4
CCS ---------------- 10 3 6 3 1 2

Description
Start Time Refer to Section 15-F-2.01 “Station
screen.”
Busy Calls The number of calls which failed to
access any AGC resources.
CCS One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone conversa-
tion.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal to
36 CCS.
Tenant If tenant service is employed, AGC
screen for each tenant is displayed
individually.

15-F-13
G. Other Features

1.00 PFT command (Power

Failure Transfer)
Description Conditions
Provides up to 18 extension/CO cards pairs to In case of the KX-T96174X (SLC card), three
maintain a conversation when power is restored ports (ports 1 through 3) are available for Power
or TSW recovery. Failure Transfer Assignment.
If this is not programmed then power restoration
or TSW recovery drops any existing conversa-
tions.

Command Format
PRG > PFT + AT+ (Index)

Index = PFT No. (01 ~ 18)

Screen display

; PRG > PFT SH01 <CR>

; PFT No. 01
; 1 : Trunk Slot No.------------------------------------ 101
; 2 : Extension Slot No. ------------------------------ 107
; PFT No. 02
; 1 : Trunk Slot No.------------------------------------ 102
; 2 : Extension Slot No. ------------------------------ 108
;
;
;
; PFT No. 18
; 1 : Trunk Slot No.------------------------------------ 206
; 2 : Extension Slot No. ------------------------------ 212
; PRG >

Item Data Explanation

1 101~315 Assign LCOT, GCOT, RCOT or PCOT card No. which is

available for power failure transfer

2 101~315 Assign HLC or SLC card No. which is available for power
failure transfer

Refer to Section 10-C-47.00 “Power Failure

Transfer (PFT),” for further information about
programming.

15-G-1
(70695)(E)
(70695)
Conditions
SLT telephones and some PITS telephones* can
be used during power failure if power failure
transfer assignment had been done in advance.
*Following PITS telephones can be used during
power failure.
PITS-KX-T123230, KX-T123230D,
KX-T123235, KX-T61630, KX-T30830
When you are using the PITS telephones avail-
able with power failure transfer, set the POWER
FAILURE switch to ON, when power failure
occurs.
If dialing cannot be done, set the DIALING MODE
selector to another position (PULSE or TONE).
When the power is restored, set the POWER
FAILURE switch to OFF.
If the power is restored during a conversation, set
the POWER FAILURE switch to OFF after
conversation is completed.

15-G-2
(70695)
2.00 VUP command (Version-up)
Description
Used to initialize the RAM area of the newly
added system memory while keeping the current
settings intact.
This command is valid when one of the following
version of ROM is replaced with a new version of
ROM (version 12.XX and above).
• V.6.5X,V.8.XX,V.9.XX,V.10.XX
Command Format
OPE>VUP + old ROM Version No. (Vxxxx)* ↵
* If your old ROM version is V.6.5X or lower, enter “V.6.50”.

If your old ROM version is V.7.XX, enter “V.8.00”.

Display Example

; OPE>VUP V10.50 <CR>

; V10.50 -> V12.00 version up
; Are You Sure? (Y; Yes, Other: No) =
;
; OK
; OPE >

Conditions
After replacing an old version of ROM with a new
version of ROM (Version 12.XX or higher),
“Additional System Memory Initialization” should
be done before programming the newly added
features. Then newly added system memory is
initialized by default values.

Note:
• If you do not execute this operation after
replacing the ROM, the system malfunction may
occur.

15-G-3
(70695)
 Section 16

Backup Utility-On-Site
 (Section 16)

Backup Utility-On-Site

Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 16-A-1

B Backup Utility Types......................................................................................... 16-B-1

1.00 VT220, Compatibles, or Dumb Terminals.............................................. 16-B-1
2.00 Before Beginning Backup...................................................................... 16-B-2
3.00 Using VT220, Compatibles.................................................................... 16-B-3
3.01 Backup Main Menu...................................................................... 16-B-3
3.02 Saving Procedure........................................................................ 16-B-4
3.03 Loading Procedure...................................................................... 16-B-6
4.00 Using Dumb Terminal ............................................................................ 16-B-7
4.01 Saving Procedure........................................................................ 16-B-7
4.02 Loading Procedure...................................................................... 16-B-7

C Troubleshooting............................................................................................... 16-C-1

16-1
A. Introduction
Introduction Backup Configuration
Backup is a procedure where a copy of the 1. Maintenance Device = Operation device
system programming data and attendant console
database is stored on an external storage Main Unit
VT220, compatible,
medium, such as a floppy disk or magnetic tape. or Dumb Terminal
If it becomes necessary to re-initialize the system with external storage
programming data and attendant console medium
database, it will be faster to reload from tape or
disk than by manual re-input.
This section describes a backup procedure of RS-232C Cable
system programming data and attendant console
database at on-site.
The backup device is the same as the maintenance
Backup Types device.
There are following two backup types.
2. Maintenance device = Attendant console
1. Save (Main Unit Backup Device)
Attendant
• Saving system programming data and console
attendant console database from the
system to the backup device at on-site can Main Unit
be done during on-line mode as well as
off-line mode.
Personal computer with
Extension
• When an attendant console is used as the external storage medium
system administration device, saving the
system programming data and attendant
RS-232C Cable
console database can be done using a
personal computer with external storage
medium. The backup device is a personal computer with
external storage medium
2. Load (Backup Device Main Unit)

• Loading system programming data and

attendant console database from the
backup device to the system can be done
during off-line mode only.

• When an attendant console is used as the

system administration device, loading the
system programming data and attendant
console database can be done using a
personal computer with external storage
medium.

(Note)
To save/load the attendant console database,
first save/load the data to the Main Unit and then
save/load the attendant console database to the
backup device.
Refer to Section 13-E “Backup Mode” for further
information.

16-A-1
B. Backup Utility Types

1.00 VT220, Compatibles, or

Dumb Terminals
On-site backup is possible with the following
terminals which have functions for saving system
programming data and attendant console
database sent via RS-232C cable to an external
storage medium and loading the saved system
programming data and attendant console
database to the Main Unit.
• VT220, (VT100) terminal
• VT220 (VT100) compatible terminal
• Dumb terminal
Operating Mode Switching
(VT220 Dumb)
There are two methods for switching the mode
from VT220 to Dumb.
1. First set “System-Operation (2/3)” System
Administration Device to “Dumb” and save the
change to memory.
Change to Dumb mode is made when “9. Exit”
is selected in the Main Menu and reenter the
system administration mode, or when the
communication is interrupted and reconnection
is made to the system.
(Note)
Even when System Administration Device
name is changed to Dumb in VT mode,
switching from VT220 to Dumb and from
Dumb to VT220 by simultaneously pressing
CTRL key + V key is possible until exit has
been executed once or until the
communication has been interrupted.
Operating Mode Switching
(Dumb VT220)
1. When the System Administration Device
name is changed from Dumb to VT220 by
operation in Dumb mode, VT mode will be
obtained when the communication between
the system and maintenance device is
interrupted once and then started again.
(Note)
In the above case, return to VT mode will not
be executed by simultaneously pressing
CTRL key + V key in Dumb mode.

(Note)
When a Dumb mode is entered using the
above procedure, return to VT mode is not
possible even when CTRL key + V key are
pressed simultaneously.
Return to VT mode is made by changing the
System Administration Device name by
operation in Dumb mode from Dumb to VT220
and using the exit command at the initial
prompt “>” or interrupting the communication
between the system and maintenance device
once and then restarting communication.

2. When CTRL key + V key are pressed

simultaneously while the Main Menu is being
displayed in VT mode, the mode will be
switched from VT220 to Dumb.
When CTRL key + V key are pressed
simultaneously while the initial prompt “>” is
displayed in Dumb mode, the mode will be
switched from Dumb to VT220.

16-B-1
2.00 Before Beginning Backup
It will not be possible to save or load the system
programming data and attendant console
database correctly if the backup device’s
communications settings are not correct.

1. Are the baud rate, number of data bits, stop

bit and parity settings correct? They must all
be the same as the settings on the system
side. (Is there a communications format
setting? This must be set to full duplex.)

2. Is the backup device set up to sent X-on/X-off

codes to control the flow of the data from the
system? (X-on/X-off send)
Also, is it set up to receive X-on/X-off codes
sent from the system to control the flow of the
data sent to the system? (X-on/X-off receive)
Both are essential.

3. Is the backup device set so that all control

codes corresponding to ASCII 00h-1Fh are
transmitted and written to the storage device?
Also, is the backup device set so that these
stored control codes can be sent without
limitation to the system?
The above settings are necessary to ensure
that the SOH, STX, EOT, ETX codes, etc.
specified in the transmission format
correspond to the control codes.
In addition, in order to perform a backup with
a protocol, the backup device must be set up
so that all codes form 00h-FFh are received,
stored and transmitted.

4. Does the setup specify automatic linefeeds

(the linefeed code is automatically added to
the data each time the data displayed reaches
the 80th column at the far right of the
screen)? If this function is enabled, the large
number of extra codes added to the data will
produce an “Illegal code detect” error
whenever data is loaded. The automatic
linefeed function must therefore be turned off.

16-B-2
3.00 Using VT220, Compatibles
3.01 Backup Main Menu
From the Main Menu Screen, Select “7. Backup
Utility” then the following “Backup Utility Main
Menu” appears on the screen.

Backup Utility Main Menu ONL BCK LIN DIR

+ + + +

1. Load ( SIO 1 -> PBX )

2. Save ( PBX -> SIO 1 )

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Description
1. Load...Loading the saved data (system
programming data and attendant
console database) from backup device
to the Main Unit.
2. Save...Saving the system programming data
and attendant console database from
the Main Unit to backup device.

16-B-3
3.02 Saving Procedure
Save - Submenu
1. ALL Data
2. PBX Data
3. ATT Local Data
=>
1 COMMON 2 3 4
1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of
communication between sender and receiver
have been made, like uniform communication
parameters for sender and receiver etc.
2. Select “2. Save” from the Backup Utility Main
Menu, then Save-Submenu screen appears
on the screen. (See above)
3. Before selecting an area, prepare the terminal
to receive data.
4. Select the area (1 to 3) with the submenu.
(Refer to [Submenu Description].)
5. The saving start message “Transfer start”
appears on the screen. Then the selected
data is transferred as ASCII codes from the
Main Unit to the backup device.
6. When saving is finished, the following
message appears on the screen.
“Transfer end”
7. Release the Data Receive mode of the
backup device.
[Submenu Description]
1. All Data...Saves all data, system programming
data and attendant console
database (ATT1 or ATT2), from the
Main Unit to backup device.
OFL BCK LIN DIR
+ + + +
5 6 7 8
2. PBX Data...Saves PBX data (system
programming data) from the Main
Unit to backup device.
3. ATT Local Data .....Saves the database of
attendant console (ATT1 or
2) from the Main Unit to
backup device.
Note:
From software version 9.5X and above, the
system can hold only one of two attendant
console databases (ATT1 or 2) at a time.
If both databases of ATT1 and 2 should be
saved/loaded respectively (e.g. Tenant Service),
follow the procedure below.
Save
(1) ATT1 → System → Backup Device (Data 1)
(2) ATT2 → System → Backup Device (Data 2)
Load
(1) Backup Device (Data 1) → System → ATT1
(2) Backup Device (Data 2) → System → ATT2
Saving/Loading of data between ATT1/2 and
system can be done in ATT Local Mode.
Refer to Section 13 “Attendant Console –
Local Mode” for further information.
16-B-4
(50195)
Transmission Format

The number of
SOH STX Address Area Data Area
bytes

Data Area Checksum EXT STX Checksum EXT EOT

Address Area
Area Area

SOH = Start of header

STX = Start of text
Address = System data address
(Is system address is “FFFFF h”, it would
be software version) (ASCII code)
The number of byte = 1 to 256 (ASCII code)
Data area = System data (ASCII code)
Checksum = Address + The number of bytes +
data
* The complement of the sum of all bytes (ASCII
code)
ETX = End of text
EOT = End of data transfer

16-B-5
3.03 Loading Procedure

Load - Submenu OFL BCK LIN DIR

+ + + +

1. ALL Data

2. PBX Data

3. ATT Local Data

=>

1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of [Submenu Description]

communication between sender and receiver
1. All Data Loads all data, system
have been made, like uniform communication
programming data and attendant console
parameters for sender and receiver etc.
database (ATT1 or ATT2), from backup device
2. Select “1. Load” from the Backup Utility Main to Main Unit.
Menu, then Load-Submenu Screen appears on
the screen. (See above) 2. PBX Data...Loads PBX data (system
programming data) from backup
3. Select the area (1 to 3) with the submenu. device to Main Unit.
(Refer to [Submenu Description].)
3. ATT Local Data*....Loads the database of
4. The loading start message “Transfer start”
attendant console (ATT1
appears on the screen, and the system waits for
or 2) from backup device
the data from the backup device.
to Main Unit.
5. Change the backup device to Data Send mode.
*Refer to “Note:” on page 16-B-4.
Saved data is transmitted as ASCII codes from
the backup device to the system.
6. When loading of the saved data is finished, the (Note)
following message appears on the screen. Loading the saved data is possible during off-
“Transfer end” line mode only. If you select “1. Load” in on-
7. Release the Data Send mode of the backup line mode, an error message appears on the
device. screen and your selection becomes invalid.
No other troubles occur.
8. You can edit the just loaded data in off-line
mode.
And if you want to restart the system (enters to
on-line mode), set the Operation Switch
(MODE) to on-line mode, and press the RESET
button.
For further information about Operation Switch,
refer to Section 2-F-2.00 “CPU Rotary-Switch
Features.”
16-B-6
(50195)
4.00 Using Dumb Terminal
4.01 Saving Procedure
1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of
communication between sender and receiver
have been made, like uniform communication
parameters for sender and receiver etc.
2. Change the system mode to Data Receive.
3. Select the area and enter the saving
command.
(a) Command format
OPE>SAV + Item 1 + Item 2
(b) Item explanation
Item 1 : 1 to 3
1.All Data
2.PBX Data
3.ATT Local Data*
* Refer to “Note:” on page 16-B-4.
Item 2 : 1 to 3
1.No procedure (Hex)
2.CRC-16 (binary code decimal) available only
in remote operation
3.CRC-CCITT (binary code decimal) available
only in remote operation
(Note)
• Refer to Section 16-B-3.02 “Saving Procedure”
about description of Item 1.
• To select the option 2, or 3 of Item 2 is
available only when you are saving the system
programming data and attendant console
database from a remote location.
4. The saving start message “Transfer start”
appears on the screen. Then the selected
data is transferred as ASCII codes from the
system to the backup device.
5. When saving is finished, the following
message appears on the screen.
“Transfer end”
6. Release the Data Receive mode of the backup
device.
4.02 Loading Procedure
1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of
communication between sender and receiver
have been made, like uniform communication
parameters for sender and receiver etc.
16-B-7
(50195)
2. Enter the loading command.
(a) Command format
OPE>LOD + Item 1 + Item 2
(b) Item explanation
Item 1 : 1 to 3
1.All Data
2.PBX Data
3.ATT Local Data*
Item 2 : 1 to 3
1.No procedure (Hex)
2.CRC-16 (binary code decimal) available only
in remote operation
3.CRC-CCITT (binary code decimal) available
only in remote operation
* Refer to “Note:” on page 16-B-4.
(Note)
• Refer to Section 16-B-3.03 “Loading
Procedure” about description of Item 1.
• To select the option 2, or 3 of Item 2 is
available only when you are loading the saved
data from a remote location.
3. The loading start message “Transfer start”
appears on the screen, and the system waits
for the data from the backup device.
4. Change the terminal to data send mode.
Selected data is transferred as ASCII codes
from the backup device to the system.
5. When loading is finished, the following
message appears on the screen.
“Transfer end”
6. Release the Data Send mode of the backup
device.
7. When loading the selected data is finished,
you can edit the loaded data in off-line
communication mode.
And if you want to restart the system (move to
on-line mode), set the Operation Switch
(MODE) to on-line mode, and press the
RESET button.
(Note)
Loading the selected data is possible only in
off-line mode. If you select “1. Load” in on-
line mode, an error message appears on the
screen and your selection becomes invalid.
No other troubles occur.
C.Troubleshooting
1. If the following troubles should occur during
backup operation, stop the operation and
return to the initial screen.
• When the communication cable connection
has disconnected.
• When the backup device has lost power.
In above case stop the loading and boot the
system with default values compulsorily.
2. Checksum error detection
If checksum error is detected during loading
the system programming data, an error
message appears on the screen and loading
is terminated.
Then the system is reset and started with
default values automatically.

Error Message List

Error Message Contents Countermeasures

Device error (VT220) Backup device is not connected Connect the backup device to SIO # 1 Port.
DATA ERROR 027(Dumb) (only when maintenance device
is attendant console)

Version* error (VT220) Different version* at the time of Match the backup version.
DATA ERROR 029(Dumb) backup

Checksum error (VT220) A checksum error has been Communication line is defective or backup
DATA ERROR 030(Dumb) detected. data is destroyed.

Illegal code detected (VT220) Incorrect data has been Communication line is defective or backup
DATA ERROR 031(Dumb) received. data is destroyed.

* Version=System Data Version

The system firmware (ROM) needs to be changed only in case of a software update
involving an alteration in the data format of the system area. The backup function does
not allow compatibility between different system data versions. Data saved using the old
version of the firmware can be used as is even if the firmware is updated, as long as the
system programming data (RAM) is not changed.

16-C-1
 Section 17

Backup Utility-Remote Location

 (Section 17)

Backup Utility-Remote Location

Contents

Page
A Introduction...................................................................................................... 17-A-1

B Backup Utility Types......................................................................................... 17-B-1

1.00 Before Beginning Backup...................................................................... 17-B-1
2.00 Using Dumb Terminal ............................................................................ 17-B-2
2.01 Saving Procedure........................................................................ 17-B-2
2.02 Loading Procedure...................................................................... 17-B-4

C Troubleshooting............................................................................................... 17-C-1

17-1
A. Introduction
Introduction
This section describes a backup procedure of
system programming data and attendant console
database from a remote location.
To execute system programming, diagnosis, data
backup, and traffic measurement in an interactive
format via CO line from a remote location, RMT
card (Modem) must be installed to the system.
Backup (Save and Load) from a remote location
is possible only in Dumb mode.
For further information about switching of the
operating modes, please refer to Section 16-B
“Backup Utility Types.”
The following conditions are required for remote
operation.
Backup Types
There are following two backup types.
1. Save (Main Unit Remote terminal)
• Saving the system programming data and
attendant console database from the
system to remote terminal is possible during
on-line communication mode only.
2. Load (Remote terminal Main Unit)
• When loading the system programming data
and attendant console database from a
remote terminal begins, the system
automatically shifts to off-line mode while
holding the speech path.

• To have successful data communications with Backup Configuration

protocol, the communication parameters of 1. Maintenance device= RMT (remote) terminal
both the system and remote maintenance
terminal must be preset to the following fixed
values. Main Unit Remote terminal

data = 8 bit
parity = none
Modem
stop = 1 bit
Central
* These fixed communication parameters do Office
not apply to the data communication without
protocol. The backup device is the same as the
maintenance device
• For remote access, a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
For further information about communication
parameters, refer to Section 9-D-7.00
“Communication Interface.”

• RMT card (Modem) must be installed to the

system.

• To administer the system from a remote

location, assign “System-Operation” “Remote
Directory Number” in system programming.

• Backup (Save and Load) from a remote

location is possible only in Dumb mode.
(When system administration from a remote
location is started, the system defaults to Dumb
operation mode.)

For further information about remote operation,

refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration from a Remote Location.”

17-A-1
B. Backup Utility Types

1.00 Before Beginning Backup

It will not be possible to save or load the system
programming data and attendant console
database correctly if the backup device’s
communications settings are not correct.

1. Are the baud rate, number of data bits, stop

bit and parity settings correct? They must all
be the same as the settings on the system
side. (Is there a communications format
setting? This must be set to full duplex.)

2. Is the backup device set up to sent X-on/X-off

codes to control the flow of the data from the
system? (X-on/X-off send) Also, is it set up to
receive X-on/X-off codes sent from the system
to control the flow of the data sent to the
system?
Both are essential.

3. Is the backup device set so that all control

codes corresponding to ASCII 00h-1Fh are
transmitted and written to the storage device?
Also, is the backup device set so that these
stored control codes can be sent without
limitation to the system?
The above settings are necessary to ensure
that the SOH, STX, EOT, ETX codes, etc.
specified in the transmission format
correspond to the control codes.
In addition, in order to perform a backup with
a protocol, the backup device must be set up
so that all codes form 00h-FFh are received,
stored and transmitted.

4. Does the setup specify automatic linefeeds

(the linefeed code is automatically added to
the data each time the data displayed reaches
the 80th column at the far right of the
screen)? If this function is enabled, the large
number of extra codes added to the data will
produce an “Illegal code detect” error
whenever data is loaded. The automatic
linefeed function must therefore be turned off.

17-B-1
2.00 Using Dumb Terminal
2.01 Saving Procedure

First, confirm that the preparations for the start of
communication have been made.
• The communication parameters must be the
same for sender and receiver.
• The system will do an “auto baud” to adjust its
baud rate to remote terminal (300 or 1200
baud).
Without the protocol
1. Change the terminal to data receive mode.
2. Select the area and enter the saving
command.
(a) Command format
OPE>SAV + Item 1 + Item 2
(b) Item explanation
Item 1 : 1 to 3
1. All Data
2. PBX Data
3. ATT Local Data*
* Refer to “Note:” on page 16-B-4.
Refer to Section 16-B-3.02 “Saving
Procedure” about description of Item 1.
Using the protocol CRC-16/CRC-CCITT
1. Select the area and enter the saving
command.
A message “Transfer start” appears on the
screen, and the system will wait for protocol
linking.
Refer to the explanations for without the
protocol on this page in regard to (a)
Command format and (b) Item explanation.
2. Switch the terminal to protocol data receive
mode.
When the protocol link has been established,
the selected data is transferred in binary
format from the system to a remote terminal.
3. When saving is finished, the protocol link is
disconnected automatically, and the mode
changes to non-protocol communication
mode, and the following message appears on
the screen.
“Transfer end”
4. Release Protocol Data Receive mode of the
backup device.

Item 2 : 1 to 3
1. No procedure (Hex)
2. CRC-16 (binary code decimal) only
available in remote operation
3. CRC-CCITT (binary code decimal) only
available in remote operation

3. The saving start message

“Transfer start” appears on the screen.
Then the selected data is transferred as
ASCII codes from the system to the remote
terminal.

4. When the saving is finished, the following

message appears on the screen.
“Transfer end”

5. Release the Data Receive mode of the

backup device.

17-B-2
(50195)
 The number
SOH STX Address Area Data Area
of byte

The number
Data Area ETX STX Address Area ETX EOT
of byte

Transmission Format
SOH = Start of header
STX = Start of text
Address = System data address
(Is system address is “FFFFF h”, it
would be software version)
(Binary data)
The number of byte = 1 to 256 (Binary data)
Data area = System data (Binary data)
Checksum = Address + The number of bytes +
data
ETX = End of text
EOT = End of data transfer

17-B-3
2.02 Loading Procedure
First, confirm that the preparations for the start of
communication have been made.
• The communication parameters must be the
same for sender and receiver.
• The system will do an “auto baud” to adjust its
baud rate to the remote terminal (300 or 1200
baud).
Without the protocol
1. Enter the loading command.
(a) Command format
OPE>LOD + Item 1 + Item 2
(b) Item explanation
Item 1 : 1 to 3
1. ALL Data
2. PBX Data
3. ATT Local Data*
* Refer to “Note:” on page 16-B-4.
Refer to Section 16-B-3.03 “Loading
Procedure” about description of Item 1.
Item 2 : 1 to 3
1. No procedure (Hex)
2. CRC-16 (binary code decimal) available
only in remote operation
3. CRC-CCITT (binary code decimal)
available only in remote operation
2. The loading start message “Transfer start”
appears on the screen, and the system waits
for the data from the remote terminal.
3. Change the terminal to data send mode.
Selected data is transferred as ASCII codes
from the remote terminal to the system.
4. When loading the selected data from a
remote terminal begins, the system
automatically shifts to off-line mode while
holding the speech path.
5. When loading the selected data is finished,
the following message appears on the screen.
“Transfer end”
17-B-4
(50195)
6. Release the Data Send mode of the backup
device.
7. When the remote operation is terminated, the
system is reset automatically.
Using the protocol CRC-16/CRT-CCITT
1. Enter the loading command.
Refer to the explanations for without protocol
in regard to (a) Command format and (b) Item
explanation.
2. The loading start message
“Transfer start”
appears on the screen, and the system waits
for Protocol Linking.
3. Change the remote terminal to protocol data
send mode.
When the protocol link has been established,
the selected data is transferred in binary
format from the remote terminal to the
system.
4. During the loading, the system automatically
shifts to off-line mode while holding the
speech path.
5. When loading the selected data is finished,
the protocol link is disconnected
automatically, and the protocol data send
mode changes to non-protocol
communication mode and the following
message appears on the screen.
“Transfer end”
6. Remove the terminal from protocol data send
mode.
7. You can edit the loaded data from a remote
location. And if you want to reset the system
(enters to on-line mode), replace the handset
and stop the data communication. After
loading the selected data, if the system
detects “no carrier,” the system is reset
automatically.
C. Troubleshooting
1. If the following troubles should occur during 2. Checksum error detection
backup operation, stop the operation and
return to the initial screen. If checksum error occurs during loading the
saved data, an error message appears on the
screen and loading is terminated.
• When the communication cable has been
Then the system is reset and started with
disconnected.
default values automatically.
• When the remote terminal has lost power.

In above case stop the loading and boot the

system with default values compulsorily.

Error Message List

Error Message Contents Countermeasures

Data error 027 Backup device is not connected. Connect the backup device to SIO
(only when maintenance device is #1 Port.
attendant console)

Data error 029 Different version* at the time of Match the backup version.
backup.

Data error 030 A checksum error has been Communication line is defective or
detected. backup data is destroyed.

Data error 031 Incorrect data has been received. Communication line is defective or
backup data is destroyed.

* Version=System Data Version

The system firmware (ROM) needs to be changed only in case of a software update
involving an alteration in the data format of the system area. The backup function does not
allow compatibility between different system data versions. Data saved using the old
version of the firmware can be used as is even if the firmware is updated, as long as the
system programming data (RAM) is not changed.

17-C-1
 Section 18

Abbreviations
 Abbreviations
A H
AGC Automatic Gain Control HLC Hybrid Line Circuit
ARS Automatic Route Selection
ATT Attendant Console I
ATLC Attendant Console Line Circuit
ICM Intercom
INS In Service
B
IRNA Intercept Routing-No Answer
BGM Background Music
BLF Busy Lamp Field L
BSS Busy Station Signaling
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCOT Loop Start Central Office Trunk
C
LED Light Emitting Diode
CHG Change LNR Last Number Redial
CO Central Office
COL Central Office Line M
CONF Conference
MOD Modification
COS Class of Service
MODEM Modulator and Demodulator Unit
COT Central Office Trunk
MSG Message
CPC Calling Party Control
MW Message Waiting
CPU Central Processing Unit
O
D
OCC Other Common Carrier
DES Destination
OFDN Overflow Directory Number
DID Direct Inward Dialing
OGM Outgoing Message
DIL Direct In Lines
OHCA Off-Hook Call Announcement
DISA Direct Inward System Access
OPX Off Premise Extension
DN Directory Number
OUS Out of Service
DND Do Not Disturb
DP Dial Pulse
P
DPH Doorphone Circuit
DSS Direct Station Selection PB Push Button
DTMF Dual-Tone Multifrequency PBX Private Branch Exchange
PCO Private CO
E PDN Primary Directory Number
PF Programmable Feature
EFA External Feature Access
PITS Proprietary Integrated Telephone
EXT Extension
System
PLC Proprietary Integrated Telephone
F
System Line Circuit
FDN Floating Directory Number
FWD Call Forwarding R
RMT Remote Circuit
G
RST Restart
GCO Group CO
GCOT Ground Start Central Office Trunk

18-1
S
SCO Single CO
SDN Secondary Directory Number
SLC Single Line Telephone Circuit
SLT Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SNR Saved Number Redial
SRC Source

T
TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station
TG Trunk Group
TSW Time Sharing Switch

U
UCD Uniform Call Distribution
UNA Universal Night Answer

W
WT Warning Tone

18-2
Section 19

Index
 Index

A Basic Shelf, 1-E-1, 2-B-1

Absent Message: Battery Adaptor, 2-C-32
Capability, 4-I-12, 5-G-10 Building Block System, 1-A-3
Boundary, 9-D-16, 10-C-12 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen, 6-C-7
Account Code Entry, 4-I-5, 5-G-5, 6-J-6 Busy-Out Extension, 6-A-4, 9-G-29, 10-C-52
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Card, 1-A-6, 1-E-10,
C
2-C-28
Call:
Amphenol 57 JE type, 2-C-24
Forwarding-All Calls, 4-F-6, 5-D-4
Anchor Plug, 2-B-19
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook, 4-F-9, 5-D-7
ANSWER Key, 6-A-3, 6-E-1
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer,
Area Code, 3-C-6, 3-C-15 to 20
4-F-15, 5-D-13
Assignable Feature Buttons, 4-B-4
Forwarding-No Answer, 4-F-12, 5-D-10
Assigned Feature Clear, 4-I-19, 5-G-15
Forwarding to Trunk, 4-F-18, 5-D-16
ATLC (Attendant Console Line Circuit) Card,
Hold Retrieve-Station, 4-E-5, 5-C-3
1-A-5, 1-E-7, 2-C-9
Park and Paging, 6-I-6
Attendant:
Park-Station, 4-E-8, 5-C-5
Console-less Operation, 3-D-3
Park-System, 4-E-6, 5-C-4, 6-F-3
Management Screen, 6-C-31
Park-System Screen, 6-C-19
Overflow Time, 6-G-6
Pickup Deny, 4-D-9, 5-B-3
Auto Start Time, 3-B-18, 4-I-3, 5-G-3, 6-J-5
Pickup Group, 3-B-12
Automatic:
Splitting, 4-E-10, 6-H-3
Answering Selection, 12-C-18
Transfer, 4-F-1, 5-D-1, 6-G-1
Callback-Trunk, 4-C-22, 4-G-1, 5-A-12
Transfer by Camp-On to Station, 6-G-2
Callback-Station, 4-C-24, 5-A-13
Transfer via Attendant Console, 6-G-9
Dialing, 4-C-10, 5-A-4, 6-D-4
Waiting, 4-D-15, 5-B-8
Gain Control (AGC), 3-D-4, 9-F-8, 10-C-38
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection, 3-F-10
Line Hunting (Calling) Selection, 12-C-15
Centrex, 3-C-37, 4-G-15, 5-E-3
Pause Insertion, 3-C-37
Class of Service (COS), 3-B-10, 9-D-22, 10-C-15
Redial, 4-C-15
CO:
Redial Retry Count, 10-C-77
Access Control, 6-J-22
Redial Retry Interval, 10-C-77
Appearance Type, 3-D-16 to 17, 9-E-11, 10-C-31
Route Selection (ARS), 3-C-21
Busy Out, 3-F-11
Station Release, 3-B-21
Duration Limit, 3-D-5, 4-F-3, 4-F-8, 4-G-9, 4-G-11,
Transfer, 4-I-24
5-D-16, 6-H-2, 9-E-4, 10-C-29
B Forward Mode, 4-F-18, 5-D-16, 9-D-25, 10-C-15
Backup: Management Screen, 6-C-28
Configuration, 16-A-1 Transfer Mode, 4-F-3, 9-D-25, 10-C-15
Main Menu, 16-B-3 Communication Interface, 9-D-65, 10-C-25, 17-A-1
Mode, 13-E-1 Conference, 4-G-5, 5-E-1, 6-H-1
Types, 16-A-1 One Appearance, 4-G-5
Utility-On-Site, 16-1 Two Appearances, 4-G-7
Utility-Remote Location, 17-1 Confirmation Tone, 3-B-24
Utility-Types, 16-B-1, 17-B-1 Consultation Hold, 4-E-3, 4-F-1, 5-C-2, 5-D-1
Background Music (BGM), 4-I-9 CPU Card, 1-E-3, 2-C-3
Background Music (BGM) through External Pager, CPU Rotary-Switch, 2-F-2
4-H-9, 5-F-8, 6-I-7 CRT Unit, 2-E-5
Basic Features, 3-B-1

19-1
D Error Log, 14-D-1, 14-D-4, 14-E-4, 14-G-2, 15-D-1
Data Line Security, 4-I-11, 5-G-9 Error Message Tables, 9-M-1
Delayed Answer, 9-K-3, 10-C-66 Exclusive Hold, 4-E-2
Dial: Executive Busy Override, 4-C-25, 5-A-14, 6-D-15
Call Pickup, 4-D-7, 5-B-1 Executive Busy Override Deny, 4-D-11, 5-B-5
Mode, 3-C-36, 9-F-3 Expansion Shelf, 1-E-2, 2-B-7
Tone Transfer, 6-J-16 Extension:
Dialing Plan, 3-C-6, 3-C-20, 9-E-4 to 5, 10-C-29 Directory Mode, 13-B-1
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Trunk Card, 1-A-5, 1-E-8, Directory Screen, 6-C-17
2-C-25 Management Screen, 6-C-21
Direct: External:
Answering (Pre-Selection), 4-D-3 Feature Access, 4-G-15, 5-E-3
In Line (DIL) 1:1, 3-D-3, 3-D-16, 9-E-2, 10-C-29 First Digit Time-Out, 3-B-21, 9-D-20, 10-C-14
In Line (DIL) 1:N, 3-D-3, 3-D-16 to 17, 9-E-2, Interdigit Time-Out, 3-B-21, 9-D-20, 10-C-14
10-C-29 Interdigit Time-Out (PBX), 3-B-21, 9-D-20, 10-C-14
Inward Dialing (DID), 3-D-7, 9-K-5, 10-C-69 Music Source, 2-D-2, 3-E-1, 9-D-5, 10-C-7
Inward System Access (DISA), 3-D-4, 9-K-1,
F
10-C-66
FDN for General Operator Call 1/2, 9-D-4
Termination, 3-D-3, 3-D-16, 9-F-3, 10-C-34
Feature Buttons, 4-B-1
Trunk Access, 4-C-9
First Dial Timer, 10-C-79
Directed Call Pickup, 4-D-8, 5-B-2
Fixed:
Directed Night Answer, 3-B-15
Feature Buttons, 4-B-1
Directory Number (DN), 3-B-5
Feature Numbers, 3-B-2
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Card,
Message, 4-I-12, 5-G-10, 9-D-71, 10-C-27
1-A-6, 1-E-8, 2-C-28
Night Service, 3-B-17
Disconnect Time, 4-G-14, 6-H-6, 9-E-4, 10-C-29
Flash, 4-G-14
Discriminating Ringing, 3-D-19
Detect, 10-C-77
Distinctive Busy Tone, 3-B-23
Flexible:
Distinctive Dial Tone, 3-B-22
Feature Numbers, 3-B-3
DN Assignment, 3-B-5, 9-C-6, 10-C-5
Message, 4-I-12, 5-G-10, 9-D-71, 10-C-27
DN (Directory Number) Button Assignment,
Night Service, 3-B-17, 4-I-2, 5-G-2, 6-J-1
9-G-7, 12-C-2, 10-C-43
Numbering, 3-B-1
Do Not Disturb (DND), 4-D-12, 5-B-6
Ports, 1-A-3
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override, 4-C-26, 5-A-15
Ringing Assignment-No Ringing, 3-D-18
Door Opener, 2-C-13
Ringing Assignment-Delayed Ringing, 3-D-18
Doorphone, 4-G-13, 5-E-2, 6-H-4
Floating Directory Number (FDN), 3-B-6
DPH (Doorphone Circuit) Card, 1-E-9, 2-C-10
Forced Account Code Mode, 4-I-5, 5-G-5, 6-J-6,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button Assignment,
9-D-23, 10-C-15
9-G-12, 9-G-15, 10-C-48, 12-C-11
Free Slot (FS), 1-E-1, 1-E-2, 2-C-1
DSS Console, 4-I-22
Function keys, 7-I-1
DTMF Duration Time, 9-F-3, 10-C-34
Dual Console Operation, 3-D-1 G
Dumb Type Terminal, 1-D-1, 8-A-1, 10-A-1, 15-A-1 GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) Card,
1-A-5, 1-E-5, 2-C-22
E
Group:
Electronic Station Lock Out, 4-I-18, 4-I-20, 5-G-14,
CO (GCO), 3-D-17
5-G-16, 6-J-10
ICM (Intercom), 3-B-11, 9-E-15, 9-G-3, 10-C-40
Equal Access, 4-C-8, 5-A-3, 6-D-3, 9-H-1, 10-C-54

19-2
Group (continued) K
Call Pickup, 3-B-12, 9-E-14, 9-G-3, 10-C-10 Key Operation Table for Various Terminals, 7-H-8
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), 3-B-12, 9-E-15,
10-C-33 L
Paging, 3-B-13, 9-D-29, 9-E-15, 10-C-33 Last Number Redial (LNR), 4-C-14, 5-A-9, 6-D-8
Trunk, 3-B-13, 9-E-1, 9-F-3, 10-C-28, 10-C-34 LCOT (Loop Start Central Office Trunk) Card,
Guide Plate, 2-C-2 1-A-5, 1-E-5, 2-C-21
Leading Digit Table, 3-C-28, 9-J-1
H LED Indication Patterns, 4-A-19
Hands-Free Conversation, 4-G-4 Line Access Buttons, 4-B-6
Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station, 6-G-6 Local:
Held Call Reminder, 3-E-2, 9-D-5, 9-D-20, 10-C-14 Alarm, 14-D-2, 15-D-2
Held Call Reminder (ATT), 3-E-2, 9-D-5, 9-D-20, 10-C-14 Call, 3-C-6, 3-C-15
HELP Mode, 13-F-1 Diagnosis Mode, 13-D-1
HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) Card, 1-A-5, 1-E-7, 2-C-14 Mode, 13-A-1
Hold, 4-E-1, 5-C-1, 6-F-1 Trunk Dial Access, 4-C-6, 5-A-1, 6-D-1
Home Dialing Plan, 3-C-6, 3-C-20, 9-D-4, 9-E-5, 10-C-6 Lockout, 3-B-21
Hook Switch Flash Time, 4-G-15, 5-E-3, 9-E-4, 10-C-30 Long Distance Call, 3-C-6, 3-C-15
Loop Key, 6-A-3, 6-E-2
I
In Service (INS), 7-J-5, 8-F-2, 14-C-2, 15-C-1 M
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access, 3-C-7, 4-C-7, 5-A-2, Maintenance, 14-1, 15-1
6-D-2 Maintenance Capability, 9-D-25, 10-C-16, 11-A-1
Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access, 3-C-10, Making Internal Calls, 4-C-17, 5-A-11, 6-D-9
4-C-8, 5-A-3, 6-D-3 Making Outside Calls, 4-C-6, 5-A-1, 6-D-1
Inter Office Calling, 4-C-17, 5-A-11 Max. Dialing Digits, 3-B-10, 9-D-25, 10-C-15
by BLF Screen, 6-D-11 Message Waiting, 4-I-15, 5-G-12, 6-J-9
by Extension Directory Screen, 6-D-9 Microphone Mute, 4-G-16
by Extension Management Screen, 6-D-12 Mixed Station Capacities, 3-B-19
by Name/Department, 6-D-13 Modified Digit Table, 3-C-24, 9-J-13, 10-C-65
Manual Dialing, 6-D-9 Monitor, 14-G-1, 15-F-1
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), 6-D-14 Music on Hold, 3-E-1
Intercept Routing:
No Answer (IRNA), 3-F-8, 6-J-26 N
Time-Out (DISA), 3-D-4, 9-D-20, 10-C-14 Night Answer Point, 3-B-15 to 17, 4-I-1 to 2, 5-G-1 to 2
Time-Out (System), 3-F-8, 6-J-26, 9-D-20, 10-C-14 6-J-1 to 4, 9-F-3, 10-C-34
Intercom (ICM): Night Key, 6-A-3, 6-J-5
Answer BSS/OHCA Deny, 4-D-6 Night Service, 3-B-14, 4-I-1, 5-G-1, 6-J-1
Answer Voice Calling Deny, 4-D-5 No Line Preference:
Busy Station Signaling (BSS), 4-C-20 Answering, 4-D-3
Calling, 4-C-18 Calling, 4-C-4
Group, 3-B-11, 9-E-15, 9-G-3, 10-C-40 Numbering Plan, 3-B-1, 9-D-33, 10-C-20
Hands-Free Answerback, 4-D-4
O
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), 4-C-21,
Off Premise Extension (OPX), 3-F-3
4-G-17
Office Code, 3-C-6, 3-C-15, 3-C-20, 3-C-30 to 32
Voice Calling, 4-C-19
Office Code Table, 3-C-30 to 32
Interdigit Pause, 10-C-77
OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement) Card, 1-A-6,
Interposition Call Transfer, 6-G-8
1-E-11, 2-C-6

19-3
One Touch Dialing, 4-C-10 Prime Line Preference:
On-Hook Dialing, 4-C-4 Answering, 4-D-2
Operator, 3-B-8 Calling, 4-C-2
Call, 4-C-28, 5-A-17 Printer, 2-D-5
Operator/International Call Restriction, 3-C-13 Privacy :
OPX (Off Premise Extension Trunk) Card, 1-A-5, 1-E-9, Attach, 4-G-3
2-C-26 Programmable, 4-G-1
Other Common Carrier (OCC) Access, 4-C-8, 5-A-3, Release, 4-G-2
6-D-3, 9-H-5, 10-C-56 Programmable Feature (PF) Buttons, 4-B-4, 9-G-12,
Outgoing CO Back Tone, 10-C-80 9-G-15, 10-C-46
Outgoing Call Features, 3-C-1, 4-C-1, 5-A-1, 6-D-1 Prolong Time, 9-K-3, 10-C-66
Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back Private CO (PCO), 3-D-15, 4-B-8
3-F-5, 6-J-19 PITS (Proprietary Integrated Telephone System),
Out of Service (OUS), 7-J-7, 8-F-3, 14-C-3, 15-C-2 3-B-19, 4-A-2 to 18
Overflow Transfer, 6-G-6 Automatic Test, 12-C-26
Overlay Sheet, 11-B-1, 12-B-1 Station Programming, 12-1
System Programming, 11-1
P Pulse Speed, 9-F-3, 10-C-35
Paging:
All Extensions, 4-H-1, 5-F-1, 6-I-1 R
All Extensions and External Pagers, Released Line Operation, 6-C-31, 6-G-10
4-H-7, 5-F-7, 6-I-5 Remote:
Call Park and, 6-I-6 Administration, 14-B-3, 15-B-2
Equipment, 2-D-1 Alarm, 9-D-9, 10-C-10, 14-D-3, 15-D-3
External Pagers, 4-H-5, 5-F-5, 6-I-3 Directory Number, 9-D-9, 10-C-10, 14-B-3, 15-B-2
Group, 4-H-3, 5-F-3, 6-I-2 Station Feature Control, 4-I-20, 5-G-16, 6-J-10
Parallel Connection of Extensions, 2-C-29, 3-F-12 Rerouting, 3-F-9
Password: Ringing Transfer, 4-F-4
Changing, 7-E-1, 10-C-74 RMT (Remote Circuit) Card, 1-A-6, 1-E-10, 2-C-28
PITS Programming, 6-J-21, 9-D-13, 10-C-12, 11-C-2 Route Lists Table, 3-C-26, 9-J-9, 10-C-64
Walking COS, 4-C-27, 5-A-16, 9-D-13, 10-C-12 Route Plan Table, 3-C-27, 9-J-6, 10-C-63
PBX Access Code (No Restriction), 3-C-3, 3-C-8, RS-232C Interface, 2-D-3 to 6
3-C-37, 9-E-11, 10-C-31
PBX Access Code (Restriction), 3-C-2 to 3, 3-C-7, 3-C-8, S
3-C-37, 9-E-11, 10-C-31 Saved Number Redial (SNR), 4-C-16
Peripheral Equipments, 2-D-1 to 6 Screened Call Transfer:
Pickup: to Station, 4-F-1, 5-D-2,. 6-G-3
Dial Waiting, 5-A-9, 9-D-20, 10-C-14 to Trunk, 4-F-3, 6-G-4
Dialing, 5-A-9 Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Button, 4-B-7, 4-F-4
Group Management Screen, 6-C-26 Secret Dialing, 4-I-10, 6-J-8
PLC (Proprietary Integrated Line Circuit) Card, Search by Name/Department, 6-J-17
1-A-5, 1-E-6, 2-C-16 Serial Call, 6-G-7
Power Failure Transfer: 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction, 3-C-20
Assignment, 9-L-3, 10-C-73, 14-H-1, 15-G-1 Single CO (SCO), 3-D-3, 3-D-16
Auxiliary Connection for, 2-C-30 SLC (Single Line Telephone Line Circuit) Card,
Power Unit, 1-E-4, 2-C-3 1-A-5, 1-E-6, 2-C-18
Primary Directory Number (PDN) Button, 4-B-6 Slot Assignment, 9-C-3, 10-C-2
SLT (Single Line Telephone), 3-B-19, 5-1

19-4
SMDR Duration Time, 4-A-21, 9-D-20, 10-C-14 Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling), 4-G-18,
Special Carrier Access, 4-C-8, 5-A-3, 6-D-3, 9-H-1, 6-H-5
10-C-54, 10-C-56 Transfer Recall, 3-E-3, 9-D-20, 10-C-14
Speed Dial Dictionary Mode, 13-C-1 Troubleshooting Guide, 14-E-1
Speed Dial Screen, 6-C-15 Trunk:
Speed Dialing: Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
System, 4-C-11, 5-A-6, 6-D-4 — Day Service, 3-D-8, 4-D-10, 5-B-4
System Boundary, 9-D-16, 10-C-12 Group, 3-B-13
Station, 5-A-4 Name, 4-A-22
Station: Verify, 6-J-21
Features, 1-C-3 TSW (Time Switch Sharing) Card, 1-E-4, 2-C-3
Hunting-Circular, 3-D-20 TSW-Conference Expansion Card, 1-A-6, 1-E-11,
Hunting-Terminal, 3-D-21 2-C-4
Message Detail Recording (SMDR), 3-F-1 TSW-OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement) Card,
Name Display, 4-A-23 1-A-6, 1-E-11, 2-C-5
Programmed Data Display, 4-A-22
Switching of Day/Night Mode, 3-B-18, 4-I-3, 5-G-3, 6-J-5 U
System: Unattended Conference, 6-H-2
Administration, 14-B-1, 15-B-1 One Appearance, 4-G-9
Components, 1-B-1 Two Appearances, 4-G-11
Configuration, 1-E-1 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), 9-K-7, 10-C-70 to 71
Connections, 1-B-2 Group, 3-B-12
Description, 1-A-3 Log Out, 4-D-17, 5-B-10
Features, 1-C-1 with OGM, 3-D-12
Interface, 1-D-1 without OGM, 3-D-9
Timer, 3-B-20, 9-D-18, 10-C-14 Universal Night Answer (UNA), 3-B-16, 4-I-1, 5-G-1
Unscreened Call Transfer:
T to Remote, 4-F-5, 5-D-3, 6-G-5
Test, 1-D-2 to Station, 4-F-1, 5-D-1, 6-G-1
Self-Test, 14-D-1, 15-D-1
Functional Test by Entering Commands, V
14-F-1, 15-E-1 Variable Time-Out, 3-B-20
Tenant Service, 3-B-7 VT100, 1-D-1, 7-H-8
Timed Reminder, 4-I-7, 5-G-7 VT220, 1-D-1, 7-H-8
Toll Restriction:
for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/ W
Direct Trunk Access, 3-C-7 Walking COS (Class of Service), 4-C-27, 5-A-16
for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Password, 11-C-18
Dial Access, 3-C-10 Walking Station, 3-F-3
for Local Trunk Dial Access, 3-C-2
in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System, 3-C-5
Operation/International, 3-C-13
7/10 Digit, 3-C-20
3/6 Digit, 3-C-15
Table, 3-C-4, 3-C-6, 3-C-8, 3-C-11
Tone and Ringing Patterns, 3-B-25
Tone Detect, 3-D-5, 9-F-9, 9-K-3, 10-C-38, 10-C-66
Tone/Pulse Conversion, 3-C-36

19-5